Iveco Daily 2000my - Repair Manual PDF

https://truckmanualshub.
com/
DAILY
REPAIR MANUAL
MECHANICAL
ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC
https://truckmanualshub.com/
”This document provides data, characteristics, instructions and

methodology to perform repair interventions on the vehicle
and its components.
Anyhow, this document is addressed to qualified and
specialised personnel. Iveco commercial and assistance
network personnel as well as all Iveco authorised points of
assistance are specifically qualified and equipped to perform
the repair interventions that are indicated in this document.
Before performing any intervention, check to have available
the document relating to the vehicle model on which the
intervention is being performed and also make sure that all
accident prevention devices, such as, as a rough guide, goggles,
helmet, gloves, shoes, as well as work tooling, lifting and
transport tooling, etc., are available and efficient, and further
make sure that the vehicle is put such a way that an
intervention can be made in safety conditions.
Making interventions strictly observing the indications given
here, as well as using specific tooling indicated, assures a
correct repair intervention, execution timing observance and
operators’ safety.
Each repair intervention must be finalised to the recovery of
functionality, efficiency and safety conditions that are provided
by Iveco.
Each intervention, on the vehicle, that is finalised to a
modification, alteration or else, which is not authorised by
Iveco, involves the exclusion of any responsibility for Iveco,
and, in particular, where the vehicle is covered by a guarantee,
each such intervention involves an immediate lapse of the
guarantee.
Responsibility for Iveco in repair intervention execution is
excluded.
Iveco is available to provide all clarifications necessary to make
interventions, as well as to provide indications in cases and
situations not included in this document.
Data and information contained in this document could result
not to be updated owing to modifications made by Iveco at
any moment for technical or commercial reasons, or because
of the need to adapt the vehicle to law requirements in
different countries.
In the case of a difference between what contained here and
what actually found on the vehicle, please contact Iveco
network before making any intervention.”
The data contained in this publication might fail to reflect the
latest changes which the Manufacturer may introduce at any
time, for technical or sales purposes, or to meet the
requirements of local legislation.
Copy, even partial, of text and drawings is forbidden.
Produced by:
Publication Edited by:

IVECO S.p.A.
Customer Service
Lungo Stura Lazio, 15
B.U. TECHNICAL PUBLISHING
10156 Torino (TO) - Italy
Iveco Technical Publications
Lungo Stura Lazio, 15
Print 603.93.281 - 1st Ed. 2004 10156 Torino (TO) - Italy
PRELIMINARY REMARKS
Manuals for repairs are split into Sections, each one of which is marked by a numeral; the contents of these sections are indicated
in the general table of contents.
Each section is generally dedicated to a main Unit (e.g.: engine, gearbox, electric system, etc.).
Sections with mechanical contents include technical data, tightening torque collections, tool lists, connections — disconnections of
units to/from the vehicle, overhauls at the bench and relating troubleshooting.
On the electric/electronic system section there are the descriptions of the electric network and vehicle electronic systems, electric
schemes, components electric characteristics, components codes and troubleshooting relating to the central units specific of the
electric system.
The manual uses proper symbols in its descriptions; the purpose of these symbols is to classify contained information. In particular,
there have been defined a set of symbols to classify warnings and a set for assistance operations.
SYMBOLS - WARNINGS
Danger for persons

Missing or incomplete observance of these prescriptions can cause serious danger for persons’ safety.
Danger of serious damage for the vehicle

Partial or complete non observance of these prescriptions can cause serious damages to the vehicle and sometimes
guarantee lapse too.
General danger
! It includes the dangers of above described signals.
Environment protection
It indicates correct behaviour in order that vehicle use is environmentally friendly as much as possible.
NOTE It indicates an additional explanation for a piece of information.
Print 603.93.281 I Base - May 2004

SYMBOLS - ASSISTANCE OPERATIONS
Removal
Intake
Disconnection
Refitting
Exhaust
Connection
Removal
Operation
Disassembly
Fitting in place
Assembly
ρ Compression ratio
Tolerance
Tighten to torque
Weight difference
Tighten to torque + angle value Rolling torque

α
Press or caulk Rotation
Regulation Angle
Adjustment Angular value
Visual inspection
Preload
Fitting position check
Measurement
Value to find Number of revolutions
Check
Equipment Temperature
Surface for machining

Pressure
Machine finish bar
Oversized
Interference
Higher than….
Strained assembly
Maximum, peak
Undersized
Thickness
Less than….
Clearance
Minimum
Lubrication Selection
Damp Classes
Grease Oversizing
Temperature < 0 °C
Sealant
Cold
Adhesive
Winter
Temperature > 0 °C
Air bleeding Hot
Summer
Replacement
Original spare parts
Base - May 2004 II Print 603.93.281

PRODUCT CODE
Each title or subtitle concerning operations being performed is preceded by a six-figure number named PRODUCT CODE.
This number represents the PRODUCT CODE referred to by the repair operation contained in both REPAIR TIMES and
TROUBLE CODE document.
As a quick reference there are shown below the guide lines to read this code (see Repair Timing, too).
Product Code: 5 0 7 6
PRODUCT UNIT SUB-ASSEMBLY PRODUCT UNIT SUB-ASSEMBLY
COMPONENT COMPONENT
The first and second figures identify the PRODUCT within motor vehicle.
Example :
Product 50 = Vehicle chassis;

Product 52 = Axles;
Product 53 = Transmission;
Product 76 = Electric ssystem.
Unit Code: 0 1 0 3
COMPONENT COMPONENT
The third and fourth figures identify the UNIT within the PRODUCT.
Example :

Unit 01 = Chassis;
Unit 02 = Bumpers;
Unit 03 = Alternator.
Sub-assembly Code: 4 0 1 3
COMPONENT COMPONENT
The fifth and sixth figures exactly identify the SUB-ASSEMBLY and Component of a Unit within a PRODUCT.
Example :

Unit 01 = Chassis;
Sub-assembly 40 = Chassis cross members;
Sub-assembly 13 = Rotor.
Print 603.93.281 III Base - May 2004

GENERAL WARNINGS
Warnings shown cannot be representative of all danger situations possibly occurring. Therefore, it is suggested to contact
! immediate superiors where a danger situation occurs which is not described.
Use both specific and general-purpose toolings according to the prescriptions contained in respective use and
maintenance handbooks. Check use state and suitability of tools not subjected to regular check.
The manual handling of loads must be assessed in advance because it also depends, besides weight, on its size and on
the path.
Handling by mechanical means must be with hoisters proper as for weight as well as for shape and volume. Hoisters,
ropes and hooks used must contain clear indications on maximum carrying capacity acceptable. The use of said means
is compulsorily permitted to authorised personnel only. Stay duly clear of the load, and, anyhow, never under it.
In disassembling operations, always observe provided prescriptions; prevent mechanical parts being taken out from
accidentally striking workshop personnel.
Workshop jobs performed in pairs must always be performed in maximum safety; avoid operations which could be
dangerous for the co-operator because of lack of visibility or of his/her not correct position.
Keep personnel not authorised to operations clear of working area.
Learn operation and safety knowledge necessary relating to the vehicle prior to each intervention on it. Scrupulously
observe all safety warnings on the vehicle. Apply suitable signals for the vehicles being repaired. Once the repair
intervention has been completed, before starting up the vehicle, perform all checks indicated on paragraph “Controls
care of user” of Use and Maintenance handbook.
In lack of visibility in operating from the vehicle, charge a person on the ground with assistance. Do not leave unmanned
a vehicle in motion during repair interventions.
Keep the vehicle stationary by proper chocks.
In the case of an intervention on a vehicle lifted from the ground, check the vehicle to be quite steady on special support
stands and, in the case of lifting by means of a lift, check manual/automatic safeties to be activated.
When it is necessary to perform an intervention on methane-fed vehicles, observe the indications contained inside the
document, as well as all specific safety regulations provided.
Only remove radiator cap when the engine is cold by cautiously unscrewing it in order to let system residual pressure
out.
Inflammable fuel and all inflammable fluids and liquids must be handled with care, according to what contained on harmful
materials 12-point cards. Refuelling must be performed outdoors with the engine off, avoiding lit cigarettes, free flames
or sparks in order to prevent sudden fires/bursts. Adequately store inflammable, corrosive and polluting fluids and liquids
according to what provided by regulations in force. Compulsorily avoid to use food containers to store harmful liquids.
Avoid to drill or bore pressurised containers, and throw cloths impregnated with inflammable substances into suitable
containers.
Worn out, damaged or consumable parts must be replaced by Iveco original spares.
During workshop activity, always keep the work place clean; timely clear or clean floors from accidental liquid or oil spots.
Electric sockets and electric equipment necessary to perform repair interventions must meet safety rules.
For every intervention on vehicle hydraulic, pneumatic, conditioning and AIR - BAG systems, scrupulously observe
indications specified in relating manual sections.
Base - May 2004 IV Print 603.93.281

GENERAL WARNINGS
Put on, where required by the intervention, garments and protections provided in accident prevention rules; contact
with moving parts can cause serious injuries. Use suitable, preferably tight-fitted garments, and avoid to use jewels,
scarves, etc.
Do not leave the engine in motion at workshop locations not provided with a pipe to scavenge exhaust gas outside.
Avoid to breathe fumes coming from heating or from paint welding because they can cause damages to health; operate
outdoors or in suitably ventilated areas. Put on proper inspirator if paint powder is present.
Avoid contact with hot water or steam coming from the engine, radiator and pipings because they could cause serious
burns. Avoid direct contact with liquids and fluids present in vehicle systems; where an accidental contact has occurred,
refer to 12-point cards for provisions to make.
Clean units or assemblies detached from the vehicle and carefully check their integrity before overhaul. Tidy up detached
or disassembled parts with their securing elements (screws, nuts, etc.) into special containers.
Check for the integrity of the parts which prevent screws from being unscrewed: broken washers, dowels, clips, etc.
Self-locking nuts with an insert made of nylon must always be replaced.
Avoid contact of rubber parts with diesel oil, petrol or other not compatible substances.
Before washing under pressure mechanical parts, protect electric connectors, and central units, if present.
Tightening screws and nuts must always be according to prescriptions; IVECO commercial and assistance network is
available to give all clarifications necessary to perform repair interventions not provided in this document.
Before welding:
- Disconnect all electronic central units, take power cable off battery positive terminal (connect it to chassis bonding)
and detach connectors.
- Remove paint by using proper solvents or paint removers and clean relevant surfices with soap and water.
- Await about 15 minutes before welding.
- Equip with suitable fire resistant protections to protect hoses or other components where fluids or other materials
flow which may catch fire easily on welding.
Should the vehicle be subjected to temperatures exceeding 80°C (dryer ovens), disassemble drive electronic central
units.
The disposal of all liquids and fluids must be performed with full observance of specific rules in force.
Print 603.93.281 V Base - May 2004

GENERAL WARNINGS ON THE ELECTRIC SYSTEM
If an intervention has to be made on the electric/electronic system, disconnect batteries from the system; in this case,
! always disconnect, as a first one, the chassis bonding cable from batteries negative terminal.
Before connecting the batteries to the system, make sure that the system is well isolated.
Disconnect the external recharging apparatus from the public utility network before taking apparatus pins off battery
terminals.
Do not cause sparks to be generated in checking if the circuit is energised.
Do not use a test lamp in checking circuit continuity, but only use proper control apparatuses.
Make sure that the electronic devices wiring harnesses (length, lead type, location, strapping, connection to screening
braiding, bonding, etc.) comply with IVECO system and are carefully recovered after repair or maintenance
interventions.
Measurements in drive electronic central units, plugged connections and electric connections to components can only
be made on proper testing lines with special plugs and plug bushes. Never use improper means like wires, screwdrivers,
clips and the like in order to avoid the danger of causing a short circuit, as well as of damaging plugged connections, which
would later cause contact problems.
To start up the engine, do not use fast chargers. Start up must only be performed with either separate batteries or special
truck.
A wrong polarisation of supply voltage in drive electronic central units (for instance, a wrong polarisation of batteries)
can cause them to be destroyed.
Disconnect the batteries from the system during their recharging with an external apparatus.
On connecting, only screw up connector (temperature sensors, pressure sensors etc.) nuts at prescribed tightening
torque.
Before disconnecting the junction connector from an electronic central unit, isolate the system.
Do not directly supply electronic central units servo components at nominal vehicle voltage.
Cables must be arranged such as to result to be parallel to reference plane, i.e. as close as possible to chassis/body
structure.
Once the intervention on the electric system has been completed, recover connectors and wiring harnesses according
to original arrangement.
Key memorisation procedures are influenced by electromagnetic jamming (mobile phones, etc.). Therefore, during key
memorisation:
1 Pay attention that jamming sources are not present in the cab or near the keys.
2. Keys not insered in the panel must be at least 1 meter away.
NOTE Connectors present must be seen from cable side. Connectors views contained in the manual are representative of cable
side.
Base - May 2004 VI Print 603.93.281

Bonding and screening

Negative leads connected to a system bonded point must be both as short and possible and “star“-connected to each other, trying
then to have their centering tidily and properly made (Figure 1, re. M).
Further, following warnings are to be compulsorily observed for electronic components:
- Electronic central units must be connected to system bonding when they are provided with a metallic shell.
- Electronic central units negative cables must be connected both to a system bonding point such as the dashboard opening
bonding (avoiding “serial“ or “chain“ connections), and to battery negative terminal.
- Analog bonding (sensors), although not connected to battery negative system/terminal bonding, must have optimal isolation.
Consequently, particularly considered must be parasitic resistances in lugs: oxidising, clinching defects, etc.
- Screened circuits braiding must only electrically contact the end towards the central unit entered by the signal (Figure 2).
- If junction connectors are present, unscreened section d, near them, must be as short as possible (Figure 2).
- Cables must be arranged such as to result to be parallel to reference plane, i.e. as close as possible to chassis/body structure.
Figure 1
1. NEGATIVE CABLES “STAR“ CONNECTION TO SYSTEM BONDING M
Figure 2
88039
2. SCREENING THROUGH METALLIC BRAIDING OF A CABLE TO AN ELECTRONIC COMPONENT — C. CONNECTOR

d. DISTANCE ! 0
Print 603.93.281 VII Base - May 2004

OPTIONAL ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL PARTS INSTALLATIONS

Accessories mounting, additions and modifications on the vehicle are to be performed complying with IVECO mounting
instructions (specific document “Instructions for transformation and preparation” is available at Assistance Network workshops).
It is reminded that, especially about the electric system, several electric sockets are provided for as series (or optional) sockets in
order to simplify and normalise the electrical intervention that is care of preparation personnel.
For any exception to mounting instructions, IVECO’s authorisation is necessary.
Lack of observance of above described prescriptions involves guarantee lapse.
It is absolutely forbidden to make modifications or connections to electric central units wiring harnesses; in particular,
the data interconnection line between central units (CAN line) is to be considered inviolable.
CONVERSIONS BETWEEN THE MAIN UNITS OF MEASUREMENT OF THE

INTERNATIONAL SYSTEM AND MOST USED DERIVED QUANTITIES
Power
1 kW = 1.36 metric HP
1 kW = 1.34 HP
1 metric HP = 0.736 kW
1 metric HP = 0.986 HP
1 HP = 0.746 kW
1 Hp = 1.014 metric HP
Torque
1 Nm = 0.1019 kgm
1 kgm = 9.81 Nm
Revolutions per time unit
1 rad/s = 1 rpm x 0.1046
1 rpm = 1 rad/s x 9.5602
Pressure
1 bar = 1.02 kg/cm2
1 kg/cm2 = 0.981 bar
1 bar = 105 Pa
(Nm and bar units are converted according to 10:1 and 1:1 for the sake of simplicity)
1 kgm = 10 Nm
1 kg/cm2 = 1 bar
Temperature
0° C = 32° F
1° C = (1 x 1.8 + 32) ° F
Base - May 2004 VIII Print 603.93.281

DAILY
Print 603.93.281 — 1st edition

Base - May 2004
UPDATE DATA
Section Description Page Revision date
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

INDEX OF SECTIONS
Section
General 1
Engines 2
Volume 1 Clutch 3
Transmission 4
Propeller shafts 5
Rear axles 6
Axle 7
Volume 2 Suspensions 8
Wheels and tyres 9
Steering gear 10
Hydro-pneumatic system - brakes 11
Bodywork - Chassis frame - Cab air-conditioning 12
Scheduled Maintenance 13
Volume 3 Electric/electronic system 14
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY GENERAL 1
SECTION 1
General
Page
IDENTIFICATION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
- Vehicle Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
COMPOSITION OF MODELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
ALPHANUMERICAL CODING FOR

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
ALPHANUMERICAL CODING FOR

BUS IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
REPLENISHING FLUIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

2 GENERAL DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY GENERAL 3
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Plate IVECO SPA
Plate legend
a)
a) Type-approval number marking, b) Kg

manufacturer’s code and general vehicle data. c) Kg
b) Total tractor weight.
c) Total weight of tractor + trailer (if applicable). d) 1- Kg
d) Permissible weight limit on front axle. e) Kg
e) Permissible weight limit on middle axle (if applicable).
2-
f) Permissible weight limit on rear axle. f) 3- Kg
g) Permissible weight limit on 4th axle (if applicable). g) 4- Kg
h) Specific identification of type. Type No of axles
i) Wheelbase in mm. h) n)
l) Engine type. Wheelbase Cor-
rected
m) Engine power. i) absorp-
tion
n) No. of axles. Engine type Engine power KW

value
o) Place of manufacture. l) m)
* Permissible grade of smoke Made in
o)
Admissible smoke
value
Manufacturer’s plate
To identify the vehicle
according to E.E.C.
directive (on the front
cross member).
Engine
Chassis frame Stamping
Stamping (at the front on (right-hand side on the crankcase)
the right-hand structural
member of the chassis
frame).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

4 GENERAL DAILY
COMPOSITION OF MODELS
MODELS
35 C 10
35 C 11
35 C 12
35 C 13
35 C 14
35 C 15
35 C 17
29 L 10
29 L 11
29 L 12
35 S 10
35 S 11
35 S 12
35 S 13
35 S 15
35 S 17
35 C 9
35 S 9
29 L 9
ASSEMBLIES
8140.63.4.. (85 CV PC/NA + EGR + OXICAT) •• •• ••
8140.43R.43XX/44XX (90 CV ID/TCA*) o o o
8140.43B.43XX/44XX (105 CV ID/TCA*) o o o
8140.43C.40XX (105 CV ID/TCA + OXICAT) o o o
8140.43S.41XX (125 CV ID/TCA* E.G.R. + OXICAT) J
8140.43S.43XX/44XX (125 CV ID/TCA*) o o
8140.43N.43XX/44XX (150 CV ID/TCA*) o o
F1AE0481A*A (96 CV) o o o
F1AE0481B*A (116 CV) o o o
F1AE0481B*B (116 CV + E.G.R. + OXICAT) J
F1CE0481A o
F1CE0481B o o
Single disc 9” 1/4 o o o o o o o o o o o
Single disc 10” 1/2 o o
Single disc 11 o o o o o
ZF 5S 200 o o o o o o
ZF 6S 300 o o o o
ZF 6S 380 O.D. o o o
FRONT AXLES:
5817 o o o o o o o o o o o
5818 V V V
5819 o o o
5823
450210 o o o o o o o o o o o
450311/1 o o o o o o o o
450511
450517/2
Rack-and-pinion Power steering o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
FRONT MECHANICAL SUSPENSIONS:
o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
independent with transverse leaf spring (MK3)
independent with torsion bars (•) (•) (•) (•) (•) (•) (•) (•)
REAR Parabolic Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z
MECHANICAL
SUSPENSIONS: - single leaf
- reinforced o o o o o o o o o o o
Semi-elliptic s s s s s s s s
Semi-elliptic
with leaf spring
z z z z z z z z
REAR AIR SUSPENSIONS V V V V V V V V V V V ◒ V ◒ V ◒ V ◒ V
ID = Direct injection s Standard on chassis cabs and vans 40C

NA = Aspirated Alternatively on Vans — Chassis Cowls and Cut Aways
PC = Indirect injection (pre-combustion chamber) Z Standard on Vans (excluding 40C) — Chassis Cowls and Cut
TCA = Turbocharged with intercooler Aways — Alternatively on Chassis Cabs
OXICAT = Catalytic silencer z Chassis cabs only, as an alternative
O.D. = Over Drive ◒ Not provided on 35C (with max. load of 1900 kg and
(•) Optional extra (with max load of 1900 kg) tyres 135/75 R16) and 40 C Chassis cabs - 40 C Vans and Cut
o Standard Aways
V Alternative S Single rear wheels
* With Common Rail: 43XX, MS6.3 - 44XX, EDC 16 L = Light with single rear wheels
electronic injection system C = Twin rear wheels
EGR = Anti-pollution device BUS Glazed vans — Glazed Vendor — Chassis Cowls — Cut Aways,
J Vehicle category M1 produced until 31/12/01 bodied or adaptable to carry passengers
o Non-EU markets
•• Vehicles made until 9/01
o Vehicles made since 9/01
Vehicles with front suspension with transverse leaf spring
Vehicles with front suspension with torsion bars
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY GENERAL 5
MODELS
40 C 10
40 C 11
40 C 12
40 C 13
40 C 14
40 C 17
45 C 11
45 C 13
45 C 14
45 C 17
50 C 11
50 C 13
50 C 14
50 C 15
50 C 17
40 C 9
ASSEMBLIES
8140.63.4.. (85 CV PC/NA + EGR + OXICAT) ••
8140.43R.43XX/44XX (90 CV ID/TCA*) o
8140.43B.43XX/44XX (105 CV ID/TCA*) o o o
8140.43C.40XX (105 CV ID/TCA + OXICAT) o o o
8140.43S.41XX (125 CV ID/TCA* E.G.R. + OXICAT)
8140.43S.43XX/44XX (125 CV ID/TCA*) o o o
8140.43N.43XX/44XX (150 CV ID/TCA*) o
F1AE0481A*A (96 CV) o
F1AE0481B*A (116 CV) o
F1AE0481B*B (116 CV + E.G.R. + OXICAT)
F1CE0481A o o o
F1CE0481B o o o
Single disc 9” 1/4 o o o o
Single disc 10” 1/2 o o o o o o o
Single disc 11 o o o o o o o
ZF 5S 200 o o
ZF 5S 270 o o
ZF 6S 380 O.D. o o o o o o
FRONT AXLES:
5817
5818
5819 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
5823
450210
450311/1 o o o o o o o
450511 o o o o o o o o o
450517/2
Rack-and-pinion Power steering o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
independent with torsion bars o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o
REAR Parabolic Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z
MECHANICAL
- reinforced
Semi-elliptic s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s s
Semi-elliptic
z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z z
with leaf spring
REAR AIR SUSPENSIONS ◒ V ◒ V ◒ V V V V V V V V V V V

o Standard Aways
o Non-EU markets
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

6 GENERAL DAILY
A40 C 13 (BUS)
A40 C 15 (BUS)
A50 C 13 (BUS)
A50 C 15 (BUS)
A65 C 15 (BUS)
A35 S 13 (BUS)
MODELS
60 C 15
60 C 17
65 C 15
65 C 17
ASSEMBLIES
8140.63.4.. (85 CV PC/NA + EGR + OXICAT)
8140.43R.43XX/44XX (90 CV ID/TCA*)
8140.43B.43XX/44XX (105 CV ID/TCA*)
8140.43C.40XX (105 CV ID/TCA + OXICAT)
8140.43S.41XX (125 CV ID/TCA* E.G.R. + OXICAT)
8140.43S.43XX/44XX (125 CV ID/TCA*) o o o
8140.43N.43XX/44XX (150 CV ID/TCA*) o o o o o
F1AE0481A*A (96 CV)
F1AE0481B*A (116 CV)
F1AE0481B*B (116 CV + E.G.R. + OXICAT)
F1CE0481A
F1CE0481B o o
Single disc 9” 1/4
Single disc 10” 1/2 o o o
Single disc 11 o o o o o o o
ZF 5S 200
ZF 5S 270
ZF 6S 300 o o o o o o o o
ZF 6S 380 O.D. o o
FRONT AXLES:
5817 o
5818
5819 o o o o
5823 o o o o o
450210 o
450311/1 o o
450511 o o
450517/2 o o o o o
Rack-and-pinion Power steering o o o o o o o o o o
o
independent with torsion bars o o o o o o o o o o
REAR Parabolic Z Z o o o o o
MECHANICAL
- reinforced
Semi-elliptic s s s s
Semi-elliptic
with leaf spring
z z z z
REAR AIR SUSPENSIONS V V V V V V V V V V

o Standard Aways
o Non-EU markets
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY GENERAL 7
ALPHANUMERICAL CODING FOR VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

CUSTOMIZED VEHICLE (V.P.)
MARKET VEHICLE (V.M.)
STANDARD VEHICLE (V.C.B.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
RANGE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A LIGHT ROAD VEHICLES
PROGRAMMING FAMILY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
29 L
1 L 30
35 S
35 C
2 L 35
40 C
50 C CHASSIS CABS AND

3 L 50 DERIVATIVES *
45 C
60 C
4 L 65
65 C
29 L
5 L 30 A
35 S
35 C
6 L 35 A
40 C
50 C
7 L 50 A VANS AND DERIVATIVES *
45C
60 C
8 L 65A
65 C
* With engines 8140
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

8 GENERAL DAILY
PROGRAMMING FAMILY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
H F 25 29 L
CHASSIS CABS AND

M F 30 35 S DERIVATIVES •
35 C
E F 35
40 C
L F 25 A 29 L
N F 30 A 35 C
35 C VANS AND DERIVATIVES •

G F 35 A
40 C
50 C
R F 50 A
45 C
60 C
S F 65 A
65 C
• With engines F1A - F1C
ENGINE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A 8140 63 40XX PC/NA - 85 CV

8140.63.40XX
B 8140.43 C.40XX ID/TCA - 105 CV
E 8140.43 S.41XX ID/TCA - 125 CV (MI)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY GENERAL 9
ENGINE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
F 8140.43 B.43XX ID/TCA - 105 CV
G 8140.43 S.43XX ID/TCA - 125 CV
H 8140.43 N.43XX ID/TCA - 150 CV
M 8140.43 R.43XX ID/TCA - 90 CV
J F1AE0481A ID/TCA - 96 CV
K F1AE0481B ID/TCA - 116 CV
L F1AE0481B ID/TCA - 116 CV (MI)
P F1CE0481A ID/TCA - 136 CV
Q F1CE0481B ID/TCA - 166 CV
R F1AE0481D ID/TCA - 140 - 150 CV
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

10 GENERAL DAILY
SUSPENSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A Mechanical suspension: front with transverse leaf spring.
B Mechanical suspension: front with torsion bars.
C Mechanical front suspension with transverse leaf spring — rear air suspension.
D Mechanical front suspension with torsion bars — rear air suspension.
VERSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
35 S.9 (•) - 29 L.9 - 35 S.11 (•)
29 L.10 (•) - 29 L.11 - 29 L.12 (•)
35 S.10 (•) - 35 S.12 (•) - 35 S.13 (•)
35 S 15 (•) 35 S.17 (•) - 35 C.9 (•)
35 C.10 (•) - 35 C.11 (•) - 35 C.12 (•)
1 CHASSIS 35 C.13
C 13 (•) - 35 C.14
C 14 (•) - 35 C 15 (•)
CAB 35 C.17 (•) - 40 C.9 - 40 C.11 - 40 C.12
45 C.11 - 45 C.13 - 45 C.14 (•) - 45 C.17 (•)
50 C.11
C 11 (•) - 50 C.13
C 13 (•) - 50 C.14
C 14 (•)
50 C.15 (•) - 50 C.17 (•) - 60 C.15 (•)
60 C.17 (•) - 65 C.15 (•) - 65 C.17 (•)
29 L.9 D - 29 L.10 D (•) - 29 L.11 D

29 L.12 D (•) - 35 S.9 D (•) - 35 S.10 D (•)
35 S.11 D (•) - 35 S.12 D (•) - 35 S.13 D (•)
35 S.15 D (•) - 35 S.17 D (•) - 35 C.9 D (•)
35 C.10 D (•) - 35 C.11 D (•) - 35 C.12 (•)
CHASSIS
6 35 C.13 D ((•)) - 35 C.14 D ((•)) - 35 C.15 D ((•))
CAB
35 C.17 D (•) - 40 C.12 D - 40 C.13 D
6+1
45 C.11 D - 45 C.13 D - 45 C.14 D (•)
45 C.17 D ((•)) - 50 C.11 D ((•)) - 50 C.13 D (•)
( )
50 C.14 D (•) - 50 C.15 D (•) - 50 C.17 D (•)
60 C.15 D - 60 C.17 D - 65 C.15 D (•)
65 C.17 D (•)
29 L.9 CC - 29 L.10 CC (•) - 29 L.11 CC

29 L. 12 CC (•) - 35 S.9 CC (•) - 35 S.10 CC (•)
35 S.11 CC (•)
( ) - 35 S.12 CC (•)
( ) - 35 S.13 CC (•)
( )
35 S. 15 CC (•) - 35 S.17 CC (•) - 35 C.9 CC (•)
35 C.10 CC (•) - 35 C.11 CC (•) - 35 C.12 CC (•)
35 C.13 CC (•) - 35 C. 14 CC (•) - 35 C.15 CC (•)
0 CHASSIS
35 C.17
C 17 CC (•) - 40 C.
C 9 CC - 40 C.10
C 10 CC
COWL
40 C.11 CC - 40 C.12 CC - 40 C.13 CC
40 C.14 CC (•) - 40 C.17 CC (•) - 45 C.11 CC
45 C.13 CC - 45 C.14 CC (•) - 45 C.17 CC (•)
50 C.11 CC (•) - 50 C.13 CC (•) - 50 C.14 CC (•)
50 C.15 CC (•) - 50 C.17 CC (•) - 60 C.15 CC
60 C.17 CC (•) - 65 C.15 CC (•) - 65 C.17 CC (•)
(•) present version /P too (rear air suspensions)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY GENERAL 11
VERSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
29 L.9 CCS - 29 L.10 CCR (•) - 29 L.11CCS
29 L.12 CCR (•) - 35 S 9. CCS (•)
35 S. 10 CCS (•) - 35 S.10CCR (•)
35 S.11CCS (•) - 35 S.12 CCR (•)
35 S.12 CCS ((•)) - 35 S.13 CCS ((•))
35 S.15 CCS (•) 35 S.17 CCR (•)
35 C.9 CCS (•) - 35 C.10 CCR
35 C.10 CCS (•) - 35 C.11 CCS (•)
35 C.12 CCR - 35 C.12 CCS (•)
CHASSIS 35 C.13 CCS ((•)) - 35 C.14 CCR ((•))
R
COWL SHORT 35 C.15 CCS (•) - 35 C.17 CCR (•)
40 C.9 CCS - 40 C.10 CCR - 40 C.11 CCS
40 C.12 CCR - 40 C.13 CCS - 40 C.14 CCR (•)
40 C.17 CCR (•) - 45 C.11 CCS
45 C.13 CCS - 45 C.14 CCR ((•))
45 C.17
C 17 CCR (•)
( ) - 50 C.11
C 11 CCS (•)
( )
50 C.13 CCS (•) - 50 C.14 CCS (•)
50 C.15 CCS (•) - 50 C.17 CCS (•)
60 C.15 CCS - 60 C.17 CCS (•)
65 C.15 CCS (•) - 65 C.17 CCS (•)
35 C.9 CA (•) - 35 C.10 CA (•)

35 C.11 CA (•)
( ) - 35 C.12 CA (•)( )
35 C.13
C 13 CA ((•)) - 35 C.
C 15 CA ((•))
40 C.9 CA - 40 C.10 CA - 40 C.11 CA
A CUT-AWAY 40 C.12
C 12 CA - 45 C.11
C 11 CA - 45 C.13
C 13 CA
45 C.17 CA (•) - 50 C.11 CA (•)
50 C.13 CA ((•)) - 50 C.15 CA ((•)) - 50 C.17 CA ((•))
60 C.15 CA - 60 C.17 CA (•) - 65 C.15 CA (•)
65 C.17 CA (•)
29 L.9 V - 29 L.10 V (•) - 29 L.11 V

29 L.12 V (•) - 35 S.9 V (•) - 35 S.10 V (•)
35 S.11 V ((•)) - 35 S.12 V ((•)) - 35 S.13 V ((•))
35 S.15 V (•) - 35 S.17 V (•) - 35 C.9 V (•)
35 C.10 V (•) - 35 C.11 V (•) - 35 C.12 V (•)
( ) - 35 C.14 V (•)
35 C.13 V (•) ( ) - 35 C.15 V (•)
( )
H VAN
35 C.17 V (•) - 40 C.9 V - 40 C.10 V
40 C.11 V - 40 C.12 V - 40 C.13 V
40 C.14 V ((•)) - 40 C.17 V (•)
( ) - 45 C.11 V
45 C.13
C 13 V - 45 C C.14
14 V (•)
( ) - 45 C.17
C 17 V (•)
( )
50 C.11 V (•) - 50 C.13 V (•) - 50 C.15 V (•)
60 C.15 V - 65 C.15 V (•)
29 L.10 SV (•) - 29 L.12 SV (•) - 30 S.9 SV

30 S.11 SV - 35 S.9 SV (•) - 35 S.10 SV (•)
35 S.11 SV ((•)) - 35 S.12 SV ((•)) - 35 S.13 SV ((•))
35 S.15 SV (•) - 35 S.17 SV (•) - 35 C.9 SV (•)
35 C.10 SV (•) - 35 C.11 SV (•) - 35 C.12 SV (•)
SEMI GLAZED
SEMI-GLAZED ( ) - 35 C.14 SV (•)
35 C.13 SV (•) ( ) - 35 C.15 SV (•)( )
V
VAN 35 C.17 SV (•) - 40 C.9 SV - 40 C.10 SV
40 C.11 SV - 40 C.12 SV - 40 C.13 SV
40 C.14 SV (•)
( ) - 40 C.17 SV (•)
( ) - 45 C.11 SV
45 C.13
C 13 SV - 45 C.14C 14 SV (•)
( ) - 45 C.17
C 17 SV (•)
( )
50 C.11 SV (•) - 50 C.13 SV (•) 50 C.15 SV (•)
50 C.17 SV (•) - 65 C.15SV (•)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

12 GENERAL DAILY
VERSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
29 L.9 C.V. - 29 L. 10 C.V. (•) - 29 L.12 C.V. (•)
29 S.11 C.V. - 35 S.9 C.V. (•) - 35 S.10 C.V. (•)
35 S.11 C.V. (•) - 35 S.12 C.V. (•)
35 S.13 C.V. (•) - 35 S.15 C.V. (•)
VENDOR 35 C.9 C.V. (•) - 35 C.10 C.V. (•)
U VERSION CITY 35 C.11
C 11 C.V.
C V (•) - 35 C.12
C 12 C.V.
C V (•)
VAN 35 C.13 C.V. (•) - 35 C.15 C.V. (•)
40 C.10 C.V. - 40 C.12 C.V. - 45 C.14 CV (•)
45 C.17
C 17 CV (•) - 50 C.11
C 11 C.V.
C V (•)
50 C.13 C.V. (•) - 50 C.14 C.V. (•)
50 C.15 C.V. (•) - 50 C.17 C.V. (•)
5 COMBI 29 L.12 C ((•)) - 35 S.9 C ((•)) - 35 S.11 C ((•))

35 S.12 C (•)
( ) - 35 S.13 C (•) ( )
WHEELBASE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3000 mm (L30 - L30A - L35A - L50A - F25 -
1
F30 - F25A - F30A - F35A - F50A - F65A)
1 3000 L mm (F35) •
3000 L mm (L35 - L50 - L30A - L35A -

2
L50A - F25A - F30A - F35A - F50A)
3300 mm (L30A - L35A - L50A - L65A -

3
F25A - F30A - F35A - F50A - F65A)
3 3450 mm (L30 - L35 - L50 - L65) *
4 3450 mm (F25 - F30 - F35 - F50 - F65) •
4 3750 mm (L30 - L35 - L50 - L65) *
* With engines 8140

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY GENERAL 13
WHEELBASE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
4 3950 mm (L30A - L35A - L50A - L65A) *
5 4100 mm (L35) *
5 3750 mm (F25 - F30 - F35 - F50 - F65) •
3950 mm (F30 - F35 - F25A - F30A - F35A -

6
F50A - F65A) •
6 4750 mm (L50 - L65) •
7 4100 mm (F35) •
7 4350 mm (L50 - L65) *
8 3950 mm (L30 - L35) *
8 4350 mm (F50 - F65) •
9 4750 mm (F50 - F65) •
* With engines 8140

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

14 GENERAL DAILY
GEARBOX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A 5 SPEED (5 S 200 - 5 S 270)
B 6 SPEED (6 S 300)
C 5 SPEED (5 S 300)
D 6 SPEED (6 S 300 A)
E 6 SPEED (6 S 380 O.D.)
F 6 SPEED (6 S 380 A O.D.)
A Automated
O.D. Over Drive
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY GENERAL 15
DRIVE — INTERNAL HEIGHT OF LOADING BAY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
LEFT-HAND DRIVE (L30 - L35 - L50 - L65)*
1
(F25 - F30 - F35 - F40 - F65) •
LEFT-HAND DRIVE AND INTERNAL HEIGHT OF

LOADING BAY H1 = 1545 mm (L30A - L35A - L50A - L65A - 1
F25A - F30A - F35A)
LEFT-HAND DRIVE AND INTERNAL HEIGHT OF LOADING

BAY H2 = 1900 mm (L30A - L35A - L50A - L65A) * 2
(F25A - F30A - F35A - F50A - F65A) •
LEFT-HAND DRIVE AND INTERNAL HEIGHT OF LOADING

BAY H3 = 2100 mm (L30A - L35A - L50A - L65A)* 3
(F30A - F35A - F50A - F65A) •
RIGHT-HAND DRIVE (L30 - L35 - L50 - L65) *

A
(F25 - F30 - F35 - F50A - F65A) •
RIGHT-HAND DRIVE AND INTERNAL HEIGHT OF

LOADING BAY H1 = 1545 mm (L30A - L35A - L50A - L65A) * A
(F25A - F30A - F35A - F50A - F65A) •

LOADING BAY H2 = 1900 mm (L30A - L35A - L50A - L65A) * B
(F25A - F30A - F35A - F50A - F65A) •

LOADING BAY H3 = 2100 mm (L30A - L35A - L50A - L65A) * C
(F30A - F35A - F50A - F65A) •
* With engines 8140

MANDATORY MARKET OPTIONAL EXTRAS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
OPTIONAL EXTRAS REQUIRED BY THE CUSTOMER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004
16 GENERAL DAILY
ALPHANUMERICAL CODING FOR BUS IDENTIFICATION

CUSTOMIZED VEHICLE (V.P.)
MARKET VEHICLE (V.M.)
STANDARD VEHICLE (V.C.B.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
RANGE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A LIGHT ROAD VEHICLES
PROGRAMMING FAMILY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A LBU1 35 S
B LBU2 40 C
C LBU2 50 C
ENGINE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
G 8140.43 S.43XX ID/TCA - 125 CV
H 8140.43 N.43XX ID/TCA - 150 CV
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY GENERAL 17
SUSPENSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
A Mechanical suspension: front with transverse leaf spring.

B Mechanical suspension: front with torsion bars.
C Mechanical front suspension with transverse leaf spring
— rear air suspension.
D Mechanical front suspension with torsion bars
— rear air suspension.
VERSION
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
V GLAZED VENDOR LBU2
LBU1
F GLAZED VAN
LBU2
2 MINIBUS LBU2
3 HIRE LBU2
I PRIMARY SCHOOLS LBU2
M MIDDLE SCHOOLS LBU2
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

18 GENERAL DAILY
GEARBOX — WHEELBASE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
5 SPEED
A LBU1
3000 L mm
6 SPEED LBU1
B
3000 L mm LBU2
6 SPEED
C LBU2
3950 mm
DRIVE — INTERNAL HEIGHT OF LOADING BAY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
LEFT-HAND DRIVE AND INTERNAL HEIGHT OF

2
LOADING BAY H1 = 1900 mm (LBU1 - LBU2)

B
LOADING BAY H2 = 1900 mm (LBU1 - LBU2)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY GENERAL 19
REPLENISHING FLUIDS
IVECO RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS PARTS TO BE REPLENISHED Quantity

Litres kg
Sump + filter capacity 6.3 6.7
Sump capacity 5.2 4.6
Total dry engine capacity 6.9 6.1
Engine 8140 Sump capacity:
- max level 5.2 4.6
Urania Daily
Urania LD 5 - min level 3.5 3.1
Quantity of oil in circulation in the car-
tridge filter and heat exchanger
1.4 1.23
Sump capacity:
Engine F1A - max level 4.3 3.78
- min level 3 2.65
Quantity of oil in circulation in the car-
1 0.88
tridge filter and heat exchanger
Sump capacity:
Engine F1C - max level 6.6 5.81
- min level 4.29 3.78
! Max. gradient negotiable by vehicle uphill/downhill with oil at minimum level 30%
Gearbox
ZF 5S 200 - ZF 5S 270 2 1.8
T l TRUCK GEARLITE
Tutela
ZF 6S 300 2.7 2.43
ZF 6S 380 O.D. 2.2 -
Front axle:
5817 - -
5818 - -
5819 - -
5823 - -
Rear axles:
Tutela W140/M-DA
W140/M DA (SAE 85W140) 450210 18
1.8 15
1.5
Tutela W140/M-DA (SAE 85W140) 450311/1 1.9 1.65
Tutela W140/M-DA (SAE 85W140) 450511 1.9 1.65
Tutela W140/M-DA (SAE 85W140) 450517/2 3 2.7
Tutela GI/A Power steering 1.4 1.3
Tutela TRUCK DOT SPECIAL Brake circuit 1.11 1
Arexons DP1 Windscreen washer 5 4.5
Paraflu11 * Cooling system 9 -
* = Protective anti-freeze (concentration 50%, freezing point —35°C)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

20 GENERAL DAILY
International lubricant description FL Group products

Engine oil meets specifications:
ACEA B5 with synthetic base SAE 5W30 Urania Daily
ACEA E3/E5 with mineral base Urania LD5
Differential and wheel hub oil meets specifications:
API GL-5 with mineral base SAE 85W140 Tutela W 140/M - DA
API GL-5 with mineral base SAE 80W90 Tutela W 90/M - DA (1)
Mechanical gearbox oil containing non-EP anti-wear additives
Tutela Truck Gearlite
Meets specification API GL 4 SAE 75W80
Hydrostatic transmission and power steering oil
Tutela GI/A
Meets specifications: ATF-DEXRON II D
General-purpose grease
Tutela MR 2
lithium soap based grease N.L.G.I. fluidity no. 2
Specific grease for wheel hubs and bearings
Tutela MR 3
lithium soap based grease N.L.G.I. fluidity no. 3
Hydraulic brake and clutch control fluid
In conformity with N.H.T.S.A. standards No. 116, ISO 4925 Tutela TRUCK DOT SPECIAL
Standard SAE J 1703, IVECO STANDARD 18-1820
Windscreen washer liquid
Tutela Professional SC 35
Mixture of spirits, water and surfactants CUNA NC 956-11
Concentrated protective radiator fluid
ethylene glycol based containing corrosion inhibitors, Paraflu11(2)
in conformity with Iveco Standard 18-1830
(1) Specific for cold climes.
(2) 100% Paraflu to be diluted with water to 50%
95 35
50 10 SAE 40
32 0 SAE 30
SAE
14 -10 20W
SAE
5 -15
15W/40
SAE SAE 5W 30
-13 -25 10W
oF oC
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY ENGINES 1
SECTION 2
5401 Engines
Page
ENGINES WITH ELECTRONIC
HIGH-PRESSURE
INJECTION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
- 8140.43R. 43XX/44XX
- 8140.43B. 43XX/44XX
- 8140.43S. 41XX
- 8140.43S. 43XX/44XX
- 8140.43N. 43XX/44XX
ENGINES WITH ROTARY MECHANICAL

INJECTION PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
- 8140.43C. 43XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
- 8140.63C. 40XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
FIA ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
FIC ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

2 ENGINES DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY ENGINES 8140 3
5401 Engines 8140.XXX
Page
MAIN SERVICING OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED
ON VEHICLE ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
ENGINE REMOVAL-REFITTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
- Removal (Engine 8140.43B/R/S) . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
- Removal (Engine 8140.43C - 8140.63) . . . . . . 12
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
- Checks and tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
- Bleending the fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
- Power steering system air bleed . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
OXICAT - OXYDIZER CATALYST

(VEHICLES WITH 8140.43C - 8140.63 ENGINES) 14
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
- Cylinder head removal and refitting . . . . . . . . . 15
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
REPLACING BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
- Replacing air-conditioning compressor drive belt17
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
- Assembly and adjusting belt tension . . . . . . . . . 17
- Replacing water pump - alternator drive belt . . 17
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
- Changing the timing system driving belt . . . . . . 17
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
REPLACING WATER PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

4 ENGINES 8140 DAILY
Page
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
REPLACING INJECTORS
(ENGINE 8140.63 - 8140.43C) . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
REPLACING INJECTION PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
- Assembly and injection pump adjustment . . . . 22
ENGINE FLYWHEEL REMOVAL-REFITTING . . . 23
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

MAIN SERVICING OPERATIONS TO BE PERFORMED ON VEHICLE ENGINE
On vehicles equipped with 8140.43B/R/S (Common Rail) engines, follow the indications specified below before
performing engine servicing operations that involve fuel system:
- before every engine servicing operation, perform engine/vehicle diagnosis by proper IVECO testers and print out
obtained results.
- the replacement of central unit MS6.3 or EDC 16 must be authorised by the Help Desk;
- following components in feed system cannot be overhauled but have to be replaced: flow limiting devices, if present,
pressure relief valve, if present, fuel pressure sensor, hydraulic accumulator, complete CP1 high pressure feed pump,
pressure control valve, electric injectors;
- Every Common Rail system part is packed by supplier into oil paper sheets and then stored into cardboard boxes.
These parts shall be protected against dampness and shall be unpacked just before their use.
- Take utmost care to part cleanliness during filter and prefilter handling and fitting (even in case of simple
replacement) to prevent foreign matters and dirt infiltration. To this purpose, hydraulic part and sensor protective
plugs shall be removed just before refitting into place.
- Assembly direction shall be observed for all electric connections.
- Every threaded connection shall be tightened to the specified torque.
- Every quick coupling connector (on this engine find them on high pressure pump and diesel fuel draining duct) shall
be fitted properly. Operate on the tabs set at connector base to remove them.
Electroinjector:
injector body connections/unions/nuts shall never be manipulated. Nozzle body and electromagnet shall never be
disassembled, since this operation is not required and is forbidden.
When servicing operations on high pressure pipe are required, the hexagon on injector side shall be held with proper
wrench.
Before servicing pipes, check whether injector is fitted into seat on cylinder head.
When removing/refitting injector draining duct, do not remove retaining spring from its seat on injector: when pushing
the spring towards the engine and exerting a vertical force on connector, recycling is released. When refitting, put
recycle connector into its seat and exert a vertical force by pressing the retaining spring towards engine. Fitting shall
be friendly.
Rev. sensor (camshaft/flywheel):

during positioning, air gap between sensor and phonic wheel shall be falling within 0.8 and 1.5 mm and detection surface
and wheel surface shall be parallel.
CPI high pressure pump:

no intervention is allowed on third pumping element cutoff device.
When servicing operations on high pressure pipe are required, the hexagon on pump side shall be held with proper
wrench.
Before servicing high pressure pipe, check whether pump is properly fitted into its seat.
High pressure pipes

When removed, high pressure pipes shall not be reused but replaced.
Fixing connection tightening or loosening shall be performed with injectors, rail and high pressure pump perfectly
secured and holding the hexagon on component side if there is enough space.
Rail and accessories

Pressure control device and pressure relief valve can be refitted 5 consecutive times, then they shall be replaced. Before
refitting they shall be smeared with an oil film.
Overpressure valve shall be lubricated before refitting and its seal shall always be replaced.
For engine 8140.43S only - Since engine No. 3089322, a rail with the same configuration but without flow limiters
and pressure relief valve has been mounted. The same prescriptions specified for the previous one shall be complied
with.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

540110 ENGINE REMOVAL-REFITTING
Removal (Engine 8140.43B/R/S) Figure 1
Set the vehicle over the pit or on the lift.

Lift up the bonnet (1), unscrew the screws securing it and take
it off. Remove the prop (2).
Disconnect the negative cable (3) and the positive cable (5)
from the battery (4) and detach this from the engine bay.
Unhook the cable (17) from the bonnet opening control
devices.
Disconnect the electrical connections (8) of the front
headlamps.
Unscrew the nuts (6) and screws (7), then remove the front
cross member (16) with the light clusters.
Unscrew the screws (10, 12 and 14) and remove the bottom
side guards (11 and 13).
Unscrew the eight nuts (9) and remove the bumper (15).
Underneath the vehicle (see Figure 4):
- Unscrew the screws (8) and nuts (10), then remove the
bottom side guards (11).
- Unscrew the screws (⇒) and remove the central guard
(12).
50952
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Take the cap (1) off the expansion tank (3). Figure 2
Unscrew the coolant plug (10), under the radiator (11), and
drain the cooling system.
Disconnect the heat exchanger pipes (7 and 8) from the intake
manifold and from the turbocharger.
NOTE Close the turbocharger air outlet appropriately to

prevent foreign bodies accidentally getting inside
and damaging it.
Disconnect the coolant pipes (12, 13 and 16) from the

radiator (11).
A
NOTE Vehicles with an air-conditioner in the cab should
have the electrical connection (9) disconnected
from the drier filter.
Disconnect the electrical connection (16) of the fan switch.

Unscrew the air filter bracket fasteners (17) to help extract the
air intake pipe (18) from the duct (15) on the radiator
assembly.
Unscrew the four screws (6) and remove the heat-exchanger
radiator assembly (11).
NOTE For vehicles with an air-conditioner in the cab:

- Put the radiator, with condenser and drier filter,
back into the engine bay, taking care not to put
the air-conditioning system pipes under
tension.
Disconnect the coolant pipes (2-19-20-21-22) from the

relative pipes on the engine.
Disconnect the electrical connection (4).
Unscrew the nuts (5) and remove the expansion tank (3).
NOTE This figure refers to a vehicle provided with

additional heater A.
62115
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Disconnect the electrical connections of the engine cable: Figure 3

- (4), from the fascia wiring;
- (6), from the chassis frame cable;
- (7), from the electronic control unit;
- (8), of the earthing cable on the engine;
- (14), from the low engine oil level indicator;
- (25) from turbosupercharger actuator control solenoid
valve (engine 8140.43N only);
- (13), from the diesel filter.
Disconnect the electrical connection (1) from the thermostart
glow plug.
Disconnect the electrical connection (2) from the thermostart
solenoid valve.
NOTE The remaining electrical connections of the engine

cable should be disconnected from the relative
electric components after removing the engine (see
Figure 5).
Unscrew the screws (3) to free the engine cable from the
body.
Disconnect the fuel pipe (11) from the high-pressure pump.
Disconnect the fuel recovery pipes (9 and 10).
Disconnect the pipe (12) from the vacuum pump.
Place a container under the power steering pump to recover
the oil from the system. Then disconnect the oil inlet and
outlet pipes (15 and 16).
Disconnect oil vapour piping (23) from flow control valve (for
EGR versions only).
Disconnect air intake duct (22) from turbosupercharger.
Disconnect pressure pipe (24) from turbosupercharger
actuator control solenoid valve (engine 8140.43N only).

and damaging it.
Attach the rocker arm 99360550 (5) to the lifting hooks on

the engine. Hook it onto the hoist and put the engine slightly
under traction.
NOTE Vehicles with air-conditioning in the cab should have

the compressor (20) disconnected as follows:
- loosen the nut (17);
- unscrew the tightener screw (18);
- remove the drive belt (21);
- take out the screws (19) and put the
compressor (20) back into the engine bay
without disconnecting it from the system pipes. 61983
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Remove the sealing from the ring nut (1), unscrew it and Figure 4
disconnect the speedometer control cable.
Disconnect the electrical connection (4) from the reversing
light switch.
Unscrew the screws (3) securing the propeller shaft (2) to the
gearbox. Fasten the propeller shaft to the chassis frame
appropriately.
Unscrew the screws (6) and the screw (5). Remove the
crosspiece (7) supporting the gearbox complete with plug.
Disconnect the exhaust pipe (9) from the turbocharger outlet
pipe.
Disconnect the screws (16 and 18) securing the brackets (15
and 17) and disconnect the ”bowdens” (14 and 19) from the
gearbox.
Unscrew the screws (20), move the clutch control cylinder
(21), with its bracket, and fasten it to the chassis frame
appropriately.
Remove the nuts (13) for the screws securing the engine
brackets to the structural members and take out the screws.
Lift the engine assembly and take it out of the engine bay.
NOTE The engine should be taken out of the engine bay

extremely carefully so as not to damage the top pipe
of the power steering and the
heatproof-soundproof covering of the engine bay.
50955
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 5
50956
Disconnect the electrical connections (⇒) of the engine Figure 6

cable from the relative electric components.
Detach the gearbox from the engine as follows:
- stand the engine on a workbench so it is sufficiently
stable;
- disconnect the starter motor and the bottom guard (1,
Figure 6) from the gearbox;
- set the stand 99370620 on a hydraulic lift and apply it to
the gearbox;
- take out the screws securing the gearbox to the engine;
- disconnect gearbox from engine.
62853
In case of difficulty, take the inspection cover off the front

cover of the gearbox.
Using special pliers, open out the split ring retaining the
thrust-bearing sleeve to the clutch plate and at the same time
disconnect the gearbox from the engine.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Removal (Engine 8140.43C - 8140.63)

Figure 7
51194
This differs from engine removal for the 8140.43S as there Disconnect the throttle cable (9) from the injection pump
is no engine cable or electric components connected to it and from the bracket.
and in the following. Disconnect the fuel pipes (10 and 14) from the injection
Disconnect the electric cables: pump.
- (1), from the thermostart solenoid valve; 8140.63 (aspirated) engine only:
- (2), thermostart glow plug; - (18), vacuum pipe from EGR valve;
- (3), insufficient engine oil pressure indicator; - (19), EGR potentiometer electric cable;
- (4), coolant temperature indicator;
- Disconnect the glow plug electrical connection from the
- (5), temperature switch for K.S.B. and thermostart; control unit in the engine bay, above the battery.
- (6), alternator;
- (7), temperature switch;
- (8), electric fan;
- (11), starter motor;
- (15) electric stop; NOTE The engine should be taken out of the engine bay
- (16), K.S.B.; extremely carefully so as not to damage the top pipe
of the power steering and the heatproof-soundproof
- (17), engine speed sensor.
covering of the engine bay.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Refitting
When positioning the engine in the engine bay, take
! special care not to damage the top pipe of the power
To refit the power unit, reverse removal operations and steering and the soundproof-heatproof cladding of
observe the following indications: the engine bay.
Once positioned, meticulously check that the top
- before refitting gearbox to engine, remove thrust bearin pipe of the power steering is sound.
from diaphragm spring by opening circlip. Before using it again, check that the power steering
Fit thrust bearing on input shaft cover sleeve and oil and coolant contain no impurities. If they do, filter
connect it to clutch disengagement lever. Smear input with suitable mesh filters. For any topping up, refer
shaft with Molikote molybdenum disulphate grease. to the REPLENISHING FLUIDS table in the
Engage a speed to rotate main shaft by rotating propeller ”GENERAL” section.
shaft flange. Push down the gearbox to properly engage
thrust bearing into diaphragm spring;
- take the utmost care when refitting the power unit into Figure 8
engine compartment;
- check the conditions of the coolant pipes or sleeves and
of the air conveyors. Replace them if they show any sign
of deterioration;
- check the flexible mountings of the assemblies: engine
and gearbox. Replace them if they show any sign of
deterioration;
- check that the exhaust pipe members have not
deteriorated and are not about to deteriorate. If this is
so, replace them along with the flexible parts for securing
them;
- tighten the screws or nuts to the required torque;
- meticulously check the state of the vacuum pipe. It must
show no sign of cracking, cutting, scoring or of being
75242
crushed. Replace it if there is any doubt at all about its
soundness. When mounting it, make sure the pipe does
FUEL PIPES
not come into contact with sharp metal parts or corners
1. High-pressure pump fuel pipe fast coupling - 2. Fuel
or with any particularly hot parts. In addition, after
supply pipe fast coupling 3. Fuel return pipe fast coupling -
assembly, the pipe must have no bends or constrictions,
4. Fuel filter mount.
its radius of curvature should be broad and it must be
secured to the vacuum pump fitting with a suitable If the fuel pipes (1-2-3) get disconnected from the mount (4),
clamp; it is necessary, when refitting, to make sure their couplings are
thoroughly clean. This is to prevent getting a bad seal and fuel
- make sure that the quick-coupling fittings of the fuel
leaking out as a result.
pipes are carefully cleaned and that, after their
connection to the relevant unions of the high-pressure
pump or of the fuel filter mounting, they are fully inserted
and do not get disconnected.
Checks and tests
- fill the cooling system with coolant.
- bleed the fuel supply system as described in the relative Start up engine, leave running at a speed slightly in
paragraph (only for engines 8140.63.4... - 8140.43C.4...); excess of idle speed and wait for coolant to heat
- fill the power steering circuit and bleed the air as sufficiently to open thermostat. Then check the fol-
described in the relevant paragraph; lowing:
- check the level of oil in the engine and gearbox;
- adjust the tension of the drive belt of the compressor for - no coolant leaks from coolant hose and cab interior
the air-conditioner as described in ”Replacing Belts” (if heating hose connection sleeves. Tighten hose clips, if
present). necessary;
- no oil leaks from between cover and cylinder head, oil
sump and crankcase, oil filter and housing, heat
exchanger and crankcase or from lubrication circuit lines;
- no fuel leaks from injection pump and injector lines.
Tighten fittings if necessary;
- check that the indicator lights on the instrument panel
and relating to the devices disconnected when the
engine was removed are working properly.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

542011 Bleending the fuel system (see 507130 OXICAT - OXYDIZER CATALYST
Figure 7) 8140.43C - 8140.63 engines (Vehicles with 8140.43C -
only 8140.63 engines)
Description
Loosen bleed screw (12), operate priming pump lever (13)
until complete bleeding of all the air in the system, tighten The oxidizing catalyst (1) is a post-treatment device for ex-
bleed screw. haust gases. It is used to oxidize CO, HC transforming them
into carbon dioxide (CO2) and steam (H2O).
NOTE If the engine stops for lack of fuel, resulting in air This catalyst also treats saturated and aromatic hydrocarbons
being introduced into the system (and if the bleed- forming part of the particulate, such as the carbon in the form
ing process described above is no sufficient), it is of soot, metals, water and sulphur compounds that are ex-
necessary to loosen the unions of at least two injec- hausted.
tors, rotate the engine and start it. The cylindrical-shaped catalyst consists of a ceramic honey-
When the air has been bled off, close the unions comb monolith whose cells are platinum-impregnated, a ca-
again. talyzing substance of oxidation reactions. Its total volumetric
capacity is equal to 600 cm3 with a density of 400 cells per
square inch.
501430 Power steering system air The exhaust gases passing through the cells heat the catalyst,
bleed converting the pollutants into inert compounds.
The chemical oxidation reaction of CO, HC and of the parti-
Check the level of oil in the tank and top it up if necessary. culate is efficient with temperatures ranging between
Lift the vehicle at the front, start up the engine and let it idle 200°C ÷350°C.
for some time. With temperatures higher than 350°C it starts oxidizing the sul-
Check there is no oil leakage from the hydraulic circuit and phur contained in the diesel oil, generating sulphur dioxide
check the level in the tank. (SO2) and sulphur trioxide (SO3), which are the cause of acid
Slowly turn the flywheel in both directions of steering so that rain.
the air in the hydraulic system comes out.
Check the level of oil in the tank again and top up if necessary. Correct catalyst sizing enables limiting the temperature, ob-
taining the greatest percentage of conversion of polluting
emissions, while reducing the freezing of sulphur compounds.
Figure 9
455182
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

540610 Cylinder head removal and refitting

Figure 10
62063
Removal - remove the pipe (19) from the rear cover of the cylinder
Remove the timing belt as described under the relevant head;
heading (operation 541257). - take out the screw securing the engine electric cable
Disconnect the electrical connections from the: bracket;
- cooling temperature indicator (11); - take out the screw (20) securing the pipes (17) to the
cylinder head;
- ”KSB” temperature switch (8140.63/43C engines only)
and/or thermostart; - take out the screw (18) securing the oil vapour
condenser;
- air temperature and pressure sensor (4) (8140.43B/R/S
engine only); - remove the top (23) and side (22) soundproofing;
- expansion tank level indicator (14); - disconnect the electrical connections:
(29) from the electro-injectors (26) (8140.43B/R/S
- disconnect the coolant pipes (2, 3 and 5); engines only);
- remove the expansion tank (15); - (13) from the engine speed sensor (8140.43B/R/S and
- remove the coolant pipes (10) from the water pump and 8140.63 engines only);
from the heat exchanger pipe (9); - from the glow plugs (8140.63 engine only);
- take out the screw (1) and the nut securing the bracket - from the fuel pressure sensor (25) (8140.43B/R/S
fixing the pipes (10 and 16) to the inlet manifold; engines only);
- extract the oil vapour recirculation valve (6) from the - remove the tappet cover.
duct (8) (8140.63 engine only);
8140.43B/R/S engines only
- remove the exhaust pipes (7) from the turbocharger Disconnect fuel recovery pipe (28) from connection (24).
(8140.43C - 8140.43B/R/S engines only); Press clamps (32) and lift connections (31) at the same time,
- remove the turbocharger (8140.43B/R/S/43 C engines disconnect connections and pipes (28) from electroinjectors
only) from the inlet manifold; (26).
Disconnect the fuel pipes (28) from the electro-injectors
(26) and from the hydraulic accumulator. Take out the
screws securing the electro-injector brackets (20).
Remove the electro-injectors (26) from the cylinder head.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Disconnect the pipe (33) from the high-pressure pump and Figure 11
from the hydraulic accumulator.
8140.43B/R/S engine excluded
Disconnect the fuel pipes from the injection pump and from
the injectors.
Disconnect the fuel recovery pipes from the injectors. α
Disconnect the LDA pipe from the inlet manifold (8140.43
C engine only).
Take out the screws (27) and remove the cylinder head with
6448
its gasket.
Refitting Tightening order diagram for cylinder heads fastening screws:

Refitting requires carrying out the operations for removal in - 1st step: pre-tightening with torque wrench to torque of
reverse order, while taking the following precautions: 60 ± 5 Nm;
- 2nd step: return to torque of 60 ± 5 Nm;
Check that the piston of cylinder No. 1 is at TDC.
- 3rd step: closing with 180° ± 10° angle.
Check that the mating surfaces of the cylinder head and
crankcase are clean.
Keep the cylinder head gasket clean.
Position the cylinder head gasket, of the thickness
determined in the ”checking piston protrusion” paragraph,
with the lettering ”HIGH” facing the cylinder head.
Figure 12
NOTE It is essential to keep the gasket sealed in its package

until just before assembly.
Before reusing the cylinder head fixing screws, measure their

thread diameter to check it is no less than 11.5 mm at any
point. If this is not so, replace them.
Turn the camshaft so that the valves of cylinder No. 1 are
shut.
Mount the cylinder head. Insert the screws and tighten them, 62063
in three successive stages, following the order and method Clean spaces between rear cover (4) and cylinder head (3)
shown in the following figure. from sealant residues and refill with IVECO 1905685 sealant.
Fit seal (2) on tappet cover (1). Smear tappet cover corners
(⇒) with Silastic 732 RTV (approx. 10g). Refit tappet cover
on cylinder head and tighten fixing nuts (5) to the specified
torque.
NOTE The angle closure is done with tool 99395216. Check the speed sensor is mounted as described under the
relevant heading (8140.63 - 8140.43 S engines only).
When fitting the fuel pipes, don’t use the metal clamp with
the flexible plug and fixing screw. Replace them with new
parts (8140.63 - 8140.43C engines only).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

REPLACING BELTS
Figure 13
50958
543910 Replacing air-conditioning compres-

sor drive belt Assembly and adjusting belt tension
Disassembly
Set the vehicle on a lift or over a pit.
From underneath the vehicle, detach the central
soundproofing guard.
Loosen the screws (4 and 6) fixing the tensioner (5) and the Mount the drive belt (1) taking care to position its ribs
nut (8). correctly in the respective races of the pulleys.
Remove the belt (10) driving the compressor. Turn the screw (3) to release the automatic tightener (2).
Turn the crankshaft by one turn to settle the belt.
With suitable equipment, measure the tension of the belt (1)
Assembly and adjusting belt tension in the section A, crankshaft / water pump / alternator, that
should be 140 ± 5 Hz.
Mount the drive belt (10), taking care to position its Mount the compressor drive belt, if there is one, and adjust
ribs properly in the respective races of the pulleys. the tension as described under the relevant heading.
Turn the screw (7) to lightly tension the belt (10).
Turn the crankshaft by one turn. Using the ap-
propriate instrument, check that in section B, com- 543411 Changing the timing system driving
pressor/crankshaft, the frequency is 160 ±10 Hz, belt
corresponding to a load of 500 ± 50 N.
If this is not so, turn the screw (7) appropriately. Lock the Disassembly
screws (4 and 6) at the required tightening torque.
Unscrew the screw (7) by two turns and lock the nut (8) at Following the procedures described for removing the engine,
the required torque. take out the radiator assembly without disconnecting the
Mount the radiator assembly and the remaining parts as air-conditioning system pipes from the condenser and from
described for refitting the engine assembly. the drier filter and put it suitably aside in the engine bay.
543411 Replacing water pump - alternator

drive belt NOTE For this operation it is not necessary to remove the
bumpers, it is sufficient to remove the air duct from
Disassembly the radiator and, for vehicles with engine 8140.63,
to remove the screws securing the intake filter air
Disassemble the compressor drive belt, if there is one, as inlet to the radiator.
described under the relevant heading.
Cancel the action of the automatic tightener (2) with the
screw (3) and remove the water pump - alternator drive belt
(1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 14
86142
2) references A and B on the tappet cover and on the

Removal camshaft pulley coincide;
3) tool 99360608 (19) is inserted in the engine flywheel
groove (18).
Remove the air-conditioner compressor drive belt (7) (if
there is one) and the water pump / alternator drive belt (6)
as described under the relevant headings. NOTE For engines 8140.43C - 814063 only (engines with
Remove the transverse air duct (3) without disconnecting rotary injection pump), in these conditions, stop
the fuel pipe from the solenoid valve and the electric cables. the injection pump pulley (9) from turning by
Put it appropriately to one side in the engine bay (8140.63 inserting another 99360608 tool through hole (8)
engine excluded). and that of the auxiliary unit.
Take out the screw (11) securing the pulley and remove this
from the crankshaft.
Remove the top (2) and side (1) soundproofing covers, if Remove the nut (16) securing the belt-tightening roller (17).
present. Remove the bottom timing cover (10). Insert a special
Remove the top timing cover (4). wrench (12) between the pin (14) and the push rod (13) so
Arrange the engine so that cylinder piston 1 is at firing stroke as to cancel its pressure on the belt-tightening roller (15).
TDC as follows. Remove the timing belt (5).
Insert tool 99360608 (19) in hole (⇒) of transmission cover
(20) from underneath the vehicle.
Turn the crankshaft slowly in the direction of rotation until When removing the cogged belt after travelling
the following conditions occur: ≥ 30000 km, replace it no matter what its state of
1) hole (15) of the crankshaft timing gear is facing efficiency.
downwards;
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 15
50960
Tighten the nuts securing the tightener roller (7) at the

NOTE Replace the front crankshaft cover in the event of torque of 37 ÷ 45 Nm.
leakage as shown in the respective section
(operation 540440).
Use tool 99395849 to check timing belt tension (1) which
must be as follows in point C:
- engines 8140.43R/B/S/N: 90 -115 Hz;
- engines 8140.43C - 8140.63: 88 - 112 Hz.
Refitting
Then complete refitting by carrying out the operations
described for removal in reverse order.
Mount the cogged belt (1).
Mount the bottom cover (4) and tighten the fixing screws to
the required torque.
Remove the wrench (3) so that the push rod (2), acting on
the belt tightener (7), tensions the cogged belt (1).
8140.43C - 8140.63 engines only.
Remove the tool 99360608 (5).
Check timing as follows.

Turn the crankshaft slowly in the direction of rotation by two
turns and check that the conditions illustrated in removal
procedure 1-2-3 are fulfilled when the timing belt is taut.
NOTE For 8140.43C - 814063 engines, in these

conditions, check injection pump pulley timing by
inserting tool 99360608 (5) through the pulley
hole (6) and that of the auxiliary unit.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

543210 REPLACING WATER PUMP

Figure 16
50961
Remove the wrench (4) and the washer (3) from the water
Disassembly pump shaft (1) and take out the pulley (5). Remove the nuts
and extract the electromagnetic coupling (2).
Disassemble the compressor drive belt (if there is one) and the
water pump drive belt as described under the relevant headings. Shift the piston ring (22) downwards and insert the pipe (23)
into the thermostat box so as to remove it from the water
Remove the air manifold (20) without disconnecting the electric
pump (1).
cables and the fuel pipe from the solenoid valve - thermostart
glow plug in the engine bay. Take out the screws (24) and remove the water pump (1)
from the crankcase.
Remove the side (18) (if present) and top (19) soundproofing
covers from the cylinder head.
Remove the timing belt cover (17). Assembly
Remove the automatic tightener (14). Loosen the screw (15)
for the nut securing the alternator to the mounting. For assembly, carry out the operations for disassembly in
Take out the screw (12) securing the alternator to the water reverse order, taking the following precautions:
pump (1). - replace the seal rings of the pipe (23);
Insert a special wrench (16) between the pin (13) and the push
rod (11) so as to cancel its pressure on the tightener roller (25). - clean the thread of the screws (24) and apply IVECO
Take out the screws securing the piping (8) to the water pump 1905683 sealant on their first 15 mm.
(1).
Disconnect the electromagnetic pulley electrical connection NOTE The hub locking nut (9) has a left-hand thread. The
(10). nut (7) must be replaced whenever disassembled.
Stop electromagnetic pulley (5) rotation using the proper tool.
Unscrew clockwise (7) hub retaining nut (9) and remove the
hub. Phase 1, tightening with torque wrench to a torque of 40 Nm.
Phase 2, closing with an angle of 110° ± 10°.
NOTE The nut (7) retaining the hub (9) has a left-hand NOTE The angle closure is performed with tool
thread. 99395216.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

775010 REPLACING INJECTORS (ENGINE 8140.63 - 8140.43C)

Figure 17
50963
771010 REPLACING INJECTION PUMP

Disassembly
Disassembly
Remove the air manifold (10) from the inlet manifold without
disconnecting the electric cables and the fuel pipe. Remove the transverse air manifold (10) without
Put the air manifold (10) appropriately to one side in the disconnecting the fuel pipe and electric cables from the
engine bay. Take out the side soundproofing cover (if any) thermostart components. Put the transverse air manifold
and the top cover (11). Remove the injectors (17 or 13), the (10) appropriately to one side in the engine bay.
fuel recovery pipe (16) and the fuel pipes (15). For engine Remove the top (11) and side (if any) soundproofing covers.
8140.43C, take out the screws (18) securing the injector Remove the timing cover (6). Turn the crankshaft so as to
brackets and remove the injectors from the cylinder head. align the camshaft pulley mark A with the tappet cover mark
For engine 8140.63, unscrew the injectors (13). B, making it possible to insert tool 99360608 into the hole
(5) in the pulley and into the hole in the auxiliary member
assembly. If this is not possible, turn the crankshaft by one
Assembly turn.
Remove the pipe bracket for the oil dipstick (7) from the
For assembly, carry out the operations described for disas- auxiliary member assembly.
sembly in reverse order, taking the following precautions: Disconnect the following from the injection pump:
- tighten the injectors of engine 8140.63 at a torque of 60 - Electric cables:
Nm (6 kgm); D (9), KSB device.
D (14), electrostop.
- bleed the fuel air as described under the relevant heading. D (12), EGR potentiometer (if present);
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

- fuel pipes (3 - 7, Figure 17); Connect the electric cable to the bulb (1, Figure 18) of the
- pipes delivering fuel to the injectors (15, Figure 17); KSB device and power it with the voltage of the vehicle. This
deactivates the KSB device.
- vacuum pipe (8, Figure 17)
- bowden throttle control cable (1, Figure 17); From underneath the vehicle:
Disconnect the injection pump. - remove the soundproofing guards of the engine/gear-
box;
- disconnect the oil dipstick pipe (7, Figure 17);
NOTE Having to refit the same injection pump that has
been removed. Mark its assembly position on its - take out a nut securing the injection pump.
mounting. From the engine bay, take out the nuts securing the injection
pump and remove the pump.
Assembly and injection pump adjustment
Figure 18
50694
Take out the plug located on the pump closure screw and
screw down tool 99395100 (2), with the rod in contact with NOTE The KSB device is deactivated when the timing
the top of the timing piston. advance control lever is no longer pulled.
Preload the dial gauge 99395603 (3) by approx. 3 mm.
Figure 19 Remove the tool 99360608 from the injection pump control
pulley.
Turn the engine in the opposite direction to that of rotation
until the injection pump timing piston reaches TDC, indicated
by the dial gauge (3). Zero the dial gauge (3). Insert tool
99360608 (5) into the hole (⇒) of the gearbox cover (6).
Slowly turn the crankshaft in its direction of rotation to insert
tool 99360608 (5) into the slot in the engine flywheel (4).
In the above condition, marks A and B (Figure 17) must
coincide and the injection pump piston must have made the
required travel. If this is not so, turn the pump body in its slot
to obtain the required value shown by the dial gauge. Fully
lock the nuts securing the pump to the auxiliary member
assembly.
18941
NOTE The injection pump fixing nut, crankcase side, is

NOTE Having to replace the coupling (1), take the new tightened with wrench 99352114.
part with the spare part number corresponding to
the angle stamped on it.
Remove tool 99360608 (5).

Check the timing is correct.
Cut off supply to the KSB device.
Key the injection pump onto the auxiliary member assembly,
Remove tool 99395100 (2, Figure 18) and screw the plug
making the groove (2), obtained in the pump drive shaft, with
back onto the closing screw.
the protrusion (1) of the coupling. Screw down the nuts
Finish mounting the parts removed, following the reverse
securing the pump without fully locking them.
order to disassembly.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

540850 ENGINE FLYWHEEL REMOVAL-RE- Remove the flywheel fastening screws, lift pin (11) from en-
FITTING gine flywheel (13) milling and remove it.
Removal
NOTE Should rear cover leaks be found, replace the cover
This operation includes: as described in the relevant chapter (operation
540460).
- propeller shafts removal-refitting (see relevant section
505620)
- gearbox removal-refitting (see relevant section
530210) Refitting
- clutch removal-refitting (operation 505210).
Check on dial gauge (1) whether piston (3) is at TDC,
For engines 8140.43C-8140.43 B/R/S proceed as otherwise operate on the output shaft to position it in said
follows: condition.
Remove cylinder 1 injector (6) as specified in engine over- Position engine flywheel (13) on output shaft to fit tool pin
haul. (11) into flywheel milling and secure the fastening screws.
Tighten flywheel fastening screws to the required torque.
Fit tool 99395098 (2) with dial gauge 99395603 (1) into in- Refit injector as specified in engine overhaul.
jector seat and secure it to cylinder head by clip (5) and
screw (4).
Rotate the output shaft until reading piston (3) TDC posi- For engines 8140.63:
tion on dial gauge (1).
Apply gauge 99395214 (10) to engine block. Removal
Operate on engine flywheel (13) to fit tool 99395214 (10)
pin (11) into engine flywheel (13) milling. Set cylinder 1 piston to TDC at compression stage (valves
closed).
Lock pin (11) by screw (12). Fit tool 99395100 (8) including the dial gauge 99395603 (9)
on injection pump (7) (after removing the plug); preload and
set the dial gauge to zero.
Figure 20 Apply gauge 99395214 (10) to engine block and proceed as
described for engines 8140.43C-8140.43 B/R/S.
Refitting
Check for no rotation of the output shaft on dial gauge (9).

Otherwise reset it to dial gauge zero position.
Refit engine flywheel as described for engines
8140.43C-8140.43 B/R/S.
62851
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY ENGINES 8140.43R/B/S/N 25
5401 Engines with electronic

high-pressure injection system
- 8140.43R.43XX/44XX
- 8140.43B.43XX/44XX
- 8140.43S.41XX
- 8140.43S.43XX/44XX
- 8140.43N.43XX/44XX
Page
EMISSIONS VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
- Engine 8140.43R.43XX/44XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
- Engine 8140.43B.43XX/44XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
- Engine 8140.43S.41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
- Engine 8140.43S.43XX/44XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
- Engine 8140.43N.43XX/44XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
ASSEMBLY DATA - CLEARANCES . . . . . . . . . . 41
TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
OVERHAULING ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
DISASSEMBLING THE ENGINE AT THE BENCH 57
REPAIR OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
CYLINDER BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
- Checks and measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
- Checking head mating surface

on cylinder block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
- Spare cylinder barrel assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
CRANKSHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
- Measuring main journals and connecting rods . 66
- Checking crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
- Replacing gearbox input shaft

centering ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
- Replacing timing control gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
ENGINE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

26 ENGINES 8140.43R/B/S/N DAILY
Page Page
- Assembling main bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 - Disassembling camshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

- Measuring main journals assembly clearances . . 70
- Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
- Checking crankshaft end float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
- Checking cam lift and journal alignment . . . . . . 82
- Checking alignment pulley crankshaft . . . . . . . . 71
VALVE TAPPET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
- Rear crankshaft cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
- Disassembling valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
- Front crankshaft cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
- Checking cylinder head seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
ENGINE FLYWHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
- Checking cylinder head mating surface . . . . . . . 83
- Replacing bearing supporting gearbox
input shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
- Replacing engine flywheel ring gear . . . . . . . . . 72 - Removing deposits, refacing and checking
valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
CONNECTING ROD - PISTON ASSEMBLY . . . 72
- Checking clearance between valve stem
- Pistons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 and valve guide and centring valves . . . . . . . . . 84
- Measuring the pistons diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 VALVE GUIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
- Piston gudgeon pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 - Replacing valve guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
- Conditions for correct pin-piston coupling . . . . 74 - Reaming valve guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
- Piston rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 VALVE SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
- Connecting rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 - Regrinding and replacing valve seats . . . . . . . . . 84
- Bushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 VALVE SPRINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
- Checking connecting rod for distortion . . . . . . 76 ASSEMBLING CYLINDER HEADS . . . . . . . . . . . 86
- Checking torsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 - Assembling valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

- Checking bending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 - Assembling tappets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
- Assembling connecting rod - piston assembly . 77 - Assembling camshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
- Coupling connecting rod - pistons . . . . . . . . . . 77
- Adjusting tappet clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
- Checking for connecting rod - piston distortion 78
- Refitting cylinder head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
- Assembling piston rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
AUXILIARY MEMBER ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
- Assembling connecting rod - piston assemblies
in cylinder barrels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 - Disassembling auxiliary member assembly . . . . 90
- Measuring connecting rod assembly clearance . 79 - Oil pressure control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
- Checking piston protrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 OIL PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
- Flywheel adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 - Assembling auxiliary member assembly . . . . . . 92
CYLINDER HEADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 - 6-element heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Page Page
LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
- Operation at low engine rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
- General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
- Oil vapour recycling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 - Operation at high engine rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 - Proportional solenoid valve controlling

turbocharger actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
- Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
- Electromagnetic pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
- Checking the actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
- Water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
- Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 FUEL SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
TIMING AND AUXILIARY MEMBER CONTROL 99 HIGH-PRESSURE ELECTRONIC INJECTION SYSTEM

(COMMON RAIL MS 6.3 OR EDC.16) . . . . . 111
- Setting the timing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
- General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
- Checking and aligning electromagnetic
coupling pulleys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
- Checking alternator pulley alignment . . . . . . . . 102
- Self-diagnosis - BLINK CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
- Checking compressor pulley alignment . . . . . . . 102
- Immobilizer recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
- Adjusting compressor - air-conditioner drive
belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 - Checking fuel temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
- Adjusting alternator - water pump - Checking engine coolant temperature . . . . . . . 113

drive belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
- Timing system speed sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 - Checking quantity of fuel injected . . . . . . . . . . . 113
- Engine speed sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 - Checking idling adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
SUPERCHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 - Fuel cut-off in release phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 - Checking cylinder balancing on idling . . . . . . . . 113

- Turbocharger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
- Checking regulator engine rotation
(anti-sawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 - Checking smokiness at exhaust on

acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
- Checking and adjusting the pressure relief valve 107
- Checking exhaust gas recirculation
- Changing the pressure relief valve . . . . . . . . . . 107 (E.G.R. if present) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
- GARRET GT 2256 T variable - Checking top speed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

geometry turbosupercharger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
- Checking rotation regularity during
- General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Page Page
- Checking thermostart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 - Fuel pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

- Checking activation of air-conditioning system . 113 - High-pressure pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
- Checking fuel pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
- 3rd pumping element exclusion device . . . . . . 120
- Checking diesel warming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
- Pressure regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
- Checking cylinder position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
- Hydraulic accumulator (rail) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
- Checking pilot and main injection timing . . . . . 114
- Flow limiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
- Checking injection pressure closed cycle . . . . . 114
- Pressure relief valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
- Fuel supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
- Fuel recirculation and supply system . . . . . . . . . 123
- Correcting flow rate according
to water temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 ELECTRO-INJECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
- Correcting flow rate to avoid noise, - Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

smoke or overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS . . . . 126
- De-rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
- Electronic control unit MS6.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
- Adjusting turbine speed (for variable geometry
turbocharger - when present) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 SENSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
- Injection timing electronic test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 - Engine speed sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
- Speed governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
- Camshaft timing sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
- Engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
- Air temperature and pressure sensor . . . . . . . . 126
- Cold starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
- Fuel temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
- Warm starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
- Fuel pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
- Run up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
- Atmospheric pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
- After run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
- Engine coolant temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . 127
- Cut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
- Throttle pedal position sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
- Cylinder balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
- Clutch pedal position sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
- Synchronization search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
- Brake pedal position sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
- Vehicle speed sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
ACTUATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
- Fuel pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
- PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) controls . . . . 127
- Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM E.G.R.
- Fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 (vehicles with homologation MI) . . . . . . . . . . . 128
- Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 GUIDE TO TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . 129
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

EMISSIONS VALUES
Engine 8140.43R.43XX/44XX
Figure 21
74943
Gas emissions Smokiness

Engine 8140.43R.43XX/44XX conforms to the Euro3 Engine 8140.43R.43XX/44XX conforms to the smoke limits
standards on gas emissions (measured on engine bench to required by EEC regulations 72/306 and R24-03 with the
OICA mode 13 cycle), with the following limits fixed by EEC following exhaust smoke values:
regulation 1999/96: Maximum power (Bosch BSU opacimeter degrees) 1.5
Maximum torque (Bosch BSU opacimeter degrees) 2.5
— CO (carbon monoxide) < 2.1 g/kWh
Full load at 1000 rpm (Bosch BSU opacimeter degrees) 3.5
— NOx (nitrogen oxide) < 5.0 g/kWh
— HC (hydrocarbons) < 0.66 g/kWh Noise emissions
Maximum mean noise level, Lpa, of the standard engines
— Particulate < 0.13 g/kWh
measured according to ISO Std. 3745 (microphones at 1 m
Test fuel: CEC RFT 73 - T - 90 - S ≤ 0.05 %. from the engine surfaces):
Idling (800 rpm) dB A 76
Full power (3600 rpm) dB A 99
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Engine 8140.43B.43XX/44XX
Figure 22
74939

Engine 8140.43B.43XX/44XX conforms to the Euro3 Engine 8140.43B.43XX/44XX conforms to the smoke limits
standards on gas emissions (measured on engine bench to required by EEC regulations 72/306 and R24-03 with the
OICA mode 13 cycle), with the following limits fixed by EEC following exhaust smoke values:
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Engine 8140.43S.41..
Figure 23
74939

Engine 8140.43S.41.. with E.G.R. conforms to the Standard on Engine 8140.43S.41.. with E.G.R. conforms to the smoke limits
gas emissions ECE 96/69 step 2 (measured on roller bench required by EEC regulations 72/306 and R24-03 with the
according to ECE-EUDC 20 mode 1 cycle), with the following following exhaust smoke values:
limits: Maximum power (Bosch BSU opacimeter degrees) 1.5
— HC+NOx (unburnt hydrocarbons
+ nitrogen oxide) < 1.6 g/km Noise emissions
— Particulate < 0.2 g/kWh Maximum mean noise level, Lpa, of the standard engines
Test fuel: CEC RFT 73 - T - 90 - S v 0.05 %.
from the engine surfaces):
Test conditions: coast-down assigned 12.7 kW at 80 km/h. Idling (800 rpm) dB A 76
Reference weight of vehicle 2270 kg Full power (3600 rpm) dB A 99
Vehicle equipped with EGR system and oxidizing catalyst:
— Degussa 1.5 l - 300 cpsi - V50 - 2g - Pt
— Kemira 1.5 l - 300 cpsi - 7007 - 1g - Pt
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Engine 8140.43S.43XX/44XX
Figure 24
74939

Engine 8140.43S.43XX/44XX conforms to the Euro3 Engine 8140.43S.43.XX/44XX conforms with the limits of
standards on gas emissions (measured on engine bench to smokiness required by EEC standards 72/306: 1.37 lm with the
OICA mode 13 cycle), with the following limits fixed by EEC following exhaust smokiness values:
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Engine 8140.43N.43XX/44XX
Figure 25
74940

Engine 8140.43N.43XX/44XX conforms to the Euro3 Engine 8140.43N.43XX/44XX conforms with the limits of
standards on gas emissions (measured on engine bench to smokiness required by EEC standards 72/306: 1.37 lm with the
OICA mode 13 cycle), with the following limits fixed by EEC following exhaust smokiness values:
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 26
74942
LONGITUDINAL SECTION OF THE ENGINE WITH INTEGRATED CYLINDER LINERS
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 27
74941
CROSS SECTION OF THE ENGINE WITH INTEGRATED CYLINDER LINERS
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 28
51158
LONGITUDINAL SECTION OF THE ENGINE WITH INSERTED CYLINDER LINERS
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 29
62866
CROSS SECTION OF THE ENGINE WITH INSERTED CYLINDER LINERS
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
8140.43S.41XX
8140.43R.43XX 8140.43B.43XX 8140.43N.43XX
8140.43S.43XX
Type 8140.43R.44XX 8140.43B.44XX 8140.43N.44XX
8140.43S.44XX
ID/TCA ID/TCA ID/TCA
ID/TCA
Cycle Diesel 4 strokes
Feedin Supercharged with aftercooler
Injection Direct
No. of cylinders 4 on-line
∅
Diameter mm 94.4
Stroke mm 100
+ + +.. = Total displacement cm3 2800
ρ Compression ratio 18:1
Max. power kW 64.7 ÷ 67.3 75.3 ÷ 80.7 88.8 ÷ 95.2 103.5 ÷ 110.5
(HP) (88.0 ÷ 91.6) (102.4 ÷ 1098) (120.8 ÷ 129.5) (140.7 ÷ 150.3)
rpm 3600 3600 3600 3600
Max. torque Nm 201.6 ÷ 218.4 237.5 ÷ 262.5 275.5 ÷ 304.7 304 ÷ 338
(kgm) (20.6 ÷ 22.3) (24.2 ÷ 26.7) (28.1 ÷ 31.1) (31 ÷ 34.2)
rpm 1800 1800 1800 1800
Engine idling speed,

no load
rpm 800 ± 25
Maximum engine
speed, no load
rpm 4200 ± 50
Pressure at T.D.C.
*bar 20 ÷ 26
bar Minimum permissible
pressure at T.D.C.
*bar 16
(*) The pressure value is recorded by turning the engine over with the electric starter motor, with oil temperature at 40°- 50°C
and the injection pump in the stop condition.
ID = Direct injection
PC = Indirect injection (pre-chamber)
TCA = Supercharging with intercooler
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

8140.43S.41XX
8140.43R.43XX 8140.43B.43XX 8140.43N.43XX
8140.43S.43XX
Type 8140.43R.44XX 8140.43B.44XX 8140.43N.44XX
8140.43S.44XX
ID/TCA
A
VALVE TIMING
opens before T.D.C. A 8°

closes after B.D.C. B 37°
B
opens before B.D.C. D 48°

closes after T.D.C. C 8°
D
For timing check
mm 0.5 ± 0.05
X
mm 0.5 ± 0.05
X
Running
mm 0.5 ± 0.05
X
mm 0.5 ± 0.05
Electronic high-pressure fuel supply system type BOSCH MS6.3

or EDC 16, comprising a high-pressure pump, electro-injectors,
FUEL SUPPLY
hydraulic accumulator (rail), EDC control unit, pressure and
temperature sensors.
Pump arrangement -
With piston n. l at T.D.C.
X
Start of delivery mm -
Injector
j nozzle type
yp BOSCH
DSLA 136 P 804
Injection order 1- 3 - 4 - 2
bar
Injection pressure bar 1350
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

8140.43S.41XX
8140.43R.43XX 8140.43B.43XX 8140.43N.43XX
8140.43S.43XX
Type 8140.43R.44XX 8140.43B.44XX 8140.43N.44XX
8140.43S.44XX
ID/TCA
SUPERCHARGING With intercooler -
Turbocharger type KKK K03-2076-CCA 6.68 -
marked with colour pink blue
Turbocharger shaft radial clearance - - -
Turbocharger shaft axial clearance - - -
Minimum opening stroke of pressure
relief valve mm - -
Maximum opening stroke of pressure
relief valve mm 3.5 ± 0.2 2.2 -
Pressure corresponding to the minimum stroke bar - - -
Pressure corresponding to the maximum stroke bar 1.3 ± 0.002 -
Turbocharger type MITSUBISHI TD04
marked with colour pink blue -

Turbocharger shaft radial clearance 0.396 ÷ 0.602 -
Turbocharger shaft axial clearance 0.034 ÷ 0.106 -
Minimum opening stroke of pressure relief valve mm 1 -
Pressure corresponding to the minimum stroke bar 0.820 ± 0.020 0.920 ± 0.020 -
Maximum opening stroke of pressure relief valve mm 5 -
Pressure corresponding to the maximum stroke bar 1.000 ± 0.030 1.100 ± 0.030 -
GARRET GT
GARRET 2256 T
Turbocharger type
GT 20 with variable
geometry
Minimum opening stroke of pressure relief valve mm - 1 -
Pressure corresponding to the minimum stroke bar - 1,20 ÷ 1,27 -
Maximum opening stroke of pressure relief valve mm - 4 -
Pressure corresponding to the maximum stroke bar - 1,28 ± 1,42 -
Turbocharger shaft radial clearance - 0.086 ÷ 0.117
Turbocharger shaft axial clearance - 0.030 ÷ 0.083
Actuator setting:
- low pressure0 mmHg valve fully open -
- low pressure150 mmHg valve stroke mm - 2.3 ÷ 3.7
- low pressure400 mmHg valve stroke mm - 9.7 ÷ 10.7
- valve fully shut valve stroke mm - 11 ÷ 12.4
LUBRICATION Forced feed by gear pump, relief valve, dual action oil filter
Oil pressure, engine hot
bar at idling speed bar  0.8  0.8 0.8  0.8
at maximum speed bar 3.5 3.5 3.5 3.5
With a centrifuge pump, driven by the crankshaft via a poly-V
COOLING belt, thermostat, fan with electro-magnetic clutch, radiator,
“Intercooler” heat exchanger.
Thermostat:
starts to open: 82º C ± 2º C
fully open: 110º C
Urania Daily OIL REPLENISHMENT
Urania LD 5 Total capacity at 1st filling
liters 6.9
kg 6.1
Quantity at periodical
replacements:
- engine sump
liters 5.2
kg 4.6
- engine sump + filter
liters 6.3
kg 5.7
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ASSEMBLY DATA - CLEARANCES

8140.43S.41XX
8140.43R.43XX 8140.43B.43XX 8140.43N.43XX
8140.43S.43XX
Type 8140.43R.44XX 8140.43B.44XX 8140.43N.44XX
8140.43S.44XX
ID/TCA
CYLINDER BLOCK AND CRANK MECHANISM COMPONENTS
∅1 Bores for cylinder liners
∅1 97.39 ÷ 97.45 *
Cylinder liners: **
L outside diameter ∅2 97.47 ÷ 97.50
∅2 length L 167.00 ÷ 167.30
Cylinder liners -
crankcase bores 0.02 ÷ 0.11
(negative allowance)
Outside diameter ∅2 0.2
∅3
Cylinder barrels:
**
X (protrusion from engine
0.005 max
block bottom)
inside diameter ∅3 94.402 ÷ 94.432
Pistons: supplied as spare

∅1 MONDIAL PISTON
parts type:
X measuring dimension X 10
outside diameter ∅1 94.306 ÷ 94.320
∅2 pin bore ∅2 32.003÷32.009
Piston - cylinder sleeve 0.082 ÷ 0.126
∅1 parts type: KS
∅2 pin bore ∅2 32.003÷32.009
Piston diameter ∅1 0.4
X
Pistons protrusion
X > 0.40 ÷  0.80
∅3 Gudgeon pin ∅3 31.990 ÷ 31.996
Gudgeon pin - pin housing 0.003 ÷ 0.015

* Diameter to obtain at the time of servicing to fit the cylinder liners supplied as spares.
** Supplied as spares.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

8140.43S.41XX
8140.43R.43XX 8140.43B.43XX 8140.43N.43XX
8140.43S.43XX
Type 8140.43R.44XX 8140.43B.44XX 8140.43N.44XX
8140.43S.44XX
ID/TCA
CYLINDER BLOCK AND CRANK MECHANISM COMPONENTS mm
Piston type MONDIAL PISTON - KS
X1* 2.200 ÷ 2.230
X1
Piston ring grooves X2 2.050 ÷ 2.070
X2
X3 X3 2.540 ÷ 2.560
* measured on ∅ of 91.4 mm
2.068 ÷ 2.097
S 1 S 1*
S2 Piston rings S2 1.970 ÷ 1.995
S3
2.470 ÷ 2.490
S3
1 0.103 ÷ 0.162
Piston rings - grooves 2 0.55 ÷ 0.100
3 0.05 ÷ 0.09
Piston rings 0.4
X1 Piston ring end gap in cylin-

der liners
X2
X1 0.20 ÷ 0.35
X3
X2 0.30 ÷ 0.50
X3 0.30 ÷ 0.55
∅1 Small end bush housing
Ø1 35.460 ÷ 35.490
Big end bearing housing *

∅2
Ø2 60.341 ÷ 60.348
* spare connecting rod
supplied
∅4 Small end bush diameter
outside ∅4 35.570 ÷ 35.595
∅3
inside ∅3 32.010 ÷ 32.020
S
Big end bearing shell
supplied as spare parts S 1.875 ÷ 1.884
Small end bush - housing 0.08 ÷ 0.135
Piston pin - bush 0.014 ÷ 0.03
Piston rings 0.254 ÷ 0.508
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

8140.43S.41XX
8140.43R.43XX 8140.43B.43XX 8140.43N.43XX
8140.43S.43XX
Type 8140.43R.44XX 8140.43B.44XX 8140.43N.44XX
8140.43S.44XX
ID/TCA
X
Measuring dimension X 125
Max. connecting rod

axis misalignment
tolerance = 0.07
Main journals ∅1
∅1 ∅2 nº 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 80.182 ÷ 80.208
nº 5 86.182 ÷ 86.208
Crankpins ∅2 56.515 ÷ 56.538
Main bearing shells
S1* 2.165 ÷ 2.174
S1 S 2 Big end bearing shells
S2* 1.875 ÷ 1.884
* supplied as spare parts
Main bearings ∅3
∅3 nº 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 84.588 ÷ 84.614
nº 5 90.588 ÷ 90.614
Bearing shells -
main journals 0.032 ÷ 0.102
Bearing shells -
big ends 0.035 ÷ 0.083
Main bearing shells 0.254 ÷ 0.508
Big end bearing shells 0.254 ÷ 0.508
Main journal,
thrust bearing X1 31.000 ÷ 31.100
X 1
Main bearing housing,

X 2
X3
Thrust washer
halves X3 30.900 ÷ 30.950
Crankshaft end
float 0.060 ÷ 0.310
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

8140.43S.41XX
8140.43R.43XX 8140.43B.43XX 8140.43N.43XX
8140.43S.43XX
Type 8140.43R.44XX 8140.43B.44XX 8140.43N.44XX
8140.43S.44XX
ID/TCA
CYLINDER HEADS - VALVE GEAR mm
∅ 1
Valve guide housings in the

cylinder heads ∅1 12.950 ÷ 12.985
∅ 2
∅2 8.023 ÷ 8.038
Valve guide
∅3 13.012 ÷ 13.025
∅ 3
Valve guides and housings

0.027 ÷ 0.075
in the cylinder heads
Valve guide 0.05 - 0.10 - 0.2
∅ 4 Valves:
∅4 7.985 ÷ 8.000
α 60° 15′ ± 7′ 30″
∅4 7.985 ÷ 8.000
α α 45° 30′ ± 7′ 30″
Valve stem and its guide 0.023 ÷ 0.053
Housing in head for valve
seat
∅1 42.125 ÷ 42.175
∅ 1 37.380 ÷ 37.415
∅1
Outside diameter of valve

∅ 2 seat; angle
g of valve seat in
cylinder
li d head:
h d
∅2 44.245÷44.260
α 60° ± 5′
α ∅2 37.495 ÷ 37.510
α 45° ± 5′
X 1.2 ÷ 1.5
X Recessing of valve X 1 ÷ 1.3
Between valve 0.070 ÷ 0.135

seat and head
0.080 ÷ 0.130
Valve seats -
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

8140.43S.41XX
8140.43R.43XX 8140.43B.43XX 8140.43N.43XX
8140.43S.43XX
Type 8140.43R.44XX 8140.43B.44XX 8140.43N.44XX
8140.43S.44XX
ID/TCA
Valve outside spring
height:
free height H 52
H H1 under a load of:
2
H kg 43.8 ± 2.5 H1 38.5
kg 77.4 ± 4 H2 28.5
Valve inside spring
height:
free height H 45.5
H under a load of:
H1 kg 16.4 ± 1 H1 33.5
H
kg 30 ± 1.5 H2 23.5
Injector protrusion X 3.7 ÷ 4.3

X
Camshaft bearing housing
normal ∅ 33.985 ÷ 34.015

∅ ∅ ∅ oversized ∅ 34.185 ÷ 34.215
∅ 2
Camshaft bearing journals
normal ∅ 33.934 ÷ 33.950
∅ 1 ∅ 3 oversized ∅ 34.134 ÷ 34.150
Between seats and

0.035 ÷ 0.081
supporting pins
Tappets housing on
∅ cylinder heads
∅ normal 44.000 ÷ 44.025
Tappet ∅ normal 43.950 ÷ 43.970

∅
Between tappets and seats 0.030 ÷ 0.075
3.25 to 4.45 mm
Cap
with a progression of 0.05
Cam lift:
H
H 9.5
H 10.5
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TIGHTENING TORQUES
TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
Flanged screw, cylinder head
Phase 1: pretightening 60 ± 5 6 ± 0.5
Phase 2: pretightening 60 ± 5 6 ± 0.5
Phase 3: angle 180° ± 10°
Flanged screw, lower to upper cylinder block
Preliminary torque 50 ± 5 5 ± 0.5
Angle 90° ± 5°
Connecting rod caps fastening screw
Preliminary torque 50 ± 5 5 ± 0.5
Angle 63° ± 2°
Flywheel attachment bolts
Preliminary torque 30 + 3 3 + 0.3
Angle 90° ± 2°
Self-locking nut for fastening the electromagnetic joint to the water pump
Preliminary torque 40 4
Angle 110° ± 10°
Blanking plug, engine oil main pipe M18 40 4
Water circuit M16x1.5 conic cap 25 2,5
Oil pan/engine block fastening screw 18 1.8
Accessory equipments support oil duct sealing plug 25 2.5
Flanged screw, auxiliary units mounting M12 60 6
Accessory equipments support fastening screw M8 25 2.5
Accessory equipments support front cover fastening screw 25 2.3
Accessory equipments support rear cover fastening screw 18 1.8
Auxiliary members assembly upper cover securing screw 25 2,5
Hexagon socket-head screw, crankshaft oil seal rear cover (Rotostat) 25 2.5
Hexagon socket-head screw, crankshaft oil seal front cover (Rotostat) 7.5 0.75
Camshaft front cover fastening nut 7.5 0.75
Water pump pipe/inlet manifold fastening nut 25 2.5
Cylinder heads rear cover fastening screws and nut 25 2.5
Nut, engine lifting brackets 18 1.8
Inlet and outlet manifold fastening nut 25 2.5
Inlet manifold/crank fastening screw 18 1.8
Crankshaft driving pulley fastening screw 200 20
Camshaft caps fastening nut 18 1.8
Camshaft driving gear fastening screw 25 2.5
Injection pump driving gear fastening screw 100 10
EGR valve/inlet and outlet manifolds fastening nut 18 1.8
Nut fixing toothed bushing to the high-pressure pump 79 7.9
Coupling fixing heat exchanger and for oil filter cartridge * 75 7.5
Oil filter fixing 25 2.5
Screw fixing oil suction strainer 25 2.5
Oil pressure valve spring cap 65 6.5
Union for piston cooling nozzle 40 4
Flanged screw fixing water pump casing to crankcase 50 5
Oil level sensor fixing on crankcase 25 2.5
* The thread must first be spread with IVECO 1905683 sealant
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
Nut, magnet to water pump 7.5 0.75
Screw, cylinder head water thermostat pipe union 18 1.8
Screw, driven pulley to water pump hub 25 2.5
Screw, alternator mounting to crankcase 50 5
Screw, alternator to mounting 75 7.5
Nut to secure alternator to support 65 6.5
Nut, turbocharger to exhaust manifold 25 2.5
Screw, thermostat water outlet pipe 18 1.8
Nut, power steering pump 35 3.5
M6 screw, vacuum pump 12 1.2
M8 flanged screw, vacuum pump 18 1.8
Plug, auxiliary units front cover 35 3.5
Self-locking nut, tappets cover 10 1
Nut fixing top tensioner bearing mount 30 3
Nut fixing bottom tensioner mount 25 5
Nut fixing bottom tensioner bearing 40 4
Screw to secure the piping of oil exiting turbocharger 10 1
Union, turbocharger oil delivery pipe 38 3.8
Flanged screw, oil drain mounting to lower crankcase 40 4
Oil pipe fitting, to crankcase main duct 45 4.5
Fastening, oil pressure sender and switch to pipe fitting 40 4
Flanged screw, gas exhaust pipe to turbocharger 25 2.5
Nut, thermostarter plug 35 3.5
Fastening, thermostarter connection to plug 22 2,2
Fastening, solenoid valve union 20 2
Screws, heat exchanger pipes to upper crankcase 40 4
Water transmitter fixing M16x1.5 (conical) 30 3
Crankcase water drain pipe union 35 3.5
Nut, water inlet line to pump 25 2.5
Screw, cover to thermostat box 18 1.8
Thermometric transmitter fixing - M8x1.25 10 1
Thermometric transmitter fixing - M12x1.5 30 3
Thermometric transmitter fixing - M14x1.5 25 2.5
M10x1.25 50 c.s. hex screw to secure injector bracket 40 4
M12x1.5 fitting for diesel outlet from high-pressure pump 22 2.2
M12x1.5 fitting for diesel inlet on hydraulic accumulator (rail) 22 2.2
M14x1.5 fitting for diesel outlet from hydraulic accumulator (rail) 22 2.2
M12x1.5 fitting for diesel inlet on electro-injector 22 2.2
5-way fixing coupling M16x1.5 on overpressure valve (rail), if applicable 27 2.7
Screw to secure 4-way pipe fitting on hydraulic accumulator (rail) 25 2,5
M16 x1.5 pipe fitting to secure fuel recovery piping to hydraulic accumulator (rail) 27 2,7
M8 nut securing hydraulic accumulator (rail) on cylinder head 25 2.5
M8 nut securing bottom soundproof cover on hydraulic accumulator (rail) 18 1.8
M8 nut securing high-pressure pump on spacer 25 2.5
Fuel pressure sensor fixing on hydraulic accumulator (rail) 35 3.5
Flow limiter fixing on hydraulic accumulator, if applicable 45 4.5
Pressure relief valve fixing on hydraulic accumulator (rail) 45 4.5
* Coat thread with IVECO 1905683 sealing compound before assembly
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
Engine auxiliary units
Screw, fan distance piece to electromagnetic pulley 13 ± 1 1.3 ± 0.1
Screw, fan to distance piece 6 ± 0,6 0.6
Screw, starter motor 41 ± 4 4.1 ± 0.4
Screw to secure flywheel r.p.m. sensor 10 1
Screw to secure timing detector sensor 7.5 0.7
Securing conic pipe fitting M16x1.5 for water delivery from cylinder head to cab heater 18 1.8
Flanged screw M10x1.25 to secure the piping of water entering heat exchanger 40 4
Flanged screw M12x1.25 to secure the piping of water entering heat exchanger 50 5
Flanged screw M8x1.25 to secure the piping of water entering heat exchanger 18 1.8
Screw or nut to secure exhaust manifold bracket 40 4
Cap M10x1.25 of breather pipe on thermostat body 10 1
Socket conic threaded cap M16x1.5 * 25 2.5
M12x1.5 cap 30 3
Screw to secure compressor support 65 6.5
Engine assembly suspension
M12 screw fixing bracket for flexible plug to engine 90 ÷ 74 9 ÷ 7.4
M10 screw fixing bracket for flexible plug to frame 58 ÷ 47 5.8 ÷ 4.7
M12 screw fixing bracket for flexible plug to frame 101 ÷ 83 10.1 ÷ 8.3
M12 self-locking nut fixing flexible plug to brackets 49 4.9
Screw securing rear bracket supporting gearbox 35 3.5
Nut securing flexible plug to rear bracket supporting gearbox 49 4.9
Screw securing flexible plug to cross member 20 2
M12 screw securing cross member to frame 101 ÷ 83 10.1 ÷ 8.3
* Apply LOCTITE 506 on thread
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
TOOL NO. DESCRIPTION
99305019 Box with full set of tools for regrinding valve seats
99305047 Appliance to check spring loads
99317915 Set of three box wrenches (14-17-19 mm)
Telescopic rotary stand to overhaul units

99322205 (700 daN bearing capacity, 120 daN/m torque)
99340035 Extractor for electromagnetic pulley
99340205 Extractor for electromagnetic pulley
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
99342138 Puller for injection pump coupling joint
99348004 Universal extractor for interiors from 5 to 70 mm
Wrench for camshaft rotation when adjusting valve clearance

99350114 (bench operation)
99355040 Bushing (17 mm) to remove engine oil level sensor from crankcase
99360091 Tool to remove cartridge filters
99360183 Pliers for mounting rings on engine pistons
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99360268 Tool for removing and refitting engine valves
99360288 Punch for removing valve guides
99360291 Punch for refitting valve guides (use with 99360288)
99360292 Keying device for mounting gasket on valve guide
99360306 Tool to retain engine flywheel
Tool retaining tappets to replace plate when adjusting valve

99360309 clearance
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
Mounting for securing injection pump control assembly and auxiliary

99360363 assemblies when overhauling at the bench
99360508 Rings for lifting cylinder blocks
99360550 Arm for removing and refitting engine
99360605 Band to insert standard and oversized pistons into the cylinders
99360607 Parts to check oil pump drive shaft driving
99360608 Tool for setting the timing gears
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99361004 Mounting to support cylinder head when adjusting tappets
99361029 Brackets securing engine to rotary stand 99322205
99365014 Adjustable mounting
99365147 Injection pump coupling joint check wrench
99365160 Wrench (17 mm) to remove injector pipes
99367121 Vacuum and pressure hand pump
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
99370006 Interchangeable grip for punches
Dial gauge base to check piston balancing and pre-chamber plug

99370415 protrusion
Keying device to mount gasket on camshaft front cover and on auxiliary

99374336 member assembly (use with 99370006)
99387001 Pliers to recover valve clearance plates
99389829 Torque wrench 9x12 (5-60 Nm)
99389833 Torque wrench
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99390310 Valve guide smoothers
99394038 Milling cutter to regrind injector seat (8140.63 engine excluded)
99395098 Tool for checking piston TDC (to be used with 99395603)
99395214 Gauge to position engine flywheel
Pair of meters for angular tightening with square 1/2” and 3/4”
99395216 connection
99395220 Universal goniometer/inclinometer
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
99395363 Complete square to check for connecting rod distortion
99395603 Dial gauge (0 ÷ 5 mm)
99395604 Dial gauge (0 ÷ 10 mm)
99395687 Bore meter (50 ÷ 178 mm)
99395849 Belt tension tester (10.0 to 600 Hz frequency)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

OVERHAULING ENGINE
540110 DISASSEMBLING THE ENGINE AT
THE BENCH Block the turbocharger air/exhaust gas inlets and
Figure 30 ! outlet to prevent foreign bodies getting inside.
Fit the brackets 99361029 to the crankcase and use these to

secure the engine to the rotary stand 99322205. Drain the
oil from the engine by removing the plug from the oil sump.
Remove the fan from the electromagnetic coupling.
Figure 32
62854
If the engine cable was not removed, disconnect its electrical

connections from: thermostat temperature sensor, revs.
sensor, engine rpm sensor, pressure regulator, 3rd pumping
element cut-out device, rail pressure sensor, intake manifold
air pressure/temperature sensor.
Remove the side cover, disconnect electrical connections
from injectors and disconnect the engine cable.
Remove pipe (2) from hose (1).
To be able to fit the brackets 99361029 onto the crankcase 62855
to secure the engine to the stand for overhauling, on the
left-hand side of the engine it is necessary to: Remove pipe (10) connection (8) from connection (9).
- disconnect the pipe (3) from the heat exchanger (4); Remove screws (5) and pipe (10) clamps fastening nut (11).
- disconnect the pipe (7) from the side cover (5); Remove nuts (4) and disconnect duct (6) including solenoid
- take out the screws (6 and 9) and remove the pipe (10) valve (2), glow plug (3) and pipe (10) from intake manifold
complete with pipes (3 and 7); (1), remove soundproof cover (7).
- disconnect the pipe (11) from the crankcase fitting.;
- disconnect the pipe (2) from the fillpipe (1);
- remove the oil vapour condenser (8) complete with
pipes (2 and 11).
Figure 33
Figure 31
52162
On the right-hand side: 62856
- disconnect the pipe (2) from the crankcase, taking out Press clips (5) in the direction shown by the arrow and
the fixing screw (6) and the fitting complete with oil disconnect fuel recovery pipe connection (3) from injectors
pressure transmitter (8); (4). Disconnect pipe (2) from high pressure pump (1).
- take out the threaded plug (7); Hold the pressure relief valve (7) and remove hose (9) with
- take out the screw (10) and disconnect the fitting (9) connection (8) including pipe (3), plug (6) and pipe (2).
from under the crankcase;
- take out the nuts (1) and remove the exhaust manifold
(3) from the cylinder head complete with turbocharger
(4) and oil pipes (2 and 5).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 34 Figure 36
62857 52168
Disconnect the fuel pipes (2) from the electro-injectors (1) Disconnect: rail (3), high pressure pump (4), oil dipstick pipe
and from the hydraulic accumulator (rail) (7) as follows. (2) and oil filler (1).
Keeping the hexagon (4) of the electro-injector (1) stationary
with a wrench, undo the coupling (3) using the wrench
99365160.
Keeping the hexagon (6) of the flow limiting valve stationary,
if applicable, unscrew the coupling (5) and disconnect the fuel
pipe (2).
Take out the screws (8) fixing the brackets (9) retaining the
electro-injectors (1).
Disconnect the electro-injectors (1) from the cylinder head.
NOTE For engine 8140.43S only.

Since engine No. 3089322, a rail with the same
configuration but without flow limiters and
pressure relief valve has been mounted. The same
prescriptions specified for the previous one shall be Figure 37
complied with.
Figure 35
52163
Remove the screw (2) fastening the pipe (4 and 1) bracket

(3) to the intake manifold (5).
62858 Remove the pipe (4) from the cylinder head.
Remove the nuts (7) fastening the pipe (1) to the water
Disconnect the pipe (6) from the high-pressure pump (3) and pump (6).
from the hydraulic accumulator (rail) (7). Remove the screw (9) fastening the pipe (8) to the bedplate.
NOTE Stop high pressure pump hexagon (4) by means of

the proper wrench when loosening connection
(5).
Remove nuts (2) and then remove protection (1).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 38 Figure 41
62859
50659
Disconnect the pipe (4) from the heat exchanger (3). Take
out the screw (1 and 5) and disconnect the pipe (2) complete Using tool 99360306 (3), applied as shown in the figure, stop
with pipes (1 and 8, Figure 33) from the crankcase base. crankshaft rotation and loosen the screws (1) securing the
flywheel (2). Take out the screws (5), remove the mounting
(6) complete with speed sensor (4).
Figure 39
Figure 42
52169
Remove the intake manifold (1), tappet cover (4) complete 50660
with speed sensor (2). Recover the brackets (5) and the
timing cover (3). Take out the screw securing the pulley (1) to the crankshaft.
disconnect the pulley (1) from the crankshaft and the spacer,
if any.
Figure 40
Figure 43
50661
50658
Loosen gear fixing screws (1 and 7). Fit proper wrench (5)
Using the right wrench on the automatic tightener (2), between push rod (3) and belt tightener cylinder (4).
slacken the tension of the belt (1) and remove it. Remove nut (2). Remove lower cover (6) and timing belt (8).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 44 Figure 46
50662
Remove the fixed tightener mounting (5) and the guard

50664
beneath (6).
Remove the thermostat box (1) complete with switches (2 With a suitable plate (1) applied as shown in the figure, block
and 3) and pipe (4). rotation of the electromagnetic pulley (2), unscrew the nut
(3) securing the hub (4) clockwise and remove the hub.
NOTE The hub nut (3) has a left-hand thread.
Figure 45 Figure 47
50663
50665
Unscrew the screws (1) securing the cylinder head (2) and
remove it with its gasket. Remove the key (1) and washer (3) from the water pump
shaft (2).
Extract the pulley (9) from the water pump shaft (2).
NOTE Check the protrusion of the pistons as described Take out the nuts (7) and extract the electromagnetic
in the relevant paragraph to check the possibility of coupling (8).
facing the crankcase if it has deformed.
Remove the mounting (5) complete with alternator (4) from
the crankcase and from the water pump (2).
Remove the water pump (2).
Remove the adjustable tightener (6).
Remove the crankshaft front cover (10).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 48
NOTE To be able to remove the connecting rod cap (1,
Figure 50) of the piston No. 4, take it to TDC.
Figure 51
50666
Remove screws (2) and disconnect auxiliary component unit

(1) including hydraulic power steering pump (3), vacuum
device (4), oil filter (6) and heat exchanger (5).
Figure 49
18830
Take out the screws fixing the connect rod caps, remove
them and extract the pistons (1) from the top of the crank-
case.
NOTE Keep the half bearings in their respective housings

because, if utilized, they must be fitted in the same
50667 position they were in when dismantled.
Turn the engine 180º and take out the oil sump (1).
Take out the engine oil suction rose (2).
Figure 50
Figure 52
41090
Take out the tool 99360306 for blocking flywheel rotation.

Turn the engine 90º and loosen the screws (3) of the 41091
connecting rod caps (1) with the appropriate wrench (2). Using the wrench (3), take out the screws (2) securing the
engine flywheel (1) and remove it from the crankshaft.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 53
NOTE At removal, take note of the assembling position of
lower and upper crankshaft half bearings since if re-
used they shall be refitted in the same position.
Figure 56
50668
Remove the crankshaft rear cover (1) from the crankcase,

complete with oil seal.
Figure 54
23023
Remove crankshaft (1) using a hoist and a suitable rope.
18833
Unscrew lower/upper crankcase fastening screws (1) using Figure 57

wrench (2).
Figure 55
19183
Recover main half bearings (2).

Straighten safety plate bends and remove oil spray nozzles
23022 (1).
Remove lower crankcase (1) with its gasket.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

REPAIR OPERATIONS Measurements shall be taken for each cylinder, at three

CYLINDER BLOCK different heights on the barrel and on two perpendicular
surfaces: the first one parallel to engine longitudinal axis (A)
Checks and measurements and the other one perpendicular (B); max. wear is generally
found on this latter surface and in correspondence with the
Figure 58 first measurement.
Bore/recondition and plateau finish by honing cylinder barrels
if ovalization, excessive taper or any sign of wear are found.
Cylinder barrel reboring shall be performed according to the
diameter of spare pistons oversized by 0.4 mm of rated value
and prescribed assembling clearance. Should cylinder barrel
be bored to higher diameter, oversize shall be performed by
fitting a spare cylinder barrel and proceeding as described in
the relevant chapter.
Figure 60
18836 18837
Once engine is dismantled, clean cylinder-crankcase group

accurately.
For handling cylinder group use rings 99365508.
Make sure crankcase has no cracks.
Check working plug conditions. If rusted or not perfectly
tightening, replace them.
Check cylinder liner surfaces: they should not show any
traces of binding, scoring, ovality or excessive taper.
The inside diameter of the cylinder liners, in order to
ascertain the extent of their ovalization, taper and wear, is
checked with the bore gauge 99395687 (1) fitted with the
dial gauge and reset on the ring gauge (2) of the diameter of
the cylinder liner.
D
NOTE If ring gauge is not available use a micrometer to set
to zero.
With reaming gauge 99395687 (1), equipped with centesimal

comparator set to zero as previously described, check cylin-
der liner inside diameter, to verify the degree of ovality, taper
and wear.
62067
Figure 59 A-B= Main bearing longitudinal axis

* Surface roughness parameters
R1 = 4 ÷ 10 µm
Rz = 3 ÷ 8 µm
1st measurement
Ra = 0.3 ÷ 0.6 µm
W1 < 2 µm
2nd measurement Admitted surface pores with machined cylinder
ZONE B1 = max. stress area between piston
ring/barrel: two non-continuos pores, C
max. 0.5 x 0.5 admitted
100%
3rd measurement ZONE B2 = area interested by piston ring sliding:
two non-contiguous pores, max
1x0.8 admitted C
61689 100%
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Checking head mating surface on cylinder block

Figure 61 Figure 63
3
WT = 10 - PITCH 5
18839
Make sure mating surface, on cylinder block, does not show SECTION A-A
62068
any deformations.
This check can be done, after removing setscrews (1), with * Engine block surface
a soot-coated surface plate or with a gauged rule (2) and ** Spot-faced surface Ø 111
thickness gauge (3). When levelling is over, reset cylinder barrel spot-facing and
Once deformation areas are detected, flatten supporting sur- bevelling as shown in the figure.
face with a grinder. Check main bearing housings as follows:
- Fit lower crankcase on upper crankcase, without
NOTE Crankcase flattening can be performed only after bearings and gaskets;
being sure that, once the work is completed, piston - tighten fastening screws to specified torque;
protrusion from cylinder liner will not be greater - with a suitable inside diameter comparator, make sure
than specified value. the seat diameter is equal to specified value.
If a greater value is found, replace crankcase.
Spare cylinder barrel assembling
Figure 62
0,4 ÷ 1
61688
B
B = Main bearing longitudinal axis Implement cylinder barrel seats into engine block by boring the latter
at the values shown in the above figure, so as to obtain the average
diameter measured according the methods described in the following
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 64 Figure 65
1st measurement
2nd measurement
WT = 10 - PITCH 5
3rd measurement
61690
Measurements shall be performed for every four barrel seats SECTION A-A
at three different heights and on two perpendicular surfaces:
the first one parallel to engine longitudinal axis (A) and the
62069
other one perpendicular (B) as shown in the diagram.
Average diameter D1med shall be calculated according to * engine block surface - ** spot-faced surface Ø 111 mm
the following formula:
- to prevent breakage, check whether barrel edge is

A (10) + A1(50) + A1(142) + B 1(10) + B 1(50) + B 1(142) perfectly resting on block:
D1 med = 1
6 cylinder barrel shall not protrude by 0.005 above block
bottom.
− 0.05 Otherwise, replace the cylinder barrol.
It shall be 97.500 + 0.11 , the difference between max diam-
eter Dmax and min. diameter Dmin shall be: Dmax - Dmin After driving in the cylinder liners, machine them to the
= ≤ 0.03 mm tolerance and roughness indicated in the “Checks and
measurements” section.
NOTE Value between brackets corresponds to the

measurement point from upper block edge.
Figure 66
After implementing the proper seats, barrel fitting into

cylinder unit shall be performed by hydraulic press and plate
as follows:
- Check whether cylinder barrel outside diameter is equal
to the prescribed value.
Avoid using oil or grease when driving barrels;
- set barrel into block and check whether at 80 mm driving
the load is ≥ 1300 daN;
- proceed with driving and check whether load is ≥ 5000
daN when driving is over;
20767
X=Dm 97.390 ÷ 97.450

Y = barrel outside ∅ 97.470 ÷ 97.500
Z = barrel inside ∅ 92.700 ÷ 92.900
£ 94.402 ÷ 94.432
* Dimension to be obtained after driving the liner into the
crankcase at the end of the work.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

5408 CRANKSHAFT
NOTE It is advisable to record measured values on a table.
540810 Measuring main journals and con- See Figure 68.
necting rods
Figure 67
Undersize classes are of:

0.254 - 0.508 mm.
NOTE Main journals and crank pins must be all ground to

the same undersize.
The performed undersize, on main journal and
crank pins, must be identified by a special printing
applied on the side of crank arm n.1.
For undersized crank pins: letter M
For undersized main journals: letter B
For undersized crank pins and main journals: letter
50709 MB
If any traces of seizing, scoring or excessive ovalitys are de-
tected on main journals and crank pins it is necessary to re-
grind journals (2), measure crank pins with micrometer (1)
in order to determine to which diameter pins must be re-
duced.
Figure 68
RATED RATED
VALUE VALUE
MINIMUM Ø
MAXIMUM Ø
RATED
VALUE
MINIMUM Ø
MAXIMUM Ø
44035
TABLE ON WHICH MEASURED VALUES OF MAIN JOURNALS AND CRANK PINS OF CRANKSHAFT
MUST BE RECORDED
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 69
CRANKCASE, VALVE GEAR SIDE

INTERMEDIATE CRANKCASES
Before
rolling
After rolling After rolling
CRANK PINS CRANKCASE, FLYWHEEL SIDE
Before
After rolling
Before
rolling
rolling
After rolling
44034
MAIN DATA ON MAIN JOURNALS AND ON CRANKS PINS
NOTE Since when reducing by 0.254 or 0.508 mm crank pin - rolling turns: 3 approaching, 12 actual, 3 output turns
or main journal diameters, the rolled section of their
- rolling speed: 56 rev/min
side grooves can be damaged, grooves shall be
turned according to data shown in the figure and - crank pin groove depth reduction after rolling: 0.15 ÷
rolling shall be performed according to the following 0.30 * mm
specifications.
- main journal groove depth reduction after rolling: 0.15
Rolling force: ÷ 0.35 * mm
- 1st main journal 925 ± 25 daN
- 2nd - 3rd - 4th - 5th main journal 1850 ± 50 daN * measured with 2.5 mm diameter gauged pins
- 1st - 4th crank pin 1850 ± 50 daN
- 2nd- 3rd crank pin 2040 ± 50 daN
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Checking crankshaft
Figure 70
45065
CRANKSHAFT MAIN TOLERANCES
TOLERANCES CHARACTERISTIC SUBJECT TO TOLERANCE GRAPHIC SYMBOL

Circularity ○
OF SHAPE
Taper
Parallelism
OF ORIENTATION
Perpendicularity ⊥
OF POSITION Concentricity
Circular oscillation ↗
OF OSCILLATION
Total oscillation ↗↗
CLASS OF IMPORTANCE ATTRIBUTED TO PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS GRAPHIC SYMBOL

CRITICAL E
IMPORTANT ⊕
SECONDARY ⊝
Figure 71 NOTE The checks of tolerances indicated in the figures

must be carried out after grinding crankshaft pins,
if necessary.
SYMMETRY OF MAIN JOURNALS AND CRANK PINS

1. Crank pins
Stroke 100 ± 0,125
2. Main Journals
3. Normal position.
Once grinding is completed, observe the following notices:
- Round the burr edges of main journals and crank pins
lubricating holes;
- remove oil duct sealing plugs, reface seats with a suitable
miller to remove any calking, clean ducts accurately, fit
plugs using a suitable tool (1, Figure 72) and calk them
on the relevant seats;
- make sure the plugs do not show any leakage under an
45066
inner pressure of 1.5 bars.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Replacing gearbox input shaft centering ring Figure 74
Figure 72
18569
By means of ring 99360508 (1) lift engine block (2) and

secure it on rotating stand 99322205 with clamps 99361029
(3).
Figure 75
61886
Use puller 99348004 to remove drive shaft (3) gearbox input

shaft centering ring (2).
Use a generic tool for refitting.
Replacing timing control gear
18919
Figure 73
Rotate engine block, fit oil spray nozzles (2) with the
respective safety plates and tighten screws with a torque
wrench (1) to specified torque.
Bend safety plates on screws.
Assembling main bearings

Figure 76
61712
Should timing gear toothing be damaged or worn, proceed

with removal as follows:
- mill gear (1) in the two points indicated by the arrows,
heat the gear to a temperature not exceeding 350 °C,
then take out the gear by extractor 99348001 (2) and
block (3).
To fit the new gear on the drive shaft, the gear shall be heated 18920
so that ≥ 200 ºC temperature difference is present between
the two parts and gear keyhole shall coincide with shaft
spline. NOTE Having not found the need to replace small end
After fitting, under 900 N load, gear must not be withdrawn bearings, refit them in the same order and position
from shaft. they were before being dismantled.
NOTE Max. gear heating temperature is 350°C. Small end bearings (1) are supplied as spare parts, with an
undersized inside diameter of 0.254 - 0.508 mm.
NOTE Do not perform any adaptation on bearings.

ENGINE ASSEMBLY
When fitting the engine, replace always: safety spring rings,
sealing rings and gaskets. Put the main bearing shells (1) with the lubrication hole into
their respective seats.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

540811 Measuring main journals assembly Figure 80

clearances
Figure 77
23034
- Screw and tighten screws (2) according to the following

two stages:
- 1st stage: by torque wrench, to 50 ± 5 Nm;
- 2nd stage: 90º ± 5º angle tightening according to the
23023
following diagram.
Fit crankshaft (1).
Check the clearance between crankshaft main journals and
Figure 81
respective bearings, proceeding as follows:
- clean carefully the journals;
- apply a calibrated wire on main journals.
Figure 78
6447
A. Valve gear side - B. Flywheel side
Tightening order diagram of lower/upper crankcase fastening
screws.
Figure 82
18922
- Set rubber sealing gaskets (1) and small end bearings (2)
on lower crankcase.
Figure 79
18518
- Dismantle lower crankcase.
The clearance between small end bearings is calculated by
comparing the width the calibrated wire has reached, in the
point of greater deflection, with the scale graduation
indicated on the envelope containing the calibrated wire.
The numbers indicated on the scale indicate the coupling
18923
clearance, in millimetres, that must be of 0.032 ÷ 0.102 mm.
If a clearance different than that specified is found, replace half
- Fit the lower crankcase on the upper crankcase, verifying bearings and repeat the check; once the prescribed clearance
that reference marks (1) correspond, since the parts is obtained, lubricate small end bearings and fit lower
component crankcase are not interchangeable. crankcase definitively, tightening fastening screws as
described previously.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Checking crankshaft end float 540460 Rear crankshaft cover

Figure 85
Figure 83
18519 45068
End float check is carried out by placing a magnetic-base dial

gauge (1) on crankshaft (2), as shown in the figure; the normal NOTE The rear (3) and front (1, Figure 86) covers of the
assembly clearance is of 0.060-0.310 mm. crankshaft have the “ROTOSTAT” type gasket
If a greater clearance is found replace rear small end thrust integrated.
bearings and repeat float check between crankshaft pins and The covers are supplied as spare parts together
small end bearings. with the chock (2). The chock (2) must not be
removed from the gasket until this has been fitted
on the crankshaft.
Checking alignment pulley crankshaft In addition, the thickness of the cover is not the
same as that of the first assembly.
This is to prevent its lip from getting onto the shank
Figure 84 of the crankshaft in exactly the same position where
it could be worn.
Trim any gasket excess in the points indicated by the arrows.

Lubricate crankshaft (1) shank. Fit rear gasket (3) and tighten
screws to specified torque. Remove chock (2).
540440 Front crankshaft cover
Figure 86
50669
Push the crankshaft (1) towards the flywheel side so as to

keep the crankshaft end in contact with the thrust bearing.
In these conditions, measure the distance X between the
crankcase (3) and the end of the gear (2). If the distance X
is 53.82 ÷ 54.55 , it is necessary to place a spacer n 98428488 46668
(5) (thickness 0.5 ± 0.05 mm) between the gear (2) and the
pulley (4 or 6). If the distance X is 54.56 ÷ 55.12, don’t apply
the spacer. Cut the exceeding seal in the point shown by arrows.
Mount the pulley (4), (engine without air-conditioner Lubricate drive shaft shank. Fit front cover (1) and tighten
compressor) or (6), (engine with air-conditioner fixing screws (3) to the specified torque. Remove chock (2).
compressor).
Measure the distance Y or Y1 between the end of the pulley
(4 or 6) and the crankcase at the two extreme positions of
crankshaft end float.
Y = 89.67 ÷ 91.03 mm NOTE The remaining fixing screws should be mounted
Y1 = 107.17 ÷ 108.53 mm after positioning the belt guard.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

540850 ENGINE FLYWHEEL

Figure 87 5408 CONNECTING ROD - PISTON AS-
SEMBLY
Figure 89
50670
Make sure there are no blisters, cuts or damage of any kind

anywhere on the surface of the flywheel (1) shown by the 50671
arrow, otherwise replace flywheel.
Check clutch disk bearing surface. If it shows any scoring it is CONNECTING ROD - PISTON ASSEMBLY
necessary to lathe-shape it. 1. Piston - 2. Pin - 3. Split ring - 4. Sealing ring -
5. Oil scraper ring - 6. Slotted oil scraper ring with spiral
spring - 7. Connecting rod body - 8. Half bearings -
NOTE Flywheel rated thickness is 53 mm. 9. Connecting rod cap - 10. Cap fastening screws.
Check pistons: they must not show any trace of seizing,
scoring, cracks or excessive wear, otherwise replace them.
540852 Replacing bearing supporting gear-
box input shaft
Gearbox input shaft supporting bearing (3) dismantling and Figure 90

refitting is carried out by means of a common punch.
540853 Replacing engine flywheel ring gear

Check the state of the teeth of the ring gear (2). If any teeth
are broken or excessively worn, remove it from the flywheel
(1) with a general-purpose punch and fit the new one, after
heating it to a temperature of 150ºC for 15 ÷ 20 min. The
bevel, made on the internal diameter of the ring, must be
facing towards the flywheel.
Figure 88
41097
Remove split rings (1) from piston (2) with pliers 99360183
(3).
Figure 91
41132
Fit engine flywheel (1) without tightening fixing screws (2).

For final screw (2) tightening see chapter ”Flywheel setting”.
NOTE Before reusing flywheel fastening screws verify with

a micrometer that threading diameter of the
41098
screws is not less than 10.8 mm in any point,
otherwise replace them. Remove piston (1) from connecting rod by removing split
ring (2) and extracting pin (3).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 92
60’
74944
MAIN DATA FOR KS PISTON, PINS AND PISTON RINGS - ENGINES 8140.43B/R
*Measured on the diameter of 91.4 mm.
Figure 93
60’
74945
MAIN DATA FOR MONDIAL PISTON, PINS AND PISTON RINGS - ENGINES 8140.43B/R
Figure 94
60’
74946
MAIN DATA ON KS - MONDIAL PISTONS, PINS AND SPRING RINGS -

ENGINES 8140.43N/S
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

540840 Pistons 540841 Piston gudgeon pins

Measuring the pistons diameter
Figure 97
Figure 95
18857
41101
Measurements of piston gudgeon pin diameter (1) with a

Measure piston diameter (1), with a micrometer (2), to micrometer (2).
determine assembly clearance; measured diameter value
must be equal to that indicated in the table of page 43.
NOTE Spare pistons have standard diameter with 0.4 mm

oversize and include rings, pin and safety rings.
Conditions for correct pin-piston coupling
Figure 98
Figure 96
41103
41102
Lubricate pin (1) and the relevant seat on piston (2) hubs
The clearance between piston and cylinder liner can be also with engine oil; piston must allow to be inserted with a slight
checked by means of a thickness gauge (1), as shown in this finger pressure and it should not come out by gravity.
figure.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

540842 Piston rings Figure 102

Figure 99
74947 41104
The piston rings (1st slot) and oil scraper rings (2nd slot) have DIAGRAM FOR MEASURING THE CLEARANCE
TOP etched on them: this should be facing upwards when BETWEEN THE FIRST PISTON SLOT AND THE
they are fitted on the piston. PISTON RING
1. 1st piston slot - 2. Piston ring - 3. Cylinder barrel
Figure 100
Using a feeler gauge (1, Figure 101) check the clearance (X)
between the ring (2) and the slot (1); this clearance must be
of the prescribed value.
16552
Check piston ring (2) thickness with a micrometer (1).
Figure 103
Figure 101
74948
41105
Checking the clearance between the V-ring (2) 1st slot and Check the clearance between the seal rings (2) of the 2nd and
the associated slot on the piston with a feeler gauge (1) as 3rd slot and the associated seats on the piston (3) with the
follows. Insert the piston into the cylinder barrel so that the feeler gauge (1).
ring (2) comes approximately half way out of it.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 104 Spare connecting rods are supplied with 60.341 ÷ 60.348
head diameter marked with letter O and load class identified
with number 33.
1 Material removal is not admitted.
540834 Bushes
18858
Checking, with a thickness gauge (1), the opening between Make sure that bushing, in connecting rod small end, is not
piston ring ends (2), introduced in cylinder liner. loose and free from any scoring and traces of seizure,
otherwise replace it.
540830 Connecting rods Dismantling and refitting are performed with a suitable
punch.
Figure 105 When driving, check accurately that oil flow holes, on bushing
and connecting rod small end, coincide.
With reamer reface bushing so as to obtain 32.010 ÷ 32.020
mm diameter.
Checking connecting rod for distortion

Figure 106
49073
MAIN DATA FOR CONNECTING ROD, BUSHING,

PISTON PIN AND HALF BEARINGS
* Internal diameter to be obtained after driving into the
connecting rod small end and regrinding with reamer.
** Cannot be measured in free state.
• ∅ of the connected rod supplied as a spare
NOTE Connecting rods are marked as follows:
- body and cap with a number identifying the
coupling;
- Connecting rod cap with a letter: O or X identifying the
diameter class for connecting rod head mounted in 61696
production;
- connecting rod cap with a number identifying the load Use tool 99395363 (5) to check connecting rod (1) axes
class for the connecting rod mounted in production; parallelism and proceed as follows:
- it could also be marked with the corresponding cylinder - fit connecting rod (1) on tool 99395363 (5) chuck and
number. lock it by screw (4);
In case of replacement, the new connecting rod shall be
marked with the same numbers and letters as the old one. - set chuck (3) on V-prisms and rest connecting rod (1)
on stop bar (2).
Numbering shall be performed on the opposite side to half
bearing retaining slots.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Checking torsion
Figure 107 Assembling connecting rod - piston assembly
Coupling connecting rod - pistons
Figure 109
41107
Etched on the top of the piston are, at reference (1): the type
61694
of engine, selection of the class and supplier*; at reference
(2): the direction for fitting the piston in the cylinder barrel;
Check connecting rod (5) torsion by comparing the two (3), mark on testing adhesion of 1st slot insert; at reference
piston pin (3) points (A and B) on connecting rod axis (4): adhesive label with the numerical code for optical reading
horizontal surface. of the type of engine and class selection.
Position dial gauge (2) support (1) so that dial gauge is Figure 110
precharged by approx. 0.5 mm on piston pin (3) on point A
and set dial gauge (2) to zero. Move chuck (4) with
connecting rod (5) and compare the difference, if any, on the
opposite side (B) of piston pin (3): the difference between A
and B shall not exceed 0.08 mm.
Checking bending
Figure 108
45070
Fit piston (1) to connecting rod (2) so as piston assembly

reference and connecting rod numbers (3) can be seen as
shown in the figure.
Figure 111
61695
Check connecting rod (5) bending by comparing two piston

pin (3) points C and D on vertical connecting rod axis. Set dial
gauge (2) vertical support (1) on piston pin (3) point C.
Move connecting rod forward and backward searching the
highest piston pin position and set dial gauge (2) to zero when
finding this condition.
Move chuck and connecting rod (5) and repeat the above
operation on piston pin (3) point D. The difference between
points C and D shall not exceed 0.08 mm.
41840
Set piston (1) on connecting rod, fit pin (3) and secure it with
piston rings (2).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Checking for connecting rod - piston distortion Assembling connecting rod - piston assemblies
in cylinder barrels
Figure 112
Figure 114
18863
Lubricated pistons correctly, including piston rings and

cylinder liner interiors.
By means of ring clamp 99360605 (2) fit connecting
rod-piston assemblies (1) into cylinder liners, checking that:
61697 - the number of each connecting rod corresponds to cap
After assembling connecting rod-piston assembly, use tool fitting number.
99395363 (8) to check squaring as follows:
- fit connecting rod (7) and piston (3) on tool 99395363 Figure 115
(8) chuck (4) and lock it by screw (5);
- set connecting rod (7) on bar (6);
- position dial gauge (2) support (1) so that dial gauge is
set on piston point A, with 0.5 mm preload and set dial
gauge (2) to zero;
- move chuck (4) so that dial gauge (2) is set on piston (3)
point B and check for any deviation.
Assembling piston rings

Figure 113 45071
DIAGRAM FOR CONNECTING ROD-PISTON

ASSEMBLY FITTING INTO CYLINDER
1. Piston - 2. Accessory components group - 3. Number
printing area - A. Indirect injection engine piston
(prechamber) - *Piston crown cavity - B. Direct injection
engine piston
- piston ring openings are 120° offset one another;
- all pistons are of same weight;
- the symbol printed on the piston crown is directed
towards flywheel, or the recess on the piston skirt
41097
corresponds to the position of oil spray nozzles.
Fit piston rings (1) on piston (2), using pliers 99360183 (3).
NOTE Having not found any need to replace main

NOTE The piston rings for the 1st and 2nd slot must be bearings, it is required to refit them in the same
fitted with the word “TOP” facing upwards. order and position they were when dismantled.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

540831 Measuring connecting rod assembly

clearance NOTE Connecting rod caps fastening screws must be
replaced with new ones, when fitted definitively.
Figure 116
Check manually that connecting rods slide axially on

crankshaft pins.
1
2
3
4 Checking piston protrusion
Figure 118
18534
To measure clearance carry out the following operations:

- clean carefully the parts and remove any oil traces;
- place a cut down size of calibrated wire (3) on crankshaft
pins (4).
Figure 117
23598
1
α
Once connecting rods-pistons assemblies fitting is
2 completed, check for piston (1) protrusion at T.D.C. with
respect to upper crankcase surface, with thickness gauge (3)
and calibrated rule (2).
In connection with measured protrusion, choose cylinder
18927 head replacement gasket, according to the following table.
- Fit connecting rod caps (2) with relevant half bearings.
NOTE The fitting of connecting rod cap of cylinder n. 4 is Piston average Cylinder head gasket thickness*
practicable only when piston is at T.D.C. protrusion Free Fitted
0.61 ÷ 0.80 1.48 ÷ 1.62 ~ 1.40
0.40 ÷ 0.60 1.23 ÷ 1.35 ~ 1.20
- Tighten screws, previously lubricated with UTDM oil,
with torque wrench (1) to torque of 50 Nm + angle of
63° ± 3°;
NOTE For angular closing use tool 99395216.

NOTE * Thickness of cylinder head gasket is calculated on
the basis of maximum piston protrusion from the
- Remove cap (2) and determine existing clearance, by crankcase measured on all four pistons.
comparing calibrated wire width (3, Figure 116) with
graduation of scale indicated on envelope (2, Figure 116) The difference between minimum and maximum
containing such a wire. If a clearance other than the one protrusion of the four pistons should be equal to
specified is found, replace half bearings and repeat check. or less than 0.200 mm.
Once prescribed clearance is obtained, lubricate The cylinder head gasket included in the engine
connecting rod half bearings and fit them definitively by overhauling spare parts kit is supplied in its
tightening connecting rod caps fastening screws as maximum size. Obviously, it can also be obtained
described. in other sizes, as required.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

540850 Flywheel adjustment Figure 120

Figure 119
41135
Apply tool 99360306 (3).
Tighten flywheel (1) fastening screws (2) in two stages:
41134
- 1st stage: tightening with torque wrench to torque
Make sure flywheel fastening screws (4) are slack. 30 ± 3 Nm;
Apply gauge 99395214 (3) to engine crankcase. - 2nd stage: closing with 90° ± 2° angle.
Rotate crankshaft so as to set piston (1) to T.D.C.
Rotate crankshaft in direction opposite to that of rotation of
~ 90° (89° 25’).
With the special dial gauge (2), determine exact balance NOTE The angle closing is performed with tool 99395216
point of pistons of cylinders 1 and 2, operating as follows: (4).
set to zero dial gauge (2) on piston of cylinder n.1;
move dial gauge so set to zero, on piston of cylinder n. 2 and
record deviation.
If no deviation is found, it means that pistons of cylinders 1
and 2 are perfectly balanced. In the opposite case, share out Figure 121
halved value of measured deviation, by rotating crankshaft
conveniently.
Example:
- If deviation is in default, i.e.: 0.2 mm before zero setting point,
it is required to rotate crankshaft in opposite direction to that
of rotation, so that deviation is halved, that is, 0.1 mm.
- If deviation is in excess, i.e. 0.2 mm after zero setting point,
it is required to rotate crankshaft in its direction of rotation
of ~ 1/4 of turn, to recover crank mechanism clearances,
then invert rotation direction until deviation is halved, that is,
0.1 mm.
Once balance of pistons is so determined, without moving
crankshaft, direct flywheel in such a way that pin of tool
99395214 (3) is inserted into flywheel milling (→).
Slightly tighten screws (4).
Remove tool 99395214. 41825
Then tighten flywheel fastening screws (4) according to
procedures described in the following figure. Rotate the engine, fit oil suction strainer (1), place sealing ring
(2) and fit oil sump.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

560610 CYLINDER HEADS

541210 Disassembling camshaft Figure 124
Figure 122
3 18868
18876 Measure camshaft pins (2) diameter with a micrometer (1),

and with an inside micrometer gauge the diameter of the hole
Set tool 99361004 on adjustable support 99365014 and defined by the union of caps to the relevant supports on
secure cylinder head on said support. cylinder head, that should be 0.035 ÷ 0.081 mm. If not so,
Remove cover (3), unscrew camshaft (2) caps (1) fastening replace concerned parts.
nuts, remove caps and shaft.
If it is necessary to replace the basin plugs on the ends of the
camshaft, use a suitable punch for removal - refitting.
NOTE To avoid bending the camshaft too much, loosen
the nuts fixing the caps (1) gradually and evenly.
NOTE Before mounting the plugs, apply sealant on their
sealing surfaces.
Checks
The surfaces of the shaft support pins and of the cams must
be ultra-smooth. If they show signs of seizure and scoring,
replace the shaft.
Figure 123
41112
MAIN DATA ON CAMSHAFT, RELEVANT SUPPORTS AND CAPS ON CYLINDER HEAD

* Normal diameter - ** 0.2 mm oversize diameter
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

541211 Checking cam lift and journal align- Figure 127

ment
Set shaft on centres and check, with a centesimal dial gauge

placed on central support, that alignment error is no greater
than 0.04 mm, otherwise replace shaft. Also check cams lift:
it should be 10.5 mm for those of outlet and 9.5 mm for
those of inlet; if different values are found replace the shaft.
18891
Check valve tappet (1) diameter, with a micrometer (2) and

with an inside micrometer gauge the diameter of relevant
541224 VALVE TAPPET seats on cylinder head; they must be equal to those indicated
in Figure 125. The normal fitting clearance between the
Figure 125 maximum diameter of valve tappet and that of seats is
0.030 ÷ 0.075 mm.
The replacement of valve tappet, because of an excessive
clearance in the seats, requires to fit oversized valve tappet
43,950 ÷ 43,970 after boring the seats by means of a suitable reamer.
540662 Disassembling valves

Figure 128
44,000 ÷ 44,025
41113
25227
MAIN DATA ON VALVE TAPPET AND RELEVANT Valve dismantling is performed with tool 99360268 (1) by
SEAT ON CYLINDER HEAD exerting a pressure on cap (3) so that, pressing springs (4 and
5) it is allowed to remove lock cones (2). Then remove:
upper cap (3), springs (4 and 5) and lower cap (6).
Figure 126 Repeat operation on all valves.
Overturn cylinder head and remove valves (7).
Figure 129
18877
Extract valve tappet (1) complete with adjusting caps, placing

them in a container according to the order they were when
removed.
Lateral surface of valve tappet must be very smooth and dent
free. 50674
Small dents can be eliminated with a very fine abrasive stone. Using suitable pliers (1), remove the seal rings (2) from the
valve guides.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Checking cylinder head seal 540662 VALVES

Figure 130 Figure 132
18542
INTAKE EXHAUST
Check for hydraulic leak by means of suitable equipment 41115
(1-2-3-4). MAIN DATA ON INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALES AND
Supply water, through pump, heated at ~ 90°C and at 2 ÷ 3 VALVE GUIDES
bar pressure.
Should plug leaks be found, replace them using a proper Removing deposits, refacing and checking
beater for removal/refitting. valves
Figure 133
NOTE Before mounting the plugs, apply water-reacting

sealant on their sealing surfaces.
If there is any leakage from the cylinder head, it must be

replaced.
Checking cylinder head mating surface

18625
Figure 131 Remove any carbonic deposits on valves, using the special
metal brush.
Check that valves do not show any trace of seizure, crack or
burning. Regrind seats on valves, if necessary, with grinder
99301014, removing an amount of material, as little as
possible.
Figure 134
18879
The check of mating surface of the head (1) to cylinder group

is performed by means of a rule (2) and a thickness gauge (3).
If a deformation is found, measure cylinder head thickness,
whose rated value is 150 ± 0.1 mm.
18882
When checking, if the amount of material to be removed for
flattening cylinder head is greater than 0.4 mm, replace
cylinder head. With a micrometer (2) measure valve stem (1): it must be
7.985 ÷ 8.00 mm.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Checking clearance between valve stem and Figure 138

valve guide and centring valves
Figure 135
41116
Valve guide fitting.

Reaming valve guides
41842
Figure 139
These checks are carried out with a magnetic-base dial gauge
(1) set as shown. Assembly clearance is 0.023 ÷ 0.053 mm.
On emptying valve (2) check that centring error is not
greater than 0.03 mm.
540667 VALVE GUIDES
Replacing valve guides
Figure 136
18886
Once valve guides are driven, sleek them with smoothing

tool 99390310 (1).
540661 VALVE SEATS
Regrinding and replacing valve seats
18883
Figure 140
Remove valve guide with punch 99360288 (1).
Figure 137
18887
Check valve seats (2). If any slight scoring or burning is found

regrind them with tool HUNGER 99360419 (1) according to
inclination values specified in Figure 141.
18885
If it is required to replace them, using the same tool and taking
care not to damage the cylinder head, remove as much
Heat cylinder head to 80° ÷ 100°C and with punch material as possible from valve seats, until it is possible to
99360288 (1) equipped with part 99360291 (2) fit new valve extract them from the cylinder head with a punch.
guide (3) previously cooled in liquid nitrogen.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 141
EXHAUST INTAKE
3.6 ÷ 3.7
10.5 ÷ 10.45
REFERENCE 39.7 ∅
REFERENCE 34.8 ∅
18889
MAIN DATA ON VALVE SEATS
18888
Heat cylinder head to 80° ÷ 100°C and, by means of a 18890
suitable punch (1), fit in it the new valve seats (2), previously Fit valves and injectors.
cooled in liquid nitrogen. Check valve sealing and respective seats with tools (1-2).
With tool HUNGER 99360419, regrind valve seats according
to inclination values specified in Figure 141.
Figure 143
Figure 145
50675
18880
Clean injector seats from any deposit, using cutter 99394038 With dial gauge (1) check that, from cylinder head surface,
(1). the hollow of valves and injector (2) protrusion have the
prescribed value.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

540665 VALVE SPRINGS ASSEMBLING CYLINDER HEADS

62071
Should rear cover (1) be removed from cylinder head (3), fit
a new gasket (2) at refitting and tighten fixing nuts to the
specified torque.
62386
Prior to reassembly, test valve spring flexibility by means of

Assembling valves
tool 99305047. Compare load and elastic deformation data Figure 149
with those applying to new springs shown in the following
figure.
Figure 147
41122
Lubricate stem of valves and insert them in the relevant valve

guides.
With tool 99360292 (1) fit sealing ring (2) on intake and
exhaust valve guides (3).
Figure 150
50676
MAIN DATA FOR ADJUSTING CONTROL

VALVES SPRING EXHAUST
EXTERNAL SPRING INTERNAL SPRING

Height Under a load of Height
mm kg mm
H 52 Free H 45.5
41113
H1 38.5 P 43.8  2.5 P1 16.4  1 H1 33.5
Place on cylinder heads: lower cap (6), springs (4 and 5) and
H2 28.5 P1 77.4  4 P1 30  1.5 H2 23.5 upper cap (3); with tool 99360268 (1) press springs (4 and
5) and secure parts to the valve by means of lock cones (2).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Assembling tappets Figure 154

Figure 151
45081
18877 Fit the seal ring (3) together with the chock into the front
Lubricate tappet seats and fit tappets (1) complete with cover (4) using the keying device 99374336 (2) and the grip
adjusting cap, in the same sequence they were before 99370006 (1).
dismantling. Lubricate the shank of the camshaft.
Spread IVECO 1905685 sealant on the mating surface of the
front cover (4) and fit it onto the cylinder head. Tighten the
Assembling camshaft fixing nuts to the prescribed torque.
Remove the chock.
Figure 152
NOTE The seal ring (3) is supplied as a spare together with
the choke; this must not be removed from the seal
ring until the front cover (4) has been fitted on the
cylinder head.
Adjusting tappet clearance

Figure 155
41123
Lubricate supports on camshaft (1) cylinder heads and fit

camshaft.
Fit caps (2) on relevant supports, making sure that the
numbers indicated on caps are turned to the same side as
those indicated on cylinder heads.
Figure 153
6423
VALVE GEAR DIAGRAM

Adjustment of valve tappet clearance must be carried out
accurately so as not to alter the required valve gear diagram,
as would occur if the clearance were greater or lesser than
prescribed.
In fact, an excessive clearance causes noise or delays opening
41124 and advances valve closing, while an insufficient clearance
Screw nuts (1), that fasten caps (2) to cylinder heads, causes the opposite effect; while if the clearance is quite null
gradually and uniformly until bringing caps in contact with the valves always remain a little open with very harmful
cylinder heads. consequences as far as the life of the valves and seats is
Then tighten nuts (1) to prescribed torque. concerned.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

18894
23030
- with gun (3), address a compressed air jet in milling (2)
For adjusting valve tappet clearance proceed as follows: so as to lift adjusting cap (1) to be replaced;
- insert key 99350114 (2) on valve gear control fastening - remove adjusting cap with pliers 99380701.
screws and rotate camshaft until setting valves to closing
position;
- check, with a thickness gauge (1), that clearance
Figure 159
between valve tappets and intake/exhaust cams is
0.5 ± 0.05 mm.
1
2
18895
The thickness value of adjusting caps (1) is printed on one of

their two surfaces. Should this value be illegible, measure it
Figure 157 with a micrometer (2).
On fitting adjusting cap, printed value must be oriented to-
wards valve tappets.
NOTE Valve tappet clearance adjusting caps are supplied

as spare parts with the following thickness: 3,25 -
3,30 - 3,35 - 3,40 -3,45 - 3,50 - 3,55 - 3,60 - 3,65 -
3,70 - 3,72 - 3,75 - 3,77 - 3,80 - 3,82 - 3,85 - 3,87
- 3,90 - 3,92 - 3,95 - 3,97 - 4,00 - 4,05 - 4,10 - 4,15
- 4,20 - 4,25 - 4,30 - 4,35 - 4,40 - 4,45 mm.
23031
If it is necessary to replace the adjusting caps, to obtain the

required operating clearance, proceed as follows: NOTE Having to adjust valve tappet clearance with cylin-
- rotate valve tappets so as milling on edge are directed der heads installed on engine, before compressing
towards intake and exhaust ducts; valve tappet with tool 99360309 (1, Figure 157),
rotate engine with special tool, so as to set intake
- insert tool 99360309 (1), between intake and exhaust valve cam of the cylinder involved in valve tappet
valve tappets, and use it as a lever until valve tappets are adjusting, turned approximately upward; in these
fully compressed; conditions piston will be 10-13 mm from T.D.C.,
thus avoiding piston crawling with valves.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Refitting cylinder head Screw and tighten screws in three consecutive stages
Figure 160 according to the sequence and procedure shown in the
following figure.
NOTE Angle closing is carried out by means of tool

99395216 (1).
Figure 162
6448
61889
Tightening order diagram for cylinder heads fastening screws:
Set cylinder piston 1 to TDC and keep it in this position by
locking engine flywheel (4) rotation and applying tool - 1st step: pre-tightening with torque wrench to torque of
99392214 (3) to block. 60 ± 5 Nm;
This condition is required to set timing. - 2nd step: return to torque of 60 ± 5 Nm;
Check that joining surface of cylinder heads and that on - 3rd step: closing with 180° ± 10° angle.
Do not soil cylinder head gasket.
Place cylinder head gasket (2), according to thickness speci- Figure 163
fied in paragraph ”Checking piston protrusion”, with inscrip-
tion ”ALTO” [top] (1) oriented towards head.
Arrow indicates the point where fitted gasket thickness is
specified.
NOTE It is absolutely necessary to keep gasket sealed in

its packing and to remove it from envelope only a
short time before fitting it.
Figure 161
62072
Fill spaces A between rear cover (6) and cylinder head (5)
with Silastic 732 RTV sealant.
Fit seal (2) on tappet cover (1). Smear tappet cover corners
(⇒) with SILASTIC 732 RTV (approx. 10g). Refit tappet
cover (1) on cylinder head and tighten fixing nuts (7) to the
α specified torque.
Fit pipe and electric cable locking clamps (8) and tighten fixing
nuts (5) to the specified torque.
41144
Fit sensor (4) and support on tappet cover and check air gap
Turn camshaft (2) to close cylinder 1 valves. as described in the relevant chapter.
Refit cylinder head (3). Fit intake manifold (3).
NOTE Before reusing cylinder head fixing screws, check by

micrometer whether screw thread diameter,
measured at any point, is higher than 11.5 mm,
otherwise replace screws.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

543050 AUXILIARY MEMBER ASSEMBLY Figure 166
Figure 164
50678
With a socket head wrench (2) unscrew fittings (3) fastening

heat exchanger (1) to the accessory equipments group (5)
and mounting (4).
50677
Auxiliary components are collected into one support (1) Figure 167
fixed to engine upper block side and operated by the timing
belt which controls the camshaft.
On the mounting there are oil ducts, for lubricating the vari- 1
ous components.
The following components are fitted on said support: injec-
tion pump, oil pump and control valve, servo brake vacuum
pump and power steering pump, double-action oil filter and 2
heat exchanger.
26244
Remove vacuum pump (1) complete with drive joint (2) and
gasket.
Remove oil pump rear cover (3) complete with oil pressure
Disassembling auxiliary member assembly control valve.
50677 50679
Remove the power steering pump (5). Take out the screws
Fit accessory equipments group with screws on support (3) and extract the oil pump control gear (4). Take out the
99360363 (3) previously clamped in a vice. screws (1) and remove the top cover (2).
Unscrew oil filter (2) with tool 99360091 (1).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
543075 Oil pressure control valve Figure 172

Figure 169
41812
26245
Unscrew plug (5), remove spring (4) and control valve con- Remove oil pump driven gear (1).
sisting of piston (3) and barrel (2) from the cover (1).
Check that: piston (3) slides freely into barrel (2) and does
not show any traces of scoring and that spring (4) is not
broken or yielded.
Figure 173
Pressure adjusting calibration to oil temperature of 100°C:
— minimum rpm: 0.8 bars
— maximum rpm: 3.8 bars
Figure 170
74971 26246
MAIN DATA FOR ADJUSTING OIL PRESSURE Remove screws and front cover (1).
CONTROL VALVE SPRING
543010 OIL PUMP

Figure 171
Figure 174
1
1
2
18908
With a rule (2) and a thickness gauge (1) check clearance be-
tween upper surface of gears (3) and cover supporting sur-
face that must be 0.065 ÷ 0.131 mm; otherwise replace worn 26247
parts.
Remove oil pump driving gear (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

6
2
1 3 1
3
4
5
18559 18906
Remove driven gear (1) only if an excessive wear of said gear Check the torque resisting rotation between the driven gear
or of entire driving gear (3) is detected; this operation must and the oil pump driving shaft, proceeding as follows:
be carried out under a hydraulic press (2). - apply tool 99360607 (2) to block rotation of gear (5);
- trace two reference marks (3) on shaft (4) and on gear
(5);
- operate on the driving shaft with a torque wrench (1)
calibrated at 64 Nm and tool 99360607;
- make sure the reference marks are perfectly aligned;
replace the parts if they are not.
Figure 178
Assembling auxiliary member assembly
Figure 176
51755
2 Fit the shaft (1) with the oil pump driven gear.
Figure 179
3
18561
For assembling accessory equipments group, invert oper-

ations described for dismantling it observing the instructions
described and illustrated here below.
Fitting operation of driven gear (2) on driving shaft (3) is to
be performed with a hydraulic press (1), by heating gear and
cooling shaft, so as a temperature difference of ~ 270°C be-
tween the two parts is found. Once fitting is completed,
51754
check that a space of 88 - 0.2 mm exist between outer sur-
faces of gears. Fit the shaft (1) with the drive gear.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

50847
74949
Using the keying device 99374336 (2) and the grip 99370006 Fit the rear cover (2) and tighten the screws (3) and the fixing
(1), fit the gasket (3) onto the front cover (4). nuts to the required torque.
Figure 181 NOTE The rear cover (2) must be fitted within 10 minutes
of applying the sealant.
Fit the vacuum pump (1).
52378
Fit the front cover (2) with the gasket (1) on the auxiliary
member support box and tighten the relative screws (3) to
Figure 184
Figure 182
50679
51700
Fit the top cover (2) with the relative gasket and tighten the
Clean and degrease the mating surfaces of the cover (1) and screws (1) to the required torque.
the box supporting the auxiliary parts.
Fit the gear (4) and tighten the screws (3) to the required tor-
Spread IVECO 1905685 sealant on the sealing surface of the
que.
rear cover (1), indicated by the darker area, evenly and
without any breaks. Fit the power steering pump (5).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

543110 6-element heat exchanger Figure 187

Figure 185
50823
50681 Position the mounting (3) on the auxiliary member assembly

(5) so that the hole (→) coincides with the centring pin (4).
Position the heat exchanger (2) on the mounting (3) and
constrain it to the auxiliary member assembly (5) with the
On supplying heat exchanger (1) with air at 1 bar pressure, fitting (1).
verify that no leaks exist from oil flow side (2) and also from Tighten the fitting (1) to the required torque.
water flow side.
Test conditions:
Oil type SAE 30 NOTE Before mounting the fitting (1), spread IVECO
Oil temperature at heat exchanger inlet 115°C sealant 1905683 onto its thread.
Oil delivery 30 litres/min
Water temperature
at heat exchanger inlet 85°C
Water delivery 20 litres/min
PERFORMANCE
Exchanged heat quantity 4.0 kW
Oil pressure drop 0.85 bar
Built-in safety valve (2)
Opening pressure 0.82÷1.03 bars
50677
50682 Lubricate sealing rings with engine oil and place them on oil
Carefully clean support (2), heat exchanger (4) and fitting (5) filter (2).
and particularly their oil ways.
Screw oil filter on fittings (1, Figure 187) and tighten it with
Always replace seal rings (1 and 3). tool 99360091 (1) to 25 Nm torque.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 189 540480 Oil vapour recycling system
Figure 190
74950
Mount the auxiliary element assembly (2) fitting the gasket

in between. Tighten the fixing screws with a torque wrench
(3) to the prescribed torque.
NOTE As spares, the screws (1) are supplied with the

thread pre-treated with LOCTITE 506 sealant.
If they are reused, clean the thread thoroughly and 62073
apply IVECO 1905683 sealant at the section
shown in the figure. OIL VAPOUR RECYCLING SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Oil vapours formed into oil sump during engine running, pass
through oil filler (1), are ducted into pipe (2) and then
collected into condenser (4) where condensed vapours are
drained into oil sump through pipe (5) and put into circulation
again.
5050 LUBRICATION Exceeding vapours, if any, are discharged into atmosphere
General through pipe (3).
Engine lubrication is forced circulation type and its is per-
formed by the following components:
- gear oil pump built in accessory equipments group, a
pressure control valve built in rear cover of accessory
equipments group;
- a Modine type heat exchanger with built-in safety valve;
- a double-action oil filter with built-in safety valve.
Operation (see Figure 191)
Engine oil is sucked from sump by oil pump (8) through
suction strainer (9) and sent under pressure to heat
exchanger (4) where it is cooled.
Oil passes through oil filter (5) and conveyed to lubricate
concerned components through ducts or pipes.
Once lubrication cycle is achieved, oil returns to sump
by gravity. Oil filter can be cut out by built-in safety valve,
in case it is clogged. Also heat exchanger ,in case of
clogging, is cut out by a safety valve.
NOTE To remove-check and refit the parts forming the oil

pump and oil pressure adjustment valve, see
”AUXILIARY MEMBER ASSEMBLY”.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 191
62183
LUBRICATING SYSTEM DIAGRAM

1. Oil delivery pipe to camshaft - 2. Main oil delivery pipe - 3. Acces-
sory equipments group with built-in oil pump seat - 4. ”Modine”
type water-oil heat exchanger - A. Oil delivery to engine - B. Oil suc-
tion from sump - 5. Double-action oil filter with built-in safety valve
for clogged filter cut out - 6. Vacuum pump - 7. Oil pressure control
valve - 8. Pump gears - 9. Oil suction strainer - 10. Oil spray nozzle
for piston crown cooling - 11. Oil drainage pipe from turbocharger
to crankcase - 12. Oil delivery pipe to turbocharger.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

5432 COOLING
Figure 192
COOLING SYSTEM DIAGRAM

A. To the heater in the cab.
B. From the heater in the cab.
Exhaust valve opening
52172
Description Operation
The engine’s cooling system is the closed-circuit, forced The water pump driven by a the crankshaft via a poly-V belt
circulation type and comprises the following parts: sends the coolant into the crankcase and with a greater head
into the cylinder head.
- an expansion tank whose plug has two valves
When the coolant temperature reaches and exceeds the
incorporated in it: an outlet (2) and an inlet (1) that
working temperature it causes the thermostat to open and
govern the pressure in the system;
from here the coolant is sent to the radiator and cooled by
- a coolant level sensor at the base of the expansion tank; the fan.
The pressure inside the system due to the change in
- an engine cooling module to dissipate the heat taken temperature is governed by the outlet (2) and inlet valves
from the engine by the coolant with the heat exchanger built into the expansion tank filler cap (detail A).
for the intercooler;
The outlet valve (2) has a twofold function:
- a heat exchanger to cool the lubricating oil;
- to keep the system slightly under pressure so as to raise
- a centrifugal-type water pump built into the crankcase
the boiling point of the coolant;
onto which the electric fan is keyed;
- to discharge into the atmosphere the excess pressure
- an electric fan comprising an electromagnetic coupling generated in case of high temperature of the coolant.
on whose shaft turns an idle hub fitted with a mobile
metal plate and on which is mounted the fan. The function of the inlet valve (1) is to permit transferring the
coolant from the expansion tank to the radiator when, inside
Coolant temperature for:
the system, a low pressure is produced due to the decrease
- turning on the fan: 94°C ± 2°C; in volume of coolant as a result of its temperature lowering.
Outlet valve opening 1 ± 0.1 kg/cm2.
- turning off the fan: 80°C ± 2°C; Inlet valve opening 0.005 ÷ 0.02 kg/cm2.
- a 3-way thermostat governing coolant circulation.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

543212 Electromagnetic pulley

41128
Use a thickness gauge (3) to check that the distance between

impeller (1) and sealing ring (2) is 0.56 ÷ 1.08 mm.
Also check that there are no cracks in pump body. If there
50685 are, replace the whole water pump.
ELECTROMAGNETIC PULLEY SECTION 543250 Thermostat
Specifications
* Torque that can be entered at 1000 rpm Figure 196
and at 20°C 23 Nm
* Torque that can be transmitted at 20_C
with the clutch run in 43 Nm
Voltage 12 Volt
Consumption 24 W
When cooling fluid temperature reaches the value of
94° ± 2°C, thermometric switch allows electromagnet (1)
to be supplied and that, becoming magnetized, it attracts
movable plate (2) thus causing hub (4) to become integral
with electromagnetic joint (3).
50687
543210 Water pump
Figure 194 By-pass type thermostat (1) is inserted into the support (2)
fixed to cylinder heads and it does not need any adjustment.
If there are any doubts about its serviceability, replace it.
The thermometric switch/transmitter and water tempera-
ture sensor are fitted on the thermostat body.
Figure 197
50686
WATER PUMP LONGITUDINAL SECTION 50822

1. Pump body - 2. Bearing locking screw - 3. Pump driving A. Stroke start 82° ± 2 °C.
shaft complete with bearing - 4. Sealing ring - 5. Impeller B. Stroke at 97° ≥ 7 mm
Stroke at 110° ≤ 10.5 mm
The stroke of 7 mm within less than 60”
A = 0.56 ÷ 1.08 mm; assembly clearance between impeller Water blow-by with thermostat and valve closed
and sealing gasket for water pump body. ≤ 2 l/h
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281
50688
Fit new seal rings (2) and split rings (3) on the connecting pipe 41818
(4) and insert this into the thermostat box (1).
Fit the mobile tightener mounting without locking the nut (5)
Figure 199 fixing the roller (4).
Insert, between barrel (1) and push rod (2), a special wrench
(3) so as to annul push rod pressure on belt tightener roller
(4).
Setting the timing system

Figure 202
50689
Insert the pipe (2) with the thermostat box (1) into the water
pumpe (3) and fit the parts assembled in this manner onto
the crankcase and onto the cylinder head.
NOTE As spares, the screws (4) are supplied with the

thread pre-treated with LOCTITE 506 sealant.
If they are reused, clean the thread thoroughly and
apply IVECO 1905683 sealant on the first 15 mm.
TIMING AND AUXILIARY MEMBER

CONTROL
Figure 200
61900
Check whether cylinder 1 piston is at TDC.

This condition takes place when tool 99395214 (1) pin (2)
is fitted into engine flywheel (3) slit (⇒) and control gear hole
(5) and timing gear (4) are facing downward.
50689
Insert the reaction pin (2) into its seat in the water pumpe (1).
Fit the guard (3) and the fixed tightener (4).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 203 - Turn the crankshaft slowly in the direction of rotation by

two turns and check that hole (5) in gear (4) is facing
downwards and that the pin (2) of the tool (1) is inserted
in the slot (à) through the flywheel (3) when the timing
belt is taut; the notches (1 and 2, Figure 203) must be
aligned.
Figure 206
45074
- Make coincide notch (1) engraved on camshaft driving

toothed pulley, with that (2) engraved on valve tappets
cover.
Figure 204
86144
- apply a torque of 28 ÷ 30 Nm to the crankshaft (3) to

tension the belt (1) slightly;
Use tool 99395849 to check timing belt tension (1) which
must be 90 ÷115 Hz in point A.
86143
- Fit toothed belt (1);

- fit lower cover (4) and tighten fastening screws and nuts
to prescribed torque;
- remove tool (3) so as pushing rod (2), acting on belt
tightener (5), makes toothed belt taut (1);
Figure 205
Figure 207
61900 50711
- remove engine flywheel (3) slit (⇒) from tool 99395214

(1) pin (2); Fit upper cover (1).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

41808 50696
Key the pulley (1) with the spacer, if any, found on disassem- Fit the hub (1), washer (2) and retaining nut (3).
bly or determined as described in ”Checking crankshaft pulley Block rotation of the hub (1) and tighten the nut (3) in two
alignment”; block engine flywheel rotation with tool stages.
99360306 and tighten the setscrew with a torque wrench to
NOTE The hub (2) locking nut is left-handed. This nut (3)
must be replaced at every dismantling.
1st step: tightening with torque wrench at 40 Nm torque;

Figure 209
2nd step: closing with 110° ± 10° angle.
NOTE Angle closing is performed with tool 99395216.
Figure 211
62075
1
Fit the electromagnetic coupling (2) onto the water pump
shaft (3) and tighten the nuts (1) to the required torque.
Checking and aligning electromagnetic

coupling pulleys
Fit the puller key (5), puller (4) and measure the distance Y
about 88.9 to 90.1 mm.
41824
By means of thickness gauge (1) check the air gap that should
be of 0.25 ÷ 0.45 mm.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 212 544012 Adjusting alternator - water pump

drive belt tension
Figure 214
62076
Fit the mounting (2 or 6) complete with alternator (1) back 50698
onto the crankcase base: Cancel the action of the automatic tightener (2) with the
screw (3).
- mounting (2), for engines with air-conditioner
compressor; Fit the drive belt (1) taking care to position its ribs correctly
in the respective races of the pulleys.
- mounting (6), for engines without air-conditioner Release the automatic tightener (2). Turn the crankshaft by
compressor. 1 turn to settle the belt.
Tighten the screw (3) to a torque of 80 ÷ 90 Nm Using appliance 99395849, measure the tension of the belt
Tighten the screw (4) to a torque of 40 ÷ 50 Nm. (1) in section A water pump - alternator that must be
140 ± 5 Hz.
Checking alternator pulley alignment

Check that the distance X between the crankcase and the
end of the pulley (5) is 88.7 ÷ 90.1 mm. 544035 Adjusting compressor - air-condi-
tioner drive belt tension (see
Figure 213
Figure 214)
Fit compressor (6) and tighten fixing screws (8) to 25 Nm
torque.
Fit belt tighteners (5) without tightening screws (4 and 7).
Fit control belt (9) taking care to position its ribs into pulley
grooves.
Operate on screw (11) to tension belt (9) and rotate drive
shaft by one turn. Use tool 99395849 to check whether
frequency in compressor-drive shaft section B is equal to 160
± 10 Hz which corresponds to 500 ± 50 Nm.
3 Otherwise operate on screw (11).
Tighten screws (4 and 7) to 25 Nm torque.
Unscrew two turns screw (11) and lock nut (10) to 25 Nm
torque.
62077
Refit compressor (2) and tighten fixing screws (1) to 25 Nm

torque.
Checking compressor pulley alignment

Check whether distance y between block and pulley end (3)
is 106.96 ÷ 108.56 mm.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 215
NOTE For engine 8140.435 only.
Since engine No. 3089322, a rail with the same
configuration but without flow limiters and
pressure relief valve has been mounted. The same
prescriptions specified for the previous one shall be
complied with.
Figure 217
74951
NOTE If the pump mount (5) had been removed, when

fitting it on you need to insert a new gasket and
position the mount (5) so that the hole A faces
downwards.
Refit high pressure pump (4), oil dipstick pipe (3), oil filler (1)
and rail (2).
NOTE Should high pressure pump (4) joint be replaced, 50699

use tool 99365143 to lock joint rotation when Fit the electro-injectors (1), position the brackets (3) on
moving fixing nut and tool 99342138 to remove them and tighten the fixing screws (2) to the required torque.
the joint from high pressure pump shaft.
After fitting the new joint, tighten the fixing nut to
the specified torque.
Figure 218
Figure 216
62079
Connect the pipes (2) to the electro-injectors (1) and to the

62078 hydraulic accumulator (4).
Connect the pipe (5) to the high-pressure pump (6) and to
the hydraulic accumulator (1). NOTE Pipe fittings (3) of pipings (2) must be tightened at
prescribed torque by using wrench 99317915 (5)
and dynamometric wrench 99389833 (7).
NOTE Pipe fittings (4) of piping (5) must be tightened at The couplings (3) must be tightened with a specific
prescribed torque by using a suitable wrench and wrench keeping the hexagon (6) of the
dynamometric wrench 99389833. electro-injectors (1) and, if applicable, the hexagon
Connection (4) shall be tightened by keeping high (8) of the flow limiting valves stationary.
pressure pump hexagon (3) stopped at the same The pipes (2) have to be changed with new ones
time. with each removal.
Pipes (5) shall always be replaced after removing.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

52163
74952
Fit protection (1) on rail (6) and tighten nuts (2) to the Secure the pipe (8) to the crankcase base with the screw (9).
required torque. Hold valve (7) and connect fuel drain With the nuts (7), secure the pipe (1) to the water pump (6).
connection (8) to it with hose (5). Connect the pipe (4) to the fitting of the cylinder head.
Connect pipe (4) to high pressure pump (3). Using the bracket (3), constrain the pipes (1 - 4) to the intake
manifold (5), tightening the screw (2) to the required torque.
Figure 220
Figure 223
62860
Press clips (2) in the direction shown by the arrow and
connect pipe connection (1) to injectors (3).
Fit rubber plug (4) into protection (5) and connect pipe (6)
to connection (7).
Figure 221
62855
Refit the soundproof cover (7). Refit air duct (6) including:
solenoid valve (2), glow plug (3) and pipe (1) to intake
manifold (1) and tighten nuts (4) to the required torque. Use
connection (8) to connect pipe (10) to connection (9) and
secure pipe (10) clamps with screws (5) and nut (11).
Connect the electrical connections of the engine cable, if any,
to injectors (and refit the side cover), to air pressure and
temperature sensor, to rail pressure sensor, to 3rd pumping
element cut-out device, to engine rpm sensor, to revs. sensor
and to thermostat box temperature sensor.
62859
Connect to the heat exchanger (3) the pipe (4) including pipe
(1) and fasten the latter to the bedplate by means of screws
(1 and 5).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Reconnect the cooling fan to the electromagnetic joint. 764264 Timing system speed sensor
Apply lifting rig 99360549 to engine lifting hooks and hitch 764266 Engine speed sensor
the lifting rig to the hoist, then remove engine from the rotary
stand. Remove brackets 99361029.
Figure 226
Figure 224
5
2 3
1
6
50723
62861 Check the sensor gap. It must be:

Complete engine assembly. - 0.8 ÷ 1.5 mm, between the camshaft pulley (1) and the
Place new gaskets (1) on the cylinder head and fit the exhaust sensor (2).
manifold (3) complete with turbocharger (4) and oil pipes
(2 - 5). If you find a different value, loosen the nut (3) and act on the
mounting (4).
NOTE Before fitting the turbocharger onto the engine, it - 0.8 ÷ 1.5 mm, between the engine flywheel (5) and the
is necessary to fill the central body with engine sensor (6).
lubricating oil. If you find different values, loosen the screws (7) and act on
the mounting (8).
Secure the fitting (8) to the crankcase base with the screw
(9).
Secure the pipe (2) to the crankcase with the screw and with
the fitting (7) complete with the oil pressure transmitter.
Screw down the threaded plug (6).
Figure 225
50651
Fit the oil vapour condenser (8) complete with pipes (2 - 11).
Connect the pipe (2) to the fillpipe (1). Connect the pipe (11)
to the crankcase fitting.
Connect the pipe (5) to the side cover (7).
Connect the pipe (3) to the heat exchanger (4).
Secure the pipe (10), with the screw (9), to the crankcase
and, with the screw (6), to the cylinder head.
Fill the engine with the required amount and grade of
lubricating oil.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

SUPERCHARGING
Figure 227
52174
TURBOCHARGING DIAGRAM FOR ENGINES 8140.43.B/R/S

Description 542410 Turbocharger type
The turbocharging system comprises an air filter,
KKK K03-2076-CCA 6.68
turbocharger and the intercooler. MITSUBISHI TD 04
The air filter is the dry type comprising a filtering cartridge that GARRETT GT 20
can be periodically replaced. The turbocharger fitted on the engines 8140.43.B/R/S is the
The function of the turbocharger is to use the energy of the type with the pressure relief valve.
engine’s exhaust gas to send pressurized air to the cylinders. It is basically composed of:
The intercooler comprises a radiator fitted onto the engine - a central body housing a shaft supported by bushings at
coolant radiator and its function is to lower the temperature whose opposite ends are fitted the turbine rotor and the
of the air leaving the turbocharger to send it to the cylinders. compressor rotor;
- a turbine body and a compressor body fitted on the end
of the central body;
- an overpressure relief valve fitted on the turbine body.
Its function is to choke the exhaust gas outlet, sending
a portion of it straight into the exhaust pipe when the
turbocharging pressure downstream from the
compressor reaches the setting.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

REPAIRS
Figure 230
NOTE On finding irregular operation of the engine due to
the turbocharging system, before checking the
turbocharger, it is wise to check the efficiency of the
seals and the fastening of the coupling sleeves,
checking moreover there are no blockages in the
intake sleeves, air filter or radiators. If the
turbocharger damage is due to a lack of lubrication,
check that the oilways are neither burst nor clogged,
in which case change them or remove the trouble.
54249 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

Checking and adjusting the pressure relief
valve
The following descriptions and illustrations refer to checking a
88617
KKK-type turbocharger that, by analogy, unless otherwise
stated, hold for the MITSUBISHI and GARRETT type too. For the MITSUBISHI type, loosen the nut (3) and turn the tie
rod (4) appropriately.
Figure 228 For GARRETT type, unloosen nut (10) and properly turn ring
nut (9).
Changing the pressure relief valve
For turbocharger MITSUBISHI, take off fastener (2) securing
the tie rod to lever (1), and take valve (5) off the turbocharger
by taking off securing screws (6).
For turbocharger GARRETT, take off fastener (7) securing the
tie rod to lever (8), and take valve (12) off the turbocharger
by taking off securing nuts (11).
Fit the new valve by carrying out the operations for removal
in reverse order and adjust the travel of the tie rod as
33129 described under the relevant heading.
Cover the inlets and outlets of the air, exhaust gas and
lubricating oil. Figure 231
Thoroughly clean the outside of the turbocharger using
anticorrosive and antioxidant fluid.
Disconnect the pipe (2) from the union of the pressure relief
valve (1) and fit onto it the pipe of appliance 99367121 (1,
Figure 229).
Figure 229
45078
For the KKK turbocharger, proceed as follows:

Take off the clip (1), remove the nut (2). Detach the bracket
(3) supporting the relief valve (4) from the turbocharger.
Fit the new valve by carrying out the operations for removal
in reverse order and adjust it as follows:
Screw the nut (6) onto the stem (5) of the valve down to the
bottom of the thread; mount the lever (7) on the valve stem.
75821 Using appliance 99367121 (5, Figure 229) introduce
Rest the tip of the dial gauge (1) with a magnetic base on the compressed air into the valve (4) at the prescribed pressure;
end of the tie rod (2) and reset it. in this condition, screw down the nut (2) until the butterfly
Using appliance 99367121 (5), introduce compressed air into valve governed by the lever (7) goes onto the stop in its seat.
the valve body (6) at the prescribed pressure and check this Unscrew the nut (6) to bring it into contact with the lever (7)
value stays constant throughout the check; if it does not, and at the same time lock the nuts (2 and 6).
change the valve. Adjust the pressure relief valve as described under the
In the above conditions, the tie rod must have made the relevant heading.
prescribed travel. Afterwards, paint the nuts (2 and 6) with safety paint and fit
If you find a different value for the KKK type, take off the clip the clip onto them and connect the pipe (2, Figure 228) to the
and turn the nuts (3 and 4) appropriately. valve (4), securing it with a new clamp.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

542410 GARRET GT 2256 T variable Figure 233

geometry turbosupercharger
(engine 8140.43N)
General
The variable geometry turbosupercharger consists of the
following:
- centrifugal supercharger (1);
- turbine (2);
- set of mobile blades (3);
- mobile blade control pneumatic actuator (4), vacuum
controlled by proportional solenoid valve controlled by
EDC MS6.3 ECU.
Variable geometry enables:
- to increase the speed of the exhaust gases running into
the turbine at low engine rpm;
- to decrease the speed of the exhaust gases running into
the turbine at high engine rpm.
82871
To obtain the max. engine volumetric efficiency also at low
rpm (with on-load engine).
Operation at low engine rpm Operation at high engine rpm
62870 62872
1. TURBINE - 2. MOBILE BLADES - 3. PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR - 4. REVOLVING RING
When engine is running at low speed, the exhaust gases show The ECU, through the actuator control solenoid valve,
weak kinetic energy; under these conditions a traditional modulates the vacuum acting on the diaphragm, so actuator
turbine shall rotate slowly, thus providing a limited booster (3) controls through the tie rod, the gradual opening of the
pressure. mobile blades (2) until reaching the max. open position.
In the variable geometry turbine (1), the mobile blades (2) are Blade through-sections results larger thus producing a speed
set to max. closed position and the small through-sections decrease in exhaust gas flow through the turbine (1) with
between the blades increase the inlet gas speed. Higher inlet speeds equal to or lower than those of the low rpm condition.
speeds involve higher tip speeds of the turbine and therefore Turbine (1) speed is therefore adjusted to a proper value
of the turbosupercharger. enabling suitable engine operation at high speeds.
Engine speed increase results in a gradual increase of exhaust
gas kinetic energy, and also in turbine (1) speed and booster
pressure increase.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Proportional solenoid valve controlling Actuator

turbocharger actuator
Figure 237
Figure 235
62875
SECTION ON THE ACTUATOR
62876
The solenoid valve modulates the low pressure controlling the The actuator diaphragm, connected to the control rod, is
turbocharger actuator, taken from the air circuit of the servo governed by the low pressure on the top of the actuator.
brake, according to the information exchanged between the
The low pressure modulated by the proportional solenoid
electronic control unit and the sensors: engine speed, throttle
valve varies the movement of the diaphragm and, as a result,
pedal position and pressure/temperature fitted on the intake
of the rod governing the turbine’s mobile blades.
manifold.
As a result, the actuator varies the opening of the blades of the
turbocharger that adjust the flow of exhaust gases.
Figure 236
62869
TURBOCHARGING FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM

1. Variable geometry turbocharger - 2. Pneumatic actuator - 3. Proportional solenoid valve - 4. Air filter -
5. MS6.3 control unit - 6. Servo brake - 7. Vacuum device - 8. High-pressure pump.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

REPAIRS
NOTE NOT ALLOWED ARE:
Checking the actuator
- any replacement or regulation of the
actuator, since the calibration of such
Figure 238
component is made in an optimal way
for each turbocharger and is
guaranteed for the turbocharger;
- any operation on nut (5) and ring nut
(4), since such operation does not
change engine supply characteristics
but may impair engine reliability and
duration.
Ring nut (4) is sealed with antitempering
yellow paint.
In case of engines under guarantee, each
above specified intervention and/or
alteration to paint applied on ring nut (4)
causes the lapse of the guarantee.
62873
Cover air, exhaust gas and lubricant inlets and outlets.

Clean the turbosupercharger outside accurately using
anticorrosive and antioxidant fluid and check the actuator (6).
Clamp the turbosupercharger in a vice.
Apply vacuometer 99367121 (1) pipe to actuator (6) hose.
Apply the magnetic base gauge (2) to exhaust gas inlet flange
in the turbine.
Set gauge (2) feeler pin on tie rod (3) end and set gauge (2)
to zero.
Operate the vacuum pump and check whether the tie rod (3)
stroke values correspond to the vacuum values shown in the
following table:
- vacuum 0 mm Hg Fully open valve

Valve stroke
- vacuum 150 mm Hg
2.3 ÷ 2.7 mm
Valve stroke
- vacuum 400 mm Hg
9.7 ÷ 10.7 mm
Valve stroke
- fully closed valve
11 ÷ 12.4 mm
If a different value is found, replace the turbocharger.
NOTE During the check the vacuum value shall not fall,
otherwise the actuator shall be replaced.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

FUEL SUPPLY
HIGH-PRESSURE ELECTRONIC INJECTION SYSTEM (COMMON RAIL MS 6.3 OR EDC.16)
General Figure 239
Common Rail MS6.3 is a high-pressure electronic injection
system for fast diesel engines with direct injection.
Its main features comprise:
- high injection pressures available (1350 bar);
- these pressures can be modulated between 150 bar up
to the maximum operating pressure of 1350 bar, irre-
spective of the speed of rotation and engine load;
- capacity to operate at very high speeds (up to
6000 rpm);
- injection control precision (injection duration and ad-
vance);
- lower consumption;
- lower emissions.
The main functions of the system are basically as follows:
- checking fuel temperature;
- checking engine coolant temperature;
- checking amount of fuel injected;
- checking idling speed;
- cutting off fuel in release phase;
- checking cylinder balancing when idling;
- checking anti-sawing;
- checking smokiness at exhaust on acceleration;
- checking exhaust gas recirculation (E.G.R. if present);
- checking top speed limit;
- checking thermostart;
- checking activation of air-conditioning system (if any);
- checking auxiliary fuel pump;
- checking position of cylinders;
- checking main and pilot injection advance;
- checking closed cycle of injection pressure;
- checking turbocharging pressure;
- self-diagnosis;
- connection with immobilizer unit.
The system makes pre-injection (pilot injection) possible
before T.D.C. with the advantage of decreasing the
derivative of the pressure in the combustion chamber,
lowering the noise level of combustion, which is typical of
direct injection engines.
The control unit checks the amount of fuel injected,
adjusting the line pressure and injection times.
The information the control unit processes to regulate the
amount of fuel to be injected comprises:
- engine speed;
- coolant temperature;
- turbocharging pressure;
- air temperature;
- intake air quantity; 50700
- battery voltage;
- diesel pressure; HIGH-PRESSURE ELECTRONIC INJECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS LAYOUT
- position of accelerator pedal. 1. Engine speed sensor - 2. Air temperature pressure sensor - 3. Thermostart glow plug - 4. Thermostart solenoid valve - 5. Timing phase sensor - 6. Electro-injectors - 7. Hydraulic accumulator (rail) -
8. Coolant temperature sensors - 9. Electromagnetic fan (Baruffaldi) - 10. Hydraulic accumulator (rail) fuel pressure sensor - 11. Compressor (if present) - 12. E.G.R. valve modulator (if present) - 13.
High-pressure pump - 14. 3rd pumping element exclusion device - 15. Pressure regulator - 16. Fuel filter - 17. Heater - 18. Fuel temperature sensor - 19. Electric supply pump -
20. Fuel pre-filter - 21. Fuel tank - 22. Battery - 23. Control unit with atmospheric pressure sensor - 24. Fuel outlet assembly with calibrated hole - 25. Hydraulic accumulator (rail) pressure relief device
- 26. Accelerator pedal sensor - 27. Clutch pedal sensor - 28. Brake pedal sensor - 29. Engine rev counter - 30. Tachograph - 31. Thermostart warning light.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

SYSTEM OPERATION Checking smokiness at exhaust on

acceleration
Self-diagnosis - BLINK CODE With heavy acceleration, on the basis of the signals received
The control unit self-diagnosis system checks the signals from from the debimeter and engine speed, the control unit
the sensors, comparing them with the admitted limits (see determines the optimum amount of fuel to inject:
relative heading):
— it operates the pressure regulator;
Immobilizer recognition — it varies the electro-injector injection time.
When the control unit receives the signal of the key on ”MAR”
it enables starting. Checking exhaust gas recirculation (E.G.R. if
present)
Checking fuel temperature Depending on the engine load and the signal from the
accelerator pedal sensor, the control unit limits the amount of
The control unit, with fuel temperature exceeding 75ºC air taken in, actuating partial suction of the exhaust gases.
detected by fuel filter sensor, controls the pressure regulator
to reduce line pressure (injection not modified). If
temperature exceeds 90ºC, power is reduced to 60%. Checking top speed limit
Depending on the number of revs, the control unit actuates
Checking engine coolant temperature two action strategies:
The control unit with the coolant temperature over: — at 4250 rpm, the control unit reduces fuel flow by redu-
cing electroinjectors opening time, when 5000 rpm are
— 98°C, operates the electromagnetic fan (Baruffaldi); exceeded it deactivates electroinjectors.
— 105°C, switches on the coolant temperature warning
light. Checking rotation regularity during accele-
ration
Checking quantity of fuel injected Acceleration regularity is guaranteed under whatever
According to the signals from the sensors and the mapped condition by pressure regulator and electroinjectors opening
values, the control unit: time control.
— operates the pressure regulator;
— varies the ”pilot” injection time to 2200 rpm; Checking thermostart
— varies the ”main” injection time. In the phase of:
— starting
Checking idling adjustment — after-starting
The control unit processes the signals from the various sensors the control unit times operation of the thermostart control
and regulates the amount of fuel injected: unit according to engine temperature.
— it operates the pressure regulator;
— it varies the injection times of the electro-injectors. Checking activation of air-conditioning system
Within certain thresholds the speed takes account of the The control unit operates the air-conditioning compressor:
battery voltage. — switching it on/off when the relative switch is pressed;
— momentarily turning it off (approximately 6 sec.) in the ca-
Fuel cut-off in release phase se of heavy acceleration or demand for full power, or if
In the phase of releasing the accelerator pedal the control unit the engine coolant reaches a temperature of approx.
actuates the following logic elements: 105°C.
— it cuts off supply to the electro-injectors;
— it partially reactivates supply to the electro-injectors befo-
Checking fuel pump
re reaching idling speed; Irrespective of the speed, the control unit:
— it operates the fuel pressure regulator. — supplies the auxiliary fuel pump with the key on MAR;
— cuts off auxiliary pump supply if the engine is not started
Checking cylinder balancing on idling
up within a few seconds.
According to the signals received from the sensors, the control
unit controls the regularity of the torque at idling speed:
— it varies the amount of fuel injected into the single electro-
injectors (injection time).
Checking regulator engine rotation

(anti-sawing)
It ensures regular engine rotation at a constant rate while
increasing revs.
The control unit processes the signals received from the
sensors and determines the amount of fuel to be injected via:
— the pressure regulator;
— the electro-injector opening time.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Checking diesel warming Correcting flow rate to avoid noise, smoke or

It times operation of diesel warming in relation to ambient overloading
temperature. The behaviour that could lead to this kind of trouble is well
known.
Checking cylinder position The designer has therefore included special instructions in the
During each turn of the engine, the control unit recognizes control unit to avoid it.
which cylinder is in the power stroke and operates the
injection sequence for the appropriate cylinder. De-rating
In the event of the engine overheating, injection is modified,
Checking pilot and main injection timing decreasing the delivery to a varying degree, in proportion to
According to the signals from the various sensors, including the the temperature reached by the coolant.
absolute pressure sensor built into the control unit, the control
unit determines the optimum point of injection according to Adjusting turbine speed (for variable geometry
internal mapping. turbocharger - when present)
Turbine speed is adjusted by varying its geometry and is
Checking injection pressure closed cycle controlled by ECU through an electric signal which powers the
Depending on the engine load, determined by processing the pilot solenoid valve of the pneumatic actuator. ECU, according
signals from the various sensors, the control unit operates the to signals received from engine rpm sensor, intake manifold
regulator to obtain optimum line pressure. pressure/temperature sensor and throttle sensor, processes
the feedback signal to properly modulate turbine actuator
Fuel supply pilot solenoid valve opening.
The fuel supply is calculated in relation to:
Injection timing electronic test
— accelerator pedal position The advance (start of delivery, expressed in degrees) may be
— engine speed different from one injection to the next, also differentiated
— quantity of air introduced. from one cylinder to another. It is calculated, similarly to the
The outcome may be corrected in relation to: delivery, in relation to the engine load (accelerator position,
engine speed and air introduced).
— the water temperature. The advance is appropriately corrected:
Or to avoid:
— in phases of acceleration;
— noise — according to the water temperature.
— smoke and also to obtain:
— overloading
— overheating — lower emissions, noise and overloading;
— turbine over-revving. — better vehicle acceleration.
The delivery can be modified in the case of: An extremely high advance is set on starting, depending on the
water temperature.
— action of external devices (ABS), ABD, EDB Feedback from the start of delivery is supplied by the change
— serious trouble decreasing the load or stopping the engi- in impedance of the injector solenoid valve.
ne.
After determining the mass of air introduced by measuring its Speed governor
volume and temperature, the control unit calculates the The electronic speed governor has both features of
corresponding mass of fuel to inject into the relevant cylinder governors:
(mg per delivery) also taking into account the temperature of — idling and top speed
the diesel.
The mass of fuel calculated in this way is first converted into — all speeds
volume (mm3 per delivery) and then into degrees of throw, It is stable in ranges where conventional, mechanical governors
or duration of injection. are imprecise.
Correcting flow rate according to water Engine starting

temperature During the first few turns of the engine, the stroke and cylinder
A cold engine meets with greater resistance during operation: no. 1 recognition signals (flywheel sensor and camshaft sensor)
friction is high, the oil is still very viscous, the various clearances are synchronized.
are not yet optimized. The accelerator pedal signal is ignored on starting. Starting
In addition, the injected fuel tends to condense on the metal delivery is set only according to water temperature, by a
surfaces that are still cold. special map.
The fuel supply for a cold engine is therefore greater than for When the control unit detects such speed and acceleration of
a warm one. the flywheel as to be able to consider the engine started up
and no longer driven by the starter motor, it re-enables the
accelerator pedal.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Cold starting Cut-off

If even just one of the three temperature sensors (water, air This function cuts off fuel delivery when the vehicle is
or diesel) records a temperature lower than 10°C, pre-post decelerating (accelerator pedal released).
heating is activated.
When the key makes contact the pre-heating indicator light Cylinder balancing
comes on and stays on for a length of time that varies in
Individual cylinder balancing contributes to increasing comfort
relation to the temperature (while the heater at the intake
and handling.
manifold inlet warms the air), then flashes. It is now possible
This function permits individual, customized control over the
to start up the engine.
delivery of fuel and the start of delivery for each cylinder, even
When the motor is running this indicator light goes out, while
differently from one cylinder to another, to compensate for
the heater continues to be powered for a certain length of
the hydraulic tolerances of the injector.
time (variable) for post-heating.
If, with the indicator light flashing, the engine is not started up The differences in flow (delivery specifications) between the
within 20 ÷ 25 seconds (inattention time), the operation is various injectors cannot be evaluated directly by the control
cancelled so as not to run down the batteries pointlessly. unit. This information is supplied by Modus reading the bar
The pre-heating curve is also variable in relation to the battery code of each injector at the time of assembly.
voltage.
Synchronization search
Warm starting If there is no signal from the camshaft sensor, the control unit
If the reference temperatures all exceed 10°C, when the key is anyhow able to recognize the cylinders into which the fuel
makes contact the indicator light comes on for approximately is to be injected.
2 sec., for a short test, and then goes out. It is now possible to If this occurs when the engine is already running, the
start up the engine. combustion sequence has already been acquired, so the
control unit continues with the sequence on which it has
Run up already been synchronized.
When the key makes contact, the control unit transfers the If this occurs when the machine is at a standstill, the control
information stored in memory when the engine was last unit energizes a single solenoid valve. Within at most 2 turns
stopped into the main memory (see After run) and makes a of the crankshaft, injection will take place in that cylinder, so
diagnosis of the system. the control unit just needs to get synchronized on the order
of combustion and to start up the engine.
After run
Whenever the engine is switched off with the key, the control
unit stays powered for a few seconds by the main relay.
This makes it possible for the microprocessor to transfer some
data from the main memory (of the volatile type) to a
non-volatile memory, which can be cancelled and written over
(EEPROM), so as to make it available at the next start up (see
Run Up).
These data basically consist of:
— various settings (engine idling adjustment, etc.);
— settings of some components;
— fault memory.
The process lasts a few seconds, typically from 2 to 7
(depending on the amount of data to save), after which the
ECU sends a command to the main relay and makes it
disconnect from the battery.
NOTE It is extremely important for this procedure not to

be broken off, for example by switching off the
engine with the battery cut-out, or by disconnecting
the battery cut-out before 10 seconds have passed
since switching off the engine.
If this happens, the functioning of the system is
ensured, but repeated interruptions may damage
the control unit.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Operation The electro-injectors are supplied by the rail and their

A piston pump supplies diesel at a regulated pressure equal to operation is determined by the excitation of a fast
that of injection (up to 1350 bar). electromagnetic actuator built into the body of each
electro-injector that, by opening a gap, causes a difference in
A 2-way solenoid valve taps an adequate amount of fuel from pressure, making it possible for the needle to open.
the pump delivery in order to regulate the pressure on the
desired value. An electronic control unit, in which the control and power
units for operating the electro-injectors are integrated, is
The diesel under pressure is accumulated in a hydraulic enabled to control the entire injection system.
accumulator (rail) that performs the function of capacity to
limit the pressure ripples. Some sensors, connected to the control unit, make it possible
to determine the status of the engine and injection system, as
A pressure sensor is fitted on the hydraulic accumulator (rail) well as the demand for power from the driver, at any moment.
with the job of sending a signal (feedback) to the pressure
adjustment circuit. This system is completed by the possibility of operating an
EGR actuator and an actuator for a turbocharger equipped
with a waste-gate or a turbocharger with variable geometry
(if present on the engine).
Figure 240
50701
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
1. 3rd pumping element exclusion device - 2. Engine speed sensor on engine flywheel - 3. High-pressure pump -
4. Pressure regulator - 5. Other actuators (thermostart, heated filter, fan control, AC control) - 6. Electronic control
unit with atmospheric pressure sensor built in - 7. Other sensors (accelerator, brake, clutch, vehicle speed, water
temperature, air temperature) - 8. From the manifold (rail) pressure sensor - 9. Fuel tank - 10. Pre-filter - 11. Motor
pump - 12. Fuel filter - 13. Filter overpressure valve - 14. Exhaust assembly with calibrated hole - 15. Pressure relief
device of hydraulic accumulator (rail) - 16. Air flow rate meter - 17. Hydraulic accumulator (rail) - 18. Electro-injectors -
19. Stroke sensor on camshaft pulley.
A To thermostart
Electric circuit
Fuel at low pressure
Fuel at high pressure
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Specifications

The hydraulic system is composed of: Delivery pressure: 2,5 bar
— tank; Flow rate: > 155 l/h
Power supply: 13.5 V - < 5A
— pre-filter;
Coil resistance at 20°C: 28.5 Ohm
— electric supply pump;
— fuel filter;
— high pressure supply pump;
— pressure regulator;
— manifold (rail);
— electro-injectors;
— supply pipes and fuel recirculation.
773010 Fuel pump

This rotary positive displacement pump with integrated
by-pass is mounted on the suction pipe, on the left-hand side
of the chassis frame.
The fuel pump is the roller-type with positive displacement, a
brush motor with energizing by permanent magnets.
The impeller turns, driven by the motor, creating volumes that
shift from the inlet port to the delivery port.
These volumes are defined by the rollers that stick to the outer
ring when the motor turns.
The pump has two valves, a check valve to prevent the fuel
circuit from emptying (with the pump stationary) and an
overpressure valve that recirculates the delivery with the inlet
when pressures over 5 bar are produced.
Figure 241
50707
CROSS-SECTION OF FUEL PUMP
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

542011 Fuel filter

Figure 242
88613
1. Clogging signalling sensor - 2. Temperature sensor connector - 3. Heater support - 4. Water in signalling sensor -
5. Overpressure valve - 6. Heater connector - 7. Bending insert - 8. Fuel filter - 9. Water separator - 10. Connector -
11. Connector - 12. Purging screw.
The fuel filter is composed of a cartridge (8) equipped with a Fuel pipes
water separator (9).
The water accumulation capacity (A) of the filter is approx. Figure 243
100 cm3.
The water indicator (4) is mounted on the bottom end.
Unscrewing the indicator (4) drains off any water.
Heater support (3) has an integrated temperature sensor.
On heater support (3) there are screwed up sensor (1) to
signal filter clogging and overpressure valve (5).
When the temperature of the diesel is less than 6°C, an
electric heating element warms it up to at most 15°C before
sending it to the pressure pump.
When diesel oil temperature is under 6 °C, a resistor heats the
oil up 15 °C maximum before delivering it to high pressure
pump.
Overpressure valve characteristic
opening pressure 1.8 + 0.2 bar
- 0.3
Clogging indicator characteristics
differential working pressure 0.8 + 0.05 bar
- 0.1
Tightening torques 75585
1. Tightening clogging signalling sensor 20±2 Nm 1. High-pressure pump supply pipe quick-coupling fitting —
4. Water indicator 0.8±1.2 Nm 2. Supply pipe quick-coupling fitting — 3. Fuel return pipe
5. Tightening overpressure valve 25±2 Nm quick-coupling fitting — 4. Fuel filter mounting.
7. Threaded insert * 30±2 Nm
8. Fuel filter tightening 18±2 Nm If disconnecting the fuel pipes (1-2-3) from the mounting (4),
10. Connector 30±2 Nm it is necessary, when refitting, to make sure their fittings are
11. Connector 30±2 Nm perfectly clean. This is to avoid an imperfect seal and fuel
12. Bleed screw 12 Nm getting out.
* Before assembly, apply thread-stop LOCTITE on the
thread.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

775010 High-pressure pump Specifications:

This is the ”radialjet” type with three radial pistons (total Type with radial pumping elements
displacement 0.7 c.c.). It is operated by the timing belt without Number of pumping elements:3
any need for timing. Total displacement: 0.7 cm3
Each pumping assembly is composed of: Volumetric efficiency: > 80% at 1000 bar from 500 to
3000 rpm pump
— a piston (5) operated by a cam (2) integral with the shaft
Operating range: up to 1350 bar
of the pump (6);
Input power: 3.2 kW at 1000 bar and
— an inlet plate valve (3); 3000 rpm pump
— a delivery ball valve (4). Top speed: 3000 giri/min
The high-pressure pump must be supplied by the motor pump Supply: Diesel at a pressure of 0.5 bar,
at a pressure of at least 0.5 bar. with a minimum flow rate of
The maximum delivery pressure reaches 1350 bar. 0.5 l/min more than the flow
The delivery pressure is controlled by a pressure adjustment rate absorbed by the high
solenoid valve mounted on the pump. pressure.
The high-pressure pump is lubricated and cooled by the diesel
through appropriate channelling.
In addition, the pump is equipped with a 3rd pumping element
exclusion device.
Figure 244
1 8 6 4
2
3
9
4
6
10 5
7
11 11
50702
1. 3rd pumping element exclusion solenoid valve - 2. Push rod - 3. Inlet plate valve - 4. Cylinder - 5. Pumping element -
6. Pump shaft - 7. Inlet - low pressure (from diesel filter) - 8. Delivery ball valve - 9. Delivery - high pressure (rail) -
10. Delivery - low pressure (recirculation) - 11. Three-lobe cam
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

3rd pumping element exclusion device Figure 246

The 3rd pumping element exclusion device is composed of a
solenoid valve (1, Figure 244) that by means of the push rod
(2, Figure 244) keeps the inlet valve (3, Figure 244) open
during the delivery phase of the 3rd pumping element (5,
Figure 244). It is activated by the electronic control unit when
the engine, running above 4200 rpm, does not increase the
power. The fuel thus discharged (approx. 1/3 of the delivery),
before being put into the recirculation circuit, increases the
efficiency of the high-pressure pump.
771034 Pressure regulator 88411
Take off screws (2) and unthread pressure regulator (3) from
Figure 245 high pressure pump (1).
Figure 247
50703
1. Valve - 2. Ball shutter - 3. Pin - 4. Body - 5. Coil -

6. Pre-loading spring - 7. Anchor
It is mounted on the high-pressure pump and operated by the
electronic control unit. It regulates the supply pressure of the 88412
fuel for the electro-injectors. Accurately clean the seat (⇒) of pressure regulator and the
The pressure regulator is mainly composed of: connection surface (⇒) of the regulator.
— a ball shutter (2)
— a pin (3) controlling the valve (1) NOTE For cleaning, do not use tools which could damage
— a pre-loading spring (6) the surfaces and pay attention that impurities are
— a coil (5). not introduced into channels.
With the solenoid de-energized, the delivery pressure
depends on the pre-load of the spring.
Pressure modulation is obtained by supplying the solenoid coil Figure 248
in PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) and closing the regulation
loop by feedback from the pressure sensor, the PWM signal
has a carrier of 1000 Hz and the duty cycle can be varied via
software from 1% to 95%.
Replacing pressure regulator.
Accurately clean high pressure pump and operate as follows.
88413
Mount new seal rings (2 and 3) on pressure regulator (1) and

lubricate the rings with vaseline.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

2
88414
Mount pressure regulator (2) on high pressure pump (1).
NOTE Mounting operation must be performed keeping 88411

the regulator perpendicular to connection plane
without angling it, in order not to damage seal rings The hydraulic accumulator is mounted on the cylinder head
(2 and 3, Figure 248). on the opposite side to the intake.
With its volume of approximately 29 cm3 dampens the
pressure ripples of the fuel due to:
Figure 250 — the operation of the high-pressure pump
— the opening of the electro-injectors.
The flow limiters (2) are mounted on the top of the hydraulic
accumulator (1).
The fuel pressure sensor (4) and pressure relief valve (5) are
mounted on the bottom.
774512 Flow limiters

Figure 252
88415
Screw up screws (1) and tighten them at 6 ÷ 7 Nm (0,6 ÷ 0,7

kgm) torque.
NOTE Where pressure regulator is replaced on the engine

mounted on the vehicle, it is needed, after
replacement, to check that there are no fuel leaks
after an engine working period.
52176
These ensure engine operation protecting the vehicle against

the risk of fire in the event of fuel leakage: internal
(electro-injector jet jammed open) or external (pipe fittings,
774510 Hydraulic accumulator (rail) loose or damaged electro-injectors under high pressure).
Under regular conditions, piston (1) is kept in open position
by spring (2) and fuel pressure that, due to section difference
NOTE For engine 8140.43S only. between piston (1) internal and external surface operates
Since engine No. 3089322, a rail with the same highly on the latter one. When there is high pressure loss at
configuration but without flow limiters and pressure limiter outlets, inlet pressure prevails and overcoming spring
relief valve has been mounted. Component (2) reaction moves piston (1), closing fuel outlet U.
description given in the following pages stands valid
for engines up to this serial No.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

774511 Pressure relief valve

Figure 253
1 2
52177
When the pressure of the fuel exceeds the setting of the

pressure relief valve (1550 bar) it overcomes the reaction of
the spring (2) and, by shifting the plunger (1), discharges the
fuel into the low pressure - recovery circuit.
Figure 254
542025
542026 Fuel recirculation and supply
system
The supply system is divided into a low-pressure circuit and
a high-pressure circuit.
The low-pressure circuit comprises: pre-filter pipes, motor
pump, fuel filter, fuel outlets, recirculation pipes, thermostart
solenoid valve and thermostart glow plug.
The excess fuel of the high-pressure pump is partly used for
lubricating and cooling the pump and with the excess fuel from
the electro-injectors supplies the thermostart.
The excess fuel from the hydraulic components flow into the
outlets.
The union fixing the outlet coupling and the pressure relief High pressure
valve of the hydraulic accumulator contains a calibrated hole
whose purpose is to keep an overpressure of 0.5 bar in the Low pressure
starter heater circuit. Thermostart supply
The system does not require air bleeding. 61982
The low pressure supply pipes, except for the recirculation
FUEL SUPPLY AND RECIRCULATION SYSTEM DIAGRAM
pipes, are fast coupling ones.
1. Thermostart glow plug - 2. Thermostart solenoid valve - 3. Electro-injector - 4. Hydraulic accumulator (rail) - 5. 3rd pumping element exclusion solenoid valve -
6. High-pressure pump - 7. Fuel filter - 8. Motor pump - 9. Pre-filter - 10. Tank - 11. Pressure control valve - 12. Fitting - 13. Pressure relief valve - 14. Flow limiters.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

775010
Print 603.43.351
ELECTRO-INJECTORS
Figure 255 Operation
Electro-injector operation can be broken down into three
phases:
— ”rest position”
Coil (4) is de-energised, and shutter (6) is in closing position
and prevents fuel from being introduced into the cylinder, Fc
> Fa (Fc: caused by fuel pressure acting on control area (7) of
rod (1); Fa: caused by line pressure acting on pressure
chamber (8).
— ”start of injection”
The coil (4) is energized and causes the shutter (6) to rise.
The fuel of the control volume (9) flows off towards the return
manifold (10) causing a drop in pressure in the control area
(7).
At the same time, line pressure through feed duct (12) applies
a force Fa > Fc in pressure chamber (8) lifting peg (2), with fuel
being consequently introduced into cylinders.
— ”end of injection”
The coil (4) is de-energized and makes the shutter (6) return
to its closed position. This recreates such a balance in the
forces as to make the pin (2) return to its closed position and
consequently end injection.
Injector level
The injector level is the set of characteristics of the amount of
fuel injected in relation to the duration of the electrical signal
at different pressures of injection. Accurate knowledge of
these characteristics is of fundamental importance in
determining the necessary electrical signal to inject the desired
quantity of fuel.
Experimental measurements
The injector level can be measured:
— on the injector test bench;
— on the engine on the bench.
50704 In both cases an injection pressure is established and the
injectors are actuated (in the case of the test bench it is also
possible to measure one injector at a time) with an electrical
1. Pressure rod - 2. Pin - 3. Nozzle - 4. Coil - signal of fixed frequency (NG) and duration (ET).
5. Pilot valve - 6. Ball shutter - 7. Control area - On the injector test bench, the injected quantity is measured
8. Pressure chamber - 9. Control pipe - 10. Low-pressure by directly accumulating, for a set time, the fuel in graduated
fuel return - 11. Control pipe - 12. Supply pipe - burettes, then dividing the accumulated quantity by the
13. Electrical connection - 14. High-pressure fuel inlet fitting number of injections.
- 15. Spring On the engine on the bench, the injected quantity (QCARB)
is measured indirectly by the consumption of fuel, generally
measured with a gravimeter and expressed in kg/h. The
measurement should be made for a sufficiently long time so
Electric injectors feed at high pressure (up to 1350 bar) and as to average out errors.
recirculate at atmospheric pressure; recirculation is necessary However, it is necessary that throughout the measurement
for diesel oil used for pilot valve operation. the speed of the engine and the injection pressure remain
The temperature of the diesel put back into circulation by the constant. In addition, all recirculation (pump, pressure
electro-injector can get very high (approximately 120°C). regulator, injectors) must be put back into the circuit
The head of the electro-injector has a fitting for the electrical downstream from the meter so the measurement is not
connector. changed.
They are mounted on the cylinder head and operated by the
injection control unit.
The electro-injector can be divided into two parts:
— actuator/jet composed of pressure rod (1), pin (2) and
nozzle (3)
— control solenoid valve composed of coil (4) and pilot val-
ve (5).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

The quantity injected by each injector in each cycle is EDC.16:

therefore: — 60-pin connector A for the components on the engine
Q c = C n ⋅ 1 ⋅ 1 ⋅ 1 ⋅ 10 6
where 60 eNG 8 — 94-pin connector K for the components on the vehicle
Qc injected quantity in mm2/cycle/cylinder In addition to handling the operation of the system described
Cn hourly consumption in kg/h under the relevant heading, the electronic control unit is
NG speed in rpm interfaced with the other electronic systems on the vehicles
δ fuel density in kg/dm3 such as ABS - ABD - EBD cruise control, speed limiting device,
(δ diesel oil = 0.835 kg/dm3). immobilizer (IVECO CODE).
while
Nc SENSORS
with e= ⋅2
Nt
Nc number of cylinders Engine speed sensor
Nt number of strokes (2 or 4) This is an inductive sensor and is positioned on the flywheel.
It generates signals obtained from lines of magnetic flux that
It may immediately be seen how in the case of the test bench close through holes in the flywheel. There are 58 holes.
the delivery is measured for each single injector, whereas with The electronic control unit uses this signal to measure the
the engine on the bench the delivery is averaged over the speed of rotation of the engine, its angular position and to
number of injectors. In this last case, it is therefore not known operate the electronic rev counter.
whether there are differences between the injectors. It is If this signal fails the rev counter will not work.
therefore useful to measure the temperature of the exhaust
gas of each cylinder, a fairly reliable index of the torque
delivered by each single cylinder and therefore of the amount Camshaft timing sensor
of fuel introduced with each cycle. On the basis of these It is either an inductive type sensor for MS6.3 central unit or
measurements it is possible to tell whether the injectors have a Hall effect type sensor for EDC.16 central unit, and it is
a similar behaviour to one another. positioned on timing system shaft pulley.
To do this it is necessary to have thermocouples or The signal generated by this sensor is used by the electronic
thermometers to be placed in contact with each exhaust control unit as a redundant signal to measure the different
manifold outlet, in the area close to the cylinder head fixing engine speeds.
flange.
ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS 772655 Air temperature and pressure sensor

766161 Electronic control unit MS6.3 or Positioned on the intake manifold, it measures the pressure of
EDC 16 the turbocharging air introduced into the intake manifold.
This value, together with that of the air temperature sensor,
Figure 256 makes it possible for the electronic control unit to calculate the
exact quantity of air introduced into the cylinders so as to
operate the injectors adjusting the fuel delivery, limiting
harmful emissions, improving consumption and performance.
The sensor contains an electronic temperature correction
circuit to optimize the pressure measurement in relation to the
temperature of the intake air.
772656 Fuel temperature sensor

Integrated in the fuel filter, it measures the fuel temperature
and transmits it to the electronic control unit.
When the fuel temperature is too high (ambient temperature,
engine at full load and tank in reserve), correct lubrication of
the high-pressure pump is no longer assured. On the basis of
90638
the values received, the control unit determines the density
The control unit is a ”flash EPROM” and so it can be and volume of the fuel, correcting the delivery limiting engine
reprogrammed from outside without changing the hardware. performance.
The injection control unit has the absolute pressure sensor
built in to further improve the control of the injection system.
The control unit is mounted on the left-hand side of the engine
bay and is connected to the vehicle’s wiring harness by two
connectors:
MS6.3:
— 43-pin connector A for the components on the engine
— 43-pin connector B for the components on the vehicle
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

774511 Fuel pressure sensor ACTUATORS

This is mounted in the middle of the hydraulic accumulator The injection system comprises three classes of actuators
(rail) and it has the task of providing feedback for the injection interlocked with the electronic control unit:
control unit to: - electro-injectors (see relevant heading);
— adjust injection pressure - regulators (see relevant headings) requiring PWM control
— adjust the duration of injection. (Pulse Width Modulation):
• for pressure
766161 Atmospheric pressure sensor • EGR (if mounted)
This is integrated in the electronic control unit. It provides a • turbocharger with variable geometry (if mounted);
criterion of correction for the measurement of the air flow - actuators with continuous ON/OFF signal to:
rate and to calculate the reference air flow rate to check the • engage electromagnetic coupling for radiator cooling
EGR. fan;
• turn on/off air-conditioner compressor (if mounted);
764254 Engine coolant temperature sensor • Cruise Control;
• thermostart control;
This provides the control unit with an index of the thermal • fuel filter heating;
status of the engine in order to determine corrections for the
• electric supply pump.
fuel delivery, injection pressure, EGR injection advance when
starting cold (if mounted) and Warm-Up.
NOTE All the power controls are made with relays located
505910 Throttle pedal position sensor
in the cab.
The accelerator pedal position sensor provides the control
unit with a voltage value in proportion to the angle of
operation of the pedal determining fuel delivery.
PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) controls

772641 Clutch pedal position sensor A PWM control has an active and an inactive state that
Mounted on the pedal board, it provides the control unit with alternate within a constant set length of time. During the active
a positive signal when the clutch is engaged (pedal released). state the actuator control circuit is closed, which is thus
Every time the clutch is disengaged to change gear, the control powered with the control voltage; whereas, during the
unit fails to receive this signal and deactivates the Cruise inactive state the circuit is open.
Control function. The duration of the two states may be varied with the
condition that the sum of the two times is equal to the length
of the modulation delivery.
772642 Brake pedal position sensor The duration of the active state determines the duty-cycle,
which is normally expressed as a percentage of the total time.
There are two of these sensors mounted on the pedal board. Therefore, if the duration of the two active and passive states
With the brake pedal released, they provide the control unit are the same, the duty-cycle is equal to 50%.
with a positive signal that is used to detect brake operation so For reasons of diagnostics, the duty-cycle is limited between
as to deactivate the Cruise Control function and stop delivery 1% and 99%; the control resolution is equal to 0.005%
of fuel. (1/20000 of the time).
In addition, a sensor switches on the brake lights. The time length has been chosen taking account of the
dynamic actuator response specifications.
Too low a carrier frequency could cause oscillations in the
764261 Vehicle speed sensor actuator, while too high a frequency would decrease control
This sensor, mounted on the gearbox by the drive output resolution.
shaft, transmits the vehicle speed signal, through the electronic The E.G.R. and variable geometry turbocharger (if mounted)
tachograph, to the control unit. are controlled through a vacuum modulating valve.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM

E.G.R.
(vehicles with homologation MI)
The EGR system is similar to the one made on the 8140.63
engine and covered under the specific heading.
It differs from the version on 8140.63 engines in the control
performed by the EDC control unit and in the different
settings of the modulating solenoid valve and of the pneumatic
one of the EGR.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

GUIDE TO TROUBLESHOOTING
INTRODUCTION
Good diagnostic is mainly obtained when using Iveco electronic diagnostic tools (Modus/IWT).
When a vehicle enters the workshop, information given by the driver shall be taken in duly consideration but the first thing to
do is to connect Modus/IWT and to perform an accurate and thorough diagnostic analysis:
- failure memory reading;
- parameter reading;
- engine test;
- etc.
Print out results, specially if Help Desk assistance is required.

In this case, take into account that Help Desk can reject assistance requests based only on blink code.
The blink code, when present, is a tool which can be useful in some cases (vehicle stopped along the road, Modus/IWT missing)
but must not replace the diagnosis with Iveco tools, as it only provides rough indications.
Another factor that favours failure solving is experience.
To remove in part the lacking of experience of repair operators on this new electronic system, (since there is no previous system
to be used for reference), the following pages contain a GUIDE TO TROUBLESHOOTING drawn up by Training together with
the experts that have designed and developed Common Rail MS6.3 or EDC 16.
Take into account that ”Troubleshooting” cannot replace Modus/IWT, but it is a further aid, a sort of condensed experience
derived from the in-depth knowledge of the system.
”Troubleshooting” is divided into two separate sections:
- the first one, organised according to Blink Codes or DTC-FMI, concerns failures that can be directly detected by MS6.3 EDC
16. These failures are mainly electric - electronic;
- the second one, organised according to symptoms, describes failures that cannot be directly detected by the ECU. These
failures are mainly mechanical - hydraulic.
”Troubleshooting” does not replace diagnostic through Iveco electronic diagnostic tools but is an integration to it.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ENGINE
1st Section
BLINK CODE
with MS6.3 central unit
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ENGINE
Blink code This table gives the error codes:

With the key turned off, press the diagnosis button. To delete the list of errors from the control unit memory,
follow this procedure:
— Two sets of flashes of the EDC warning light with a short
pause in between indicate the code number of the first — with the key turned off, press the diagnosis button;
error stored in memory.
— keeping the button pressed, turn the key on;
— Press the button again to pass on to the next error.
— keep the button pressed for 5 seconds;
— After reaching the last error, the first one is repeated.
— let go of the button;
— The list of errors contains all the errors stored in memory
and not only the active ones. — turn the key off.
— The order of presentation of the errors respects the
chronological order in which they appeared.
Blink-Code Warning light Failure Reduction level (*)

VEHICLE
1.1 On Vehicle speed
1.2 (not used)
1.3 Off Cruise Control push buttons
1.4 Blinking Accelerator pedal *
1.5 Off Clutch switch plausibility
1.6 On Brake switch plausibility
1.7 Off Brake/accelerator plausibility Idling
1.8 Off Diagnostic warning light
1.9 Off Air conditioner
ENGINE 1
2.1 Blinking Water temperature sensor *
2.2 Off Air temperature sensor
2.3 On Diesel fuel temperature sensor
2.4 Blinking Booster pressure sensor *
2.5 Off Atmospheric pressure sensor
2.7 Blinking Fuel electric pump
2.8 Off Fuel heater
2.9 On Fan
ENGINE 2
3.1 Blinking Cylinder 1 balancing
3.5 Off Battery voltage
3.6 Off Glow plug warning light
3.7 Off Glow plug relay
3.8 Off Glow plug relay
3.9 Off Glow plug control
VGT
4.4 Blinking VGT control
4.5 On VGT solenoid valve
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Blink-Code Warning light Failure Reduction level (*)

INJECTORS
5.1 Blinking Cylinder 1 injector solenoid valve
5.7 On Block 1 (cylinders 1-4)
5.8 On Block 2 (cylinders 2-3)
ENGINE RPM
6.1 Blinking Flywheel sensor *
6.2 Blinking Timing sensor *
6.4 Blinking Runaway speed rate
FUEL PRESSURE
*
8.1 Blinking Fuel pressure control
or engine switching off
8.2 Blinking Fuel pressure sensor *
8.3 Blinking Pressure limiter
8.4 On 3rd pumping element cut-out solenoid valve
8.5 On EGR control
8.6 On EGR solenoid valve
8.7 On Flow meter
8.8 Off Air temperature sensor (flow meter)
ECU
*
9.1 Blinking ECU error (Gate array)
Engine switching off
9.2 On ECU error (Eeprom)
9.3 Blinking Immobilzer - EDC communication
9.4 On Main relay
9.5 Off After run stopped repeatedly
9.6 Blinking Engine not switched off by key
*
9.7 Blinking Sensor power 1 or engine
switching off
9.8 Blinking ECU error (Checksum) Impossible to start
9.9 Blinking ECU error (Operating system) Engine switching off
* Cases in which there is a reduction in power.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ENGINE
EDC
DAILY
BLINK POSSIBLE POSSIBLE RECOMMENDED TESTS

WARNING REMARKS
CODE CAUSE FAILURES OR OPERATIONS
LIGHT
Print 603.93.281
1.1 On Vehicle speed sensor Speed indication on speed- Road test with IWT-IT2000 If the speed value read on IWT-IT2000 is fixed
- not plausible or absent sig- ometer may be failing. Light although the vehicle speed is varying, there is
Read parameters
nal defect with high speeds. a communication fault between sensor and
Check wiring, connections and in- ECU.
volved components
Should signal be missing, Cruise Control can
be activated also at low speeds (operation ac-
cording to PTO parameters) since the ECU
does not detect that the speed threshold dis-
criminating between PTO and Cruise Control
modes have been exceeded.
1.1 On Vehicle speed signal (sec- Faulty CRUISE CONTROL/ Road test with IWT-IT2000 If the speed value read on IWT-IT2000 is fixed
tion between speedometer PTO although the vehicle speed is varying, there is
Check plausibility between speedom-
and ECU) shorted to posi- a communication fault between speedometer
Light defect with high speeds. eter indication and speed read by IWT-
tive or to ground and ECU.
IT2000
Check wiring, connections between
speedometer and ECU and involved
components
1.3 Off Non-plausibility of CRUISE Faulty CRUISE CONTROL/ Read parameters with IWT-IT2000 to
CONTROL/PTO push PTO detect the faulty push button
buttons
Check wiring between steering column
stalk and ECU, connections and control
push button
1.4 Blinking Accelerator pedal potentio- Power reduction. Read parameters with IWT-IT2000. Should it be impossible to accelerate using the
meter shorted to positive or pedal, drive using the Cruise Control push
1500 rpm accelerated idling Check wiring, connections and compo-
to ground, or excessive ac- button after disconnecting the speed sensor.
nents
celerator pedal voltage or
potentiometer failure.
ENGINES 8140.43R/B/S/N
135
Base - May 2004

EDC
136
WARNING REMARKS
LIGHT
Base - May 2004

1.5 Off Clutch switch: not plausible Faulty CRUISE CONTROL/ Depress completely the pedal clutch If check is OK, failure could be due to poor
or absent signal PTO and read state parameters on IWT- clutch activation (it is possible to shift gears
IT2000. without activating the switch)
Or, when depressing the
clutch pedal with CRUISE If failure persists, check wiring, connec- If the clutch signal is absent, Engine test cannot
CONTROL/PTO on, engine tions and proper switch assembling be performed.

comes up to peak rpm
Light defect at gear shifting.
1.6 On Brake switches: not plaus- Possible stop light malfunc- State parameters Check proper pedal switch assembling (they
ible signals between pri- tioning. must activate at the same time)
Wiring, connections, switches
mary and secondary
Faulty CRUISE CONTROL/
PTO
1.7 Off Brake/accelerator pedal Engine speed comes down Read parameters on Modus IWT- If the brake is activated with the accelerator
plausibility: brake and accel- to idling IT2000, check whether accelerator depressed, engine runs idle until releasing the
erator activated at the pedal potentiometer signal sets to zero brake to enable vehicle stop even if the accel-
same time when releasing, otherwise it is possible erator pedal is locked in intermediate posi-
that the driver has depressed brake and tion. It is however possible to accelerate al-
accelerator at the same time. though the brake pedal is depressed without
activating safety strategies.
1.8 Off EDC lamp shorted or with The EDC indicator light fails Check component wiring connec- The functionality of the indicator light is of
open circuit to come on when turning tions vital importance for the system’s operation
the key ON, or it always and integrity.
stays on even with the key
Sensitize the user to verify that the indica-
turned OFF
tor light works properly with every ignition
(if there are no faults in memory, it has to
turn on for 2 sec. and then go out).
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
EDC
DAILY

WARNING REMARKS
LIGHT
Print 603.93.281
1.9 Off Air-conditioning com- In case of open circuit at 8a Measurable relay parameters
pressor control contactor pin, also 2.7, 2.8 and 2.9 are
Check wiring, connections and relay
coil shorted to conditioning recorded
earth or circuit open.
Faulty conditioner com-
pressor
2.1 Blinking Circuit open, shorted to Difficult starting cold Reading parameters on Modus IWT- The fan comes on with fuel temperature =
earth or shorted to posi- IT2000 20 ºC
Engine cooling fan always
tive of water temperature
on Checking wiring and connector of If the water and diesel temp. are the same,
sensor, the fuel tempera-
water temp. sensor, sensor replace- the substitution value is active.
ture is used instead Power reduction (and noise
ment
since pre-injection is not ef-
fected)
2.1 Blinking See 2s Section: “The en- See 2s Section: “The engine See 2s Section: “The engine fails to See 2s Section: “The engine fails to start”
gine fails to start” fails to start” start”
2.2 Off Intake manifold air tem- Light performance reduction Read parameters on Modus IWT- 40ºC air temperature fixed substitution value
perature sensor short to at cold, light smoke when ac- IT2000. is set; glow plug control as a function of air
positive or to ground, or celerating with warm engine, temperature not operating.
Check wiring and component.
circuit open. 3.9 indication at the same
Flame start is however performed if water or
time and smoke at starting.
fuel temperature sensors indicate < 0 ºC and
Smoke at starting and when is deactivated when reaching 0º C
accelerating at high speed
with warm engine
2.3 On Fuel temperature sensor If the electric failure depends Read parameters on Modus IWT- Water temperature is adopted as substitution
short to positive or to on pin 30 see also 2.1 IT2000. value. Should also this signal be missing, 40 ºC
ground, or circuit open. fixed value is adopted.
Difficult cold starting. Check wiring, connections and compo-
nent.
137
Base - May 2004

EDC
138
WARNING REMARKS
LIGHT
Base - May 2004

2.4 Blinking Air turbocharging pressure Puff of smoke on acceler- Reading parameters on Modus IWT-
sensor on intake manifold ation IT2000.
shorted to earth, circuit
VGT: reduced power Checking wiring and component
open or shorted to posi-
tive or supplied by current Smoke on acceleration

exceeding the minimum
or maximum limit
2.5 Off ECU built-in atmospheric Black smoke on vehicles with Read parameters on Modus IWT- The pressure value being used as substitution
pressure sensor short to EGR (not excluded in height) IT2000. value is the last valid value recorded by ECU
ground or to positive or cir-
Contact Help Desk and comply with its
cuit open.
instructions to replace the ECU, if re-
quired
2.7 Blinking Fuel motor pump contac- Batteries discharge Active diagnosis with Modus-IWT- It is possible to hear the noise of the pump
tor shorted to positive IT2000 turning continuously, even with the key off.
Early deterioration of the
motor pump Check the wiring, connections and
component
The fuel motor pump is al-
ways active even with the
engine turned off
2.7 Blinking Coil of contactor for fuel The engine cuts out or fails Active diagnosis with Modus-IWT-
motor pump shorted to to start IT2000
earth or with open circuit
Check the wiring, connections and
component
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
EDC
DAILY

WARNING REMARKS
LIGHT
Print 603.93.281
2.7 Blinking Fuel motor pump contac- Early deterioration of the Active diagnosis on status parameters It is possible to hear the noise of the pump
tor shorted to positive motor pump with Modus-IWT-IT2000 turning continuously, even with the key off
Battery discharges Status parameters
Check wiring, connections and com-
ponent
2.8 Off Fuel filter heater contactor Battery discharges Active diagnosis with Modus-IWT-
shorted to positive — the IT2000
heater is always on even
with fuel temperature >
component
5°C
2.9 On Fan electromagnet Increased fuel consumption Active diagnosis with Modus-IWT- The fan is always on (with engine running)
shorted to positive IT2000
component
2.9 On Contactor coil shorted to Overheating of the engine Active diagnosis with Modus-IWT-
earth or circuit open and consequent possible li- IT2000
mitation on power
Engine cooling fan doesn’t component
work
2.9 On Fan contactor coil shorted Increased fuel consumption Active diagnosis with Modus-IWT-
to positive IT2000
Engine cooling fan always
on even with engine cold Check the wiring, connections and
component
139
Base - May 2004

EDC
140
WARNING REMARKS
LIGHT
Base - May 2004

3.1 Blinking Injector unbalanced Possible irregular rotation Engine test with Modus-IWT-IT2000 The control unit must modify the signal to
or and smokiness. EDC indica- the relevant injector (Cylinder Balancing)
Replacement of defective injector, if
3.2 tor light blinking from idling too far past the normally expected value
any
or to approximately 1300 rpm
3.3
or
3.4
3.1 Blinking If not linked to 5.1 - 5.2 - 5.3 Engine running with 3 cylin- Check for leaks outside injector pipes Do not switch off the engine since it will re-
or - 5.4, flow-limiter interven- ders or inside the injector start only after having removed the failure
3.2 tion due to pressure loss
or downstream the rail to-
3.3 wards the involved cylinder
or
3.4
3.5 Off Battery voltage too low Accelerated idling up to Battery test with IWT-IT2000
1300 rpm with released
Perform suitable checks on voltage
pedal
regulator and batteries
3.5 Off Battery voltage too low Engine switching off or not Battery test. Check battery, terminals, Engine off if battery voltage < 6,5V
starting wiring, alternator and voltage regulator
3.6 Off Starter heater indicator Indicator light always off. Active diagnosis with Modus-IWT- The driver doesn’t wait for pre-heating,
lamp shorted to positive Cold starting difficult IT2000 even at low ambient temperatures, as there
or with open circuit is no indication from the indicator light
Check the wiring and component
3.6 Off Starter heater indicator Starter heater indicator light Active diagnosis with Modus-IWT- Pre-heating works, but with cold starting
lamp shorted to earth always on IT2000 there is no indication on when to start the
engine because the lamp stays on.
component
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
EDC
DAILY

WARNING REMARKS
LIGHT
Print 603.93.281
3.7 Off Starter heater glow plug Possible destruction of the Active diagnosis with Modus-IWT-
contactor shorted to starter heater due to over- IT2000
earth heating because it is always
supplied
component
Battery discharges
3.8 Off Starter heater solenoid 3.9, the battery can quickly Active diagnosis with Modus-IWT- The solenoid valve is always activated, the
valve contactor coil discharge. Cold starting diffi- IT2000 fuel passes continuously through the glow
shorted to earth cult plug in the intake manifold
Smoke on starting component
3.8 Off Starter heater solenoid If shorted to positive 3.9, Active diagnosis of the contactor
valve contactor coil smoke
Check the wiring and component
shorted to positive or
1.5 - 1.6 - 1.3 - 2.1 - 2.2 -
with open circuit
2.3 - 3.6 if the electric
trouble is correlated to the
common earth of the com-
ponents involved
Cold starting difficult
3.9 Off Glow plug solenoid short Smoke, noise, fuel smell and Active diagnostic Solenoid valve always open, with key to ON
to ground faulty engine performance fuel flows continuously into intake manifold
Check wiring, connections and compo-
Fuel consumption increase nent.
141
Base - May 2004

EDC
142
WARNING REMARKS
LIGHT
Base - May 2004

4.4 Blinking Booster pressure too high, 4.5 VGT test Mechanism locked partially/completely
too low or too different closed or open
Possible consumption in- Read parameters on Modus IWT-
from the provided value
crease due to exhaust back IT2000. Or VGT solenoid valve short to positive or to
(for mechanical locking)
pressure ground
Check VGT mechanism movement
Early turbine wear

Check VGT actuator
Power reduction
Check wiring
Smoke when accelerating
Check VGT pneumatic control circuit
(due to air excess or lack)
4.5 On VGT actuator short to 4.4 and power reduction VGT test If wiring to pin 8a short to positive or open,
VGT only positive or to ground or cir- (and noise since pre-injec- the following are also faulty:
cuit open tion is not performed)
nent. - fan control
Smoke when accelerating
- VGT control
(due to air excess or lack)
- 3rd pumping element cut-out
- pressure regulator
- EGR
- conditioner compressor
- fuel motor pump
5.1 Blinking Corresponding cylinder in- 3.1- 3.2 -3.3 -3.4 Engine test The engine turns only with pairs of cylinders
5.2 jector shorted to positive (2 and 3 or 1 and 4)
The engine runs on 2 cylin- Wiring - connections — electrical part
5.3
ders of relevant injector After turning off and back on again the en-
5.4
gine turns with 3
5.1 Blinking Injector electrical part short 3.1 - 3.2 - 3.3 - 3.4 Engine test.
or to ground or circuit open
Engine running with 3 cylin- Check wiring, connections and compo-
5.2
ders nent.
or
5.3
or
5.4
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
EDC
DAILY

WARNING REMARKS
LIGHT
Print 603.93.281
5.7 Blinking Power stage of cylinders 1 3.1 - 3.2 - 3.3 - 3.4 Delete fault memory and try again It might happen if the outer casing of the
or and 4 or 2 and 3 (in con- control unit has been shorted with battery
The engine runs on 2 cylin- If the error remains, call the Help
5.8 trol unit) defective + (accidentally with a spanner, etc.)
ders Desk and follow their instructions to
replace the control unit, if necessary.
6.1 Blinking Flywheel sensor: signal mis- Difficult starting with warm Read parameters on Modus IWT- Should flywheel signal be missing, camshaft
sing or not plausible engine, starting impossible IT2000. sensor signal is adopted
with cold engine
Check wiring, connections and sensor
Power reduction (and noise assembling
since pre-injection is not per-
formed)
6.2 Blinking Camshaft sensor: signal Difficult starting with warm Check wiring, connections and sensor Should camshaft signal be not good, flywheel
missing or not plausible engine, starting impossible assembling sensor timing signal is adopted
with cold engine
Power reduction
6.4 Off The engine has over- If the over-revving occurred Data saved, verify the duration and Sensitize the driver about the correct use of
revved, probably driven, when driven, no reaction frequency of the over-revving the vehicle
perceptible by the driver
or: Delete the fault memory
(other than the indicator
crankshaft sensor signal (in light blinking)
this case, signalling error
6.1)
143
Base - May 2004

EDC
144
WARNING REMARKS
LIGHT
Base - May 2004

8.1 Blinking Excessive current to regu- Engine off if actual pressure is Visually inspect absence of fuel leaks If ECU detects a pressure value significantly
lator - injectors with blow- lower than a certain value from high pressure pipes and rail. lower than the calculated value, engine is
by at end of lifetime, leaks with respect to target pres- Check pressure relief valve tightness. switched off
from pressure relief valve, sure.
Check wiring and regulator coil resis- NOTE: injectors must not show blow-by with
regulator locked open, 3rd

Power reduction tance. If also 8.4 is displayed or injector < 200.000 km covered
pumping element cut-out
and pressure relief valve malfunctioning
always powered, high pres- Noise increase since pre-in- WARNING! If failure memory is deleted, en-
can be excluded. Check 3rd pumping
sure pump breakage, rail jection is not performed gine will not start but failure is no longer indi-
element cut-out wiring and connec-
breakage or pipe breakage cated
tions and replace high pressure pump
between injection pump
if required. For this reason, before deleting the fault
and rail
memory it is advisable to print out its content.
8.1 Blinking Pressure regulator locked 8.3 - 8.4 If 8.3 blink code is not displayed, replace
closed rail pressure sensor; otherwise check
Power reduction
regulator resistance. Replace pump and
Noise increase since pre-in- regulator if required.
jection is not performed
If also 8.3 + 8.4 are displayed, contact
Help Desk and comply with its instruc-
tions to replace the ECU, if required
8.2 Blinking Rail pressure sensor short Power reduction Read parameters on Modus IWT-
to positive or to ground or IT2000.
Noise increase since pre-in-
circuit open
jection is not performed Check wiring, and replace sensor
8.3 Blinking Pressure regulator short to 8.1 and 8.4 could be present Check wiring, connections and regula- Restarting impossible
ground or to positive or cir- tor. Replace high pressure pump if 8.1
Engine switching off or not
cuit open - 8.3 are displayed.
starting
Replace ECU if 8.3 - 8.4 are displayed,
if required.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
EDC
DAILY

WARNING REMARKS
LIGHT
Print 603.93.281
8.4 Off 3rd pumping element cut- 8.1 Active diagnostic with Engine test to 3rd pumping element not cut-out when ex-
out solenoid valve control check pump operation pected, pump can therefore be poor lubri-
Error in ECU memory
short to ground or circuit cated when motoring over (long downhill
open with warm engine and exhaust brake on over
nent
peak rpm).
CAUTION
NEVER RUN DOWNHILL WITH ENGINE
OFF AND GEAR ENGAGED.
8.5 On EGR monitoring: incorrect EGR is turned off Check that the EGR pneumatic valve In case of any defect with the wiring of pin
implementation of the is not jammed shut or open (or in- 8A, the errors related to all the devices
Emissions not in conformity
EGR percentage calcu- tentionally tampered with) connected to this pin will be stored in
with legislation
lated by the control unit memory
Check that the pipe between the so-
Smoke at high speed - re-
lenoid valve and the EGR pneumatic
duced performance
valve is not crushed, punctured or de-
tached
Check wiring - connectors and sole-
noid valve
8.6 On EGR solenoid valve short- EGR fails to work or works Check the EGR solenoid valve works In case of any defect with the wiring of the
circuited or with open cir- constantly properly (diagnosis active with the EDC connector pin 8A, the errors related
cuit diagnostic tool) to all the devices connected to this pin will
Emissions not in conformity
be stored in memory
with legislation Using a multimeter, check the integ-
rity of the solenoid valve
Smoke at high speed - re-
duced performance
145
Base - May 2004

EDC
146
WARNING REMARKS
LIGHT
Base - May 2004

8.7 Blinking Debimeter or air flow-rate EGR not working Measurable parameters
meter (EGR version only)
Power reduction Check wiring and replace flow-meter,
shorted to +Batt., shorted
if required
to earth or with open cir- Increase in noise since pre-
cuit, on the supply or injection is not effected Check air circuit (loss due to too low
measuring circuit air mass, waste-gate valve operation for

too high air mass found max. power
Airflow signal not plausible
and high speed), replace flow-meter
8.8 Off Intake air pressure sensor No reaction perceivable by Check the sensor and associated wir-
for EGR shorted or with the driver ing work properly
open circuit
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
EDC
DAILY

WARNING REMARKS
LIGHT
Print 603.93.281
9.1 Blinking ECU internal failure Engine switching off or not If failure persists, contact Help Desk In this case ECU cannot perform switching off
starting. In certain cases it and comply with its instructions to re- diagnostic and it is impossible to restart. If
First switching off after re-
could not switch off and place the ECU, if required ECU was already being initialised, an improper
placing with new ECU not
going to power reduction engine switching off procedure (or current
performed through key
level cut-off from alternator with engine running)
(+15), but by disconnect-
results in storing of many system failures,
ing the battery positive with
under ambient conditions of low battery volt-
engine on
age and engine speed below idling. No failure
could be stored, it depends on ECU damages
9.1 Blinking ECU internal failure Engine could switch off with- If failure persists, contact Help Desk This can take place when ECU power is cut
out being possible to restart and comply with its instructions to re- out not by the key
it place the ECU, if required
No failure could be stored, it depends on ECU
Power reduction (and noise damages
increase since pre-injection is
not performed)
9.2 On Control unit EEPROM The data are not saved on Delete fault memory
fault switching off the engine.
If the error remains, call the Help
The fault memory is lost, it Desk and follow their instructions to
is possible to read solely replace the control unit, if necessary
the current faults and not
the intermittent ones
The curb idle speed that
may have been set with the
Cruise Control is not saved
9.3 Blinking Communication problems Engine switching off or not Check wiring, connections and compo-
with Immobilizer in short or starting. nent
circuit open to CAN line
Perform Immobilizer diagnostic
147
Base - May 2004

EDC
148
WARNING REMARKS
LIGHT
Base - May 2004

9.4 On Main contactor fails to dis- 3.5 Status parameters The control unit stays supplied and the
connect EDC indicator light on even with the key off
battery discharges Check wiring, connections and com-
ponent
9.5 Off After Run interrupted sev- Fault memory and other Check the control unit supply wiring Investigate any incorrect use of the vehicle
eral times operational data are not to find any intermittent false contacts
correctly stored in EE-
If the wiring is in order, change the
PROM
main contact
9.6 Blinking Failure of the internal test The engine fails to stop in Delete the fault memory: if the error
procedure that takes place the preset time when the remains, in normal conditions of
in the control unit each +15 key is turned OFF switching off the engine, call the Help
time the engine stops Desk to replace the control unit, if
necessary
9.7 Blinking ECU internal failure in sen- 1.4 - 2.4 - 8.2 and 8.7 can be If failure persists, contact Help Desk
sor power circuit displayed at the same time and comply with its instructions to re-
place the ECU, if required
Power reduction (and noise

increase since pre-injection is
not performed)
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
EDC
DAILY

WARNING REMARKS
LIGHT
Print 603.93.281
9.8 Blinking ECU software internal fail- Engine switching off or not If failure persists, contact Help Desk In certain cases engine could not be restarted
ure due to the attempt of starting. and comply with its instructions to re- now and then
tampering with ECU data- place the ECU, if required
set
9.9 Blinking ECU software internal fail- Possible short injection cut- If failure persists, contact Help Desk
ure or attempt to tamper off, indication of other fail- and comply with its instructions to re-
with ECU data-set ures with ambient para- place the ECU, if required
meters not consistent
Impossible to restart engine
Light defect at gear shifting
149
Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ENGINE
1st Section
DTC-FMI error codes
with EDC central unit
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Failing Type of Checks to be Measuring Values to be
DTC FMI Visible failure Possible Cause Repair action Remarks
DAILY
component Failure performed conditions detected

01 01 VEHICLE - EXCEEDED A/C Short-circuit to Check wiring and
Print 603.93.281
AIR-CONDITIO UPPER compressor positive. connections.
NER LIMIT always on. Replace relay if
COMPRESSOR required.
RELAY (DTC 1)
01 02 VEHICLE - BELOW Check correct Short-circuit to Check wiring and
AIR-CONDITIO LOWER operation of ground. connections.
NER LIMIT warning light Replace relay if
COMPRESSOR using ”Active required.
RELAY (DTC 1) diagnostic”
procedure.
01 04 VEHICLE - NO A/C Open circuit, Check wiring and
AIR-CONDITIO SIGNAL compressor not relay connections.
NER working. disconnected. Replace relay if
RELAY (DTC 1)
01 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL A/C Open circuit, Check wiring and
AIR-CONDITIO NOT compressor not relay connections.
NER PLAUSIBLE working. disconnected. Replace relay if
RELAY
02 04 VEHICLE - NO A/C No CAN line Check wiring and
AIR-CONDITIO SIGNAL compressor not signal. connections.
NER working. Replace relay if

RELAY
02 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL A/C Non plausible Check wiring and
AIR-CONDITIO NOT compressor not CAN line signal. connections.
NER PLAUSIBLE working. Replace relay if
RELAY
03 01 ELECTRONIC EXCEEDED Wrong ECU Switch key on/off
CONTROL UPPER programming. and wait for a few
UNIT - LIMIT Probable seconds, clear
INTERNAL ECU electromagnetic failure memory. If
FAULT interference. the error persists,
Faulty ECU. call the Help Desk
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
153
Base - May 2004

154
03 02 ELECTRONIC BELOW Wrong ECU Switch key on/off
Base - May 2004

CONTROL LOWER programming. and wait for a few
for instructions on
how to replace the

ECU.
03 04 ELECTRONIC NO Wrong ECU Switch key on/off
CONTROL SIGNAL programming. and wait for a few
UNIT - Probable seconds, clear
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
03 08 ELECTRONIC SIGNAL Wrong ECU Switch key on/off
CONTROL NOT programming. and wait for a few
UNIT - PLAUSIBLE Probable seconds, clear
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
05 01 EGR - EXCEEDED Possible poor Flow meter Check integrity of Power
INCORRECT UPPER performance in short-circuit or flow meter and reduction and
DEBIMETER LIMIT acceleration. open circuit. wiring between flow deactivated
SIGNAL meter connector EGR function.
and EDC
connector.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

05 02 EGR - BELOW Possible poor Flow meter Check integrity of Power
Print 603.93.281
INCORRECT LOWER performance in short-circuit or flow meter and reduction and
DEBIMETER LIMIT acceleration. open circuit. wiring between flow deactivated
SIGNAL meter connector EGR function.
and EDC
connector.
07 01 EGR - EXCEEDED Possible poor Flow meter Check integrity of Power
DEBIMETER UPPER performance in short-circuit or flow meter and reduction and
SIGNAL OUT OF LIMIT acceleration. open circuit. wiring between flow deactivated
LIMIT meter connector EGR function.
and EDC connector.
07 02 EGR - BELOW Possible poor Flow meter Check integrity of Power
DEBIMETER LOWER performance in short-circuit or flow meter and reduction and
SIGNAL OUT LIMIT acceleration. open circuit. wiring between flow deactivated
OF LIMIT meter connector EGR function.
and EDC
connector.
08 01 VEHICLE - EXCEEDED Incorrect Short-circuit to In ”Measurable Make sure that
ACCELERATOR UPPER accelerator positive, voltage parameters” accelerator
PEDAL 1 LIMIT pedal operation, exceeding 4700 environment, check pedal travel is
engine idling at mV. that the ”accelerator not hindered.
1500 rpm. pedal position”
parameter changes
proportionally to the
position of the pedal
from 0% to 100%.
Check wiring and
connections.
Replace accelerator
pedal if required.
155
Base - May 2004

156
08 02 VEHICLE - BELOW Incorrect Short-circuit to In ”Measurable Make sure that
Base - May 2004

ACCELERATOR LOWER accelerator ground. parameters” accelerator
PEDAL 1 LIMIT pedal operation, environment, check pedal travel is
engine idling at that the not hindered.
1500 rpm. ”accelerator pedal
position” parameter
changes
proportionally to
the position of the

pedal from 0% to
100%. Check wiring
and connections.
Replace accelerator
pedal if required.
08 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL Incorrect Accelerator In ”Measurable Make sure that
ACCELERATOR NOT accelerator pedal parameters” accelerator
PEDAL 1 PLAUSIBLE pedal operation, potentiometer environment, check pedal travel is
engine idling at 1 and that the not hindered.
1500 rpm. accelerator ”accelerator pedal
pedal position” parameter
potentiometer changes
2 values not proportionally to
plausible. the position of the
pedal from 0% to
100%. Check wiring
and connections.
Replace accelerator
pedal if required.
09 01 VEHICLE - EXCEEDED Incorrect Short-circuit to In ”Measurable Make sure that
ACCELERATOR UPPER accelerator positive, voltage parameters” accelerator
PEDAL 2 LIMIT pedal operation, exceeding 4700 environment, check pedal travel is
engine idling at mV. that the not hindered.
changes
proportionally to
the position of the
pedal from 0% to
100%. Check wiring
and connections.
Replace accelerator
pedal if required.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

09 02 VEHICLE - BELOW Incorrect Short-circuit to In ”Measurable Make sure that
Print 603.93.281
ACCELERATOR LOWER accelerator ground. parameters” accelerator
PEDAL 2 LIMIT pedal operation, environment, check pedal travel is
engine idling at that the not hindered.
changes
proportionally to
the position of the
pedal from 0% to
100%. Check wiring
and connections.
Replace accelerator
pedal if required.
09 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL Incorrect Accelerator In ”Measurable Make sure that
ACCELERATOR NOT accelerator pedal parameters” accelerator
PEDAL 2 PLAUSIBLE pedal operation, potentiometer environment, check pedal travel is
engine idling at 1 and that the not hindered.
1500 rpm. accelerator ”accelerator pedal
pedal position” parameter
potentiometer changes
2 values not proportionally to
plausible. the position of the
pedal from 0% to
100%. Check wiring

and connections.
Replace accelerator
pedal if required.
0A 01 ENGINE 1 - EXCEEDED Possible Faulty Replace ECU.
ATMOSPHERIC UPPER smokiness at environmental
PRESSURE LIMIT high altitude. pressure sensor
SENSOR Problematic in ECU.
cranking at high
altitude.
0A 02 ENGINE 1 - BELOW Possible Faulty Replace ECU.
ATMOSPHERIC LOWER smokiness at environmental
PRESSURE LIMIT high altitude. pressure sensor
SENSOR Problematic in ECU.
cranking at high
altitude.
157
Base - May 2004

158
0B 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL Power Press brake and Check wiring and If the brake is
Base - May 2004

ACCELERATOR NOT reduction: accelerator at connections. actuated while
PEDAL/BRAKE PLAUSIBLE engine rpm the same time. Replace sensor if the accelerator is
PEDAL SUSPECT drop to idling required. pressed, the
speed. motor runs on
slow idling until
the brake is
released, so that
the vehicle can

be stopped even
if the pedal of the
accelerator
remains stuck on
the intermediate
position. Instead
you can
accelerate while
the pedal is
pressed without
the interference
of safety
measures.
0C 01 EGR - AIR MASS EXCEEDED EGR off. EGR Check, if the EGR
SUPPLY TOO UPPER Emissions not monitoring: pneumatic valve is
LOW LIMIT compliant with incorrect EGR not locked in Open
law. Derated percentage or Closed-Position
performance actuation 2) Check, that the
and smoke at calculated by solenoid valve and

high engine rpm. ECU. the EGR pneumatic
valve is not squashed
or holed or detached
3) Check the EGR
solenoid
valve-functionality
4) Check the
solenoid
valve-integrity by
means of a
multimeter
5) Check the wiring
harness between the
solenoid valve and
DAILY
the EDC connector.
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

0D 02 EGR - AIR MASS BELOW EGR off. EGR Check, if the EGR
Print 603.93.281
SUPPLY TOO LOWER Emissions not monitoring: pneumatic valve is
HIGH LIMIT compliant with incorrect EGR not locked in Open
valve is not
squashed or holed
or detached
3) Check the EGR
solenoid
valve-functionality
4) Check the
solenoid
valve-integrity by
means of a
multimeter
5) Check the wiring
harness between
the solenoid valve
and the EDC
connector.
11 01 ENGINE 1 - EXCEEDED Positive power Check wiring and Possible smoke
BOOST UPPER reduction and connections. in exhaust

PRESSURE LIMIT smoke in Possibly replace during
SENSOR exhaust. sensor. Check in acceleration.
”measurable Replace if
parameter” required.
environment that
atmospheric
pressure sensor and
turbo charger air
pressure sensor
values are similar
when engine is off.
11 02 ENGINE 1 - BELOW Positive power Check wiring and Possible smoke
BOOST LOWER reduction and connections. in exhaust
PRESSURE LIMIT smoke in Replace sensor if during
SENSOR exhaust. required. acceleration.
Replace if
required.
159
Base - May 2004

160
11 08 ENGINE 1 - SIGNAL Positive power Faulty sensor. Check wiring and
Base - May 2004

BOOST NOT reduction and connections.
PRESSURE PLAUSIBLEsmoke in Replace sensor if
SENSOR exhaust. required.
12 01 ENGINE 2 - EXCEEDED Problematic Flat battery, Check battery state Replace
BATTERY UPPER cranking. interrupted with diagnostic tool alternator,
VOLTAGE LIMIT wiring. (measurable regulator or
parameters). Check battery.
wiring and
connections.
12 02 ENGINE 2 - BELOW Engine does not Faulty battery, Check with Replace battery,
BATTERY LOWER start. Possible faulty alternator, diagnostic tool. alternator or
VOLTAGE LIMIT power faulty ECU. ECU if required.
reduction.
13 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL Brake signal The two switch Check wiring and
BRAKE PEDAL NOT plausibility, states are connections.
SIGNAL ERROR PLAUSIBLE possibly no different. Replace sensor if
brake lights, required.
Cruise Control /
PTO not
working.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

14 01 ENGINE 1 - EXCEEDED Problematic Faulty sensor, Check wiring and 1- Measure type: 1- Connector 1- Min. value:
Print 603.93.281
COOLANT UPPER cold cranking. interrupted connections. Resistance (KOhm) Not connected; 0,11 KOhm;
TEMPERATURE LIMIT Possible power wiring. Replace sensor if Measure point 1: Key +15 OFF; Max. value: 48,3
SENSOR reduction. required. Sensor Pin: 1 KOhm; Typical
2- Connector
Measure point 2: Value: 2,5
Not connected;
Sensor Pin: 2 KOhm;
Key +15 OFF;
2- Measure type: 2- Typical Value:
3- Connector
Resistance (Ohm) 0,1 Ohm;
Not connected;
Measure point 1:
Key +15 OFF; 3- Typical Value:
ECU Pin: A58
0,1 Ohm;
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 1
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A41
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 2
14 02 ENGINE 1 - BELOW Problematic Faulty sensor, Check wiring and 1- Measure type: 1- Connector 1- Min. value:
COOLANT LOWER cold cranking. interrupted connections. Resistance (KOhm) Not connected; 0,11 KOhm;
2- Connector
Not connected;
Sensor Pin: 2 KOhm;

Key +15 OFF;
3- Connector
Not connected;
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A58
0,1 Ohm;
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 1
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A41
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 2
161
Base - May 2004

162
14 08 ENGINE 1 - SIGNAL Problematic Faulty sensor, Check wiring and 1- Measure type: 1- Connector 1- Min. value:
Base - May 2004

COOLANT NOT cold cranking. interrupted connections. Resistance (KOhm) Not connected; 0,11 KOhm;
TEMPERATURE PLAUSIBLE Possible power wiring. Replace sensor if Measure point 1: Key +15 OFF; Max. value: 48,3
2- Connector
Not connected;
Sensor Pin: 2 KOhm;
Key +15 OFF;
3- Connector

Not connected;
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A58
0,1 Ohm;
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 1
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A41
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 2
15 01 ENGINE 1 - EXCEEDED Faulty coolant Replace sensor. 1- Measure type: 1- Connector 1- Min. value:
COOLANT UPPER temperature Resistance (KOhm) Not connected; 0,11 KOhm;
TEMPERATURE LIMIT sensor. Measure point 1: Key +15 OFF; Max. value: 48,3
SENSOR (TEST) Sensor Pin: 1 KOhm; Typical
2- Connector
Not connected;
Sensor Pin: 2 KOhm;
Key +15 OFF;
3- Connector

Not connected;
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A58
0,1 Ohm;
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 1
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A41
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 2
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

1E 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL Clutch switch: Gear shift Check wiring and The anomaly
Print 603.93.281
CLUTCH NOT signal either not detected connections. caused by
SIGNAL PLAUSIBLE plausible or not without pressing Replace sensor if incomplete
SUSPECT present. Cruise brake pedal. required. clutch operation
Control / PTO if everything is
not working or OK.
engine revs up
to maximum
speed when
clutch pedal is
pressed and
Cruise control /
PTO is on.
20 01 EGR - EGR EXCEEDED EGR solenoid 1) Check integrity of EGR either not
POWER ST. UPPER valve solenoid valve with working or
SHORT TO LIMIT short-circuit to multimeter. always working.
BATT. battery. 2) Check wiring Emissions not
between solenoid compliant with
valve and EDC law. No reaction
connector. perceivable by
driver.
21 02 EGR - SHORT BELOW Solenoid valve 1) Check integrity of EGR either not
CIRCUIT TO LOWER short-circuit to solenoid valve with working or
GROUND ON LIMIT ground. multimeter. always working.
EGR VALVE 2) Check wiring Emissions not

driver.
22 04 EGR - OPEN NO EGR solenoid 1) Check integrity of EGR either not
CIRCUIT ON SIGNAL valve solenoid valve with working or
EGR VALVE short-circuit or multimeter. always working.
open circuit. 2) Check wiring Emissions not
driver.
163
Base - May 2004

164
22 08 EGR - OPEN SIGNAL EGR solenoid 1) Check integrity of EGR either not
Base - May 2004

CIRCUIT ON NOT valve solenoid valve with working or
EGR VALVE PLAUSIBLE short-circuit or multimeter. always working.
driver.
24 01 ENGINE SPEED - EXCEEDED Possible No signal, open Check wiring and Flywheel sensor
CAMSHAFT UPPER problematic circuit. connections. timing signal
SENSOR LIMIT cold cranking. adopted if
camshaft signal is
not correct.
24 02 ENGINE SPEED - BELOW Possible No signal, open Check correct Flywheel sensor
CAMSHAFT LOWER problematic circuit, faulty assembly of sensor timing signal
SENSOR LIMIT cold cranking. sensor. and phonic wheel, adopted if
check engine timing. camshaft signal is
not correct.
25 01 ENGINE SPEED - EXCEEDED Problematic Faulty sensor. Check wiring and Camshaft
CRANKSHAFT UPPER cold cranking, connections. sensor speed
SENSOR LIMIT power adopted if signal
reduction is not present.
(possible noise
due to missed
pre-injection).
25 02 ENGINE SPEED - BELOW Problematic Faulty sensor. Check wiring and Camshaft
CRANKSHAFT LOWER cold cranking, connections. sensor speed

(possible noise
due to missed
pre-injection).
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

26 01 ENGINE SPEED - EXCEEDED Possible power Incorrect Check wiring, Longer cranking
Print 603.93.281
FAULT UPPER reduction. camshaft phonic connections and time.
BETWEEN LIMIT wheel assembly. sensor, check that
FLYWHEEL phonic wheel is
SENSOR AND fitted correctly.
CAMSHAFT
28 01 ENGINE 1 - FUEL EXCEEDED Possible power Short-circuit to Check wiring and
1- Measure type: 1- Connector 1- Typical Value:
TEMPERATURE UPPER reduction. positive, connections. Resistance (Ohm) Not connected; 1 Ohm;
SENSOR LIMIT excessively low Replace sensor if
Measure point 1: Key +15 OFF;
2- Typical Value:
temperature is required. Sensor Pin: 1
2- Connector 0,1 Ohm;
detected. Measure point 2:
Not connected;
Sensor Pin: 2 3- Typical Value:
Key +15 OFF;
2- Measure type: 0,1 Ohm;
Resistance (Ohm) 3- Connector
Measure point 1: Not connected;
ECU Pin: A52 Key +15 OFF;
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 1
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A51
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 2
28 02 ENGINE 1 - FUEL BELOW Possible power Short-circuit to Check wiring and 1- Measure type: 1- Connector 1- Typical Value:
TEMPERATURE LOWER reduction. ground, connections. Resistance (Ohm) Not connected; 1 Ohm;
SENSOR LIMIT excessively high Replace sensor if Measure point 1: Key +15 OFF;
2- Typical Value:
Not connected;
Key +15 OFF;
2- Measure type: 0,1 Ohm;
Measure point 1: Not connected;
ECU Pin: A52 Key +15 OFF;
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 1
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A51
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 2
165
Base - May 2004

166
29 01 ENGINE 1 - FAN EXCEEDED Fan relay not Fan relay Check wiring and Possible
Base - May 2004

RELAY UPPER working. short-circuit to connections. increased fuel
LIMIT positive. Replace relay if consumption.
required. Possible engine
overheating and
power
reduction.
29 02 ENGINE 1 - FAN BELOW Fan relay not Fan relay Check wiring and Possible
RELAY LOWER working. short-circuit to connections. increased fuel

LIMIT ground. Replace relay if consumption.
overheating and
power
reduction.
29 04 ENGINE 1 - FAN NO Fan relay not Check wiring and Possible
RELAY SIGNAL working. connections. increased fuel
Replace relay if consumption.
overheating and
power
reduction.
29 08 ENGINE 1 - FAN SIGNAL Fan relay not Check wiring and Possible
RELAY NOT working. connections. increased fuel
PLAUSIBLE Replace relay if consumption.
overheating and
power
reduction.
2A 01 ENGINE 1 - EXCEEDED Fuel filter Filter heater Check wiring and Battery goes flat.
PRE-HEATING UPPER pre-heater relay relay connections.
RELAY FUEL LIMIT not working. short-circuit to Replace relay if
FILTER positive - Heater required.
always on also at
fuel
temperature >
5° C.
2A 02 ENGINE 1 - BELOW Fuel filter Filter heater Check wiring and Battery goes flat.
PRE-HEATING LOWER pre-heater relay relay connections.
FILTER ground. required.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

2A 04 ENGINE 1 - NO Fuel filter Check wiring and Battery goes flat.
Print 603.93.281
PRE-HEATING SIGNAL pre-heater relay connections.
RELAY FUEL not working. Replace relay if
FILTER required.
2A 08 ENGINE 1 - SIGNAL Fuel filter Check wiring and Battery goes flat.
PRE-HEATING NOT pre-heater relay connections.
RELAY FUEL PLAUSIBLE not working. Replace relay if
FILTER required.
2F 01 ENGINE 2 - EXCEEDED Possible Short-circuit to Check wiring and
GLOW PLUG UPPER problematic positive, glow connections.
RELAY LIMIT cold cranking. plugs always on Replace relay if
also with ECU required.
off, possible
battery
deployment.
2F 02 ENGINE 2 - BELOW Short-circuit to Check wiring and
GLOW PLUG LOWER ground, glow connections.
RELAY LIMIT plugs always on. Replace relay if
required.
2F 04 ENGINE 2 - NO Possible Faulty wiring. Check wiring and Faulty diagnostic
GLOW PLUG SIGNAL problematic connections. light.
RELAY cold cranking. Replace relay if
required.
2F 08 ENGINE 2 - SIGNAL Possible Faulty relay, Check wiring and Possible

GLOW PLUG NOT problematic wiring connections. increased fuel
RELAY PLAUSIBLE cold cranking. interrupted. Replace relay if consumption.
overheating and
power
reduction.
167
Base - May 2004

168
30 01 ENGINE 2 - EXCEEDED Warning light Short-circuit to Check wiring and The driver does
Base - May 2004

COLD START UPPER always off. positive. connections. not wait
LAMP LIMIT Problematic Replace sensor if preheating even
cold cranking. required. when the room
Pre-heater temperatures
warning light are low, because
always on. no warning light
signal is enabled.
Preheating
works, but with
cold start-up no
indication is
available that tells
you when to
start the motor
because the light
is always turned
on.
30 02 ENGINE 2 - BELOW Warning light Short-circuit to Check wiring and The driver does
COLD START LOWER always off. ground. connections. not wait
LAMP LIMIT Problematic Replace sensor if preheating even
signal is enabled.
Preheating
works, but with

cold start-up no
indication is
available that tells
you when to
start the motor
because the light
is always turned
on.
30 04 ENGINE 2 - NO Warning light Check wiring and Warning light off
COLD START SIGNAL always off. connections. during
LAMP Problematic Replace sensor if pre-heating.
cold cranking. required. Replace bulb if
Pre-heater required.
warning light
DAILY
always on.
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

30 08 ENGINE 2 - SIGNAL Warning light Check wiring and Warning light off
Print 603.93.281
COLD START NOT always off. connections. during
LAMP PLAUSIBLE Problematic Replace sensor if pre-heating.
warning light
always on.
31 01 ENGINE 2 - EXCEEDED Possible Short-circuit to Check wiring and Relay unit
CONTROL UPPER problematic positive. connections. Check always on also
SYSTEM LIMIT cold cranking. electrical system with ECU off,
PRE-POSTHEATI between relay and possible battery
NG glow plugs. deployment.
32 01 ELECTRONIC EXCEEDED Faulty ECU. Switch key on/off
CONTROL UPPER and wait for a few
UNIT - LIMIT seconds, clear
INTERNAL ECU failure memory. If
FAULT the error persists,
call the Help Desk
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
33 01 ELECTRONIC EXCEEDED The engine Faulty ECU Switch key on/off
CONTROL UPPER switching EEPROM. and wait for a few
UNIT - LIMIT off-data are not seconds, clear
INTERNAL ECU memorized. The failure memory. If

FAULT failures memory the error persists,
is lost, only the call the Help Desk
present failures for instructions on
and not the how to replace the
intermittent ECU.
ones can be
read, the idling
speed, which
can be
eventually set
by the Cruise
Control
commands,
remains not
memorized.
169
Base - May 2004

170
33 02 ELECTRONIC BELOW The engine Faulty ECU Switch key on/off
Base - May 2004

CONTROL LOWER switching EEPROM. and wait for a few
intermittent ECU.
ones can be
read, the idling
speed, which
can be
eventually set
by the Cruise
Control
commands,
remains not
memorized.
33 04 ELECTRONIC NO The engine Faulty ECU Switch key on/off
CONTROL SIGNAL switching EEPROM. and wait for a few
UNIT - off-data are not seconds, clear
intermittent ECU.
ones can be
read, the idling
speed, which
can be
eventually set
by the Cruise
Control
commands,
remains not
memorized.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

33 08 ELECTRONIC SIGNAL The engine Faulty ECU Switch key on/off
Print 603.93.281
CONTROL NOT switching EEPROM. and wait for a few
UNIT - PLAUSIBLE off-data are not seconds, clear
intermittent ECU.
ones can be
read, the idling
speed, which
can be
eventually set
by the Cruise
Control
commands,
remains not
memorized.

for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
171
Base - May 2004

172
Base - May 2004

for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
39 01 ENGINE 1 - AIR EXCEEDED Problematic Check wiring and Measure type: Connector Not Typical Value: Air temperature
TEMPERATURE UPPER cranking, smoke, connections. Resistance (KOhm) connected; Key 2,5 KOhm; sensor and
SENSOR LIMIT problematic Replace sensor if Measure point 1: +15 OFF; built-in pressure
acceleration. required. Sensor Pin: 1 sensor. The
Measure point 2: sensor is fitted
Sensor Pin: 2 on flow meter in
engines with
EGR.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

39 02 ENGINE 1 - AIR BELOW Problematic Short-circuit to Check wiring and Measure type: Connector Not Typical Value: Air temperature
Print 603.93.281
TEMPERATURE LOWER cranking, smoke, ground, connections. Resistance (KOhm) connected; Key 2,5 KOhm; sensor and
SENSOR LIMIT problematic excessively high Replace sensor if Measure point 1: +15 OFF; built-in pressure
acceleration. temperature is required. Sensor Pin: 1 sensor. The
detected. Measure point 2: sensor is fitted
engines with
EGR.
3A 02 ELECTRONIC BELOW The engine fails Communication Check integrity of Measure type: Connector Typical Value:
CONTROL LOWER to start with CAN Line, run Resistance (Ohm) Connected; Key 60 Ohm Ohm;
UNIT - LIMIT Immobilizer Immobilizer ECU Measure point 1: +15 OFF;
IMMOBILISER ECU problems diagnostics and wait Diagnostic socket.
on CAN Line. for indications Pin: 21 Measure
provided. point 2: Diagnostic
socket. Pin: 22
3C 01 INJECTOR - EXCEEDED Engine not Injector wiring Check wiring and Only two
BENCH 1 UPPER working short-circuit. connections. cylinders
LIMIT properly, Replace injector if running.
possible power required.
reduction.
3C 02 INJECTOR - BELOW Engine not Short-circuit to Check wiring and Only two
BENCH 1 LOWER working ground. connections. cylinders
LIMIT properly, running.
possible power
reduction.
3C 08 INJECTOR - SIGNAL Engine not Injector Check wiring and Only two
BENCH 1 NOT working electrical system connections. cylinders
PLAUSIBLE properly, failure. Replace injector if running.
reduction.
3D 04 INJECTOR - NO Engine not Injector wiring Check wiring and Only two
BENCH 1 SIGNAL working disconnected. connections. cylinders
properly, Replace injector if running.
reduction.
3E 01 INJECTOR - EXCEEDED Engine not Injector wiring Check wiring and Only two
reduction.
173
Base - May 2004

174
3E 02 INJECTOR - BELOW Engine not Short-circuit to Check wiring and Only two
Base - May 2004

possible power
reduction.
3E 08 INJECTOR - SIGNAL Engine not Injector Check wiring and Only two

reduction.
3F 04 INJECTOR - NO Engine not Injector wiring Check wiring and Only two
reduction.
40 01 INJECTOR - EXCEEDED Engine off. Internal ECU Clear failure
INJECTOR A UPPER problem. memory. If the error
SUPPLY LIMIT persists, ensure that
the failure does not
concern the
injectors and call the
Help Desk for
instructions on how
to replace the ECU.
40 02 INJECTOR - BELOW Engine off. Internal ECU Clear failure
INJECTOR A LOWER problem. memory. If the error

concern the
Help Desk for
instructions on how
to replace the ECU.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

40 04 INJECTOR - NO Engine off. Internal ECU Clear failure
Print 603.93.281
INJECTOR A SIGNAL problem. memory. If the error
SUPPLY persists, ensure that
concern the
Help Desk for
instructions on how
to replace the ECU.
40 08 INJECTOR - SIGNAL Engine off. Internal ECU Clear failure
INJECTOR A NOT problem. memory. If the error
SUPPLY PLAUSIBLE persists, ensure that
concern the
Help Desk for
instructions on how
to replace the ECU.
INJECTOR B UPPER problem. memory. If the error
concern the
Help Desk for

instructions on how
to replace the ECU.
175
Base - May 2004

176
Base - May 2004

INJECTOR B LOWER problem. memory. If the error
concern the
Help Desk for
instructions on how
to replace the ECU.

INJECTOR B SIGNAL problem. memory. If the error
concern the
Help Desk for
instructions on how
to replace the ECU.
INJECTOR B NOT problem. memory. If the error
concern the
Help Desk for
instructions on how
to replace the ECU.
42 01 INJECTOR - EXCEEDED Engine not Short-circuit to Check wiring and Only three
INJECTOR 1 UPPER working positive. connections. cylinders
reduction.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

42 01 INJECTOR - EXCEEDED 1- Measure type: 1- Connector 1- Typical Value:
Print 603.93.281
INJECTOR 1 UPPER Resistance (Ohm) Not connected; 0.1 Ohm;
LIMIT Measure point 1: Key +15 OFF;
2- Min. value: 0.5
ECU Pin: A47
2- Connector Ohm; Max.
Measure point 2:
Not connected; value: 0.9 Ohm;
Injector Pin: 2
Key +15 OFF; Typical Value:
2- Measure type: 0.7 Ohm;
Measure point 1: Not connected; 3- Typical Value:
Injector Pin: 1 Key +15 OFF; 0,1 Ohm;
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A16
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 1
42 04 INJECTOR - NO Engine not Injector wiring Check wiring and Only two
INJECTOR 1 SIGNAL working short-circuit. connections. cylinders
reduction.
42 04 INJECTOR - NO 1- Measure type: 1- Connector 1- Typical Value:
INJECTOR 1 SIGNAL Resistance (Ohm) Not connected; 0.1 Ohm;

2- Min. value: 0.5
ECU Pin: A47
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
Measure point 1: Not connected; 3- Typical Value:
Injector Pin: 1 Key +15 OFF; 0,1 Ohm;
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A16
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 1
177
Base - May 2004

178
42 08 INJECTOR - SIGNAL Engine not Injector not Check wiring and Only three
Base - May 2004

INJECTOR 1 NOT working working connections. cylinders
PLAUSIBLE properly, properly. Replace injector if running.
reduction.
42 08 INJECTOR - SIGNAL 1- Measure type: 1- Connector 1- Typical Value:
INJECTOR 1 NOT Resistance (Ohm) Not connected; 0.1 Ohm;
PLAUSIBLE Measure point 1: Key +15 OFF;
2- Min. value: 0.5

ECU Pin: A47
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
3- Connector
Resistance (Ohm)
Not connected; 3- Typical Value:
Measure point 1:
Key +15 OFF; 0,1 Ohm;
Injector Pin: 1
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A16
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 1
43 04 INJECTOR - NO Engine not Injector wiring Check wiring and Only three
INJECTOR 1 SIGNAL working open circuit. connections. cylinders

reduction.
reduction.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

Print 603.93.281
INJECTOR 2 UPPER Resistance (Ohm) Not connected; 0,1 Ohm;
2- Typical Value:
ECU Pin: A17
Measure point 2:
Not connected;
Injector Pin: 1 3- Min. value: 0,5
Key +15 OFF;
2- Measure type: Ohm; Max.
Resistance (Ohm) 3- Connector value: O,9 Ohm;
Measure point 1: Not connected; Typical Value:
ECU Pin: A13 Key +15 OFF; 0,7 Ohm;
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
Injector Pin: 1
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
reduction.
INJECTOR 2 SIGNAL Resistance (Ohm) Not connected; 0,1 Ohm;

2- Typical Value:
ECU Pin: A17
Measure point 2:
Not connected;
Key +15 OFF;
2- Measure type: Ohm; Max.
Resistance (Ohm) 3- Connector value: O,9 Ohm;
Measure point 1: Not connected; Typical Value:
ECU Pin: A13 Key +15 OFF; 0,7 Ohm;
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
Injector Pin: 1
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
179
Base - May 2004

180
Base - May 2004

reduction.
INJECTOR 2 NOT Resistance (Ohm) Not connected; 0,1 Ohm;
2- Typical Value:
ECU Pin: A17
Measure point 2:
Not connected;
Key +15 OFF;
Ohm; Max.
2- Measure type:
3- Connector value: O,9 Ohm;
Resistance (Ohm)
Not connected; Typical Value:
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A13
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
Injector Pin: 1
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2

reduction.
reduction.
reduction.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

Print 603.93.281
reduction.
reduction.
2- Typical Value:
ECU Pin: A31
Measure point 2:
Not connected;
Key +15 OFF;
Ohm; Max.
2- Measure type:
3- Connector value: 0,9 Ohm;
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A1
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 1
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
Injector Pin: 1
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
reduction.
reduction.
181
Base - May 2004

182
Base - May 2004

reduction.

reduction.
2- Typical Value:
ECU Pin: A46
Measure point 2:
Not connected;
Key +15 OFF;
Ohm; Max.
2- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A1
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 1
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
Injector Pin: 1
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
4E 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL Cruise control / Press SET+ / Check correct Replace wiring
CRUISE NOT PTO not SET- and operation of the and connections
CONTROL PLAUSIBLE working. RESUME/ OFF switch by reading if state does not
SWITCH UNIT at the same state parameters. change when
time. Cruise Control
buttons are
pressed.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

50 01 ELECTRONIC EXCEEDED Engine does not Main relay Check wiring and
Print 603.93.281
CONTROL UPPER start, ECU not interrupted or connections.
UNIT - MAIN LIMIT powered or short-circuit. Replace relay if
RELAY DEFECT ECU always required.
powered and
EDC off also at
key-on.
50 02 ELECTRONIC BELOW Engine does not Main relay Check wiring and
CONTROL LOWER start, ECU not interrupted or connections.
powered and
EDC off also at
key-on.
51 01 VEHICLE - EXCEEDED Incorrect PTO Voltage Check wiring and
MULTIPOSITIO UPPER operation. exceeding max. connections.
N SELECTOR / LIMIT threshold, Replace sensor if
PTO short-circuit to required.
positive.
51 02 VEHICLE - BELOW Incorrect PTO Voltage under Check wiring and
MULTIPOSITIO LOWER operation. min. threshold, connections.
N SELECTOR / LIMIT short-circuit to Replace sensor if
PTO ground. required.
51 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL Incorrect PTO Faulty device. Check wiring and
MULTIPOSITIO NOT operation. connections.

N SELECTOR / PLAUSIBLE Replace sensor if
PTO required.
183
Base - May 2004

184
52 04 FUEL PRESSURE NO Engine off. Faulty MPROP. Check wiring and Measure type: Connector Not Min. value: 3.2 High noise.
Base - May 2004

- PRESSURE SIGNAL connections. Resistance (Ohm) connected; Key Ohm; Max.
MPROP Measure point 1: +15 OFF; value: 3.6 Ohm;
REGULATOR ECU Pin: A49 Typical Value:
ERROR Measure point 2: 3.4 Ohm;
ECU Pin: A19
52 08 FUEL PRESSURE SIGNAL Check wiring and Measure type: Connector Not Min. value: 3.2
- PRESSURE NOT connections. Resistance (Ohm) connected; Key Ohm; Max.
MPROP PLAUSIBLE Replace ECU if Measure point 1: +15 OFF; value: 3.6 Ohm;
REGULATOR required. ECU Pin: A49 Typical Value:
ECU Pin: A19
53 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED Short-circuit to Check wiring and
- PRESSURE UPPER battery, faulty connections.
MPROP LIMIT MPROP. Replace MPROP if
REGULATOR required.
ERROR (SHORT
CIRCUIT TO
POSITIVE)
- PRESSURE UPPER ground. Faulty connections.
REGULATOR required.
ERROR (SHORT
CIRCUIT TO
NEGATIVE)

for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

5A 01 ELECTRONIC EXCEEDED Wrong ECU Switch key on/off
Print 603.93.281
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
5A 02 ELECTRONIC BELOW Wrong ECU Switch key on/off
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
5B 01 ELECTRONIC EXCEEDED Wrong ECU Switch key on/off
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
185
Base - May 2004

186
5E 01 ENGINE 1 - FUEL EXCEEDED Fuel pump on Faulty relay, Turn key-on: pump
Base - May 2004

PUMP RELAY UPPER always when short-circuit to must run for
LIMIT engine is off. positive in approximately 10
wiring. seconds (it should
hum). Check pump
relay if pump
remains on. Check
wiring if all checks
are OK.
5E 02 ENGINE 1 - FUEL BELOW Fuel pump not Faulty relay, Turn key-on: pump
PUMP RELAY LOWER working. short-circuit to must run for
LIMIT ground in wiring. approximately 10
seconds (it should
hum). Check the
pump relay,
protection fuse and
wiring if this does
not occur.
5E 04 ENGINE 1 - FUEL NO Fuel pump not Faulty relay, Check wiring and
PUMP RELAY SIGNAL working. wiring connections.
interrupted. Replace relay if
required.
5E 08 ENGINE 1 - FUEL SIGNAL Fuel pump not Faulty relay, Check wiring and
PUMP RELAY NOT working. wiring connections.
PLAUSIBLE interrupted. Replace relay if
required.
5F 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED Short-circuit to Check wiring and Check DTC 103
- RAIL PRESSURE UPPER positive. Faulty connections. error.
SENSOR OR LIMIT sensor. Rail Replace sensor if
SIGNAL ERROR pressure not required.
regular.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

5F 02 FUEL PRESSURE BELOW Short-circuit to Check wiring and
Print 603.93.281
- RAIL PRESSURE LOWER ground, faulty connections.
SENSOR OR LIMIT sensor. Replace sensor if
SIGNAL ERROR required.
60 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED Faulty rail Replace sensor.
- RAIL PRESSURE UPPER pressure sensor.
SENSOR LIMIT
OFFSET
60 02 FUEL PRESSURE BELOW Faulty rail Replace sensor.
- RAIL PRESSURE LOWER pressure sensor.
SENSOR LIMIT
OFFSET
62 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED High pressure Check fuel feed Fuel
- FAULT ON UPPER circuit fuel system. management
THE FUEL LIMIT leakage. and pressure
DRUCK failure in rail.
CONTROL OF
THE RAIL
(POSITIVE
DEVIATION)
62 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED Injector jammed Check hydraulic and Fuel
- FAULT ON UPPER in fuel passage mechanical management
THE FUEL LIMIT open position. efficiency of and pressure
DRUCK injectors. failure in rail.
CONTROL OF
THE RAIL
(POSITIVE
DEVIATION)
187
Base - May 2004

188
62 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED MPROP Check efficiency of Fuel
Base - May 2004

- FAULT ON UPPER adjuster open MPROP adjuster. management
THE FUEL LIMIT movement and pressure
DRUCK jammed. failure in rail.
CONTROL OF
THE RAIL
(POSITIVE
DEVIATION)
62 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED Faulty high Check efficiency of Fuel

- FAULT ON UPPER pressure pump. high pressure pump. management
THE FUEL LIMIT and pressure
CONTROL OF
THE RAIL
(POSITIVE
DEVIATION)
CONTROL OF
THE RAIL
(NEGATIVE
DEVIATION)
64 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED High pressure Check high pressure Fuel
- RAIL PRESSURE UPPER circuit fuel system. Replace management
ERROR: TOO LIMIT leakage. high pressure pump and pressure

LOW if required. failure in rail.
65 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED MPROP Check MPROP
- RAIL PRESSURE UPPER regulator regulator, replace if
ERROR: TOO LIMIT jammed. required.
HIGH
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

66 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED Negative vehicle High pressure Check fuel feed
Print 603.93.281
- ERROR ON UPPER reaction with circuit fuel system, replace high
THE RAIL LIMIT smoke in leakage. pressure pump if
PRESSURE exhaust during required. Faulty fuel
(EXCESSIVE acceleration. feed system (fuel
DUTY CYCLE) pump and filter
jammed).
67 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED Engine off. MPROP Check MPROP Replace
- ERROR ON UPPER regulator regulator, replace if pressure relief
THE RAIL LIMIT jammed. required. valve.
PRESSURE
(EXCESSIVE)
68 02 ELECTRONIC BELOW Switch key on/off
CONTROL LOWER and wait for a few
call the Help Desk
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.

for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
189
Base - May 2004

190
Base - May 2004

for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
69 01 ELECTRONIC EXCEEDED Anomalous Sensor power Switch key on/off Possible fault
CONTROL UPPER engine circuit fault in and wait for a few indications of
UNIT - SENSOR LIMIT operation due ECU. seconds, clear various sensors
POWER SUPPLY to incorrectly failure memory. If powered by
powered the error persists, ECU.
sensors. call the Help Desk
Reduced for instructions on
power. how to replace the
ECU.
69 02 ELECTRONIC BELOW Anomalous Sensor power Switch key on/off Possible fault
CONTROL LOWER engine circuit fault in and wait for a few indications of
ECU.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

6A 01 ELECTRONIC EXCEEDED Anomalous Sensor power Switch key on/off Possible fault
Print 603.93.281
ECU.
6A 02 ELECTRONIC BELOW Anomalous Sensor power Switch key on/off Possible fault
ECU.
6B 01 ELECTRONIC EXCEEDED Anomalous Sensor power Switch key on/off Possible fault

ECU.
191
Base - May 2004

192
6B 02 ELECTRONIC BELOW Anomalous Sensor power
Switch key on/off Possible fault
Base - May 2004

CONTROL LOWER engine circuit fault in
and wait for a few indications of
ECU.
6C 01 VEHICLE - EDC EXCEEDED Warning light Short-circuit to Check correct Warning light
LAMP UPPER not working. positive. operation of should come on
LIMIT warning light using for
”Active diagnostic” approximately 5
procedure. seconds at
key-on. Check
wiring and
connections if
this does not
occur.
6C 02 VEHICLE - EDC BELOW Warning light Short-circuit to Check correct Warning light
LAMP LOWER not working. ground. operation of should come on
key-on. Check
wiring and
connections if
this does not

occur.
6C 04 VEHICLE - EDC NO Warning light Open circuit, Check correct Warning light
LAMP SIGNAL not working. bulb operation of should come on
disconnected. warning light using for
key-on. Check
wiring and
connections if
this does not
occur.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

6C 08 VEHICLE - EDC SIGNAL Warning light Wiring Check wiring and Warning light
Print 603.93.281
LAMP NOT not working. problems. connections. should come on
PLAUSIBLE Replace sensor if for
required. approximately 5
seconds at
key-on. Check
wiring and
connections if
this does not
occur.
6D 08 ENGINE 2 - SIGNAL Check wiring and Key 15 off during
INTERNAL ECU NOT connections. initialisation.
FAULT PLAUSIBLE
(PLAUSIBILTY
ERROR +15)
6E 08 ELECTRONIC SIGNAL Wrong ECU Switch key on/off
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
75 01 VEHICLE - EXCEEDED Speed of 170 Check correct Encourage

VEHICLE SPEED UPPER km/h exceeded. calibration of driver to use the
SENSOR / LIMIT speedometer. vehicle
SIGNAL correctly.
75 04 VEHICLE - NO Interrupted Check wiring and
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL wiring between connections
SENSOR / vehicle speed between vehicle
SIGNAL sensor and speed sensor and
instrument instrument panel.
panel.
75 04 VEHICLE - NO Wiring Check wiring and Intervention
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL interrupted connections required if
SENSOR / between between instrument instrument
SIGNAL instrument panel and EDC panel indicates
panel and EDC ECU. vehicle speed.
ECU.
193
Base - May 2004

194
75 04 VEHICLE - NO Vehicle speed Check correct
Base - May 2004

VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL sensor assembly and
SENSOR / disconnected or efficiency of vehicle
SIGNAL failed. speed sensor.
75 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL Vehicle speed Check correct
VEHICLE SPEED NOT sensor assembly and
SENSOR / PLAUSIBLE disconnected or efficiency of vehicle
75 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL Vehicle speed Wrong Check correct

VEHICLE SPEED NOT on instrument speedometer calibration of
SENSOR / PLAUSIBLE panel does not setting. speedometer.
SIGNAL increase
sensibly.
77 01 VEHICLE - EXCEEDED Wrong vehicle Wrong Check correct
VEHICLE SPEED UPPER speed speedometer calibration of
SENSOR / LIMIT indication. setting. speedometer.
SIGNAL
77 02 VEHICLE - BELOW Wrong vehicle Wrong Check correct
VEHICLE SPEED LOWER speed speedometer calibration of
SIGNAL
77 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL Wrong vehicle Wrong Check correct
VEHICLE SPEED NOT speed speedometer calibration of
SENSOR / PLAUSIBLE indication. setting. speedometer.
SIGNAL

UNIT - PLAUSIBLE Probable seconds, clear failure
INTERNAL ECU electromagnetic memory. If the error
FAULT interference. persists, call the Help
Faulty ECU. Desk for instructions
on how to replace
the ECU.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
ENGINE
2nd Section
SYMPTOMS
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Main engine operating trouble: 6— The engine produces blue smoke;

1— The engine fails to start or cuts out; 7— The engine produces white or black smoke;
2— The engine overheats; 8— The engine knocks abnormally;
3— The engine lacks power; 9— The engine stops;
4— The engine produces black or dark grey smoke; 10 — Fuel consumption too high;
5— The engine produces grey (tending to white) smoke; 11 — Oil pressure low or too high.
1 THE ENGINE FAILS TO START

OR CUTS OUT
Connections to battery terminals efficient. Clean, check, tighten the nuts of the clamps or change
NO them.
YES
Batteries efficient. Perform the checks described in the “Electrical System”

NO Repair Manual.
YES
Starter motor efficient. Perform the checks described in the “Electrical System”
NO Repair Manual.
YES
No air infiltration in the low-pressure supply circuit. Extend the starting procedure.
NO Self-bleeding system.
YES
No moisture in the supply circuit. Eliminate the causes of infiltration.

NO Clean the supply circuit including the tank.
YES
Fuel pre-filter efficient. Analyse and replace if necessary.

NO
(continues)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Pre-post heating system efficient. Diagnosis with Modus — IT2000 — IWT.

NO
YES
High-pressure pump efficient. Engine Test with Modus IWT — IT 2000.

NO
YES
Injector efficient. Engine Test with Modus IWT — IT 2000.

NO Check O-ring seal.
YES
Compression ratio correct. Overhaul the engine or limit repairs to the parts
NO concerned (valves, rings, etc.).
YES
Motor pump efficient. Pump not supplied.

NO Check wiring and fuse.
Buzzing is a sign it is working.
YES
Motor pump efficient. Insert a pressure gauge between the motor pump and
NO filter, with the panel on the pressure must be no less
than 2 bars, otherwise change the motor pump.
YES
Low-pressure supply pipes efficient. Visual analysis to exclude leaks and constrictions.
NO
YES
Fuel return pipes to tank efficient Visual analysis to exclude constrictions.

NO
(continues)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Fuel filter efficient. Insert a pressure gauge between the filter and the
NO high-pressure pump, with the panel on the pressure
must be greater than 1.8 bars, otherwise change the
filtering cartridge and repeat.
YES
Fuel filter clogging sensor efficient. Insert a pressure gauge between the filter and the
filtering cartridge and repeat.
YES
Starter heater solenoid valve efficient. Plug the fuel delivery pipe and try starting again. If the
NO engine starts, check the supply and replace the solenoid
valve if necessary.
YES
Fuel return pipes to the tank upstream of the outlet Insert a pressure gauge upstream of the starter heater
assembly or outlet assembly efficient. NO valve, with the panel on the pressure must be greater
than 0.4 bars, otherwise search for leaks and tighten the
connections properly.
YES
Fuel return pipes to the tank upstream of the Insert a pressure gauge upstream of the starter heater,
recirculation outlet assembly efficient. NO with the panel on the pressure must be less than 0.9 bars,
otherwise remove and clean the recirculation nozzle.
YES
By-pass valve downstream of fuel filter efficient. Insert a pressure gauge between the filter and the
filter base and repeat.
YES
Rail overpressure valve efficient. If the pressure gauge inserted upstream of the
NO high-pressure pump indicates at least 1.8 bars and the
pressure gauge upstream of the starter heater valve at
most 0.9 bars, check the parameters with IWT-IT2000.
(continues)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Rail overpressure valve efficient. If when cranking the rail pressure is less than 150 bars,
NO remove the recirculation assembly, plug the ring
connecting to the rail and inspect the seal of the
overpressure valve.
If there is any blow-by, change the valve.
YES
Repeat the test with IWT-IT2000.
Electro-injector efficient. If after the above test, the rail pressure is still less than
NO 150 bars, change the injector.
YES
High-pressure pump and shut-off valve efficient. If after the above tests, the rail pressure is still less than
NO 150 bars, change the pump-regulator assembly.
YES
Engine flywheel with correct timing. Check the timing is correct; do the timing if necessary.
NO
YES
Timing sensor on flywheel efficient. Check the sensor is in the right position. Position it
NO correctly.
YES
EDC control unit efficient. Change the control unit.

NO
2 THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
Correct coolant level. Check for leaks and restore the level.
NO
(continues)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Water pump drive belts and fan efficient. Change the tensioner.
NO
YES
Water pump efficient. Overhaul or replace the assembly.

NO
YES
Thermostat efficient. Replace.

NO
YES
Radiator efficient. Wash thoroughly, check whether any liquid leaks;

NO replace the part if necessary.
YES
Air filter and circuit piping efficient. Clean or change the defective parts.
NO
YES
Cylinder head gasket efficient. Change.

NO
YES
Electric fan efficient. Check the wiring, coolant temperature sensor and
NO electromagnetic coupling; replace if necessary.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

3 THE ENGINE LACKS POWER
Fuel filters efficient. Change, proceeding as described in the “Operation

NO and Maintenance” booklet.
YES
High and low pressure, supply circuit efficient. Check system coupling seal.
NO
YES
Thermostat efficient. Change.

NO
YES
Fuel in tank. Check the fuel level.

NO
YES
Drawing element of fuel in tank efficient. Check the priming pump and clean the drawing
NO element of any debris.
YES
High-pressure pump efficient. Engine Test with Modus — IWT — IT2000, replace if
NO necessary.
YES
Injectors efficient and flow limiters (if applicable) work Engine Test with Modus — IWT — IT2000, replace if
correctly NO necessary.
Check O-ring seal.
(continues)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Rail overpressure valves efficient. Disconnect the fuel return pipe from the rail and check
NO for any blow-by.
YES
Compression ratio correct. Engine Test with Modus — IWT — IT2000.

NO
YES
Turbocharger efficient (integrity of blades, bearings, Check it works properly.

actuators). NO Repair or replace the assembly.
YES
Valve clearance efficient. Check - adjust.

NO
YES
Waste-gate efficient. Check it works properly.

NO Change.
YES
EGR pneumatic valve efficient. Check it works properly.

NO Change.
YES
Throttle potentiometer efficient. Check wiring and tightening of pedal base.

NO Replace if necessary.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

4 THE ENGINE PRODUCES BLACK

OR DARK GREY SMOKE
Air filter efficient. Change.

NO
YES
Injectors efficient. Engine Test with Modus — IWT — IT2000.

YES
Cylinder compression correct. Engine Test with Modus — IWT — IT2000.

NO
YES
Starter heater solenoid valve efficient. Plug the fuel delivery pipe and try starting again.
NO If the engine starts, check the supply and replace the
solenoid valve if necessary.
YES
Turbocharger efficient. Check it works properly.

NO Repair or replace.
YES
Waste-gate efficient. Check it works properly.

NO Change.
YES
EGR pneumatic valve efficient. Check it works properly.

NO Change.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

5 THE ENGINE PRODUCES GREY

SMOKE, TENDING TO WHITE
Injectors efficient. Engine Test with Modus — IWT IT 2000.

YES
Coolant level correct. Probable passage of coolant into the combustion

NO chambers. Change the cylinder head gasket or overhaul
the engine.
6 THE ENGINE PRODUCES BLUE

SMOKE
Oil in the cylinders. Too much oil consumption.

YES Turbine oil blow-by.
Blow-by from valve guide.
7 THE ENGINE PRODUCES WHITE OR

BLACK SMOKE
Timing sensor on flywheel efficient. Check the sensor is correctly positioned.

YES Position it correctly.
YES
Engine flywheel timing correct. Check the timing is correct; do the timing if necessary.
YES
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

ENGINE
8 THE ENGINE KNOCKS

ABNORMALLY
Knocking identified on the crankshaft. Check the clearance and ovalization of the main journals,
YES the fixing of the screws for the main bearing caps and
engine flywheel, and the oil pressure. Replace the parts or
overhaul the engine.
NO
Knocking identified on the connecting rods. Check the clearance and ovalization of the crankpins, the
YES fixing of the screws for the connecting rod caps and for
distortion of the connecting rods. Replace the parts or
overhaul the engine.
NO
Knocking identified on the pistons. Check the clearance between the pistons and cylinder
YES liners, the integrity of the piston rings and the clearance
between the piston bosses and pins. Replace the parts
or overhaul the engine.
NO
Knocking identified in the cylinder head. Check the working clearance between the rocker arms
YES and valves for the timing. Adjust.
NO
Knocking identified in the timing system. Check and if necessary replace the gears.
YES
YES
Knocking identified in the air compressor. Overhaul or replace the air compressor.
YES
NO
Knocking identified in the injectors. Replace.

YES
(continues)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Starter heater solenoid valve efficient. Plug the fuel delivery pipe and try starting again.
NO If the engine starts, check the supply and replace the
solenoid valve if necessary.
YES
Timing sensor on flywheel efficient. Check the sensor works properly.

NO Position it correctly.
YES
Engine flywheel timing correct. Check timing is correct; do the timing if necessary.
NO
9 THE ENGINE STOPS
Fuel in the tank. Refuel and, if necessary, bleed.

NO
YES
Fuel filters efficient. Replace.

NO
YES
Fuel circuit efficient. Check the circuit and bleed it.

NO
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

10 FUEL CONSUMPTION TOO HIGH
Fuel pipes and tank efficient. Eliminate any leaks and replace the deteriorated parts.
NO
YES
Air filter efficient Replace.

NO
11 OIL PRESSURE LOW OR TOO HIGH
Pressure adjustment valve trips correctly. Check and replace if necessary.

NO
YES
Oil pump and delivery pipes efficient. Check and replace if necessary.
NO
YES
Main and big end bearings efficient. Replace the bearings and if necessary grind the
NO crankshaft.
YES
Engine oil SAE viscosity correct. Replace the engine oil with one of suitable viscosity.
NO
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY ENGINES 8140.43C/63 209
Engines with rotary mechanical

injection pump
Page
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
- Engine 8140.43C.43XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
- Engine 8140.63.40XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

210 ENGINES 8140.43C/63 DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ENGINE
TROUBLESHOOTING
Main engine operating faults with mechanical injection pump:

6- engine emits blue smoke;
1- engine will not start; 7- abnormal knocking from the engine;
2- engine overheats; 8- engine stops;
3- engine lacks power; 9- engine exceeds maximum rpm;
4- engine emits black or dark grey smoke; 10 -oil pressure too high or too low;
5- engine emits grey (whitish) smoke; 11 -excessive fuel consumption.
1 ENGINE WILL NOT START
Battery terminal connections serviceable. Clean, check, tighten clamp nuts or replace.
NO
YES
Battery serviceable. Carry out the checks described in the “Electrical

NO Equipment” repair manual.
YES
Starter motor serviceable. Carry out the checks described in the “Electrical
NO System” repair manual.
YES
Starter heater serviceable. Replace.

NO
YES
Injection pump timing correct. Check correct timing as described in the relevant
NO chapter.
YES
Fuel pump operating correctly. Check and replace if necessary.

NO
(continued)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Injectors serviceable. Check operation and adjust.

NO
YES
No air infiltration in fuel circuit or injection pump. Remove the causes of infiltration.
NO Bleed.
YES
No water in fuel circuit or injection pump. Remove the causes of infiltration.

NO Clean supply circuit, including tank
YES
Compression ratio as specified. Overhaul the engine or limit repairs to the parts
NO concerned (valves, piston rings etc.).
YES
Fuel filters serviceable. Replace.

NO
YES
Automatic advance regulator and electric STOP valve Check and replace the parts concerned.
serviceable. NO
2 ENGINE OVERHEATS
Coolant level correct. Check for leaks and top up.

NO
YES
Water pump and fan driving belts serviceable. Check, adjust tension and replace parts if necessary.
NO
(continued)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Water pump serviceable. Overhaul or replace the unit.

NO
YES
Thermostat serviceable. Replace.

NO
YES
Radiator serviceable. Wash thoroughly, check there are no leaks, replace if

NO necessary.
YES
Air filter and circuit ducts serviceable. Clean or replace defective parts.
NO
YES
NO section.
YES
Cylinder head gasket serviceable. Replace.

NO
YES
Electric fan efficient. Check the wiring. Electromagnetic coupling control

NO switch and electromagnetic coupling or replace them.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

3 ENGINE LACKS POWER
Fuel filters serviceable. Replace, proceeding as described in the

NO “Use and maintenance” booklet.
YES
Fuel circuit serviceable. Check and repair as required.

NO
YES
Thermostat serviceable. Replace.

NO
YES
Feed pump serviceable. Replace.

NO
YES
Injectors serviceable. Check operating and adjust.

NO
YES
NO section.
YES
Injection pump adjusted as specified. Check and adjust the injection pump on the bench.
NO
(continued)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Compression ratio as specified. Using tool 99395682 Motometer, check the specific
NO coupling and make the necessary repairs.
YES
Turbocharger efficient (engine 8140.43C.4..). Repair or replace the unit.

NO
YES
L.D.A. device and circuit efficient (engine 8140.43C.4..) Check.

NO
4 ENGINE EMITS BLACK

OR DARK GREY SMOKE
Air filter serviceable. Replace.

NO
YES
Starter heater serviceable. Replace.

NO
YES
Automatic boost device cutting in. Check and replace if necessary.

NO
YES
Injectors serviceable. Check their operation and set them or replace them.
NO
YES
NO section.
(continued)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

L.D.A. device efficient (engine 8140.43C.4..) Adjust the L.D.A. device using tool 99309002.
NO
YES
Injection pump adjusted as specified. Check injection pump and adjust on bench.
NO
YES
Compression ratio as specified. Using tool 99395682 Motometer, check the specific
NO coupling and do the necessary work.
YES
Good quality diesel fuel. Clean the tank and replace the diesel filters.
NO
5 ENGINE EMITS GREY (WHITISH)

SMOKE
Thermostat operating correctly. Replace.

NO
YES
Injectors serviceable. Check their operation and set them or replace them.
NO
YES
NO section.
YES
Coolant level correct. Coolant probably entering combustion chamber;

NO replace cylinder head gasket or overhaul the engine.
(continued)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ENGINE
Good quality diesel fuel. Clean the tank and replace the diesel filters.
NO
6 ENGINE EMITS BLUE SMOKE
Excessive oil consumption. Check oil breather, cylinder compressions.

YES If necessary, overhaul the cylinder head or engine.
7 ABNORMAL KNOCKING
FROM THE ENGINE
Knocking coming from crankshaft. Check main journals for clearance and ovality, tightness of
YES main bearing cap bolts and flywheel bolts, oil pressure.
Replace parts or overhaul the engine.
NO
Knocking coming from connecting rods. Check crankpins for clearance and ovality, tightness of
YES connecting rod cap bolts, connecting rods for distortion.
Replace parts or overhaul the engine.
NO
Knocking coming from pistons. Check clearance between pistons and cylinder liners,
YES piston rings for breaks, gudgeon pin to piston boss
clearances. Replace parts or overhaul the engine.
NO
Knocking coming from cylinder head. Check operating clearance between rocker arms and
YES valves, injection pump timing, valve timing. Adjust.
NO
Knocking coming from timing gears. Check gears and replace if necessary.
YES
(continued)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Knocking coming from air compressor. Overhaul or replace the air compressor.
YES
NO
Knocking coming from injectors. Check their operation and set them or replace them.
YES
8 ENGINE STOPS
Fuel in tank. Replenish and bleed if necessary.

NO
YES
Fuel filters serviceable. Replace.

NO
YES
Feed circuit serviceable. Check circuit and bleed.

NO
YES
Idling speed correct. Adjust.

NO
YES
Injector pump delivery correct. Check delivery on bench.

NO
(continued)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Injector pump controls serviceable. Replace parts showing deterioration and adjust.
NO
9 ENGINE EXCEEDS MAXIMUM RPM
Speed governor operating correctly. Check and replace worn parts if necessary.
NO
10 OIL PRESSURE TOO LOW

OR TOO HIGH
Pressure relief valve operating. Check and replace if necessary.

NO
YES
Oil pump and delivery pipes serviceable. Check and replace if necessary.
NO
YES
Main and big end bearings serviceable. Replace bearings and if necessary recondition
NO crankshaft.
YES
Engine oil viscosity SAE correct. Replace engine oil with one of suitable viscosity.
NO
11 EXCESSIVE FUEL CONSUMPTION
Fuel tank and pipes serviceable. Eliminate any leaks and replace parts showing
NO deterioration.
(continued)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Air filter serviceable. Replace.

NO
YES
Injector adjustment correct. Check operation and adjust .

NO
YES
Injector pump adjustment correct. Check and adjust on test bench.

NO
YES
L.D.A. device efficient (engine 8140.43C.4..) Adjust the L.D.A. device using tool 99309002.
NO
YES
Injection pump timing correct. Check static setting of injection pump.

NO
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY ENGINES 8140.43C 221
5401 Engine 8140.43C.43XX
Page
- Gas emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
- Smokiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
- Noise emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
TIGHTENING TORQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
ENGINE OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
- Dismantling engine on bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
- Engine assembling at the bench . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
- Setting the timing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
- Injection pump assembling and timing . . . . . . . 237
COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
FEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

222 ENGINES 8140.43C DAILY
Print 603.43.351
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 1
52184

Engine 8140.43C conforms with the Euro2 standards on gas Engine 8140.43C conforms with the limits of smokiness
emissions (measurement on engine bench according to R 49 required by EEC standards 72/306 and R 24-03 with the
cycle), with the following limits fixed by EEC 91/542 standards: following exhaust smokiness values:
— CO (carbon monoxide) < 4.0 g/kWh Maximum power (Bosch BSU opacimeter degrees) 2.0
— HC (hydrocarbons) < 1.10 g/kWh
Noise emissions
Test fuel: CEC RFT 73 - T - 90 - S ≤ 0.05 %.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 2
52178
8140.43C.4... ENGINE LONGITUDINAL SECTION
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 3
52179
8140.43C.4... ENGINE CROSS SECTION
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

8140.43C.4..
Type
ID/TCA

Feeding Supercharged
Injection Direct
∅
Diameter mm 94.4
Stroke mm 100
ρ Compression ratio 18.5
Max. power kW 73.8 ÷ 78.6

(HP) 100.4 ÷ 106.9
rpm 3600
Max. torque Nm 245.8 ÷ 268.6

(kgm) 25.1 ÷ 27.4
rpm 1800

no load
rpm 800 ± 25
Maximum engine
speed, no load
rpm 4200 ± 50
Pressure at T.D.C.
*bar 20 ÷ 26
pressure at T.D.C.
*bar 16
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

8140.43C.4..
Type
ID/TCA
A
VALVE TIMING

B

D
For timing check
mm 0.5 ± 0.05
X
mm 0.5 ± 0.05
X
Running
mm 0.5 ± 0.05
X
mm 0.5 ± 0.05
FUEL SUPPLY
Bosch type injection pump rotating distributor
- with immobilizer VER 824
- without immobilizer VER 824-1
Speed governor all speeds
Cold start K.S.B. electrical, mechanical
Pump arrangement
X
Start of delivery mm 1.10 ± 0.05
BOSCH injector
j nozzle type
yp SACLESS
DSLA 134 P 604
Injection order
- injection pump A-B-C-D

- engine 1- 3 - 4 - 2
bar
Injection pressure bar 240 + 12 *
* When checking, for any values of less than 200 bars, calibrate the injectors at 230 + 8 bar.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

8140.43C.4..
Type
ID/TCA
SUPERCHARGING With intercooler

Turbocharger type KKK K03-2076-CCA 6.68
marked with colour pink
Turbocharger shaft radial clearance -
Turbocharger shaft axial clearance -
Minimum opening stroke of pressure
relief valve mm -
Maximum opening stroke of pressure
relief valve mm 3.5 ± 0.2
Pressure corresponding to the minimum stroke bar -
Pressure corresponding to the maximum stroke bar 1.3 ± 0.002
Turbocharger type MITSUBISHI TD04
marked with colour pink

Turbocharger shaft radial clearance 0.396 ÷ 0.602
Turbocharger shaft axial clearance 0.034 ÷ 0.106
Minimum opening stroke of pressure relief valve mm 1
Maximum opening stroke of pressure relief valve mm 5
Pressure corresponding to the minimum stroke bar 1.11 ± 0.0026
Pressure corresponding to the maximum stroke bar 1.35 ± 0.0039
Oil pressure,
bar
engine hot
at idling speed bar  0.8
at maximum speed bar 3.5
With a centrifuge pump, driven by the crankshaft via a poly-V belt,
COOLING thermostat, fan with electro-magnetic clutch, radiator, heat ex-
changer. “Intercooler”
Thermostat:
fully open: 110º C
OIL REPLENISHMENT
Total capacity at 1st filling
liters 6.9
kg 6.1
replacements:
Urania
U i Daily
D il - engine sump
Urania Turbo liters
Urania LD 5 5.2
kg 4.6
- engine sump
liters 6.3
kg 5.7
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

8140.43C.4..
Type
ID/TCA

∅1 97.39 ÷ 97.45*
Cylinder liners: **
∅2 length L 167.00 ÷ 167.30

Cylinder liners -
∅3
Cylinder barrels:
**
0.005 max
block bottom)

∅1 MONDIAL PISTON
parts type:
∅2 pin bore ∅2 32.003÷32.009
∅1 KS
parts type:
∅2 pin bore ∅2 32.003÷32.009
X
Pistons protrusion
X > 0.40 ÷  0.80
∅3 Gudgeon pin ∅3 31.990 ÷ 31.996
* Diameter to be obtained at servicing when fitting spare cylinder barrels.

** Supplied as spare parts.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

8140.43C.4..
Type
ID/TCA

Piston type MONDIAL PISTON - KS
X1* 2.200 ÷ 2.230
X1 Piston ring grooves X 2 2.050 ÷ 2.070
X2 X3 2.540 ÷ 2.560
X3
S1 S 1* 2.068 ÷ 2.097
S3 S3 2.470 ÷ 2.490
1 0.103 ÷ 0.162
Piston rings - grooves2 0.55 ÷ 0.100
3 0.05 ÷ 0.09
Piston rings 0.4

der liners
X2
X1 0.20 ÷ 0.35
X3
X2 0.30 ÷ 0.50
X3 0.30 ÷ 0.55
Ø1 35.460 ÷ 35.490

∅2
Ø2 60.341 ÷ 60.348
supplied
outside ∅4 35.570 ÷ 35.595
∅3
inside ∅3 32.010 ÷ 32.020
S
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

8140.43C.4..
Type
ID/TCA

X
Max. connecting rod

axis misalignment
tolerance = 0.07
Main journals ∅1
∅1 ∅2 nº 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 80.182 ÷ 80.208
nº 5 86.182 ÷ 86.208
Crankpins ∅2 56.515 ÷ 56.538
Main bearing shells
S1* 2.165 ÷ 2.174
S2* 1.875 ÷ 1.884
Main bearings ∅3
∅3 nº 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 84.588 ÷ 84.614
nº 5 90.588 ÷ 90.614
Bearing shells -
Bearing shells -
big ends 0.035 ÷ 0.083
Main journal,
X 1

X 2
X3
Thrust washer
halves X3 30.900 ÷ 30.950
Crankshaft end
float 0.060 ÷ 0.310
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

8140.43C.4..
Type
ID/TCA
CYLINDER HEADS - VALVE GEAR

∅ 1

cylinder heads ∅1 12.950 ÷ 12.985
∅ 2
∅2 8.023 ÷ 8.038
Valve guide
∅3 13.012 ÷ 13.025
∅ 3

0.027 ÷ 0.075
Valve guide 0.05 - 0.10 - 0.2
∅ 4 Valves:
∅4 7.985 ÷ 8.000
α 60° 15′ ± 7′ 30″
∅4 7.985 ÷ 8.000
α α 45° 30′ ± 7′ 30″
seat
∅1 42.125 ÷ 42.175
∅ 1 37.380 ÷ 37.415
∅1

∅ 2 g of valve seat in
seat; angle
cylinder
li d head:
h d
∅2 42.245 ÷ 42.260
α 60° ± 5′
α ∅2 37.495 ÷ 37.510
α 45° ± 5′
X 1.2 ÷ 1.5
X Recessing of valve X 1 ÷ 1.3

seat and head
0.080 ÷ 0.130
Valve seats -
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

8140.43C.4..
Type
ID/TCA

height:
free height H 52
H 2 kg 43.8 ± 2.5 H1 38.5
kg 77.4 ± 4 H2 28.5
Valve inside spring
height:
free height H 45.5
H under a load of:
H1
H kg 16.4 ± 1 H1 33.5
kg 30 ± 1.5 H2 23.5

X
normal ∅ 33.985 ÷ 34.015
∅ ∅ ∅ oversized ∅ 34.185 ÷ 34.215

∅ 2
normal ∅ 33.934 ÷ 33.950
∅ 1 ∅ 3 oversized ∅ 34.134 ÷ 34.150
Between seats and

0.035 ÷ 0.081
supporting pins
Tappets housing on
∅ cylinder heads
∅ normal 44.000 ÷ 44.025
Tappet ∅ normal 43.950 ÷ 43.970

∅
3.25 to 4.45 mm
Cap
Cam lift:
H
H 9.5
H 10.5
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TIGHTENING TORQUE
NOTE This differs from the analogous section for

8140.43R/B/S/N engines in the following tightening
torques.
TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
Nut M14 x 1.5 fixing toothed bushing to the injection pump 83 8.3
Nut or screw fixing injection pump 25 2.5
Fastening L.D.A. coupling to the intake manifold and to the injection pump 10 1
Screw fixing injector bracket 40 4
Screw fixing top cover of auxiliary element assembly 18 1.8
Fastening diesel inlet and outlet coupling on injection pump 25 2.5
Fastening diesel pipe fittings to the injection pump and injectors 33 3.3
Fastening “OUT” coupling on injection pump 25 2.5
Fixing diesel recovery pipes from the injectors 7 0.7
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
TOOLS
NOTE This differs from the analogous section for 8140.43R/B/S/N engines in the exclusion of tools 99317915 - 99389829
- 99389833 - 99395603 and the addition of the following tools.
99352114 Wrench (13 mm) for nut on crankcase side fixing injection pump
(8140.43C engines only)
99360486 Fitting to check compression in cylinders (use with 99395682)
99395100 Dial gauge holding tool for injection pump setting
99395682 Device for checking diesel engine cylinder compression
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

ENGINE OVERHAUL Figure 6
NOTE This differs from the overhaul of the

8140.43B/R/S/N engines in the following.
540110 Dismantling engine on bench

Figure 4
52228
Remove connections (5) and disconnect fuel recovery pipes

(6) from injectors (4).
Remove connection (8) and disconnect three-way
connection (3) from injection pump including pipes (6-7) and
spring plugs.
52226 Remove injector (4) bracket (1) fixing screws (2).
Remove injectors from cylinder head.
Take out the fitting (4) and disconnect the pipe (3) from the
L.D.A. device (5).
Disconnect the pipe (2) from the fuel recirculation fitting (6).
Remove the air duct (1) complete with pipes (2, 3),
thermostart glow plug (7) and thermostart solenoid valve (8)
from the intake manifold.
Remove the soundproofing cover (9).
Figure 7
Figure 5
52229
Mark the assembly position of the injection pump (1) on the

auxiliary member assembly (2).
Remove the fixing nuts and disconnect the injection pump (1)
from the auxiliary member assembly (2).
52227
NOTE To remove the bottom fixing nut on the crankcase

Disconnect the fuel pipes (1) from the injectors (3) and from side, use wrench 99352114 (3).
the injection pump (2).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

560610 CYLINDER HEAD Figure 10
Figure 8
45074
18880 - Make coincide notch (1) engraved on camshaft driving

Use dial gauge (1) to check whether valve sunk and injector toothed pulley, with that (2) engraved on valve tappets
(2) protrusion from cylinder head surface are falling within the cover.
required value. Figure 11
Engine assembling at the bench

Setting the timing system
Figure 9
41820
- Rotate accessory equipments driving toothed pulley (1)

so as to align pulley hole (1) with that of support and lock
rotation by inserting tool 99360608 (2).
Figure 12
61900
Check whether cylinder 1 piston is at TDC.

This condition takes place when tool 99395214 (1) pin (2) is
fitted into engine flywheel (3) slit (⇒) and control gear hole
(5) and timing gear (4) are facing downward.
45079
- Fit toothed belt (1);

- fit lower cover (4) and tighten fastening screws and nuts
to prescribed torque;
- remove tool (3) so as pushing rod (2), acting on belt
tightener (5), makes toothed belt taut (1);
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 13 Injection pump assembling and timing

Figure 15
62081
NOTE Should joint (2) be replaced, use tool 99365143 to

61900 lock joint (2) rotation when moving nut (4) and tool
99342138 to remove the joint from injection pump
- remove engine flywheel (3) slit (⇒) from tool 99395214
shaft.
(1) pin (2);
- turn the crankshaft slowly in the direction of rotation by
Connect injection pump on accessory equipments group
two turns and check that hole (5) in gear (4) is facing
proceeding as follows:
downwards and that the pin (2) of the tool (1) is inserted
in the slot (→) through the flywheel (3) when the timing - check for the exact timing of valve gear;
belt is taut; the notches (1 and 2, Figure 10) must be - Fit injection pump (2, Figure 16) on auxiliary component
aligned. unit (3, Figure 16). The spline (1) obtained inside pump
control shaft shall coincide with joint projection (3).
Position the injection pump on auxiliary component unit
so that marks performed at removal coincide.
- Screw pump fastening nuts (1, Figure 16) without
Figure 14 tightening them;
Figure 16
52221
86144
- Remove the plug, situated on pump closing screw, and
screw tool 99395100 (5) with the rod in contact with
- lock the tightener (2), tightening the fixing nut at a torque distributor piston crown;
of 37 ÷ 45 Nm; - prevaricate dial gauge 99395603 (5) of ~ 3 mm;
Use tool 99395849 to check timing belt tension (1) which - feed the thermal bulb (4) of K.S.B. device with a 12 V
must be 88 ÷ 112 Hz in point A. voltage, throughout timing duration; in this way K.S.B.
device is cut-out.
NOTE K.S.B. device is cut-out when advance changer lever

is no more engaged.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

- Reverse engine rotation until dial gauge (5, Figure 16) - cut-out feed to K.S.B. device (3);
indicates that pump piston is at BDC.
- remove tool 99395100 with dial gauge (5, Figure 16) and
- Set dial gauge to zero. screw again plug on locking screw;
- remove tool 99395214 (1, Figure 17).
Figure 17
NOTE When refitting fuel pipes, do not reuse metallic

clamp with spring plug and fixing screw, but replace
them with new parts.
Figure 19
- Turn the engine flywheel (3) in its direction of rotation so

that, when the hole (5) of the gear (4) driving the timing
system goes into its lowest position, the pin (2) of tool
99395214 (1) goes into the milled slot (⇒) of the engine
flywheel (3).
In these conditions it is necessary to measure the stroke
of the timing system piston on the dial gauge (5,
Figure 16). If you find the stroke has a different value to
the prescribed one, turn the pump casing in its slot to get
the prescribed value indicated by the dial gauge.
NOTE The injection pump is supplied as a spare part with
Figure 18 the start of delivery already set and with the spacer
(1).
The screw (3) locks the shaft (2) of the injection pump to keep
the above-mentioned setting until the pump is fitted onto the
engine.
After assembly, loosen the screw (3), to make it possible to
insert the spacer (1) between the screw and the casing of the
injection pump, then lock the screw (3), the spacer (1) is used
to ensure the shaft of the injection pump turns.
After tightening the screw (3), twist the end of the spacer (1)
so as to cause it to break off and then be removed.
After fitting the injection pump, check its timing as described
under the relevant heading.
62082
- Tighten the nuts fixing injection pump (1) to auxiliary

component unit (2) to the specified torque. 5432 COOLING
Coolant temperature:
- turning on the fan: 92 ± 2_C;
NOTE To tighten injection pump fastening nut, engine - turning off the fan: 87 ± 2_C.
crankcase side, use key 99352114 (4).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY FEEDING 241
Feeding
Page
INJECTION PUMP TEST VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

COLD INJECTION ADVANCE
AUTOMATIC DEVICE (KSB)
[KALT START BETRIEBSEINRICHTUNG] . . . 247
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
NOTE The test and adjustment values indi-

cated in the text and summary tables
are given as a general indication.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

242 FEEDING DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY FEEDING 243
INJECTION PUMP TEST VALUES
IVECO ENGINEERING No. 500347285 Edit. 1
INJECTION ROTARY PUMP TEST VALUES

Injection pump: VE4/12F1800R824 IVECO PART N.: 500329477
Speed governor: All speeds BOSCH PART N.: 0460 424 177
Engine : 8140.43C.4000 For: IVECO
Timing:
- Injection pump static advance (Output reference ”A”) 1.0 ± 0.5
degrees before |X| after | | T.D.C. with I.P. pumping in phase of delivery at 1 mm from B.D.C.
- Or with piston at T.D.C. and injection pump pumping in phase of delivery
at 1.10 ± 0.04 mm from B.D.C.
- Engine idling speed without load: 800 ± 25 rpm
TEST BENCH WITH STATIC AND DYNAMIC CHARACTERISTICS

CONFORMING TO STANDARDS ISO 4008/1 -/2
- Rotation direction: Right X - Supply pressure: 0.35 ± 0.05 bar

Left - Burette evacuation time:
- Pipes: ∅ 6 x ∅ 2 x450 mm - Test fluid conforming to standard: ISO 4113
- Injectors: 1688 901 027 - Temperature Influx
- Calibrated hole pad: = ∅ 0.5 mm Defluxion X
- Injector setting : 250 ± 3 bar - Thermometer : 55 ± 1 °C
- Backflow chock: ∅ 0.75 mm - Electronic : ± 4 °C
”INJECTION PUMP ADJUSTMENT VALUES”

”THE NUMBERS GIVEN IN BRACKETS SHOULD
BE USED ONLY AS CONTROL VALUES”
1 - START OF DELIVERY 5 - DELIVERY AT FULL LOAD WITHOUT

OVERCHARGING
Pre-lift (from B.D.C.) mm: 0 ± 0.02
Speed rpm: 550
2 - ADVANCE CHANGER TRAVEL
Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 28.5 ± 0.5
Max difference cm3:
Speed rpm: 900
Overcharging pressure hPa: 1200 6 - IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment values mm: 1.2 ± 0.1
Speed rpm: 350
3 - TRANSFER PUMP PRESSURE
Max difference cm3: 6.0 (6.5)
Speed rpm: 900
Overcharging pressure hPa: 1200 7 - ADJUSTING THE RESIDUAL DELIVERY
Adjustment values bar: 5.9 ± 0.3
Speed rpm:
4 - DELIVERY AT FULL LOAD WITH OVERCHARGING
Delivery per 1000 shots cm3:
Speed rpm: 1100 8 - MAXIMUM SPEED ADJUSTMENT
Overcharging pressure hPa: 1200
Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 57.5 ± 0.5 Speed rpm: 2000
Max difference cm3: 4.0 (4.5) Overcharging pressure hPa: 1200
Date: 17-11-1998 Sheet 1/4

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004
244 FEEDING DAILY
9 - START 14 - DELIVERY RUN AND ADJUSTMENT
Speed rpm: 100 .1 Speed rpm: 500 (*)

Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 75.0 ± 20 Overcharging pressure hPa: 500
Minimum delivery cm3: 55.0 Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 48.5 ± 0.5
cm3: (± 3.5)
10 - ”LFB” SETTING
.2 Speed rpm: 2230
Speed rpm:
Overcharging pressure hPa:
.1. Delivery difference
cm3: (± 2.0)
per 1000 shots cm3:
.2. Transfer pump pressure
.3 Speed rpm: 2100
difference bar:
11 - INJECTION ADVANCE RUN Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 21.0 ± 6.0
cm3: (± 8.0)
.1 Speed rpm: 900 .4 Speed rpm: 2000
Advance travel mm: 1.2 ± 0.1 Overcharging pressure hPa: 1200
mm: (± 0.7) Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 43.0 ± 0.5
.2 Speed rpm: 1500 cm3: (± 4.5)
Advance travel mm: 3.6 ± 0.6
mm: (± 0.7) .5 Speed rpm: 1800
.3 Speed rpm: Overcharging pressure hPa: 1200
Advance travel mm: Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 5.8 ± 2.5
mm: cm3: (±3.5)
.4 Speed rpm:
Advance travel mm: .6 Speed rpm: 1100
mm: Overcharging pressure hPa: 1200
12 - TRANSFER PRESSURE RUN cm3: (± 3.5)
Overcharging pressure hPa: 1200 .7 Speed rpm: 600
.1 Speed rpm: 900 Overcharging pressure hPa: 1200
Transfer pump pressure bar: 5.9 ± 0.3 Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 60.5 ± 4.0
.2 Speed rpm: 1800 cm3: (± 6.0)
Transfer pump pressure bar: 8.3 ± 0.5
.3 Speed rpm: 600 .8 Speed rpm: 550
Transfer pump pressure bar: 4.9 ± 0.5 Overcharging pressure hPa: 0
.4 Speed rpm: Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 28.5 ± 0.5
Transfer pump pressure bar: cm3: (±3.5)
13 - BACKFLOW VOLUME ON VALVE
.9 Speed rpm:
.1 Speed rpm: 600 Overcharging pressure hPa:
Overcharging pressure hPa: 1200 Delivery per 1000 shots cm3:
Backflow volume c.c./10s: 113 ÷ 146 cm3:
c.c./10s: (107 ÷ 152)
.2 Speed rpm: 1800 .10 Speed rpm:
Overcharging pressure hPa: 1200 Overcharging pressure hPa:
Backflow volume c.c./10s: 143 ÷ 187 Delivery per 1000 shots cm3:
c.c./10s: (138 ÷ 193) cm3:
Date: 17-11-1998 Sheet 2/4

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281
DAILY FEEDING 245
15 -DELIVERY NULL (STOP) 19 - POTENTIOMETER CALIBRATION AND CHECKING
1 Mechanical: Supply volt:

Speed rpm: 425 Setting
Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 1.5 ± 1.5 Speed rpm:
Voltage volt: 12 Delivery per 1000 shots cm3:
2 Electrical: Potentiometer output voltage volt:
Speed rpm: 350 Checking:
Potentiometer output voltage volt:
16 - DELIVERY AT IDLING SPEED
20 - EGR MICROSWITCH CALIBRATION
1 Speed rpm: 350
(± 4.0) Overcharging pressure hPa:
2 Speed rpm: Delivery per 1000 shots cm3:
21 - GLOW PLUG MICROSWITCH ADJUSTMENT
cm3:
3 Speed rpm:
Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: Contact closed at:
control lever travel
4 Speed rpm:
of injection pump
of injection
Residual delivery check
5 Speed rpm: 22 - CUT-OUT ELECTROMAGNET
Operating minimum voltage volt: 10
17 - ”LFB” CHECK
Rated voltage volt: 12
Speed rpm: 23 - ASSEMBLING AND ADJUSTING DIMENSIONS
1 Delivery difference Denomination:
per 1000 shots cm3: K mm: 3.6
Advance travel diff. mm: MS mm: 0.9
2 Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: Ya mm: 34.0 ± 1.0
Advance travel diff. mm: Yb mm: 47.0 ± 3.0
18 - AUTOMATIC START EXTRA DELIVERY
Devices
1 Speed rpm: 100 LDA STROKE mm: 5.2 + 0.2
Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 75.0 ± 20.0 KSB LEVER :
cm3: min. 55 KSB ADVANCE mm: 5.71
2 Speed rpm: 370 KSB ADVANCE A.P. DEGREES : 2.0
cm3: max 75
3 Speed rpm:
cm3:
Date: 17-11-1998 Sheet 3/4

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004
246 FEEDING DAILY
IVECO ENGINEERING No.500347285 Edit. 1
REMARKS:
1) References for which no letters or numbers are given are reserved for other injection pump
designs.
2) For a correct adjustment of injection pumps on the electric bench, conform to the manual
IVECO Technical Publications and Training No. XXXXXXXXX
3) Measurements taken on injection pumps equipped with ”KSB” must be performed with the
same at rest.
4) (*) LDA adjusting point: act on spring pre-loading ring.
5) After every variation of LDA pressure, act on the control lever.
6) For adjusting the starting point (ARF valve) add a 12.0 mm spacer to the third delivery stop.
NOTES: BOSCH SHEET ED. 3 DTD. 10.07.98 C.I.D. DATE

1-I14734-006-085 17-11-1998
Sheet 4/4
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY FEEDING 247
COLD INJECTION ADVANCE AUTOMATIC DEVICE (KSB) [KALT START

BETRIEBSEINRICHTUNG]
Figure 20
7
42032A
42032
1. Wax thermal bulb - 2. Control lever - 3. Flexible connecting cable - 4. Eccentric pin -
5. Roll-carrier ring - 6. Advance changer piston - a. Lever position (2) in cold start condition -
b. Lever position (2) in normal operating condition.
Description The heat generated by the flow of current, heats the wax that
Rotary injection pumps, with mechanical speed governor, expands and causes pushing rod to come out, resetting the
that are fitted on the engines dealt with in this publication, are lever (2) to position ”b” by degrees.
equipped with a cold injection advance automatic device In this way the extra advance is cancelled, since the parts of
(KSB). This tool has the purpose of setting the injection advance changer come back to their normal operating
advance, below a given temperature, to a greater value than position.
that static one of pump fitting to the engine, and to reset it
by degrees to the value of this latter, as temperature rises. The full cut-out of KSB device is achieved after about 3-4
minutes of operation.
Operation
KSB cold injection advance automatic device is a mechanical
NOTE The check and adjustment, if required, of KSB tool
type electric drive tool that mainly consists of a wax thermal
is carried out with the injection pump placed on a
bulb (1) that acts on the advance changer control lever (2),
test bench.
through a pushing rod and a connecting cable (3).
When starting a cold engine, the thermal bulb (1) pushing
rod, that operates on the connecting cable (3), is placed at Coolant temperature values for KSB heat bulb connection
back position; consequently the lever (2) is kept in position
Engine 8140.43C:
”a”.
- connection at 45°C ± 2°C
In this condition the eccentric pin (4) (which is operated by
the lever (2)), changes the position of roll carrier ring (5) with - disconnection at 30°C ± 2°C
respect to its normal position and, in its turn, it causes piston
Engines 8140.63 - 8140.43S
(6) to move, thus producing an increase of advance with
respect to the value of fitting static advance. - at altitudes <1000m:
At engine start the resistance existing in the thermal bulb (1)
- disconnection at 20°C ± 3°C
is supplied by alternator D+.
- at altitudes >1000m:
- disconnection at 50°C ± 4°C
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

248 FEEDING DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY ENGINES 8140.63 249
Print 603.43.351
5401 Engine 8140.63.40XX
Page
EMISSIONS VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
- Gas emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
- Smokiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
- Noise emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
8140.63 ENGINE OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
- Disassemblt engine on bench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
PISTONS - PINS - SNAP RINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
- Assembling connecting rod-piston assembly . . . 269
- Fitting connecting rods-pistons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
CYLINDER HEADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
CAMSHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
- Checking cam lift and journal alignment . . . . . . 269
PRECOMBUSTION CHAMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
- Disassembly .......................... 271
- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
GLOW PLUGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
- Checking glow plugs continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
- Heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
- Oil vapour full recirculation system (Blow-by) . 273
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

250 ENGINES 8140.63 DAILY
Page
COOLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
- Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM E.G.R. 275
- General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
- Modulating solenoid valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
- Potentiometer on injection pump lever . . . . . . 277
- Engine rpm sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
- Absolute pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
- Vacuum sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
- Electronic control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
OPERATION LOGICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
- Air conditioner interface operation logic . . . . . 279
- Pre-Post Heating Operating Logic . . . . . . . . . . 279
- Engine Cooling Fan Operating Logic . . . . . . . . . 279
- KSB Operating Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
FEEDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

EMISSIONS VALUES
Figure 21
52182

Engine 8140.63 conforms with the ECE 96/69 standard Engine 8140.63 conforms with the limits of smokiness
(measurement with vehicle on roller test bench according to required by EEC standards 72/306 and R 24-03 with the
ECE + EUDC cycle), with the following limits: following exhaust smokiness values:
— CO (carbon monoxide) < 1.36 g/km Maximum power (Bosch BSU opacimeter degrees) 2.0
— HC+NOx
(hydrocarbons + nitrogen oxide) < 1.20 g/km
— Particulate < 0.14 g/km
Noise emissions
Test conditions: assigned coast-down 12.7 kW at 80 km/h.
Reference weight of vehicle 2270 kg, vehicle equipped with Maximum mean noise level, Lpa, of the standard engines
EGR system and oxidation catalyst: measured according to ISO Std. 3745 (microphones at 1 m
— Degussa 1.5 l-300 cpsl-V50-2g Pt Idling (800 rpm) dB A 79
— Kemira 1.5 l-300 cpsl-7007-1g Pt Full power (3800 rpm) dB A 99
Test fuel: CEC RFT 73 - T - 90 - S ≤ 0.05 %.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

8140.63.4..
Type
PC/NA

Feeding Aspirated
Injection Indirect
∅
Diameter mm 94.4
Stroke mm 100
ρ Compression ratio 21.7 ± 0.5
Max. power kW 58 ÷ 62
(HP) (78.9 ÷ 84.3)
rpm 3800
Max. torque Nm 179

(kgm) 18.2
rpm 2000

no load
rpm 800 ± 25
Maximum engine
speed, no load
rpm 4400 ± 25
Pressure at T.D.C.
*bar 20 ÷ 26
pressure at T.D.C.
*bar 16
NA = Aspirated
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

8140.63.4..
Type
PC/NA
A
VALVE TIMING

B

D
For timing check
mm 0.5 ± 0.05
X
mm 0.5 ± 0.05
X
Running
mm 0.5 ± 0.05
X
mm 0.5 ± 0.05
FUEL SUPPLY
Bosch type
yp injection
j p
pump
p rotating distributor
VER 808 - 2 (with immobilizer)
Speed governor min. and max.
Cold start K.S.B. electrical, mechanical
Pump arrangement
X
Start of delivery mm 0.94 ± 0.05
KGM DNO
BOSCH injector nozzle type
SACLESS
Injection order
- injection pump A-B-C-D

- engine 1- 3 - 4 - 2
bar
Injection pressure bar 130 + 8
* When checking, for any values of less than 200 bars, calibrate the injectors at 230 + 8 bar.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

8140.63.4..
Type
PC/NA
Oil pressure,
bar
engine hot
at idling speed bar  0.8
at maximum speed bar 3.5
With a centrifuge pump, driven by the crankshaft via a poly-V belt,
COOLING thermostat for adjustment, fan with electro-magnetic clutch, radia-
tor.
Thermostat:
fully open: 110º C
OIL REPLENISHMENT
Total capacity at 1st filling
liters 6.9
kg 6.1
Urania Daily replacements:
Urania Turbo - engine sump
U a a LD 5
Urania liters 5.2
kg 4.6
- engine sump
liters 6.3
kg 5.7
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

8140.63.4..
Type
PC/NA

∅1 97.39 ÷ 97.45*
Cylinder liners: **
∅2 length L 167.00 ÷ 167.30
Cylinder liners -
∅3
Cylinder barrels:
0.005 max
block bottom)

∅1 MONDIAL PISTON
parts type:
∅2 pin bore ∅2 32.000÷32.005
∅1 AE GOETZE
parts type:
∅2 pin bore ∅2 32.000÷32.005
X
Pistons protrusion
X 0.75 ÷ 1.15
∅3 Gudgeon pin ∅3 31.990 ÷ 31.996
* Diameter to be obtained at servicing when fitting spare cylinder barrels.

** Supplied as spare parts.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

8140.63.4..
Type
PC/NA
Piston type MONDIAL PISTON/AE GOETZE

X1* 2.685 ÷ 2.715
X1
X2
X3 X3 2.540 ÷ 2.560
S1 S 1* 2.568 ÷ 2.597
S3 S3 2.470 ÷ 2.490
1 0.088 ÷ 0.147
3 0.05 ÷ 0.09
Piston rings 0.4

der liners
X2
X1 0.20 ÷ 0.35
X3
X2 0.30 ÷ 0.50
X3 0.30 ÷ 0.55

Ø1 35.460 ÷ 35.490

∅2
Ø2 60.341 ÷ 60.348
supplied
outside ∅4 35.570 ÷ 35.595
∅3
inside ∅3 32.010 ÷ 32.020
S
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

8140.63.4..
Type
PC/NA

∅ 1

cylinder heads ∅1 12.950 ÷ 12.985
∅ 2
∅2 8.023 ÷ 8.038
Valve guide
∅3 13.012 ÷ 13.025
∅ 3

0.027 ÷ 0.075
Valve guide 0.05 - 0.10 - 0.2
∅ 4 Valves:
∅4 7.985 ÷ 8.000
α 60° 15′ ± 7′ 30″
∅4 7.985 ÷ 8.000
α α 45° 30′ ± 7′ 30″
seat
∅1 44.025÷44.075
∅ 1 37.380 ÷ 37.415
∅1

∅ 2 seat; angle
g of valve seat in
cylinder
li d head:
h d
∅2 44.145÷44.160
α 60° ± 5′
α ∅2 37.495 ÷ 37.510
α 45° ± 5′
X 1.15 ÷ 1.45
X Recessing of valve X 1.0 ÷ 1.3
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

8140.63.4..
Type
PC/NA

X
Max. connecting rod

axis misalignment
tolerance = 0.07
Main journals ∅1
∅1 ∅2 nº 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 80.182 ÷ 80.208
nº 5 86.182 ÷ 86.208
Crankpins ∅2 56.515 ÷ 56.538
Main bearing shells
S1* 2.165 ÷ 2.174
S2* 1.875 ÷ 1.884
Main bearings ∅3
∅3 nº 1 - 2 - 3 - 4 84.588 ÷ 84.614
nº 5 90.588 ÷ 90.614
Bearing shells -
Bearing shells -
big ends 0.035 ÷ 0.083
Main journal,
X 1

X 2
X3
Thrust washer
halves X3 30.900 ÷ 30.950
Crankshaft end
float 0.060 ÷ 0.310
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

8140.63.4..
Type
PC/NA

seat and head
0.080 ÷ 0.130
Valve seats -

height:
free height H 52
H 2 kg 43.8 ± 2.5 H1 38.5
kg 77.4 ± 4 H2 28.5
Valve inside spring
height:
free height H 45.5
H under a load of:
H1
H kg 16.4 ± 1 H1 33.5
kg 30 ± 1.5 H2 23.5
Height
g of A 5.348 ÷ 5.373
precombustion
b i
X chamber plug
p g X B 5.373 ÷ 5.398
b
base seat
∅ C 5.398 ÷ 5.423
Precombustion
chamber plug seat ∅ 32.490 ÷ 32.540
∅ Precombustion chamber plug ∅ 32.550 ÷ 32.570
A Green 5.373 ÷ 5.397
S 5.398 ÷ 5.422
S B -
C Yellow 5.423 ÷ 5.447
Precombustion
chamber plug - 0.010 ÷ 0.080
Cylinder heads
Precombustion chamber
X position from cylinders -0.000 ÷ +0.049
heads level surface
Injector protrusion X -
X
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

8140.63.4..
Type
PC/NA

normal ∅ 33.985 ÷ 34.015
∅ ∅ ∅ oversized ∅ 34.185 ÷ 34.215

∅ 2
normal ∅ 33.934 ÷ 33.950
∅ 1 ∅ 3 oversized ∅ 34.134 ÷ 34.150
Between seats and

0.035 ÷ 0.081
supporting pins
Tappets housing on
∅ cylinder heads
∅ normal 44.000 ÷ 44.025
Tappet ∅ normal 43.950 ÷ 43.970

∅
3.25 to 4.45 mm
Cap
Cam lift:
H
H 10.5
H
10.5
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TIGHTENING TORQUES
NOTE This differs from the analogous section for the 8140.43C engine in the following tightening torques.
TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
Nut M12x1.5 fixing toothed bushing to the injection pump 55 5.5
Fixing incandescent glow plugs 25 2.5
Nut fixing electric cable to the glow plug 1.5 ÷ 2 0.15 ÷ 0.2
Injector fastening 60 6
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
NOTE This differs from the analogous section for the 8140.43C engine in the exclusion of tools 99360486 - 99367121 -
99394038 - 99395098 and the addition of the following tools.
Cylinder compression test coupling

99360498 (use with 99395682)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 22
52180
8140.63.4... ENGINE LONGITUDINAL SECTION
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 23
52181
8140.63.4... ENGINE TRANSVERSE SECTION
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

8140.63 ENGINE OVERHAUL Figure 26
NOTE This differs from overhauling engine 8140.43.C in

the following.
Disassembly engine on bench

Figure 24
52207
Take out the screw (3) fixing the bracket (4) securing the
pipes (1 and 2) to the intake manifold (5).
Disconnect the pipe (2) from the cylinder head.
Take out the nuts (6) securing the pipe (1) to the water pump
(7).
Figure 27
11
52205
To be able to apply the brackets 99361029 to the crankcase

for securing the engine to the stand for overhauling, it is
necessary:
on the left-hand side of the engine:
- to disconnect the pipe (3) from the heat exchanger (4);
- to disconnect the pipe (7) from the side cover (6);
- to take out the screws (5 and 9) and remove the pipe
(10) complete with pipes (3 and 7);
- to disconnect the pipe (11) from the crankcase fitting;
- to disconnect the pipe (2) from the fillpipe (1);
- to remove the oil vapour condenser (8) complete with
pipes (2 - 10 - 11).
52208
Disconnect the pipe (4) from the heat exchanger (3).

Figure 25 Take out the screws (1 and 5) and remove the pipe (2) from
the crankcase complete with pipes (4) and pipes (1,
Figure 26).
Figure 28
52206
On the right-hand side, take the plug out of the crankcase to

be able to screw down the screw (3) fixing the bracket 52209
99361029 (1) and to mount this bracket. Take out the nuts (5) for the screws (4) and disconnect the
Mount the other bracket on the left-hand side of the crankcase EGR valve (3) from the sleeve (6).
and secure them to the rotary stand 99322230 (2). Remove the intake manifold (1) and exhaust manifold (2)
Take the plug out of the oil sump (4) and drain off the from the cylinder head.
lubricating oil.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 29 Figure 32
52210 52213
Lift the clips (1) and remove the side soundproofing guard
(2). Remove the tappet cover (6) with its relative gasket.
Take out the nuts (3) and remove the top soundproofing Take out the screw (2) and remove the fillpipe (1) from the
guard (4). auxiliary member assembly (5).
Take out the screw (3) and extract the oil dipstick pipe (4)
Figure 30 from the crankcase base.
52211
Remove the fuel pipes (1) from the injection pump (3) and Figure 33
from the injectors (2).
Remove the fuel recovery pipes (4) from the injectors (2).
Figure 31
52214
Mark (⇒) the position of assembly of the injection pump (3)

on the auxiliary member assembly (1).
Take out the fixing nuts (2) and remove the injection pump
52212 (3) from the auxiliary member assembly (1).
Take out the nuts (4) and disconnect the electric cable (5)
from the glow plugs (6).
Unscrew and remove the injectors (1). NOTE To remove the lower fixing nut on the crankcase
side, use wrench 99352114 (4).
Take out the screws (2) and remove the guard (3).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 34 Figure 37
50658 50661
Using the right wrench on the tightener (2), slacken the Loosen the screws fixing the gears (1 - 7).
tension of the belt (1) and remove it. Insert a special wrench between (5) the push rod (3) and the
cylinder (4) of the tightener.
Take out the nut (2).
Remove the bottom cover (6).
Figure 35 Remove the cogged belt (8).
Figure 38
52215
Using tool 99360306 (3) applied as illustrated in the figure,

block crankshaft rotation and loosen the screws fixing (1) the
flywheel (2).
Figure 36
52216
Remove the fixed tightener mounting (2) and the guard (3)
beneath.
Remove the screws fixing the thermostat box (1).
Block rotation of the electromagnetic pulley.
Unscrew the nut (6) securing the hub (4) clockwise.
Remove the hub (4) and the washer (5).
50660
NOTE The hub fastening nut (6) has a left-hand thread.
Remove the screw fixing the pulley (1) to the crankshaft.
Remove the pulley (1) from the crankshaft and the spacer,
if any.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 39 Figure 40
52218
Remove the screws (2) fixing the cylinder head (1) and
remove this with the gasket from the crankcase.
52217
Remove the key (1) and washer (3) from the water pump
shaft (2).
Remove the pulley (10) from the water pump shaft (2). NOTE Check piston protrusion as described in the
Take out the nuts (8) and extract the electromagnetic relevant paragraph to verify the possibility of
coupling (9). crankcase flattening in case it is deformed.
Remove the mounting (5) complete with alternator (4) from
the crankcase and from the water pump (2), complete with
thermostat box (7).
Remove the adjustable tightener (6).
Remove the front cover (11) of the crankshaft.
Figure 41
PISTONS - PINS - SNAP RINGS
30’
62083
MAIN DATA OF MONDIAL PISTONS FEDERAL MOGUL, PINS AND RINGS OF THE 8140.63... ENGINE
* This dimension is measured on the diameter of 91.4 mm.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Assembling connecting rod-piston assembly 560610 CYLINDER HEADS

Fitting connecting rods-pistons 541210 CAMSHAFT
Figure 42
541211 Checking cam lift and journal align-
ment
Figure 44
45069
On the crown of the piston, reference (1) indicates the type

of engine (7), class selection (A) and supplier (X)*; reference
(2) has an adhesive label (on the piston supplied as a spare)
with the code number for optical reading of the type of 61795
engine and class selection; reference (3); piston crown cavity.

Set shaft on centres and check, with a centesimal dial gauge
placed on central support, that alignment error is no greater
than 0.04 mm, otherwise replace shaft. Also check cams (1)
* X = Federal MOGUL lift: it should be 10.5 mm; if different values are found replace
Y = MONDIAL PISTON the shaft.
Figure 45
Figure 43
IGNITIO
IGNITION
SEQUENCE
N
1-3-4-2
SEQUE
NCE
1-3-4-2
62385
Fit piston (1) to connecting rod (2) so as piston assembly 62084

reference and connecting rod numbers (3) can be seen as
DIAGRAM OPENING-CLOSING VALVE
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 46 Figure 49
49074 49076
SECTION F-F
1. Glow plug - 2. Injector seat - 3. Combustion
prechamber plug
Figure 47
Exhaust Intake
Ø 34.8 Ø 40.9
(REFERENCE DIA.) (REFERENCE DIA.)
49075
MAIN DATA - VALVE SEATS
Figure 48 The check of mating surface of the head (1) to cylinder group
is performed by means of a rule (2) and a thickness gauge (3).
If a deformation is found, measure cylinder head thickness,
whose rated value is 150 ± 0.1 mm.
When checking, if the amount of material to be removed for
flattening cylinder head is greater than 0.4 mm, replace
cylinder head.
If the amount of material to be removed is within 0.2 mm
there is no need to dismantle combustion prechamber plugs,
otherwise proceed as stated in the following figure.
18879
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

PRECOMBUSTION CHAMBERS Figure 52

Disassembly
Figure 50
41803
After cylinder heads regrinding, with material removal of

more than 0.2 mm thickness, measure with dial gauge (1) the
52219
depth Y of pre-combustion chamber seats.
Number the pre-combustion chambers (3) in order to refit According to the class of the pre-combustion chambers,
them in the same order of disassembly and remove them shown in the previous figure, restore depth Y of respective
from the cylinder head (1) taking special care with a suitable seats, to the corresponding classes listed here below:
punch (2).
depth Y
Class
mm
Assembly A 4.480 ÷ 4.505
Figure 51 B 4.505 ÷ 4.530
C 4.530 ÷ 4.555
Figure 53
41802
Precombustion chambers (1) are subdivided into classes

according to base thickness X and selected as follows:
Class X mm
A 4.500 ÷ 4.520
B 4.520 ÷ 4.540
C 4.540 ÷ 4.560
52189
Should it be required to replace one or more precombustion
chambers (1) (being not necessary to regrind respective seats Precombustion chamber (1) plugs driving is carried out with
on cylinder heads), measure thickness X of their base to fit tool 99360356 (2), making their centring balls (←) coincide
the new part of same class and in the same order found upon with the milling (→) of relevant seat on cylinder heads.
dismantling.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

GLOW PLUGS Figure 56

Disassembly
Figure 54
52222
Screw the injectors (1) into the cylinder head and, with the
52220 right wrench, tighten them to the required torque.
Fit the glow plugs (2) and electric cable (4), and tighten the
Remove glow plugs (1) from cylinder heads.
fixing nuts (3) to the required torque.
Checking glow plugs continuity LUBRICATION

543110 Heat exchanger
Figure 55
Figure 57
50681
10-element heat exchanger
On supplying heat exchanger (1) with air at 1 bar pressure,

41807
verify that no leaks exist from oil flow side (2) and also from
water flow side.
Check the efficiency of each single glow plug (2) by
connecting the two tester terminals (1) to glow plug Test conditions:
terminals and verify its continuity, otherwise replace glow Oil type SAE 30
plug. Oil temperature at heat exchanger inlet 115°C
Assembly Oil delivery 30 litres/minute
Fit incandescence plugs to the cylinder head and tighten them Water temperature at heat exchanger inlet 85°C
to a torque of 15 ÷ 1 Nm (1.5 ÷ 0,1 kgm). Water delivery 20 litres/minute
PERFORMANCE
Exchanged heat quantity 5.0 kW
Oil pressure drop 0.85 bar
NOTE Re-check continuity after fitting glow plugs, since Built-in safety valve (2)
deforming effect, due to assembly pressure, may Opening pressure 0.82 ÷ 1.03 bars
cause the interruption of said continuity
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

540480 Oil vapour full recirculation system (Blow-by)

Figure 58
2
3
1 5
52614
OIL VAPOUR FULL RÉCIRCULATION SYSTEM DIAGRAM (8140.63 engine)

1. Suction conveyer - 2. Flow relief valve - 3. Delivery pipe - 4. Oil vapour outlet pipe -
5. Oil vapour condenser - 6. Oil drainage pipe - 7. Crankcase
The vapours that develop in the sump during engine This valve, applied on pipe (3) in proximity to suction
operation, are collected in a condenser (5). conveyer (1), limits the flow of vapours, by choking flowing
A portion of such vapours condense and, through pipe (6), section according to the vacuum existing in suction pipe.
return in the sump, while the remaining portion, through pipe In this way most of the vapours will return in the sump.
(3) is sucked by engine and burnt.
The flow of vapours sucked by engine, is controlled by a relief
valve (2).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

5432 COOLING SYSTEM

543250 Thermostat
Figure 59
41129
A. Stroke start 79 °C ± 2 °C.

B. Stroke at 94 °C ≥ 7 mm
Stroke at 110 °C ≤ 10.5 mm
7 mm stroke in < 60”
Water blow-by with thermostat closed and valve closed
≤ 2 l/h
7 mm stroke shall take place in ≤ 60 seconds
Coolant temperature for:

- turning on the fan: 94_ ± 2_C;
- turning off the fan: 80_ ± 2_C.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION SYSTEM E.G.R.

General Information Besides the difference in combustion, there is an additional
The system recirculates a portion (max. 30%) of the exhaust effect of the reduction in the flow rate of gases leaving the
gas from the exhaust manifold to the intake manifold of the vehicle exhaust from which the flow of recirculated gas is
engine according to characteristics that are permanently taken away.
stored in the system’s electronic control unit. Operation (see Figure 60)
Recirculation of gas at the intake is only permissible at low The electronic control unit (7) processes the information
loads where the air/fuel ratio is definitely high. from the atmospheric pressure sensor (2), water
temperature sensor (3), engine speed sensor (4),
Exhaust gas recirculation is applied solely to permit the potentiometer on the injection pump control lever (5) and,
engine/vehicle to observe the gas emission limits of nitrogen as programmed in its memory, it uses a PWM signal to
oxide (NOx). control the modulating solenoid valve (7).
Exhaust gas recirculation permits a reduction of as much as This command sets circuits (a) and (b) in communication
40% of the quantity of nitrogen oxides emitted by the engine inside the solenoid valve, modulating a variable vacuum in
against virtually negligible increases in hydrocarbons and circuit (b) according to the strength of the command issued
particulate. by the control unit.
This lower pressure acts on the diaphragm of the EGR
This is due to an effect of the combustion reaction slowing pneumatic valve (10) calling up and lifting the shutter that
down due to there being inert gases instead of oxygen, with normally closes the passage of exhaust gas toward the
an according decrease in the maximum temperature of the intake.
gas cycle on which the formation of nitrogen oxides closely In this way, communication is opened between the exhaust
depends. and intake manifolds and the percentage of exhaust gas
calculated by the control unit flows into the intake manifold.
Figure 60
75994
1. Bitron electronic control unit - 2. Atmospheric pressure sensor - 3. Water temperature sensor - 4. Engine speed sensor
5. Potentiometer on injection pump control lever - 6. Vacuum chamber - 6. Air filter - 7. Modulating solenoid valve -
8. Servo brake - 9. Vacuum - 10. EGR pneumatic valve - 11. Vacuum tank.
A Vacuum circuit for servo brake
B Modulated vacuum circuit for EGR valve control
Intake air Exhaust gas outlet
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

A closed-circuit feedback check is assured by the vacuum System components

sensor inside the control unit that measures the modulated EGR pneumatic valve
vacuum in the circuit (b). If different from the set value
(within certain parameters), the control signal to the Figure 61
solenoid valve is appropriately modified to achieve the
calculated vacuum.
In the engine phases that do not require gas recirculation 1
(starting, cold engine, idling, load required, high levels), the
control signal of the control unit (1) to the modulating
solenoid valve (7) is cancelled. The solenoid valve closes the
connection between the implementing circuit (b) and the
vacuum circuit (a) while restoring atmospheric pressure in
the circuit (b) with the air coming out of the filter (6) of the
modulating solenoid valve (7).
The quantity of recirculated gas is adjusted by a poppet valve 2
controlled pneumatically by low pressure taken, via a fitting
with a calibrated cross-section, from the pipe connecting the
vacuum device to the servo brake.
The governing modulated vacuum from the solenoid valve
(7) will reach the pipe (B) and, overcoming the force of the
spring, will lift the diaphragm connected to the shutter that
will move upwards and permit exhaust gas recirculation
towards the intake manifold.
3
1. PIPE - 2. DIAPHRAGM - 3. SHUTTER
The quantity of recirculated gas is adjusted by a poppet valve

controlled pneumatically by low pressure taken, via a fitting
with a calibrated cross-section, from the pipe connecting the
vacuum device to the servo brake.
The governing modulated vacuum from the solenoid valve
will reach the pipe (1) and, overcoming the force of the
spring, will lift the diaphragm (2) connected to the shutter
(3) that will move upwards and permit exhaust gas
recirculation towards the intake manifold.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Modulating solenoid valve Potentiometer on injection pump lever

Figure 63
Figure 62
62087
Potentiometer (1) is set on injection pump control lever.

Since control unit cannot read exactly the load acting on
engine instantaneously, it reads injection pump lever position
This is a proportional solenoid valve connected on one side that is an indication of fuel introduction and therefore of load.
to servobrake vacuum circuit (typical ratings 600 mm Hg) and
on other it makes it possible to modulate a vacuum variable It is supplied with a voltage of 5 V.
between 30 and 3,000 mm Hg depending on the command It is connected to the control unit on pins 3 - 9 - 11.
signal generated by electronic control unit.
It supplies the control unit a signal between 0 ÷ 5 V
It is connected to the control unit on pin 19. depending on the angle of rotation of the injection pump
It is supplied with a 0 ÷ 12 V signal at a fixed frequency of 140 lever.
Hz (duty-cycle). Duty cycle means the ratio between the
time the signal is “ON” and the total period of the cycle Engine rpm sensor
(1/140 Hz). The vacuum modulated by the solenoid valve
depends only on the duty cycle. Figure 64
Supplying the solenoid (1), the core (2) attracts the mobile
plate (3) towards it which obstructs the passage of
atmospheric pressure (A) to the chamber (B).
Vacuum is created in chamber (B) the mobile, equipment (4)
rises allowing connection between the vacuum source (F)
and the outgoing vacuum (E).
When the solenoid valve is not supplied, there will only be
atmospheric pressure at the outlet as the mobile pressure (3)
falls, atmospheric pressure reaches chamber (B), mobile
equipment (4) moves down, valve (5) blocks the inlet of the
vacuum source (F) and atmospheric pressure (C) and control
pressure (B) communicate with the outlet vacuum (E) 62088
through hole (D). This is an inductive sensor (1) located on the engine flywheel.
It generates signals obtained by the magnetic flux lines which
close through the four holes machined on the flywheel.
The electronic control unit uses this signal to detect the
different engine speeds.
This signal is also sent to the instrument cluster on pin B2 to
drive the electronic rev counter.
It is connected to the control unit on pins 8 - 17.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Engine coolant temperature sensor Vacuum sensor

Figure 67
Figure 65
62191
Modulated vacuum sensor (2) is set inside control unit and

This an NTC sensor located in a boss of the thermostat body. corrects any error and/or miscalibration of the different
components to guarantee the proper vacuum value required
It detects the temperature of the water in the head and
by the system.
makes it possible to reduce E.G.R. below a temperature of 40
ºC until shutting it off completely because when the engine It also makes it possible to detect any malfunctioning of the
is cold it would cause high smoke and difficulty in starting. E.G.R. system due to blowby or pneumatic failure of the
modulating solenoid valve.
It is connected to the control unit on pins 2 - 11.
Electronic control unit

Control unit (1) is set on engine compartment right side and
is connected to wiring by 25-pin connector.
It incorporates the vacuum sensor.
Absolute pressure sensor In addition to the E.G.R. it is capable of controlling the
before-after heating function, the engine cooling fan
electromagnetic joint, the KSB device and, where applicable,
Figure 66 it is connected to the climate control unit.
E.G.R. operating logic.
Depending on the position of the injection pump lever,
engine rpm, coolant fluid temperature and environment
pressure, the control unit decided the re-circulation
percentage to be activated and drives the modulating
solenoid valve.
Through the vacuum sensor (2) it reads the ”actual” vacuum
modulated by the modulating solenoid valve, compares it
with the theoretical one, and if the two values differ within
determinate parameters, it makes the necessary corrections
to control the modulating solenoid valve until reaching the
required ”actual” vacuum rating, otherwise, it does not take
account of it and controls the solenoid valve without the
62089
reference signal.
Atmospheric pressure sensor (1), is set on engine
compartment right side and detects atmospheric pressure
value, thus enabling to reduce E.G.R. above 1,500 m altitude,
since the oxygen reduction connected to air density
reduction improves smokes in presence of E.G.R.
It is supplied at 5 V.
It is connected to the control unit on pins 9 - 10 - 11.
It supplies the control unit a signal of between 0 ÷ 5V
depending on the environment pressure.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

OPERATION LOGICS Figure 69
Figure 68
BEFORE-AFTER WARMING DEVICE OPERATING GRAPH

A.WARMING ON AND WARNING LIGHT ON - B. WARMING TIME
ON WITH WARNING LIGHT ON - C. DISTRACTION TIME - D.
AFTER WARMING TIME - E. AFTER WARMING OFF AND WARNING
LIGHT OFF
CONNECTIONS OF GLOW PLUG CONTROL RELAY

Pre-Post Heating Operating Logic
The control unit monitors pre-post heating as a function of
the engine compartment temperature measured by a sensor
located inside the control unit itself.
Air conditioner interface operation logic
EGR control unit controls air conditioning system It activates the remote control switch controlling the plugs
compressor (load) relay connections and disconnection and (this switch is positioned on the right side of the engine
obviously compressor activation or deactivation, at starting compartment) for a variable time as a function of the above
and according to engine coolant temperature, i.c. engine rpm temperature.
and acceleration.
Engine Cooling Fan Operating Logic
NOTE: With load ON, compressor is OFF The control unit can connect/disconnect the
With load OFF, compressor is ON electromagnetic coupling of the fan depending on the cooling
fluid temperature.
Starting: at starting, EGR control unit activates compressor It connects it when ~94°C are reached and disconnects it at
relay (NC). This load will be disconnected 6 ± 1 sec. after ~76°C. (The temperature sensor resistance at these values
exceeding 700 ± 25 engine rpm, thus enabling if required, to is equal to ~245Ω at 94°C and ~420Ω at 76°C).
activate compressor. Although engine rpm returns to lower
values than threshold ones, load will no longer be connected KSB Operating Logic
until next engine starting. At approximately 1000 m, the EGR electronic control unit
Engine coolant temperature: load is activated at approx. turns on, by activating the relevant remote control switch,
107ºC and deactivated at approx. 101ºC. Resistance values the KSB advance variator when the engine cooling fluid
for EGR engine coolant temperature sensor are approx. temperature is equal to ~25°C and turns it off at ~20°C.
160Ω at 107ºC and approx. 195Ω at 101ºC. The relevant resistance values of the engine cooling fluid
Engine rpm: load is disconnected at ≥ 4000 rpm and temperature sensor are: 3kΩ ± 100Ω at 25°C and 3.8kΩ ±
connected at ≤ 4100 rpm. 100Ω at 20°C.
Acceleration: load disconnects for approx. 100 m/sec. at > Instead, at an altitude of approximately 1100 m, the variator
2500 i.c. engine rpm. is activated at ~55°C and disconnected at ~50°C. In this case
the resistance values of the sensor are, respectively,
900±20Ω and 1.08kΩ ± 20Ω.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY FEEDING 281
Feeding
Page
INJECTION PUMP TEST VALUES . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
NOTE The test and adjustment values indi-

cated in the text and summary tables
are given as a general indication.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

282 FEEDING DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY FEEDING 283
FEEDING
INJECTION PUMP TEST VALUES

Injection pump: VE4/9F1900R808-1 IVECO PART N.: 500329480
Speed governor: MIN/MAX BOSCH PART N.:0460 494 470
Engine : 8140.63.4000 For: IVECO
Timing:
- Injection pump static advance (Output reference ”A”) 1.0° ± 0.5°
degrees before | | after |X| T.D.C. with I.P. pumping in phase of delivery at 1 mm from B.D.C.
- Or with piston at T.D.C. and injection pump pumping in phase of delivery at 0.94 ± 0.05 mm from B.D.C.
- Engine idling speed without load: 800 ± 25 rpm
TEST BENCH WITH STATIC AND DYNAMIC CHARACTERISTICS

CONFORMING TO STANDARDS ISO 4008/1 -/2
- Rotation direction: Right X - Supply pressure: 0.35 ± 0.05 bar

Left - Burette evacuation time: KMM
- Pipes: ∅ 6 x ∅ 2 x 450 mm - Test fluid conforming to standard: ISO 4113
- Injectors: 1688 901 022 - Temperature Influx
- Calibrated hole pad: - Defluxion X
- Injector setting : 130 + 3 bar - Thermometer : 45 ± 1 °C
- Backflow chock: ∅ 0.55 mm - Electronic : ± 4 °C
”INJECTION PUMP ADJUSTMENT VALUES”

”THE NUMBERS GIVEN IN BRACKETS SHOULD
BE USED ONLY AS CONTROL VALUES”
1 - START OF DELIVERY 5 - DELIVERY AT FULL LOAD WITHOUT

OVERCHARGING
Pre-lift (from B.D.C.) mm: 0 ± 0.02
Speed rpm: 1250
2 - ADVANCE CHANGER TRAVEL
Speed rpm: 1250
Overcharging pressure hPa: 6 - IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment values mm: 2.8 ± 0.1
Speed rpm: 375
3 - TRANSFER PUMP PRESSURE
Speed rpm: 1250
Overcharging pressure hPa: 7 - ADJUSTING THE RESIDUAL DELIVERY
Adjustment values bar: 6.2 ± 0.2
Speed rpm:
4 - DELIVERY AT FULL LOAD WITH OVERCHARGING
Speed rpm: 8 - MAXIMUM SPEED ADJUSTMENT
Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: Speed rpm: 2050
Max difference cm3: Overcharging pressure hPa:
Date: 26-06-1998 Sheet 1/4

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004
284 FEEDING DAILY
9 - START 14 - DELIVERY RUN AND ADJUSTMENT
Speed rpm: 100 .1 Speed rpm: (*)

Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 80.0 ± 15 Overcharging pressure hPa: -
Minimum delivery cm3: 65.0 Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: -
cm3: -
10 - ”LFB” SETTING
.2 Speed rpm: 2380
Speed rpm: 1250 Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 1.5 ± 1.5
Overcharging pressure hPa: - cm3: (± 1.5)
1. Delivery difference
.3 Speed rpm: 2150
per 1000 shots cm3: < 12 ± 1.0 Overcharging pressure hPa:
2. Transfer pump pressure cm3:
Delivery per 1000 shots 23.0 ± 5.0
difference bar: 0.2 ± 0.1
cm3: (± 6.0)
11 - INJECTION ADVANCE RUN .4 Speed rpm: 2050
Overcharging pressure hPa: - Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 43.0 ± 1.0
.1 Speed rpm: 1250 cm3: (± 6.0)
Advance travel mm: 2.8 ± 0.1 .5 Speed rpm: 1900
mm: (± 0.5) Overcharging pressure hPa:
.2 Speed rpm: 1700 Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 50.0 ± 2.0
Advance travel mm: 5.5 ± 0.4 cm3: (± 2.5)
mm: (± 0.6) .6 Speed rpm: 1250
.3 Speed rpm: - Overcharging pressure hPa:
Advance travel mm: - Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 53.0 ± 0.5
mm: - cm3: (± 2.0)
.4 Speed rpm: - .7 Speed rpm: 600
Advance travel mm: - Overcharging pressure hPa
mm: - Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 52.0 ± 2.5
cm3: (± 3.0)
12 - TRANSFER PRESSURE RUN .8 Speed rpm: -
Overcharging pressure hPa: -
Overcharging pressure hPa: - Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: -
.1 Speed rpm: 1250 cm3: -
Transfer pump pressure bar: 6.2 ± 0.2 .9 Speed rpm: -
.2 Speed rpm: 1900 Overcharging pressure hPa: -
Transfer pump pressure bar: 8.5 ± 0.5 Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: -
.3 Speed rpm: - cm3: -
Transfer pump pressure bar: - .10 Speed rpm: -
.4 Speed rpm: - Overcharging pressure hPa: -
Transfer pump pressure bar: - Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: -
13 - BACKFLOW VOLUME ON VALVE cm3: -
.1 Speed rpm: 600

Overcharging pressure hPa: -
Backflow volume c.c./10s: 41.4 ÷ 74.52
c.c./10s: (41.4 ÷ 74.52)
.2 Speed rpm: 1900
Backflow volume c.c./10s: 60.7 ÷ 104.8
c.c./10s: (60.7 ÷ 104.8)
Date: 26-06-1998 Sheet 2/4

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281
DAILY FEEDING 285
15 - DELIVERY NULL (STOP) 19 - POTENTIOMETER CALIBRATION AND CHECKING
.1 Mechanical: Supply volt: 5.0

Speed rpm: 460 Setting
Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 1.5 ± 1.5 Speed rpm: 1000
Voltage volt: 0 Delivery per 1000 shots cm3 33.8 ± 0.5
.2 Electrical: Potentiometer output voltage volt: 3.25 ± 0..1
Speed rpm: 375 Checking:
Potentiometer output voltage volt:
16 - DELIVERY AT IDLING SPEED
.1 Speed rpm: 375 20 - EGR MICROSWITCH CALIBRATION

(± 5.0) Speed rpm:
.2 Speed rpm: 300 Overcharging pressure hPa:
Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 28.0 ± 6.0 Delivery per 1000 shots cm3:
(± 6.0) 21 - GLOW PLUG MICROSWITCH ADJUSTMENT
.3 Speed rpm: 460
Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 1.5 ± 1.5 Contact closed at:
.4 Speed rpm: of injection pump
Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: control lever travel
Residual delivery check
.5 Speed rpm 22 - CUT-OUT ELECTROMAGNET
Delivery per 1000 shots cm3
Operating minimum voltage volt: 10
17 - ”LFB” CHECK Rated voltage volt: 12
Speed rpm: 1250 23 - ASSEMBLING AND ADJUSTING DIMENSIONS
.1 Delivery difference Denomination:
per 1000 shots cm3: 17.0 ± 3.0 K mm: 3.7
Advance travel diff. mm: 1.0 ± 0.1 KF mm:
.2 Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 5.0 ± 1.0 MS mm: 1.6
Advance travel diff. mm: SVS max. mm:
MSI mm:
18 - AUTOMATIC START EXTRA DELIVERY Ya mm: 38.9 ± 1.0
Yb mm: 44.5 ± 3.0
.1 Speed rpm: 100 TLA-E mm:
Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 80.0 ± 15
cm3: 65 min. Devices
.2 Speed rpm: 400 HBA STROKE mm:
Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: 65.0 ± 8 LDA STROKE mm:
cm3: 73 max. KSB LEVER :
.3 Speed rpm: KSB SPEED R.P.M :
Delivery per 1000 shots cm3: KSB TRANSFER bar:
cm3: KSB SPEED R.P.M :
KSB ADVANCE mm: 2.8
KSB ADVANCE A.P. DEGREES : 3.5
KSB VOLT EL. VALVE :
Date: 26-06-1998 Sheet 3/4

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004
286 FEEDING DAILY
REMARKS:
1) references for which no letters or numbers are given are reserved for other injection pump
designs;
2) for a correct adjustment of injection pumps on the electric bench, conform to the manual
IVECO Technical Publications and Training No. XXXXXXXXX;
3) measurements taken on injection pumps equipped with ”KSB” must be performed with the
same at rest;
4) (*) LDA adjusting point: act on spring pre-loading ring;
5) after every variation of LDA pressure, act on the control lever;
6) for adjusting the starting point (ARF valve) add a 12.0 mm spacer to the third delivery stop.
6b) “MODIFICATION POINT 6” FOR POTENTIOMETER SETTING POINT, PLACE A 12mm
SHIM BETWEEN THE THROTTLE LEVER AND THE THIRD STOP.
NOTES: BOSCH SHEET ED. 5 DTD. 24.06.98 C.I.D. DATE

26-06-98
Sheet 4/4
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY F1A ENGINE 287
Print 603.43.351/D
F1A engine
Page
MAIN OPERATIONS ON ENGINE MOUNTED
ON VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
ENGINE REMOVAL-REFITTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
- Checks and tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
- Power steering system air bleed . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
REPLACING BELTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
- Replacing air-conditioning compressor drive belt
(version with belt tensioner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
- Replacing air-conditioning compressor drive belt
(version with elastic belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
- Power steering pump-alternator belt replacement 298
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
- Replacing timing drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
REPLACING ELECTRO-INJECTORS . . . . . . . . . 301
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
CYLINDER HEAD REMOVAL AND REFITTING 302
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
REPLACING HIGH-PRESSURE PUMP CP3 . . . . . 305
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
REPLACING WATER PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

288 F1A ENGINE DAILY
Page Page
- Checking connecting rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 - Checking torsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
EMISSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 - Checking bending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
ENGINE IDENTIFICATION CODE . . . . . . . . . . 308 - Assembling connecting rod-piston assembly . . . 359
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 - Checking for connecting rod — piston distortion 360
ASSEMBLY DATA — CLEARANCES . . . . . . . . . . 313 - Assembling piston rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 - Assembling connecting rod — piston assemblies
in cylinder barrels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
EXPERIMENTAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
- Measuring crankpin assembly clearance . . . . . . 361
- Checking piston protrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
OVERHAULING ENGINE F1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
- Removing valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
CYLINDER BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
- Checking cylinder head seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
- Checking head mating surface on cylinder block 349
VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
CRANKSHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
- Removing deposits, refacing and checking valves 363
- Measuring main journals and crank pins . . . . . . 349
- Checking clearance between valve stem and
- Checking crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 valve guide and centring valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
- Replacing timing control gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 VALVE GUIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
ENGINE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 - Replacing valve guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
- Assembling main bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 - Boring valve guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
- Measuring main journal assembly clearance . . . 352 VALVE SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
- Checking crankshaft end float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 - Regrinding - replacing valve seats . . . . . . . . . . . 365
- Assembling rear seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 VALVE SPRINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
- Replacing bearing supporting gearbox input shaft 355 ROCKER ARMS — TAPPETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
ENGINE FLYWHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 - Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
CONNECTING ROD — PISTON ASSEMBLY . . . 355 ASSEMBLING CYLINDER HEADS . . . . . . . . . . . 367
- Pistons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 - Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
- Measuring piston diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 - Overhead removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
- Piston pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 TIMING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
- Conditions for correct pin-piston coupling . . . . 357 - Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
- Piston rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 - Camshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
- Connecting rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 - Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
- Bushes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 - Checking cam lift and pin alignment . . . . . . . . . 370
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Page Page
- Assembling overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

- Assembling front seal ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
- Operating principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
- Refitting cylinder head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
- Air flow meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
- Adjusting air-conditioner —
compressor drive belt tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 FUEL SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
- Timing speed sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 HIGH-PRESSURE ELECTRONIC
INJECTION SYSTEM (MS 6.3 - EDC 16) . . . . 395
- Engine speed sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
- General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
- General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
- Self-diagnosis — BLINK CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
OIL VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY (GPOD) . . . . 385
- Immobilizer recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
- Oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
- Checking fuel temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
- Characteristic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
- Checking engine coolant temperature . . . . . . . 397
- Vacuum pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
- Checking quantity of fuel injected . . . . . . . . . . . 397
- Oil pressure control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
- Checking idling adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
- Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
- Fuel cut-off in release phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
- Modine heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
- Checking cylinder balancing on idling . . . . . . . . 397
- Oil vapour recirculation system . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
- Checking regular engine rotation (anti-sawing) . 397
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
- Checking smokiness at exhaust on acceleration 397
COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 (E.G.R. if present) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 - Checking top speed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
- Electromagnetic pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 - Checking regular rotation on acceleration . . . . 397
- Water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 - Checking glow plug control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
- Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 - Checking activation of air-conditioning system . 397
TURBOCHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 - Checking fuel pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 - Checking diesel warming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
- Turbocharger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 - Checking cylinder position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 - Checking pilot and main injection timing . . . . . 398
- Pressure relief valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 - Checking injection pressure closed cycle . . . . . 398
- Checking and adjusting pressure relief valve . . . 392 - Fuel supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
- Replacing pressure relief valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 - Correcting flow rate according
to water temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM 393
- Correcting flow rate to avoid noise,
- EGR system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 smoke or overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Page Page
- De-rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 - Engine speed sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
- Injection timing electronic test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 - Camshaft timing sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
- Speed governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 - Air temperature and pressure sensor . . . . . . . . 415
- Engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 - Fuel temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
- Cold starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 - Fuel pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
- Warm starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 - Atmospheric pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
- Run up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 - Engine coolant temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . 416
- After run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 - Throttle pedal position sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
- Cut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 - Clutch pedal position sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
- Cylinder balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 - Brake pedal position sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
- Synchronization search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 - Vehicle speed sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 ACTUATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 - PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) controls . . . . 416
- Fuel pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 GUIDE TO TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . 417
- Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
- Fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
- Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
- Fuel pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
- High-pressure pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
- High-pressure pump internal structure . . . . . . . 407
- Working principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
- Pressure control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
- Replacing pressure regulator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
MECHANICAL SUPPLY PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
- Overpressure valve
(for forged hydraulic accumulator) . . . . . . . . . . 413
ELECTRO-INJECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
- Electronic control unit MS6.3 or EDC 16 . . . . . 414
- Glow plug electronic control unit . . . . . . . . . . . 415
- Glow plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
SENSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

MAIN OPERATIONS ON ENGINE MOUNTED ON VEHICLE
Keep to the following instructions before doing any work on the engine involving components of the fuel supply system.
- Before doing any work on the engine, perform the engine/vehicle fault diagnosis with specific IVECO diagnosis
equipment and print out the results.
- Replacement of the MS6.3 or EDC 16control unit must be authorized by the Help Desk.
- Following components in feed system cannot be overhauled but have to be replaced: pressure relief valve, if present,
fuel pressure sensor, hydraulic accumulator, complete CP1 high pressure feed pump, pressure control valve, electric
injectors.
- All the parts of the Common Rail system are packaged by the supplier in sheets of oiled paper and are stored in
cardboard boxes. They must therefore be protected against moisture and unpacked just prior to assembly.
- The greatest care must be taken over the cleanliness of parts, making sure that when handling or assembling
(starting with straightforward filter and pre-filter replacement) no dirt of foreign bodies can get inside. For this
reason, the plugs protecting the hydraulic parts and sensors must be removed just prior to positioning in their seats.
- Take care over the direction of assembly for all electrical connections.
- All threaded connections must be tightened to the prescribed torque.
- All the quick-coupling connectors (on the engine they are found on the high-pressure pump and on the diesel drain
manifold) must be fully inserted. To drive them out, press on the tabs at the base of the connectors.
Electro-injector
None of the couplings/unions/nuts on the injector body may be handled. It is neither necessary nor permitted to
dismantle the nozzle body or the electromagnet.
If working on the high-pressure pipe, the hexagon on the injector side must be kept stationary with a wrench.
Before working on pipes, make sure the injector is stationary in its seat on the cylinder head.
When assembling/disassembling the injector drain, the retaining spring must not be removed from its seat in the injector:
pushing the spring towards the engine and applying a vertical force on the connector frees the recirculation. When
assembling, rest the recirculation connector in its seat and apply a vertical force while keeping the retaining spring
pressed in the direction of the engine. Fitting in has to be easy.
CP3 High-pressure pump

If working on the high-pressure pipe, the hexagon on the pump side must be kept stationary with a wrench.
Before working on the high-pressure pipe, make sure the pump is secured in its seat.
High-pressure pipes
Each high-pressure pipe must be replaced after disassembly operations.
The couplings must be tightened or loosened with the injectors, hydraulic accumulator (rail) and high-pressure pump
well secured and taking care to keep the hexagon on the component side stationary, space permitting.
Hydraulic accumulator (rail) and accessories

Pressure sensor, as well as pressure relief valve (if present) can be successively mounted 5 times. Thereafter, they need
to be replaced. They must be lubricated with a thin layer of oil before being mounted.
Pressure relief valve, if present, must also be lubricated before being mounted and its gasket must compulsorily be
replaced.
Toothed timing drive belt

If the engine has run for a period equivalent to over 25,000 km, the toothed timing drive belt must be replaced with
a fresh one, no matter what its state of wear, whenever it gets removed or any work is done on its automatic tightener.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

72446
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

540110 ENGINE REMOVAL-REFITTING
Removal Figure 1
Set the vehicle over the pit or on the lift.

Lift up the bonnet (2), unscrew the screws (1) securing it and
take it off. Remove the prop (3).
Disconnect the negative cable (4) and the positive cable (6)
from the battery (5) and detach this from the engine bay.
Unhook the cable (11) from the bonnet opening control
devices.
Disconnect the electrical connections (12) of the front
headlamps.
Unscrew the nuts (7) and screws (8), then remove the front
cross member (10) with the light clusters.
Unscrew the screws (10, 12 and 14) and remove the bottom
side guards (11 and 13).
Underneath the vehicle (see Figure 4):
- Unscrew the screws (⇒) and remove the central guard
(12).
75818
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

- Take the cap (2) off the expansion tank (4). Figure 2
- Unscrew the coolant plug (16), under the radiator (17),
and drain the cooling system.
- Disconnect the pipe (25) from the coalescence filter (26)
and from the air intake pipe (14).
- Disconnect the pipes (12) and (13) from the heat
exchanger, intake manifold and turbocharger.

and damaging it.
- Disconnect the coolant pipes (9 and 10).
NOTE Vehicles with an air-conditioner in the cab should

have the electrical connection (15) disconnected
from the drier filter.
- Unscrew the air filter bracket fasteners (20) to help

extract the air intake pipe (21) from the duct (18) on the
radiator assembly.
- Disconnect the pipe (22) from the duct (19) and (23)
from the engine.
- Disconnect the tube (3) from the expansion tank (4).
- Unscrew the screws (11) to remove the radiator
assembly (17) together with the heat exchanger.
NOTE For vehicles with an air-conditioner in the cab:

- Put the radiator, with condenser and drier filter,
back into the engine bay, taking care not to put
the air-conditioning system pipes under
tension.
- Disconnect the coolant pipes (8) and (24) from the rigid
three-way pipe (27), freeing them from any clamps (7).
- Disconnect the heater delivery pipe (1).
- Unscrew the fasteners (6) to remove the expansion tank
(4), disconnecting the level sensor’s electrical connection.
- Take the soundproofing cover (5) off the cylinder head
after removing the oil filler cap.
75817
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Place a container under the power steering pump to recover Figure 3

the oil from the system. Then disconnect the oil inlet and
outlet pipes (16 and 17).
- Disconnect the pipes (7) recovering diesel from the
high-pressure-pump.
- Disconnect the pipe (8) delivering diesel to the
high-pressure-pump.
- Disconnect the vacuum pipe (23) from the vacuum
pump.
- Disconnect the air intake duct (19).

prevent foreign bodies accidentally getting inside.
- Free the wiring harness of the engine (15) from the

clamps (←) on the timing cover, disconnect the
connections of the alternator (21) and from the sensors
on the thermostat (22), from the electromagnetic
coupling of the fan hub (20) and move the wiring to one
side so it will not interfere with the disassembly of the
engine.
- Disconnect the wiring (2) from the water temperature
and timing sensors, from the injectors, intake air
temperature sensor and rail pressure sensor. Move the
wiring to one side.
- Disconnect the high-pressure pump electrical connection
(10).
- Disconnect the engine speed sensor (9).
- Disconnect the engine earth cable (6).
- Disconnect the positive cable from the starter motor (5).
The remaining electrical connections of the engine cable are
disconnected from the associated electrical components after
removing the engine.
- Disconnect the oil fillpipe by undoing the fastenings (1).
- Undoing the fastenings (18), remove the fan from the
electromagnetic coupling (20).
- Attach tool 99360544 (4) to the brackets on the engine
to extract it from the engine bay and put it slightly under
traction.
NOTE Vehicles with air-conditioning in the cab should have

the compressor (11) disconnected as follows:
- slacken the tightener using the screw (13) and
remove the belt (14);
- undo the fasteners (12), remove the
compressor (11) and put it back into the engine
bay without disconnecting it from the system
pipes.
75820
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

- Disconnect the screws (16 and 20) securing the brackets Figure 4
(17 and 19) and disconnect the ”bowdens” (18 and 21)
from the gearbox.
- Unscrew the fixing screws (22), move the clutch control
cylinder (23), with its bracket, and fasten it to the chassis
frame appropriately.
- Remove the sealing from the ring nut (1), unscrew it and
disconnect the speedometer control cable.
- Disconnect the electrical connection (4) from the
reversing light switch.
- Disconnect the exhaust pipe (9) from the turbocharger
outlet pipe.
- Put a jack under the gearbox to support it.
- Disconnect the bracket supporting the gearbox on the
rear crosspiece by undoing the four screws (5).
- Unscrew the fixing screws (6) and remove the crosspiece
(7) supporting the gearbox complete with the
gearbox/support bracket.
- Disconnect the engine mounts (14) by undoing the four
screws (13).
- Disconnect the rubber buffers (14) by undoing the four
screws (13).
- Unscrew the screws (3) securing the propeller shaft (2)
to the gearbox. Fasten the propeller shaft to the chassis
frame appropriately.
- Take the jack out from under the gearbox.
- Lift the engine assembly and take it out of the engine bay.
NOTE The engine should be taken out of the engine bay

extremely carefully so as not to damage the parts
remaining on the vehicle.
If it is necessary to detach the gearbox from the engine, take

out the fixing screws and remove the starter motor.
Take out the fixing screws and detach the gearbox from the
engine.
Should this prove difficult, take the inspection cover off the
front cover of the gearbox.
Using special pliers, open out the circlip retaining the
thrust-bearing sleeve to the clutch plate while detaching the
gearbox from the engine.
75819
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Refitting
NOTE When positioning the engine in the engine bay,
take special care not to damage the top pipe of the
To refit the engine assembly, carry out the operations power steering and the soundproof-heatproof
described for removal in reverse order, following these cladding of the engine bay.
instructions: Once positioned, meticulously check that the top
pipe of the power steering is sound.
- Before refitting the gearbox to the engine, it is necessary Before using it again, check that the power steering
to remove the pressure plate bearing from the oil and coolant contain no impurities. If they do,
diaphragm spring by opening out the retaining circlip. filter with suitable mesh filters. For any topping up,
Fit the pressure plate bearing on the sleeve of the drive refer to the REPLENISHING FLUIDS table in the
input shaft cover, connecting it to the clutch release “GENERAL” section.
lever. Spread the gearbox input shaft with Molikote
molybdenum disulphide grease.
Engage a gear to let the main shaft turn, rotating the
propeller shaft connecting flange. Push the gearbox fully
in so that the pressure plate bearing couples with the
diaphragm spring correctly.
- Pay special attention to the operations needed to install
the engine assembly in the engine bay. Checks and tests
- Check the conditions of the coolant pipes or sleeves and
of the air ducts. Replace them if they show any sign of Start up the engine, leave it running just a little faster
deterioration. than idling speed and wait for the coolant
- Check the flexible mountings of the assemblies: engine temperature to reach the value for opening the
and gearbox. Replace them if they show any sign of thermostat, then check that:
deterioration.
- Check that the exhaust pipe members have not
deteriorated and are not about to deteriorate. If this is - No water leaks from the connecting sleeves of the
so, replace them along with the flexible parts for securing engine cooling and cab heating circuit pipes; tighten the
them. collars if necessary.
- Tighten the screws or nuts to the required torque. - No oil leaks from between the cover and cylinder head,
oil sump and crankcase, oil filter and its seat, heat
- Meticulously check the state of the vacuum pipe. It must exchanger and crankcase or from between the various
show no sign of cracking, cutting, scoring or of being pipes of the lubricating circuit.
crushed. Replace it if there is any doubt at all about its
soundness. When mounting it, make sure the pipe does - No fuel leaks from injection pump and injector lines.
not come into contact with sharp metal parts or corners Tighten fittings if necessary.
or with any particularly hot parts. In addition, after - Check the indicator and warning lights on the instrument
assembly, the pipe must have no bends or constrictions, panel and the devices disconnected on removing the
its radius of curvature should be broad and it must be engine all work properly.
secured to the vacuum pump fitting with a suitable
clamp.
- Make sure the quick-coupling fittings of the fuel pipes are
thoroughly clean and, after connection to the relevant
high-pressure pump unions or fuel filter mount, are fully
inserted and do not come loose.
- Fill the cooling system with coolant. 501430 Power steering system air
bleed
- Fill the hydraulic power steering circuit and bleed the air
as described under the relevant heading.
Check the level of oil in the tank and top it up if necessary.
- Check the level of oil in the engine and gearbox. Lift the vehicle at the front, start up the engine and let it idle
- Adjust the tension of the drive belt of the compressor for some time.
for the air-conditioner as described in “Replacing Belts” Check there is no oil leakage from the hydraulic circuit and
(if present). check the level in the tank.
Slowly turn the steering wheel in both directions of steering
so that the air in the hydraulic system comes out.
Check the level of oil in the tank again and top up if necessary.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

REPLACING BELTS
543910 Replacing air-conditioning 543910 Replacing air-conditioning
compressor drive belt compressor drive belt
(version with belt tensioner) (version with elastic belt)
Disassembly Disassembly
Figure 7
Figure 5
90155
Take elastic belt (3) off pulleys (1 and 4).

75247
Assembly
Set the vehicle on a lift or over a pit. From underneath the Fit the flexible belt (3) equipped with tool 99360191
vehicle, detach the middle soundproofing guard. (2) on the pulley (4) and apply the tool on the pulley
Loosen the screw (2) fixing the tightener (1) and remove the (1).
belt (4) driving the air-conditioner compressor (3). Fit the drive ring (5) on the flexible belt (3) and fasten
the ring on the compressor support.
Assembly and adjusting belt tension Turn the drive shaft clockwise until the belt fits
perfectly on the pulley (1).
Figure 6 543910 Power steering pump-alternator
belt replacement
Disassembly
Figure 8
75502
Mount the drive belt, taking care to position its ribs properly
in the respective races of the pulleys.
With the tool SP.2341 (2) inserted in the holes of the 75248
tightener (1) and a torque wrench (3), turn the tightener (1) Disassemble the compressor drive belt, if there is one, as
with a torque of 8.2-10 Nm; in this condition, tighten the described under the relevant heading.
screw (4) to a torque of 25 Nm. Slacken off the tension of the belt (1) using a specific wrench
Turn the engine in its direction of rotation to have the belt on the automatic tightener (2) and remove the belt.
(5) make two full turns.
Using tool 99395849, measure the tension of the belt (5) in Assembly
the section A, which must be 204 ± 10 Hz, corresponding to Mount the drive belt (1) taking care to position its
a load of 1010 ± 10 N on the tightener. ribs correctly in the respective races of the pulleys.
Fit the middle soundproofing guard back on. Release the automatic tightener (2). Turn the
crankshaft by one turn to settle the belt.
Mount the compressor drive belt, if there is one, and
adjust the tension as described under the relevant
heading.
Fit the middle soundproofing guard back on.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

541257 Replacing timing drive belt Figure 9
Disassembly
Following the procedures described for removing the engine,

take out the radiator assembly without disconnecting the
air-conditioning system pipes from the condenser or from the
drier filter and put it appropriately aside in the engine bay.
Remove the air-conditioner compressor drive belt (22) (if
there is one) and the water pump / alternator drive belt as
described under the relevant headings.
Remove the fan (25) from the electromagnetic coupling (6).
Disconnect the electrical connection (24) from the
electromagnetic coupling (6).
Take out the fixing screws (2) and (3) and remove the
mounting together with the electromagnetic coupling (6).
Take out the screws and remove the fixed tightener (5) and
the automatic tightener (4).
Remove the wiring from the timing cover (23) and dismantle
this.
Take off the cap (13) and remove the soundproofing cover
(14).
Disconnect the pipes (15) from the pipe (16).
Take out the fixing screws (8) and remove the expansion tank
(7); disconnect the electrical connection for the level indicator
from the expansion tank and put the tank (8) aside
appropriately.
Take out the screws (10) and remove the bracket (11) fixing
the soundproofing cover (14).
Remove the plugs (9) from the overhead and the plug (20)
from the oil pump — vacuum pump assembly mounting.
Turn the crankshaft clockwise so as to be able to insert the pins
99360614 (12) through the holes in the plugs (9) into the
relevant holes of the camshafts and pin 99360615 (19)
through the hole in the plug (20) into the crankshaft.
Loosen the screw (17) securing the automatic tightener (18)
and remove the timing belt (21).
75566
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 10
Assembly
Insert tool 99360608 (8) into the hole of the toothed pulley
(7) and into the corresponding hole of the overhead to
prevent changing the assembly position of the toothed pulley
(7) in the following operations.
Loosen the screw (9) fixing the toothed pulley (7) and, using
tool 99340028, drive the pulley (7) out of the camshaft.
Turn the automatic tightener (1) clockwise, positioning it as
shown in frame A.
Turn the timing belt (10) as shown in the figure observing the
precautions below.
Do not bend the timing belt. Arrows indicating the direction
of assembly of the timing belt on the engine are shown on the
back of the belt. The arrows must correspond to the direction
of rotation of the belt and the notches must coincide with
those on the pulley (7) and the gear (12).
If required to fit the timing belt (10) on the pulley (7), remove
tool 99360608 (8) and turn the pulley (7) clockwise by no
more than half a pulley tooth.
On completing assembly, adjust the toothed pulley (7) to put

the section X of the belt under tension and tighten the screw
(9) to a torque of 90 Nm.
Keeping the screw (2) stationary and using a suitable wrench
on the hexagon of the plate (3) of the tightener, turn it
anticlockwise to cover the reference hole (5) located on the
fixed portion of the tightener (see frame B).
In the above conditions, tighten the fixing screw (2) to a
torque of 36 ± 4 Nm.
Remove the tools 99360614 (6) and 99360615 (11) for the
timing.
Turn the engine in its direction of rotation by 8 turns to be able
to put the tools (6) and (11) back in to do the timing.
In these conditions, the notches of the timing belt (10) must
coincide with those of the pulley (7) and the gear (12).
NOTE Do not turn the engine in the opposite direction; if,

on turning the engine, you pass the point for
inserting the tools (6) and (11), turn the engine
clockwise by another two turns.
See frame C: holding the tightener plate (3) stationary with

the wrench inserted in its hexagon, loosen the fixing screw (2).
Keeping the fixing screw (2) stationary, turn the plate (3)
clockwise until its reference mark ∧ (4) coincides with the
reference hole (5) of the fixed portion of the tightener.
In the above conditions, tighten the screw (2) to a torque of
30 ± 4 Nm.
Then complete assembly by carrying out the steps described
for disassembly in reverse order.
After assembly, the belt (10) tension measured using tool
99395849 must be as follows in the following points: X, 212
± 12 Hz - X1, 178 ± 10 Hz.
x = direction of movement of the tightener

y = direction of rotation of the wrench 85844
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

775010 REPLACING ELECTRO-INJECTORS

Figure 11
75564
Disassembly Assembly
Partly drain the coolant off from the radiator. Thoroughly clean the seat of the electro-injectors, taking care
Remove the plug (13, Figure 9) and detach the no foreign bodies get into the cylinder barrels.
soundproofing cover (14, Figure 9). Fit a fresh gasket (12) onto the electro-injector (10) and fit
Disconnect the pipes (15, Figure 9) from the pipe (16, this in the overhead.
Figure 9).
Take out the fixing screws (8, Figure 9) and remove the Complete assembly by carrying out the operations described
expansion tank (7, Figure 9). Disconnect the level indicator for disassembly in reverse order, taking the following
electrical connection from the expansion tank. precautions:
Disconnect the pipe (17, Figure 12) from the coalescence - With each disassembly, the fuel pipes must be replaced
filter (2, Figure 12). with fresh ones.
Disconnect the electrical connections (1) from the - Tighten the nuts, screws and fittings to the prescribed
electro-injectors (10) and (2) from the fuel pressure sensor torque.
(8). - To tighten the fittings of the fuel pipes, use the wrench
Press the springs (3) in the direction shown by the arrow and in the 99317915 series and the torque wrench
disconnect the fittings of the pipe (4) to recover fuel from the 99389829.
Disconnect the fuel pipes (7) from the electro-injectors (10) - After assembly, replenish the coolant as described under
and from the hydraulic accumulator (9). the relevant heading.
Take out the screws (6) and the brackets (5) fixing the Check assembly of the timing sensor as described under the
electro-injectors (10) to the cylinder head. relevant heading.
Using tool 99342153 (11) extract the electro-injectors (10)
from the overhead.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

540610 CYLINDER HEAD REMOVAL AND REFITTING

Figure 12
75567
Removal
Remove the timing belt as described under the relevant Disconnect the pipe (3) from the fitting.
heading (operation 541257).
Remove the electro-injectors (4) as described in “Replacing
Disconnect the coolant pipes (12) and (13) from the pipe electro-injectors” (operation 775010).
(11). Disconnect the electrical connections from: timing sensor (5)
Take out the fixing screws and remove the expansion tank and remove this from the overhead, water temperature
(16), disconnecting the level sensor electrical connection sensors (6) and (7), air pressure and temperature sensor (10),
from this. and glow plugs (15).
Remove the pipe (18) for the oil dipstick from the intake Detach the fuel pipe (9) from the hydraulic accumulator (8),
manifold. from the high-pressure pump and from the intake manifold.
Disconnect the pipes (1) and (17) from the coalescence filter Disconnect the fuel return pipe (14) from the pressure relief
(2) and detach this from the overhead. valve of the hydraulic accumulator (8).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 13
75568
Loosen the clamp and disconnect the sleeve (11) from the Take out the screws and remove the overhead together with
air duct (10). the pins 99360614.
Loosen the collar (2), take out the screw (13) fixing the
bracket (12) and detach the air duct (10).
Disconnect the oil vapour recirculation pipe (8) from the air NOTE The pins 99360614 applied so as not to alter the
intake sleeve (9) and disconnect this from the turbocharger timing after removing the timing belt must be
(5). removed from the overhead only if this is to be
Disconnect the oil pipe (1) from the cylinder head and from removed.
the turbocharger (5).
Loosen the clamp (7) and disconnect the oil pipe (6) from
the crankcase union.
Take out the screws and disconnect the exhaust pipe (4) Take off the overhead gasket.
from the turbocharger (5). Take out the tappets and carefully put them aside.
Take off the nuts (3) and remove the turbocharger (5) with Using the bushing 99355041, take out the glow plugs.
its gasket from the exhaust manifold. Take out the screws fixing the cylinder head and detach this
from the crankcase.
Remove the cylinder head gasket.
NOTE Close the turbocharger air outlet/inlet
appropriately to prevent foreign bodies
accidentally getting inside and damaging it.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Refitting Figure 14
Refitting requires carrying out the operations for removal in A

reverse order, while taking the following precautions:
Check that the timing tools:
- 99360614 (6, Figure 10) and 99360608 (8, Figure 10)
are inserted in the overhead;
- 99360615 (11, Figure 10) is inserted in the crankcase as
described in “Replacing timing belt.”
Keep the cylinder head gasket clean.
75494
Position the cylinder head gasket with the lettering ”TOP”
facing the cylinder head. Diagram of the tightening sequence for the cylinder head
fixing screws:
- 1st phase: pre-tightening with torque wrench
• screws 1-2-3-4-5-6 to a torque of 100 ±5 Nm;
• screws 7-8-9-10 to a torque of 50 ±2.5 Nm.
- 2nd phase: angle closing
• screws 1-2-3-4-5-6 90° ±5°;
• screws 7-8-9-10 60° ±3°.
- 3rd phase: angle closing
• screws 1-2-3-4-5-6 90° ±5°;
NOTE It is essential to keep the gasket sealed in its package • screws 7-8-9-10 60° ±3°.
A = flywheel side.
- Tighten the screws and nuts to the prescribed torque.

- The seals and gaskets must not be reused, but replaced
with new ones.
Mount the cylinder head. Insert the screws and tighten them,
in three successive stages, following the order and method
shown in the following figure. NOTE If the engine has run for a period equivalent to =
25,000 km, the toothed timing drive belt must be
replaced with a fresh one, no matter what its state
of wear.
NOTE The angle closure is done with tool 99395216.
To tighten the glow plugs, use the bushing 99355041 and

torque wrench 99389819.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
Print 603.43.351
771010 REPLACING HIGH-PRESSURE

PUMP CP3 Figure 17
Removal
Remove the timing belt as described under the relevant

Figure 15
75273
Take out the screws (1) and remove the high-pressure pump
(2) from the water pump mounting (3).
Refitting
For refitting, carry out the steps described for removal in reverse
order and tighten the screws and nuts to the prescribed torque.
75271
Lock rotation of the high-pressure pump gear (1) by applying NOTE If the engine has run for a period equivalent to =
tool SP. 2263 (2) as illustrated in the figure. Remove the nut 25,000 km, the toothed timing drive belt must be
(3) and take out the tool (2). replaced with a fresh one, no matter what its state
of wear.
543210 REPLACING WATER PUMP
Removal
Figure 16
Remove the high-pressure pump as described under the
relevant heading.
Figure 18
75272
Using tool 99340035 (2) applied as shown in the figure,

extract the gear (1) from the shaft of the high-pressure pump
(3).
75569
Take out the screw (2) and remove the fixed tightener (1).
Take out the screws (3) and remove the water pump
mounting (4).
Refitting
Fit two new seals on the water pump and fit it back on the
crankcase, carrying out the operations described for removal
in reverse order and tightening the screws or nuts to the
prescribed torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

EMISSIONS
Engine F1AE0481A*A (96 HP) — Engine F1AE0481B*A (116 HP)
Figure 19
75570

The engines conform to the Euro3 standards on gas The engines conform to the limits of smokiness required by
emissions (measurement on engine bench according to EEC standards 72/306, updated 97/20 EC: 1.49 l/m with the
OICA cycle), with the following limits fixed by the ESC and following exhaust smoke values:
ELR 1999/96-2001/27 standards: Maximum power (Bosch BSU opacimeter degrees) 1.5
ESC:
- CO (carbon monoxide) < 2.1 g/kWh
Noise emissions
- NOx (nitrogen oxide) < 5.0 g/kWh Maximum mean noise level, Lpa, of the standard engines
- HC (unburnt hydrocarbons) < 0.66 g/kWh measured according to ISO Std. 3745 (microphones at 1 m
- Particulate < 0.13 g/kWh Idling (800 rpm) 76 dBA
ELR: 0.8 l/m (opacity) Full power (3800 rpm) 96 dBA.
Test fuel: CEC RF03A084 — S ≤ 0.03%
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Engine F1AE0481B*B (116 HP with EGR)

Figure 20
75571

The engine conforms to the Euro3 standards on gas The engine conforms to the limits of smokiness required by
emissions (measurement on engine bench according to EEC standards 72/306, updated 97/20 EC: 1.49 l/m with the
OICA cycle), with the following limits fixed by the ESC and following exhaust smoke values:
ELR 1999/96-2001/27 standards: Maximum power (Bosch BSU opacimeter degrees) 1.5
ESC:
- CO (carbon monoxide) < 0.95 g/kWh
- NOx (nitrogen oxide) < 0.78 g/kWh Noise emissions
- HC + NOx (unburnt hydrocarbons) < 0.86 g/kWh Maximum mean noise level, Lpa, of the standard engines
- Particulate < 0.1 g/kWh from the engine surfaces):
ELR: 0.8 l/m (opacity) Idling (800 rpm) 76 dBA
Full power (3800 rpm) 96 dBA.
Test fuel: CEC RF03A084 — S ≤ 0.03%
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

ENGINE IDENTIFICATION CODE
F 1 A E 0 4 8 1 A * C +
Emission level
Type approval power
Use No.
Supply / injection
No. cylinders
Engine cycle — cylinder position
Engine
Family development 0= 4-stroke,

vertical
Engine family
4 = 4 cylind.
6 = 6 cylind.
8 = DI. TCA
1 = Truck
2 = Bus
4 = E.M. mach.
& tractors
6 = Nautical
9 = Military
0481 A = 71 kW - (96 CV) 3000-3700 rpm - 244 Nm / 1800÷2800 rpm

0481 B = 85 kW - (116 CV) 3000-3900 rpm - 270 Nm / 1800÷2800 rpm
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
Figure 21
SELF-ADHESIVE LABEL
Engine variant
Iveco drawing number
— 9 digits
Engine serial number
— 7 digits
GAN — 9 characters
Electro-injector class
1 or 2 or 3

— 9 digits
75243
Figure 22
CRANKCASE MARKING
75244
EXAMPLE
A = IVECO trademark IVECO
B = IVECO name of engine variant ** F1AE0481A * A001
C = Engine serial number 1359862
st
D = 1 digit, main journal no. 1 (engine front)
E = Main bearing selection diameters 12345
F = Barrel selection diameters 1234
st
G = 1 digit, cylinder no. 1 (engine front)
(**) Data obtainable from “XZ” engine ordering number information
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Type F1AE0481 A F1AE0481 B

Supply Turbocharged with intercooler
Injection Direct
Number of cylinders 4 in line
∅
Bore mm 88
Stroke mm 94
ρ Compression ratio 18
Maximum power kW 71 85
(HP) (96) (116)
rpm 3000 ÷ 3700 3000 ÷ 3900
Maximum torque kW 240 270

(HP) (24.4) (27.5)
rpm 1800 ÷ 2800 1800 ÷ 2800
Slow running of engine

with no load rpm 800
Fast idling speed of
engine with no load rpm 4600
Pressure at T.D.C.
*bar 20 ÷ 26
pressure at T.D.C.
*bar 16
(*) The pressure is measured by setting the engine turning with the aid of just the starter motor, with an oil temperature of
40 — 50°C.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
A
TIMING SYSTEM
Start before T.D.C. A 14°
end after B.D.C. B 27°

B
Start before T.D.C. D 54°
end after B.D.C. C 10°

D
For timing check
mm -
X
mm -
X
Operation
mm -
X
mm -
High pressure electronic fuel feed system BOSCH MS6.3 to

chassis number (…) and BOSCH EDC16 from chassis
number (…).
SUPPLY
Composed of CP3 high-pressure pump, electro-injectors,
temperature sensors
Pump setting -
With piston no.1 at T.D.C.
X
Electro injectors type

Electro-injectors BOSCH
Injection sequence 1- 3 - 4 - 2
bar
Injection pressure bar 1600
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TURBOCHARGING With intercooler
Turbocharger type KKK K03-2072-EDC

K03 2072 EDC 5.68
5 68
Turbocharger shaft radial play -
Turbocharger shaft end float -
Maximum stroke of pressure relief valve opening mm 3.5 ±0.5
Pressure corresponding to maximum stroke: bar 1.5 ±0.002
forced by gear pump, pressure relief valve, oil filter with
LUBRICATION
integral cartridge with total filtering
Oil pressure with engine hot
bar (100°C ±5°C):
at idling speed bar ≥0.6
at top speed bar 4
by centrifugal pump, thermostat for adjustment, coolant
COOLING temperature, fan with electromagnetic coupling, radiator,
heat exchanger
Water pump control: by belt
Thermostat: N. I.
start of opening: 82 ±2ºC
FLUIDS
Capacity:
engine sump
at minimum level liters 3
kg 2.65
engine sump
at maximum level litres 4.3
Urania Daily kg 3.78
Urania LD 5 quantity in circulation
in cartridge filter and heat
exchanger
litres 1.4
kg 1.23
quantity of oil for first
filling liters 57
5.7
kg 5.02
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ASSEMBLY DATA — CLEARANCES
CYLINDER ASSEMBLY AND CRANK MEMBERS mm

∅1 Cylinder liners:
∅1 88.002 ÷ 88.022
Cylinder liners: -
L outside diameter ∅ -
∅2 length L -
Cylinder liners —
crankcase seats -
(interference)
Outside diameter ∅2 -
∅3
Cylinder liners:
X (protrusion from bottom -
of crankcase)
inside diameter ∅3 -
Pistons:
∅1 FEDERAL MOGUL MAHLE MONDIAL
supplied as spares type
X measurement X 46 45.5
outside diameter ∅1 87.801 ÷ 87.815 87.832 ÷ 87.846
∅2 seat for pin ∅2 31.003 ÷ 31.009
Piston — cylinder liners 0.187 ÷ 0.221 0.156 ÷ 0.190
X
Piston protrusion
from crankcase X 0.3 ÷ 0.6
∅3 Piston gudgeon pin ∅3 30.990 ÷ 30.996
Piston gudgeon pin — pin seat 0.07 ÷ 0.019
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004


Type of piston FEDERAL MOGUL MAHLE MONDIAL
X1* 2.197 2.200 ÷ 2.230
X1
Piston ring slots X2 2.040 ÷ 2.060 2.050 ÷ 2.070
X2
X3 X3 2.520 ÷ 2.540 2.540 ÷ 2.560
* measured on ∅ of 85 mm
S1 Piston rings: S 1* 2.068 ÷ 2.097
S2 S2 1.970 ÷ 1.990
S3 S3 2.470 ÷ 2.490
* measured on ∅ 85 mm
Piston rings — slots 1 0.103 ÷ 0.162
2 0,060 ÷ 0.100
3 0.050 ÷ 0.090
Piston rings 0.4
X1 Piston ring end opening in

cylinder liner:
X2
X1 0.20 ÷ 0.35
X3
X2 0.60 ÷ 0.80
X3 0.25 ÷ 0.50
∅1 Small end bushing seat
Ø1 34.460 ÷ 34.490
Connecting rod bearing seat*

∅2
Ø2 62.833 ÷ 62.841
* connecting rod supplied as
spare part
∅4 Small end bushing diameter
∅3 outside ∅4 34.560 ÷ 34.585
inside ∅3 31.010 ÷ 31.020

S
Big end bearing shells
supplied as spare part S -
Small end bushing — seat
0.07 ÷ 0.125
(interference)
Piston gudgeon pin — bushing 0.014 ÷ 0.030
Big end bearing shells 0.254 - 0.508
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


X
Measurement X 125
Maximum error
on alignment of
connecting rod axes = 0.09
Main journals ∅1
∅1 ∅2 No. 1-2-3-4 71.182 ÷ 71.208
No. 5 76.182 ÷ 76.208
Crankpins ∅2 59.015 ÷ 59.038
Main bearing shells
S1* 2.165 ÷ 2.174
S2* 1.883 ÷ 1.892
Main bearing housings ∅ 3
∅3 No. 1-2-3-4 75.588 ÷ 75.614
No. 5 80.588 ÷ 80.614
Bearing shells -
Bearing shells —
crankpins 0.035 ÷ 0.083
Main journal
for shoulder X1 31.020 ÷ 31.170
X 1
Main bearing housing

for shoulder X2 25.790 ÷ 25.840
X 2
X3
Half thrust washers X3
30.810 ÷ 30.960
Crankshaft shoulder
0.060 ÷ 0.260
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

CYLINDER HEAD — TIMING SYSTEM mm

∅ 1
Guide valve seats

on cylinder head ∅1 9.980 ÷ 10.000
∅ 2
∅2 6.023 ÷ 6.038
Valve guides
∅3 10.028 ÷ 10.039
∅ 3
Valve guides and seats on head

0.028 ÷ 0.059
(interference)
Valve guides 0.05 - 0.10 - 0.25
∅ 4 Valves:
∅4 5.975 ÷ 5.990
α 44°45’ ± 77.5’
5’
∅4 5.975 ÷ 5.990
α 44°45’ ± 77.5’
5’
α
Valve stem and relevant guide 0.033 ÷ 0.063
Seat on head for valve seat:
∅1 31.390 ÷ 31.415
∅ 1 31.390 ÷ 31.415
∅1

∅ 2 seats; angle of valve seats on
cylinder
y head:
∅2 31 495 ÷ 31.510
31.495 31 510
α 44.5° ± 5’
α ∅2 31.495 ÷ 31.510
α 44.5° ± 5’
X 0.5 ÷ 0.8
X Recessing X 0.5 ÷ 0.8
0.08 - 0.12
Between valve
seat and head
0.08 - 0.12
Valve seats -
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


Valve spring height:
free spring H 54
H under a load of:
H1
H 2 N243 ± 12 H1 45
N533 ± 24 H2 35

X
∅ Seats for tappets on

cylinder head normal ∅ 12.016 ÷ 12.034
Normal diameter tappets 11.988 ÷ 12.000

∅
Camshaft pin seats in

cylinder overhead
1⇒7
∅1 48.987 ÷ 49.013
∅ ∅ ∅ ∅2 46 987 ÷ 47.013
46.987 47 013
1 2 3
∅3 35.987 ÷ 36.013
∅ 2
Camshaft supporting pins:
∅1 48.925 ÷ 48.950
∅2 46 925 ÷ 46.950
46.925 46 950
∅1 ∅2 ∅3
∅3 35.925 ÷ 35.950
Supporting pins and seats 0.037 ÷ 0.088
Useful cam height
H H
3.77
H
4.203
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
99317915 Set of six box-type wrenches (14-17-19 mm)
Rotary telescopic stand for overhauling assemblies

99322205 (capacity 700 daN, torque 120 daN/m)
99340028 Extractor for camshaft pulley
99340035 High-pressure pump toothed pulley extractor
99340057 Tool to remove crankshaft front gasket
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99340058 Tool to remove crankshaft rear gasket
99342153 Tool to extract injectors
99346254 Keying device for mounting crankshaft front gasket
99346255 Keying device for mounting crankshaft rear gasket
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
99360191 Guide for flexible belt
99360544 Arm for removing and refitting engine
99360608 Tool for positioning timing gear
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99360614 Tool (2) for camshaft timing
99360615 Tool for crankshaft timing
99367121 Manual pump to measure pressure and vacuum
99374458 Keying device for mounting oil seal gasket on camshaft front cover
99389819 Torque wrench (0-10 Nm) with square 1/4” connection
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
99389829 9x12 coupling torque wrench (5-60 Nm)
Milling cutter to regrind injector seat

99394038 (8140.63 engine excluded)
99395216 connection
99395687 Bore meter (50 — 178 mm)
Device for checking belt tension

99395849 (frequency from 10.0 to 600 Hz)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99396037 Centring ring for crankshaft front gasket cover
EXPERIMENTAL TOOLS
This section shows the working drawings for the experimental tools (S.P.) used in overhauling the engine described in this
section, which may be made by the repair shops.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TIGHTENING TORQUE
TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
Cylinder head central fixing screw
first phase: pre-tightening 100 9.8
second phase: angle 90º
third phase: angle 90º
Cylinder head side fixing screw
first phase: pre-tightening 50 4.9
second phase: angle 60º
third phase: angle 60º
Hex screw with flange M8x1.25 L 40 fixing overhead 25 2.5
Hex screw with flange M8x1.25 L 77 fixing overhead 25 2.5
Central base fastening screw
first phase: pre-tightening 50 ± 5 5 ± 0.5
second phase: angle 60º ± 2.5º
third phase: angle 60º ± 2.5º
Outer base fastening screw 36 ÷ 30 3.6 ÷ 3
Connecting rod cap fixing screw
first phase: pre-tightening 40 4
second phase: angle 60°
Hex screw with flange M12x1.25 L 43 fixing engine flywheel
first phase: pre-tightening 30 3
second phase: angle 90°
Cylindrical socket head screw fixing phonic wheel to crankshaft • 15 1.5
Nozzle union 25 2.5
Tapered threaded socket plug R 3/8” x 10 oil circuit 22 2.2
Water drain plug M14x1.50 L 10 25 2.5
Union on crankcase for oil return from turbocharger R 3/8” 50 5
Screw M6x1 fixing suction strainer 10 1
Male threaded socket plug M28x1.5 L11 fixing 100 9.8
Hex screw with flange M8x1.5 L 35 fixing frame retaining oil sump 25 2.5
Hex screw with flange M6x1 L30 fixing frame retaining oil sump 10 1
Hex screw with flange M6x1 L25 fixing frame retaining oil sump 10 1
Tapered threaded socket plug M6x1x8.5* 2 0.2
Male threaded plug with O-ring M22x1.5 L16 50 ±10 5 ±1
Hex screw with flange M6x1 L20 fixing oil vacuum pump assembly 10 1
Hex screw with flange M6x1 L50 fixing oil vacuum pump assembly 10 1
Oil filter cartridge M22x1.5 L7 25 2.5
Union fixing heat exchanger M22x1.5 80 ± 5 7.8 ± 0.5
Hex screw with flange M12x1.25 L55 fixing toothed pulley controlling timing system 90 8.8
Hex screw with flange M18x1.5 L78 fixing pulley on crankshaft 300 30
Hex screw with flange M8x1.25 L45 fixing pulley on damper 30 3
Hex screw with flange M8x1.25 L60 fixing automatic tightener 36 3.6
High pressure pump gear fastening hex nut with flange M14x1.5 70 6.9
Fastener for complete guide pulley roller for timing belt M8x1.25 L45 25 2.5
• Thread pre-treated with Loctite.
* Apply Loctite on the thread.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
Tapered threaded socket plug R 3/8” x 10 17 1.7
Hex screw with flange M12x1.25 L65 fixing gear for camshaft chain 115 11.3
Hex screw with flange M6x1 L25 fixing chain cover 10 1
Hex screw with flange M6x1 L35 automatic tightener 10 1
Threaded plug M14x1.5 L10 25 2.5
Ball joint fastening screw M6x1x9 10 1
Hex screw with split washer and flat washer fixing water pump M8x1.25 L28 25 2.5
Hex screw with split washer and flat washer fixing water pump M6x1 L20 10 1
Flanged screw M8x1.25 fixing water outlet union 25 2.5
Flanged screw M8x1.25 fixing piezometric tube on intake manifold 25 2.5
Flanged nut M8x1.25 fixing piezometric tube on bracket 18 1.8
Self-tapping screw L16 fixing bracket on coalescence filter cover 6 0.6
Flanged screw M6x1x16 fixing piezometric tube 10 1
Self-tapping flanged screw L14 fixing piezometric tube on front cover 2 0.2
Coupling M10x1x10 fixing vapour outlet 12 1.2
Union M10x1x19 fixing vapour outlet 14 ÷ 16 1.4 ÷ 1.6
Hex screw with flange M8x1.25 L25 fixing thermostat 25 2.5
Hex screw with flange M8x1.25 L100 fixing air-conditioner compressor 25 2.5
Hex screw with flange M8x1.25 L120 fixing air-conditioner compressor 25 2.5
Hex screw with flange M8x1.25 L50 fixing air-conditioner compressor mounting 25 2.5
Cylindrical socket head screw M8x1.25x40 fixing air-conditioner compressor drive belt guide
25 2.5
pulley
Hex screw fixing bottom of alternator M10x1.25 L40 and M10x1.5 L50 50 5
Hex nut with flange fixing top of alternator M10x1.25 L10 - -
Fastener for complete guide pulley roller for timing belt M10x1.25 L50 40 4
Allen head screw fixing automatic tightener M8x1.25 L65 25 2.5
Hex screw with flange M8x1.25 L45 fixing pulley on damper 30 3
Screw plug with washer M12x1.5 L20 30 3
Vacuum pump coupling M10x1 on oil vacuum pump assembly 10 1
Flanged screw M6x1x27 fixing timing cover 7.5 0.7
Hex screw with flange M6x1 L27 fixing coalescence filter assembly 10 1
Screw M6x1 L12 fixing sump blow-by oil drain pipes 10 1
Union M20x1.5 blow-by breather socket 30 3
Hex screw with flange M8x1.25 L90 fixing intake manifold 30 3
Flanged nut M8x1.25 fixing exhaust manifold 25 2.5
Flanged screw M6x1 fixing oil fillpipe 10 1
Flanged screw M8x1.25 fixing oil dipstick pipe 18 1.8
Glow plug M8x1 L11.5 8 ÷ 11 0.8 ÷ 1.1
High-pressure injection system
Hex screw fixing hydraulic accumulator M8x1.25 L50 28 2.8
Screw M8x1.25 L30 fixing high-pressure pump 25 2.5
Screw M8x1.25 fixing bracket anchoring fuel delivery pipe 25 2.5
Fitting for fuel pipe M14x1.50 (forged hydraulic accumulator) 25 ± 2 2.5 ± 0.2
Fitting for fuel pipe M12x1.50 (forged hydraulic accumulator) 25 ± 2 2.5 ± 0.2
Hex screw fixing electro-injector retaining bracket 28 2.8
Hex screw with flange fixing low-pressure fuel pipes M6x1 L30 10 1
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
Pipe fitting M12x1.5 to secure electric injectors side and high pressure pump side piping
25 ± 2 2.5 ± 0.2
(welded hydraulic accumulator)
Pipe fitting M14x1.5 to secure hydraulic accumulator side piping
19 ± 0.2 1.9 ± 0.2
(welded hydraulic accumulator)
Union M12x1.5 L23 - L24 and M12x1.5 Ll2 for fixing fuel pipes 25 2.5
Fitting for fastening multiple filler to high pressure pump M12x1.5 L24 25 2.5
Flanged screw M12x1.5 fixing water temperature sensor 30 3
Flanged screw M6x1 fixing air temperature sensor 10 1
Flanged screw M6x1 fixing engine speed sensor 10 1
Socket-head screw M6x1 fixing timing sensor 10 1
Screw M8x1.25 fixing air duct bracket 28 2.8
Screw M8x1.25 fixing air duct 25 2.5
Cylindrical socket-head screw M6x1 for V-clamp 8 0.8
Nut M8x1.25 fixing turbocharger 25 2.5
Flanged screw M8x1.25 fixing turbocharger outlet pipe 25 2.5
Fitting M14x1.5 or M12x1.5 for pipe delivering oil to turbocharger 35 3.5
Fitting M22x1.5 for oil return pipe from turbocharger 45 4.5
Flanged screw fixing oil return pipe from turbocharger 10 1
Hex screw with flange M8x1.25 L40 fixing power steering pump 25 2.5
Hex screw with flange M12x1.25 L155 fixing electromagnetic coupling mounting 90 8.8
Hex screw with flange M8x1.25 L20 fixing manoeuvring hooks 25 2.5
Flanged screws M10x1.25 fixing engine mounts 50 5
Oil level sensor M12x1.25 25 2.5
Thermometric switch/transmitter M16x1.5 25 2.5
Oil pressure switch M14x1.5 40 4
Cylindrical socket-head screw M8x1.25 fixing E.G.R. valve 25 2.5
Flanged screw M8x1.25 fixing E.G.R. heat exchanger 25 2.5
Flanged nut M8x1.25 fixing elbow 25 2.5
Compensator fastening nut M8x1.25 25 2.5
Oil pressure regulation valve cap 100 10
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 23
75815
LONGITUDINAL CROSS-SECTION OF ENGINE WITH E.G.R.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 24
75816
TRANSVERSE CROSS-SECTION OF ENGINE WITH E.G.R.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

OVERHAULING ENGINE F1A

540110 DISASSEMBLING THE ENGINE Figure 27
AT THE BENCH
Figure 25
75247
75245 Take off screw (2), if present, and dismount belt tensioner (1).
If the following parts have not already been removed, do so Take off the belt (4) driving the air-conditioner compressor
now: (3).
- top soundproofing cover;
- rail guard; Figure 28
- engine cable, disconnecting its electrical connections
from: thermostat temperature sensor, timing sensor,
engine speed sensor, pressure regulator, rail pressure
sensor, intake manifold air temperature/pressure sensor.
To be able to fit the brackets 99361038 onto the crankcase
to secure the engine to the stand for overhauling, it is
necessary to remove the left and right engine mounts (3) and
disconnect the oil pipe (2) from the turbocharger (1) and
from the crankcase.
NOTE Block the turbocharger air/exhaust gas inlets and

outlets to prevent foreign bodies getting inside.
88614
Figure 26 Or, on the engines with elastic belt (2), with a suitable tool,
take the belt off pulleys (1 and 3).
Figure 29
75246
Fit the brackets 99361038 (2) to the crankcase and use these
to secure the engine to the rotary stand 99322205 (3). Drain
75248
the oil from the engine by removing the plug from the oil
sump. Using the specific wrench on the automatic tightener (2),
Disconnect the fan from the electromagnetic coupling (1). slacken the tension of the belt (1) and remove it.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 30 Figure 33
75249 75252
Take out the screw (4) and remove the automatic tightener Take out the screws (2) and (3) and remove the mounting
(3). Take out the screw (2) and remove the fixed tightener (1) together with the electromagnetic coupling (4).
(1). Take out the screws (5) and remove the pulley (6).
Figure 34
Figure 31
75250
Take out the bolt (1), the bottom screws (3 and 4) and
remove the alternator (2) from the mounting (5).
75253
Take out the screws (1) and remove the timing cover (2).
Figure 32
Figure 35
75251
75254
Take out the screw (3) and remove the mounting (1) of the Take out the screw (3) and remove the tightener (4).
power steering pump (4). Using a suitable wrench, remove Take out the screws (1) and (5) and remove the gears (2) and
the oil level sensor (2). (6). Remove the toothed belt (7).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 36 Figure 39
75255 75258
Take out the screws (2) and remove the bracket (1). Take Take out the screws (2) and the brackets (3) fixing the
out the screws (4) and remove the coalescence filter (3). electro-injectors (1) to the cylinder overhead.
Take off the nuts (6) and remove the oil fillpipe (5).
Figure 37 Figure 40
75256 75259
Press the springs (3) in the direction shown by the arrow and Using tool 99342153 (1) extract the electro-injectors (2)
disconnect the fittings of the pipe (1) recovering fuel from the from the overhead.
Figure 41
Figure 38
75257 75260
Disconnect the fuel pipes (2) from the electro-injectors (3) Take out the screw (4) and extract the oil dipstick pipe (3)
and from the hydraulic accumulator (1) (rail). from the crankcase. Disconnect the pipe (2) from the
hydraulic accumulator (1) and from the high-pressure pump
(5).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 42 Figure 45
75261
Only for forged version hydraulic accumulator, take off pipe

fitting (4) and disconnect piping (5) for fuel recovery from
75264
overpressure valve (3).
Take out the screws (1) and remove the hydraulic Take out the screw (4), loosen the clamp (1) and disconnect
accumulator (2). the air duct (5) from the turbocharger (2) and from the
overhead (3).
Figure 43
Figure 46
75262
Disconnect the fuel recovery pipes (4), (5) and (6) from the
high-pressure pump (2), removing the couplings (1) and (3).
Figure 44
75265
Disconnect the oil pipe (7) from the coupling of the cylinder
head (1) and from the coupling of the turbocharger (3).
Take off the nuts (2) and remove the turbocharger (3) with
the associated gasket from the exhaust manifold (6).
Take off the nuts (5) and the spacers (4), remove the exhaust
manifold (6) with the associated gasket from the cylinder
head (1).
75263
For engines with E.G.R. only

Loosen the clamp (3) and disconnect the pipe (4) from the
heat exchanger (1).
Take off the nuts (2) and (6) and remove the heat exchanger
(1) together with the E.G.R. valve (5).
Take out the screws (8) and remove the flange (7).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 47 Figure 50
75266 75269
Take off screws (1) and disconnect inlet manifold (2) with its Take off the gasket (1) and remove the hydraulic tappets
gasket. together with the rocker arms (2).
Using wrench SP.2275 (3), remove the glow plugs (4).
Figure 51
Figure 48
75270
Take out the screws (1) and remove the cylinder head (2).
75267
Dismount sensor (3).

Take off the nut (1) and remove the timing sensor (2). Using NOTE Check the protrusion of the pistons as described
under the relevant heading to check the possibility
wrench SP.2262 (7), remove the temperature sensors (4).
of facing the crankcase if it has deformed.
Take out the screws (5) and remove the thermostat box (6).
Figure 49 Figure 52
75271
Block rotation of the high-pressure pump gear (1) by applying

75268 tool SP 2263 (2) as shown in the figure. Take off the nut (3)
and remove the tool (2).
Take out the screws (1) and remove the overhead (2).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 53 Figure 56
75272 75275
Using tool 99340035 (2), applied as in the figure, extract the Remove the plug (6) from the oil pump — vacuum pump
gear (1) from the shaft of the high-pressure pump (3). assembly (1).
Position the crankshaft so as to be able to insert tool
Figure 54 99360615 (5) into its hole through the hole in the plug (6)
and block rotation of the crankshaft.
Take out the screw (3) with the spacer (4) beneath and
remove the gear (2).
Figure 57
75273
Take out the screws (1) and remove the high-pressure pump
(2) from the water pump mounting (3).
75276
Figure 55
Apply tool 99340057 (4) to the front O-ring (3) of the
crankshaft and remove it from the oil pump — vacuum pump
assembly (2).
Take out the screws (1) and remove the oil pump — vacuum
pump assembly (2).
75274
Take out the screws (2) and remove the water pump
assembly (2).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 58 Figure 61
75277 75280
Using tool 99360076 (1), remove the oil filter (2). Take out the screw (2) and remove the speed sensor (1).
Take out the screws (4) and remove the compressor
mounting (3).
Figure 59 Figure 62
75278 75281
Take out the coupling (2) and remove the heat exchanger Take out the plug (2) with the seal (3) and extract the oil
(1). pressure control valve (1).
Figure 60 Figure 63
75279 75282
Take out the screws (2) and remove the air-conditioner Undo the screws (2) and remove the oil sump (1) with the
compressor (1) (if applicable). associated gasket and frame (3).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 64 Figure 66
75283
Take out the screws (2), (3), (4) and (5) and remove the 75285
suction strainer (1) together with the pipe (6).
Block rotation of the flywheel (1) with tool 99360306 (3).
Take out the screws (2) and remove the engine flywheel (1).
Take out the screw (5) and remove the guard (4).
Figure 65
Figure 67
75284
Take out the screws (2) and remove the connecting rod caps
(3).
Extract the pistons (1) from the top of the crankcase.
75286
Apply tool 99340058 (2) to the rear O-ring (1) and extract
it from the crankcase.
NOTE On the same side of the connecting rod and its

associated cap, indicate the number of the cylinder
from which the connecting rod has been removed.
Keep the bearing shells in their respective housings
since, if they are used, they will need to be fitted in
the position found during removal.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 68 Figure 71
75287
Using an appropriate wrench and a hex-fluted wrench,

unscrew the screws (1) and (2) and remove the crankcase
base (3).
75290
Figure 69 Take out the couplings (1) and remove the oil jets (2).
NOTE On completing engine removal, it is necessary to

clean the removed parts thoroughly and check
their integrity.
The following pages give the instructions for the
main checks and measurements to make in order
to determine whether the parts can be reused.
75288
NOTE Note the assembly position of the bottom main

bearing shells (2) since, if they are reused, they will
need to be fitted in the position found during
removal.
Figure 70
75289
With the aid of a hoist and a rope, remove the crankshaft (1).
NOTE Note the assembly position of the top main bearing

shells (2) since, if they are reused, they will need to
be fitted in the position found during removal.
The central half ring (3) is fitted with thrust half-washers.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

REPAIRS Figure 74
CYLINDER BLOCK
Checks and measurements
Figure 72
1st measurement
2nd measurement
3rd measurement
75293
The measurements must be made for each single cylinder at
three different heights up the liner and on two planes at right
18837
angles to each other: one parallel to the longitudinal axis of
After removing the engine, thoroughly clean the the engine (B) and the perpendicular (A); the greatest wear
cylinder-crankcase assembly. Use the rings 99365508 to is generally found on this last plane with the first
carry the cylinder block. measurement.
Carefully check that the crankcase has no cracks in it. On finding ovalization, taper or wear, go ahead and
Check the state of the plugs. If they are rusty or there is any bore/grind and finish the face of the cylinder liners. The
doubt about their seal, replace them. Examine the surfaces refacing of the cylinder liners should be done in relation to
of the cylinder liners; they must show no sign of meshing, the diameter of the pistons supplied as spare parts oversized
scoring, ovalization, taper or excessive wear. The inside by 0.4 mm of the nominal value and to the prescribed
diameter of the cylinder liners is checked, to ascertain the assembly clearance.
extent of ovalization, taper and wear, using the bore meter
99395687 (1) fitted with a dial gauge previously reset on the Figure 75
ring gauge of the diameter of the cylinder liner or on a
micrometer.
Figure 73
75292
* Surface roughness parameters:
Rt = 4 ÷ 10 µm
Rz = 3 ÷ 8 µm
Ra = 0.25 ÷ 0.6 µm
Wt < 1.5 µm
Permissible surface porosity for machined cylinder
(see Figure 75)
ZONE B1 = Area of greatest mechanical stress,
segment/liner contact: No.2 C
non-continuous porosities are 100%
permissible max. 0.5x0.5.
ZONE B2 = Surface involved in segment rubbing: C
No.2 non-contiguous porosities are
permissible max. 1x0.8. 100%
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Checking head mating surface on cylinder 5408 CRANKSHAFT

block 540810 Measuring main journals and
Figure 76 crank pins
Figure 78
75296 75298
See that the head mating surface, on the cylinder block, has On finding signs of seizure, scoring or excessive ovalization
no deformation. on main journals and crankpins, it is necessary to regrind the
This check can be made, after taking out the grub screws (3), pins. Before grinding the pins (2), measure the shaft pins with
with a surface plate spread with carbon black or with a a micrometer (1) to establish to what diameter it is necessary
calibrated rule (1) and a feeler gauge (2). After ascertaining to decrease the pins.
the areas of deformation, level the bearing surface with a
grinding machine.
NOTE The crankcase can only be surfaced after making NOTE It is advisable to enter the measurements in a table.
sure that, on completing the work, the piston See Figure 77.
protrudes from the cylinder liner by no more than
the prescribed value.
Figure 77 NOMINAL NOMINAL

VALUE VALUE
MINIMUM ∅
MAXIMUM ∅
NOMINAL
VALUE
MINIMUM ∅
MAXIMUM ∅ 75297
TABLE IN WHICH TO ENTER THE MEASUREMENTS OF THE CRANKSHAFT MAIN JOURNALS AND CRANKPINS
NOTE The main journals and crankpins must always be For undersized crankpins, letter M.
ground to the same undersize class. For undersized main journals, letter B.
The undersizing performed, on the main journals or For undersized crankpins and main journals, letter MB.
crankpins, must be marked by punching on the side
of crank arm no. 1. The undersize classes are:
0.254 — 0.508 mm.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Checking crankshaft
Figure 79
75299
MAIN CRANKSHAFT TOLERANCES
TOLERANCES TOLERANCE CHARACTERISTIC SYMBOL

Circularity ○
SHAPE
Cylindricality
Parallelism
DIRECTION
POSITION Concentricity or coaxiality
OSCILLATION
CLASS OF IMPORTANCE ASCRIBED TO THE PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS SYMBOL

CRITICAL E
IMPORTANT ⊕
SECONDARY ⊝
Figure 80 NOTE The checks on the tolerances indicated in the

figures must be made after grinding the crankshaft
pins.
SYMMETRY BETWEEN MAIN JOURNALS AND

CRANKPINS
1. Crankpins
94 ± 0,125
180° ± 15’
2. Main journals
3. Normal position
After grinding, keep to the following:
- Round off the edges of deburring the holes for
lubrication of the main journals and crankpins.
45066
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

JOURNAL ON TIMING SYSTEM SIDE JOURNAL ON FLYWHEEL SIDE

Figure 81 Figure 84
honed
max. 0.1 on 360°

honed
Before rolling
waviness
in circumferential direction
waviness
in axial direction
75300
RACE AREA FOR ALL MAIN JOURNALS
(MACHINED BY TURNING) 75303
INTERMEDIATE JOURNALS No. 2-4
CRANKPINS
Figure 82 Figure 85
max. 0.1 on 360°
Before rolling
honed
max. 0.1 on 360°
honed
Before rolling
waviness
waviness
in axial direction
(MACHINED BY TURNING)
75301 75304
INTERMEDIATE JOURNAL No. 3 * On both races, on all 360°.
NOTE Since, during the 0.254 and 0.508 mm undersizing

on the diameter of the crankpins and main journals,
the rolled portion of the side races of the pins may
Figure 83 get involved, it is necessary to turn the races
keeping to the data given in the figure and to do the
rolling keeping to the following instructions.
Rolling force:
- 1st main journal 925 ±25 daN.
honed - 2nd — 3rd — 4th — 5th main journal 1850 ±50
daN.
- crankpin 1850 ±50 daN.
max. 0.1 on 360°
Before rolling
- Rolling turns: 3 approach, 12 effective, 3 out.

- Rolling speed: 56 rpm.
- Decrease in crankpin race depth after rolling: 0.15 — 0.30
75302 mm*.
- Decrease in main journal race depth after rolling: 0.15 —
MAIN DATA OF MAIN JOURNALS AND CRANKPINS 0.30 mm*.
* Measured with calibrated rollers ∅ 2.5 mm.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 86 Assembling main bearings

Figure 88
75305
Take out the screws (4) and replace the phonic wheel (3).
75307
The screws (4) are coated with LOCTITE 218 and must be
replaced with fresh ones after each disassembly.
They must be tightened to a torque of 15 Nm. NOTE Not having found it necessary to replace the main
bearings, they need to be fitted back on in the same
sequence and position found upon disassembly.
On finding the timing control gear teeth (1) damaged or
worn, remove them from the crankshaft (2) using a suitable The main bearings (1) are supplied as spare parts undersized
extractor. on the inside diameter by 0.254 ÷ 0.508 mm.
The new gear is fitted onto the crankshaft by heating it to a
NOTE Do not do any accommodating on the bearings.
temperature of 200°C for no longer than 15 minutes.
On completing assembly and after the gear has cooled, it
must withstand a torque of 150 Nm without slipping. Thoroughly clean the top main bearing shells (1) and position
them in the crankcase.
NOTE The middle half ring (2) is fitted with thrust washers.
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
The following parts must be replaced with new ones at the 540811 Measuring main journal assembly
time of assembly: retaining rings, seals and gaskets, screws clearance
whose thread is coated with sealant.
Figure 89
Figure 87
75289
Mount the crankshaft (1).

75306
Check the clearance between the crankshaft main journals
Fit on the oil spray nozzles (2) and tighten the couplings (1) and their respective bearings by proceeding as follows:
to the prescribed torque.
- Thoroughly clean the pins.
- Apply a calibrated wire onto the main journals.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
Figure 90 Figure 92
75288 75310
Thoroughly clean the bottom main bearing shells (2) and - Remove the bottom crankcase.
mount them in the crankcase base (1).
The clearance between the main bearings and their
associated pins is measured by comparing the length of the
calibrated wire (1), at the point of greatest crushing, with the
Figure 91 graduated scale on the casing containing the calibrated wire.
The numbers on the scale indicate the clearance of the
coupling in millimetres, which must be 0.032 ÷ 0.102 mm.
If the clearance is not as prescribed, replace the bearings and
repeat the check.
α
Checking crankshaft end float
Figure 93
75309
75311
Mount the crankcase base (12).
The end float is checked by setting a dial gauge (1) with a
Tighten the screws in the sequence shown in the figure in magnetic base on the crankshaft (2) as shown in the figure.
three steps: The normal assembly clearance is 0.060 — 0.310 mm.
- Step 1: with a torque wrench, to a torque of 50 Nm. If you find the clearance to be greater than as required,
- Step 2: closing to an angle of 60°. replace the rear main bearing shells carrying the thrust
bearings and repeat the clearance check between the
- Step 3: closing to an angle of 60°. crankshaft pins and the main bearing shells.
If the end float of the crankshaft does not come within the
NOTE Use tool 99395216 (11) for the angle closing. prescribed values, it is necessary to grind the crankshaft and
accordingly change the main bearing shells.
NOTE: The middle main bearing has half thrust washers
integrated in it, so it performs the function of a thrust bearing.
It is supplied as a spare part only with the normal shoulder
thickness.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351/D
Figure 94 Figure 96
85842
Thoroughly clean the crankcase / crankcase base mating 75406
surface. Then tighten the outer screws (1) to a torque of 36 — 30 Nm.

Apply, on base, sealant LOCTITE 510 IVECO no. 93162432,
as indicated in the scheme. The sealant must result to be 540460 Assembling rear seal
even, not patchy.
Figure 97
NOTE Mount the crankcase base within 10 minutes of
applying the sealant.
Figure 95
85843
Carefully clean the seal seat. Apply LOCTITE 510 IVECO nr.
2992504 on the seal (1) for 30° in the points shown in the
figure.
75309
Lubricate the rear shank of the crankshaft with engine oil.
Fit part (2) of tool 99346255 onto the rear shank of the
Mount the crankcase base (12) and tighten the fixing screws crankshaft; secure it with the screws (3) and key the fresh seal
in three stages, following the sequence shown in the figure: (1) onto it.
Position part (4) on part (2); screw down the nut (5) to fit
- Step 1: with a torque wrench, to a torque of 50 Nm. the seal (1) fully inside the crankcase.
- Step 2: closing to an angle of 60°.
NOTE Use tool 99395216 (11) for the angle closing.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
540850 ENGINE FLYWHEEL Figure 100

Figure 98
75391
Fit tool 99360351 (4) onto the crankcase to block rotation

of the engine flywheel (1).
Tighten the screws (3) fixing the engine flywheel (1) in two
steps:
- Step 1: with a torque wrench, to a torque of 30 Nm.
75389
Check clutch disk rest surface: if it shows deep scoring, a
replacement must be performed.
NOTE The nominal thickness of the engine flywheel is 50 5408 CONNECTING ROD — PISTON
±0.6 mm. ASSEMBLY
Figure 101
540852 Replacing bearing supporting gear-
box input shaft
The bearing (2) supporting the gearbox input shaft is
removed and fitted using a general-purpose drift.
Check conditions of the teeth of crown wheel (1); where
excessive cracking or wear is found, replace engine flywheel.
Figure 99
75392
PISTON — CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY

1. Piston — 2. Piston ring — 3. Pin — 4. Trapezoidal ring —
5. Oil scraper ring — 6. Slotted oil scraper ring with spiral
spring — 7. Connecting rod body — 8. Bearing shells —
9. Connecting rod cap — 10. Cap fixing screws.
75390
Check the pistons. They must show no signs of seizure,
Mount the sheet metal guard (1) and secure it to the crankcase scoring, cracking or excessive wear; replace them if they do.
tightening the screw (2) to the prescribed torque.
Mount the engine flywheel (3) and screw down the screws (4).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

75394
75393 Using a micrometer (2), measure the diameter of the piston

(1) to determine the assembly clearance. The diameter has
Remove the piston rings (1) from the piston (2) using pliers to be measured at the value shown.
99360183 (3).
540840 Pistons
Measuring piston diameter
Figure 104
88403
MAIN DATA ON PISTON FEDERAL MOGUL, PINS AND SPRING RINGS

ENGINE F1AE 0481A (96 HP)
* Measured on the diameter of 85 mm.
Figure 105
88404
MAIN DATA ON PISTON MAHLE MONDIAL, PINS AND SPRING RINGS

ENGINE F1AE 0481B (116 HP)
* Measured on the diameter of 85 mm.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 106 Conditions for correct pin-piston coupling
Figure 109
88405
By means of micrometer (2), measure the diameter of piston

(1) to determine mounting clearance; the diameter must be
detected at distance X from piston base:
- 46 mm - engine F1AE0481A (96 HP) 75397
- 45.5 mm - engine F1AE0481B (116 HP).
Lubricate the pin (1) and its seat on the hubs of the piston
(2) with engine oil. The pin must go into the piston by lightly
NOTE The pistons are supplied as spare parts with the pressing with the fingers and must not drop out by gravity.
standard, normal and 0.4mm oversize diameters
together with rings, pin and retaining rings.
540842 Piston rings
Figure 107
Figure 110
75395
74947
The clearance between the piston and cylinder liner can also
be checked using a feeler gauge (1) as illustrated in the figure. The trapezoidal split rings (1st slot) and the oil scraper rings
(2nd slot) have the word TOP etched in them; when fitting
them on the piston, the word TOP must be facing upwards.
540841 Piston pins
18857 16552
Measuring the diameter of the piston pin (1) with a Check the thickness of the piston rings (2) with a micrometer
micrometer (2). (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

74948
Check the clearance between the trapezoidal ring (2) (1st

75399
slot) and the associated slot on the piston with a feeler gauge
(1), proceeding as follows: insert the piston into the cylinder Check the opening between the ends of the piston rings (2)
liner so that the ring (2) comes approximately half way out inserted in the cylinder liner using a feeler gauge (1).
of it.
540830 Connecting rods
Figure 113
Figure 116
41104
75400
DIAGRAM FOR MEASURING THE CLEARANCE X
BETWEEN THE FIRST PISTON SLOT AND THE
TRAPEZOIDAL RING MAIN DATA OF THE CONNECTING ROD, BUSHING,
1. Piston slot — 2. Trapezoidal piston ring — PISTON PIN AND BEARING SHELLS
3. Cylinder liner * Internal diameter to obtain after driving into the small
Using a feeler gauge (1, Figure 112), check the clearance (X) end and grinding with a reamer.
between the ring (2) and the slot (1); this clearance must ** Dimension cannot be measured in the free state.
have the prescribed value. *** Thickness of the bearing shell supplied as a spare part.
Figure 114 NOTE Each connecting rod has its cap marked:
- with a letter: O or X indicating the diameter
class of the big end mounted in production;
- with a number indicating the weight class of the

connecting rod mounted in production.
In addition, it could be stamped with the number of the
cylinder in which it is fitted.
In the event of replacement it is therefore necessary to
number the new connecting rod with the same number as
the one replaced.
The numbering must be done on the opposite side to the
bearing shell retaining slots.
The connecting rods are supplied as spare parts with the
75398
diameter of the big end 62.842 — 62.848 mm marked with the
Check the clearance between the piston rings (2) of the 2nd letter O and the weight class marked with the number 33.
and 3rd slot and the associated seats on the piston (3) with It is not permissible to remove material.
a feeler gauge (1).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

540834 Bushes Checking bending

Check that the bush in the small end has not come loose and Figure 119
shows no sign of seizure or scoring. If it does, replace the
complete connecting rod.
Checking connecting rods
Figure 117
61695
Check the bending of the connecting rod (5) by comparing

two points C and D of the pin (3) on the vertical plane of the
axis of the connecting rod.
Position the vertical mount (1) of the dial gauge (2) so that
61696
this rests on the pin (3) at point C.
Check the alignment of the axes of the connecting rods (1) Swing the connecting rod backwards and forwards seeking
with device 99395363 (5), proceeding as follows: the highest position of the pin and in this condition zero the
- Fit the connecting rod (1) on the spindle of the tool dial gauge (2).
99395363 (5) and lock it with the screw (4). Shift the spindle with the connecting rod (5) and repeat the
- Set the spindle (3) on the V-prisms, resting the check on the highest point on the opposite side D of the pin
connecting rod (1) on the stop bar (2). (3). The difference between point C and point D must be no
Checking torsion
Figure 118
Assembling connecting rod-piston assembly
Figure 120
61694
75401
Check the torsion of the connecting rod (5) by comparing
two points (A and B) of the pin (3) on the horizontal plane Etched on the top of the piston are: the type of engine (1),
of the axis of the connecting rod. class selection (2) and supplier (3) as well as the direction of
Position the mount (1) of the dial gauge (2) so that this fitting the piston in the cylinder liner (4). The mark (5) is for
pre-loads by approx. 0.5 mm on the pin (3) at point A and passing the 1st slot insert adhesion test.
zero the dial gauge (2). Shift the spindle (4) with the
connecting rod (5) and compare any deviation on the
opposite side B of the pin (3): the difference between A and
B must be no greater than 0.08 mm.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 121 After fitting the connecting rod — piston assembly together,
check for distortion with the tool 99395363 (8) as follows:
- Fit the connecting rod (7) together with the piston (3)
on the spindle (4) of tool 99395363 (8) and lock it with
the screw (5).
- Rest the connecting rod (7) on the bar (6).
- Position the mount (1) of the dial gauge (2) so that this
is positioned at point A of the piston with a pre-load of
0.5 mm and zero the dial gauge (2).
- Shift the spindle (4) so as to position the dial gauge (2)
at point B of the piston (3) and check for any deviation.

Figure 124
75402
Connect the piston (1) to the connecting rod (2) together

with its cap so that the piston assembly reference, position
of the connecting rod and of the cap are observed as shown
in the figure.
Figure 122
41097
Fit the piston rings (1) on the piston (2) using the pliers
99360183 (3).
NOTE The 1st and 2nd slot rings need to be mounted with
the word ”TOP” facing upwards.
75394
Position the piston (1) on the connecting rod, insert the pin
(3) and secure it with the split rings (2). Assembling connecting rod — piston assemblies
in cylinder barrels
Checking for connecting rod — piston distortion
Figure 125
Figure 123
75404
Lubricate the pistons well, including the piston rings and the
inside of the cylinder liners.
With the aid of the clamp 99360605 (2), fit the connecting
rod — piston assembly (1) in the cylinder liners, checking that:
75403
- The number of each connecting rod corresponds to the
cap mating number.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

- The openings of the piston rings are staggered 120° apart. - Remove the cap (2) and determine the existing clearance
by comparing the width of the calibrated wire (3,
- The pistons are all of the same weight.
Figure 126) with the graduated scale on the case (2,
- The symbol punched on the top of the pistons faces the Figure 126) that contained the calibrated wire. On finding
engine flywheel, or the recess in the skirt of the pistons a clearance other than as prescribed, replace the bearing
tallies with the oil spray nozzles. shells and repeat the check.
On obtaining the prescribed clearance, lubricate the
connecting rod bearing shells and fit them permanently by
NOTE Not finding it necessary to replace the connecting tightening the connecting rod cap fixing screws as
rod bearings, you need to fit them back in exactly
described.
the same sequence and position found on
disassembly.
NOTE The connecting rod cap fixing screws must always
be replaced for permanent assembly.
540831 Measuring crankpin assembly
clearance Manually check that the connecting rods slide axially on the
Figure 126 pins of the crankshaft.
Checking piston protrusion
Figure 128
75405
To measure the clearance, carry out the following steps: 75409
- Thoroughly clean parts (1) and (4) and eliminate all After mounting the connecting rod — piston assemblies, check
traces of oil. the protrusion of the pistons (2) at the T.D.C. in relation to the
- Place a length of calibrated wire (3) on the crankshaft top surface of the crankcase with a dial gauge (1).
pins (4).
NOTE The difference between the minimum and
Figure 127
maximum protrusions of the four pistons must be
= 0.15 mm.
The cylinder head gasket in the set of spare gaskets
needed for complete engine overhaul is supplied
with a single thickness. Clearly, it is supplied
separately too.
α Figure 129
75408
- Fit the connecting rod caps (2) with the associated

bearing shells.
- Tighten the screws (3) in two steps:
- Step 2: closing to an angle of 60°. 75283
NOTE Use tool 99395216 (1) for the angle closing. Mount the suction strainer (1) together with the pipe (6).
Screw down the fixing screws (2-3-4-6) and tighten them to
the prescribed torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
Figure 130 541210 Removing valves
Figure 132
75412
75410
Fit the gasket (4) and the frame (3) onto the oil sump (1).
Screw down the fixing screws (2) and tighten them to the Fit part (4) of tool 99360260 onto the cylinder head (5) and
prescribed torque. secure it with the screws (3).
Screw down the oil drain plug (5) and tighten it to the Fit part (2) of tool 99360260 onto part (4), screw down the
prescribed torque. nut (1) so that on compressing the springs (8) it is possible
to remove the cotters (6). Then take out the plates (7) and
the springs (8).
Using suitable pliers, remove the oil seal (9).
560610 CYLINDER HEAD Repeat these operations on the remaining valves.
Disassembly Turn the cylinder head over.
Figure 133
Figure 131
75413
75411 The intake (1) and exhaust (2) valves have the same diameter
Place the cylinder head (1) on the mounting SP.2271 (7). mushroom.
Remove the brackets (6) for lifting the engine. The central cavity (→) of the mushroom of the intake valve
Use the wrench SP 2262 to remove the timing sensors (2 and (1) is distinguished from that of the exhaust valve (2).
3).
Take out the screws (5) and remove the thermostat casing NOTE Before dismounting the valves from cylinder head,
(4). number them, to the purpose of being able to
remount them in the position that was found on
dismounting operation where they should not be
replaced.
A = intake side — S = exhaust side
Remove the intake (1) and exhaust (2) valves.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


Check the hydraulic seal using a suitable tool. Figure 135
Pump in water heated to approx. 90°C at a pressure of 2 ÷
EXHAUST INTAKE
3 bars. VALVE VALVE
Replace the cup plugs if they are found to leak at oil, using
a suitable drift for their removal — assembly.
NOTE Before mounting the plugs, apply LOCTITE 270

water-reacting sealant on their sealing surfaces.

replaced.
75452
MAIN DATA OF INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVES

Checking cylinder head mating surface Removing deposits, refacing and checking
Figure 134 valves
Figure 136
18625
75451
The mating surface of the head (1) with the cylinder block Remove the carbon deposits on the valves with a wire brush.
is checked using a rule (2) and a feeler gauge (3). Check that the valves show no signs of seizure, cracking or
The deformation found on the entire length of the cylinder burning.
head must be no greater than 0.20 mm.
For greater values, regrind the cylinder head according to the
values and instructions given in the following figure. Figure 137
The nominal thickness A of the cylinder head is 112 ±0.1 mm;
the maximum permissible removal of metal must not exceed
a thickness of 0.2 mm.
NOTE After regrinding, check the valve recessing and if

necessary regrind the valve seats to make the
prescribed valve recessing.
18882
Using a micrometer (2), measure the stem of the valves (1):

it must be 5.975 — 5.990 mm. If necessary, regrind the seats
on the valves with a grinding machine 99305018, removing
as little material as possible.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351

Figure 138
75455
Remove the valve guides (2) with the drift SP.2312 (1).
75453
The checks are made using a dial gauge (2) with a magnetic Figure 141
base, positioned as illustrated. The assembly clearance is
0.033 — 0.063 mm.
Making the valve (1) turn, check that the centring error is no
540667 VALVE GUIDES

Figure 139
75456
Heat the cylinder head to 80 — 100°C and, using the drift

SP.2312 (1) provided with part SP.2311 (2), mount the new
valve guides (3) previously chilled in liquid nitrogen.
Where above indicated tools are not available, mount valve
guides positioning them in cylinder head according to
dimension indicated in Figure 139.
Boring valve guides

Figure 142
88774
MAIN DATA OF VALVE GUIDES — SEATS

Valve guide seat inside ∅ 9.980 ÷ 10.000 mm 75457
Valve guide outside ∅ 10.028 ÷ 10.039 mm
After driving in the valve guides (2), regrind them with the
* Measurement to be made after driving in the valve guides. smoother SP.2310 (1).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
540661 VALVE SEATS

Regrinding - replacing valve seats
Figure 143
75458
Check the valve seats. On finding any slight scoring or burns, Mount the valves, block the seat of the electro-injectors and
regrind them with an appropriate tool according to the glow plugs; using a suitable tool, check the seal of the
angles given in Figure 143. valves/seats.
Having to replace them, with the same tool and taking care
not to affect the cylinder head, remove as much material
from the valve seats as possible until, with a punch, it is
possible to extract them from the cylinder head.
Heat the cylinder head to 80 ÷ 100°C and, using a suitable
drift, fit in it the new valve seats, previously chilled in liquid
nitrogen. Figure 145
Using a specific tool, regrind the valve seats according to the
angles given in Figure 143.
Figure 144
54760
Using a dial gauge (1), check that, from the plane of the
cylinder head, the valve recessing (2) and the protrusion of
the injector (3) and of the glow plug have the prescribed
value:
- Valve recessing: 0.5 ÷ 0.8 mm.
75459
- Injector protrusion: 2.77 ÷ 3.23 mm.
Using the milling cutter 99394038 (1), clean the injector seat - Glow plug protrusion: 3.78 mm.
of any deposits.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
540665 VALVE SPRINGS ROCKER ARMS — TAPPETS

62386
Before assembly, check the flexibility of the valve springs with

the tool 99305047. Compare the load and elastic
deformation data with those of the new springs given in the
following figures. 75461
COMPLETE ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY

Figure 147 The rocker arm assembly is composed of the rocker arm (1),
hydraulic tappet (3), made integral with each other by the clip
(2).
Figure 149
50676
MAIN DATA TO CHECK INTAKE AND EXHAUST

VALVE SPRINGS
Height Under a load of

mm kg 75942
H 54 Free
H1 45 P 243 ±12 CROSS-SECTION OF THE HYDRAULIC TAPPET
H2 35 P1 533 ±24 A = 32.44 ±0.3, end of stroke
B = 31.30, working position
C = 29.75 ±0.25, start of stroke
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 150
75462
MAIN DATA HYDRAULIC TAPPETS — SEATS
Checks Figure 152

The sliding surface of the tappets must have no scoring/dents;
replace them if they do.
Using a micrometer, measure the diameter of the tappets
and, using a bore meter, measure the diameter of the seats
in the cylinder head; the difference in the measurements will
give the assembly clearance.
ASSEMBLING CYLINDER HEADS

Figure 151
75587
Position the springs (8) and plates (7) on the cylinder head
(5).
Fit the part (4) of tool 99360260 onto the cylinder head (5)
and secure it with the screws (3).
Fit the part (2) of tool 99360260 onto part (4), screw down
the nut (1) so that by compressing the springs (8) it is possible
to insert the retaining cotters (6); then unscrew the nut (1)
checking that the cotters (6) have settled in correctly.
Repeat these operations on the remaining valves.
75463
Lubricate the stem of the valves (1) and insert them into the
associated valve guides (4) according to the position marked
during removal. Using tool SP.2264 (2), mount the oil seals
(3) on the valve guides (4).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351/D
75466
75464
Using the extractor 99340028 (2) extract the toothed pulley
Fit the thermostat casing (5) with a new seal and tighten the (1) driving the camshaft.
fixing screws (4) to the prescribed torque.
Figure 156
Mount temperature sensors (1 and 2), and tighten them at
prescribed torque.
For tightening sensor (2), use wrench SP.2262 (3).
Mount the temperature sensors (1 and 2) and, using the
wrench SP.2263 (3), tighten them to the prescribed torque.
540650 Overhead
Overhead removal
75467
Figure 154
Using four self-tapping screws (2), apply the tool SP. 2325 (3)
to the seal (1) and with the extractor (5 and 6) remove the
seal (1) from the overhead (4).
NOTE The screws (2) must be screwed down so they get

positioned at the dimension shown in the figure.
Figure 157
75465
Position the overhead (2) together with the pins 99360614

(1) on the mounting SP. 2271.
Take out the screw (4) with the washer (5) beneath fastening
the toothed pulley (3).
75468
Remove the circlip (1) and take off the cover (2) together
with the seal (3).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 158 5412 TIMING SYSTEM

Figure 161
75469
Take out the screws (1) and remove the rear cover (2) 75472
together with its gasket.
Figure 159
1. Camshaft on intake side — 2. Hydraulic tightener —
3. Camshaft on exhaust side — 4. MORSE chain —
5. Rocker arms — 6. Hydraulic reacting tappet —
7. Valve assembly.
Description
The timing system is the type with a twin camshaft in the head
and four valves per cylinder with hydraulic tappets.
Motion is transmitted by the crankshaft, via a toothed belt,
to the gear keyed onto the intake valve drive shaft. The drive
transmission of the exhaust valve drive shaft takes place via
a MORSE-type chain kept under tension by a hydraulic
tightener.
The toothed belt, moreover, drives the water pump and the
high-pressure pump CP3 and is kept at the right tension by
75470
an automatic tightener roller.
Insert a suitable pin (2) in the hole (⇒) of the chain drive (3). The four valves move by the action of the “free” rocker arms
Take out the screws (4) and (6) with their washers (5) for (with no supporting shaft).
fixing gears to the camshafts. The rocker arms, one per valve, are always in contact with
Take out the screws (7) and remove the chain drive (3) from the corresponding cam and are kept in this position by a
the overhead (1). hydraulic reacting tappet, thereby eliminating the need for
periodical adjustment.
T.D.C
.
2
1 CLOSING
INTAKE
OPENING
2 CLOSING
EXHAUST
OPENING
3 FIRING
ORDER
75471 1-3-4-2
Turn over the overhead (1) and, taking care not to damage 3
75473
the seats, extract the camshafts (2) and (3) from it. B.D.C
.
TIMING SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351/D
541210 Camshaft 541211 Checking cam lift and pin alignment

Checks
The surfaces of the shaft supporting pins and of the cams Figure 164
must be finely honed; if there is any sign of meshing or
scoring, replace the shaft.
Figure 163
75474 75475
Using a micrometer (1), measure the diameter of the pins (2) Set the shaft (1) on tailstocks and, using a dial gauge on the
of the camshaft and, using a bore meter, measure the middle mounting, check that the alignment error is no greater
diameter of the supporting seats in the overhead. than 0.04 mm; replace the shaft if it is. In addition, check the
The difference between these two measurements gives the cam lift: it must be as prescribed; replace the shaft if it is any
existing clearance. different.
The nominal assembly clearance is 0.037 ÷ 0.088 mm.
Figure 165
75476
MAIN DATA, CAMSHAFT PINS AND SEATS

1. Intake valve camshaft seats — 2. Exhaust valve camshaft seats — 3. Intake valve camshaft — 4. Exhaust valve camshaft.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
Assembling overhead
75471 75479
Lubricate the supporting pins of the shafts (2 and 3) and fit Fit the chain drive (2) on the camshafts and secure it to the
them in the overhead (1). overhead (1) tightening the screws (8) to the prescribed
torque.
NOTE In this operation, take care not to damage the Screw down the screws (4) and (7) with the washers (5) and
overhead supporting seats. (6) and tighten them as follows:
- Tighten the screw (7) to a torque of 50 Nm.
Figure 167 - Close further with an angle of 60°.
- Take out the pin (5).
- Tighten the screw (4) to a torque of 50 Nm.
- Close further with an angle of 60°.
NOTE Use the goniometer 99395216 for the angle

closing.
75477
Position the overhead (1) and secure it on the mounting Figure 170
SP.2271 (2).
Position the camshafts (4 and 5) so as to be able to insert the
pins 99360614 (3) into their radial holes through the
threaded holes of the overhead.
Figure 168
75469
Fit on the rear cover (2) with a new gasket and tighten the
75478 fixing screws (1) to the prescribed torque.
Compress the tightener so as to be able to insert a suitable
pin (2) into the hole (→) of the chain drive (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 171
NOTE The toothed pulley (1, Figure 173) is not locked on
the shaft since it must be able to turn when fitting
and tensioning the timing belt. For the same reason,
keep the tools 99360608 (4, Figure 173) and
99360614 (3, Figure 167) fitted.
Figure 174
75468
Fit a new seal (3) on the cover (2) and fit this in the overhead.
Fit on the seal (1).
Figure 172
75281
Fit the oil pressure control valve (1) in the crankcase.

Fit on the plug (2) with the seal (3) and tighten it to the
prescribed torque.
540442 Assembling front seal ring

Figure 175
75481
Lubricate the shank of the camshaft.

Using the keying device 99374458 (3), fit the seal (2) in the
overhead (1).
Figure 173
75483
Fit the centring tool 99396037 (2) onto the shank of the
crankshaft.
Mount the oil vacuum pump assembly (1) with a new gasket
and tighten the screws (1-15) according to the following
procedures:
- Tighten the screws from no. 1 to no. 6 to a torque of 5
±1 Nm while checking that the tool 99360037 (2) turns
freely.
- Tighten the screws from no. 7 to no. 15 to a torque of
10 ±1 Nm.
75482
- Tighten the screws from no. 1 to no. 6 to a torque of 10
Fit the toothed pulley (1) onto the camshaft so as to align the
±1 Nm.
hole of the pulley with that of the overhead and insert the
tool 99360608 (4) into these holes. Screw down the screw - After checking that tool 99360037 (2) turns freely,
(3) together with the washer (2) without tightening fully. remove it.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
75484 75280
Lubricate the shank of the crankshaft. Mount the speed sensor (1) with a fresh gasket and tighten
the fixing screw (2) to the prescribed torque (if applicable).
Screw down part (3) of tool 99346254 in the crankshaft and
place the seal (2) on the part (3). Fit on the compressor mounting (3) and tighten the fixing
screws (4) to the prescribed torque.
Key part (5) of tool 99346254 onto part (3), screw down the
nut (4) until the seal (2) gets into position in the seat of the
oil vacuum pump assembly (1).
Figure 179
Take out the tool 99346254 (3, 4 and 5).
Figure 177
75279
Mount the air-conditioner compressor (1) (if applicable) and

tighten its fixing (2) screws to the prescribed torque.
Figure 180
75485
Turn the crankshaft so as to be able to insert tool 99360615

(5) into the hole in the crank of the crankshaft, through the
hole in the oil vacuum pump assembly (1), to block crankshaft
rotation.
Mount the gear (2), screw down the screw (3) together with
the spacer (4) and tighten it to the prescribed torque.
NOTE Do not remove the tool 99360615 (5) as it will be

needed for fitting the timing drive belt.
75486
Mount the oil pressure transmitter (3) with a fresh gasket.

Mount the heat exchanger (1) with a fresh seal and tighten
the coupling (2) to the prescribed torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
75487
Lubricate the seal of the oil filter (1) with engine oil. 75490
Using tool 99360076 (2), tighten the oil filter to the Fit the high-pressure pump (2) onto the flange of the water
prescribed torque. pump (1) and tighten the fixing screws (3) to the prescribed
torque.
75488 75271
Thoroughly clean the mating surface (à) of the water pump Fit the driving gear (1) onto the shaft of the high-pressure
(1) and position fresh seals (2 and 3) on it. pump and block rotation of this shaft by applying tool
SP.2263 (2) as illustrated in the figure. Tighten the nut (3) to
the prescribed torque and remove the tool (2).
Figure 183
75489
Mount the water pump (1) and tighten the fixing screws (2)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Refitting cylinder head

75491
Check that tool 99360619 (2) inserted in the hole (→) of the 75493
oil vacuum pump assembly (1) blocks crankshaft rotation.
Mount the cylinder head (1).
This condition is necessary for setting up the timing system
and to prevent the valves interfering with the pistons. Screw down the fixing screws (3) and tighten them, in three
successive stages, following the order and methods shown in
the following figure.
Figure 187 NOTE The angle closure is done with tool 99395216 (2).
Figure 189
75492

Keep the cylinder head gasket clean. 75494
Position the cylinder head gasket (1) of the thickness
determined under the heading “checking piston protrusion” Diagram of the tightening sequence for the cylinder head
with the lettering ”TOP” facing the cylinder head. fixing screws:
- 1st phase: pre-tightening with torque wrench
• screws 1-2-3-4-5-6 to a torque of 100 ±5 Nm;
NOTE It is essential to keep the gasket sealed in its package • screws 7-8-9-10 to a torque of 50 ±2.5 Nm.
• screws 1-2-3-4-5-6 90° ±5°;
• screws 7-8-9-10 60° ±3°.
• screws 1-2-3-4-5-6 90° ±5°;
• screws 7-8-9-10 60° ±3°.
A = flywheel side.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
75495
Thoroughly clean the hydraulic tappets (2), lubricate them and

fit them in the cylinder head (3), positioning the rocker arms (1)
on the valves correctly.
Fit on the gasket (5).
Insert the two tools SP. 2264 (4) into the electro-injector seats 85844a
for subsequent centring of the overhead on the cylinder head.
X = Direction of movement of the tightener —
Figure 191 Y = Direction of rotation of the key.
Turn the automatic tightener (1) clockwise, positioning it as
shown in frame A.
Turn the timing belt (10) as shown in the figure observing the
precautions below.
Do not bend the timing belt. Arrows indicating the direction
of assembly of the timing belt on the engine are shown on
the back of the belt. The arrows must correspond to the
direction of rotation of the belt and the notches must
coincide with those on the pulley (7) and the gear (12).
If required to fit the timing belt (10) on the pulley (7), remove
tool 99360608 (8) and turn the pulley (7) clockwise by no
more than half a pulley tooth.
75496
NOTE If the engine has run for a period equivalent to ≥
Mount the overhead (1) together with the tools 99360614 25,000 km, the toothed belt must be replaced with
(3) for the timing and tighten the fixing screws (2) to the a fresh one, no matter what its state of wear.
prescribed torque.
Take out the tools SP. 2264 (4). On completing assembly, adjust the toothed pulley (7) to put
Figure 192 the section X of the belt under tension and tighten the screw
(9) to a torque of 90 Nm
Keeping the screw (2) stationary and using a suitable wrench
on the hexagon of the plate (3) of the tightener, turn it
anticlockwise to cover the reference hole (5) located on the
fixed portion of the tightener (see frame B).
In the above conditions, tighten the fixing screw (2) to a
torque of 36 ± 4 Nm
Remove the tools 99360614 (6) and 99360615 (11) for the
timing.
Turn the engine in its direction of rotation by 8 turns to be
able to put the tools (6) and (11) back in to do the timing.
In these conditions, the notches of the timing belt (10) must
coincide with those of the pulley (7) and the gear (12).
75497
Mount the fixed tightener (1) and tighten the fixing screw (2) NOTE Do not turn the engine in the opposite direction;
to the prescribed torque. if, on turning the engine, you pass the point for
inserting the tools (6) and (11), turn the engine
Mount the automatic tightener (4) without fully tightening clockwise by another two turns.
the fixing screw (3), max. closing torque 5 Nm.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
See frame C: Figure 193, holding the tightener plate (3) Figure 196
stationary with the wrench inserted in its hexagon, loosen
the fixing screw (2). Keeping the fixing screw (2) stationary,
turn the plate (3) clockwise until its reference mark (4)
coincides with the reference hole (5) of the fixed portion of
the tightener. In the above conditions, tighten the screw (2)
to a torque of 36 ±4 Nm.
After assembly, the belt (10) tension measured using tool
99395849 must be as follows in the following points: X = 212
± 12 Hz -X1 = 178 ± 10 Hz.
76252
Fit on the mounting (1) together with the electromagnetic

coupling (4) and tighten the fixing screws (2 and 3) to the
prescribed torque.
Figure 194
Figure 197
75499
Remove the tools (6 and 11, Figure 193).
Screw the plug (1) into the oil-vacuum pump mounting (2)
and the plugs on the holes of the overhead. 75251
Mount the oil level sensor (1).

Fit on the power steering (2) pump mounting (4) and tighten
Figure 195 the fixing screws (3) to the prescribed torque.
Figure 198
75500
Mount the timing cover (1) and tighten the screws (2) to the
prescribed torque. 75250
Mount the damper pulley (3) and tighten the screws (4) to Position the alternator (2) on the mounting (5) and secure
the prescribed torque. it with the bottom screws (3 and 4) and the bolt.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 199 With tool SP. 2341 (2) inserted in the holes of the tightener
(1) and torque wrench (3), turn the tightener (1) with a
torque of 8.2 — 10 Nm; in this condition, tighten the screw
(4) to a torque of 25 Nm.
Turn the engine in its direction of rotation to have the belt
(5) make two full turns.
With appliance 99395849, measure the tension of the belt
(5) in section A, which must be 204 ±10 Hz corresponding
to a load on the tightener of 1010 ± Nm.
In the case of engines with a compressor drive belt of elastic
type, no tensioning is needed. For mounting, operate as
follows.
75501 NOTE The elastic belt must be replaced by a new elastic

belt at each dismounting operation.
Mount the fixed tightener (2) and tighten the fixing screw (1).
Mount the automatic tightener (3) and tighten the screw (4)
Figure 202
Figure 200
90155
75248
Fit the flexible belt (3) equipped with tool 99360191 (2) on
Using a wrench on the automatic tightener (2), mount the the pulley (4) and apply the tool on the pulley (1).
drive belt (1), taking care to position its ribs correctly in the Fit the drive ring (5) on the flexible belt (3) and fasten the ring
respective races of the pulleys. on the compressor support.
Turn the drive shaft clockwise until the belt fits perfectly on
544035 Adjusting air-conditioner — the pulley (1).
compressor drive belt tension
75502
75503
Fit the tightener (1) without tightening the screw (4).
Fit the drive belt (5) taking care to position its ribs correctly Fit a new seal (3) on the electro-injector (1) and mount this
in the respective races of the pulleys. in the overhead (2).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

75504
Mount the brackets (3) fastening the electro-injectors (1)

and screw down the screws (2) without locking them.
Mount the hydraulic accumulator (4) and tighten the fixing 75507
screws to the prescribed torque.
Using the wrench (4) of the 99317915 series and the torque
Figure 205 wrench 99389829 (3), tighten the fuel pipe fittings (1) and (2)
Figure 208
88615
Forged version: on hydraulic accumulator (2), mount:

pressure sensor (1) tightening it at 35 ± 5 Nm torque, and
pressure relief valve (3) tightening it at 27 ± 2 Nm torque.
Welded version: mount pressure sensor and tighten it at 70
± 5 Nm torque. 75508
Mount the glow plugs (1) and, using the box-type wrench SP.
Figure 206 2275 (2) and torque wrench 99389819 (3), tighten them to
a torque of 8 ÷ 10 Nm.
Figure 209
75506
Connect the fuel pipes (2) to the electro-injectors (1) and to

the hydraulic accumulator (3).
Tighten the screws (4) fixing the electro-injector brackets to
75509
NOTE Whenever they get removed, the fuel pipes must Mount the intake manifold (1) with a new gasket and, using
be replaced with new ones. a torque wrench (3), tighten the fixing screws (2) to the
prescribed torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
75256
75510
Press the clips (3) in the direction shown by the arrow and
connect the fuel recovery pipe fittings (1) to the
Connect the fuel pipe (4) to the hydraulic accumulator (7) electro-injectors (2).
and to the high-pressure pump (5).
With wrench (2) of series 99317915 and dynamometric
wrench 99389829 (1), tighten pipe fittings (3 and 6) at
prescribed torque.
NOTE Whenever they get removed, the fuel pipes (4)

must be replaced with new ones. Figure 213
Figure 211
75512
Fit the exhaust manifold (5) with a new gasket and the
spacers (6) and tighten the nuts (7) to the prescribed torque.
On the exhaust manifold (6), mount: the turbocharger (4)
with a new gasket and tighten the nuts (3) with washers to
the prescribed torque, the compensator pipe (1) (if
applicable) with a new seal and tighten the nuts (2) with
washers to the prescribed torque.
75511
NOTE Before fitting the turbocharger on the engine, it is
Connect the fuel recovery pipe (1) with new seals to the necessary to fill the central body with engine
pressure relief valve (6) tightening the coupling (7) to the lubricating oil.
prescribed torque (only for forged version hydraulic
accumulator).
Connect the fuel recovery pipes (1) and (5) with new seals
to the high-pressure pump (2) with the couplings (3) and (4).
Insert the oil dipstick tube (9) with a new seal into the
crankcase and secure it together with the pipe (10), using the
screw (8) tightened to the prescribed torque, to the intake
manifold.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
75513
75263
Connect the pipe (4) to the cylinder head (6) and to the
turbocharger (7). For engines with E.G.R. only
Using the wrench (2) in the 99317915 series and the torque Mount the flange (7) with a new gasket and tighten the
wrench 99389829 (1), tighten the couplings (3 and 5) to the screws (8) to the prescribed torque.
prescribed torque. Mount the heat exchanger (1) together with the E.G.R. valve
(5) and new gaskets and tighten the screws (2 and 6) to the
prescribed torque.
Connect the pipe (4) to the exchanger (1) and to the flange
(7) securing it with the clamps (3).
Figure 215
Figure 217
75264
Connect the air duct (5) to the turbocharger (2) and to the
75255
overhead (3).
Tighten the clamp (1) and the screw (4) to the prescribed
torque. Mount the oil fillpipe (5) with a new seal and tighten the nuts
(6) to the prescribed torque.
Mount the coalescence filter (3) and tighten its fixing nuts (4)
Mount the bracket (1) and tighten the screws (2) to the
prescribed torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
Figure 218 764264 Timing speed sensor

764266 Engine speed sensor
Figure 220
Cross-section A-A
75246
Fit the cooling fan (1) back onto the electromagnetic

coupling. Fit the arm 99360549 onto the engine lifting hooks.
Hook the arm onto the hoist and remove the engine from
the rotary stand (3). Take out the brackets 99361028 (2).
Figure 219
75245 75514
Complete engine assembly. The sensor gap is:

Fit on the left and right engine mountings (3) and tighten the - 1 ±0.5 mm, between the camshaft pulley (2) and timing
fixing screws to the prescribed torque. sensor (1).
Connect the oil pipe (2) to the turbocharger (1) and to the
crankcase and tighten the fixing screws and the coupling of - 1 mm, between the phonic wheel (4) and speed sensor
the oil pipe (2) to the prescribed torque. (3).
If applicable, mount the following parts:
- Engine cable, connecting its electrical connections to the
thermostat temperature sensor, timing sensor, engine
speed sensor, pressure regulator, rail pressure sensor
and intake manifold air pressure/temperature sensor.
- Hydraulic accumulator guard.
- Top soundproofing cover.
- Add the prescribed grade and quantity of lubricating oil
to the engine.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
5450 LUBRICATION Figure 221

General
The engine is lubricated by forced circulation performed by the

following parts:
- An oil gear pump is incorporated in an assembly that also
includes the vacuum pump (GPOD).
- A pressure control valve incorporated in the crankcase.
- A Modine-type heat exchanger with built-in safety valve.
- A double filtration oil filter with built-in safety valve.
Engine oil is drawn up from the sump by the oil pump (3)
via the suction strainer (2) and delivered under pressure to
the heat exchanger (5) where it is cooled.
The oil continues through the oil filter (6) and goes to
lubricate the relevant parts through ducts or pipes.
At the end of the lubrication cycle, the oil returns to the
sump by gravity. The oil filter can be excluded by the safety
valve built into it if it gets clogged. The heat exchanger is
also excluded by a safety valve if it gets clogged.
In addition, the lubrication oil supplies the hydraulic
automatic tightener (7) of the camshaft drive (8).
Oil under pressure
Oil in freefall
Coolant
Breather on pressure control valve
75515
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
OIL VACUUM PUMP ASSEMBLY (GPOD) Characteristic data

transmission ratio 1.15
displacement 16.2 cm3
Figure 222 pumping diameter 49.5 mm
number of teeth 7
height 11
oil pump minimum speed 862 rpm
oil pump max. speed 4485 rpm
oil pump over-revs 5247 rpm
oil pump forced over-revs 6279 rpm
speed 2500 rpm
torque 2.1 Nm
power draw (calc.) 550 W
Oil temperature: 100°C — closed recirculation —

max. outlet pressure 5 bars
engine speed rpm
capacity (l/min)
(oil pump speed — rpm)
750 (862) 12
3900 (4485) 68
Vacuum pump
The vacuum pump (2, Figure 223), with radial blades, is also
incorporated in the GPOD (1, Figure 223). It is driven directly
by the oil pump.
75517
transmission ratio 3.25
DIAGRAM OF GPOD ASSEMBLY ON ENGINE displacement 86 cm3
volume to drain 4.5 litres
1. Vacuum pump — 2. Oil pump — 3. Crankshaft — volume to drain with EGR 9 litres
A. Vacuum pump oil supply hole. chamber diameter 65 mm
Clearance between the crankshaft gear teeth and the oil rotor diameter 50 mm
pump drive gear 0.003 ÷ 0.2 mm. cam 7.5 mm
The assembly must not be overhauled; in the event of number of blades 3
defective operation, it must be replaced. height 34 mm
vacuum pump minimum speed 994 rpm
503010 Oil pump vacuum pump max. speed 5168 rpm
vacuum pump over-revs 6046 rpm
Figure 223 vacuum pump forced over-revs 7235 rpm
theoretical flow rate at minimum (air) 85.5 l/min
actual flow rate at minimum (air) —
at atmospheric pressure 46 l/min
Theoretical speed at max. speed — (air) 444.4 l/min
Actual flow rate at max. speed — (air)
at atmospheric pressure 60 l/min
measured power draw (maximum)

speed 2500 rpm
torque 2.1 Nm
power draw (calc.) 550 W
Oil temperature: 100°C — engine speed 750 rpm

(pump speed 994 rpm)
tank vacuum
0.5 0.8
(litres) (bar)
4.5 4.5 12.5
5.6 time (sec)
( ) 6.0 16.0
75516
9 9.0 24.0
The oil pump (3) is a gear pump driven directly by the
crankshaft.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
543475 Oil pressure control valve 543070 Oil filter

75520
CROSS-SECTION OF OIL PRESSURE CONTROL

VALVE MOUNTED IN CRANKCASE
75523
Valve removed from crankcase L = 51.75 mm.
Valve fitted in crankcase L = 50.75 mm.
Oil filter with single filtration with built-in by-pass valve —
Start of opening 4 bar L = 49.5
opening pressure 2.5 ± 0.3 bar.
maximum opening 4.6 bar L = 44.
543110 Modine heat exchanger
Figure 225
Figure 228
75521
PARTS COMPRISING THE OIL PRESSURE

CONTROL VALVE
1. Split ring — 2. Washer — 3. Spring — 4. Valve —
5. Valve casing.
75524
Figure 226
Thoroughly clean the heat exchanger (1).

Always change the seals (2 and 4).
Built-in safety valve (3).
Opening pressure 0.82 - 1.03 bar
75522
MAIN DATA OF THE OIL PRESSURE CONTROL

VALVE SPRING
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
540480 Oil vapour recirculation system Figure 229

Description
The oil vapours formed in the sump while the engine is
running, passing through the overhead cover, are channelled
into the separator / condenser filter known as the blow-by.
The filter is structured in two sections:
- The first one with a labyrinth, where most of the vapours
are condensed and return to the sump through an
umbrella outlet valve.
- The second one includes a coalescence filter that
condenses the remaining vapours that return to the
sump through another umbrella valve.
The portion of vapour that has not condensed is sent, via a
MANN-HUMMEL valve, to the intake duct and burnt during
normal engine operation.
NOTE The blow-by filter cannot be taken apart and must

therefore be replaced entirely.
75525
OIL VAPOUR RECIRCULATION DIAGRAM
1. MANN-HUMMEL valve — 2. Umbrella valves — 3. Blow-by filter — A. Labyrinth — B. Intake oil
vapour recovery flow — C. Oil return flow into sump — D. Flow of oil vapours from the sump —
E. Flow of oil vapours from the overhead — F. Coalescence filter.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

5432 COOLING Figure 230

Description
The engine cooling system is the type with forced circulation
in a closed circuit. It comprises the following parts:
- An expansion tank whose plug has two valves
incorporated in it: an outlet and an inlet, which govern
the pressure of the system.
- A coolant level sensor at the base of the expansion tank.
- An engine cooling module to dissipate the heat taken
from the engine by the coolant with a heat exchanger
for the intercooler.
- A heat exchanger to cool the lubricating oil.
- A heat exchanger to cool the exhaust gases (engines
with EGR).
- A centrifugal water pump incorporated in the crankcase.
- An electric fan comprising an electromagnetic coupling
on whose shaft a hub turns idle that is fitted with an
axially mobile metal plate on which is mounted the
impeller.
- A 3-way thermostat governing the circulation of the
coolant.
Operation
The water pump driven by a poly-V belt by the crankshaft
sends coolant into the crankcase and with a greater head into
the cylinder head.
working temperature, it causes the thermostat to open and
the fluid is channelled from here to the radiator and cooled
by the fan.
The pressure in the system due to the change in temperature
is governed by the outlet (2) and inlet (1) valves incorporated
in the expansion tank filler plug (detail A).
- to keep the system slightly pressurized so as to raise the
boiling point of the coolant;
produced in case of high coolant temperatures.
The function of the inlet valve (1) is to permit transferring the
coolant from the expansion tank to the radiator when a
lower pressure is created in the system due to the reduction
in volume of the coolant as a result of its temperature
lowering.
Inlet valve opening 0.005 — 0.02 kg/cm2.
Hot
Very hot
Cold
75526
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

543212 Electromagnetic pulley The water pump (3) cannot be overhauled. In case of coolant
Figure 231 leaking from the seal or damage, it must be replaced. The
water pump casing (1) is also used as a mounting for the
high-pressure pump. The seals (3 and 4) must always be
replaced.
Figure 233
75527
75529
CROSS-SECTION OF THE ELECTROMAGNETIC JOINT
Characteristics LONGITUDINAL CROSS-SECTION OF THE
Transmissible torque at 20°C with clutch run in 45 Nm WATER PUMP
Voltage 12 Volts 1. Pump casing — 2. Pump drive shaft together with
Power input 26 W bearing — 3. Seal — 4. Impeller.
The electric fan control relay is activated or deactivated
according to the temperatures of: the engine coolant, the fuel 543250 Thermostat
supercharging air and the pressure of the air conditioner fluid
(if present). Figure 234
Coolant temperature
(if the sensor is not defective)
It activates at > 96°C and deactivates at < 84°C.
Turbocharging air temperature
Fuel temperatures
(if the coolant temperature sensor is acknowledged to be
defective by the EDC control unit)
With climate control system
With pressure in the system
it turns on 18.5 ± 0.98 bar
it turns off 14.58 ± 0.98 bar
543210 Water pump
Figure 232
75530
The by-pass thermostat (1) needs no adjustment.

If there is any doubt about its operation, replace it.
The thermostat casing is fitted with the thermometric
switch/transmitter and water temperature sensor.
A. — A1 Start of stroke at 78°C ±2°C.
B. Valve (1) stroke at 94°C = 7 mm.
B1 Valve (2) stroke 94°C, 6.4 mm
75528 The stroke of 7 mm less than 60”.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TURBOCHARGING
Figure 235
HOT AIR AT ATMOSPHERIC TEMPERATURE
HOT COMPRESSED AIR
COLD COMPRESSED AIR
EXHAUST GAS
COLD EXHAUST GAS
75531
TURBOCHARGING DIAGRAM
Description
The turbocharging system comprises an air filter, The function of the turbocharger is to use the energy of the
turbocharger and intercooler. engine’s exhaust gas to send pressurized air to the cylinders.
The air filter is the dry type comprising a filtering cartridge to The intercooler comprises a radiator included in the engine
be periodically replaced. coolant radiator and its function is to lower the temperature
of the air leaving the turbocharger to send it to the cylinders.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

542410 Turbocharger
Figure 236
75532
A. THROTTLE VALVE SHUT B. THROTTLE VALVE OPEN
Figure 237
75533
It is basically composed of: - an overpressure relief valve fitted on the turbine casing.
Its function is to choke the exhaust gas outlet (detail B),
- a central casing housing a shaft supported by bushings at
sending a portion of the exhaust gas straight into the
whose opposite ends are fitted the turbine wheel and
exhaust pipe when the turbocharging pressure
the compressor rotor;
downstream from the turbocharger reaches the setting.
- a turbine casing and a compressor casing mounted on
the end of the central body;
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

REPAIRS
Replacing pressure relief valve
NOTE On finding irregular engine operation due to the
turbocharging system, it is first expedient to Figure 240
perform the checks on the turbocharger, check the
efficiency of the seals and the fixing of the couplings,
additionally checking there is no clogging in the
check that the oil circulation pipes are not burst or
clogged, in which case replace them or eliminate
the trouble.
54249 Pressure relief valve

Checking and adjusting pressure relief valve
Figure 238
75536
Take off the nut (2).

Take out the screws (5) and detach the bracket together
with the relief valve (7) from the turbocharger.
Mount the new valve, performing the operations for
disassembly in reverse order, and register it as follows:
Screw the nut (3) onto the stem (4) of the valve down to the
end of the thread. Mount the lever (1) on the valve stem.
Using device 99367121 (5, Figure 239), introduce
compressed air into the valve (7) at the prescribed pressure;
in this condition, screw down the nut (2) until the throttle
75534 valve controlled by the lever (1) gets positioned in its seat.
Unscrew the nut (3) to bring it into contact with the lever
Cover the air, exhaust gas and lubricating oil inlets and (1) and at the same time block the nuts (2 and 3).
outlets. Thoroughly clean the outside of the turbocharger Adjust the pressure relief valve (7) as described under the
using anticorrosive and antioxidant fluid. Disconnect the pipe relevant heading.
(2) from the union of the pressure relief valve (1) and fit on Afterwards, paint the nuts (2 and 3) with safety paint and
it the pipe of the device 99367121 (1, Figure 239). connect the pipe (6) to the valve (7), securing it with a new
retaining clamp.
Figure 239

necessary to fill the central body with engine
lubricating oil.
75535
Rest the tip of the dial gauge (1) with a magnetic base on the
end of the tie rod (2) and zero it. Using the device 99367121
(5), introduce compressed air into the valve casing (6) at the
prescribed pressure and make sure this value stays constant
throughout the check; replace the valve if it doesn’t. In the
above conditions, the tie rod must have made the prescribed
travel. On finding a different value, use the nuts (3 and 4).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) SYSTEM

Figure 241
84146
a. Brake booster vacuum circuit - b. EGR modulated vacuum circuit

1. ECU - 2. High pressure pump - 3. Coolant temperature sensor - 4. Engine rpm sensor - 5. EGR pneumatic valve - 6. Flow
meter - 7. Suction air cleaner - 8. Modulating solenoid valve - 9. Air cleaner - 10. Vacuum brake booster -11. Reservoir - 12.
Vacuum unit.
EGR system operation Operating principles

The EGR system is similar to that fitted on 8140.63 engines The ECU (MS6.3 or EDC 16) processes the data from the
and described in the specific system section. atmospheric pressure sensor, coolant sensor, engine rpm
Differences with respect to the previous version fitted on sensor, accelerator pedal potentiometer and controls the
8140.63 engines include: application of an exhaust gas heat modulating solenoid valve via a PWM signal according to
exchanger and air flow meter, governing system programmed settings.
implementing EDC MS6.3 or EDC 16, different modulating The control signal output by the ECU controls the
solenoid valve and pneumatic EGR calibration values. modulating solenoid valve which puts the brake booster
vacuum circuit into communication with that of the EGR.
The vacuum created in the EGR circuit depends on the
control signal.
The vacuum acts on the pneumatic EGR valve by recalling
and lifting the shutter which normally closes the passage of
exhaust gasses to suction.
This puts the exhaust manifold into communication with the
suction manifold and part of the exhaust gasses flows into the
intake manifold.
The control signal from the ECU to the modulating valve is
cancelled during engine conditions not requiring exhaust gas
recirculation (cranking, cold engine, idling, load request, high
altitude). The solenoid valve closes the connection between
the brake booster vacuum circuit and the EGR circuit; at the
same time, atmospheric pressure is re-established in the EGR
circuit by letting in air through the specific air cleaner.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 242 Air flow meter

1. Connector - 2. Flow meter body - 3. Air and
recirculated gas inlet mesh - 4. Suction air temperature
sensor - 5. Power - 6. Ground - 7. Reference voltage -
8. Output signal.
The heated film flow meter is arranged between the turbine
and the intercooler.
The suction air temperature sensor is built into the flow
meter; the flow meter is connected to the ECU pins
A5/A17/A18/A26/A28.
Operation
The hot film membrane temperature is kept constant
(approximately 120 °C higher than suction air temperature)
by a heating resistor.
The air mass crossing the duct tends to subtract heat from
the membrane. Consequently more current is required
through the resistor to keep the temperature constant.
Current uptake is proportional to the mass of air flowing into
86036
the engine. It is measured by a Wheatstone bridge and the
resulting signal is sent to the ECU.
Figure 243
Intake exhaust
gas
Cooled exhaust
gas
Coolant to heater
Gas from E.G.R. valve
Hot exhaust gasses
Engine coolant
Coolant arriving
from cylinder Cold exhaust gasses
head
75537
EXHAUST GAS COOLING

A. Intake exhaust gas — B. Cooled exhaust gas — C. Coolant to heater — D. Gas from E.G.R. valve —
E. Coolant arriving from cylinder head.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

FUEL SUPPLY Figure 244

HIGH-PRESSURE ELECTRONIC
INJECTION SYSTEM (MS 6.3 - EDC 16)
General
Common Rail MS6.3 is a high-pressure electronic injection
system for fast diesel engines with direct injection.
Its main features comprise:
to the maximum operating pressure of 1600 bar,
irrespective of the speed of rotation and engine load;
- capacity to operate at very high speeds (up to 6000
rpm);
- injection control precision (injection duration and
advance);
- lower emissions.
- checking glow plugs;
- self-diagnosis;
- connection with immobilizer unit;
- checking maximum torque limitation.
before the TDC with the advantage of decreasing the
- engine speed;
- turbocharging pressure; high pressure 88435
- air temperature; low pressure
- intake air quantity; HIGH-PRESSURE ELECTRONIC INJECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS LAYOUT
- battery voltage;
1 Timing phase sensor — 2 Electro-injectors — 3 Glow plug — 4 Coolant temperature sensor — 5 Electromagnetic fan — 6 E.G.R. valve modulator (if present) — 7. Engine speed sensor — 8 Compressor
- diesel pressure; (if present) — 9 High-pressure pump — 10 Pressure regulator— 11 Fuel filter — 12 Fuel temperature sensor — 13 Fuel filter clogging sensor — 14 Electric supply pump — 15 Fuel pre-filter — 16 Fuel tank —
- position of throttle pedal. 17 Battery — 18 Control unit with atmospheric pressure sensor — 19 Throttle pedal sensor — 20 Clutch pedal sensors — 21 Brake pedal sensors — 22 Fuel check valve — 23 Heater — 24 Air temperature
pressure sensor — 25 Hydraulic accumulator (rail) pressure relief device — 26 Forged version hydraulic accumulator (rail) — 27 Hydraulic accumulator (rail) fuel pressure sensor — 28 Engine rev counter—
29 Tachograph — 30 Starter heater indicator light - 31. Welded version hydraulic accumulator..
In box A, there is shown the variant with welded version hydraulic accumulator.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ENGINE
SYSTEM OPERATION Checking regular engine rotation (anti-sawing)

Self-diagnosis — BLINK CODE It ensures regular engine rotation at a constant rate while
The control unit self-diagnosis system checks the signals from increasing revs.
the sensors, comparing them with the admitted limits (see The control unit processes the signals received from the
relative heading): sensors and determines the amount of fuel to be injected via:
- the pressure regulator;
Immobilizer recognition - the electro-injector opening time.
it communicates with the immobilizer control unit to enable Checking smokiness at exhaust on
starting. acceleration
With heavy acceleration, on the basis of the signals received
Checking fuel temperature from the air introduction meter and engine speed sensor, the
control unit determines the optimum amount of fuel to inject:
With the fuel temperature greater than 75°C, detected by the
sensor on the fuel filter, the control unit operates the pressure - it operates the pressure regulator;
regulator to decrease the line pressure (injection times are not - it varies the electro-injector injection time.
changed). If the temperature exceeds 90°C, the power is
reduced to 60%. Checking exhaust gas recirculation (E.G.R. if
present)
Checking engine coolant temperature Depending on the engine load and the signal from the
The control unit, depending on the temperature: accelerator pedal sensor, the control unit limits the amount of
air taken in, actuating partial suction of the exhaust gases.
- of the engine coolant, turbocharging air and fuel, operates
the electromagnetic fan (Baruffaldi) and switches on the Checking top speed limit
coolant temperature warning light.
Checking quantity of fuel injected two action strategies:
According to the signals from the sensors and the mapped - at 4250 rpm it cuts off the fuel, decreasing the
values, the control unit: electro-injector opening time;
- operates the pressure regulator; - over 5000 rpm it deactivates the electro-injectors.
- varies the ”pilot” injection time to 2200 rpm; Checking regular rotation on acceleration
- varies the ”main” injection time.
Regular progression is assured in all conditions by the control
Checking idling adjustment of the pressure regulator and the electro-injector opening
time.
The control unit processes the signals from the various sensors
and regulates the amount of fuel injected:
Checking glow plug control unit
- it operates the pressure regulator;
The injection control unit, in the phase of:
- it varies the injection times of the electro-injectors.
Within certain thresholds the speed takes account of the - starting
battery voltage. - after-starting
times operation of the glow plugs according to the engine
Fuel cut-off in release phase temperature.
In the phase of releasing the throttle pedal the control unit
actuates the following logic elements: Checking activation of air-conditioning system
- it cuts off supply to the electro-injectors; The control unit operates the air-conditioning compressor:
- it partially reactivates supply to the electro-injectors - switching it on/off when the relative switch is pressed;
before reaching idling speed; - momentarily turning it off (approximately 6 sec.) if the
- it operates the fuel pressure regulator. engine coolant reaches the set temperature.
Checking cylinder balancing on idling Checking fuel pump

According to the signals received from the sensors, the control Irrespective of the speed, the control unit:
unit controls the regularity of the torque at idling speed: - supplies the auxiliary fuel pump with the key on MAR;
- it varies the amount of fuel injected into the single - cuts off auxiliary pump supply if the engine is not started
electro-injectors (injection time). up within a few seconds.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004


known.
unit determines the optimum point of injection according to Injection timing electronic test
internal mapping.
The advance (start of delivery, expressed in degrees) may be
different from one injection to the next, also differentiated
Checking injection pressure closed cycle from one cylinder to another. It is calculated, similarly to the
Depending on the engine load, determined by processing the delivery, in relation to the engine load (accelerator position,
signals from the various sensors, the control unit operates the engine speed and air introduced).
regulator to obtain optimum line pressure. The advance is appropriately corrected:
- in phases of acceleration;
Fuel supply - according to the water temperature.
The fuel supply is calculated in relation to: And also to obtain:
- accelerator pedal position - lower emissions, noise and overloading;
- engine speed - better vehicle acceleration.
- quantity of air introduced. An extremely high advance is set on starting, depending on the
The outcome may be corrected in relation to: water temperature.
- the water temperature. Feedback from the start of delivery is supplied by the change
in impedance of the injector solenoid valve.
Or to avoid:
- noise Speed governor
- smoke The electronic speed governor has both features of
- overloading governors:
- overheating
- idling and top speed
- turbine over-revving.
- all speeds
The delivery can be modified in the case of:
It is stable in ranges where conventional, mechanical governors
- action of external devices (ABS), ABD, EDB are imprecise.
- serious trouble decreasing the load or stopping the
engine. Engine starting
After determining the mass of air introduced by measuring its During the first few turns of the engine, the timing and cylinder
volume and temperature, the control unit calculates the no. 1 recognition signals (flywheel sensor and camshaft sensor)
corresponding mass of fuel to inject into the relevant cylinder are synchronized.
(mg per delivery) also taking into account the temperature of The accelerator pedal signal is ignored on starting. Starting
the diesel. delivery is set only according to water temperature, by a
The mass of fuel calculated in this way is first converted into special map.
volume (mm3 per delivery) and then into degrees of throw, When the control unit detects such speed and acceleration of
or duration of injection. the flywheel as to be able to consider the engine started up
Correcting flow rate according to water accelerator pedal.
temperature
A cold engine meets with greater resistance during operation:
friction is high, the oil is still very viscous, and the various
clearances are not yet optimized.
In addition, the injected fuel tends to condense on the metal
surfaces that are still cold.
The fuel supply for a cold engine is therefore greater than for
a warm one.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


relation to the temperature (while the glow plugs in the Individual cylinder balancing contributes to increasing comfort
cylinder head heat the air), then flashes. It is now possible to and handling.
start up the engine. This function permits individual, customized control over the
When the motor is running this indicator light goes out, while delivery of fuel and the start of delivery for each cylinder, even
the glow plugs continue to be powered for a certain length of differently from one cylinder to another, to compensate for
time (variable) for post-heating. the hydraulic tolerances of the injector.
within 20-25 seconds (inattention time), the operation is various injectors cannot be evaluated directly by the control
voltage.
Warm starting
If there is no signal from the camshaft sensor, the control unit
stopped into the main memory (see After Run) and makes a of the crankshaft, injection will take place in that cylinder, so
diagnosis of the system. the control unit just needs to get synchronized on the firing
sequence and to start up the engine.
After run
data from the main memory (volatile) to a non-volatile
memory, which can be erased and written over (EEPROM),
so as to make it available at the next start up (see Run Up).
- various settings (engine idling adjustment, etc.);
- settings of some components;
- fault memory.

the control unit.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

OPERATION
In this injection system, the pressure regulator, located Figure 245
upstream from the high-pressure pump, governs the flow of
fuel needed in the low-pressure system. Afterwards, the
high-pressure pump correctly supplies the hydraulic
accumulator.
This solution, pressurizing solely the necessary fuel, improves
the energy efficiency and limits heating the fuel in the system.
The relief valve fitted on the high-pressure pump has the
function of keeping the pressure, at the pressure regulator
inlet, constant at 5 bars; irrespective of the efficiency of the fuel
filter and of the system upstream. The action of the relief valve
causes an increase in the flow of fuel in the high-pressure pump
cooling circuit.
The high-pressure pump continually keeps the fuel at the
working pressure, irrespective of the timing and the cylinder
that is to receive the injection and accumulates it in a duct
common to all the electro-injectors.
At the electro-injector inlet, there is therefore always fuel at
the injection pressure calculated by the electronic control unit.
When the solenoid valve of an electro-injector is energized by
the electronic control unit, fuel taken straight from the
hydraulic accumulator gets injected into the relevant cylinder.
The hydraulic system is made out of a low-pressure fuel
recirculation circuit and a high-pressure circuit.
The high-pressure circuit is composed of the following pipes:
- pipe connecting the high-pressure pump outlet to the
Rail;
- hydraulic accumulator;
- pipes supplying the electro-injectors.
The low-pressure circuit is composed of the following pipes:
- fuel intake pipe from the tank to the pre-filter;
- pipes supplying the mechanical supply pump and the
pre-filter;
- pipes supplying the high-pressure pump via the fuel filter.
The fuel system is completed by the fuel outlet circuit from the
hydraulic accumulator and from the electro-injectors.
According to the high performance of this hydraulic system,
for reasons of safety it is necessary to:
- avoid connecting high-pressure pipe fittings with
approximate tightening;
- avoid disconnecting the high-pressure pipes with the
engine running (NEVER try bleeding, which is both
pointless and dangerous).
The integrity of the low-pressure circuit is also essential for the
system to work properly; it is therefore necessary to avoid all
manipulation and modifications and act only in the event of
leakage.
high pressure
88436
NOTE The pipes connected to the fuel filter mounting are low pressure
quick-coupling ones. FUEL RECIRCULATION AND SUPPLY SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Before fitting them, make sure the couplings and the
associated fittings on the mounting are clean. 1. CP3 high-pressure pump with integrated supply pump — 2. Fuel arrival pipe from the filter — 3. Pressure regulator — 4. Water in filter sensor — 5. Fuel filter with water separator — 6. Fuel temperature
sensor — 7. Fuel warming — 8. Fuel delivery pipe to the filter — 9. Fuel return pipe to the tank — 10. Fuel check valve — 11. Multiple coupling — 12. Fuel return low pressure piping - 13. Welded version
hydraulic accumulator - 14. High-pressure delivery pipe to the hydraulic accumulator — 15. Low-pressure return pipe from the hydraulic accumulator to the multiple coupling — 16. Overpressure valve —
17. Forged version hydraulic accumulator — 18. Pressure sensor — 19. High-pressure pipe between hydraulic accumulator and electro-injectors — 20. Electro-injectors — 21. Return pipe from the
electro-injectors to the high-pressure pump CP3.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Specifications

The hydraulic system is composed of: Delivery pressure: 2.5 bar
- tank Flow rate: > 155 litres/h
Power supply: 13.5 V - < 5 A
- pre-filter
Coil resistance at 20°C: 28.5 Ohms
- electric supply pump
- fuel filter
- high pressure supply pump with supply pump built
inpressure regulator
- manifold (rail)
- electro-injectors
- supply pipes and fuel recirculation
773010 Fuel pump

This rotary positive displacement pump with integrated
by-pass is mounted on the suction pipe, on the left-hand side
of the chassis frame.
brush motor with energizing by permanent magnets.
The pump has two valves, a check valve to prevent the fuel
circuit from emptying (with the pump stationary) and an
overpressure valve that recirculates the delivery with the inlet
Figure 246
50707
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

542011 Fuel filter

Figure 247
88613
1. Clogging signalling sensor - 2. Temperature sensor connector - 3. Heater support - 4. Water in signalling sensor -
5. Overpressure valve - 6. Heater connector - 7. Bending insert - 8. Fuel filter - 9. Water separator - 10. Connector -
11. Connector - 12. Purging screw.
The fuel filter is composed of a cartridge (8) equipped with a Fuel pipes
water separator (9). Figure 248
The water accumulation capacity (A) of the filter is approx.
100 cm3.
The water indicator (4) is mounted on the bottom end.
Unscrewing the indicator (4) drains off any water.
Heater support (3) has an integrated temperature sensor.
On heater support (3) there are screwed up sensor (1) to
signal filter clogging and non return valve (5).
When the temperature of the diesel is less than 6 °C, an
electric heating element warms it up to at most 15 °C before
sending it to the high pressure pump.
Check valve characteristics
opening pressure 0.5 + 0.05
- 0.1
bar
differential pressure less than 0.2 bar at 120 litres/h of fuel.
differential working pressure 1.1 bar
Tightening torques
1. Tightening clogging signalling sensor 20±2 Nm 75585
4. Water in signalling sensor 0.8±1.2 Nm
5. Check valve tightening 25±2 Nm 1. High-pressure pump supply pipe quick-coupling fitting —
8. Fuel filter tightening 18±2 Nm 2. Supply pipe quick-coupling fitting — 3. Fuel return pipe
10. Connector 35±2 Nm quick-coupling fitting — 4. Fuel filter mounting.
11. Connector 35±2 Nm If disconnecting the fuel pipes (1-2-3) from the mounting (4),
12. Bleed screw 4 Nm it is necessary, when refitting, to make sure their fittings are
7.* Threaded insert 35±2 Nm perfectly clean. This is to avoid an imperfect seal and fuel
* Before mounting, apply thread holding down Loctite on getting out.
thread.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

775010
Print 603.43.351/D
High-pressure pump
Figure 249
85846
1. Mechanical feeding pump - 2. CP3 high pressure pump - 3. Pressure regulator A. To the tank - B. Return from rail -
C. Return from fuel filter - D. Delivery to rail - E. From tank - F. Return to injectors.
Pump with 3 radial pumping elements controlled via a gear by

the timing belt; it needs no timing. On the rear of the NOTE The high-pressure pump — supply pump assembly
high-pressure pump there is the mechanical supply pump, cannot be overhauled and therefore the fixing
controlled by the shaft of the high-pressure pump. screws must be neither removed nor tampered
The pump is lubricated and cooled by the fuel. with. The only permissible job is replacing the driving
gear.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 250
85847
1 Delivery valve on single pumping element — 2. Relief valve 5 bar — 3. Pressure regulator — 4. Fuel inlet from filter — 5. Pump
shaft — 6. Delivery valve to common rail — 7. Fuel return from high-pressure pump — 8. Mechanical supply pump.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

High-pressure pump internal structure

Print 603.43.351
Figure 251
Sec. B-B
Sec. C-C
70498
1. Cylinder — 2. Three-lobed element — 3. Plate intake valve — 4. Ball delivery valve — 5. Plunger — 6. Pump shaft —
7. Low-pressure fuel inlet — 8. Fuel ducts to supply pumping elements.
Each pumping assembly comprises: in a circular movement on a wider radius, with the result
of working the three pumping elements alternately:
- a plunger (5) operated by a three-lobed element (2)
floating on the shaft of the pump (6). Since the element - a plate intake valve (3);
(2) floats on a misaligned portion of the shaft (6), during
- a ball delivery valve (4).
shaft rotation, it does not turn with it but is only shifted
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Working principle
Figure 252
Sec. B - B
Figure 253
Sec. D - D 72597
1. Outlet for delivery to rail — 2. Delivery valve to rail — 3. Pumping element — 4. Pump shaft — 5. Pumping element supply
duct — 6. Pressure regulator supply duct — 7. Pressure regulator.
The pumping element (3) is arranged on the cam on the pump received from the control unit, chokes the flow of fuel to the
shaft. In the suction phase, the pumping element is supplied pumping element. During the compression phase of the
through the supply duct (5). The amount of fuel to send to the pumping element, the fuel, on reaching such a pressure as to
pumping element is determined by the pressure regulator (7). open the delivery valve to the common rail (2), supplies it
The pressure regulator, on the basis of the PWM command through the outlet (1).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 254
Sec. C — C (Figure 253)
72598 72599
1, 3, 6 Pumping element inlet — 2. Pump lubrication ducts — 4. Main pumping element supply duct — 5. Pressure regulator —
7. Regulator outlet duct — 8. Relief valve 5 bar — 9. Fuel outlet from regulator inlet.
Figure 254 shows the low-pressure fuel routing in the pump; The pressure regulator (5) determines the amount of fuel with
it highlights the main supply duct of the pumping elements (4), which to supply the pumping elements; excess fuel flows out
the supply ducts of the pumping elements (1-3-6), the ducts through the duct (9).
used to lubricate the pump (2), the pressure regulator (5), the
The 5-bar relief valve, besides acting as a manifold for the fuel
5-bar relief valve (8) and the fuel outlet.
outlets, has the function of keeping the pressure constant at
The pump shaft is lubricated by the fuel through the delivery 5 bars at the regulator inlet.
and return ducts (2).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 255
72600
72601
Sec. A — A (Figure 253)
1, 2 Fuel outlet ducts — 3. Fuel outlet from the pump with coupling for high-pressure pipe for the common rail.
The figure shows the high-pressure fuel flow through the

outlet ducts of the pumping elements.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

771034 Pressure control valve Replacing pressure regulator.

The fuel pressure regulator is mounted on the low-pressure
circuit of the CP3 pump. The pressure regulator modulates Figure 258
the amount of fuel sent to the high-pressure circuit according
to the commands received directly from the engine control
unit. The pressure regulator is mainly composed of the
following components:
- connector
- casing
- solenoid
- pre-load spring
- shutter cylinder.
When there is no signal, the pressure regulator is normally
open, therefore with the pump providing maximum delivery.
The engine control unit, via the PWM (Pulse Width
Modulation) signal, modulates the change in fuel flow rate in
the high-pressure circuit by partially closing or opening the
sections of passage of the fuel in the low-pressure circuit. 88406
Operation Accurately clean high pressure pump.
Figure 256 Take off screws (2) and unthread pressure regulator (3) from
high pressure pump.
Figure 259
75574
1. Solenoid — 2. Magnetic core — 3. Shutter cylinder —

4. Fuel inlet — 5. Fuel outlet. 88407
When the engine control unit governs the pressure regulator Accurately clean the seat (→) of pressure regulator and the
(via PWM signal), the solenoid (1) is energized that, in its turn, connection surface (→) of the regulator.
generates the movement of the magnetic core (2). The shift
of the core causes the shutter cylinder (3) to move axially,
choking the flow of fuel. NOTE For cleaning, do not use a tool which could damage
the surfaces and pay attention that impurities are
not introduced into channels.
Figure 257
Figure 260
75575
1. Solenoid — 2. Magnetic core — 3. Pre-load spring —

4. Shutter cylinder.
When the solenoid (1) is not energized, the magnetic core is
88408
pushed into the rest position by the pre-load spring (3). In this
condition, the shutter cylinder (4) is in such a position as to Mount new seal rings (1 and 2) on pressure regulator (3) and
offer the fuel the greatest section of passage. lubricate the rings with vaseline.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 261 MECHANICAL SUPPLY PUMP

Normal working condition
Figure 263
88409
72592
Mount pressure regulator (1) on high pressure pump (2). A. Fuel inlet from the tank — B. Fuel outlet to the filter —
1, 2 By-pass valves in closed position.
The function of the gear pump, mounted on the rear of the
NOTE Mounting operation must be performed keeping
high-pressure pump, is to supply the high-pressure pump. It is
the regulator perpendicular to connection plane
governed by the shaft of the high-pressure pump.
without angling it, in order not to damage seal rings
In normal working conditions, the flow of fuel inside the
(1-2, Figure 260).
mechanical pump is shown in the figure.
Conditions of outlet overpressure
72593
The by-pass valve (1) trips when overpressure is generated at

the outlet B. The pressure, overcoming the elastic resistance
88410 of the spring of the valve (1), sets the outlet in communication
with the inlet via the duct (2).
Screw up screws (1) and tighten them at 6 ÷ 7 Nm (0.6 ÷ 0.7
kgm) torque. Conditions of bleeding
Figure 265
NOTE Where pressure regulator is replaced on the engine
mounted on the vehicle, it is needed, after
replacement, to check that there are no fuel leaks
after an engine working period.
72594
The by-pass valve (1) trips when, with the engine switched off,
you want to fill the supply system via the priming pump. In this
situation, the by-pass valve (2) opens, due to the effect of the
inlet pressure, and the fuel flows out via the outlet B.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

774510 Hydraulic accumulator (rail) Overpressure valve (for forged hydraulic

accumulator)
The hydraulic accumulator is mounted on aspiration side
cylinder head. Figure 268
Its task is to damp pressure oscillations caused:
- the operation of the high-pressure pump;
- the opening of the electro-injectors.
Figure 266
70500
1. Casing — 2. Plunger — 3. Stop — 4. Spring — 5. Direct

outlet to tank — 6. Seat on rail.
The pressure relief valve protects the system components if
the fuel pressure exceeds the setting: 1750 bars.
A. The tapered end of the plunger normally keeps the outlet
to the tank shut.
Figure 269
75576
B
1. Forged version hydraulic accumulator, inner volume ~
22 cm3 - 2. Fuel pressure sensor - 3. Overpressure valve.
70502
Figure 267 B. If the pressure of the fuel in the hydraulic accumulator

exceeds 1750 bars, the plunger gets shifted and the
excess pressure is discharged into the tank.
775010 ELECTRO-INJECTORS
Figure 270
75588
88418
The electro-injectors have high-pressure supply (up to 1600
bar) and recirculation at atmospheric pressure, necessary for
1. Welded version hydraulic accumulator, inner volume ~ the diesel used to operate the pilot valve.
23 cm3 - 2. Fuel pressure sensor. The temperature of the diesel put back into circulation by the
electro-injector can get very high (approximately 120°C).
The head of the electro-injector has a fitting for the electrical
connector.
They are mounted on the cylinder head and operated by the
injection control unit.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
Figure 271 The coil (4) is energized and causes the shutter (6) to rise.
The fuel of the control volume (9) flows off towards the return
manifold (10) causing a drop in pressure in the control area
(7).
At the same time, line pressure through feed duct (12) applies
Fc a force Fa > Fc in pressure chamber (8) lifting peg (2), with fuel
being consequently introduced into cylinders.
- ”end of injection”
The coil (4) is de-energized and makes the shutter (6) return
to its closed position. This recreates such a balance in the
consequently end injection.
ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS
766161 Electronic control unit MS6.3 or
Fa EDC 16
Figure 272
50704
90638
1 Pressure rod — 2 Pin — 3 Nozzle — 4 Coil — 5 Pilot valve —
6 Ball shutter — 7 Control area — 8. Pressure chamber —
9 Control volume — 10 Low-pressure fuel return — The control unit is a ”flash EPROM” and so it can be
11 Control pipe — 12 Supply pipe — 13 Electrical connection reprogrammed from outside without changing the hardware.
— 14 High-pressure fuel inlet fitting — 15 Spring. It processes the signals from the sensors by applying software
algorithms and controls the actuators (especially the
The electro-injector can be divided into two parts: electro-injectors and pressure regulator).
- actuator/jet composed of pressure rod (1), pin (2) and built in to further improve the control of the injection system.
nozzle (3); The control unit is mounted on the left-hand side of the engine
- control solenoid valve composed of coil (4) and pilot bay and is connected to the vehicle’s wiring harness by two
valve (5). 43-pin connectors:
Operation MS6.3:
phases: — 43-pin connector B for the components on the vehicle
EDC.16:
- ”rest position”
Coil (4) is de-energised, and shutter (6) is in closing position — 94-pin connector K for the components on the vehicle
and prevents fuel from being introduced into the cylinder, Fc In addition to handling the operation of the system described
> Fa (Fc: caused by fuel pressure acting on control area (7) of under the relevant heading, the electronic control unit is
rod (1); Fa: caused by line pressure acting on pressure interfaced with the other electronic systems on the vehicles
chamber (8). such as ABS — EBD cruise control, speed limiting device,
- ”start of injection” immobilizer (IVECO CODE), EGR and glow plugs.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

761917 Glow plug electronic control unit SENSORS
Engine speed sensor

Figure 273
It is an inductive type sensor and is positioned on the phonic
wheel mounted on engine shaft front end.
It generates signals obtained from magnetic flux lines which
close through phonic wheel teeth. Teeth number: 58.
The electronic control unit uses this signal to measure the
speed of rotation of the engine, its angular position and to
operate the electronic rev counter.
If this signal fails the rev counter will not work.
Camshaft timing sensor
It is a Hall effect type sensor positioned on camshaft pulley.
It generates signals obtained from lines of magnetic flux that
close through a notch in the pulley.
The signal generated by this sensor is used by the electronic
control unit as a redundant signal to measure the different en-
gine speeds.
75578
The engine control unit, in the phase of: 772655 Air temperature and pressure sensor
- starting Positioned on the intake manifold, it measures the pressure of
- after-starting the turbocharging air introduced into the intake manifold.
times the operation of the glow plug control unit according to This value, together with that of the air temperature sensor,
the engine temperature. makes it possible for the electronic control unit to calculate the
exact quantity of air introduced into the cylinders so as to
Glow plugs drive is through glow plugs pre-heating central unit operate the injectors adjusting the fuel delivery, limiting
depending on engine temperature under close control of harmful emissions, improving consumption and performance.
engine control central unit. The sensor contains an electronic temperature correction
The pre-heating control unit contains an “intelligent” circuit to optimize the pressure measurement in relation to the
contactor that sends feedback to the control unit that is thus temperature of the intake air.
informed about any fault with the pre-heating control unit or
shorting to earth of the glow plugs.
Integrated in the fuel filter, it measures the fuel temperature
and transmits it to the electronic control unit.
761915 Glow plugs When the fuel temperature is too high (ambient temperature
condition, engine at full load and tank in reserve), correct
Figure 274 lubrication of the high-pressure pump is no longer assured. On
the basis of the values received, the control unit determines the
density and volume of the fuel, correcting the delivery limiting
engine performance.
774511 Fuel pressure sensor

This is mounted in the middle of the hydraulic accumulator
(rail) and it has the task of providing feedback for the injection
control unit to:
- adjust injection pressure
- adjust the duration of injection.
75579
766161 Atmospheric pressure sensor
CONTROL VALUES This is integrated in the electronic control unit. It provides a
With a constant supply voltage of 11 V: criterion of correction for the measurement of the air flow rate
and to calculate the reference air flow rate to check the EGR.
- max. current drawn 18 A
- in 5 sec. 11 ±1.5 A
- in 30 sec. 6 ±0.9 A
- temperature after 7 sec. 850°C
- tightening torque 8-10 Nm
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

764254 Engine coolant temperature sensor ACTUATORS

This provides the control unit with an index of the thermal The injection system comprises three classes of actuators
status of the engine in order to determine corrections for the interlocked with the electronic control unit:
fuel delivery, injection pressure, EGR injection advance when - electro-injectors (see relevant heading);
starting cold (if mounted) and warm-up.
- regulators (see relevant headings) requiring PWM control
(Pulse Width Modulation):
505910 Throttle pedal position sensor • for pressure
• EGR (if mounted)
The accelerator pedal position sensor provides the control • turbocharger with variable geometry (if mounted);
unit with a voltage value in proportion to the angle of
operation of the pedal determining fuel delivery. - actuators with continuous ON/OFF signal to:
• engage electromagnetic coupling for radiator cooling
fan;
772641 Clutch pedal position sensor • turn on/off air-conditioner compressor (if mounted);
• Cruise Control;
Mounted on the pedal board, it provides the control unit with • starter heater control;
a positive signal when the clutch is engaged (pedal released). • fuel filter heating;
Every time the clutch is disengaged to change gear, the control • electric supply pump.
unit fails to receive this signal and deactivates the Cruise
Control function.
NOTE All the power controls are made with relays located
772642 Brake pedal position sensor in the cab.
There are two of these sensors mounted on the pedal board.
With the brake pedal released, they provide the control unit
with a positive signal that is used to detect brake operation so
as to deactivate the Cruise Control function and stop delivery
of fuel.
In addition, a sensor switches on the brake lights. PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) controls
A PWM control has an active and an inactive state that
alternate within a constant set length of time. During the active
764261 Vehicle speed sensor state the actuator control circuit is closed, which is thus
This sensor, mounted on the gearbox by the drive output powered with the control voltage; whereas, during the
shaft, transmits the vehicle speed signal, through the electronic inactive state the circuit is open.
tachograph, to the control unit. The duration of the two states may be varied with the
of the modulation delivery.
The duration of the active state determines the duty-cycle,
which is normally expressed as a percentage of the total time.
Therefore, if the duration of the two active and passive states
are the same, the duty-cycle is equal to 50%.
For reasons of diagnostics, the duty-cycle is limited between
1% and 99%; the control resolution is equal to 0.005%
(1/20000 of the time).
The time length has been chosen taking account of the
dynamic actuator response specifications.
Too low a carrier frequency could cause oscillations in the
actuator, while too high a frequency would decrease control
resolution.
The E.G.R. and variable geometry turbocharger (if mounted)
are controlled through a vacuum modulating valve.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

GUIDE TO TROUBLESHOOTING
INTRODUCTION
During vehicle operation, the control unit can detect a series of electric faults. Each fault is associated to a failure code that will
be stored in the ECU memory.
Failure codes can be read by connecting IVECO test tools to 38-pole diagnostic socket.
Figure 275
86435
1. 38-pole diagnostic socket.
For the MS 6.3 ECU there is a code for each failure called blink Code, whereas for EDC 16 ECU a double failure code, called
DTC and FMI will be stored.
The DTC code represents the failing component whereas the FMI code identifies the failure type.
Good diagnosis is made above all with the electronic diagnosis instruments developed by Iveco (Modus / IT2000 / IWT).
When the vehicle comes into the garage, the information provided by the driver is given due consideration, but the first thing
to do is to hook up Modus / IT2000 / IWT and carefully run a full diagnosis:
- reading fault memory;
- reading parameters;
- engine test;
- etc.
Print the entire diagnosis outcomes, specially when Help Desk assistance is required.
The Help Desk will actually reject any demand of assistance if the workshop does not comply with the above procedure.
Here follows a GUIDE TO TROUBLESHOOTING drawn up by the engineers that have designed and implemented the Common
Rail with MS 6.3 and EDC 16 ECUs.
Troubleshooting consists of two different sections:
- the first one, organised by Blink Codes for engine versions with MS 6.3 ECU and DTC-FMI for engine versions with EDC
16 ECU, concerns electric-electronic failures that can be directly detected by the control units.
- the second one for troubleshooting by symptoms describes possible trouble that cannot be identified by the electronic
control unit. This kind of trouble is chiefly of a mechanical — hydraulic nature.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

1st Section
Print 603.43.351/D
for engine versions with MS 6.3 ECU
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
Blink code (on vehicles up to chassis No. Figure 276

5383302/D187233)
With the key turned off, press the diagnosis button.
- Two sets of flashes of the EDC warning light with a short
pause in between indicate the code number of the first
error stored in memory.
- Press the button again to pass on to the next error.
- After reaching the last error, the first one is repeated.
- The list of errors contains all the errors stored in memory
and not only the active ones.
- The order of presentation of the errors respects the
chronological order in which they appeared.
The table gives the error codes.
To delete the list of errors from the control unit memory,
follow this procedure:
- with the key turned off, press the diagnosis button;
- keeping the button pressed, turn the key on;
- keep the button pressed for 5 seconds; 77087
- let go of the button;
- turn the key off. 1. 38-pin diagnosis socket — 2. Blink code switch
The diagnosis socket (1) and the blink code switch are
located in the glove compartment in front of the passenger’s
seat.
Blink code Indicator light Fault description Power reduction
VEHICLE
1.1 On Vehicle speed
1.2 (not used)
1.3 Off Cruise Control buttons
1.4 Blinking Throttle pedal *
1.5 Off Clutch switch
1.6 On Brake switch
1.7 Off Throttle/brake plausibility Idling
1.8 Off Main EDC / diagnosis indicator light
1.9 Off Air-conditioner control contactor
ENGINE 1
2.1 Blinking Water temperature sensor *
2.2 Off Air temperature sensor
2.3 On Fuel temperature sensor
2.4 Blinking Turbocharging pressure sensor *
2.5 Off Atmospheric pressure sensor
2.7 On Fuel motor pump control contactor
2.8 Off Fuel filter heater control contactor
2.9 On Fan control contactor
ENGINE 2
3.1 Off Cylinder 1 balancing
3.5 Off Battery voltage
3.6 Off Glow plug indicator light
3.7 Off Glow plug control contactor
3.9 Off Pre-heating monitoring
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
Blink code Indicator light Fault description Power reduction

ELECTRO-INJECTORS
5.7 Blinking Bank 1 (cylinders 1 — 4)
5.8 Blinking Bank 2 (cylinders 2 — 3)
ENGINE SPEED
6.1 Blinking Crankshaft sensor *
6.2 Blinking Timing sensor *
6.4 Off Engine overspeed
FUEL PRESSURE
*
8.1 Blinking Fuel pressure control
or cutting out engine
8.2 Blinking Fuel pressure sensor *
8.3 Blinking Pressure regulator solenoid valve
8.5 On EGR monitoring
8.6 On EGR solenoid valve
8.7 On Debimeter
8.8 Off Air temperature sensor (debimeter)
CONTROL UNIT
*
9.1 Blinking Control unit error (Gate array)
9.2 On Control unit error (EEPROM)
9.3 Blinking EDC — Immobilizer communication
9.4 On Main contactor
9.5 Off After run test
9.6 Blinking Engine Stop Test (ECU)
*
9.7 Blinking Sensor power supply
9.8 Blinking Control unit error (Checksum) Starting not possible
9.9 Blinking Control unit error (Operating system) Cutting out engine
(∗) Cases when there is a power reduction.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ENGINE
BLINK EDC POSSIBLE POSSIBLE TESTS OR

DAILY
NOTES
CODE LAMP CAUSE TROUBLE RECOMMENDED ACTION
Print 603.93.281
1.1 On Vehicle speed sensor signal The speedometer does not Read measurable parameters with the Error detected only with vehicle travelling and
not plausible (circuit may work (if the fault is between
diagnostic instrument: when there is only in the event of a short circuit.
be open or sensor the sensor and the
this error, the vehicle speed read on the
If signal is not present no error is detected
defective). speedometer). control unit will be fixed on 5 km/h.
because the control unit considers vehicle to be
Read fault memory with the diagnosis at a standstill.
instrument: if the error is intermittent,
Cruise Control / PTO are * old code
check the connectors for an uncertain
not working.
contact. ** new code
If the error is present, perform the
following checks:
• If the speedometer doesn’t work,
use a multimeter to check the sensor
power supply (12V) between its pin 1
and earth.
If the power supply is correct, check the
wiring between the sensor’s pin 3 and
the instrument panel’s pin B1*
(A22**), between the sensor’s pin 2
and the instrument panel’s pin B10*
(A21**).
• If the speedometer works but

indicates an implausible speed, check
the sensor is fitted properly, it is clean
and its magnetic gap is correct.
If the defect persists, check the wiring
between the instrument panel’s pin
B5* (A20**) and the EDC connector’s
pin B14, and between the instrument
panel’s pin B13* (A1**) and the EDC
connector’s pin B4.
F1A ENGINE
423
Base - May 2004

424
NOTES
Base - May 2004

1.3 Off Cruise Control / PTO Cruise Control / PTO and Read status parameters with the Not plausible if Set+ and Set- or Resume and Off
control buttons not idling adjustment fail to work. diagnosis instrument to identify the are activated at the same time.
plausible. defective control (does not switch
F1A ENGINE
ON-OFF).
Check the wiring from OFF (pin 4 drive
control system) to EDC connector pin
B32, RESUME (pin 5 drive control
system) to EDC connector pin B25, from
SET + button (pin 6 drive control
system) to EDC connector pin B33, from
SET — button (pin 3 drive control
system) to EDC connector pin B1.
Check there is voltage (approximately
12V) between pins 1, 2 and earth of the
Cruise Controls.
If the voltage is right and the wiring
sound, but the fault remains, change the
right-hand lever of the drive control
system.
1.4 Blinking Throttle pedal Power loss. Read measurable parameters with the
potentiometer shorted. diagnostic instrument to check
Engine runs at fast idle speed potentiometer malfunctioning (the signal
(1500 rpm) with throttle does not change from 0% to 100%).
pedal in rest position.
Check the integrity of the potentiometer
Pressing the pedal causes the (R total = approx. 1 kOhm between pins
engine rpm to increase 4 and 6), check the linear change in

progressively and resistance of the potentiometer between
uncontrollably up to a pins 5 — 6 and 5 — 4 between the
reduced top speed (3900 minimum and the maximum. If the
rpm). potentiometer is working correctly,
check the wiring between the pedal
connector pin 6 and the EDC connector
pin B27, between the pedal connector
pin 4 and the EDC connector pin B35,
between the pedal connector pin 5 and
the EDC connector pin B2.
1.4 Blinking No signal from the Fast idling 1500 rpm in any Check the integrity of the potentiometer.
throttle pedal pedal position. If the potentiometer is sound, check the
potentiometer (circuit wiring between the potentiometer and
may be open). the EDC control unit connector.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY
NOTES
Print 603.93.281
1.4 Blinking Throttle pedal: implausible Fast idling 1500 rpm in idling Read status parameters with the (The potentiometer signal is good and indicates
signal between idling switch position and normal diagnosis instrument to check the idling the pedal has been released, but the switch status
and potentiometer. acceleration position when switch works properly. indicates the pedal is pressed.)
pressing the pedal.
If the outcome is negative, use a
multimeter on the component to
check the integrity of the idling switch
(ON-OFF switching between pins 3
and 2 of the pedal connector).
If the switch is sound, look for a break
in the wiring between the switch pin 2
and EDC connector pin B29, between
switch pin 3 and EDC connector pin
B13.
1.4 Blinking Throttle pedal: implausible Idling normal, but on pressing Using a multimeter on the component, (The potentiometer signal is good and indicates
signal between idling switch the pedal the engine speed check the integrity of the the pedal has been released, but the
and potentiometer. settles on an intermediate potentiometer. potentiometer signal indicates the pedal is
fixed value. pressed.)
If the potentiometer is sound, look for
a break or short-circuiting in the wiring
between the potentiometer and the
connector.
F1A ENGINE
425
Base - May 2004

426
NOTES
Base - May 2004

1.5 Off Clutch switch: signal not Cruise Control / PTO fail to Read status parameters with the If everything turns out satisfactory with the check,
plausible (at the EDC work. diagnosis instrument to check correct the trouble could be with not pressing the clutch
F1A ENGINE
control unit it seems the switchover on pressing the pedal. fully down (it is sometimes possible to change
speed of the vehicle has gear without operating the switch).
If the result is negative, use a
changed from 0 to at least
multimeter on the component to
30 km/h without the clutch
check continuity and switchover on
getting pressed) or not
pressing the pedal between pins 1 and
present.
2.
If the switch is sound, check the
continuity of the wiring between
switch pin 2 and EDC connector B38.
With the key ON, check there is
voltage (approx. 12V) between EDC
pin B31 and earth. Also check the fuse
24 and the wiring between the switch
pin 1 and pin 13 of fuse 24.
1.6 On Brake switch — signals not Brake lights might not work. Read status parameters with the Check the pedal switches are fitted correctly
plausible between primary diagnosis instrument to check correct (they must activate at the same time).
and secondary. and simultaneous switchover of the
If the trouble occurs too frequently, change both
The Cruise Control / PTO primary and secondary brake switches.
switches.
fails to work.
If the outcome is negative, use a
multimeter to check the integrity and
correct switchover of the switches

(one between pins 3 and 2 and the
other between pins 1 and 2).
If the switches are sound, with the key
ON and the pedal pressed (brake lights
on), check for approx. 12V on EDC pin
B26 (secondary switch) and on EDC
pin B31 (primary switch). If there is no
voltage, check the wiring and the relays
between the switches and EDC
connector.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY
NOTES
Print 603.93.281
1.7 Off Throttle / brake pedal Engine speed drops down to Read parameters with the diagnosis This error is stored in memory only if the brake
plausibility: simultaneous idling. instrument, check that the throttle and throttle signals are integral.
brake and throttle pedal potentiometer signal resets on
If the brake is applied with If the error is saved to memory when the pedals
activation. release, otherwise the driver might
the throttle pressed, the are not pressed, it is likely that one of the brake
have pressed the brake and the throttle
engine drops down to idling switches is stuck or shorted to +Batt.
together.
until the brake is released so
Make the user aware about using the pedals
it is possible to stop the
correctly.
vehicle even if the throttle
pedal jams in an intermediate
position. Whereas, it is
possible to accelerate with
the brake pedal pressed
without any safety
mechanisms tripping.
1.8 Off EDC lamp shorted or The EDC lamp fails to come Check continuity between the The operation of the indicator light is extremely
circuit open. on when turning the key ON instrument panel pin B17 and EDC important for the operation and integrity of the
or it stays on even with the connector pin B23. system.
key OFF.
Check that with the key ON there is Make the user aware to check the indicator light
approx. 12V between the instrument works properly with each ignition (if there are no
panel pin B16 and earth. faults in memory, it has to come on for 2 sec. and
then go out).
Check the LED works between B16

and B17 on the instrument panel.
Check continuity between the
instrument panel pin B17 and EDC
connector pin B23.
F1A ENGINE
427
Base - May 2004

428
NOTES
Base - May 2004

1.9 Off AC compressor control The air-conditioning Active diagnosis with the diagnostic If the circuit is open at pin A8 level 2.7-2.8-2.9 are
relay coil shorted to +Batt compressor is not instrument. saved to memory as well.
F1A ENGINE
or to earth or circuit open. disconnected when the

If the outcome is negative, check that, The control unit only sees the integrity of the coil
EDC requires it.
with the key ON and engine off, between pins 8 — 35 and not any stuck contacts.
between the EDC pin A35 and earth
During active diagnosis, besides the relay tripping
there is no voltage (if there is also 9.7,
the compressor clutch must disconnect-
call the Help Desk to have the control
reconnect.
unit replaced, if necessary).
If the compressor does cut out,
disconnect the relay 25337. If on
disconnecting the relay the
compressor stops, replace the relay.
If the compressor never works, try
replacing the relay and check continuity
between the EDC connector pin A8
and earth.
2.1 Blinking Water temperature sensor Less power (and noise as Read measurable parameters with the In the event of trouble with the wiring pin A30,
short-circuited or circuit pre-injection is not diagnosis instrument to check simultaneous signalling of trouble with the fuel
open. implemented) in all cases. plausibility between EDC water temperature sensor and indication (reading
temperature and that signalled by the measurable parameters) of a fixed temperature of
Engine cooling fan always on
vehicle’s instrument. 60°C.
(if there is no temperature
signal or it is not valid, in Read parameters: if there is this error, In the event of a high temperature, check the
order to protect the engine the water temperature read on the engine cooling fan comes on and if necessary the
the control unit turns on the control unit will be the same as that of contacts of relay 25336 and fuse no. 5.
fan). the fuel.
In the event of contrasting indications,
use a multimeter to check the integrity
of the sensor between its pins 1 and 2
(R = approx. 2.5 kOhm at 20°C).
If the sensor is integral, check the wiring
between the sensor and EDC
connector pin A1-A30.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY
NOTES
Print 603.93.281
2.2 Off Air temperature sensor on The control unit calculates Read measurable parameters with the The temperature sensor is integrated with the
intake manifold short- the fuel metering basing itself diagnosis instrument: if there is this pressure sensor.
circuited or circuit open. on a set temperature value. It error, the turbocharging air
is therefore possible to have temperature will be fixed at 20°C.
slight decreases or increases
If the temperature is fixed at 20°C,
in performance and smoke
check the integrity of the sensor (R =
depending on the difference
approx. 2.5 kOhm at 20°C) pin 1 and
between the substitution
2.
temperature and the actual
one. If the sensor is sound, check the wiring
between the sensor and EDC
connector pin A2-A19.
2.3 On Fuel temperature sensor The control unit calculates Read measurable parameters: if there is In the event of trouble with the wiring pin A30,
short-circuited or circuit the fuel metering basing itself this error, the fuel temperature will be simultaneous signalling of trouble with the water
open. on the water temperature, the same as that of the water. temperature sensor and indication (reading
but in this case there is no parameters) of a fixed temperature of 50°C.
If the temperature indicated has the
reaction the driver can
same value as that of the water, check If the signal exceeds 85°C, reduction to 60%
detect.
the integrity of the sensor (R = approx. power, if it exceeds 90°C, reduction in injection
2.5 kOhm at 20°C). pressure, if it exceeds 110°C, the error is stored
in memory (even if the signal is sound).
If the sensor is sound, check the wiring
between the sensor and EDC If the flight recorder reading detects too much
connector pin A15-A30. time at high temperatures, make the user aware
of not driving with the fuel tank level always low.
F1A ENGINE
429
Base - May 2004

430
NOTES
Base - May 2004

2.4 Blinking Air pressure sensor on Decrease in power. Read measurable parameters with the The pressure sensor is integrated with the
intake manifold short- diagnosis instrument: if there is this temperature sensor.
Possible oscillation while
F1A ENGINE
circuited or circuit open. error, the value read on the control

driving with engine at full If the waste-gate valve is jammed shut, there may
unit will be fixed on 2000 mbar.
Or waste-gate valve load. be surging with the engine under load because:
malfunctioning. If the indicated value is fixed at 2000
- power limitation trips when accelerating under
mbar, check the wiring between the
load;
sensor and EDC connector A3 — A34.
- the turbocharging pressure drops;
If the wiring is sound:
- the engine goes back to normal operation and
Check that the waste-gate valve is not
the pressure increases;
jammed shut or open.
- limitation trips again;
- etc.
If the turbocharging pressure really is too high,
there is a risk of turbine over-revving with its
associated damage.
2.5 Off Ambient pressure sensor Possibly some black smoke at The sensor is integrated in the EDC Any painting on the engine/control unit may
short-circuited or circuit altitude, especially with EGR control unit and cannot be replaced on prevent the ambient pressure getting measured
open. (it is not excluded at its own. correctly.
altitude).
2.7 On Fuel motor pump relay coil Fuel motor pump always on Active diagnosis of the relay with the You hear the noise of the pump turning
short-circuited or circuit even with key OFF. diagnosis instrument. continuously, even with the key off.
open.
The battery discharges. Take out the relay 25837, located in
the contactor control unit (left-hand
Early deterioration of the
side of driver).
motor pump.
If the pump cuts out, replace the relay.
Or
If the pump does not cut out, check the
wiring between 87 of the relay and
battery positive.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY
NOTES
Print 603.93.281
The engine starts with If the motor pump fails to work, check
difficulty and fails to reach its the continuity of the coil between pin
top performance. A7 and A8 of the EDC connector.
In addition, check the wiring between the
EDC connector pin A7 and relay 86,
EDC connector pin A8 and relay 85.
2.8 Off Fuel filter heater relay Heater always on even with Active diagnosis of the relay with the 2.3 may get stored in memory since the fuel gets
defective. fuel temperature > 5°C. diagnosis instrument. too warm.
The battery discharges. Check continuity of the coil between
the EDC connector pin A32 and relay
Heater fails to come on even
pin A8.
with fuel temperature < 5°C.
In addition, check the wiring between
Filter may be clogged due to
the fuel paraffining with harsh
86, EDC connector pin A8 and relay
outdoor temperatures (<
85.
-15°C).
Check the continuity of the coil Starting may be difficult with very cold
between the EDC connector pin A32 temperatures.
and relay A8.
In addition, check the wiring between Engine starting may produce too much smoke.
pins A32 of the control unit and relay

86, control unit A8 and relay 85.
2.9 On Fan relay coil short- Increase in fuel consumption. Active diagnosis of the relay with the In active diagnosis, besides the relay activating,
circuited or circuit open. diagnosis instrument. you hear the fan’s electromagnetic clutch cutting
Engine cooling fan always on
in and out.
even with engine cold. Check coil continuity between EDC
connector pin A39 and relay A8.
In addition, check the wiring between
86, EDC connector pin A8 and relay
Or 85.
F1A ENGINE
431
Base - May 2004

432
NOTES
Base - May 2004

Engine overheating and Check coil continuity between EDC
accordingly possible power connector pin A39 and relay A8.
F1A ENGINE
limitation.
In addition, check the wiring between the
Engine cooling fan fails to EDC connector pin A39 and relay 86,
work. EDC connector pin A8 and relay 85.
3.1 Off Injector no. 1 unbalanced. Injector inefficient. Engine test, cylinder efficiency test.
The control unit has to modify the signal to
injector no. 1 (Cylinder Balancing) too far beyond
There may be irregular Check the wiring and connections
the normal value.
rotation and smoke. between the injector and the EDC
connector pin A12 and A40.
If the wiring is good, perform the
compression test with the diagnosis
instrument.
If the compression in cylinder no. 1 is
OK, replace the injector.
the normal value.
instrument.
the normal value.
instrument.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY
NOTES
Print 603.93.281
the normal value.
instrument.
3.5 Off Battery voltage too low (or Fast idling up to 1250 rpm Check the efficiency of the batteries The engine cuts out or fails to start if the battery
recognized as such by the (depending on the voltage and recharging circuit, the efficiency of voltage < 6.5V.
EDC control unit). detected) with pedal the earth points and that there are no
released. deposits or oxidation on the
connectors.
3.6 Off Pre-heating indicator lamp a) Pre-heating indicator light Perform active diagnosis of the Even at low ambient temperatures, the driver fails
short-circuited or always on. indicator light with the diagnosis to wait for pre-heating as no information is
defective. instrument. provided by the indicator light.
b) Pre-heating indicator light
always off. Check the wiring between the EDC * old code
connector pin B21 and the vehicle’s
** new code
panel B6* (A30**).
Check for power between pins B16*
(A14**) of the vehicle’s panel and
earth.
F1A ENGINE
433
Base - May 2004

434
NOTES
Base - May 2004

3.7 Off Glow plug relay Shorted to +Batt or circuit Check the wiring of the EDC
short-circuited or circuit open: the glow plugs do not connector pin B42 to find the shorting
F1A ENGINE
open. work, starting may be difficult to +Batt or to earth or the break in the
and smokiness on starting. circuit.
Shorted to earth: the glow Check the integrity of the pre-heating
plugs are always powered control unit.
(short life).
Check the 60A fuse connected
between the battery positive and the
pre-heating control unit connector pin
30.
Check the power supply is correct on
pin 86 of the pre-heating control unit
and on the EDC connector pin B42.
Check the earth connection of the
pre-heating control unit pin 31.
3.9 Off Glow plugs short-circuited Starting difficult with very Check the integrity of the single glow
or circuit open. rigid outdoor temperatures. plugs.
Smokiness on starting. Check the glow plug power supply
between the pre-heating control unit
connector pin G1 — G2 — G3 — G4 and
earth.
If all OK, change the pre-heating

control unit.
5.1 Blinking Electro-injector cylinder Drop in power made by the Check the wiring and connections
no. 1 shorted to +Batt. EDC control unit. between the injector and the EDC
connector pin A12 — A40.
or The engine runs on 2
cylinders. If the wiring is good, change the
injector.
shorted to earth or circuit Possibly 3.1.

open.
The engine runs on 3
cylinders.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY
NOTES
Print 603.93.281
injector.
open.
cylinders.
injector.
open.
cylinders.

injector.
open.
cylinders.
5.7 Blinking Power stage to supply the Possibly 3.1 — 3.4. Delete the fault memory and try again.
electro-injectors of
The engine runs on 2 If the error remains and only after
cylinders 1 and 4 (in control
cylinders excluding the injector 1 or 4 defect, call
unit) defective.
the Help Desk and follow their
instructions to replace the control unit
if necessary.
F1A ENGINE
435
Base - May 2004

436
NOTES
Base - May 2004

5.8 Blinking Power stage to supply the Possibly 3.2 — 3.3. Delete the fault memory and try again.
electro-injectors of
The engine runs on 2 If the error remains and only after
F1A ENGINE
cylinders 2 and 3 (in control

cylinders excluding the injector 2 or 3 defect, call
unit) defective.
the Help Desk and follow their
instructions to replace the control unit
if necessary.
6.1 Blinking Crankshaft sensor: no signal The engine will not start cold, Check the integrity of the sensor (R = If there is no crankshaft signal, the camshaft sensor
or implausible signal. it could start warm with approx. 850 Ohm). speed signal is used instead.
difficulty.
If the sensor is sound, check the wiring Power reduction (and noise reduction because
With the engine running, between the sensor and EDC the control unit cannot manage advance and
power reduction and connector pin A29 — A37. duration of injection and bases itself on a recovery
increased noise. map. Pre-injection is not implemented).
Check the sensor is fastened properly.
6.2 Blinking Camshaft sensor: no signal The engine will not start cold, Check the integrity of the sensor (R = If there is no camshaft signal, the flywheel sensor
or implausible signal. it could start warm with approx. 850 Ohm). timing signal is used instead.
difficulty.
If the sensor is sound, check the wiring
With the engine running, between the sensor and EDC
power reduction and connector pin A4 — A31.
increased noise.
Check the sensor is fastened properly.
False injections during
starting and smoke at the
exhaust.
6.4 Off The engine has If the over-revving occurred Data saved to memory, check the Make the driver aware about using the vehicle
over-revved (over 5500 when driven, the driver can duration and frequency of the correctly.
rpm), probably driven, detect no reaction (other over-revving.
than the indicator light
or Delete the fault memory.
blinking).
crankshaft sensor signal not
plausible (in this case, error
6.1 signalled).
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY
NOTES
Print 603.93.281
8.1 Blinking Pressure in rail too great. The engine cuts out, loud Check that the connector on the After a few times, the pressure relief valve might
noise before cutting out. pressure regulator is connected. remain open, in which case it has to be changed.
The electric command fails
to reach the pressure If it is connected, check the wiring
regulator. between the regulator and the EDC
8.1 Blinking Pressure in rail too great. The engine cuts out, loud Perform the high-pressure test with the After a few times, the pressure relief valve might
noise before cutting out. diagnosis instrument. If the outcome is remain jammed open, in which case it has to be
Pressure regulator
negative, replace the high-pressure changed.
mechanically jammed
pump — regulator assembly.
open.
8.1 Blinking Pressure in rail too low. The engine cuts out or fails Perform the high-pressure test with the
to start. diagnosis instrument. If the outcome is
Pressure regulator
negative, replace the high-pressure
mechanically jammed shut.
pump — regulator assembly.
8.1 Blinking Pressure in rail too low. The engine cuts out or fails Check the wiring between the
to start. regulator and EDC connector pin A9 —
Shorting to +Batt. on the
A20.
pressure regulator.
8.1 Blinking Pressure in rail too low. The engine cuts out or fails Perform the high-pressure test with the
to start. diagnosis instrument. If the outcome is

High-pressure pump
negative, replace the high-pressure
defective.
pump together with the regulator.
8.1 Blinking Injector mechanically The engine cuts out or fails Perform the cylinder efficiency test
jammed open. to start. with the diagnosis instrument. If the
outcome is negative, replace the
defective injector.
8.1 Blinking Pressure in rail too low. The engine cuts out or fails Check the high-pressure circuit and
to start. eliminate the leak (beware, there could
Major fuel leak from the
be a leak inside the head between the
high-pressure circuit.
high-pressure union and the injector).
F1A ENGINE
437
Base - May 2004

438
NOTES
Base - May 2004

8.1 Blinking Pressure in rail too low. The engine cuts out or fails Check the motor pump works
to start. properly, check for any clogging in the
Fuel supply problem in the
F1A ENGINE
filter and pre-filter, crushed or leaking

low-pressure circuit.
pipes, and check the fuel supply gear
pump works properly.
8.2 Blinking Rail pressure sensor short- The engine cuts out. Check the sensor is powered correctly.
circuited or circuit open.
If the power supply is correct (approx.
5V) change the sensor.
If it is greater than approx. 5V, check
the wiring between the sensor and the
EDC connector pin A33-A6.
8.3 Blinking Pressure regulator short- If shorted to +Batt., the Check the wiring between the pressure 8.1 — 8.2 may also be signalled.
circuited or circuit open. pressure in the rail drops too regulator and the EDC connector pin
much, the engine cuts out A9 — A20.
and fails to restart.
Or
If shorted to earth or the Check the wiring between the pressure 8.1 may also be signalled.
circuit is open, the pressure regulator and the EDC connector pin
in the rail rises above the A9 — A20.
maximum value and the
engine cuts out.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY
NOTES
Print 603.93.281
8.5 On EGR monitoring: incorrect EGR is turned off. Check that the EGR pneumatic valve is If there is a defect on the wiring of pin A8, the
implementation of EGR not jammed shut or open (or errors associated with all the devices connected
Emissions not conforming to
percentage calculated by intentionally tampered with). to this pin will be saved to memory.
legislation.
the control unit.
Check that the pipe between the
Poor performance and
solenoid valve and EGR pneumatic
smokiness at high engine
valve is not crushed, perforated or
speeds.
disconnected.
Check the EGR solenoid valve works
properly (active diagnosis with the
diagnostic instrument).
Using a multimeter, check the integrity
of the solenoid valve.
If the solenoid valve is sound, check the
wiring between the solenoid valve and
the EDC connector pin A25 — A8.
8.6 On EGR solenoid valve EGR doesn’t work or works Check the EGR solenoid valve works If there is a defect on the wiring of the EDC
short-circuited or circuit constantly. properly (active diagnosis with the connector pin A8, the errors associated with all
open. diagnostic instrument). the devices connected to this pin will be saved to
Emissions not conforming to
memory.
legislation. Using a multimeter, check the integrity
of the solenoid valve.

No reaction the driver can
detect. If the solenoid valve is sound, check the
wiring between the solenoid valve and
the EDC connector pin A25 — A8.
8.7 On Debimeter short-circuited Power reduction and EGR Check the integrity of the debimeter
or circuit open. function turned off. and the wiring between the debimeter
connector and the EDC connector pin
A17 — A18 — A26 — A28.
8.8 Off EGR air temperature No reaction the driver can Read measurable parameters with the
sensor short-circuited or perceive. diagnosis instrument: in the event of
circuit open. this trouble, the ambient temperature
read on the control unit will be fixed on
30°C.
Check the wiring between the
F1A ENGINE
debimeter and EDC connector pin A5

— A18.
439
Base - May 2004

440
NOTES
Base - May 2004

9.1 Blinking Defect inside the control The engine cuts out or fails Delete the fault memory. This may occur when the power supply to the
unit. to start. control unit is cut off without using the key.
If the error remains, call the Help Desk
F1A ENGINE
In some cases, it might not and follow their instructions to replace Perhaps no defect has been saved to memory, it
cut out, but go onto the the control unit if necessary. depends on the state of defectiveness of the
power reduction level. control unit.
9.2 On EEPROM defect in control The data are not saved to Delete the fault memory.
unit. memory when turning off
If the error remains, call the Help Desk
the engine.
and follow their instructions to replace
The fault memory is lost, it is the control unit if necessary.
only possible to read the
faults that are present but
not the intermittent ones.
Any idling speed set with the
Cruise Control commands is
not stored in memory.
9.3 Blinking Communication trouble The engine cuts out or fails Perform Immobilizer diagnosis and
with the immobilizer; to start. check the integrity of the CAN line.
short-circuiting or circuit
open on the CAN line.
9.4 On a) Main relay broken. a) The control unit is not Replace the main relay.
powered (the engine fails to
b) Main relay short-
start or cuts out).
circuited.
b) The control unit is
constantly powered and the
indicator light stays on even
with the key turned OFF (the
battery discharges).
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY
NOTES
Print 603.93.281
9.5 Off After Run broken off Fault memory and other Check the control unit power supply Investigate any incorrect use of the vehicle.
several times. working data are not wiring for any intermittent false
corrected saved in EEPROM. contacts.
EDC inhibits starting the If the wiring is good, replace the main
engine after a certain number relay.
of unsuccessful After Runs.
9.6 Blinking Failure of the internal test The engine fails to stop in the This could occur if the engine is turned
procedure that takes place set time when the +15 key is off but it continues to be driven
in the control unit every turned onto OFF. (vehicle moving with gear engaged).
time the engine stops.
Check the wiring between the key +15
and the control unit connector pin B20.
Delete the fault memory: if in normal
conditions of turning off the engine the
error signal persists, call the Help Desk
to have the control unit replaced if
necessary.
9.7 Blinking Internal defect of the Reduction in power (and Call the Help Desk and follow their Defects may be signalled for various sensors
control unit in the sensor noise because pre-injection instructions to replace the control unit powered by the control unit.
power supply circuit. is not implemented). if necessary.
Irregular engine operation

due to sensors not being
powered correctly.
F1A ENGINE
441
Base - May 2004

442
NOTES
Base - May 2004

9.8 Blinking Internal problem with the The engine fails to start or Delete the fault memory: if the error
control unit software or an starts only occasionally. remains, call the Help Desk and follow
F1A ENGINE
attempt to tamper with the their instructions to reprogram or

data-set. replace the control unit if necessary.
9.9 Blinking Internal problem with the Possible short breaks in Delete the fault memory: if the error If this error is signalled together with other
control unit software injection because the control remains, call the Help Desk and follow defects, resolve this problem first as it could be
(operating system). unit resets irregularly while their instructions to replace the control the cause of the others.
the engine is running. unit if necessary.
Other defects may be
signalled.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
1st Section
DTC-FMI error codes
with EDC central unit
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY

0D 02 EGR - AIR MASS BELOW EGR off. EGR Check, if the EGR
Print 603.93.281
SUPPLY TOO LOWER Emissions not monitoring: pneumatic valve is
HIGH LIMIT compliant with incorrect EGR not locked in Open
valve is not
squashed or holed
or detached 3)
Check the EGR
solenoid
valve-functionality
4) Check the
solenoid
valve-integrity by
means of a
multimeter 5)
Check the wiring
harness between
the solenoid valve
and the EDC
connector.
11 01 ENGINE 1 - EXCEEDED Positive power Check wiring and Possible smoke
BOOST UPPER reduction and connections. in exhaust

PRESSURE LIMIT smoke in Possibly replace during
SENSOR exhaust. sensor. Check in acceleration.
”measurable Replace if
parameter” required.
environment that
atmospheric
pressure sensor and
turbo charger air
pressure sensor
values are similar
when engine is off.
11 02 ENGINE 1 - BELOW Positive power Check wiring and Possible smoke
BOOST LOWER reduction and connections. in exhaust
PRESSURE LIMIT smoke in Replace sensor if during
SENSOR exhaust. required. acceleration.
F1A ENGINE
Replace if
required.
445
Base - May 2004

446
11 08 ENGINE 1 - SIGNAL Positive power Faulty sensor. Check wiring and
Base - May 2004

BOOST NOT reduction and connections.
PRESSURE PLAUSIBLEsmoke in Replace sensor if
SENSOR exhaust. required.
F1A ENGINE
12 01 ENGINE 2 - EXCEEDED Problematic Flat battery, Check battery state Replace

BATTERY UPPER cranking. interrupted with diagnostic tool alternator,
VOLTAGE LIMIT wiring. (measurable regulator or
parameters). Check battery.
wiring and
connections.
12 02 ENGINE 2 - BELOW Engine does not Faulty battery, Check with Replace battery,
BATTERY LOWER start. Possible faulty alternator, diagnostic tool. alternator or
VOLTAGE LIMIT power faulty ECU. ECU if required.
reduction.
13 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL Brake signal The two switch Check wiring and
BRAKE PEDAL NOT plausibility, states are connections.
SIGNAL ERROR PLAUSIBLE possibly no different. Replace sensor if
brake lights, required.
Cruise Control /
PTO not
working.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

14 01 ENGINE 1 - EXCEEDED Problematic Faulty sensor, Check wiring and 1- Measure type: 1- Connector 1- Min. value:
Print 603.93.281
COOLANT UPPER cold cranking. interrupted connections. Resistance (KOhm) Not connected; 0,11 KOhm;
2- Connector
Not connected;
Sensor Pin: 2 KOhm;
Key +15 OFF;
3- Connector
Not connected;
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A58
0,1 Ohm;
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 1
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A41
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 2
14 02 ENGINE 1 - BELOW Problematic Faulty sensor, Check wiring and 1- Measure type: 1- Connector 1- Min. value:
COOLANT LOWER cold cranking. interrupted connections. Resistance (KOhm) Not connected; 0,11 KOhm;
2- Connector
Not connected;
Sensor Pin: 2 KOhm;

Key +15 OFF;
3- Connector
Not connected;
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A58
0,1 Ohm;
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 1
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A41
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 2
F1A ENGINE
447
Base - May 2004

448
14 08 ENGINE 1 - SIGNAL Problematic Faulty sensor, Check wiring and 1- Measure type: 1- Connector 1- Min. value:
Base - May 2004

COOLANT NOT cold cranking. interrupted connections. Resistance (KOhm) Not connected; 0,11 KOhm;
TEMPERATURE PLAUSIBLE Possible power wiring. Replace sensor if Measure point 1: Key +15 OFF; Max. value: 48,3
F1A ENGINE
2- Connector
Not connected;
Sensor Pin: 2 KOhm;
Key +15 OFF;
3- Connector
Not connected;
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A58
0,1 Ohm;
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 1
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A41
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 2
15 01 ENGINE 1 - EXCEEDED Faulty coolant Replace sensor. 1- Measure type: 1- Connector 1- Min. value:
COOLANT UPPER temperature Resistance (KOhm) Not connected; 0,11 KOhm;
TEMPERATURE LIMIT sensor. Measure point 1: Key +15 OFF; Max. value: 48,3
SENSOR (TEST) Sensor Pin: 1 KOhm; Typical
2- Connector
Not connected;
Sensor Pin: 2 KOhm;
Key +15 OFF;
3- Connector

Not connected;
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A58
0,1 Ohm;
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 1
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A41
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 2
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

1E 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL Clutch switch: Gear shift Check wiring and The anomaly
Print 603.93.281
CLUTCH NOT signal either not detected connections. caused by
SIGNAL PLAUSIBLE plausible or not without pressing Replace sensor if incomplete
SUSPECT present. Cruise brake pedal. required. clutch operation
Control / PTO if everything is
not working or OK.
engine revs up
to maximum
speed when
clutch pedal is
pressed and
Cruise control /
PTO is on.
20 01 EGR - EGR EXCEEDED EGR solenoid 1) Check integrity of EGR either not
POWER ST. UPPER valve solenoid valve with working or
SHORT TO LIMIT short-circuit to multimeter. always working.
BATT. battery. 2) Check wiring Emissions not
driver.
21 02 EGR - SHORT BELOW Solenoid valve 1) Check integrity of EGR either not
CIRCUIT TO LOWER short-circuit to solenoid valve with working or
GROUND ON LIMIT ground. multimeter. always working.
EGR VALVE 2) Check wiring Emissions not

driver.
22 04 EGR - OPEN NO EGR solenoid 1) Check integrity of EGR either not
CIRCUIT ON SIGNAL valve solenoid valve with working or
EGR VALVE short-circuit or multimeter. always working.
driver.
F1A ENGINE
449
Base - May 2004

450
22 08 EGR - OPEN SIGNAL EGR solenoid 1) Check integrity of EGR either not
Base - May 2004

CIRCUIT ON NOT valve solenoid valve with working or
EGR VALVE PLAUSIBLE short-circuit or multimeter. always working.
F1A ENGINE

driver.
24 01 ENGINE SPEED - EXCEEDED Possible No signal, open Check wiring and Flywheel sensor
CAMSHAFT UPPER problematic circuit. connections. timing signal
SENSOR LIMIT cold cranking. adopted if
camshaft signal is
not correct.
24 02 ENGINE SPEED - BELOW Possible No signal, open Check correct Flywheel sensor
CAMSHAFT LOWER problematic circuit, faulty assembly of sensor timing signal
SENSOR LIMIT cold cranking. sensor. and phonic wheel, adopted if
check engine timing. camshaft signal is
not correct.
25 01 ENGINE SPEED - EXCEEDED Problematic Faulty sensor. Check wiring and Camshaft
CRANKSHAFT UPPER cold cranking, connections. sensor speed
(possible noise
due to missed
pre-injection).
25 02 ENGINE SPEED - BELOW Problematic Faulty sensor. Check wiring and Camshaft
CRANKSHAFT LOWER cold cranking, connections. sensor speed

(possible noise
due to missed
pre-injection).
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

26 01 ENGINE SPEED - EXCEEDED Possible power Incorrect Check wiring, Longer cranking
Print 603.93.281
FAULT UPPER reduction. camshaft phonic connections and time.
BETWEEN LIMIT wheel assembly. sensor, check that
FLYWHEEL phonic wheel is
SENSOR AND fitted correctly.
CAMSHAFT
28 01 ENGINE 1 - FUEL EXCEEDED Possible power Short-circuit to Check wiring and 1- Measure type: 1- Connector 1- Typical Value:
TEMPERATURE UPPER reduction. positive, connections. Resistance (Ohm) Not connected; 1 Ohm;
SENSOR LIMIT excessively low Replace sensor if Measure point 1: Key +15 OFF;
2- Typical Value:
Not connected;
Key +15 OFF;
0,1 Ohm;
2- Measure type:
3- Connector
Resistance (Ohm)
Not connected;
Measure point 1:
Key +15 OFF;
ECU Pin: A52
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 1
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A51
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 2
F1A ENGINE
451
Base - May 2004

452
28 02 ENGINE 1 - FUEL BELOW Possible power Short-circuit to Check wiring and 1- Measure type: 1- Connector 1- Typical Value:
Base - May 2004

TEMPERATURE LOWER reduction. ground, connections. Resistance (Ohm) Not connected; 1 Ohm;
SENSOR LIMIT excessively high Replace sensor if Measure point 1: Key +15 OFF;
2- Typical Value:
F1A ENGINE

Not connected;
Key +15 OFF;
0,1 Ohm;
2- Measure type:
3- Connector
Resistance (Ohm)
Not connected;
Measure point 1:
Key +15 OFF;
ECU Pin: A52
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 1
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A51
Measure point 2:
Sensor Pin: 2
29 01 ENGINE 1 - FAN EXCEEDED Fan relay not Fan relay Check wiring and Possible
RELAY UPPER working. short-circuit to connections. increased fuel
LIMIT positive. Replace relay if consumption.
overheating and
power
reduction.
29 02 ENGINE 1 - FAN BELOW Fan relay not Fan relay Check wiring and Possible
RELAY LOWER working. short-circuit to connections. increased fuel

LIMIT ground. Replace relay if consumption.
overheating and
power
reduction.
29 04 ENGINE 1 - FAN NO Fan relay not Check wiring and Possible
RELAY SIGNAL working. connections. increased fuel
Replace relay if consumption.
overheating and
power
reduction.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

29 08 ENGINE 1 - FAN SIGNAL Fan relay not Check wiring and Possible
Print 603.93.281
RELAY NOT working. connections. increased fuel
PLAUSIBLE Replace relay if consumption.
overheating and
power
reduction.
2A 01 ENGINE 1 - EXCEEDED Fuel filter Filter heater Check wiring and Battery goes flat.
PRE-HEATING UPPER pre-heater relay relay connections.
FILTER positive - Heater required.
always on also at
fuel
temperature >
5° C.
2A 02 ENGINE 1 - BELOW Fuel filter Filter heater Check wiring and Battery goes flat.
PRE-HEATING LOWER pre-heater relay relay connections.
FILTER ground. required.
2A 04 ENGINE 1 - NO Fuel filter Check wiring and Battery goes flat.
PRE-HEATING SIGNAL pre-heater relay connections.
RELAY FUEL not working. Replace relay if
FILTER required.
2A 08 ENGINE 1 - SIGNAL Fuel filter Check wiring and Battery goes flat.
PRE-HEATING NOT pre-heater relay connections.

RELAY FUEL PLAUSIBLE not working. Replace relay if
FILTER required.
2F 01 ENGINE 2 - EXCEEDED Possible Short-circuit to Check wiring and
GLOW PLUGS UPPER problematic positive, glow connections.
RELAY LIMIT cold cranking. plugs always on Replace relay if
also with ECU required.
off, possible
battery
deployment.
2F 02 ENGINE 2 - BELOW Short-circuit to Check wiring and
GLOW PLUGS LOWER ground, glow connections.
RELAY LIMIT plugs always on. Replace relay if
required.
F1A ENGINE
453
Base - May 2004

454
2F 04 ENGINE 2 - NO Possible Faulty wiring. Check wiring and Faulty diagnostic
Base - May 2004

GLOW PLUGS SIGNAL problematic connections. light.
RELAY cold cranking. Replace relay if
required.
F1A ENGINE
2F 08 ENGINE 2 - SIGNAL Possible Faulty relay, Check wiring and Possible

GLOW PLUGS NOT problematic wiring connections. increased fuel
RELAY PLAUSIBLE cold cranking. interrupted. Replace relay if consumption.
overheating and
power
reduction.
30 01 ENGINE 2 - EXCEEDED Warning light Short-circuit to Check wiring and The driver does
GLOW PLUG UPPER always off. positive. connections. not wait
W/LIGHT LIMIT Problematic Replace sensor if preheating even
signal is enabled.
Preheating
works, but with
cold start-up no
indication is
available that
tells you when
to start the
motor because
the light is
always turned
on.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

30 02 ENGINE 2 - BELOW Warning light Short-circuit to Check wiring and The driver does
Print 603.93.281
GLOW PLUG LOWER always off. ground. connections. not wait
W/LIGHT LIMIT Problematic Replace sensor if preheating even
signal is enabled.
Preheating
works, but with
cold start-up no
indication is
available that
tells you when
to start the
motor because
the light is
always turned
on.
30 04 ENGINE 2 - NO Warning light Check wiring and Warning light off
GLOW PLUG SIGNAL always off. connections. during
W/LIGHT Problematic Replace sensor if pre-heating.
warning light
always on.
30 08 ENGINE 2 - SIGNAL Warning light Check wiring and Warning light off
GLOW PLUG NOT always off. connections. during
W/LIGHT PLAUSIBLE Problematic Replace sensor if pre-heating.
warning light
always on.
31 01 ENGINE 2 - EXCEEDED Possible Short-circuit to Check wiring and Relay unit
GLOW PLUGS UPPER problematic positive. connections. Check always on also
LIMIT cold cranking. electrical system with ECU off,
between relay and possible battery
glow plugs. deployment.
F1A ENGINE
455
Base - May 2004

456
32 01 ELECTRONIC EXCEEDED Faulty ECU.
Switch key on/off
Base - May 2004

CONTROL UPPER and wait for a few
F1A ENGINE

call the Help Desk
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
33 01 ELECTRONIC EXCEEDED The engine Faulty ECU Switch key on/off
CONTROL UPPER switching EEPROM. and wait for a few
intermittent ECU.
ones can be
read, the idling
speed, which
can be
eventually set
by the Cruise
Control
commands,
remains not
memorized.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

33 02 ELECTRONIC BELOW The engine Faulty ECU Switch key on/off
Print 603.93.281
CONTROL LOWER switching EEPROM. and wait for a few
intermittent ECU.
ones can be
read, the idling
speed, which
can be
eventually set
by the Cruise
Control
commands,
remains not
memorized.
33 04 ELECTRONIC NO The engine Faulty ECU Switch key on/off
CONTROL SIGNAL switching EEPROM. and wait for a few
UNIT - off-data are not seconds, clear

intermittent ECU.
ones can be
read, the idling
speed, which
can be
eventually set
by the Cruise
Control
commands,
remains not
memorized.
F1A ENGINE
457
Base - May 2004

458
33 08 ELECTRONIC SIGNAL The engine Faulty ECU Switch key on/off
Base - May 2004

CONTROL NOT switching EEPROM. and wait for a few
UNIT - PLAUSIBLE off-data are not seconds, clear
F1A ENGINE

intermittent ECU.
ones can be
read, the idling
speed, which
can be
eventually set
by the Cruise
Control
commands,
remains not
memorized.
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

Print 603.93.281
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
39 01 ENGINE 1 - AIR EXCEEDED Problematic Check wiring and Measure type: Connector Not Typical Value: Air temperature
TEMPERATURE UPPER cranking, smoke, connections. Resistance (KOhm) connected; Key 2,5 KOhm; sensor and
SENSOR LIMIT problematic Replace sensor if Measure point 1: +15 OFF; built-in pressure
acceleration. required. Sensor Pin: 1 sensor. The
Measure point 2: sensor is fitted
engines with
EGR.
F1A ENGINE
459
Base - May 2004

460
39 02 ENGINE 1 - AIR BELOW Problematic Short-circuit to Check wiring and Measure type: Connector Not Typical Value: Air temperature
Base - May 2004

TEMPERATURE LOWER cranking, smoke, ground, connections. Resistance (KOhm) connected; Key 2,5 KOhm; sensor and
SENSOR LIMIT problematic excessively high Replace sensor if Measure point 1: +15 OFF; built-in pressure
acceleration. temperature is required. Sensor Pin: 1 sensor. The
F1A ENGINE
detected. Measure point 2: sensor is fitted

engines with
EGR.
3A 02 ELECTRONIC BELOW The engine fails Communication Check integrity of Measure type: Connector Typical Value:
CONTROL LOWER to start with CAN Line, run Resistance (Ohm) Connected; Key 60 Ohm Ohm;
UNIT - LIMIT Immobilizer Immobilizer ECU Measure point 1: +15 OFF;
IMMOBILISER ECU problems diagnostics and wait Diagnostic socket.
on CAN Line. for indications Pin: 21 Measure
provided. point 2: Diagnostic
socket. Pin: 22
3C 01 INJECTOR - EXCEEDED Engine not Injector wiring Check wiring and Only two
reduction.
3C 02 INJECTOR - BELOW Engine not Short-circuit to Check wiring and Only two
possible power
reduction.
3C 08 INJECTOR - SIGNAL Engine not Injector Check wiring and Only two

reduction.
3D 04 INJECTOR - NO Engine not Injector wiring Check wiring and Only two
reduction.
3E 01 INJECTOR - EXCEEDED Engine not Injector wiring Check wiring and Only two
reduction.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

3E 02 INJECTOR - BELOW Engine not Short-circuit to Check wiring and Only two
Print 603.93.281
possible power
reduction.
3E 08 INJECTOR - SIGNAL Engine not Injector Check wiring and Only two
reduction.
3F 04 INJECTOR - NO Engine not Injector wiring Check wiring and Only two
reduction.
INJECTOR A UPPER problem. memory. If the error
concern the
Help Desk for
instructions on how
to replace the ECU.

INJECTOR A LOWER problem. memory. If the error
concern the
Help Desk for
instructions on how
to replace the ECU.
F1A ENGINE
461
Base - May 2004

462
Base - May 2004

INJECTOR A SIGNAL problem. memory. If the error
F1A ENGINE
concern the
Help Desk for
instructions on how
to replace the ECU.
INJECTOR A NOT problem. memory. If the error
concern the
Help Desk for
instructions on how
to replace the ECU.
INJECTOR B UPPER problem. memory. If the error
concern the
Help Desk for
instructions on how
to replace the ECU.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

Print 603.93.281
INJECTOR B LOWER problem. memory. If the error
concern the
Help Desk for
instructions on how
to replace the ECU.
INJECTOR B SIGNAL problem. memory. If the error
concern the
Help Desk for
instructions on how
to replace the ECU.
INJECTOR B NOT problem. memory. If the error
concern the
Help Desk for

instructions on how
to replace the ECU.
reduction.
F1A ENGINE
463
Base - May 2004

464
Base - May 2004

INJECTOR 1 UPPER Resistance (Ohm) Not connected; 0.1 Ohm;
2- Min. value: 0.5
F1A ENGINE
ECU Pin: A47

Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
3- Connector
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
Injector Pin: 1
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A16
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 1
reduction.
INJECTOR 1 SIGNAL Resistance (Ohm) Not connected; 0.1 Ohm;

2- Min. value: 0.5
ECU Pin: A47
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
3- Connector
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
Injector Pin: 1
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A16
Measure point 2:
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
Injector Pin: 1
DAILY

Print 603.93.281
reduction.
INJECTOR 1 NOT Resistance (Ohm) Not connected; 0.1 Ohm;
2- Min. value: 0.5
ECU Pin: A47
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
3- Connector
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
Injector Pin: 1
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A16
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 1
reduction.
reduction.
F1A ENGINE
465
Base - May 2004

466
Base - May 2004

INJECTOR 2 UPPER Resistance (Ohm) Not connected; 0,1 Ohm;
2- Typical Value:
F1A ENGINE
ECU Pin: A17

Measure point 2:
Not connected;
Key +15 OFF;
Ohm; Max.
2- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A13
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
Injector Pin: 1
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
reduction.

2- Typical Value:
ECU Pin: A17
Measure point 2:
Not connected;
Key +15 OFF;
Ohm; Max.
2- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A13
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
Injector Pin: 1
Measure point 2:
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
Injector Pin: 2
DAILY

Print 603.93.281
INJECTOR 2 NOT Resistance (Ohm) Not connected; 0,1 Ohm;
2- Typical Value:
ECU Pin: A17
Measure point 2:
Not connected;
Key +15 OFF;
Ohm; Max.
2- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A13
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
Injector Pin: 1
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
PLAUSIBLEproperly, properly. Replace injector if running.
reduction.
reduction.
reduction.
reduction.
F1A ENGINE
467
Base - May 2004

468
Base - May 2004

F1A ENGINE
reduction.
reduction.
2- Typical Value:
ECU Pin: A31
Measure point 2:
Not connected;
Key +15 OFF;
Ohm; Max.
2- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A1
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 1
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
Injector Pin: 1
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
reduction.
reduction.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

Print 603.93.281
reduction.
reduction.
2- Typical Value:
ECU Pin: A46
Measure point 2:
Not connected;
Key +15 OFF;
Ohm; Max.
2- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
ECU Pin: A1
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 1
3- Measure type:
Resistance (Ohm)
Measure point 1:
Injector Pin: 1
Measure point 2:
Injector Pin: 2
4E 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL Cruise control / Press SET+ / Check correct Replace wiring
CRUISE NOT PTO not SET- and operation of the and connections
CONTROL PLAUSIBLE working. RESUME/ OFF switch by reading if state does not
SWITCH UNIT at the same state parameters. change when
time. Cruise Control
buttons are
pressed.
F1A ENGINE
469
Base - May 2004

470
50 01 ELECTRONIC EXCEEDED Engine does not Main relay Check wiring and
Base - May 2004

CONTROL UPPER start, ECU not interrupted or connections.
F1A ENGINE
powered and
EDC off also at
key-on.
50 02 ELECTRONIC BELOW Engine does not Main relay Check wiring and
CONTROL LOWER start, ECU not interrupted or connections.
powered and
EDC off also at
key-on.
51 01 VEHICLE - EXCEEDED Incorrect PTO Voltage Check wiring and
MULTIPOSITIO UPPER operation. exceeding max. connections.
N SELECTOR / LIMIT threshold, Replace sensor if
PTO short-circuit to required.
positive.
51 02 VEHICLE - BELOW Incorrect PTO Voltage under Check wiring and
MULTIPOSITIO LOWER operation. min. threshold, connections.
N SELECTOR / LIMIT short-circuit to Replace sensor if
PTO ground. required.
51 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL Incorrect PTO Faulty device. Check wiring and
MULTIPOSITIO NOT operation. connections.
N SELECTOR / PLAUSIBLE Replace sensor if
PTO required.
52 04 FUEL PRESSURE NO Engine off. Faulty MPROP. Check wiring and Measure type: Connector Not Min. value: 3.2 High noise.
- PRESSURE SIGNAL connections. Resistance (Ohm) connected; Key Ohm; Max.
MPROP Measure point 1: +15 OFF; value: 3.6 Ohm;
REGULATOR ECU Pin: A49 Typical Value:
ECU Pin: A19
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

52 08 FUEL PRESSURE SIGNAL Check wiring and Measure type: Connector Not Min. value: 3.2
Print 603.93.281
- PRESSURE NOT connections. Resistance (Ohm) connected; Key Ohm; Max.
MPROP PLAUSIBLE Replace ECU if Measure point 1: +15 OFF; value: 3.6 Ohm;
REGULATOR required. ECU Pin: A49 Typical Value:
ECU Pin: A19
- PRESSURE UPPER battery, faulty connections.
REGULATOR required.
ERROR (SHORT
CIRCUIT TO
POSITIVE)
- PRESSURE UPPER ground. Faulty connections.
REGULATOR required.
ERROR (SHORT
CIRCUIT TO
NEGATIVE)

for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
5A 01 ELECTRONIC EXCEEDED Wrong ECU Switch key on/off
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
F1A ENGINE
471
Base - May 2004

472
5A 02 ELECTRONIC BELOW Wrong ECU Switch key on/off
Base - May 2004

F1A ENGINE

for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
5B 01 ELECTRONIC EXCEEDED Wrong ECU Switch key on/off
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
5E 01 ENGINE 1 - FUEL EXCEEDED Fuel pump on Faulty relay, Turn key-on: pump
PUMP RELAY UPPER always when short-circuit to must run for
LIMIT engine is off. positive in approximately 10
wiring. seconds (it should
hum). Check pump
relay if pump
remains on. Check
wiring if all checks
are OK.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

5E 02 ENGINE 1 - FUEL BELOW Fuel pump not Faulty relay, Turn key-on: pump
Print 603.93.281
PUMP RELAY LOWER working. short-circuit to must run for
LIMIT ground in wiring. approximately 10
seconds (it should
hum). Check the
pump relay,
protection fuse and
wiring if this does
not occur.
5E 04 ENGINE 1 - FUEL NO Fuel pump not Faulty relay, Check wiring and
PUMP RELAY SIGNAL working. wiring connections.
interrupted. Replace relay if
required.
5E 08 ENGINE 1 - FUEL SIGNAL Fuel pump not Faulty relay, Check wiring and
PUMP RELAY NOT working. wiring connections.
PLAUSIBLE interrupted. Replace relay if
required.
5F 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED Short-circuit to Check wiring and Check DTC 103
- RAIL PRESSURE UPPER positive. Faulty connections. error.
SENSOR OR LIMIT sensor. Rail Replace sensor if
SIGNAL ERROR pressure not required.
regular.
5F 02 FUEL PRESSURE BELOW Short-circuit to Check wiring and
- RAIL PRESSURE LOWER ground, faulty connections.
SENSOR OR LIMIT sensor. Replace sensor if

SIGNAL ERROR required.
60 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED Faulty rail Replace sensor.
- RAIL PRESSURE UPPER pressure sensor.
SENSOR LIMIT
OFFSET
F1A ENGINE
473
Base - May 2004

474
60 02 FUEL PRESSURE BELOW Faulty rail Replace sensor.
Base - May 2004

- RAIL PRESSURE LOWER pressure sensor.
SENSOR LIMIT
OFFSET
F1A ENGINE
62 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED High pressure Check fuel feed Fuel

- FAULT ON UPPER circuit fuel system. management
THE FUEL LIMIT leakage. and pressure
CONTROL OF
THE RAIL
(POSITIVE
DEVIATION)
62 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED Injector jammed Check hydraulic and Fuel
- FAULT ON UPPER in fuel passage mechanical management
THE FUEL LIMIT open position. efficiency of and pressure
DRUCK injectors. failure in rail.
CONTROL OF
THE RAIL
(POSITIVE
DEVIATION)
CONTROL OF
THE RAIL
(POSITIVE
DEVIATION)
62 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED Faulty high Check efficiency of Fuel
- FAULT ON UPPER pressure pump. high pressure pump. management
THE FUEL LIMIT and pressure
CONTROL OF
THE RAIL
(POSITIVE
DEVIATION)
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

Print 603.93.281
CONTROL OF
THE RAIL
(NEGATIVE
DEVIATION)
64 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED High pressure Check high pressure Fuel
- RAIL PRESSURE UPPER circuit fuel system. Replace management
ERROR: TOO LIMIT leakage. high pressure pump and pressure
LOW if required. failure in rail.
65 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED MPROP Check MPROP
- RAIL PRESSURE UPPER regulator regulator, replace if
ERROR: TOO LIMIT jammed. required.
HIGH
66 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED Negative vehicle High pressure Check fuel feed
- ERROR ON UPPER reaction with circuit fuel system, replace high
THE RAIL LIMIT smoke in leakage. pressure pump if
PRESSURE exhaust during required. Faulty fuel
(EXCESSIVE acceleration. feed system (fuel
DUTY CYCLE) pump and filter
jammed).
67 01 FUEL PRESSURE EXCEEDED Engine off. MPROP Check MPROP Replace
- ERROR ON UPPER regulator regulator, replace if pressure relief

THE RAIL LIMIT jammed. required. valve.
PRESSURE
(EXCESSIVE)
F1A ENGINE
475
Base - May 2004

476
68 02 ELECTRONIC BELOW Switch key on/off
Base - May 2004

CONTROL LOWER and wait for a few
F1A ENGINE

call the Help Desk
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

69 01 ELECTRONIC EXCEEDED Anomalous Sensor power Switch key on/off Possible fault
Print 603.93.281
ECU.
69 02 ELECTRONIC BELOW Anomalous Sensor power Switch key on/off Possible fault
ECU.
6A 01 ELECTRONIC EXCEEDED Anomalous Sensor power Switch key on/off Possible fault

ECU.
F1A ENGINE
477
Base - May 2004

478
6A 02 ELECTRONIC BELOW Anomalous Sensor power Switch key on/off Possible fault
Base - May 2004

F1A ENGINE

ECU.
6B 01 ELECTRONIC EXCEEDED Anomalous Sensor power Switch key on/off Possible fault
ECU.
6B 02 ELECTRONIC BELOW Anomalous Sensor power Switch key on/off Possible fault
ECU.
6C 01 VEHICLE - EDC EXCEEDED Warning light Short-circuit to Check correct Warning light
LAMP UPPER not working. positive. operation of should come on
key-on. Check
wiring and
connections if
this does not
occur.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

6C 02 VEHICLE - EDC BELOW Warning light Short-circuit to Check correct Warning light
Print 603.93.281
LAMP LOWER not working. ground. operation of should come on
LIMIT warning light using for approximately
”Active diagnostic” 5 seconds at
procedure. key-on. Check
wiring and
connections if this
does not occur.
6C 04 VEHICLE - EDC NO Warning light Open circuit, Check correct Warning light
LAMP SIGNAL not working. bulb operation of should come on
disconnected. warning light using for approximately
”Active diagnostic” 5 seconds at
procedure. key-on. Check
wiring and
connections if this
does not occur.
6C 08 VEHICLE - EDC SIGNAL Warning light Wiring Check wiring and Warning light
LAMP NOT not working. problems. connections. should come on
PLAUSIBLE Replace sensor if for approximately
required. 5 seconds at
key-on. Check
wiring and
connections if this
does not occur.
6D 08 ENGINE 2 - SIGNAL Check wiring and Key 15 off during

INTERNAL ECU NOT connections. initialisation.
FAULT PLAUSIBLE
(PLAUSIBILTY
ERROR +15)
6E 08 ELECTRONIC SIGNAL Wrong ECU Switch key on/off
UNIT - PLAUSIBLE Probable seconds, clear failure
INTERNAL ECU electromagnetic memory. If the error
FAULT interference. persists, call the Help
Faulty ECU. Desk for instructions
on how to replace
the ECU.
F1A ENGINE
479
Base - May 2004

480
75 01 VEHICLE - EXCEEDED Speed of 170 Check correct Encourage
Base - May 2004

VEHICLE SPEED UPPER km/h exceeded. calibration of driver to use the
SENSOR / LIMIT speedometer. vehicle
SIGNAL correctly.
F1A ENGINE
75 04 VEHICLE - NO Interrupted Check wiring and

VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL wiring between connections
SENSOR / vehicle speed between vehicle
SIGNAL sensor and speed sensor and
instrument instrument panel.
panel.
75 04 VEHICLE - NO Wiring Check wiring and Intervention
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL interrupted connections required if
SENSOR / between between instrument instrument
SIGNAL instrument panel and EDC panel indicates
panel and EDC ECU. vehicle speed.
ECU.
75 04 VEHICLE - NO Vehicle speed Check correct
VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL sensor assembly and
SENSOR / disconnected or efficiency of vehicle
75 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL Vehicle speed Check correct
VEHICLE SPEED NOT sensor assembly and
SENSOR / PLAUSIBLE disconnected or efficiency of vehicle
75 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL Vehicle speed Wrong Check correct
VEHICLE SPEED NOT on instrument speedometer calibration of
SENSOR / PLAUSIBLE panel does not setting. speedometer.

SIGNAL increase
sensibly.
77 01 VEHICLE - EXCEEDED Wrong vehicle Wrong Check correct
VEHICLE SPEED UPPER speed speedometer calibration of
SIGNAL
77 02 VEHICLE - BELOW Wrong vehicle Wrong Check correct
VEHICLE SPEED LOWER speed speedometer calibration of
SIGNAL
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

77 08 VEHICLE - SIGNAL Wrong vehicle Wrong Check correct
Print 603.93.281
VEHICLE SPEED NOT speed speedometer calibration of
SENSOR / PLAUSIBLE indication. setting. speedometer.
SIGNAL
for instructions on
how to replace the
ECU.
F1A ENGINE
481
Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

2nd Section
SYMPTOMS
The second section describes possible trouble that is not identifiable by the control unit and is
SPECIFIC TO THE COMMON RAIL SYSTEM AND THE NEW HW ENGINE
HYDRAULIC
ELECTRIC
MECHANICAL
other than conventional defects
(the aim is to guide the diagnostic approach to a new system, not to restate basic concepts that are
considered to have already been acquired by the repairer).
The possible trouble already identified by the control unit, described in the 1st Section, is not repeated here (e.g., the
! engine cuts out as a result of defect 8.1).
If there are errors stored in the control unit memory, refer to the 1st troubleshooting section.
- The engine cuts out or fails to start.
- The engine fails to start (considerable exhaust smoke).
- The engine starts with difficulty.
- The engine fails to reach its top performance.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ENGINE
TESTS OR RECOMMENDED
DAILY
SYMPTOM SYSTEM REACTION POSSIBLE CAUSE NOTES

ACTION
Print 603.93.281
The engine cuts out or The EDC indicator light fails to EDC control unit not Check fuse No. 23 (25A).
fails to start. come on. powered: fuse blown.
If the fuse has blown, find and eliminate
The starter motor turns but the cause of the overload before
the engine fails to start. replacing it.
The engine cuts out or The EDC indicator light fails to EDC control unit not Check the wiring upstream from the
fails to start. come on. powered: the main relay is not main relay to find any break in the
powered. circuit.
The starter motor turns but
the engine fails to start.
The engine cuts out or The EDC control unit is Air intake in the supply circuit Check the integrity of the pipe and
fails to start. powered, the starter motor between the tank and motor check that the quick couplings on the
turns but the engine fails to start. pump. CILC (fuel level indicator assembly) and
on the motor pump inlet are fitted
The rail pressure does NOT
properly.
reach 200 bar.
Replace any non-conforming parts.
The engine cuts out or The EDC control unit is Pre-filter clogged. Inspect and replace the pre-filter if any The pre-filter is transparent and any debris is
fails to start. powered, the starter motor debris is found inside. easy to see.
turns but the engine fails to start.
reach 200 bar.
The engine cuts out or The EDC control unit is Low-pressure pipe between Inspect the pipe and replace the
fails to start. powered, the starter motor motor pump and relevant section.
turns but the engine fails to high-pressure pump inlet
start. choked or with large leak.
reach 200 bar.
The engine cuts out or The EDC control unit is Fuel filter greatly clogged Replace the filter. If the filter clogging indicator system has not
fails to start. powered, the starter motor (within certain limits it only worked, check the relevant electric circuit and
turns but the engine fails to involves difficult starting). restore its operation.
start.
reach 200 bar.
F1A ENGINE
485
Base - May 2004

486
ACTION
Base - May 2004

The engine cuts out or The EDC control unit is Rail pressure relief valve If fuel has come out of the valve
fails to start. powered, the starter motor jammed open or lost its exhaust pipe while driving with the
turns but the engine fails to setting (continually discharges starter motor, change the valve.
F1A ENGINE
start. towards the tank).

reach 200 bar.
The engine cuts out or The EDC control unit is Mechanical defect in the gear After checking there is fuel in the tank
fails to start. powered, the starter motor pump, pressure regulator and and excluding every other possibility
turns but the engine fails to the pumping elements of the (see 1st Troubleshooting Section),
start. high-pressure pump. replace the high-pressure pump
together with the pressure regulator.
reach 200 bar.
The engine cuts out or The starter motor turns but EGR pneumatic valve jammed Check and replace the defective
fails to start. the engine fails to start. open and air throttle valve components.
jammed shut.
The rail pressure during
starting regularly rises above
200 bar.
The engine starts with The EDC control unit is The fuel motor pump is not Check that no electric cable has After starting, with a load request the engine
difficulty. powered, the starter motor powered (no buzzing is heard disconnected from the motor pump. goes into recovery (if due to insufficient fuel
turns but the engine starts only with the key ON for 9 sec.). reaching the high-pressure pump error 8.1 is
Check the wiring between the control
after insisting a long time. detected, see 1st Section).
relay and the motor pump to identify
Very slow increase in rail any break in the circuit.

pressure.
The engine starts with The rail pressure during Injector mechanically jammed Perform the Engine Test (cylinder Depending on the extent of the jamming, the
difficulty. starting regularly rises above shut. efficiency) to identify the defective control unit might detect a lack of balance
200 bar. injector and replace it. between the cylinders (See error 3.1 — 3.2 —
3.3 — 3.4, 1st Section).
The engine starts with The rail pressure during EGR pneumatic valve jammed Check which component is defective
difficulty. starting regularly rises above open or air throttle valve and replace it.
200 bar. mechanically jammed shut.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY

ACTION
Print 603.93.281
The engine starts with The rail pressure during starting Air intake in the supply circuit Check the integrity of the pipe and
difficulty. does not reach 200 bar between the tank and motor check that the quick couplings on the
immediately. pump. CILC (fuel level indicator assembly) and
on the motor pump inlet are fitted
properly.
Replace any non-conforming parts.
The engine starts with The rail pressure during starting The motor pump is not Check the wiring between the control
difficulty. does not reach 200 bar powered (no buzzing is heard relay and the motor pump.
immediately. with the key ON for 9 sec.).
The engine starts with The rail pressure during cranking Low-pressure pipe choked or Inspect the pipe and replace the
difficulty. does not reach 200 bar broken or leaking. relevant section.
immediately.
The engine starts with The rail pressure during cranking Fuel filter very clogged. Replace the filter.
difficulty. does not reach 200 bar
If the filter clogging indicator system has
immediately.
not worked, check the relevant circuit
and restore its operation.
The engine fails to reach (with no derating implemented Throttle pedal potentiometer Read parameters, check the signal If there are errors saved in the control unit
top performance by the control unit) does not go to the end of its reaches 100%. memory, refer to the 1st Troubleshooting
travel. Section.
If it does not, check the physical
integrity of the potentiometer and
replace it if necessary.
The engine fails to reach (with no derating implemented EGR pneumatic valve jammed Check which is the defective
top performance by the control unit) open or throttle valve jammed component and replace it.
shut.
The engine fails to reach (with no derating implemented Injector jammed shut. Find the defective injector (cylinder
top performance by the control unit) efficiency test with the diagnostic
instrument) and replace it.
F1A ENGINE
487
Base - May 2004

488
ACTION
Base - May 2004

The engine fails to reach (with no derating Fuel filter greatly clogged. Change the filter.
top performance implemented by the control
If the filter clogging indicator system has
unit)
F1A ENGINE
not worked, check the relevant circuit

and restore its operation.
The engine fails to reach (with no derating The motor pump is not Check the wiring between the control
top performance implemented by the control powered (no buzzing is heard relay and the motor pump.
unit) with the key ON for 9 sec.).
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
DAILY F1C ENGINE 489
F1C engine
Page
ENGINE VIEWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
ENGINE IDENTIFICATION CODE . . . . . . . . . . 496
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
ASSEMBLY DATA — CLEARANCES . . . . . . . . . . 505
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
EXPERIMENTAL TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
OVERHAULING ENGINE F1A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
CYLINDER BLOCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
- Checking head mating surface on cylinder block 537
CRANKSHAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
- Measuring main journals and crank pins . . . . . . 537
- Checking crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
- Replacing timing control gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
ENGINE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
- Assembling main bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
- Measuring main journal assembly clearance . . . 540
- Checking crankshaft end float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
- Assembling rear seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
ENGINE FLYWHEEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
CONNECTING ROD — PISTON ASSEMBLY . . . 543
- Pistons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
- Measuring piston diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
- Piston pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
- Conditions for correct pin-piston coupling . . . . 545
- Piston rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

490 F1C ENGINE DAILY
Page Page
- Connecting rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

- Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
- Bushing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
- Checking cam lift and pin alignment . . . . . . . . . 558
- Checking connecting rods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
- Assembling overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
- Checking torsion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
AUXILIARY ORGAN CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . 559
- Checking bending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
- Cylinder head refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
- Assembling connecting rod-piston assembly . . . 547
TIMING SYSTEM CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
- Checking for connecting rod — piston distortion 548
- Replacement of alternator free wheel . . . . . . . 567
- Assembling piston rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
- Timing speed sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
- Assembling connecting rod — piston assemblies
in cylinder barrels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 - Engine speed sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
- Measuring crankpin assembly clearance . . . . . . 548 LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
- Checking piston protrusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
CYLINDER HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550 OIL PUMP/DEPRESSOR UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550 - Oil pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
- Disassembling valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550 - Characteristic data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
- Checking cylinder head seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 - Vacuum pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
- Checking cylinder head mating surface . . . . . . . 551 - Oil pressure adjusting valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
VALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551 - Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
- Removing deposits, refacing and checking valves 551 - Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
- Checking clearance between valve stem and - Oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
valve guide and centring valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
- Heat exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
VALVE GUIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
- Replacing valve guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
- Boring valve guides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
- Oil vapour recirculation (Blow-by) . . . . . . . . . . 579
VALVE SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
- Regrinding - replacing valve seats . . . . . . . . . . . 553
COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
VALVE SPRINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
ROCKER ARMS — TAPPETS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
- Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
- Electromagnetic pulley . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
ASSEMBLING CYLINDER HEADS . . . . . . . . . . . 555
- Water pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
- Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
- Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
- Overhead removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
TURBOCHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
TIMING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
- Turbocharger type
- Camshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 MITSUBISHI TD 4 HL-13T - 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Page Page
- Checking glow plug control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . 591

REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
- Checking activation of air-conditioning system . 591
- Pressure relief valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
- Checking fuel pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
- Checking and adjusting pressure relief valve . . . 584
- Checking diesel warming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
- Changing the pressure relief valve . . . . . . . . . . 584
- Checking cylinder position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
- GARRET GT 2256 T variable
geometry turbosupercharger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 - Checking pilot and main injection timing . . . . . 592
- General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 - Checking injection pressure closed cycle . . . . . 592
- Operation at low engine rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 - Fuel supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
- Operation at high engine rpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585 - Correcting flow rate according
to water temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
- Proportional solenoid valve controlling
turbocharger actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586 - Correcting flow rate to avoid noise,
smoke or overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
- Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
- De-rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
- Injection timing electronic test . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
- Checking and adjusting the actuator . . . . . . . . . 587
- Speed governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
FUEL SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
- Engine starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
HIGH-PRESSURE ELECTRONIC INJECTION
SYSTEM (EDC 16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 - Warm starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
- General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 - Cold starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
SYSTEM OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 - Run up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
- Self-diagnosis — BLINK CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 - After run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
- Immobilizer recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 - Cut-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
- Checking fuel temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 - Cylinder balancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
- Checking engine coolant temperature . . . . . . . 591 - Synchronization search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
- Checking quantity of fuel injected . . . . . . . . . . . 591 OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
- Checking idling adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
- Fuel cut-off in release phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 - Fuel pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
- Checking cylinder balancing on idling . . . . . . . . 591 - Fuel pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
- Checking regular engine rotation - Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
(anti-sawing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
- Fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
- Checking smokiness at exhaust on acceleration 591
- Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
(E.G.R. if present) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 - High-pressure pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
- Checking top speed limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 - High-pressure pump internal structure . . . . . . . 600
- Checking regular rotation on acceleration . . . . 591 - Working principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Page
- Pressure control valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604

MECHANICAL SUPPLY PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
ELECTRO-INJECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
- Electronic control unit EDC 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
- Glow plug electronic control unit . . . . . . . . . . . 606
- Glow plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
SENSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
- Engine speed sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
- Camshaft timing sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
- Air temperature and pressure sensor . . . . . . . . 607
- Fuel pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
- Atmospheric pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
- Throttle pedal position sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
- Clutch pedal position sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
- Brake pedal position sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
- Vehicle speed sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
ACTUATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
- PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) controls . . . . 607
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ENGINE VIEWS
Figure 1
87237
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 2
Figure 4
88049
LEFT-HAND SIDE VIEW
Figure 3
88051
FRONT VIEW
88050
REAR VIEW
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 5
88052
RIGHT-HAND SIDE VIEW

A. Turbocharger with pressure relief valve (Waste-Gate, ENGINE 136 HP)
Figure 6
88053
TOP VIEW
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

ENGINE IDENTIFICATION CODE
F 1 C E 0 4 8 1 A * C +
Exhaust emiss. level
Homologation power
Duty No.
Supply / injection
Cylinder No.
Engine cycle — cylinder position
Engine
Engine series evolution 0= 4-stroke,

vertical
Engine series
4 = 4 cylind.
6 = 6 cylind.
8 = DI. TCA
1 = Truck
2 = Bus
4 = M.T. vehicles
and tractors
6 = Marine
9 = Army
0481 A = 100 kW - (136 HP) rpm - 340 Nm / 34.6 rpm

0481 B = 122 kW - (166 HP) rpm - 380 Nm / 38.7 rpm
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 7
SELF-ADHESIVE LABEL
Engine variant
— 9 digits
Engine serial number
— 7 digits
GAN — 9 characters
Electro-injector class
1 or 2 or 3

— 9 digits
88683
Figure 8
CRANKCASE MARKING
88684
EXAMPLE
A = IVECO trademark IVECO
B = IVECO name of engine variant ** F1CE0481A * A001
C = Engine serial number 1359862
D = 1st digit, main journal no. 1 (engine front)
E = Main bearing selection diameters 12345
F = Barrel selection diameters 1234
G = 1st digit, cylinder no. 1 (engine front)
(**) Data obtainable from “XZ” engine ordering number information
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 9
87238
LONGITUDINAL SECTION
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 10
88236
CROSS SECTION
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

CHARACTERISTIC CURVES
Figure 11
rpm
88237
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES OF ENGINE F1CE0481 A (136 HP)
Max OUTPUT 100 kW 136 HP at 3500 rpm
Max TORQUE 340 Nm 34.6 kgm at 1400 ÷ 2800 rpm
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 12
rpm
88238
CHARACTERISTIC CURVES OF ENGINE F!C E0481 B (166 HP)
Max OUTPUT 122 kW 166 HP at 3500 rpm
Max TORQUE 380 Nm 38.7 kgm at 1250 ÷ 3070 rpm
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Type F1CE0481 A F1CE0481 B

Feeding Turbocharged with intercooler
Injection Direct
N. of cylinders 4 on-line
∅
Diameter mm 95.8
Stroke mm 104
Max. power KW 100 122

(HP) (136) (166)
rpm 3500 3500
Torque at 1000 rpm Nm 240 250

Max. power Nm 340 380
(kgm) (34.5) (38.7)
rpm 1400 ÷ 2800 1250 ÷ 3070
no load
rpm 850 ± 25
Maximum engine
speed, no load
rpm 4200 ± 50
Pressure at T.D.C.
*bar 20 ÷ 26
pressure at T.D.C.
*bar 16
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
A
VALVE TIMING

B

D
For timing check
mm -
X
mm -
X
Running
mm -
X
mm -
High pressure electronic fuel feed system BOSCH EDC16

Composed of CP3.2 high-pressure pump, electro-injectors,
FEED
temperature sensors
Pump arrangement -
X
BOSCH injector nozzle type
Injection order
1- 3 - 4 - 2
- injection pump
- engine
bar
Release pressure bar 1350
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

SUPERCHARGING With intercooler

MITSUBISHI
TD 04 - HL - 13T-6 GARRETT GT 2260 V
Turbocharger type: variable geometry
with Waste-Gate
Turbocharger shaft radial clearance 0.396 ÷ 0.602 0.086 ÷ 0.117

Turbocharger shaft axial clearance 0.034 ÷ 0.106 0.030 ÷ 0.083
Minimum opening stroke of pressure relief valve mm 1 -
Maximum opening stroke of pressure relief valve mm
5 -
Pressure corresponding to the minimum stroke bar 1.21 ± 0.0026 -
Pressure corresponding to the maximum stroke bar 1.45 ± 0.0039 -
Actuator setting:
- low pressure 0 mmHg valve fully open
- low pressure 180 mmHg valve stroke
mm - 2.5
- low pressure 500 mmHg valve stroke - 10.5
mm - 11 ÷ 12.4
- valve fully shut valve stroke mm
Oil pressure with engine hot
(100 ± 5 °C):
bar
at idling speed bar 0,1
at maximum speed bar 5,0
by centrifugal pump, thermostat for adjustment, coolant
COOLING temperature, fan with electromagnetic coupling, radiator,
heat exchanger
Water pump control: by belt
Thermostat: N. I.
starts to open: 79 ± 2 ºC
fully open: 94 ± 2 ºC
Urania Daily OIL REPLENISHMENT
Urania Turbo LD 5 Total capacity at 1st filling
liters 7.6
kg 6.79
replacements:
- engine sump
liters 6.6
kg 5.81
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ASSEMBLY DATA — CLEARANCES

∅1 Cylinder liners:
∅1 95.802 ÷ 95.822
Cylinder liners: -
L outside diameter ∅ -
∅2 length L -
Cylinder liners —
crankcase seats -
(interference)
Outside diameter ∅2 -
∅3
Cylinder liners:
X (protrusion from bottom -
of crankcase)
inside diameter ∅3 -
Pistons:
∅1 MAHLE
supplied as spares type
X measurement X 58
∅2 seat for pin ∅2 36.003 ÷ 36.009
Piston — cylinder liners 0.197 ÷ 0.231
X
Piston protrusion
from crankcase X 0.3 ÷ 0.6
∅3 Piston gudgeon pin ∅3 35.990 ÷ 35.996
Piston gudgeon pin — pin seat 0.07 ÷ 0.019
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004


Piston type -
X1* 2.200 ÷ 2.230
X1
X2
X3 X3 2.540 ÷ 2.560
Anelli elastici S 1* 2.068 ÷ 2.097
S2 S3 2.470 ÷ 2.490
S3 *
measured at 1.5 mm from
outer ∅
2 0.060 ÷ 0.100
3 0.050 ÷ 0.090
Piston rings 0.4
X1 Piston ring end gap in cylinder

liners
X2
X1 0.20 ÷ 0.35
X3
X2 0.60 ÷ 0.80
X3 0.30 ÷ 0.60
Ø1 39.460 ÷ 39.490
∅2 Big end bearing housing

Ø2 67.833 ÷ 67.848
Small end bush diameter

∅4 outside ∅4 39.570 ÷ 39.595
∅3 inside ∅3 36.010 ÷ 36.020

S supplied as spare parts S
superior S 1.883 ÷ 1.892
inferior S 1.885 ÷ 1.891
Piston rings 0.254 - 0.508
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


X
Measurement X 125
Maximum error
on alignment of
connecting rod axes = 0.09
Main journals ∅1
No. 1-2-3-4 76.182 ÷ 76.208
∅1 ∅2 83.182 ÷ 83.208
No. 5
Crankpins ∅2 64.015 ÷ 64.038
Main bearing shells
S1* 2.165 ÷ 2.174
- superior S2* 1.883 ÷ 1.892
- inferior 1.885 ÷ 1.891
Main bearing housings ∅ 3
∅3 No. 1-2-3-4 80.588 ÷ 80.614
No. 5 87.588 ÷ 87.614
Bearing shells -
Bearing shells —
crankpins 0.035 ÷ 0.083
Main journal
for shoulder X1 32.500 ÷ 32.550
X 1
Main bearing housing

for shoulder X2 27.240 ÷ 27.290
X 2
X3
Half thrust washers X3
32.310 ÷ 32.460
Crankshaft shoulder
0.040 ÷ 0.240
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004


∅ 1

cylinder heads ∅1 9.980 ÷ 10.000
∅ 2
∅2 6.023 ÷ 6.038
Valve guide
∅3 10.028 ÷ 10.039
∅ 3
Valve guides and seats on head

0.028 ÷ 0.059
(interference)
Valve guide 0.05 - 0.10 - 0.25
∅ 4 Valves:
∅4 5.985 ÷ 6.000
α 60° ±7.5’
∅4 5.975 ÷ 5.990
α α 60° ±7.5’
Seat on head for valve seat:
∅1 34.490 ÷ 34.515
∅ 1
∅1 34.490 ÷ 34.515

∅ 2 seats; angle of valve seats on
cylinder
y head:
∅2 34 590 ÷ 34.610
34.590 34 610
α 59.5° ±5’
α ∅2 34.590 ÷ 34.610
α 59.5° ±5’
X 0.375 ÷ 0.525
X Recessing X 0.375 ÷ 0.525
0.075 - 0.12
Between valve
seat and head
0.075 - 0.12
Valve seats -
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


Valve spring height:
free spring H 54
H under a load of:
H1
H 2 N243 ± 12 H1 45
N533 ± 24 H2 35

X
∅ Seats for tappets on

cylinder head normal ∅ 12.016 ÷ 12.034
Normal diameter tappets 11.988 ÷ 12.000

∅

Camshaft pin seats in
cylinder overhead
1⇒7
∅1 48.988 ÷ 49.012
∅ ∅ ∅ ∅2 46 988 ÷ 47.012
46.988 47 012
∅3 35.988 ÷ 36.012
∅ 2
Camshaft supporting pins:
∅1 48.925 ÷ 48.950
∅2 46 925 ÷ 46.950
46.925 46 950
∅1 ∅2 ∅3
∅3 35.925 ÷ 35.950
Supporting pins and seats 0.032 ÷ 0.087
Useful cam height
H H
3.622
H
4.328
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
99317915 Set of six box-type wrenches (14-17-19 mm)
Rotary telescopic stand for overhauling assemblies

99322205 (capacity 700 daN, torque 120 daN/m)
99340059 Extractor for camshaft pulley
99340060 High-pressure pump toothed pulley extractor
99342153 Tool to remove crankshaft front gasket
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99346258 Keying device for mounting crankshaft front gasket
99346259 Keying device for mounting crankshaft rear gasket
99358026 Wrench for alternator pulley (free wheel) removal/refitting
99360186 Guide for flexible belt
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
99360187 Retaining tool for hydraulic power steering control shaft
99360190 Damper pulley retaining tool
99360614 Tool (2) for camshaft timing
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99360615 Tool for crankshaft timing
99367121 Manual pump to measure pressure and vacuum
99370415 Dial-gauge base for various measurements (to be used with

99395603)
99389817 Dynamometric wrench (60 ÷ 320 Nm) with 3/4” coupling
99389818 Dynamometric wrench (150-800 Nm) with 3/4” square coupling
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
99389819 Torque wrench (0-10 Nm) with square 1/4” connection
99389829 9x12 coupling torque wrench (5-60 Nm)
Milling cutter to regrind injector seat

99394038 (8140.63 engine excluded)
99395216 connection
99395603 Dial gauge (0-5 mm)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99395687 Bore meter (50 — 178 mm)
Belt tension control device (frequency from 10.0 bis 600 Hz)
99395849
Centring ring for timing gear cover

99396039
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

EXPERIMENTAL TOOLS
This section shows the working drawings for the experimental tools (S.P.) used in overhauling the engine described in this section,
which may be made by the repair shops.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

MOTORI F1A - F1C
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

MOTORI F1A - F1C
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

MOTORI F1A - F1C
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

MOTORI F1A - F1C
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

MOTORI F1A - F1C
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

MOTORI F1A - F1C
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TIGHTENING TORQUE
TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
M15x1.5 L 193 fastening screw for cylinder head inside
First stage: pre-tightening 130 13
Second stage: angle 90º
Third stage: angle 90º
M12x1.5 L 165 fastening screw for cylinder head side
First stage: pre-tightening 65 6.5
Second stage: angle 90º
Third stage: angle 60º
M8x1.25 L 117/58 fastening screw for side with chain compartment, cylinder head 25 2.5
R 1/2”bevel threaded cap with socket head 25 2.5
R 3/8” bevel threaded cap with socket head 17 1.7
R 1/4” bevel threaded cap with socket head 9 0.9
M26x1.5 threaded screw tap 50 5
Screw with flange M6x1 for camshaft rear cover fastening 10 1
Screw with flange M6x1 for camshaft shoulder plate fastening 10 1
Socket head screw with flange M8x1.25 L 30/40/77/100 for over-head fastening 25 2.5
M14x1.5 L 10 threaded screw tap 25 2.5
M6x1 socket head screw for timing system control cover 10 1
M12x1.5 L 125 inner fastening screw for lower cylinder block
First stage: pre-tightening 50 ± 5 5 ± 0.5
Second stage: angle 60º ± 2.5º
Third stage: angle 60º ± 2.5º
M8x1.25 L 77.5/40 outer fastening screw for lower cylinder block 26 2.6
Socket head screw with flange M11x1.25 for connecting rod cap fastening
Second stage: angle 70°
Socket head screw with flange M12x1.25 for engine flywheel fastening
Second stage: angle 90°
Socket cylinder head screw for phonic wheel fastening on drive shaft 15 1.5
Connection M10x1 for piston cooling nozzle 25 2.5
Bevel threaded cap with socket head R 3/8”x10 oil circuit 17 1.7
Socket head screw with flange M18x1.5 for drive shaft damper pulley fastening 350 35
Bevel cap R 1/8 x 8 7 0.7
Water draining plug M14x1.5 L10 25 2.5
Pipe union on block for oil return from turbocharger G 3/8” x 12 50 5
Suction rose M6x1 fastening screw 10 1
Socket head nut with flange M8x1.25 for depressor — oil pump unit support fastening 25 2.5
Oil pump — depressor unit control pin 110 11
Threaded cap M26x1.5 50 5
Socket head screw with flange M8x1.5 L35 for oil sump retaining frame fastening 25 2.5
Threaded screw tap with O-ring M22x1.5 L10 50 ±10 5 ±1
Socket head screw with flange M8x1.25 L60 for depressor - oil pump unit fastening 25 2.5
Socket head screw with flange M8x1.25 L50 for depressor - oil pump unit fastening 25 2.5
Flanged screw M8x1.25 L20/30 for camshaft cover fastening 25 2.5
Flanged screw M6x1 L20 for blow-by unit fastening 10 1
M14x1.5 L10 cap 25 2.5
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
Socket head screw with flange M8x1.25 L40 for suction manifold fastening 30 3
Flanged nut M8x1.25 for exhaust manifold fastening 25 2.5
Socket cylinder head screw M8x1.25 L65 for Poli-V belt automatic backstand 25 2.5
Flanged screw M10x1.25 L22 for Poli-V belt take-up pulley fastening 40 4
Flanged head M12x1.75 L30 for camshaft gear fastening 80 8
Timing chain tightener fastener M22x1.5 50 5
Timing chain mobile skid fastener 40 4
Socket cylinder head screw M8x1.25x30 for fixed skid fastening 25 2.5
Socket cylinder head screw M6x1 L16/20 for skid fastening 10 1
Socket cylinder head screw M12x1.5 for water temperature/pressure sensor fastening 30 3
Socket cylinder head screw M6x1.5 for air temperature/pressure sensor fastening 10 1
Socket cylinder head screw M6x1 for engine rev sensor fastening 10 1
Socket head screw M6x1 for phase sensor fastening 10 1
High-pressure injection system
Flanged nut M8x1.25 for high pressure pump support fastening 25 2.5
Hydraulic accumulator fastening screw M8x1.25 L50 28 2.8
High pressure pump fastening screw M8x1.25 L58 25 2.5
Screw M8x1.25 for fastening of fuel delivery pipe anchoring bracket 25 2.5
Pipe union for fuel delivery pipes to rail and electric injectors:
- M14x1.5 19 ± 2 1.9 ± 0.2
- M12x1.5 25 ± 2 2.5 ± 0.2
Socket cylinder head screw for fastening of electric injector retaining bracket 28 2.8
Flanged nut for anchoring bracket support fastening 25 2.5
Pin fastener M12x1.25 for high pressure pump 110 11
Flanged screw M6x1 for low pressure fuel pipe fastening 10 1
Flanges screw M8x1.25 for pipe support bracket fastening 40 4
Filler neck M12x1.5 for adjustable pipe union 25 2.5
Filler neck M16x1.5 for adjustable pipe union 40 4
Pipe union for multi-way filler fastening to high pressure pump M12x1.5 L24 25 2.5
Nut M8x1.25 for turbocharger fastening 25 2.5
Flanged screw M8x1.25 for turbocharger output pipe fastening 25 2.5
Pipe union M14x1.5 or M12x1.5 for oil delivery pipe to turbocharger 35 3.5
Pipe union M22x1.5 for oil return pipe from turbocharger 45 4.5
Flanged screw for fastening of oil return pipe from turbocharger 10 1
Pipe union M14x1.5 for fastening of oil delivery pipe to turbocharger 35 3.5
Screw M8x1.25 for air inlet bracket fastening 28 2.8
Screw M8x1.25 for air inlet bracket fastening 28 2.8
Socket cylinder head screw M6x1 for V-clamp closing ring 8 0.8
Flanged screw M6x1 for oil inlet pipe fastening 10 1
Pre-warming plug M8x1 8 ÷ 11 0.8 ÷ 1.1
Screw M8x1.25 for electric injector retaining bracket fastening 28 2.8
Oil filter cartridge M22x1.5 25 2.5
Socket cylinder head screw M8x1.25 for water inlet pipe fastening 25 2.5
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
Pipe union M24x1.5 for oil filter cartridge 30 3
Flanged screw M8x1.25 for heat exchanger inner element fastening 25 2.5
Socket cylinder head screw for water pump fastening:
- M10x1.5 50 5
- M8x1.25 25 2.5
Flanged screw M8x1.25 for rear cover fastening to cylinder head 25 2.5
Flanged screw M8x1.25 for coolant delivery pipe fastening 25 2.5
Flanged nut M8x1.25 for coolant delivery pipe support bracket fastening 25 2.5
Pipe union M10x1x10 for vapour vent fastening 12 1.2
Flanged screw M8x1.25 for thermostat fastening 25 2.5
Flanged nut M6x1 for electro-magnetic joint fastening 10 1
Ring nut M30x1.5 for electro-magnetic joint 150 15
Flanged screw M8x1.25 for air conditioner compressor fastening 25 2.5
Flanged screw M8x1.25 L50 for air conditioner compressor support fastening 25 2.5
Socket cylinder head screw M8x1.25 for fastening of air conditioner compressor control belt
25 2.5
idler
Socket cylinder head screw M10x1.5 for alternator fastening 50 5
Flanged screw M8x1.25 for hydraulic power steering pump fastening 25 2.5
Flanged screws M8x1.25 for power take off cover fastening 25 25
Flanged screws M8x1.25 for handling hook fastening 25 2.5
Flanged screws M10x1.25 for engine support fastening 50 5
Depressor pipe union M14x1.5 35 3.5
Oil level sensor M12x1.25 25 2.5
Thermometric transmitter/switch M16x1.5 (conical) 25 2.5
Oil pressure switch M14x1.5 40 4
* On the threading apply LOCTITE 577
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

OVERHAULING ENGINE F1C

540110 DISASSEMBLING THE ENGINE Figure 15
AT THE BENCH
Figure 13
88241
Press the springs (3) in the direction shown by the arrow and
disconnect the fittings of the pipe (1) recovering fuel from the
88239 electro-injectors (2).
If the following parts have not already been removed, do so
now:
Figure 16
- top soundproofing cover;
- rail guard;
- engine wire, by disconnecting its electrical connections
from: thermostat temperature sensor, phase sensor,
engine rev sensor, rail pressure sensor, air
pressure/temperature sensor of suction manifold.
To be able to fit the brackets onto the crankcase to secure
the engine to the stand for overhauling, it is necessary to
remove the left and right engine mounts (3) and disconnect
the oil pipe (2) from the turbocharger (1) and from the
crankcase.
NOTE Block the turbocharger air/exhaust gas inlets and

outlets to prevent foreign bodies getting inside. 88242
Disconnect the fuel pipes (2) from the electro-injectors (3)

and from the hydraulic accumulator (1) (rail).
Figure 14
Figure 17
88240 88243
Fit the brackets 99361041 (3) to the crankcase and use these Take out the screws (2) and the brackets (3) fixing the
to secure the engine to the rotary stand 99322205 (4). Drain electro-injectors (1) to the cylinder overhead.
the oil from the engine by removing the plug from the oil
sump.
If fitted, remove the fan (1) from the electro-magnetic joint
(2).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 18 Figure 21
88244 88247
Using tool 99342153 (1) extract the electro-injectors (2) Use tool 99360076 (1) to remove the oil filter (2) from the
from the overhead (3). heat exchanger (3).
Figure 19 Figure 22
88245 88248
Remove the fastening screw (3) of the pipe retaining bracket Remove the screws (1 and 3) and the heat exchanger (4)
(2). Disconnect the pipe (2) from the hydraulic accumulator with the relevant gasket and pipe (2).
(1) and the high pressure pump (4).
Figure 20 Figure 23
1 4
2 5
88246 88249
Remove the screws (1) and the hydraulic accumulator (2) Remove the screw (6) and the low pressure pipes (5) from
from the overhead device (3). the bracket (4).
Slacken the pipe unions (1 and 3) and remove the low
pressure pipes (5) from the high pressure pump (2).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 24 Figure 27
88253
88250
Remove the screw (5) and take off the air temperature and
Remove the fastening screws and take off the high pressure pressure sensor (6).
pump (1) and the hydraulic power steering pump (2).
Remove the screws (1) and take off the suction manifold (2)
Figure 25 with the relevant gasket.
Using wrench SP.2275 (3), remove the glow plugs (4).
Figure 28
88251
If fitted, use the suitable tool to remove the elastic belt (2)
from the pulleys (1 and 5).
Remove the screws (4) and take off the climate control
system compressor (3) from the support.
88254
Slacken the pipe unions (1 and 6) and take off the oil pipe (2).
NOTE The elastic belt (2) must be changed at every Remove the screws (11 and 13) and the bracket (12).
removal. Remove the screw (9) fastening the pipe (10) to the inlet (8).
Remove the screws (7) and take off the inlet (8) from the
turbocharger (5).
Figure 26 Remove the nuts (4) and take off the turbocharger (5) with
the relevant gasket from the exhaust manifold (3).
88252
Remove the screws (4) and take off the support (3).
Remove the screw (1) and the fixed backstand (2).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 29 Figure 32
88255 88330
Remove the nuts (2), the spacers (1) and take off the exhaust Using the specific wrench on the automatic tightener (2),
manifold (3) with the relevant gasket from the cylinder head. slacken the tension of the belt (1) and remove it.
Figure 30
Figure 33
88256
Remove the screw (4) and take off the pipe (5) of the oil level
dip rod.
Slacken the clamp (3), remove the screw (1) and the pipe (2) 88258
from the cover (6). Take out the screw (2) and remove the automatic tightener
(1).
Figure 31
Figure 34
88257
Remove the screws (3) and the cover (4). Take off the snap
ring (2). Pull out the centrifugal filter (1).
88259
NOTE The centrifugal filter (1) and the seal ring of the Remove the screw (2), the bolt (4) and pull the alternator (3)
cover (4) must be changed at every removal. out of the support (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 35 Figure 38
88260
88263
Remove the screws (1) and take off the support (2) from the
cylinder block. Remove the hub (5) and the pulley (4).
Cut the clamp (→), remove the fastening screw (1) of the
wire clamp, the nuts (2) and take off the electric magnet (3)
from the water pump (6).
Figure 36
Figure 39
88261
Use the suitable wrench to remove the oil level sensor (1).
88264
Remove the fastening screw and the rev sensor (2).
Stop the rotation of the engine flywheel (2) by means of tool
Figure 37 99360306 (1).
Figure 40
88262
Stop the rotation of the electro-magnetic joint (1) and

remove the nut (2).
88265
Remove the screw (2) and the damper pulley (1).

NOTE Slacken the nut (2) anticlockwise because its
threading is left-handed.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 41 Figure 44
88266
88268
Remove the screws (1) and the distribution cover (2).
Remove the hydraulic chain tightener: top (1) and lower (2).
Remove the pin (4) and disassemble the mobile skid: lower
(5) and top (3).
NOTE Tool 99340059 (4) is used to remove the seal ring
(3) from the cover (2) when the engine is installed
on the vehicle.
Figure 45
Figure 42
88269
88267
Remove the screw (3), the washer (2) and the gear (1).
Remove the nut (1) and the phase sensor (2). Remove the screw (7), the washer (6), the gear (5) and the
Remove the nuts (3) and the cover (4). chain (4).
Figure 43
Figure 46
88271
88270
Remove the screws (3) and disassemble the depressor/oil
pump unit (2). Remove the cap (4), the screws (2 and 3) and the top fixed
Remove the connection key (1). skid (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 47 Figure 50
88275
88272 Remove the gear (1) and the chain (3) from the high pressure
Remove the screws (2) and the side fixed skid (1). pump control shaft (2).
Remove the screws (4) and the lower fixed skid (3).
Figure 48 Figure 51
90311 88276
Stop the rotation of the high pressure pump control shaft (1) Remove the high pressure pump control shaft (3).
by inserting the suitable wrench inside it. Remove the nuts (2) and the support (1).
Figure 49 Figure 52
88274 88277
Remove the screw (3) and the stem with the drive gear (2) Stop the rotation of the hydraulic power steering pump
from the high pressure pump control shaft (1). control shaft (2) by inserting tool 99360187 (3) in the shaft
and fastening the tool on the support (1) by means of the
screws (4).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 53 Figure 56
88278 88281
Remove the screw (2) and the gear (1) from the hydraulic Remove the hydraulic tappets (1) with the rocker arms.
power steering control shaft (3). Remove the gasket (2).
Figure 54 Figure 57
88279 88282
Remove the hydraulic power steering control shaft (3). Take out the screws (1) and remove the cylinder head (2).
Remove the nuts (2) and the support (1).
Figure 58
Figure 55
88283
Remove the cylinder head gasket (1).

88280
NOTE Check the protrusion of the pistons (2) as
Remove the screws (1) and take off the over-head (2) from described under the relevant heading to check the
the cylinder head (3). possibility of facing the crankcase if it has deformed.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 59
NOTE On the same side of the connecting rod and its
associated cap, indicate the number of the cylinder
from which the connecting rod has been removed.
Keep the bearing shells in their respective housings
since, if they are used, they will need to be fitted in
the position found during removal.
88284
Remove the screws (2) and take off the oil sump (1) with its
gasket and frame (3).
Figure 60 Figure 62
88285 88286
Remove the screws (2) and the suction rose (1). Block rotation of the flywheel (1) with tool 99360306 (4).
Take out the screws (2) and remove the engine flywheel (1).
Take out the guard (3).
Figure 61 Figure 63
88738 88287
Take out the screws (2) and remove the connecting rod caps Apply tool 99340060 (2) to the rear O-ring (1) and extract
(3). it from the crankcase.
Extract the pistons (1) from the top of the crankcase.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 64 Figure 67
88288
Remove the screws (2) and take off the oil sump (1) with its
gasket and frame (3).
Figure 65 75290
Take out the couplings (1) and remove the oil jets (2).
NOTE On completing engine removal, it is necessary to

clean the removed parts thoroughly and check
their integrity.
The following pages give the instructions for the
main checks and measurements to make in order
to determine whether the parts can be reused.
88289

Figure 66
87793
With the aid of a hoist and a rope, remove the crankshaft (1).

The central half-bearing (3) is fitted with shoulder half-rings.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

REPAIRS Figure 70
CYLINDER BLOCK
Checks and measurements
Figure 68
18837
87782
Once the engine removal is complete, carefully clean the
cylinder block. For the cylinder block transportation use the
Figure 71
suitable rings.
Carefully check that the crankcase has no cracks in it.
Check the state of the plugs. If they are rusty or there is any
doubt about their seal, replace them. Examine the surfaces
of the cylinder liners; they must show no sign of meshing,
scoring, ovalization, taper or excessive wear. The inside
diameter of the cylinder liners is checked, to ascertain the
extent of ovalization, taper and wear, using the bore meter
99395687 (1) fitted with a dial gauge previously reset on the
ring gauge of the diameter of the cylinder liner or on a
micrometer.
Figure 69
measurement
measurement
measurement
87783
* Surface roughness parameters:

87781 R1 = 4 ÷ 10 µm
Rz = 3 ÷ 8 µm
The measurements must be made for each single cylinder at Ra = 0.3 ÷ 0.6 µm
three different heights up the liner and on two planes at right W1 < 2 µm
angles to each other: one parallel to the longitudinal axis of Permissible surface porosity for machined cylinder
the engine (B) and the perpendicular (A); the greatest wear (see Figure 71)
is generally found on this last plane with the first
ZONE B1 = Area of greatest mechanical stress,
measurement. segment/liner contact: No.2 C
On finding ovalization, taper or wear, go ahead and non-continuous porosities are 100%
bore/grind and finish the face of the cylinder liners. The
permissible max. 0.5x0.5.
refacing of the cylinder liners should be done in relation to
the diameter of the pistons supplied as spare parts oversized ZONE B2 = Surface involved in segment rubbing: C
by 0.4 mm of the nominal value and to the prescribed No.2 non-contiguous porosities are
assembly clearance. permissible max. 1x0.8. 100%
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Checking head mating surface on cylinder 5408 CRANKSHAFT

block 540810 Measuring main journals and crank
Figure 72 pins
Figure 74
88290 75298
See that the head mating surface, on the cylinder block, has On finding signs of seizure, scoring or excessive ovalization
no deformation. on main journals and crankpins, it is necessary to regrind the
This check can be made, after taking out the grub screws (3), pins. Before grinding the pins (2), measure the shaft pins with
with a surface plate spread with carbon black or with a a micrometer (1) to establish to what diameter it is necessary
calibrated rule (1) and a feeler gauge (2). After ascertaining to decrease the pins.
the areas of deformation, level the bearing surface with a
grinding machine.
NOTE The crankcase can only be surfaced after making NOTE It is advisable to enter the measurements in a table.
sure that, on completing the work, the piston See Figure 73.
protrudes from the cylinder liner by no more than
the prescribed value.
NOMINAL NOMINAL
Figure 73 VALUE VALUE
MINIMUM ∅
MAXIMUM ∅
NOMINAL
VALUE
MINIMUM ∅ 87784
MAXIMUM ∅
TABLE IN WHICH TO ENTER THE MEASUREMENTS OF THE CRANKSHAFT MAIN JOURNALS AND CRANKPINS
NOTE The main journals and crankpins must always be For undersized crankpins, letter M.
ground to the same undersize class. For undersized main journals, letter B.
The undersizing performed, on the main journals or For undersized crankpins and main journals, letter MB.
crankpins, must be marked by punching on the side
of crank arm no. 1. The undersize classes are:
0.254 — 0.508 mm.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Checking crankshaft
Figure 75
87785
MAIN CRANKSHAFT TOLERANCES
TOLERANCES TOLERANCE CHARACTERISTIC SYMBOL

Circularity ○
SHAPE
Cylindricality
Parallelism
ORIENTATION
POSITION Concentricity or coaxiality
OSCILLATION
CLASS OF IMPORTANCE ASCRIBED TO THE PRODUCT CHARACTERISTICS SYMBOL

CRITICAL E
IMPORTANT ⊕
SECONDARY ⊝
Figure 76 NOTE The checks on the tolerances indicated in the

figures must be made after grinding the crankshaft
pins.
SYMMETRY BETWEEN MAIN JOURNALS AND

CRANKPINS
1. Crankpins
2. Main journals
3. Normal position
After grinding, keep to the following:
- Round off the edges of deburring the holes for
lubrication of the main journals and crankpins.
87786
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

JOURNAL ON TIMING SYSTEM SIDE JOURNAL ON FLYWHEEL SIDE

Figure 77 Figure 80
honed
honed
max. 0.1 on 360°

Before rolling
waviness
waviness
87787 in axial direction
(MACHINED BY TURNING) 87790
INTERMEDIATE JOURNALS No. 2-4
CRANKPINS
Figure 78 Figure 81
max. 0.1 on 360°
Before rolling
honed
honed
max. 0.13 on 360°
Before rolling
87791
* As far as both values are concerned, for the whole 360°.

87788
INTERMEDIATE JOURNAL No. 3 NOTE Since, during the 0.254 and 0.508 mm undersizing
on the diameter of the crankpins and main journals,
the rolled portion of the side races of the pins may
get involved, it is necessary to turn the races
Figure 79 keeping to the data given in the figure and to do the
rolling keeping to the following instructions.
Rolling force:
- 1st main journal 925 ±25 daN.
- 2nd — 3rd — 4th — 5th main journal 1850 ±50
daN.
honed
- crankpin 1850 ±50 daN.
max. 0.1 on 360°
- Rolling turns: 3 approach, 12 effective, 3 out.

Before rolling
- Rolling speed: 56 rpm.

- Reduction of the connecting rod pin slot diameter after
rolling: 0.15 ÷ 0.30 mm*.
87789
- Reduction of the journal slots after rolling: 0.15 ÷ 0.30
mm.
MAIN DATA OF MAIN JOURNALS AND CRANKPINS * Measured with calibrated rollers ∅ 2.5 mm.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 82 Assembling main bearings

Figure 84
87792
Take out the screws (4) and replace the phonic wheel (3). 88345
The screws (4) are coated with LOCTITE 218 and must be
replaced with fresh ones after each disassembly. NOTE Not having found it necessary to replace the main
They must be tightened to a torque of 10 ± 1 Nm. bearings, they need to be fitted back on in the same
sequence and position found upon disassembly.
On finding the timing control gear teeth (1) damaged or
worn, remove them from the crankshaft (2) using a suitable The main bearings (1) are supplied as spare parts undersized
extractor. on the inside diameter by 0.254 ÷ 0.508 mm.
The new gear is fitted onto the crankshaft by heating it to a
NOTE Do not do any accommodating on the bearings.
temperature of 180°C for no longer than 15 minutes.
On completing assembly and after the gear has cooled, it
must withstand a torque of 150 Nm without slipping. Thoroughly clean the top main bearing shells (1) and position
them in the crankcase.
NOTE The middle half ring (2) is fitted with thrust washers.
ENGINE ASSEMBLY
The following parts must be replaced with new ones at the 540811 Measuring main journal assembly
time of assembly: retaining rings, seals and gaskets, screws clearance
whose thread is coated with sealant.
Figure 85
Figure 83
90064
Mount the crankshaft (1).

75306
Check the clearance between the crankshaft main journals
Fit on the oil spray nozzles (2) and tighten the couplings (1) and their respective bearings by proceeding as follows:
- Thoroughly clean the pins.
- Apply a calibrated wire onto the main journals.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 86 Figure 88
88289 75310
Thoroughly clean the bottom main bearing shells (2) and - Remove the bottom crankcase.
mount them in the crankcase base (1).
The clearance between the main bearings and their
associated pins is measured by comparing the length of the
calibrated wire (1), at the point of greatest crushing, with the
Figure 87 graduated scale on the casing containing the calibrated wire.
The numbers on the scale indicate the clearance of the
coupling in millimetres, which must be 0.032 ÷ 0.102 mm.
If the clearance is not as prescribed, replace the bearings and
repeat the check.
α
Checking crankshaft end float
Figure 89
88292
Mount the crankcase base (12). 88293
Tighten the screws in the sequence shown in the figure in The end float is checked by setting a dial gauge (2) with a
three steps: magnetic base on the crankshaft (1) as shown in the figure.
The normal assembly clearance is 0.060 — 0.310 mm.
If you find the clearance to be greater than as required,
replace the rear main bearing shells carrying the thrust
- Step 3: closing to an angle of 60°. bearings and repeat the clearance check between the
crankshaft pins and the main bearing shells.
If the end float of the crankshaft does not come within the
NOTE Use tool 99395216 (11) for the angle closing. prescribed values, it is necessary to grind the crankshaft and
accordingly change the main bearing shells.
NOTE: The middle main bearing has half thrust washers
integrated in it, so it performs the function of a thrust bearing.
It is supplied as a spare part only with the normal shoulder
Then tighten the outer screws to torque 26 Nm. thickness.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 90 Figure 92
88294 88296
Thoroughly clean the crankcase / crankcase base mating Then tighten the outer screws (1) to a torque of 26 — 30 Nm.
surface.
Apply, on base, sealant LOCTITE 510 IVECO no. 93162432,
as indicated in the scheme. The sealant must result to be
even, not patchy. 540460 Assembling rear seal
NOTE Mount the crankcase base within 10 minutes of Figure 93

applying the sealant.
Figure 91
88297
Carefully clean the seal seat.

Lubricate the rear shank of the crankshaft with engine oil.
Fit part (2) of tool 99346259 onto the rear shank of the
crankshaft; secure it with the screws (3) and key the fresh seal
(1) onto it.
Position part (4) on part (2); screw down the nut (5) to fit
the seal (1) fully inside the crankcase.
88292
Mount the crankcase base (12) and tighten the fixing screws
in three stages, following the sequence shown in the figure:
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

540850 ENGINE FLYWHEEL

Figure 94 Figure 96
88299
Tighten the screws (2) fixing the engine flywheel (3) in two
steps:

88054
Double-mass engine flywheel, one integral with the drive

shaft and one with the input shaft of the gearbox and in Take off tool 99360351 (4).
between a torsion elastic dampening system.
The advantages of this type of flywheel compared to the
normal one are: 5408 CONNECTING ROD — PISTON
- Dampening of engine irregularities transmitted to the
ASSEMBLY
gearbox and resulting drive noise reduction;
- Noise reduction in the cabin as a result of the overall Figure 97
noise reduction.
Check the clutch disc mating surface, if there are too many
scratches, change the engine flywheel (3).
Check the conditions of the bearing (2) and the crown gear
(1), if they are worn out or damaged change the engine
flywheel (3).
Figure 95
75392
PISTON — CONNECTING ROD ASSEMBLY

1. Piston — 2. Piston ring — 3. Pin — 4. Trapezoidal ring —
5. Oil scraper ring — 6. Slotted oil scraper ring with spiral
spring — 7. Connecting rod body — 8. Bearing shells —
88298 9. Connecting rod cap — 10. Cap fixing screws.
Position the metal sheet guard (3) on the cylinder block. Check the pistons. They must show no signs of seizure,
Mount the engine flywheel (1) and screw down the screws (2). scoring, cracking or excessive wear; replace them if they do.
Fit tool 99360351 (4) onto the crankcase to block rotation
of the engine flywheel (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 98 540840 Pistons

Measuring piston diameter
Figure 100
87794
75393 Using a micrometer (2), measure the diameter of the piston

Remove the piston rings (1) from the piston (2) using pliers (1) to determine the assembly clearance. The diameter has
99360183 (3). to be measured at the value shown.
NOTE The pistons are supplied as spare parts with the

Figure 99 standard, normal and 0.4mm oversize diameters
together with rings, pin and retaining rings.
Figure 101
75394
Remove the piston (1) from the connecting rod, taking out
the piston ring (2) and extracting the pin (3).
88300
Figure 102 The clearance between the piston and cylinder liner can also
be checked using a feeler gauge (1) as illustrated in the figure.
87795
MAIN DATA FOR MONDIAL PISTON, PINS AND PISTON RINGS

* The value is measured at 1.5 mm from the outer diameter
** The value of the diameter measured is 91.4 mm
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
540841 Piston pins

16552
18857
Check the thickness of the piston rings (2) with a micrometer
Measuring the diameter of the piston pin (1) with a (1).
micrometer (2). Figure 107
Conditions for correct pin-piston coupling
Figure 104
88301
Check the clearance between the trapezoidal ring (2) (1st

slot) and the associated slot on the piston with a feeler gauge
(1), proceeding as follows: insert the piston into the cylinder
75397 liner so that the ring (2) comes approximately half way out
Lubricate the pin (1) and its seat on the hubs of the piston of it.
(2) with engine oil. The pin must go into the piston by lightly
Figure 108
pressing with the fingers and must not drop out by gravity.
540842 Piston rings

Figure 105
41104
DIAGRAM FOR MEASURING THE CLEARANCE X

BETWEEN THE FIRST PISTON SLOT AND THE
TRAPEZOIDAL RING
74947
1. Piston slot — 2. Trapezoidal piston ring —
3. Cylinder liner
The trapezoidal split rings (1st slot) and the oil scraper rings
(2nd slot) have the word TOP etched in them; when fitting Using a feeler gauge (1, Figure 107), check the clearance (X)
them on the piston, the word TOP must be facing upwards. between the ring (2) and the slot (1); this clearance must
have the prescribed value.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 109
NOTE Each connecting rod has its cap marked:
- with a letter: O or X indicating the diameter class of the

big end mounted in production;
- with a number indicating the weight class of the
connecting rod mounted in production.
In addition, it could be stamped with the number of the
cylinder in which it is fitted.
In the event of replacement it is therefore necessary to
number the new connecting rod with the same number as
the one replaced.
The numbering must be done on the opposite side to the
bearing shell retaining slots.
75398
The connecting rods are supplied as spare parts with the
Check the clearance between the piston rings (2) of the 2nd diameter of the big end 67.833 — 67.848 mm marked with the
and 3rd slot and the associated seats on the piston (3) with letter O and the weight class marked with the number 33.
a feeler gauge (1).
It is not permissible to remove material.
Figure 110
540834 Bushing
Check that the bush in the small end has not come loose and
shows no sign of seizure or scoring. If it does, replace the
complete connecting rod.
Checking connecting rods

Figure 112
75399
Check the opening between the ends of the piston rings (2)
inserted in the cylinder liner using a feeler gauge (1).
540830 Connecting rods
Figure 111
61696
87796
Check the alignment of the axes of the connecting rods (1)

MAIN DATA OF THE CONNECTING ROD, BUSHING, with device 99395363 (5), proceeding as follows:
PISTON PIN AND BEARING SHELLS
- Fit the connecting rod (1) on the spindle of the tool
* Internal diameter to obtain after driving into the small
99395363 (5) and lock it with the screw (4).
end and grinding with a reamer.
** Dimension cannot be measured in the free state. - Set the spindle (3) on the V-prisms, resting the
*** Thickness of the bearing shell supplied as a spare part. connecting rod (1) on the stop bar (2).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Checking torsion Assembling connecting rod-piston assembly

87797
Etched on the top of the piston are: the type of engine (1),
class selection (2) and supplier (3) as well as the direction of
fitting the piston in the cylinder liner (4). The mark (5) is for
passing the 1st slot insert adhesion test.
61694 Figure 116
Check the torsion of the connecting rod (5) by comparing

two points (A and B) of the pin (3) on the horizontal plane
of the axis of the connecting rod.
Position the mount (1) of the dial gauge (2) so that this
pre-loads by approx. 0.5 mm on the pin (3) at point A and
zero the dial gauge (2). Shift the spindle (4) with the
connecting rod (5) and compare any deviation on the
opposite side B of the pin (3): the difference between A and
B must be no greater than 0.08 mm.
Checking bending
Figure 114
87798
Connect the piston (1) to the connecting rod (2) together

with its cap so that the piston assembly reference, position
of the connecting rod and of the cap are observed as shown
in the figure.
Figure 117
61695
Check the bending of the connecting rod (5) by comparing

two points C and D of the pin (3) on the vertical plane of the
axis of the connecting rod.
Position the vertical mount (1) of the dial gauge (2) so that
this rests on the pin (3) at point C.
Swing the connecting rod backwards and forwards seeking
the highest position of the pin and in this condition zero the
dial gauge (2).
Shift the spindle with the connecting rod (5) and repeat the
check on the highest point on the opposite side D of the pin 75394
(3). The difference between point C and point D must be no Position the piston (1) on the connecting rod, insert the pin
greater than 0.08 mm. (3) and secure it with the split rings (2).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Checking for connecting rod — piston distortion Assembling connecting rod — piston assemblies
Figure 118
in cylinder barrels
Figure 120
88302
Lubricate the pistons well, including the piston rings and the
75403
inside of the cylinder liners.
After fitting the connecting rod — piston assembly together, With the aid of the clamp 99360605 (2), fit the connecting
check for distortion with the tool 99395363 (8) as follows: rod — piston assembly (1) in the cylinder liners, checking that:
- Fit the connecting rod (7) together with the piston (3) - The number of each connecting rod corresponds to the
on the spindle (4) of tool 99395363 (8) and lock it with cap mating number.
the screw (5). - The openings of the piston rings are staggered 120° apart.
- Rest the connecting rod (7) on the bar (6). - The pistons are all of the same weight.
- Position the mount (1) of the dial gauge (2) so that this - The symbol punched on the top of the pistons faces the
is positioned at point A of the piston with a pre-load of engine flywheel, or the recess in the skirt of the pistons
0.5 mm and zero the dial gauge (2). tallies with the oil spray nozzles.
- Shift the spindle (4) so as to position the dial gauge (2)
at point B of the piston (3) and check for any deviation. NOTE Not finding it necessary to replace the connecting
rod bearings, you need to fit them back in exactly the
same sequence and position found on disassembly.
Figure 119
540831 Measuring crankpin assembly
clearance
Figure 121
41097
Fit the piston rings (1) on the piston (2) using the pliers
99360183 (3). 88303
To measure the clearance, carry out the following steps:

NOTE The 1st and 2nd slot rings need to be mounted with - Thoroughly clean parts (1) and (4) and eliminate all
the word ”TOP” facing upwards. traces of oil.
- Place a length of calibrated wire (3) on the crankshaft
pins (4).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 122 Checking piston protrusion

Figure 123
88326
88327
- Fit the connecting rod caps (3) with the associated At the end of the connecting rod-piston assembly refitting,
bearing shells. check the piston protrusion (2) at the T.D.C. compared to
- Tighten the screws (2) in two steps: the top level of the cylinder block by means of a dial gauge
(1) and relevant base 99370415.
NOTE The difference between the minimum and
NOTE Use tool 99395216 (1) for the angle closing. maximum protrusions of the four pistons must be
= 0.15 mm.
The cylinder head gasket in the set of spare gaskets
needed for complete engine overhaul is supplied
- Remove the cap (3) and determine the existing with a single thickness. Clearly, it is supplied
clearance by comparing the width of the calibrated wire separately too.
(3, Figure 121) with the graduated scale on the case (2,
Figure 121) that contained the calibrated wire. On
finding a clearance other than as prescribed, replace the
bearing shells and repeat the check.
On obtaining the prescribed clearance, lubricate the Figure 124
connecting rod bearing shells and fit them permanently
by tightening the connecting rod cap fixing screws as
described.
NOTE The connecting rod cap fixing screws must always

be replaced for permanent assembly.
Manually check that the connecting rods slide axially on the

pins of the crankshaft.
88285
Mount the suction strainer (1) together with the pipe.

Screw down the fixing screws (2) and tighten them to the
prescribed torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 125 541210 Disassembling valves
Figure 127
75412
88329
Fit the gasket (4) and the frame (3) onto the oil sump (1).
Screw down the fixing screws (2) and tighten them to the Fit part (4) of tool 99360260 onto the cylinder head (5) and
prescribed torque. secure it with the screws (3).
Screw down the oil drain plug (5) and tighten it to the Fit part (2) of tool 99360260 onto part (4), screw down the
prescribed torque. nut (1) so that on compressing the springs (8) it is possible
to remove the cotters (6). Then take out the plates (7) and
the springs (8).
Using suitable pliers, remove the oil seal (9).
560610 CYLINDER HEAD Repeat these operations on the remaining valves.
Disassembly Turn the cylinder head over.
Figure 128
Figure 126
88426
88328 The intake (1) and exhaust (2) valves have the same diameter
Apply the support SP. 2271 (5) on the cylinder head and mushroom.
tighten the support in a vice. The central cavity (→) of the mushroom of the intake valve
Remove the brackets (6) for lifting the engine. (1) is distinguished from that of the exhaust valve (2).
Remove the sensors (1 and 2), if needed.
NOTE Before removing the valves from the cylinder
Take out the screws (3) and remove the thermostat casing heads, number the valves in order to refit them
(4). correctly if they are not changed.
A = intake side — S = exhaust side
Remove the intake (1) and exhaust (2) valves.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


Check the hydraulic seal using a suitable tool. Figure 130
Pump in water heated to approx. 90°C at a pressure of 2 ÷
EXHAUST INTAKE
3 bars. VALVE VALVE
Replace the cup plugs if they are found to leak at oil, using 5,975 5,985
a suitable drift for their removal — assembly. 5,990 6,000
NOTE Before mounting the plugs, apply LOCTITE 270 32,3

water-reacting sealant on their sealing surfaces. 32,5
2,25+07.5’
replaced.
O 30,8
60 +7.5’
MAIN DATA OF INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVES
Figure 129 87799
Removing deposits, refacing and checking

valves
Figure 131
88331
18625
The mating surface of the head (1) with the cylinder block
is checked using a rule (2) and a feeler gauge (3). Remove the carbon deposits on the valves with a wire brush.
The deformation found on the entire length of the cylinder Check that the valves show no signs of seizure, cracking or
head must be no greater than 0.20 mm. burning.
For greater values, regrind the cylinder head according to the
values and instructions given in the following figure. Figure 132
The nominal thickness A of the cylinder head is 112 ±0.1 mm;
the maximum permissible removal of metal must not exceed
a thickness of 0.2 mm.
NOTE After regrinding, check the valve recessing and if

necessary regrind the valve seats to make the
prescribed valve recessing.
18882
Use a micrometer (2) to measure the valve stem (1): it must

have the value shown in Figure 132. If necessary, grind the
valve seats by means of the grinding machine 99305018, and
remove as little material as possible.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004


Figure 133
88333
Remove the valve guides (2) with the drift SP.2312 (1).
Figure 136
88332
The checks are made using a dial gauge (2) with a magnetic
base, positioned as illustrated. The assembly clearance is
0.033 — 0.063 mm.
Making the valve (1) turn, check that the centring error is no
540667 VALVE GUIDES

Figure 134
88334
Warm up the cylinder head to 80° ÷ 100°C and, by means

of beater SP.2312 (1) fitted with element SP.2311 (2), fit the
new valve guides (3) previously lubricated with engine oil.
Driving force 10 ÷ 25 KN.
If the above mentioned tools are not available, fit the valve
guides by positioning them in the cylinder head according to
the value shown in Figure 134.
Boring valve guides
Figure 137
87800
MAIN DATA OF VALVE GUIDES — SEATS

Valve guide seat inside ∅ 9.980 ÷ 10.000 mm
Valve guide outside ∅ 10.028 ÷ 10.039 mm
* Measurement to be made after driving in the valve guides.
88335
After driving in the valve guides (2), regrind them with the
smoother SP.2310 (1).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

540661 VALVE SEATS

Regrinding - replacing valve seats
Figure 138
87801
Check the valve seats. On finding any slight scoring or burns, Mount the valves, block the seat of the electro-injectors and
regrind them with an appropriate tool according to the glow plugs; using a suitable tool, check the seal of the
angles given in Figure 138. valves/seats.
Having to replace them, with the same tool and taking care
not to affect the cylinder head, remove as much material
Figure 140
from the valve seats as possible until, with a punch, it is
possible to extract them from the cylinder head.
Heat the cylinder head to 80 ÷ 100°C and, using a suitable
drift, fit in it the new valve seats, previously chilled in liquid
nitrogen.
Using a specific tool, regrind the valve seats according to the
angles given in Figure 138.
Figure 139
88337
Using a dial gauge (1), check that, from the plane of the
cylinder head, the valve recessing (2) and the protrusion of
the injector (3) and of the glow plug have the prescribed
value:
- Valve recessing: 0.375 ÷ 0.525 mm.
88336
- Injector protrusion: 2.77 ÷ 3.23 mm.
Using the milling cutter 99394038 (1), clean the injector seat - Glow plug protrusion: 3.78 mm.
of any deposits.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
540665 VALVE SPRINGS ROCKER ARMS — TAPPETS

62386
Before assembly, check the flexibility of the valve springs with

the tool 99305047. Compare the load and elastic
deformation data with those of the new springs given in the
following figures. 75461
COMPLETE ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY

Figure 142 The rocker arm assembly is composed of the rocker arm (1),
hydraulic tappet (3), made integral with each other by the clip
(2).
Figure 144
50676
MAIN DATA TO CHECK INTAKE AND EXHAUST

VALVE SPRINGS
Height Under a load of

mm kg 75942
H 54 Free
H1 45 P 243 ±12 CROSS-SECTION OF THE HYDRAULIC TAPPET
H2 35 P1 533 ±24 A = 32.44 ±0.3, end of stroke
B = 31.30, working position
C = 29.75 ±0.25, start of stroke
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 145
87802
MAIN DATA HYDRAULIC TAPPETS — SEATS
Checks
The sliding surface of the tappets must have no scoring/dents; Figure 147
replace them if they do.
Using a micrometer, measure the diameter of the tappets
and, using a bore meter, measure the diameter of the seats
in the cylinder head; the difference in the measurements will
give the assembly clearance.
ASSEMBLING CYLINDER HEADS

Figure 146
75587
Position the springs (8) and plates (7) on the cylinder head
(5).
Fit the part (4) of tool 99360260 onto the cylinder head (5)
and secure it with the screws (3).
Fit the part (2) of tool 99360260 onto part (4), screw down
the nut (1) so that by compressing the springs (8) it is possible
to insert the retaining cotters (6); then unscrew the nut (1)
checking that the cotters (6) have settled in correctly.
Repeat these operations on the remaining valves.
87803
Lubricate the stem of the valves (1) and insert them into the
associated valve guides (4) according to the position marked
during removal. Using tool SP.2264 (2), mount the oil seals
(3) on the valve guides (4).
NOTE The suction valves (5) are different from the

exhaust ones for a slot (→) in the centre of the
valve head.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

88340
88338
Remove the nuts (4) and the top skid (3).
Fit the thermostat casing (3) with a new seal and tighten the Remove the screws (1) and the shoulder plate (2).
fixing screws (4) to the prescribed torque.
Fit the temperature sensors (1 and 2) and tighten them to the
prescribed torque.
Fit the brackets for lifting the engine and tighten the fixing
screws to the prescribed torque.
Figure 151
540650 Overhead
Overhead removal
Figure 149
88341
Tilt the over-head (1) and take care not to damage the seats,
then take off the camshafts (2 and 3) from the overhead.
88339
Remove the screws (2 and 3) and the covers (1 and 4)

together with the over-head seal rings.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

5412 TIMING SYSTEM Figure 153

Figure 152
88055
1. Rocker arm - 2. Reaction hydraulic tappet - 3. Valve

assembly - 4. Camshaft on exhaust side - 5. Camshaft on
suction side - 6. Camshaft control chain.
Description 88342
The timing system is the type with a twin camshaft in the head
and four valves per cylinder with hydraulic tappets. TIMING SYSTEM AND AUXILIARY SYSTEM DIAGRAM
The control is transmitted by two chains: 1. Camshaft control gear - 2. Single chain - 3. Hydraulic
chain tightener - 4. Chain - 5. Drive gear on driving shaft -
- a double chain by 3/8” is set in motion by the driving shaft 6. Fixed skid - 7. Oil pump/depressor control shaft gear —
and sets the control shafts in motion: oil pump/depressor Hydraulic power steering pump - 8. Double chain -
— high pressure pump; 9. High pressure pump control shaft gear.
- a single chain is set in motion by the high pressure control
shaft gear and sets the camshafts in motion.
The camshaft gears are mutually interchangeable and are Figure 154
fitted with slots to make it possible for the phase sensor to
detect the phase.
The rocker arms, one for the valve, are kept in contact with
the corresponding cam by an hydraulic tappet, thus
eliminating the need for regular adjustments.
NOTE Change both chains, even if only one of them is

faulty. 1 CLOSING
INTAKE
OPENING
2 CLOSING
EXHAUST
OPENING
3 FIRING 87804
ORDER
1-3-4-2
TIMING SYSTEM DIAGRAM
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

541210 Camshaft 541211 Checking cam lift and pin alignment

Checks
The surfaces of the shaft supporting pins and of the cams Figure 156
must be finely honed; if there is any sign of meshing or scoring,
replace the shaft.
Figure 155
75474 87806
Using a micrometer (1), measure the diameter of the pins (2) Place the shaft (1) on the parallels and use a centesimal dial
of the camshaft and, using a bore meter, measure the gauge fitted on the central support to check that the
diameter of the supporting seats in the overhead. alignment error does not exceed 0.04 mm; otherwise,
The difference between these two measurements gives the change the shaft. Check also the cam lift: it must correspond
existing clearance. to the prescribed value; if different values are detected,
The nominal assembly clearance is 0.037 ÷ 0.088 mm. change the shaft.
Figure 157
87807
MAIN DATA, CAMSHAFT PINS AND SEATS

1. Intake valve camshaft seats — 2. Exhaust valve camshaft seats — 3. Intake valve camshaft — 4. Exhaust valve camshaft.
The camshaft (3) of the suction valves can be recognised through the spring cup (4) and the dowel (6).
!
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Assembling overhead
88343 88340
Lubricate the new seal rings (1) with engine oil and fit them Fit the top skid (3) and drive in the nuts (4), then tighten them
on the covers (2). to the prescribed torque.
Fit the covers (2) on the overhead, drive in the fastening Fit the shoulder plate (2) and drive in the screws (1), then
screws (3) and tighten them to the prescribed torque. tighten them to the prescribed torque.
88344 88346
Lubricate the support pins of the suction camshafts (2) and Position the camshafts (3 and 4) so that the pins 99360614
exhaust camshafts (4) and fit them on the overhead (1). (1) can be inserted in the camshaft slots (2) through the
over-head threaded holes.
AUXILIARY ORGAN CONTROLS

Figure 162
NOTE During this operation do not exchange the

assembly position of the shafts.
The suction camshaft can be recognised (2)
through the dowel (3) on the front side and the
retainer on the rear side.
In addition, take care not to damage the support
seats of the over-head shafts.
88347
Rotate the driving shaft so that the tool 99360615 (1) can be
inserted in the shaft crank hole through the cylinder block
hole, in order to stop the engine in the timing system setting
condition.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

88348 88278
Lubricate the seal rings (1 and 2) with engine oil and fit them Fit the gear (1) on the stem (3) of the hydraulic power
on the support (3). steering pump.
Drive in the screw (2) without locking it.
88279 88349
Fit the support (1) and drive in the nuts (2), then tighten them Lubricate the new seal rings (1 and 2) with engine oil and fit
to the prescribed torque. them on the support (3).
Fit the stem (3).
88277 88276
Stop the stem rotation (2) of the hydraulic power steering Fit the support (1), drive in the nuts (2) and tighten them to
pump by inserting in the latter the tool (3) and fastening the the prescribed torque.
tool on the support (1) by means of the screws (4). Fit the control stem (3) of the high pressure pump.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 169 Cylinder head refitting
Figure 172
88351
Position the chain (1) on the gears (2, 3 and 5) and fit the gear
88353
(3) on the stem (4) so that the chain (1) in tracts A and B is
tensioned. Check that the mating surfaces of the cylinder head and
Figure 170 Keep the cylinder head gasket clean.
Place the gasket (1) of the cylinder head with the thickness
given in section “Check piston protrusion”, with the “TOP”
sign facing the head.
NOTE It is essential to keep the gasket sealed in its package

Figure 173
88274
Fit the stem with the drive gear (2) on the high pressure
pump control stem (1).
Drive in the fastening screw (3).
Figure 171
88354
Mount the cylinder head (2).

Screw down the fixing screws (3) and tighten them, in three
successive stages, following the order and methods shown in
the following figure.
88352
Check the conditions of the fixed skids (1 and 3) and change NOTE The angle closure is done with tool 99395216 (1).
them if worn out.
Fit the skid (1) and drive in the fastening screws (2), then
tighten them to the prescribed torque.
Fit the skid (3) and drive in the fastening screws (4), then
tighten them to the prescribed torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

88355
Diagram of the tightening sequence for the cylinder head 88357

fixing screws:
Mount the overhead (1) together with the tools 99360614
- 1st phase: pre-tightening with torque wrench (3) for the timing and tighten the fixing screws (2) to the
• screws 1-2-3-4-5-6 to a torque of 130 Nm; prescribed torque.
• screws 7-8-9-10 to a torque of 65 Nm.
Take out the tools SP. 2264 (4).
• screws 1-2-3-4-5-6 90°;
• screws 7-8-9-10 90°.
• screws 1-2-3-4-5-6 90°;
• screws 7-8-9-10 60°.
- Screws A, to a torque of 25 Nm
TIMING SYSTEM CONTROL
88270
88356
Fit the top fixed skid (1). Drive in the screws (2 and 3) and
Thoroughly clean the hydraulic tappets (2), lubricate them and tighten them to the prescribed torque.
fit them in the cylinder head (3), positioning the rocker arms (1)
Fit the rubber cap (4) of the new gasket and tighten it to the
on the valves correctly.
prescribed torque.
Fit on the gasket (5).
Insert the two tools SP. 2264 (4) into the electro-injector seats
for subsequent centring of the overhead on the cylinder head.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

88360
88358
Check the conditions of the mobile skids (1 and 3), if worn
Position the chain (1) on the gear (5) and gear (2). out change them.
Mount the gear in such a way that fitting on aspiration valve Position the mobile skids (1 and 3) and clamp them on the
timing system shaft dowel makes slots A to result to be cylinder block by the pin (2) and tighten it to the prescribed
positioned as in figure. torque.
Figure 181
NOTE The chain arm (1) between the two gears must be
tensioned.
Drive in the fastening screw (4) with the washer (3) without
tightening it completely.
Figure 179
88361
Drive in the chain hydraulic tightener (1) and lock it to the

prescribed torque.
Figure 182
88359
Position the chain (1) on the gear (2) and fit the latter on the
camshaft of the exhaust valves.
Drive in the fastening screw (4) with the washer (3) without
tightening it completely.
88362
Tighten the fastening screw of the gear (1) on the hydraulic

power steering control stem to the prescribed torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

90311 88372
Stop the rotation of the high pressure pump control shaft (1) Tighten the fastening screw of the gear (1) on the suction
by inserting the suitable wrench inside it. valve camshaft to the prescribed torque.
Figure 187
Figure 184
88373
Make sure that the chain (3) in the tract between the gear
88370 (2) and gear (4) is tensioned.
Tighten the fastening screw of the gear (2) on the exhaust
Make sure that the chain (2) and the tract between the gear valve camshaft to the prescribed torque.
(1) and gear (3) is tensioned. Remove tools 99360614 (1).
Tighten the fastening screw of the stem with the drive gear
(1) on the high pressure pump control stem to the prescribed Figure 188
torque.
Figure 185
88374
Fit a new gasket (5) in the cover (2).

Fit the cover (2), drive in the screws (1) and tighten them to
88371
Fit the phase sensor (4).
Drive the in the chain hydraulic tightener (1) and lock it to Drive in the fastening nut (3) and tighten it to the prescribed
the prescribed torque. torque.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 189 Lubricate the tang of the driving shaft and the element
outside (2) and fit flush the new seal ring on this element (3).
Position the element (4) on element (2), lock the nut (5) until
fitting the seal ring (3) completely in the cover (1).
Figure 192
88375
Position the joint (5) in the gear (6).

Fit the oil pump/depressor unit (4) by inserting a new gasket
(1).
Drive in the screws (2) and tighten them to the prescribed
torque.
Remove tool 99360615 (2).
Figure 190
90156
Mount tool 99396030 (3), for centering cover (1), into

centrifugal filter seat and tighten screws (2) at prescribed
torque. Remove: 99346258 (4) and 99396039 (3) tools.
Figure 193
88376
Fit the cover (2) with a new gasket. Drive in the screws (2)
without tightening them completely.
Figure 191
90157
Fit a new centrifugal filter (1).

Fit a new snap ring (2).
Fit the cover (3), drive in the screws (4) and tighten them to
88377
Clean accurately the seat of the cover seal ring (1).

Drive in the element (2) of tool 99346258 in the driving shaft
tang.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

88262
88378 Stop the rotation of the electro-magnetic joint (1).

Drive in the nut (2) and tighten it to the prescribed torque.
Stop the rotation of the engine flywheel (2) by means of tool
99360306 (1).
Fit the damper pulley (3). Drive in the screw (4) and tighten NOTE The nut (2) must be driven in anticlockwise
it to the prescribed torque. because its threading is left-handed.
Figure 195
Figure 198
88379
Fit the water pump (2) with a new gasket.

Drive in the screws (1) and tighten them to the prescribed 88261
torque. Drive in the oil level sensor (1) and tighten it to the
Figure 196 prescribed torque.
Fit the rev sensor (2), drive in the fastening screw and tighten
it to the prescribed torque.
Figure 199
88263
Fit the electric magnet (3) of the cooling fan joint on the
water pump (6).
Drive in the nuts (2) and tighten them to the prescribed
torque.
Drive in the fastening screw (1) of the wire clamp and tighten 88260
it to the prescribed torque. Fit the support (2), drive in the screws (1) and tighten them
Lock the electric magnet (3) wire by means of the clamp (→). to the prescribed torque.
Fit the pulley (4) and the hub (5).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

544017 Replacement of alternator free Figure 202

wheel
Figure 200
88420
Fit the automatic backstand (1), drive in the screw (2) and
88419 tighten it to the prescribed torque.
The free wheel (2) function is to prevent that the engine

idling oscillations bounce back though the control belt on the Figure 203
alternator (1).
If it is necessary to change the free wheel (2), operate as
follows.
Remove the protection cap from the free wheel (2).
Apply tool 99358026 (3 and 4) as illustrated in the figure.
Stop the rotation of the free wheel (2) with the element (3)
and slacken the stem (5) of the alternator (1) with the
element (4).
Fit the new free wheel (2) by reversing the removal
operations. The free wheel (2) must be clamped on the stem
(5) by applying a max torque of 85 Nm.
Figure 201
88330
Operate the automatic backstand (2) with the suitable

wrench, fit the belt (1) and make sure the ribs are positioned
correctly in the respective pulley races.
Figure 204
88259
Fit the alternator (3) on the support (1), lock it with the bolt
(4) and the screw (2) and tighten them to the prescribed
torque.
88255
Fit the exhaust manifold (3) with a new gasket.

Fit the spacers (1), drive in the nuts (2) and tighten them to
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

88421 88423
Fit the turbocharger (3) with the relevant gasket on the Remove the fastening screws (1) and remove tool 99360187
exhaust manifold (1). Drive in the nuts (2) and tighten them (2).
Connect the oil pipe (5) to the turbocharger (3) and the
cylinder head, and tighten the pipe unions (4 and 6) to the
prescribed torque.
Figure 208
Figure 206
88424
88422 Position the joint (2) on the stem (3).

Slightly lubricate the seal ring (1) and fit it on the power
Fit a new seal ring (2) in the air vent (1). steering pump (5).
Slightly lubricate the seal ring (2), fit the air vent (1) on the Fit the power steering pump on the support (4).
turbocharger (3), position the bracket (7), drive in the Drive in the fastening screws (6) and tighten them to the
fastening screws (6 and 8) and tighten them to the prescribed prescribed torque.
torque.
Drive in the fastening screws (4) of the bracket (5) on the
cylinder head and tighten them to the prescribed torque.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

88425 88248
Lubricate a new seal ring (3) and fit it on the high pressure Fit the heat exchanger (4) with the new gasket and the pipe
pump (4). (2) on the cylinder block.
Position the joint (2) on the high pressure pump stem (4). Drive in the screws (1 and 3) and tighten them to the
Fit the high pressure pump (4) on the support (1), drive in prescribed torque.
the screws (5) and tighten them to the prescribed torque.
Figure 212
Figure 210
1 4
2 5
3 75508
Mount the glow plugs (1) and, using the box-type wrench SP.
6 2275 (2) and torque wrench 99389819 (3), tighten them to
a torque of 8 ÷ 10 Nm.
Figure 213
88249
Connect the low pressure pipes (5) with the new gaskets to
the high pressure pump (2) and tighten the pipe unions (1
and 3) to the prescribed torque.
Drive in the fastening screw (6) of the pipe (5) on the bracket
(4) and tighten it to the prescribed torque.
88428
Fit the suction manifold (1) with a new gasket.

Drive in the screws (2) and tighten them to the prescribed
torque. Fit the air temperature and pressure sensor (3).
Drive in the screw (4) and tighten it to the prescribed torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

75503 88431
Fit a new seal (3) on the electro-injector (1) and mount this Connect the fuel pipes (2) to the electro-injectors (3) and to
in the overhead (2). the hydraulic accumulator (1).
Tighten the screws (4) fixing the electro-injector brackets (5)
Figure 215
NOTE Whenever they get removed, the fuel pipes must

be replaced with new ones.
Figure 218
88429
Mount the brackets (3) fastening the electro-injectors (1)

and screw down the screws (2) without locking them.
Figure 216
88432
Using the wrench (2) of the 99317915 series and the torque
wrench 99389829 (1), tighten the fuel pipe fittings (3) and (4)
88430
Mount the hydraulic accumulator (1) and tighten the fixing

screws (2) to the prescribed torque.
Fit the pressure sensor (3) on the hydraulic accumulator (1)
and tighten it to the prescribed torque.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

88433 88252
Connect the fuel pipe (3) to the hydraulic accumulator (1) If present, fit the support (3), drive in the screws (4) and
and to the high-pressure pump (8). tighten them to the prescribed torque.
Tighten the couplings (2 and 5) using a wrench (7) in the Fit the fixed backstand (2), drive in the screw (1) and tighten
99317915 series and the torque wrench 99389829 (6). it to the prescribed torque.
Figure 222
NOTE Whenever they get removed, the fuel pipes (3)
must be replaced with new ones.
Fasten the pipe (3) on the support bracket with the bolt (4)
tightened to the prescribed torque.
Figure 220
90650
Fit (if present) the compressor of the air conditioner and

tighten the fastening screws to the prescribed torque.
Fit the flexible belt (3) equipped with tool 99360191 (2) on
the pulley (4) and apply the tool on the pulley (1).
Turn the drive shaft counterclockwise (⇒) until the belt fits
perfectly on the pulley (1).
88434
Lubricate the seal ring of the oil filter (2) with engine oil and
fasten it on the heat exchanger (3). Use tool 99360076 (1)
to tighten the oil filter to the prescribed torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

88239
88256
Complete engine assembly.
Connect the pipe (2) to the cover (6) and fasten it with the Fit on the left and right engine mountings (3) and tighten the
clamp (3). fixing screws to the prescribed torque.
Drive in the screw (1) and tighten it to the prescribed torque. Connect the oil pipe (2) to the turbocharger (1) and to the
Fit the pipe (5) of the oil level dip rod and fasten the support crankcase and tighten the fixing screws and the coupling of
bracket on the cylinder head by tightening the screw (4) to the oil pipe (2) to the prescribed torque.
the prescribed torque. If applicable, mount the following parts:
- Engine cable, connecting its electrical connections to the
Figure 224 thermostat temperature sensor, timing sensor, engine
speed sensor, pressure regulator, rail pressure sensor
and intake manifold air pressure/temperature sensor.
- Hydraulic accumulator guard.
- Top soundproofing cover.
- Add the prescribed grade and quantity of lubricating oil
to the engine.
764264 Timing speed sensor

764266 Engine speed sensor
Figure 226
88240
If present, refit the cooling fan (1) to the electro-magnetic

joint (2). Apply the spring equalizing rocker arm on the
engine lifting hooks, fasten the rocker arm to the hoist and
remove the engine from the rotating stand (3).
Remove the brackets 99361041(3).
88056
The sensor gap is:
- 1 mm, between the gear (4) of the camshaft and the
phase sensor (1).
- 1 mm, between the phonic wheel (2) and speed sensor
(1).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

5450 LUBRICATION Figure 227

General
The engine is lubricated by forced circulation performed by
the following parts:
- a gear oil pump with built-in depressor (GPOD);
- a pressure relief valve integrated in the oil pump;
- a heat exchanger made up of five elements;
- A double filtration oil filter with built-in safety valve.
Engine oil is drawn up from the sump by the oil pump
via the suction strainer and delivered under pressure to
the heat exchanger where it is cooled.
The oil continues through the oil filter and goes to
lubricate the relevant parts through ducts or pipes.
At the end of the lubrication cycle, the oil returns to the
sump by gravity. The oil filter can be excluded by the
safety valve built into it if it gets clogged.
In addition, the lubricating oil feeds the chain hydraulic
tightening devices for the control of the auxiliary
elements and the timing system and the hydraulic tappet.
Oil under pressure
Oil in freefall
Coolant
A. Pressure regulating valve closed - B. Pressure regulating valve open

88057
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

OIL PUMP/DEPRESSOR UNIT 503010 Oil pump

Characteristic data
Figure 228 transmission ratio 1
displacement 23.52 cm3
pumping diameter 49.5 mm
number of teeth 7
height 16 mm
oil pump minimum speed 780 rpm
oil pump max. speed 3500 rpm
oil pump over-revs 4200 rpm
oil pump forced over-revs 4900 rpm
speed 3500 rpm
torque - Nm
power draw (calc.) - W
Oil temperature: 100°C — closed recirculation —

max. outlet pressure 5 bars
88625
engine speed rpm
capacity (l/min)
1. Oil pump - 2. Oil pressure adjusting valve - (oil pump speed — rpm)
3. Depressor.
780 (862) -
3500 (4485)
NOTE Should the unit be faulty, not due to the oil
pressure adjusting valve, change the whole unit.
Figure 230
Figure 229
88690
SECTION B-B
Figure 231
88689
SECTIONS OF OIL PUMP/DEPRESSOR UNIT

1. Oil input pipe from cylinder block - 2. Oil suction pipe -
3. Oil pressure adjusting valve - 4. Oil delivery pipe -
5. Depressor air suction pipe - 6. Depressor oil suction
pipe.
88691
SECTION A-A
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Vacuum pump Figure 233

The vacuum pump (2, Figure 228), with radial blades, is also
incorporated in the GPOD (1, Figure 229). It is driven directly
by the oil pump.
transmission ratio 1
displacement 150 cm3
volume to drain 4.5 litres
chamber diameter 65 mm
rotor diameter 45.5 mm
cam 7.5 mm
number of blades 3
height 34 mm
vacuum pump minimum speed 780 rpm
vacuum pump max. speed 3500 rpm
vacuum pump over-revs 4200 rpm
vacuum pump forced over-revs 4900 rpm 88627
theoretical flow rate at minimum (air) - l/min
Oil pressure adjusting valve open
actual flow rate at minimum (air) —
at atmospheric pressure - l/min If in pipe C the oil pressure is equal or above 4.4 bar, the valve
Theoretical speed at max. speed — (air) - l/min (1), as a result of the pressure itself, wins through the spring
Actual flow rate at max. speed — (air) reaction (2) and goes down, thus opening communication
at atmospheric pressure - l/min between the delivery pipe A and the suction pipe B, through
draining holes D-E, and therefore the pressure drops.
measured power draw (maximum) When the pressure falls below 4.4 bar, the spring (2) takes
speed 3500 rpm the valve (1) to the initial position of closed valve.
torque - Nm
power draw (calc.) - W
Oil temperature: 100°C — engine speed 780 rpm

(pump speed 994 rpm) Disassembly
tank vacuum
0.5 0.8 Figure 234
(litres) (bar)
4.5 4.5 12.5
time (sec)
9 9.5 26.0
543475 Oil pressure adjusting valve
Figure 232
88058
Use the suitable wrench to remove the oil pressure adjusting

valve (1) from the oil pump.
88626
1. Oil input pipe from cylinder block - 2. Oil suction pipe -

3. Oil pressure adjusting valve - 4. Oil delivery pipe -
5. Depressor air suction pipe - 6. Depressor oil suction
pipe.
Pressure at opening start: 4.4 bar
Description of oil pressure adjusting valve closed
If in pipe C the oil pressure is below 4.4 bar, the valve (1)
closes the holes D - E.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 235 543070 Oil filter

Figure 237
88059
PARTS COMPRISING THE OIL PRESSURE

CONTROL VALVE
1. Split ring — 2. Valve — 3. Spring — 4. Valve casing.
Use the suitable pliers to remove the snap ring (1), take off
the valve (4) and the spring (3) from the valve body (2).
88061
Oil filter with built in by-pass valve — differential opening

pressure 2.5 ± 0.2 bar.
543110 Heat exchanger
Figure 236
Figure 238
88060
MAIN DATA OF THE OIL PRESSURE CONTROL

VALVE SPRING
88773
HEAT EXCHANGER COMPONENT DETAILS

Assembly 1. Heat exchanger made up of five elements - 2. Gasket -
For refitting, reverse the removal operations. 3. Box - 4. Pipe union - 5. Screw - 6. Oil filter support - 7.
Screw - 8. Heat exchanger box - 9. Gasket.
Disassembly
Remove the screws (5) and take off the heat exchanger (1)
from the box (3) with the gasket (8).
Remove the screws (7) and take off the oil filter support (6)
from the box (3).
Assembly
For refitting, reverse the removal operations and observe the
following warnings.
Clean accurately the heat exchanger (1).
Always change the gaskets (2, 9 and 8). Apply LOCTITE 577
on the threading of the pipe union (4) (if removed), drive it
in the support (1) and tighten it to the prescribed torque.
Tighten the screws to the prescribed torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

88685
Figure 240 88687
Figure 242
88686 88688
HEAT EXCHANGER SECTIONS

Oil flow from heat exchanger to oil filter
Oil flow from oil filter to cylinder block
Oil flow from cylinder block to heat exchanger
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

540480 Oil vapour recirculation (Blow-by) Figure 243

Part of the gas produced by the combustion during the
engine operation blows by the piston snap ring ports, in the
oil sump, and mixes with the oil vapours present in the oil
sump. This mixture, conveyed from the chain compartment
to the top, is partially separated from the oil by means of a
device situated on the top side of the distribution cover and
is introduced in the air suction system. This device consists
mainly of a rotating filter (3), fit flush on the stem (1), a high
pressure/shaft control and a cover (2) where the valves (4
and 5), usually closed, are fitted. The diaphragm valve (4)
regulates the partially purified mixture and keeps the pressure
inside the chain compartment around a value of ~ 10 ÷ 15
mbar.
The umbrella valve (5) discharges some of the oil still present
in the mixture coming from the filter (3) in the chain
compartment and the oil condenses in the chamber (6).
Operation
The mixture which passes through the rotating filter (3) is
partially purified from the oil particles, as a result of
centrifugation, and so these particles condense on the cover
walls to return to the lubrication circuit. The resulting purified
mixture is let in through the stem holes (1) and the
diaphragm valve consensus (4) inside the air vent upstream
of the turbocharger. The opening/closing of the valve (4)
depends mainly in the ratio between the pressure operating
the diaphragm (4) and the depression below it. The oil still
present in the mixture coming from the rotating filter (3) and
which condenses in the chamber (6) is drained into the chain
compartment through the umbrella valve (5), when the
pressure that keeps it closed drops as a result of the engine
stop.
Gas with oil level above 10 g/h

Gas with oil level ~ 0,2 g/h
Condensed oil returning to the oil sump
88062
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

5432 COOLING Figure 244

Description
The engine cooling system is the type with forced circulation
in a closed circuit. It comprises the following parts:
- An expansion tank whose plug has two valves
incorporated in it: an outlet and an inlet, which govern
the pressure of the system.
- A coolant level sensor at the base of the expansion tank.
- A pressure switch (3) notifies EDC central unit when
pressure inside expansion tank exceeds 0.4 bar value; in
this case, the central unit reduces engine performance
level by modifying injection flow rate (De-rating).
- An engine cooling module to dissipate the heat taken
from the engine by the coolant with a heat exchanger
for the intercooler.
- A heat exchanger to cool the lubricating oil.
- A centrifugal water pump incorporated in the crankcase.
- An electric fan comprising an electromagnetic coupling
on whose shaft a hub turns idle that is fitted with an
axially mobile metal plate on which is mounted the
impeller.
- A 3-way thermostat governing the circulation of the
coolant.
Operation
The water pump driven by a poly-V belt by the crankshaft
sends coolant into the crankcase and with a greater head into
the cylinder head.
working temperature, it causes the thermostat to open and
the fluid is channelled from here to the radiator and cooled
by the fan.
The pressure in the system due to the change in temperature
is governed by the outlet (2) and inlet (1) valves incorporated
in the expansion tank filler plug (detail A).
- to keep the system slightly pressurized so as to raise the
boiling point of the coolant;
produced in case of high coolant temperatures.
The function of the inlet valve (1) is to permit transferring the
coolant from the expansion tank to the radiator when a
lower pressure is created in the system due to the reduction
in volume of the coolant as a result of its temperature
lowering.
Inlet valve opening 0.005 — 0.02 kg/cm2.
B Thermostat closed
C Thermostat open
Hot
Very hot
Cold
88063
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

543212 Electromagnetic pulley Figure 246

Figure 245
88065
LONGITUDINAL CROSS-SECTION OF THE

WATER PUMP
1. Pump casing — 2. Pump drive shaft together with
bearing — 3. Seal — 4. Impeller.
543250 Thermostat
Figure 247
88064
CROSS-SECTION OF THE ELECTROMAGNETIC JOINT

Characteristics
Transmissible torque at 20°C with clutch run in 85 Nm
Voltage 12 Volts
Power input at 20°C 48 W
The electric fan control relay is activated or deactivated
according to the temperatures of: the engine coolant, the fuel
supercharging air and the pressure of the air conditioner fluid
(if present).
Turbocharging air temperature
Coolant temperature (if the sensor is not defective)
Fuel temperatures
(if the coolant temperature sensor is acknowledged to be 88066
defective by the EDC control unit)
With climate control system The by-pass thermostat (1) needs no adjustment.
If there is any doubt about its operation, replace it.
With pressure in the system The thermostat casing is fitted with the thermometric
it turns on 18.5 ± 0.98 bar switch/transmitter and water temperature sensor.
it turns off 14.58 ± 0.98 bar
A. — A1 Start of stroke at 79 ± 2 °C.
B. Valve (1) stroke at 94 ± 2 °C ≥ 7 mm.
B1 Valve (2) stroke 94 ± 2 °C, 6.4 mm
The stroke of 7 mm less than 60”.
543210 Water pump
The water pump cannot be overhauled. In case of coolant
leaking from the seal or damage, it must be replaced.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TURBOCHARGING
Figure 248
HOT AIR AT ATMOSPHERIC TEMPERATURE
HOT COMPRESSED AIR
COLD COMPRESSED AIR
EXHAUST GAS
COLD EXHAUST GAS 88068
TURBOCHARGING DIAGRAM
Description
The turbocharging system comprises an air filter, The function of the turbocharger is to use the energy of the
turbocharger and intercooler. engine’s exhaust gas to send pressurized air to the cylinders.
The air filter is the dry type comprising a filtering cartridge to The intercooler comprises a radiator included in the engine
be periodically replaced. coolant radiator and its function is to lower the temperature
of the air leaving the turbocharger to send it to the cylinders.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

542410 Turbocharger type MITSUBISHI TD 4 HL-13T - 6

Figure 249
88620
A. THROTTLE VALVE SHUT B. THROTTLE VALVE OPEN

Figure 250
88621
The turbocharger installed on the engine F1C AE0481 A - a pressure relief valve applied on the turbine body. Its
(136 CV) is fitted with pressure relief valve (waste-gate). function is to choke the output of the exhaust gases
It is basically composed of: (detail B) and send part of them directly into the exhaust
pipe, when the supercharging pressure downstream of
- a central casing housing a shaft supported by bushings at
the turbocharger is above the rated valued;
whose opposite ends are fitted the turbine wheel and
the compressor rotor;
- a turbine casing and a compressor casing mounted on
the end of the central body;
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

REPAIRS
Figure 252
NOTE On finding irregular engine operation due to the
turbocharging system, it is first expedient to
perform the checks on the turbocharger, check the
efficiency of the seals and the fixing of the couplings,
additionally checking there is no clogging in the
check that the oil circulation pipes are not burst or
clogged, in which case replace them or eliminate
the trouble.
88623
Rest the tip of the dial gauge (1) with a magnetic base on the
end of the tie rod (2) and zero it. Using the device 99367121
(3), introduce compressed air into the valve casing (4) at the
prescribed pressure and make sure this value stays constant
throughout the check; replace the valve if it doesn’t. In the
above conditions, the tie rod must have made the prescribed
542418 Pressure relief valve travel.
Checking and adjusting pressure relief valve
Figure 253
Figure 251
88624
If a different value is detected, slacken the nut (3) and rotate

the tie rod (4) as required.
Changing the pressure relief valve

88622
Remove the fastener (2) of the tie rod on the lever (1) and
take off the valve (5) from the turbocharger by pulling out the
Cover the air, exhaust gas and lubricating oil inlets and fastening screws (6).
outlets. Thoroughly clean the outside of the turbocharger
using anticorrosive and antioxidant fluid. Disconnect the pipe Fit the new valve by carrying out the operations for removal
(2) from the union of the pressure relief valve (1) and fit on in reverse order and adjust the travel of the tie rod as
it the pipe of the device 99367121 (3, Figure 252). described under the relevant heading.

necessary to fill the central body with engine
lubricating oil.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

542410 GARRET GT 2256 T variable Figure 255

geometry turbosupercharger
(engine F1C E0481 B - 166 HP)
General
The variable geometry turbosupercharger consists of the
following:
- centrifugal supercharger (1);
- turbine (2);
- set of mobile blades (3);
- mobile blade control pneumatic actuator (4), vacuum
controlled by proportional solenoid valve controlled by
EDC 16 ECU.
Variable geometry enables:
- to increase the speed of the exhaust gases running into
the turbine at low engine rpm;
- to decrease the speed of the exhaust gases running into
the turbine at high engine rpm.
82871
To obtain the max. engine volumetric efficiency also at low
rpm (with on-load engine).
Operation at low engine rpm Operation at high engine rpm

62870 62872
1. TURBINE - 2. MOBILE BLADES - 3. PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR - 4. REVOLVING RING
When engine is running at low speed, the exhaust gases The ECU, through the actuator control solenoid valve,
show weak kinetic energy; under these conditions a modulates the vacuum acting on the diaphragm, so actuator
traditional turbine shall rotate slowly, thus providing a limited (3) controls through the tie rod, the gradual opening of the
booster pressure. mobile blades (2) until reaching the max. open position.
In the variable geometry turbine (1), the mobile blades (2) are Blade through-sections results larger thus producing a speed
set to max. closed position and the small through-sections decrease in exhaust gas flow through the turbine (1) with
between the blades increase the inlet gas speed. Higher inlet speeds equal to or lower than those of the low rpm
speeds involve higher tip speeds of the turbine and therefore condition.
of the turbosupercharger. Turbine (1) speed is therefore adjusted to a proper value
Engine speed increase results in a gradual increase of exhaust enabling suitable engine operation at high speeds.
gas kinetic energy, and also in turbine (1) speed and booster
pressure increase.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Proportional solenoid valve controlling Actuator

turbocharger actuator
Figure 259
Figure 257
62875
SECTION ON THE ACTUATOR
62876
The solenoid valve modulates the low pressure controlling The actuator diaphragm, connected to the control rod, is
the turbocharger actuator, taken from the air circuit of the governed by the low pressure on the top of the actuator.
servo brake, according to the information exchanged
The low pressure modulated by the proportional solenoid
between the electronic control unit and the sensors: engine
valve varies the movement of the diaphragm and, as a result,
speed, throttle pedal position and pressure/temperature
of the rod governing the turbine’s mobile blades.
fitted on the intake manifold.
As a result, the actuator varies the opening of the blades of
the turbocharger that adjust the flow of exhaust gases.
Figure 258
62869
TURBOCHARGING FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM

1. Variable geometry turbocharger - 2. Pneumatic actuator - 3. Proportional solenoid valve - 4. Air filter -
5. EDC 16 control unit - 6. Servo brake - 7. Vacuum device - 8. High-pressure pump.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

REPAIRS
NOTE NOT ALLOWED ARE:
542451 Checking and adjusting the actuator
- any replacement or regulation of the
actuator, since the calibration of such
Figure 260
component is made in an optimal way
for each turbocharger and is
guaranteed for the turbocharger;
- any operation on nut (5) and ring nut
(4), since such operation does not
change engine supply characteristics
but may impair engine reliability and
duration.
Ring nut (4) is sealed with antitempering
yellow paint.
In case of engines under guarantee, each
above specified intervention and/or
alteration to paint applied on ring nut (4)
causes the lapse of the guarantee.
62873
Cover air, exhaust gas and lubricant inlets and outlets.

Clean the turbosupercharger outside accurately using
anticorrosive and antioxidant fluid and check the actuator
(6).
Clamp the turbosupercharger in a vice.
Apply vacuometer 99367121 (1) pipe to actuator (6) hose.
Apply the magnetic base gauge (2) to exhaust gas inlet flange
in the turbine.
Set gauge (2) feeler pin on tie rod (3) end and set gauge (2)
to zero.
Operate the vacuum pump and check whether the tie rod
(3) stroke values correspond to the vacuum values shown in
the following table:
- vacuum 0 mm Hg Fully open valve

Valve stroke
- vacuum 180 mm Hg
2.5 mm
Valve stroke
- vacuum 450 mm Hg
10.5 mm
If a different value is found, loosen nut (5) and operate on the

knurled ring nut (4) as required.
Once the adjustment has been carried out, tighten the nut
(5) to torque 5.6 ÷ 6.8 Nm.
NOTE During the check the vacuum value shall not fall,
otherwise the actuator shall be replaced.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

FUEL SUPPLY
HIGH-PRESSURE ELECTRONIC INJECTION SYSTEM (EDC 16)
General
Figure 261
The main characteristics of the high pressure electronic
injection system are:
to the maximum operating pressure of 1600 bar,
irrespective of the speed of rotation and engine load;
- capacity to operate at very high speeds (up to 6000
rpm);
- injection control precision (injection duration and
advance);
- lower emissions.
- checking glow plugs;
- self-diagnosis;
- connection with immobilizer unit;
- checking maximum torque limitation.
before the TDC with the advantage of decreasing the
- engine speed;
- turbocharging pressure; High pressure pipings
- air temperature;
- intake air quantity; Low pressure pipings
- battery voltage; 90065
- diesel pressure;
- position of throttle pedal. HIGH PRESSURE ELECTRONIC INJECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS LOCATION SCHEME
1. Stroke sensor - 2. Electric injectors - 3. Pre-heating glow plug - 4. Coolant temperature sensor for EDC - 5. Electromagnetic fan - 6. Modulator for E.G.R. valve (if present) - 7. Engine speed sensor -
8. Compressor (if present) - 9. High pressure pump - 10. Pressure regulator - 11. Fuel temperature sensor - 12. Fuel filter clogging sensor - 13. Fuel filter - 14. Electric feed pump -
15. Fuel pre-filter - 16. Fuel tank - 17. Battery - 18. Central unit with atmospheric pressure sensor - 19. Accelerator pedal sensor - 20. Clutch pedal sensors - 21. Brake pedal sensors - 22. Fuel non
return valve - 23. Heater - 24. Air pressure/temperature sensor - 25. Hydraulic accumulator (rail) pressure sensor- 26. Hydraulic accumulator (rail) - 27. Transmitter for thermometer and warning lamp
temperature dangerous - 28. Gear with slots to detect stroke from sensor (1) - 29. Engine revolution indicator - 30. Tachograph - 31 Thermostarter warning indicator.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ENGINE
SYSTEM OPERATION Checking regular engine rotation (anti-sawing)

Self-diagnosis — BLINK CODE It ensures regular engine rotation at a constant rate while
The control unit self-diagnosis system checks the signals from increasing revs.
the sensors, comparing them with the admitted limits (see The control unit processes the signals received from the
relative heading): sensors and determines the amount of fuel to be injected via:
- the pressure regulator;
Immobilizer recognition - the electro-injector opening time.
it communicates with the immobilizer control unit to enable Checking smokiness at exhaust on
starting. acceleration
Checking fuel temperature from the air introduction meter and engine speed sensor, the
control unit determines the optimum amount of fuel to inject:
With the fuel temperature greater than 75°C, detected by the
sensor on the fuel filter, the control unit operates the pressure - it operates the pressure regulator;
regulator to decrease the line pressure (injection times are not - it varies the electro-injector injection time.
changed). If the temperature exceeds 90°C, the power is
reduced to 60%. Checking exhaust gas recirculation (E.G.R. if
present)
Checking engine coolant temperature Depending on the engine load and the signal from the
The control unit, depending on the temperature: accelerator pedal sensor, the control unit limits the amount of
air taken in, actuating partial suction of the exhaust gases.
- of the engine coolant, turbocharging air and fuel, operates
the electromagnetic fan (Baruffaldi) and switches on the Checking top speed limit
coolant temperature warning light.
Checking quantity of fuel injected two action strategies:
According to the signals from the sensors and the mapped - at 4250 rpm it cuts off the fuel, decreasing the
values, the control unit: electro-injector opening time;
- operates the pressure regulator; - over 5000 rpm it deactivates the electro-injectors.
- varies the ”pilot” injection time to 2200 rpm; Checking regular rotation on acceleration
- varies the ”main” injection time.
Regular progression is assured in all conditions by the control
Checking idling adjustment of the pressure regulator and the electro-injector opening
time.
The control unit processes the signals from the various sensors
and regulates the amount of fuel injected:
Checking glow plug control unit
The injection control unit, in the phase of:
Within certain thresholds the speed takes account of the - starting
battery voltage. - after-starting
times operation of the glow plugs according to the engine
Fuel cut-off in release phase temperature.
In the phase of releasing the throttle pedal the control unit
actuates the following logic elements: Checking activation of air-conditioning system
- it cuts off supply to the electro-injectors; The control unit operates the air-conditioning compressor:
- it partially reactivates supply to the electro-injectors - switching it on/off when the relative switch is pressed;
before reaching idling speed; - momentarily turning it off (approximately 6 sec.) if the
- it operates the fuel pressure regulator. engine coolant reaches the set temperature.
Checking cylinder balancing on idling Checking fuel pump

According to the signals received from the sensors, the control Irrespective of the speed, the control unit:
unit controls the regularity of the torque at idling speed: - supplies the auxiliary fuel pump with the key on MAR;
- it varies the amount of fuel injected into the single - cuts off auxiliary pump supply if the engine is not started
electro-injectors (injection time). up within a few seconds.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004


known.
unit determines the optimum point of injection according to Injection timing electronic test
internal mapping.
The advance (start of delivery, expressed in degrees) may be
different from one injection to the next, also differentiated
Checking injection pressure closed cycle from one cylinder to another. It is calculated, similarly to the
Depending on the engine load, determined by processing the delivery, in relation to the engine load (accelerator position,
signals from the various sensors, the control unit operates the engine speed and air introduced).
regulator to obtain optimum line pressure. The advance is appropriately corrected:
Fuel supply - according to the water temperature.
The fuel supply is calculated in relation to: And also to obtain:
- accelerator pedal position - lower emissions, noise and overloading;
- engine speed - better vehicle acceleration.
- quantity of air introduced. An extremely high advance is set on starting, depending on the
The outcome may be corrected in relation to: water temperature.
- the water temperature. Feedback from the start of delivery is supplied by the change
in impedance of the injector solenoid valve.
Or to avoid:
- noise Speed governor
- smoke The electronic speed governor has both features of
- overloading governors:
- overheating
- idling and top speed
- all speeds
It is stable in ranges where conventional, mechanical governors
- action of external devices (ABS), ABD, EDB are imprecise.
- serious trouble decreasing the load or stopping the
engine. Engine starting
After determining the mass of air introduced by measuring its During the first few turns of the engine, the timing and cylinder
volume and temperature, the control unit calculates the no. 1 recognition signals (flywheel sensor and camshaft sensor)
corresponding mass of fuel to inject into the relevant cylinder are synchronized.
(mg per delivery) also taking into account the temperature of The accelerator pedal signal is ignored on starting. Starting
the diesel. delivery is set only according to water temperature, by a
The mass of fuel calculated in this way is first converted into special map.
volume (mm3 per delivery) and then into degrees of throw, When the control unit detects such speed and acceleration of
or duration of injection. the flywheel as to be able to consider the engine started up
Correcting flow rate according to water accelerator pedal.
temperature
A cold engine meets with greater resistance during operation:
friction is high, the oil is still very viscous, and the various
clearances are not yet optimized.
In addition, the injected fuel tends to condense on the metal
surfaces that are still cold.
The fuel supply for a cold engine is therefore greater than for
a warm one.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


relation to the temperature (while the glow plugs in the Individual cylinder balancing contributes to increasing comfort
cylinder head heat the air), then flashes. It is now possible to and handling.
start up the engine. This function permits individual, customized control over the
When the motor is running this indicator light goes out, while delivery of fuel and the start of delivery for each cylinder, even
the glow plugs continue to be powered for a certain length of differently from one cylinder to another, to compensate for
time (variable) for post-heating. the hydraulic tolerances of the injector.
within 20-25 seconds (inattention time), the operation is various injectors cannot be evaluated directly by the control
voltage.
Warm starting
stopped into the main memory (see After Run) and makes a of the crankshaft, injection will take place in that cylinder, so
diagnosis of the system. the control unit just needs to get synchronized on the firing
After run
data from the main memory (volatile) to a non-volatile
memory, which can be erased and written over (EEPROM),
so as to make it available at the next start up (see Run Up).
- fault memory.

the control unit.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 262
87245
FUEL SUPPLY AND RECIRCULATION SYSTEM DIAGRAM
1. Injector fuel exhaust pipe - 2. Plug - 3. Electric injector - 4. Multiple pipe union - 5. Pressure regulator - 6. High pressure
pump CP3.2 with built-in feeding pump- 7. Fuel delivery pipe to high pressure pump - 8. Sensor for water presence in the fuel
filter - 9. Fuel filter - 10. Fuel return pipe to the filter - 11. Fuel inlet pipe from the reservoir - 12. Temperature sensor
connector - 13. Fuel return pipe to the reservoir - 14. Fuel filter clogged sensor - 15. Non-return valve - 16. High pressure fuel
delivery pipe to the hydraulic accumulator (rail) - 17. Pressure sensor - 18. High pressure fuel delivery pipe to the electric
injectors - 19. Hydraulic accumulator (rail).
Check valve characteristics

opening pressure 0.5 + 0.05
- 0.1
bar High pressure fuel pipes
differential pressure less than 0.2 bar at 120 litres/h of fuel.
Low pressure fuel recirculation pipes
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

OPERATION HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

In this injection system, the pressure regulator, located The hydraulic system is composed of:
upstream from the high-pressure pump, governs the flow of - tank
fuel needed in the low-pressure system. Afterwards, the
- fuel pre-filter
high-pressure pump correctly supplies the hydraulic
accumulator. - electric supply pump
- fuel filter
This solution, pressurizing solely the necessary fuel, improves - high pressure supply pump with supply pump built
the energy efficiency and limits heating the fuel in the system. inpressure regulator
The relief valve fitted on the high-pressure pump has the
- manifold (rail)
function of keeping the pressure, at the pressure regulator
inlet, constant at 5 bars; irrespective of the efficiency of the fuel - electro-injectors
filter and of the system upstream. The action of the relief valve - supply pipes and fuel recirculation
causes an increase in the flow of fuel in the high-pressure pump
cooling circuit.
The high-pressure pump continually keeps the fuel at the
working pressure, irrespective of the timing and the cylinder
that is to receive the injection and accumulates it in a duct Fuel pipes
common to all the electro-injectors.
Figure 263
At the electro-injector inlet, there is therefore always fuel at
the injection pressure calculated by the electronic control unit.
When the solenoid valve of an electro-injector is energized by
the electronic control unit, fuel taken straight from the
hydraulic accumulator gets injected into the relevant cylinder.
The hydraulic system is made out of a low-pressure fuel
recirculation circuit and a high-pressure circuit.
The high-pressure circuit is composed of the following pipes:
- pipe connecting the high-pressure pump outlet to the
Rail;
- hydraulic accumulator;
- pipes supplying the electro-injectors.
The low-pressure circuit is composed of the following pipes:
88619
- fuel intake pipe from the tank to the pre-filter;
- pipes supplying the mechanical supply pump and the
pre-filter; 1. Fuel filter mounting - 2. High-pressure pump supply pipe
- pipes supplying the high-pressure pump via the fuel filter. quick-coupling fitting — 3. Supply pipe quick-coupling fitting.
The fuel system is also fitted with the fuel exhaust circuit and If disconnecting the fuel pipes (2-3) from the mounting (1), it
the electric injectors. is necessary, when refitting, to make sure their fittings are
According to the high performance of this hydraulic system, perfectly clean. This is to avoid an imperfect seal and fuel
for reasons of safety it is necessary to: getting out.
- avoid connecting high-pressure pipe fittings with
approximate tightening;
- avoid disconnecting the high-pressure pipes with the
engine running (NEVER try bleeding, which is both
pointless and dangerous).
The integrity of the low-pressure circuit is also essential for the
system to work properly; it is therefore necessary to avoid all
manipulation and modifications and act only in the event of
leakage.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

773010 Fuel pump
Figure 264
50707
This rotary positive displacement pump with integrated The pump has two valves, a check valve to prevent the fuel
by-pass is mounted on the suction pipe, on the left-hand side circuit from emptying (with the pump stationary) and an
of the chassis frame. overpressure valve that recirculates the delivery with the inlet
brush motor with energizing by permanent magnets. Specifications
Delivery pressure: 2.5 bar
Flow rate: > 155 litres/h
Power supply: 13.5 V - < 5 A
Coil resistance at 20°C: 28.5 Ohms
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

542011 Fuel filter

Figure 265
88618
1. Bleeding screw - 2. Temperature sensor connector - 3. Heater support - 4. Water presence sensor - 5. Heater connector -
6. Threaded insert - 7. Fuel filter - 8. Water separator - 9. Filter clogged sensor - 10. Connector - 11. Connector.
The fuel filter screwed on the heater support (3) consists of Tightening torques
a cartridge (6) fitted with water sensor (7).
The water accumulation capacity (A) of the filter is approx. 1. Bleed screw 4 Nm
100 cm3. 4. Water indicator 0.8±1.2 Nm
The water indicator (4) is mounted on the bottom end. 6. Insert 30±2 Nm
Unscrewing the indicator (4) drains off any water. 7. Fuel filter tightening 18±2 Nm
The heater support (3) has the temperature sensor built-in 9. Tightening of clog sensor 20±2 Nm
(9). 10. Connector 35±2 Nm
A clogging warning sensor (9) is screwed on the support (3). 11. Connector 35±2 Nm
When the temperature of the diesel is less than 6°C, an
electric heating element warms it up to at most 15°C before
sending it to the high pressure pump.
differential working pressure 1.1 bar
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

775010 High-pressure pump

Figure 266
88070
1. Feed mechanical pump - 2. High pressure pump CP3 - 3. Pressure regulator

A. Return to reservoir - B. Delivery to hydraulic accumulator (Rail) - C. Fuel inlet pipe from the filter -
D. Return from injectors - E. Return from hydraulic accumulator (Rail).
Pump with 3 radial pumping elements controlled via a gear by

the timing belt; it needs no timing. On the rear of the NOTE The high-pressure pump — supply pump assembly
high-pressure pump there is the mechanical supply pump, cannot be overhauled and therefore the fixing
controlled by the shaft of the high-pressure pump. screws must be neither removed nor tampered
The pump is lubricated and cooled by the fuel. with. The only permissible job is replacing the driving
gear.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 267
88739
1. Pressure regulator - 2. Modulating valve 5 bar - 3. Fuel filler from the filter - 4. Pump shaft - 5. Delivery valve to hydraulic
accumulator (rail) - 6. Fuel return from high pressure pump - 7. Feed mechanical pump - 8. Delivery valve on single pumping
element.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
High-pressure pump internal structure

Figure 268
Sec. B - B
Sec. C - C
88071
1. Cylinder — 2. Three-lobed element — 3. Plate intake valve — 4. Ball delivery valve — 5. Plunger — 6. Pump shaft —
7. Low-pressure fuel inlet — 8. Fuel ducts to supply pumping elements.
Each pumping assembly comprises: in a circular movement on a wider radius, with the result
of working the three pumping elements alternately:
- a plunger (5) operated by a three-lobed element (2)
floating on the shaft of the pump (6). Since the element - a plate intake valve (3);
(2) floats on a misaligned portion of the shaft (6), during
- a ball delivery valve (4).
shaft rotation, it does not turn with it but is only shifted
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Working principle
Figure 269
Sec. B - B
B--B
Figure 270
Sec. D - D
88072
1. Outlet for delivery to rail — 2. Delivery valve to rail — 3. Pumping element — 4. Pump shaft — 5. Pumping element supply
duct — 6. Pressure regulator supply duct — 7. Pressure regulator.
The pumping element (3) is arranged on the cam on the pump received from the control unit, chokes the flow of fuel to the
shaft. In the suction phase, the pumping element is supplied pumping element. During the compression phase of the
through the supply duct (5). The amount of fuel to send to the pumping element, the fuel, on reaching such a pressure as to
pumping element is determined by the pressure regulator (7). open the delivery valve to the common rail (2), supplies it
The pressure regulator, on the basis of the PWM command through the outlet (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 271
Sec. C - C (Figure 270)
72598 88073
1, 3, 6 Pumping element inlet — 2. Pump lubrication ducts — 4. Main pumping element supply duct — 5. Pressure regulator —
7. Regulator outlet duct — 8. Relief valve 5 bar — 9. Fuel outlet from regulator inlet.
Figure 271 shows the low-pressure fuel routing in the pump; The pressure regulator (5) determines the amount of fuel with
it highlights the main supply duct of the pumping elements (4), which to supply the pumping elements; excess fuel flows out
the supply ducts of the pumping elements (1-3-6), the ducts through the duct (9).
used to lubricate the pump (2), the pressure regulator (5), the
The 5-bar relief valve, besides acting as a manifold for the fuel
5-bar relief valve (8) and the fuel outlet.
outlets, has the function of keeping the pressure constant at
The pump shaft is lubricated by the fuel through the delivery 5 bars at the regulator inlet.
and return ducts (2).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 272
72600
72601
Sec. A - A (Figure 270)
1, 2 Fuel outlet ducts — 3. Fuel outlet from the pump with coupling for high-pressure pipe for the common rail.
The figure shows the high-pressure fuel flow through the

outlet ducts of the pumping elements.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

771034 Pressure control valve MECHANICAL SUPPLY PUMP

The fuel pressure regulator is mounted on the low-pressure Normal working condition
circuit of the CP3 pump. The pressure regulator modulates
the amount of fuel sent to the high-pressure circuit according
Figure 275
to the commands received directly from the engine control
unit. The pressure regulator is mainly composed of the
following components:
- connector
- casing
- solenoid
- pre-load spring
- shutter cylinder.
When there is no signal, the pressure regulator is normally
open, therefore with the pump providing maximum delivery.
The engine control unit, via the PWM (Pulse Width
Modulation) signal, modulates the change in fuel flow rate in
the high-pressure circuit by partially closing or opening the
72592
sections of passage of the fuel in the low-pressure circuit.
Operation A. Fuel inlet from the tank — B. Fuel outlet to the filter —
1, 2 By-pass valves in closed position.
Figure 273
The function of the gear pump, mounted on the rear of the
high-pressure pump, is to supply the high-pressure pump. It is
governed by the shaft of the high-pressure pump.
In normal working conditions, the flow of fuel inside the
mechanical pump is shown in the figure.
Conditions of outlet overpressure
Figure 276
75574
1. Solenoid — 2. Magnetic core — 3. Shutter cylinder —

4. Fuel inlet — 5. Fuel outlet.
When the engine control unit governs the pressure regulator
(via PWM signal), the solenoid (1) is energized that, in its turn,
generates the movement of the magnetic core (2). The shift 72593
of the core causes the shutter cylinder (3) to move axially,
choking the flow of fuel. The by-pass valve (1) trips when overpressure is generated at
the outlet B. The pressure, overcoming the elastic resistance
of the spring of the valve (1), sets the outlet in communication
Figure 274 with the inlet via the duct (2).
Conditions of bleeding
Figure 277
75575
1. Solenoid — 2. Magnetic core — 3. Pre-load spring — 72594

4. Shutter cylinder. The by-pass valve (1) trips when, with the engine switched off,
When the solenoid (1) is not energized, the magnetic core is you want to fill the supply system via the priming pump. In this
pushed into the rest position by the pre-load spring (3). In this situation, the by-pass valve (2) opens, due to the effect of the
condition, the shutter cylinder (4) is in such a position as to inlet pressure, and the fuel flows out via the outlet B.
offer the fuel the greatest section of passage.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

774510 Hydraulic accumulator (rail) Figure 280

Figure 278
Fc
88418
The hydraulic accumulator is fitted on the cylinder head on the

suction side. Fa
With its volume of approximately 23 cm3 it dampens the

pressure ripples of the fuel due to:
- the operation of the high-pressure pump;
- the opening of the electro-injectors.
On the hydraulic accumulator (1) there is the fuel pressure
sensor (2).
775010 ELECTRO-INJECTORS
Figure 279 50704
1 Pressure rod — 2 Pin — 3 Nozzle — 4 Coil — 5 Pilot valve —

6 Ball shutter — 7 Control area — 8. Pressure chamber -
9 Control volume — 10 Low-pressure fuel return —
11 Control pipe — 12. Feeding pipe - 13 Electrical
connection — 14 High-pressure fuel inlet fitting — 15 Spring.
Operation
phases:
- ”rest position”
The coil (4) is de-energised and the shutter (6) is in closed
75588 position and does not allow the fuel to get in the cylinder, Fc
> Fa (Fc: due to the fuel pressure operating the rod (1) control
The electro-injectors have high-pressure supply (up to 1600 area (7). Fa: due to the line pressure operating in the pressure
bar) and recirculation at atmospheric pressure, necessary for chamber (8).
the diesel used to operate the pilot valve. - ”start of injection”
The temperature of the diesel put back into circulation by the The coil (4) is energized and causes the shutter (6) to rise.
electro-injector can get very high (approximately 120°C). The fuel of the control volume (9) flows off towards the return
The head of the electro-injector has a fitting for the electrical manifold (10) causing a drop in pressure in the control area
connector. (7).
They are mounted on the cylinder head and operated by the At the same time, the line pressure through the fuel pipe (12)
injection control unit. exerts in the pressure chamber (8) a force equal to Fa > Fc
The electric injector can be subdivided into two parts (see and thus makes the pin (2) lift and so the fuel gets in the
Figure 280): cylinders.
The electro-injector can be divided into two parts: - ”end of injection”
- actuator/jet composed of pressure rod (1), pin (2) and The coil (4) is de-energized and makes the shutter (6) return
nozzle (3); to its closed position. This recreates such a balance in the
- control solenoid valve composed of coil (4) and pilot consequently end injection.
valve (5).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS The spark plug control takes place through the spark plug
766161 Electronic control unit EDC 16 pre-warming control unit according to the engine
temperature under the direct control of the engine control
Figure 281 unit EDC 16.
K A
The pre-heating control unit contains an “intelligent”
contactor that sends feedback to the control unit that is thus
informed about any fault with the pre-heating control unit or
shorting to earth of the glow plugs.
761915 Glow plugs

Figure 283
85711
The control unit is a ”flash EPROM” and so it can be

reprogrammed from outside without changing the hardware.
It processes the signals from the sensors by applying software
algorithms and controls the actuators (especially the
electro-injectors and pressure regulator).
built in to further improve the control of the injection system.
The control unit is mounted on the left-hand side of the engine 75579
bay and is connected to the vehicle’s wiring harness by two CONTROL VALUES
60-pin connectors:
With a constant supply voltage of 11 V:
- 60-pin connector A for the components on the engine
- 94-pin connector K for the components on the vehicle - max. current drawn 18 A
In addition to handling the operation of the system described - in 5 sec. 11 ±1.5 A
under the relevant heading, the electronic control unit is - in 30 sec. 6 ±0.9 A
interfaced with the other electronic systems on the vehicles - temperature after 7 sec. 850°C
such as ABS — EBD cruise control, speed limiting device, - tightening torque 8-10 Nm
immobilizer (IVECO CODE), EGR and glow plugs.
761917 Glow plug electronic control unit SENSORS
Engine speed sensor

Figure 282
It is an inductive sensor and is positioned on the phonic wheel
fitted on the front end of the drive shaft
It generates the signals resulting from the magnetic flow lines
which close through the teeth of the phonic wheel.
Tooth number 58.
The electronic control unit uses this signal to measure the
speed of rotation of the engine, its angular position and to
operate the electronic rev counter.
If this signal fails the rev counter will not work.
Camshaft timing sensor
It is an inductive sensor and is positioned on the camshaft gear
of the suction valves.
It generates the signals resulting from the magnetic flow lines
which close through a slot on the gear itself.
The signal generated by this sensor is used by the electronic
control unit as a redundant signal to measure the different
75578
engine speeds.
The engine control unit, in the phase of:
- starting
- after-starting
times the operation of the glow plug control unit according to
the engine temperature.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

772655 Air temperature and pressure sen- 772642 Brake pedal position sensor
sor There are two of these sensors mounted on the pedal board.
Positioned on the intake manifold, it measures the pressure of With the brake pedal released, they provide the control unit
the turbocharging air introduced into the intake manifold. with a positive signal that is used to detect brake operation so
This value, together with that of the air temperature sensor, as to deactivate the Cruise Control function and stop delivery
makes it possible for the electronic control unit to calculate the of fuel.
exact quantity of air introduced into the cylinders so as to In addition, a sensor switches on the brake lights.
operate the injectors adjusting the fuel delivery, limiting
harmful emissions, improving consumption and performance.
The sensor contains an electronic temperature correction 764261 Vehicle speed sensor
circuit to optimize the pressure measurement in relation to
the temperature of the intake air. This sensor, mounted on the gearbox by the drive output
shaft, transmits the vehicle speed signal, through the electronic
tachograph, to the control unit.
Integrated in the fuel filter, it measures the fuel temperature ACTUATORS
and transmits it to the electronic control unit. The injection system comprises three classes of actuators
When the fuel temperature is too high (ambient temperature interlocked with the electronic control unit:
condition, engine at full load and tank in reserve), correct
- electro-injectors (see relevant heading);
lubrication of the high-pressure pump is no longer assured. On
the basis of the values received, the control unit determines - regulators (see relevant headings) requiring PWM control
the density and volume of the fuel, correcting the delivery (Pulse Width Modulation):
limiting engine performance. • for pressure
• EGR (if mounted)
• turbocharger with variable geometry (if mounted);
- actuators with continuous ON/OFF signal to:
It is fitted on the hydraulic accumulator end (rail) and its • engage electromagnetic coupling for radiator cooling
function is to transmit a “feed-back” signal to the injection fan;
control unit for: • turn on/off air-conditioner compressor (if mounted);
- adjust injection pressure • Cruise Control;
- adjust the duration of injection. • starter heater control;
• fuel filter heating;
• electric supply pump.
766161 Atmospheric pressure sensor
This is integrated in the electronic control unit. It provides a
criterion of correction for the measurement of the air flow NOTE All the power controls are made with relays located
rate and to calculate the reference air flow rate to check the in the cab.
EGR.
PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) controls
764254 Engine coolant temperature sensor A PWM control has an active and an inactive state that
alternate within a constant set length of time. During the active
This provides the control unit with an index of the thermal
state the actuator control circuit is closed, which is thus
status of the engine in order to determine corrections for the
powered with the control voltage; whereas, during the
fuel delivery, injection pressure, EGR injection advance when
inactive state the circuit is open.
starting cold (if mounted) and warm-up.
The duration of the two states may be varied with the
505910 Throttle pedal position sensor of the modulation delivery.
The duration of the active state determines the duty-cycle,
The accelerator pedal position sensor provides the control which is normally expressed as a percentage of the total time.
unit with a voltage value in proportion to the angle of Therefore, if the duration of the two active and passive states
operation of the pedal determining fuel delivery. are the same, the duty-cycle is equal to 50%.
For reasons of diagnostics, the duty-cycle is limited between
1% and 99%; the control resolution is equal to 0.005%
772641 Clutch pedal position sensor (1/20000 of the time).
Mounted on the pedal board, it provides the control unit with The time length has been chosen taking account of the
a positive signal when the clutch is engaged (pedal released). dynamic actuator response specifications.
Every time the clutch is disengaged to change gear, the control Too low a carrier frequency could cause oscillations in the
unit fails to receive this signal and deactivates the Cruise actuator, while too high a frequency would decrease control
Control function. resolution.
The control of the E.G.R. (if fitted) and the turbocharger with
variable geometry (if fitted) occurs through the idle
modulating valve.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY CLUTCH 1
SECTION 3
5052 Clutch
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
CHARACTERISTICS AND DATA . . . . . . . . . . . 7
TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
CLUTCH REMOVAL AND REFITTING . . . . . . . 16
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
THRUST BEARING REMOVAL AND REFITTING 17
HYDRAULIC CLUTCH DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
HYDRAULIC CLUTCH DRIVE

REMOVAL - REFITTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
PEDAL BOARD REMOVAL - REFITTING . . . . . 22
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
PEDAL BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

2 CLUTCH DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY CLUTCH 3
DESCRIPTION
The clutch unit consists of the following: The introduction of a diaphragm spring (or Belville washer) as
an elastic driving brings about important advantages, such as:
- a driven disk - lined on both sides with friction seals and
fitted with a hub at the centre. Additionally, a hub spring - smaller axial size and reduced sensibility of the centrifugal
is provided to make it more elastic and soft; force, due to the absence of the release lever;
- a thrust pad - fixed to the cover or body of the friction - greater constructive accuracy due to the reduced number
clutch mechanism by means of plates that allow for axial of components;
movement when the diaphragm spring is driven by the
- improved cooling capacity due to the reduced contact
collar bearing;
surfaces between diaphragm and disk driver;
- a diaphragm spring made from a certain number of blades
- less unbalance;
arranged in a dial form;
- easy maintenance thanks to:
- a collar bearing mounted on the diaphragm spring and
locked to the same by means of the split ring. With this 1. no regulation required for clearance;
solution it is no longer necessary to adjust the clearance
2. no further need to level-off the thrust pad.
between the collar bearing and diaphragm spring since
both the components are in contact. Moreover, the clutch Finally, it must be noted how the non-linear characteristics of
is released by traction of the collar bearing. the diaphragm spring offer a reduced variation of the release
force as the control pedal gradually completes its travel and,
with a load on the disk driver not less than the rated value even
with worn seals.
Figure 1
52233
VIEW OF CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

4 CLUTCH DAILY
DIAGNOSTICS
Main operating faults of the clutch are:

4 - The clutch does not release;
1 - Noise when the clutch pedal is pressed;
5 - The clutch slips;
2 - Noise when the pedal is released;
6 - Abnormal wear of driven disk seals.
3 - Clutch jerks;
NOISE WHEN CLUTCH PEDAL

1
IS PRESSED
Collar bearing excessively worn, damaged or not Replace the collar bearing.
properly lubricated. YES
NO
Excessive play between the clutch engagement grooves Replace the shaft and, if necessary, the driven disk also.
on the shaft and the relevant seat on the hub of the YES
driven disk.
2 NOISE WHEN THE PEDAL

IS RELEASED
Driven disk springs are broken or weakened. Replace the driven disk.
YES
NO
Clutch engagement shaft worn. Replace the shaft and, if necessary, the driven disk also.
YES
NO
Collar bearing has excessive play in the joint. Replace the collar bearing.
YES
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY CLUTCH 5
3 CLUTCH JERKS
Oil or grease on the engine flywheel, or on the seals of Replace the oil or grease, clean the flywheel, and
the driven disk. YES replace the driven disk.
NO
Thrust pad deformed. Replace the clutch.

YES
NO
Friction seals worn due to off centring of the driven disk. Replace the driven disk.
YES
NO
Clutch diaphragm spring weak or broken. Replace the driven disk.

YES
NO
Driven disk springs broken or yielded. Replace the driven disk.

YES
4 THE CLUTCH DOES NOT RELEASE
Oil or grease on the seals of the driven disk. Remove the oil or grease; clean the flywheel and
YES replace the driven disk.
NO
Grooves on the clutch engagement shaft are worn and Replace the shaft and, if necessary, the driven disk.
impede the movement of the driven disk. YES
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

6 CLUTCH DAILY
Clutch pedal height not adjusted (only mechanical Adjust the height of the clutch pedal.
control). YES
NO
Clutch release hydraulic control not efficient. Replace the hydraulic control.
YES
5 THE CLUTCH SLIPS
Driven disk seals worn or burnt. Replace the driven disk.

YES
NO
Clutch diaphragm springs weak or broken. Replace the clutch.

YES
NO
Oil or grease on the seals of the driven disk. Remove the oil or grease, and replace the driven disk.
YES
ABNORMAL WEAR OF DRIVEN

6
DISK SEALS
The driver keeps the clutch pedal pressed while driving. The driver must stop this habit and use the clutch pedal
YES only when necessary.
NO
Clutch diaphragm spring blades weakened or broken. Replace the clutch.

YES
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY CLUTCH 7
CHARACTERISTICS AND DATA

Models 29 L 9/11 - 35 S 9/11 - 35 C 9 - 35 C 11 - 40 C 9 - 40 C 11* - 45 C 11* - 50 C 11*
9 ” 1/4 CLUTCH VALEO
Type Dry single disk
Clutch mechanism “Pull” with diaphragm spring
Driven disk With friction seals
Driven disk hub With double hub springs
0
External Ø seal mm 235 −1
0
Internal ∅ seal mm 165 −1
Disk thickness (new) mm 7.7 ± 0.3
Under load N 6000

Minimum thickness due to wear mm 1.25
Max. off centring driven

disk mm ~ 0.3
Minimum load on
thrust plate N 6800
Max. release load at

9 mm. release height N 1500
Minimum rise thrust pad

at 9 mm. release height mm 1.4
Disengagement stroke mm 9+1
Max. depression stroke mm 12
Disengagement control hydraulic
Lubricant -
* Only vehicles with 5 speed gearbox 5 S 200 - 5 S 270

NOTE Values refer to new clutch
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

8 CLUTCH DAILY
Models 29 L 10 - 29 L 12 - 35 S 10 - 35 S 12 - 35 C 10 - 35 C 12
9” 1/ CLUTCH BORG & BECK
4
Driven disk hub
0
External Ø seal mm 235 −1
+ 1.5
Internal ∅ seal mm 165
Under load N 6850


disk mm ~ 0.2
Minimum load on
thrust plate N 6850


Max. depression stroke mm 9.5
Lubricant -
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY CLUTCH 9
Models 35 S 13 - 35 C 13 - 40 C 11* - 40 C 13 - 45 C 11* - 45 C 13 - 50 C 11* - 50 C 13

A 35 S 13 - A 40 C 13 - A 50 C 13
10” 1/2 CLUTCH BORG & BECK

External Ø seal mm 267
Internal ∅ seal mm 171.5
Under load N 6800


disk mm ~ 0.2
Minimum load on
thrust plate N 6800

1950
9 mm. release height N

Lubricant -
* Only vehicles with 6 speed gearbox 6 S 300

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

10 CLUTCH DAILY
Models 35 S 13 - 35 C 13 - 40 C 11* - 40 C 13 - 45 C 11* - 45 C 13 - 50 C 11* - 50 C 13

A 35 S 13 - A 40 C 13 - A 50 C 13
10” 1/2 CLUTCH VALEO

Internal ∅ seal mm 171.5
Under load N 6800


disk mm ~ 0.2
Minimum load on
thrust plate N 6800


Lubricant -
* Only vehicles with 6 speed gearbox 6 S 300

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY CLUTCH 11
Models 35 C 14 - 40 C 14 - 45 C 14 - 50 C 14
11” CLUTCH VALEO


. +0
-1

. +1
-0.5
Under load N 8000


disk mm ~ 0.2
Minimum load on
thrust plate N 7000


Disengagement stroke mm +2
9. -0
Lubricant -
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

12 CLUTCH DAILY
Models 35 C 15 - 50 C 15 - 60 C 15 - 65 C 15 - A 40 C 15 - A 50 C 15 - A 65 C 15
11 ” CLUTCH VALEO
Internal ∅ seal mm 171 +1

−0,5
Under load N 8000


disk mm ~ 0.2
Minimum load on
thrust plate N 6800
Max. release load at 9

mm. release height N 1850

Disengagement stroke mm 9 -1
Lubricant -
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY CLUTCH 13
Models 35 C 15 - 40 C 15 - 60 C 15 - 65 C 15 - A 40 C 15 - A 50 C 15 - A 65 C 15
11 ” CLUTCH BORG & BECK

Internal ∅ seal mm 171 +1

−0,5
Under load N 8000


disk mm ~ 0.2
Minimum load on
thrust plate N 6800
Max. release load at 9

mm. release height N 1850

Disengagement stroke mm 9 -1
Lubricant -
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

14 CLUTCH DAILY
Models 35 S 17 - 35 C 17 - 40 C 17 - 45 C 17 - 50 C 17 - 60 C17 - 65 C 17
10” 1/2 CLUTCH VALEO


. +0
-1

. +1
-0.5
Under load N 8000


disk mm ~ 0.2
Minimum load on
thrust plate N 7500


Disengagement stroke mm +1
9. 0
Lubricant -
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY CLUTCH 15
TIGHTENING TORQUES
TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
Screw securing clutch to engine flywheel 46.5 4.7
Screw securing operator cylinder mounting to gearbox 17 ± 2 1 ± 0.1
Screw secuing pedal board mounting - -
Screw to secure clutch disengagement lever support to gearbox front cover 23.5 ± 2.5 2,3 ± 0.2
TOOLS
99370205 Guide pin for centring clutch driven disk
Figure 2
52230
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

16 CLUTCH DAILY
505210 CLUTCH REMOVAL AND CHECKS

REFITTING The checks to be made are as follows:
- the mating surface, on the engine flywheel, of the driven
Removal
disk must not be excessively worn or scored.
The operation consists of:
- removal-refitting of transmission shafts (see section - the teeth of the toothed crown must not be worn or
505620); broken.
- removal-refitting of gear box (see section 530210). If this is not the case, disassemble the engine flywheel
(operation 540850) as described in the relevant paragraph at
section 2.
Figure 3 Proceed on the engine flywheel as described in relevant
paragraph (operation 540853) at section 2.
Check that there are no oil leaks, even of a slight entity, from
the seal of the rear drive shaft; otherwise remove the flywheel
as described in the relevant paragraph. Remove the rear cover
complete with sealing rings and replace the same as described
at section 2.
Check that the support bearing or bushing of the take up shaft
on the gears fitted to the drive shaft are not worn or broken
and, if necessary, replace them as described in the relevant
paragraph (540852).
Check the condition of the thrust pad; the driven disk support
surface must not be scored or excessively worn or should
44570
there be signs of overheating; the diaphragm spring must be
in perfect condition.
Check the condition of the driven disk:
Insert the centering pin 99370205 (1) in the gear infeed shaft
support bearing, to facilitate clutch removal operations. - the friction seals must not be excessively worn or present
signs of overheating, or traces of oil or grease;
Remove the fixing screws (2) and remove the thrust pad (3)
from the engine flywheel. - there should be very little backlash between the hub and
gear take up shaft;
- the hub rings must not be loose or broken.
When any defects are found, replace the part in question.
The complete clutch is supplied with a spare kit.
The following are supplied singularly:
- the driven disk and collar bearing.
In this case it will necessary to assemble the new parts of the
driven disk spring that is to be reused.
Figure 4
44571
Remove the clutch disk (3) by extracting the centring pin

99370205 (2).
Disk plate centering pin (1) located on the engine flywheel.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY CLUTCH 17
Figure 5 - remove the guide pin;

- reconnect the gears after spreading the grooved shaft
with molybdenum disulphide Molikote as described in
Section 4;
- adjust the clutch travel as described in the relevant
paragraph (operation).
Before fitting a new driven disk check that it is centred as

follows:
Position the driven disk (1) on a lathe and, with the use of a
magnetic base dial gauge (2), check that the surface of the disk
is not out of line at any point.
Maximum tolerance allowed for the driven disk is 0.20 mm.
505254 THRUST BEARING REMOVAL

Figure 6
AND REFITTING
Figure 7
If the disk is out of line use a hook wrench (1) as in the figure.
36800
Refitting
The operation consists of:
Follow the same procedures as for removal in reverse order
and: - removal-refitting of transmission shafts (see section
505620);
- carefully clean the faying surface of the flywheel - removal-refitting of gear box (see section 530210).
disk using methylated spirits or petrol; if any slight By using the appropriate pliers open the split pin (1) and
scratches are noted remove with an abrasive extract the collar bearing (2) from the thrust pad.
cloth;
To assemble, carry out the disassembly operations in reverse.
- position the driven disk (3, Figure 4), using the guide pin
(2, Figure 4) to obtain perfect centring and to avoid
straining the hub when the gears are reconnected;
- position the thrust pad by aligning the holes with the
centring grub screws (1, Figure 4) on the engine flywheel;
- assemble and lock the thrust pad fixing screws to the NOTE The new part must be of the same supply as the
correct torque; driven disk that is to be reused.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

18 CLUTCH DAILY
505260 HYDRAULIC CLUTCH DRIVE

Figure 8
50967
The hydraulic clutch drive is composed of:

- a master cylinder (1) mounted on the pedal board and
connected to the clutch pedal (5), with an integrated oil
tank (3).
- an operating cylinder (7) fixed to the gearbox (6).
- an oil pipe (4).
NOTE The components of the hydraulic drive must never be

dismantled or separated from each other in any way.
The cover (2) of the oil tank (3) must not be
This assembly requires no maintenance and the hydraulic
removed.
circuit must not be vented.
In the event of defectiveness, the entire assembly needs to be
replaced as it is supplied as a spare part, proceeding as
described under the relevant heading.
The clip (8) holding the push rod (9) on the assembly supplied
as a spare part must not be removed or cut.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY CLUTCH 19
Figure 9
62090
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA
Main cylinder diameter 18 mm

Main cylinder section 254.47 mm2
Operating cylinder diameter 22 mm
Operating cylinder section 346.36 mm2
Clutch pedal ratio 5.85
Hydraulic ratio 1.36
Clutch disengagement lever ratio 1.67
Overall reduction ratio 13.28
Max disengagement stroke X Y (94) F (99) J (98.7) mm
Max wear stroke Y Y (67.5) F (70.8) J (69.1) mm
Y 9 ” 1/4 CLUTCH
F 10 ” 1/2 CLUTCH
J 11” CLUTCH
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

20 CLUTCH DAILY
HYDRAULIC CLUTCH DRIVE REMOVAL - REFITTING

Figure 10
50968
Refitting
Removal
For refitting, carry out the operations for removal in reverse
order, taking the following precautions:
Position the vehicle over the pit or on the lift.
From inside the cab, using a screwdriver, unhook the swivel - Do not press the clutch pedal until refitting is complete.
head (2) of the master cylinder push rod from the clutch pedal
link pin (3). - During assembly, handle parts carefully.
- Lubricate the contact surfaces of the clutch

disengagement lever with the clutch pedal link pin.
NOTE Do not act on the pin (3) to prevent it coming out of
the pedal board (1). - Lubricate the contact surface of the master cylinder swivel
head with the clutch pedal link pin.
- After refitting the operating cylinder mounting to the

gearbox, check that the cylinder push rod is aligned with
the clutch disengagement lever seat.
Working from the engine bay, turn the master cylinder (4) to
the right (approx. 1/8 of a turn) to align the square of the hole - If replacing with a new hydraulic drive assembly, after
(A) in the pedal board (1) with the square (B) of the master refitting, press firmly on the clutch pedal so as to break or
cylinder body and extract it from the pedal board (1). free the clamp holding the push rod (9).
Working under the vehicle, disengage the operating cylinder
(8 detail C) by unscrewing the screws (6 detail C) securing the - Lift the clutch pedal by hand with a force of no greater
cylinder mounting (7 detail C) from the gearbox. than 5 daN to its limit and hold it in this position for at least
five seconds so that the oil from the tank will supply the
Remove the hydraulic clutch drive assembly from the vehicle. master cylinder. Repeat this operation if necessary.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY CLUTCH 21
Figure 11
52235
MASTER CYLINDER
Figure 12
52236
OPERATING CYLINDER
Figure 13
87895
The operating cylinder makes up for the wear of the driven disc marking an increase in load on the pedal during disengagement when
the wear on the driven disc gets to be 90%.
Maximum disengagement position when new a = 121.8 mm. a1 = 112.8 mm.
Engagement position when new b = 99.3 5.8 mm. b1 = 89.8 mm
Minimum position with worn disc c = 73.3 mm. c1 = 63.8 mm
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

22 CLUTCH DAILY
502601 PEDAL BOARD REMOVAL - RE- Figure 16

FITTING
Removal
Figure 14
52240
Remove the four nuts (2) fixing the servo brake (3) and take
this out of the engine bay.
52238 For vehicles with electronic injection only
Set a proper container under the brake pipes (4) and remove Disconnect the electrical connection (1) from the sensor on
them from the brake pump (1) of the vacuum brake (3). the clutch pedal and the electrical connection (4) from the
sensor on the brake pedal. Disconnect the electrical
connection (5) from the switch on the brake pedal.
When draining the brake oil, take care it does not
come into contact with anyone, clothes, or painted Figure 17
parts.
Disconnect the electrical connection (2) from the brake liquid

tank plug.
Figure 15
52241
Disconnect the clutch drive master cylinder (1) from the pedal
board as described under the relevant heading and set it aside
appropriately in the engine bay, taking care not to damage or
bend the oil pipe.
Take out the nuts (2) and remove the pedal board (3).
Refitting
52239
From inside the cab:
For refitting, carry out the operations described for removal
For vehicles with electronic injection only in reverse order, taking the following precautions:
Remove the side guard (7), disconnect the electrical - tighten the nuts/screws to the required tightening torque
connection (6) from the accelerator pedal (4). Take out the under the relevant heading;
screws (5) and remove the accelerator pedal (4) from the
pedal board. - refit the clutch drive cylinder as described under the
relevant heading;
For vehicles with mechanical injection pump and
mechanical clutch drive only - fill the brake liquid tank with the required quantity and
grade and bleed the air (operation 784010) as described
Disconnect the accelerator cable and the clutch under the relevant heading;
disengagement cable from their respective pedals.
- after making the electrical connections, check the
Remove the fastener (1) and disconnect the brake pedal (8) efficiency of the connected components.
from the servo brake fork (3) by extracting the pin (2).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY CLUTCH 23
PEDAL BOARD
Figure 18
62091
A. Pedal board with mechanical accelerator pedal

B. Electronic accelerator pedal
NOTE The only repair operations to be performed on the pedal-assy are the following:
- accelerator pedal replacement;
- sensor replacement.
In any other case, replace the pedal using the above-mentioned components if they are serviceable.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

24 CLUTCH DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY TRANSMISSION 1
SECTION 4
5302 Transmission
Page
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
TRANSMISSION REMOVAL - REFITTING . . . . . 7
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
GEAR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5 S 200 - 5 S 270 TRANSMISSIONS . . . . . . . . . . 9
6 S 300 TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6 S 380 O.D. TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
POWER TAKE-OFFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Print 603.93281 Base - May 2004

2 TRANSMISSION DAILY
Print 603.43.351
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
DIAGNOSTICS
Main transmission operation faults: 3 - gear spontaneous disengagement;
1 - noisy transmission; 4 - difficult speed engagement or selection;
2 - noisy transmission only in reverse speed; 5 - leakages of lubricant.
1 NOISY TRANSMISSION
Insufficient lubricating oil level. Add TUTELA TRUCK GEARLITE oil up to

YES proper level.
NO
Screws which fasten the transmission to the chassis are Tighten loose screws properly.
loose. YES
NO
Excessive backlash between gears. Overhaul transmission and replace worn gears.
YES
NO
Gears, bearings, synchronizer rings and sliding sleeves Replace worn or damaged components.
worn. Springs broken. YES
NOISY TRANSMISSION ONLY

2
IN REVERSE SPEED
Reverse speed or connected gears damaged. Overhaul transmission.

YES
Print 603.93281 Base - May 2004

GEAR SPONTANEOUS
3
DISENGAGEMENT
Speed engagement/selection rod release ball spring Remove the cap and replace the spring.
yielded or broken. YES
NO
Sliding sleeves positioning springs yielded or broken. Remove the transmission and replace the springs.
YES
DIFFICULT SPEED ENGAGEMENT

4
OR SELECTION
Incorrect clutch disengagement. Check the command or replace clutch.

YES
NO
Wrong quality of oil in the box. Insufficient oil level. Drain the oil and refill with TUTELA TRUCK
YES GEARLITE oil up to proper level.
NO
Movement of sliding sleeves hindered. Forks, sliding Disassemble the transmission and look for the cause
sleeves, synchronizer rings worn. YES and carry out repairs if necessary.
NO
Wrong assembly of levers on selection and/or gear Check and/or mount the levers as described under the
engagement levers. YES relevant heading.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

5 LEAKAGES OF LUBRICANT
Oil level too high. Restore proper level.

YES
NO
Breather clogged. Clean breather.

YES
NO
Input and/or output shaft retaining rings worn. Replace retaining rings.
YES
NO
Loose screws and/or nuts which fasten: covers, Remove the component; clean coupling surfaces.
support, boxes. YES Spread on them some LOCTITE 5206 sealing, re-fit
and tighten screws and/or nuts to the prescribed
torque.
Print 603.93281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

PRINT 603.43.351/D
TRANSMISSION REMOVAL - REFITTING

Figure 1
Removal
Here we describe the removal-refitting operations for the 6 S 300 transmission
that, unless specified otherwise, also hold for the 5 S 200 - 5 S 270 - 6 S 380
O.D. transmission.
Position the vehicle over the pit or on a lift or on special stands.
From the engine bay remove the screws fastening the starter motor to the front
cover of the transmission.
Remove the starter motor and put it appropriately aside in the engine bay.
From underneath the vehicle:
- remove the soundproofing guards;
- disconnect the exhaust pipe (17) from the turbocharger pipe.
Remove the seal from the ring nut (25), unscrew it and disconnect the
speedometer control cable.
Disconnect the electrical connection (22) of the reversing light.
Unscrew the screws (23) securing the propeller shaft (24) to the transmission.
Secure the propeller shaft to the chassis frame appropriately.
Unscrew the screws (4 and 6) securing the brackets (5 and 7) and disconnect
the bowdens (3 and 8) of the gear levers.
For vehicles with hydraulic clutch drive
Unscrew the fixing screws (2), shift the clutch drive cylinder (1) with its bracket
and secure it to the chassis frame appropriately.
For vehicles with mechanical clutch drive
Take out the nut (13), flanged nut (12) and the flexible plug beneath. Remove
the cable (10) from the clutch disengagement lever (11) and from the bracket
(9). Remove the bracket (9).
For all vehicles
Using a hydraulic jack, position bracket 99370629 under the transmission. Lay
the chain on the transmission and put one of its links into the slot in the bracket.
Screw on the nut so as to firmly secure the transmission to the bracket with
the chain. Take out the screws (20) securing the transmission to the crankcase.
Unscrew the fixing screws (19), the fixing screw (21) and the plug and remove
the crosspiece (18) supporting the transmission with its plug.
Retract the gearbox to withdraw gear input shaft from clutch plate hub, then
lower the hydraulic jack. During lowering the gearbox must not hit or be caught
in other components.
At the same time, another operator should move the transmission back to
remove its drive input shaft from the clutch disc hub. Then, lower the hydraulic
jack while checking that the transmission does not knock against or get caught
up with any other parts as it comes down.
Refitting
NOTE Before re-attaching the gearbox, check gear selection and engagement
levers mounting, as described on pages 24, 60 and 100.
Refitting the transmission is not particularly difficult. It is sufficient to carry out

the operations described for removal in reverse order. Only when coupling the
clutch to the transmission is it necessary to take the following precautions.
Using appropriate pliers, open the retaining ring (16) and extract the pressure
plate bearing (15) from the diaphragm spring (14) of the clutch. Mount the
pressure plate bearing on the sleeve of the drive input shaft cover, connecting
it to the clutch disengagement lever. Spread the transmission input shaft with
Molikote molybdenum disulphide grease.
Engage a gear to permit rotation of the main shaft by turning the propeller shaft
connection flange. Push the transmission fully in so that the pressure plate
bearing (15) is correctly engaged in the diaphragm spring.
When connecting the propeller shaft, use new nuts for the screws securing the
relative flanges. All nuts and bolts must be tightened to the required torques
given in the relevant tables.
Adjust the height of the clutch pedal as described in the relevant paragraph
(vehicles with mechanical clutch drive). After refitting the transmission, check 51195
that the electrical cables are connected properly. Check that the gears engage
correctly. If they do not, proceed as described under the gear control heading.
Print 603.93281 Base - May 2004

GEAR CONTROL Figure 2

Gear control is accomplished with two Bowden cables. The
blue cable (6) with the IVECO trademark operates the lever
(4) for engaging gears.
The white cable (1) with the IVECO trademark operates the
lever (8) for selecting gears.
The length of the cables measured between the c/c distances
of the swivel heads must be:
- 780 ±2 mm engagement cable (6);
- 1280 ±2 mm selection cable (1).
The selection (8) and engagement (4) levers must be
mounted on their respective shafts so that:
- between the c/c distance of the pin of the lever (8) for
connecting the swivel head and the outside of the
bracket (2) there is a distance X of 134 ±0.75 mm;
- between the c/c distance of the pin of the lever (4) for
connecting the swivel head (3) and the outside of the
bracket (5) there is a distance Y of 135 ±0.75 mm.
NOTE Before assembly, lubricate the points of connection

of the swivel heads with the Bowden cables with
TUTELA MRM2 grease.
- Engagement cable (6):

¤ Left-hand drive vehicles, 758.5 ±2 mm.
¤ Right-hand drive vehicles, 1058.5 ±2 mm.
- Selector cable (1):
¤ Left-hand drive vehicles, 1216 ±2 mm.
¤ Right-hand drive vehicles, 1566.5 ±2 mm.
For vehicles fitting 6S300 transmission and synchronised

reverse only.
SELECTION WIRE (1) ADJUSTMENT.
Remove the screw (13) and detach the cover (12) from the
gear lever support.
Engage either 1st of 2nd gear and check that there is a distance
of 2 mm between the gear lever (10) and the stop (9);
proceed as follows if this is not so:
- remove the ball joint (14) from the connecting ball pin
(15);
- loosen the fastening nut (16);
- arrange a 2 mm shim (11) between stop (9) and lever
(10);
- hold the lever (10), shim (11) and stop (9) in contact and
turn the ball joint (15) until it reaches the ball pin (15);
- fasten and check that all the gears can be engaged;
- tightening the fastening nut (16);
- reattach the cover (12) and tighten the fastening screws
(13).
85960
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY 5 S 200 - 5 S 270 TRANSMISSIONS 9
Print 603.43.351/D
5 S 200 - 5 S 270 Transmissions
Page
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
GEAR SELECTION AND ENGAGEMENT

CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
SAFETY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
- Engagement locking device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
- Reverse gear anti-engagement device . . . . . . . 13
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
OVERHAULING THE TRANSMISSION . . . . . . 23
- Gear control box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
- Disassembling the transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
- Disassembling the rear cover bearings . . . . . . . 27
- Disassembling the transmission bearings . . . . . 27
- Disassembling the main shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
- Drive input shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
- Disassembling the transmission shaft . . . . . . . . 30
CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
- Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
- Hubs - sliding sleeves - forks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
- Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
- Shafts - gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
- Synchronizing devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
- Mounting the transmission shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
- Mounting the main shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
- Rods - forks - selector - driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

10 5 S 200 - 5 S 270 TRANSMISSIONS DAILY
Page
- Disassembly - assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
- Mounting the transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
- Adjusting the transmission shaft bearing

end float . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

GENERAL
Print 603.43.351/D
The 5 S 200 transmission is mechanical with synchronized The gears splined on the main and reverse gear shafts idle on
engagement of forward gears. straight roller bearings.
It is composed of a light alloy box (which also serves as a clutch The input and main shafts are supported, in the transmission,
cover), a rear cover (where the speed engagement controls by watertight, non-adjustable ball bearings.
and gearing are housed) and a control box.
The transmission shaft is supported, in the transmission, by
There is an opening on the side of the transmission to apply tapered roller bearings that can be adjusted axially by means
a power take-off. of ring shims.
Drive transmission is accomplished by a set of helical-toothed Gear engagement synchronization is accomplished by means
constant mesh gears, for both forward and reverse gears. of free ring synchronizing devices with a single cone for 5th -
4th - 3rd gears -R.G. and dual cone for 1st - 2nd gears.
The splined or machined gears are on four shafts: input, main,
transmission and reverse gear. Control inside the transmission is accomplished with four
rods:
- a main rod to select and engage gears;
- three rods equipped with forks for engaging gears.
The external engagement lever is equipped with two
opposing masses. These have the task of attenuating the force
of engagement of the control cable (BOWDEN) and
consequently the noise level.
Figure 1
51380
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

GEAR SELECTION AND ENGAGEMENT CONTROL

The combined action of the selection (2) and engagement (1) levers bring about the rotation and/or axial shift of the rod (4) in
two successive stages, engaging the desired gear by means of one of the rods (9, 8 or 7).
First Stage
Depending on the angular position of the selection lever (2), the driver (3) (integral with it) turns the selector (5) with the rod
(4) (connected together), setting the selector on the rod of the chosen gear.
Second Stage
Depending on the movement given to the engagement lever (1), the driver (3) (integral with it) shifts the selector (5) (already
prepared) axially with the rod (4) and consequently also the engagement rod of the chosen gear.
Position of transmission in neutral and/or ready Ready for 1st/2nd gear

to select 3rd/4th gear
Figure 2 Figure 3
SECTION A-A SECTION A-A
49373 49372
1. Gear engagement lever - 2. Gear selection lever - 3. Driver - 4. Gear selection/engagement control rod -
5. Selector - 6. Driver - 7. Rod for 3rd/4th gear engagement fork - 8. Rod for 1st/2nd gear engagement fork -
9. Rod for 5th/reverse gear engagement fork.
The position of the transmission in neutral coincides with This arrangement is accomplished by shifting the selection
being ready to select 3rd/4th gear. lever (2) anticlockwise by 7.1° to the control axis, which
corresponds to a clockwise change in the angle of the rod (4)
In this case the vertical axis of the selection lever (2) is exactly
of 10°.
90° from the horizontal control axis, corresponding to no
change in the angle of the rod (4).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Ready to select 5th/reverse gear

Figure 4 SAFETY DEVICES
The transmission is equipped with two mechanical safety
devices:
Engagement locking device to prevent more than one gear
getting engaged at the same time.
Reverse gear anti-engagement device when passing from 5th
to 4th gear.
SECTION A-A Engagement locking device

Figure 5
49375
49374
This device is composed of a plate (1), housed in the rear
cover, operated by the gear selection/engagement control rod
1. Gear engagement lever - 2. Gear selection lever - (2). When selecting/engaging a gear, the rod (2)
3. Driver - 4. Gear selection/engagement control rod - simultaneously turns the plate (1) in which it is inserted. In this
5. Selector - 6. Driver - 7. Rod for 3rd/4th gear way, the plate (1) will free itself from the slot of the rod
engagement fork - 8. Rod for 1st/2nd gear engagement fork involved in engaging the gear and will lock the other two rods
- 9. Rod for 5th/reverse gear engagement fork. by inserting itself into their slots.
Above presetting is implemented by moving selector (2)

clockwise by 7.1º with respect to control vertical axis, that Reverse gear anti-engagement device
corresponds to 10º anticlockwise angular displacement of rod
(4). Figure 6
51381
This device is composed of a plate (8) and a spring (7) housed in the transmission. When passing from the 4th gear position (Figure
A) to the 5th gear position (Figure B), the driver (9), moving in the direction of the arrow, disengages the plate (8), which under
the action of the spring (7) moves onto the driver (9) preventing reverse gear from getting engaged in the opposite manoeuvre.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

PRINT 603.43.351/D
TRANSMISSION 5 S 200 5 S 270
Type Mechanical
Input torque 250 Nm 270 Nm

Weight 44.6 kg
5 forward speeds
Speeds
1 reverse speed
Speed control Mechanical
Power take-off Optional
Speed engagement:
Forward speeds
- 5th / 4th / 3nd Single-cone synchronizer

- 2nd / 1st Dual-cone synchronizer
Reverse speed Single-cone synchronizer
Speed retention mechanism Sliding sleeves retained by pawls and springs
Gears Helical-toothed constant mesh gears
Gear ratio
First 4.99
Second 2.60
Third 1.52
Fourth 1.00
Fifth (overdrive) 0.78
Reverse 4.51
Shaft bearings:
Main shaft watertight ball bearing
Transmission shaft tapered roller
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TRANSMISSION 5 S 200 5 S 270
Transmission shaft bearing end play: 0 ÷ 0.05 mm
Transmission shaft bearing end play adjustment by shims
Shim thickness for transmission shaft bearing 2.00 - 2.30 - 2.45 mm

end play adjustment with 0.05 mm progressive sequence
Main shaft
Assembly temperatures:
sliding sleeve hubs 150oC
2nd and 3rd speed gear bushings and spacer 170ºC ÷ 160ºC
5th speed gear spacer 90ºC
Secondary shaft
bearings
g 80ºC (max 120ºC)
5thh speed gear 140ºC ÷ 170ºC
5th speed gear driving load 31 KN
5th speed gear removing load 50 KN
Input shaft
front bearing* 80ºC (max 120ºC)
Gear axial backlash:

1st - 3rd - 4th - R - 5th speed 0.15 ÷ 0.3 mm
2nd speed 0.25 ÷ 0.4 mm
3rd and 4th speed sliding sleeve hub retaining

circlip axial backlash 0 ÷ 0.05 mm
3rd and 4th speed sliding sleeve hub retaining

circlip thickness 2 - 2.85 mm with progression of 0.05 mm
Transmission shaft rear bearing retaining ring

end float 0 ÷ 0,05 mm
Transmission shaft rear bearing retaining ring 2.05 ÷ 2.45 mm

thickness with progression of 0.05 mm
242
LOCTITE sealant 510
5206
Type of oil: TUTELA TRUCK GEARLITE

Quantity 2 litres
1.8 kg
* = Do not use hot air equipment to heat bearing.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TIGHTENING TORQUES
Figure 7
* *
50969
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
Nm kgm
1 Clutch housing, screw to fasten clutch housing to chassis 80 8
2 Screw to fasten clutch housing to box 23 ±15% 2.3 ±15%
3 Constant mesh shaft cover fastening screw 23 ±15% 2.3 ±15%
4 Spring retaining plug 32 ±10% 3.2 ±10%
5 Grub screw securing gear selection sector to rod 60 ±15% 6 ±15%
6** Screw securing p.t.o. side cover 46 ±15% 4.6 ±15%
7 Plug 28 ÷ 30 ±15% 2.8 ÷ 3 ±15%
8 Screw securing reverse gear shaft 22 ±15% 2.2 ±15%
9 Screw securing rear cover 23 ±15% 2.3 ±15%
10 Screw locking sleeve for transmission coupling on main shaft 120 ±15% 12 ±15%
11D Screw securing ball bearing retaining ring 9.5 ±15% 0.9 ±15%
12 Screw securing control cable bracket 23 ±15% 2.3 ±15%
13 Screw securing gear control mounting 23 ±15% 2.3 ±15%
14 Nut for screw securing lever to control rod 34 ±15% 3.4 ±15%
15 Nut securing articulation pin to control lever 23 ±15% 2.3 ±15%
17 Oil vapour breather 10 ±15% 1 ±15%
18 Nut to secure articulation pin to control lever 23 ±15% 2.3 ±15%
* Spread LOCTITE 5206 sealant on the contact surfaces
D Spread LOCTITE 242 on the thread
** Spread LOCTITE 510 on the thread
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99322205 Assemblies overhaul revolving stand
99322225 Unit support (to use with stand 99322205)
99340205 Percussion extractor
99341002 Single-acting scaffold
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
99341012 Pair of brackets
99341015 Press
99341017 Couple of brackets whit hole
99341019 Pair of tie rods with grips
99341025 Grips
99345003 Extractor for gearbox front half-casing
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99348001 Extractor with locking device
99348004 Universal male extractor from 5 to 70 mm
99360521 Tool to extract and insert main shaft, transmission shaft and
rod - fork assembly
99370006 Handle for interchangeable drivers
99370234 Tool for fitting main shaft in rear bearing and fitting output flange
on main shaft
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
99370317 Reaction lever with extension for holding flange
99370629 Transmission support during removal from and refitting to vehicle
99371057 Bracket for supporting gearbox during overhaul

(use with 99322205-99322225)
99374091 Punch for fitting bearing external races (dia. 55 ÷ 69 mm)

(use with 99370007)
99374452 Keying device to fit gasket on transmission rear cover

(use with 99370006)
99374453 Keying device to fit gasket on transmission
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
Figure 8
75420
Figure 9 Figure 10
47371 47369
TRANSVERSE SECTION ON THE GEAR TRANSVERSE SECTION ON THE REVERSE GEAR

SELECTION/ENGAGEMENT ROD ANTI-ENGAGEMENT DEVICE
POSITIONING PUSH ROD
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 11
49364
SECTION ON GEAR ENGAGEMENT ROD POSITIONING PAWLS
Figure 12
49368
TRANSVERSE SECTION ON INTERNAL CONTROL BOX
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

530210 OVERHAULING THE TRANSMISSION

Figure 13 Figure 16
74954
Remove the plug and drain off the lubricating oil.
51385
The used oil must be disposed of according to the law With a punch (3), remove the spring pin (4) and extract the
in force. shaft (2) from the internal lever (1).
Repeat these steps for the other shaft.
Fit the gearbox (1) with the bracket 99371057 (4) and secure
this to the brackets 99322225 (3) on the rotary stand Figure 17
99322205 (2).
530220 Gear control box
Disassembly
Figure 14
51386
Use a punch on the point shown by the arrow and eject the
O-rings and roller bushes (2) from the box (1).
51383 Assembly
Take out the fixing screws (1) and remove the gear control box
(2). Figure 18
Figure 15
51384
Mark the assembly position of the levers (2 and 7) on their 51387

respective shafts (1 and 8). Loosen the nuts (3) for the
retaining screws (6). Thoroughly clean the oil vapour vent (3).
Extract the levers (2 and 7) from the shafts (1 and 8) and With a suitable punch, mount the roller bearings (1) in the box
extract these from the box (5). Take off the caps (4). (2).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 19 Figure 22
51388
Using a suitable punch, mount the O-rings (1) in the box (2), 51391
positioning them at the height shown.
Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces of the gear control box
Pack the gap between the O-ring and roller bearing with grease. (2) and apply LOCTITE 5206 sealant on them.
Fit the box (2) on the transmission, taking care that the levers
Figure 20 and shafts are positioned correctly in their respective seats.
Tighten the screws (1) to the required torque.
Check levers mounting
Figure 23
87896
Mount the selection and engagement levers (1) on their

respective shafts (2) and fasten them with the spring pins (3).
NOTE The spring pin (3) must be positioned with the cut
horizontal. Fit spring peg (4), with cutting edge
positioned at 180° from spring peg (3) cutting edge,
in spring peg (3) engagement lever.
Figure 21
51392
Check the assembly of the selection (6) and engagement (3)

levers. The selection (6) and engagement (3) levers must be
- between the c/c distance of the pin (5) of the selection
lever (6) and the outside of the bracket (1) there is a
distance X of 134 mm;
- between the c/c distance of the pin (2) of the engagement
51390
distance Y of 135 mm.
Lubricate the roller bearings (1, Figure 19) with TUTELA MR3
grease and mount the shafts (3 and 6) complete with the If a different value is measured, orientate the lever concerned
internal levers (4 and 5) in the box (2). Mount the caps (8 and on the respective shaft appropriately.
9) and levers (1 and 10) on the shafts (3 and 6) in the position Then tighten the nuts (7) for the screws (8) to the required
marked during disassembly without tightening the nuts for the tightening torque.
fixing screw (7).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Disassembling the transmission

Figure 24 Figure 27
51393 51396
Dismantle the gear control box as described under the Remove the screws (1) and take off the cover (2) protecting
relevant heading. the input shaft (3).
Remove the reverse gear stop plate (2) and the spring (1).
Figure 25 Figure 28
74955 51397
Block rotation of the sleeve (1) by applying the lever Drill the O-ring (2).
99370317 (3). With the bushing (2) remove the screw (5)
Using a suitable hook and extractor (1), remove the O-ring (2)
with the washer beneath (4).
from the transmission.
Take out the lever 99370317 (3).
Figure 29
Figure 26
51398
74956
Apply the bridge 99341003 (1) and clamps 99341017 (2)

onto the sleeve (3). Remove the circlip (2) retaining the front bearing (3) from the
Extract the sleeve (3) from the main shaft. input shaft (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 30 Figure 33
51399
Take out the plug with the washer (1), extract the springs (2
and 3) and the push rod (4). Remove the screw (6) securing
the reverse gear shaft to the transmission (5). Push the two
centring pins (7) downwards to free them from the
transmission (5). Remove the screws (8) securing the rear
cover (9) to the transmission (5).
Figure 31
51402
Insert an Allen wrench (2) into the engagement locking plate

(5). Turn the Allen wrench (2) to position the engagement
locking plate (5) outside the slots (⇒) in the engagement rods
(1, 3 and 4).
Figure 34
74957
Fit the drive input shaft (1) with tool 99345003 (2) and secure
this to the gearbox (4) with screws (3). Screw down the screw
(5) of the tool (2) to extract the gearbox from the bearing (6).
Figure 32
74959
Mount the tool 99360521 (3) onto the rods (4, 5 and 6), on
the input shaft (1) and on the transmission shaft (10). Secure
the tool 99360521 (3) on the input shaft (1) with the retaining
ring (2) and with the screw (9) to the transmission shaft (10).
Hook the tool 99360521 (3) onto the lift. Apply the extractor
composed of the bridge 99341004 (13) and ties 99341012
74965 (12) onto the rear cover (7). Use the screw of the bridge (13)
Take out the screw (3) and extract the shaft (1) from the rear and work on the lift to extract the main shaft (11) from the
cover (4). Remove the reverse gear (2). Drill the cups (10) rear bearing. Set this assembly on the workbench. Remove the
screw a special screw into them; with the aid of the screw, tool 99360521 (3) and separate the transmission shaft (10),
extract the cups (10) from the rear cover (4). Remove the input shaft with relative synchronizing ring and the rods (4, 5
springs (9) and the pawls (8). Extract the rod (7) together with and 6) from the main shaft.
the selector (5) and driver (6).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Disassembling the rear cover bearings

Figure 35 Figure 38
51404 74961
Remove the screws (2) securing the plates (3). Turn over the rear cover (3). Take out the O-ring (1) and the
”phonic wheel” (2). Using a suitable punch, remove the ball
Take out the plates (3) and the engagement locking plate (1). bearing (4, Figure 36). Remove the tachograph sensor (5) and
the reversing light switch (4).
Figure 36 Disassembling the transmission bearings

Figure 39
74960
Using universal extractor 99348004 (1), remove the outer 74962
ring (2) of the transmission shaft bearing. Using universal extractor 99348004 (1), remove the outer
ring (2) of the transmission shaft bearing.
Figure 37
Figure 40
51406
51409
Using the percussion extractor 99340205 (1) and part Using the percussion extractor 99340205 (1) and part
99348004 (2), extract the bushing with the ball bearings (3). 99348004 (2), extract the bushing with the ball bearings (3).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 41 Disassembling the main shaft
NOTE Mark the assembly position of each synchronizing

device on the respective gears.
Figure 44
51410
Remove the screws (1) securing the plates (2).

Take out the plates (2).
51413
Clamp the main shaft (1) in a vice. Remove the roller bearing
Figure 42 (2) and the synchronizer ring (3). Remove the sliding sleeve
(6) for engaging 3rd-4th gear from the hub (5) and, taking care
as the plugs (8) come out with their relative balls (9) and
springs (7), recover them.
Figure 45
51411
Turn over the transmission.

Using a suitable punch, remove the ball bearing (1).
51414
Remove the retaining ring (4, Figure 44). Extract the hub (2)
with the extractor 99348001 (1).
Figure 43
Figure 46
51412 51415
Using the percussion extractor 99340205 (1) and part Remove the synchronizer ring (1), 3rd gear (2) and roller
99348004 (2), extract the roller bearing (3). bearing (3).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 47 Figure 50
76010
Using bridge 99341003 (1), screw stays 99341019 (2), grips 51419
99341025 (4) and clamp 99341015 (3), take out the 2nd gear Using the bridge 99341003 (1), ties 99341012 (2) and clamp
(7), spacer (6) and bushing (5). 99341015 (3), extract the 1st gear (6), with the synchronizer
ring (7), middle ring (8) and ring (9), hub (5) and bushing (4).
Remove the roller bearing (10).
NOTE Force of extraction of the bushing (4) 40 kN.
NOTE Force of extraction of the bushing (4) 40 kN.
Figure 48 Figure 51
51417 51420
Take out the synchronizer ring (4), middle ring (3), ring (2) and Turn over the main shaft (1). Take out the spacer ring (2) and
roller bearing (1). remove the 5th gear (3).
Figure 49 Figure 52
51418
51421
Remove the sleeve (2) for engaging 1st-2nd gear from the hub
(1) and, taking care as the plugs (5) come out with their relative Remove the half roller bearings (1), the synchronizer ring (3)
balls (3) and springs (4), recover them. and the retaining ring (4) holding the hub (2).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 53 Figure 56
51425
If the cog-wheel (2) of the 5th gear (1) shows any sign of
75416
damage, take out the retaining ring (3), replace the cog-wheel
(2) and refit the retaining ring (3).
Using the bridge 99341003 (1), ties 99341012 (2) and clamp
99341015 (3), extract the reverse gear (5) and the Drive input shaft
synchronizer assembly (4).
Figure 57
Figure 54
51426
If the cog-wheel (2) of the input shaft gear (1) shows any sign
of damage, take out the retaining ring (3), replace the
51423 cog-wheel (2) and refit the retaining ring (3).
Remove the roller bearing (1). Disassembling the transmission shaft
Figure 58
Figure 55
5
51427
51424
Take out the retaining ring (1) and extract the internal ring (2)
Remove the sliding sleeve (2) for engaging reverse - 5th gear of the rear bearing. Turn over the shaft (3) and extract the
from the hub (1), taking care as the plugs (3) come out with internal ring (4) of the front bearing.
their relative balls (4) and springs (5), recover them. Shaft (3) gear (5) removal, if required, shall be performed by
hydraulic press; 50 kN removing load.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
Figure 59
51428
INPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY DRAWING
Figure 60
75413
MAIN SHAFT ASSEMBLY DRAWING
Figure 61
51430
TRANSMISSION SHAFT ASSEMBLY DRAWING
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 62
51431
1st-2nd GEAR DUAL CONE SYNCHRONIZER ASSEMBLY
Figure 63
75414
3rd - 4th - 5th GEAR SINGLE CONE SYNCHRONIZER ASSEMBLY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

CHECKS
Transmission Shafts - gears

The transmission and relative covers must show no sign of The seats on the shafts, for bearings, must be neither damaged
cracking. nor worn. The toothing of the gears must be neither damaged
The mating surfaces of the covers and transmission must not nor worn.
be damaged or deformed. Remove any remains of sealant
from them.
Synchronizing devices
The seats of the bearings, reverse gear shaft and gear control Check the wear on the synchronizer rings (3, Figure 64)
rods must be neither damaged nor too worn. proceeding as follows:
- position the synchronizer ring (3) on the respective
Hubs - sliding sleeves - forks cog-wheel (2, 7, 8, 9 and 11, Figure 64);
The grooves on the hubs and relative sliding sleeves must not
- turn the synchronizer ring so as to ensure correct coupling
be damaged. The sliding sleeve must run freely on the hub. The
on the tapered surface of the cog-wheel of the gear.
plugs and balls for positioning the sliding sleeve must be
neither damaged nor worn. The toothing of the sliding sleeves - With a feeler gauge, check the distance A on two
must not be damaged. The forks must be sound with an end diametrically opposite points.
float, in the radial groove of the sleeve, no greater than 1 mm. If the average measured value A is less than 0.5 mm,
replace the synchronizer ring.
Bearings
The roller bearings must be in perfect condition with no signs
of wear or overheating. They must only be removed if they are NOTE After this check, the synchronizer rings must be
to be replaced. marked on their respective gears to avoid swapping
their positions over when assembling.
Figure 64
87897
1st - 2nd GEAR SYNCHRONIZERS 3rd - 4th GEAR SYNCHRONIZERS 5th GEAR SYNCHRONIZER
A. Synchronization reserve A. Synchronization reserve A. Synchronization reserve
5th gear
+0,25
1st-2nd gear 1.4 -0.35 mm 3rd - 4th gear 1.15 + 0.2 mm 1.15 + 0.2 mm
B. 1st-2nd gear release clearance 0.9 +0,6
-0.35 mm B. 3rd - 4th gear release clearance 1.40 + 0.65 mm B. 5th gear release clearance 1.10 + 0.4 mm
Force of sliding of sliding sleeves 80 ÷ 95 Nm.

Maximum admitted wear on the synchronizers, distance A - 0,5 mm
1. Sliding sleeve - 2. 1st gear cog-wheel - 3. Synchronizer ring - 4. Middle ring - 5. Ring - 6. Hub -
7. 2nd gear cog-wheel - 8. 3rd gear cog-wheel - 9. 4th gear cog-wheel - 10. Reverse gear - 11. 5th gear cog-wheel
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Mounting the transmission shaft

Figure 65 Figure 68
5
51433
75418
Gear (5) fitting on shaft (3), if required, shall be performed by Heat the hub (2) for the 5th - reverse gear engagement sliding
hydraulic press after heating the gear to 140°C ÷ 170°C; sleeve to a temperature no higher than 150°C and mount it
31 kN driving load. on the main shaft with a suitable punch (1).
Heat the internal rings (2 and 4) of the tapered roller bearings
to a temperature of approx. 80°C and, with a suitable punch NOTE When fitting, make sure that the projecting parts (3)
(1), mount them on the transmission shaft (3). of the synchronizer ring get positioned in the hub (2)
Figure 66 correctly.
Figure 69
51434
Mount the retaining ring (1) whose thickness gives an end float 51437
when in its seat of 0 ÷ 0.05 mm.
Mount the retaining ring (1) whose thickness makes for null
Mounting the main shaft clearance in its seat.
Check the end float of the reverse gear (2). It should be
NOTE Mount the synchronizer rings on their respective gears 0.15 ÷ 0.3 mm.
according to the marks made during disassembly or
when checking in the case of replacement. Figure 70
Figure 67
51438
75417 Mount the sliding sleeve (5) on the hub (4) facing as shown
Tighten the main shaft (1) in a vice and mount on it: the roller in the figure.
cage (2), reverse gear (4) and synchronizer ring (3). Put the springs (3), plugs (1) and balls (2) into the seats of the
hub (4), settling them under the sliding sleeve.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 71 Figure 74
51439
51441
Positioning the synchronizer ring (2) and the half roller Mount the 1st gear (1).
bearings (1). Lubricate the ring (4), middle ring (3), synchronizer ring (2)
with TUTELA MR3 grease and mount them on the gear (1).
Figure 72
NOTE Make sure the tongues of the rings (2 and 3) are

positioned correctly in their respective seats.
Figure 75
51420
Install the 5th speed gear (3).

Heat spacer ring (2) to 90°C and install it.
Upset the main shaft (1).
Figure 73
51442
Heat the hub (1) for the 1st - 2nd gear sliding sleeve to a
temperature no higher than 150°C and mount it on the main
shaft with a suitable punch.
NOTE When assembling, make sure the tongues of the rings

51440
(3 and 4, Figure 74) and the projections of the
synchronizer ring (2) are positioned correctly in the
hub (1). Check that the end float of the 1st gear (3)
is 0.15 ÷ 0.30 mm.
Position the roller bearing (2) on the main shaft (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 76 Figure 78
51443 51445
Heat the bushing (2) to a temperature no higher than 170°C Mount the 2nd gear (4).
and mount it on the main shaft (1). Heat the spacer (3) to a temperature no higher than 170°C
Mount the sliding sleeve (4) on the hub (3). and mount it on the main shaft (1).
Put (3) the springs (7), plugs (5) and balls (6) into the seats in Check the end float of the 2nd gear (4). It should be
the hub, settling them under the sliding sleeve (4). 0.15 ÷ 0.30 mm.
Heat the bushing (2) to a temperature no higher than 170°C
and mount it on the main shaft (1).
Figure 77
Figure 79
51417
Lubricate the synchronizer ring (4), middle ring (3) and the ring
(2) with TUTELA MR3 grease.
51446
NOTE Make sure the tongues of the rings (2 - 3) and the
projections of the synchronizer ring (4) are
positioned correctly in their respective seats.
Mount the roller bearing (1) and the 3rd gear (3). Position the
Mount the roller bearing (1). synchronizer ring (2) on the 3rd gear (3).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 80 Rods - forks - selector - driver

Disassembly - assembly
Figure 82
51447
Heat the hub (2) to a temperature no higher than 150°C and

51449
mount it on the main shaft (1) checking that the projections
(3) of the synchronizer ring are positioned in the To replace the forks of the selector and driver from their
compartments of the hub (2). respective control rods it is sufficient to remove the retaining
spring pins with a suitable punch.
Mount the retainer ring (4) whose thickness determines an
For assembly, carry out these steps in reverse order, replacing
end float in its seat of 0 ÷ 0.05 mm. the spring pins.
Check the end float of the 3rd gear (5). It should be
NOTE Spring pegs must be positioned with the cutting edge
0.15 ÷ 0.30 mm.
placed level.
Mounting the transmission

NOTE During assembly, the gaskets, retaining rings, O-rings,
spring pins, safety plates and springs must always be
replaced with new parts.
The nuts and screws must be tightened to the required torque
unless specified otherwise, with the thread dry and greased.
Adjusting the transmission shaft bearing end float

Figure 83
Figure 81
51413
Mount the sliding sleeve (6) on the hub (5). Put the springs (7),
51450
plugs (8) and balls (9) into the seats in the hub (5), settling
them under the sliding sleeve (6). Determine the thickness S of the ring (1) for adjusting the
transmission shaft bearing (2) end float, proceeding as follows:
Grease the roller bearing (2) and fit it on the main shaft (1). - measure the distance A between the end of the
transmission (3) and the seat of the ring of the front
Position the synchronizer bearing (3) on the hub (5). bearing (2);
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 84 Figure 86
51451
- measure the distance B between the end of the rear

cover (1) and the seat of the ring of the rear bearing;
41452
Position the adjustment ring (1, Figure 83) of the thickness

determined with the above measurement in the transmission (1).
Heat the bearing seats of the box (1) to a temperature of
approx. 80°C and mount:
- the external ring (6) of the front tapered roller bearing
with punch 99374091 and grip 99370007;
- the ball bearing (7) with a general punch;
- the bushing with ball bearing (4) and the roller bearing (5)
with a general punch.
Position the retaining plates (3) and secure them to the box,
Figure 85 tightening the screws (2) to the required torque.
NOTE Apply LOCTITE 242 onto the thread of the screws

(2, Figure 86 and 5, Figure 87).
Figure 87
51452A
- mount the internal rings (2 - 4) of the tapered roller

bearings on the transmission shaft (5);
- position the external rings (1 - 3) on the internal ones
(2 - 4);
- apply a load F of 100 ÷120 N on the external rings (1 - 3).
- In these conditions, measure the distance C between the
ends of the rings (1 - 3).
51453
- The thickness S of the bearing end float adjustment ring
Heat the bearing seats of the box (1) to a temperature of
is given by:
approx. 80ºC and mount:
- the external ring (7) of the tapered roller bearing with
S = A + B − C − 0, 10 punch 99374091 and grip 99370007;
- the ball bearing (4) and the bushing with ball bearings (2)
Where:
with a general punch.
A - B - C are the measured values Position the retaining plates (6) and the engagement locking
0.10 = constant value, including the deformation of the plate (3) in their seats.
external rings (1 - 3) after driving them into their seats and the Secure these to the box, tightening the screws (5) to the
end float of the bearings of 0.05 mm. required torque.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 88 Figure 90
51454
Clamp the main shaft in a vice.

Mount the input shaft (8) on the main shaft (4) and couple this
with the transmission shaft (5).
Fit tool 99360521 (6) on shafts (8 and 5) and tie it to input
shaft (8) by circlip (9) and to secondary shaft (5) by screw (7).
Set forks and rods thereof (1 - 2 - 3) on sliding sleeves and tie
by tool 99360521 sleeves (6).
74964
Set properly clutch locking plate (5) by setscrew wrench (2)

to avoid control rods (1 - 3 - 4) interference with plate during
next operation.
Screw the pin (11) of tool 99370234 into the hole in the
output shaft (6). Mount the bushing (8) and spacer (9) on the
tool 99370234.
Screw on the nut (10) and at the same time lower the hoist
so the output shaft (6) is positioned on the ball bearing (7).
Remove the tool 99360521 and the parts (8 - 9 - 10 - 11) of
the tool 99370234.
Figure 89
Figure 91
74965
74963
Mount the rod (7) complete with selector (5) and driver (6).
Hook the hoist onto tool 99360521 (1). Lift the assembly (2) Put the pawls (8) and springs (9) into the rear cover (4).
as put together beforehand and mount it in the rear cover (3). Mount the cups (10).
Mount the reverse gear idler (2) with the shaft (1) and secure
During this operation, check that the output shaft (7) goes into the shaft to the rear cover (4) tightening the screw (3) to the
the supporting ball bearing and the control rods (4 - 5 - 6) go required torque.
into their respective seats. Apply LOCTITE 5206 sealant to the mating surfaces of the
transmission.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 92 Figure 94
74966 51398
Warm up the roller bearing inner ring (→) at 80°C and fit the Mount the front bearing (3) retaining ring (2) on the input shaft
gearbox (1) on the rear cover and check that the shafts and (1).
the control rods fit correctly in the respective seats.
Figure 95
Figure 93
51461
Mount the O-ring (2) with the key 99374453 (1).
Figure 96
51459
Insert the centring pins (⇒) in the rear cover (5).

Screw on the screws (11) fixing the rear cover (5) to the
transmission (3) and tighten them to the required torque.
Tighten the screw (4) fixing the reverse gear idler shaft to the
transmission (3) to the required torque.
Insert the push rod (6) and springs (7 - 8) and tighten the plug
(10) with a new gasket (9) to the required torque.
If the side cover (1) has been removed, apply LOCTITE 5206 51396
sealant on the mating surface and tighten the screws (2) to the
required tightening torque. Mount input shaft (3) protection cover (2) and tighten screws
(1) to the required torque.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 97 Figure 99
74969
74967
Mount the phonic wheel (2) onto the main shaft (3). Mount the output flange (1) on the main shaft with the tool
99370234 (2).
Mount the reversing light switch (4) and the tachograph
sensor (1). Remove the tool 99370234 (2).
Figure 100
Figure 98
74970
Mount the washer (3) and screw on the screw (4).
74968 Lock the rotation of the flange (1) with the lever 99370317
(2) and tighten the screw (4) to the required torque.
Mount the O-ring (3) in the rear cover (4) with the key Mount the control box as described under the relevant heading.
99374452 (1) and the grip 99370007 (2).
Fill the transmission with lubricating oil in the required quantity
and grade.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY 6 S 300 TRANSMISSION 43
6 S 300 Transmission
Page
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
GEAR SELECTION AND ENGAGEMENT . . . . . 46
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
OVERHAULING THE TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . 59
- Gear control box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
- Check levers mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
- Disassembling the drive input shaft . . . . . . . . . 66
CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
- Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
- Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
- Shafts - gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

end float 77
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

44 6 S 300 TRANSMISSION DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
GENERAL
The 6 S 300 transmission is mechanical with synchronized The input and main shafts are supported, in the transmission,
engagement of forward gears. by watertight, non-adjustable ball bearings.
It is composed of a light alloy box (which also serves as a clutch The transmission shaft is supported, in the transmission, by
cover), a rear cover (where the speed engagement controls roller bearings that can be adjusted axially by means of ring
and gearing are housed) and a control box. shims.
There is an opening on the side of the transmission to apply 6th, 5th, 4th, 3rd and reverse gears (new version transmissions)
a power take-off. are synchronised by means of single taper free synchroniser
rings; double taper wheels are used for 1st and 2nd gear.
Drive transmission is accomplished by a set of helical-toothed
constant mesh gears, for both forward and reverse gears. Control inside the transmission is accomplished with five rods:
a main rod to select and engage gears; four rods equipped with
forks for engaging gears.
transmission and reverse gear.
The outer engagement lever is provided with two
counterpoised weights. They dampen the control (Bowden)
wire engagement thrust and consequently attenuate noise.
Figure 1
85939
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

PRINT 603.43.351/D

The combined action of the selector lever (2) and the engagement lever (1) cause the rotation and axial movement of the rod (4)
in two subsequent steps to engage the required gear by means of the rods (8-7-6 and 9).
Neutral arrangement and/or 3rd/4th gear 1st/3rd gear selection election and engagement
selection and engagement arrangement arrangement
Figure 2 Figure 3
SECTION A-A
SECTION A-A
84147
3rd/4th gear selection 84148
According to the angular position of the selector lever (2), the This arrangement is obtained by moving the selector lever (2)
slider (3) turns with the rod (4) (which is integral) and the anticlockwise. In this way, the selector (4) is inserted in the
selector (5) arranges the slider on the 3rd/4th gear rod (9). At 1st/2nd gear engagement rod (5).
the same time, the slider (3) moves the rod (10) to prevent By moving the lever (1), the slider (3) will axially move the
the simultaneous engagement of two gears, to keep the 3rd 1st/2nd gear engagement rod (5).
and 4th gear engagement rod (9) free and to prevent
movement of the other rods by engaging the grooves in the
rods.
3rd/4th gear engagement
According to the movement of the engagement lever (1), the
slider (3) axial moves the rod (4) (which is integral), the
selector (5) (previously arranged) and consequently the
chosen 3rd and 4th gear engagement rod (9).
Neutral position coincides with the 3rd/4th gear selection
arrangement.
In this case, the vertical axis of the selector lever (2) is exactly
at 90° with respect to the horizontal axis of the control
corresponding to no angular variation of the rod (4).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

5th/6th gear selection and engagement Reverse gear selection and engagement
arrangement arrangement
Figure 4 Figure 5
84150
84149
This arrangement is obtained by moving the selector lever (2)
anticlockwise. In this way, the selector (4) is inserted in the re-
This arrangement is obtained by moving the selector lever (2) verse gear engagement rod (5).
clockwise. In this way, the selector (4) is inserted in the 5th/6th By moving the lever (1), the slider (3) will axially move the re-
gear engagement rod (5). verse gear engagement rod (5).
By moving the lever (1), the slider (3) will axially move the
Safety device
5th/6th gear engagement rod.
The transmission is equipped with a device which prevents the
simultaneous engagement of two gears.
It consists of a suitably shaped rod (6) fitted transversally in the
transmission box.
The slider (3), moves the rod (6) under the action of the lever
(2). This keeps the selected gear engagement rod free and
prevents movement of the other gears by engaging their
respective grooves.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

PRINT 603.43.351/D
TRANSMISSION 6 S 300
Type Mechanical
Input torque 320 Nm

Weight 63 kg
6 forward speeds
Speeds
1 reverse speed
Speed engagement:
Forward speeds
- 5th/6th - 3rd/4th Single-cone synchronizer
- 1st/2nd Dual-cone synchronizer
clip-on, in new version transmission with

Reverse speed
single taper synchroniser ring
Gear ratio
First 6.72
Second 3.94
Third 2.55
Fourth 1.77
Fifth 1.29
Sixth 1.00
Reverse 6.05
Shaft bearings:
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Transmission shaft bearing end play 0 ÷ -0.05 mm
Shim thickness for transmission shaft bearing

-
end play adjustment
Main shaft
Temperature for fitting:
- hubs for sliding sleeves 80° ÷ 110oC
- 1st-R gear bushes and spacer ring 80° ÷ 110oC
- front bearing* 90° ÷ 110oC
Transmission shaft
- bearings 80oC (max 120oC)
- 5th-4th gears 170o ÷ 160oC
Gear end float:

1st - 3rd - 4th - R - 5th gear 0.15 ÷ 0.40 mm
2nd gear 0.25 ÷ 0.5 mm
5th - 4th gear sliding sleeve hub retaining

0 ÷ 0.15 mm
ring end float

-
ring thickness
Retaining ring end float:
- transmission shaft front bearing 0 ÷ 0.1 mm
- main shaft roller bearing 0 ÷ 0.1 mm
Transmission shaft rear bearing retaining
-
ring thickness
LOCTITE 510
Sealant LOCTITE 242
LOCTITE 5206

Quantity 2.7 litres
2.43 kg
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

PRINT 603.43.351
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Figure 6
52506
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
Nm kgm
1 Plug retaining spring and reverse gear hardening push rod 32 ±10% 3.2 ±10%
2 M22x1.5 plug 50 5
3D 3rd and 4th gear fork articulation pins 45D 4.5
4 Plugs for rod preventing gear engagement 32 3.2
5 Clutch housing, screw to fasten clutch housing to crankcase 80 8
7J Screw securing p.t.o. side cover 46 ±15% 4.6 ±15%
8 Screw securing control cable mounting 23 ±15% 2.3 ±15%
11 Side plug on rear cover 35 3.5
12* Screw securing rear cover 23 ±15% 2.3 ±15%
13 Speedometer transmitter fixing 50 5
14 Screw locking sleeve for transmission coupling on main shaft 235 23.5
15 Fixing switches and reversing lights 40 4
20D Screw securing driver to main rod 9.5D 0.9
: Spread LOCTITE 5206 sealant on the contact surfaces

F Spread LOCTITE 242 on the thread
J Spread LOCTITE 510 on the thread
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99341003 Single-acting bridge
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
99341015 Constrictor
99341017 Pair of brackets with hole
99341025 Grips
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99360522 Tool to extract and insert main shaft, transmission shaft

and rod - fork assembly
99370234 Tool for fitting rear bearing and sleeve on main shaft
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS

(use with 99322205-99322225)
99374091 Punch for fitting bearing external races

(dia. 55 ÷ 69 mm use with 99370007)

(use with 99370006)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 7
87899
Figure 8
C-C
87881
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 9
M-M
87900
Figure 10
G-G
87901
Figure 11
P-P
87902
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TRANSMISSION TRANSVERSAL CROSS-SECTIONS
Figure 12
E-E
Figure 14
F-F
87885
Figure 13
N-N
87888
87903
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 15
D-D
87889
Figure 16
A-A
87890
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D

Figure 17 Figure 20
51385
85940
Fit the gearbox (1) with the bracket 99371057 (5) and secure With a punch (3), remove the spring pin (4) and extract the
this to the brackets 99322225 (3) on the rotary stand shaft (2) from the internal lever (1).
99322205 (2). Repeat these steps for the other shaft.
Remove the plug (4) and drain off the lubricating oil.
The used oil must be disposed of according to the law NOTE The coupling lever is bound to the stem by two snap
in force. pins.

Figure 21
Disassembly
Figure 18
51386
85941
Shift to neutral. Use a punch on the point shown by the arrow and eject the
Take out the fixing screws (1) and remove the gear control box O-rings and roller bushes (2) from the box (1).
(2).
Figure 19
Assembly
Figure 22
52507
respective shafts (2 and 6). Loosen the nuts (4) for the retaining
screws (5). Thoroughly clean the oil vapour vent (3).
Extract the levers (1 and 7) from the shafts (2 and 6) and extract With a suitable punch, mount the roller bearings (1) in the
these from the box (8). Take off the caps (4). box (2).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 23 Figure 26
51388
Using a suitable punch, mount the O-rings (1) in the box (2),
positioning them at the height shown. 85941
Pack the gap between the O-ring and roller bearing with
grease. Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces of the gear control box
(2) and apply LOCTITE 5206 sealant on them.
Figure 24
and shafts are positioned correctly in their respective seats.

Figure 27
87896
Figure 25
85943

levers.
52508 lever (3) and the outside of the bracket (4) there is a
Lubricate the roller bearings (1, Figure 23) with TUTELA MR3 distance Y of 135 mm.
9) and levers (1 and 10) on the shafts (3 and 6) in the position
marked during disassembly without tightening the nuts for the Then tighten the nuts for the screws to the required tightening
fixing screw (7). torque.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


Figure 28 Figure 31
1
1
51924 51927
Shift to neutral.
Extract the sleeve (3) from the main shaft.
Dismantle the gear control box as described under the
relevant heading.
NOTE If this is difficult, extract the sleeve (3) with the
Remove the two side plugs (1 - 3). Take out the screw (2) extractor composed of bridge 99341003 (1) and
fixing the driver (4) to the rod (5). clamps 99341017 (2).
Figure 29
Figure 32
1
1
51928
51925
Mark the assembly position of the rod (1) preventing

engagement of more than one gear at the same time and NOTE When putting away the sleeve (1) take care not to
remove it from the transmission. damage the phonic wheel (→) obtained by machining.
Figure 30
Figure 33
51926
Block rotation of the sleeve (1) by applying the lever

99370317 (3). With the bushing (2) remove the screw (5) 51829
with the washer beneath (4).

Remove the screws (1) and take off the cover (2) protecting
Take out the lever 99370317 (3). the input shaft (3).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 34 Figure 37
51930
51933
Perforate the o-ring (2) with a suitable hook and ram extractor Remove the two link pins (1) of the fork controlling the 3rd and
99340205 (1) and remove the o-ring from the transmission 4th gears.
box. Figure 38
Figure 35
1
1
51931 51934
Remove the circlip (2) retaining the front bearing (3) from the Push the two centring pins (2) downwards to free them from
input shaft (1). the transmission (1).
Remove the screws (3) securing the rear cover (4) to the
transmission (1).
Figure 36 Figure 39
74957
51932
Fit the drive input shaft (1) with tool 99345003 (2) and
secure this onto the gearbox (4), with the screws (3); screw
Take out the plug (4) with the washer (3), and extract the down the screw (5) of tool (2) to extract the gearbox from
spring (2) and the push rod (1). the bearing (6).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

PRINT 603.43.351
Figure 40 Figure 43
51936
Drill the cups (2), screw a special screw into them. 74973
Using the screw, extract the cups (2) from the rear cover (1). Mount the tool 99360522 (3) onto the rods (4, 5 and 6), on
Remove the springs (3) and pawls (4). the input shaft (1) and on the transmission shaft (9).
Secure the tool 99360522 (3) on the input shaft (1) with the
Figure 41
retaining ring (2) and with the screw (8) to the transmission
shaft (9).
Insert the part (13) of the bracket (11) into the reverse gear
(14) and tighten the screw (12).
1 Hook the tool 99360522 (3) onto the lift.
Apply the extractor composed of the bridge 99341004 (16)
and ties 99341012 (15) onto the rear cover (7).
NOTE In order not to damage the rear cover (7), place

special protections between it and the ties (15).
Using the extractor screw and the lift on the main shaft (10),
remove the main shaft (10) from the rear ball bearing and ex-
tract the shaft-rod assembly from the rear cover (7).
51937
Remove the rod (1) controlling the 3rd/4th gear and the main
rod (2) from the rear cover (3).
Figure 44
Figure 42
1
74988
Put the assembly you have just removed onto the workbench.
51938
Remove the tool 99360522 (6), separate the input shaft (4)
from the reverse gear (8) together with the roller bearings,
Take out the screw (3) and remove the reverse gear shaft (1) transmission shaft (5), drive input shaft (7) with the relevant
with the mounting (2) from the rear cover (4). synchronizer ring and the rods (1-2-3).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Disassembling the rear cover bearings Figure 48

1
Figure 45 2
3
6
4
1 5
7
51944
51951a Turn over the rear cover (4).
Remove the screws (1) securing the plates (2). Take out the O-ring (6).
Take out the plates (2). Using a suitable punch, remove the ball bearing (5). Remove
Turn over the rear cover (4) and remove the bearing (3). the tachograph sensor (7) and the reversing light switch (1)
with the washer (2) and extract the push rod (3).
Figure 46 Disassembling the transmission bearings

Figure 49
74960
74962
Using universal extractor 99348004 (1), remove the outer
ring (2) of the transmission shaft bearing. Using universal extractor 99348004 (1), remove the outer
Figure 47 Figure 50
1 1
51946
51943
Using the percussion extractor 99340205 (1) and part Using the percussion extractor 99340205 (1) and part
99348004 (2), extract the bushing with the ball bearings (3). 99348004 (2), extract the bushing with the ball bearings (3).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
Figure 51 Figure 54
51410

85945
Remove the sliding sleeve (2) for engaging 5th - 6th gear from
Turn over the transmission. Using a suitable punch, remove
the hub (1) and, taking care as the plugs (5) come out with the
the ball bearing (3).
balls (4) and springs (3), recover them.
Figure 52
Figure 55
51948
Using the percussion extractor 99340205 (1) and part

99348004 (2), extract the roller bearing (4-3).
85946
Disassembling the main shaft Use extractor 99348001 (6) as shown in the figure to extract
the primary shaft (1), the 5th gear (7), the synchroniser ring (5),
NOTE Mark the assembly position of each synchronizing de- the hub (4), the circlip (3) and the roller bearing (2).
vice on the respective gear.
Figure 56
Figure 53
85944 85947
Tighten the primary shaft (1) in a vice. Remove the

synchroniser ring (4) and the circlip (2). Remove the circlip (3) Remove the roller half cages (1).
from its housing.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 57 Figure 60
85948 51424
With the hydraulic press, remove the following from the pri- Remove the sliding sleeve (2) for engaging 1st-2nd gear from
mary shaft (1): 1st gear (10), shim (9), bushing (8), roller cage the hub (1) and, taking care as the plugs (3) come out with
(7); for transmission without synchronised reverse: reverse their relative balls (4) and springs (5), recover them.
gear (6); sliding sleeve (5), outer gear wheel (4), inner gear
wheel (3) and shim (2); for transmission with synchronised re-
verse: reverse gear (11) with engagement parts, synchroniser
ring (12) and gear (13).
Disassembling the drive input shaft
Figure 58 Figure 61
1
51956
85949 To replace the cog-wheel (1), use the same general tools for
disassembly as for assembly, heat it to a temperature of 80ºC.
Remove the reverse gear engagement sliding sleeve (2) from
the reverse gear (1). Retrieve hub (1) and pads (3) with
respective balls (4) and springs (5).
Disassembling the transmission shaft
Figure 59 Figure 62
1
1
51954
Take out the synchronizer ring (4), middle ring (3), ring (2) and
roller bearing (1).
51957
Using a hydraulic press, remove the 2nd gear (10), ring (9),
middle ring (8), synchronizer ring (7), synchronizer assembly
(6) and the bushing (5). Take out the roller bearing (11). Take out the retaining ring (1) holding the 6th gear (2).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
Figure 63 Figure 66
1
1
51958 51961
Using general tools, extract the internal ring (2) of the rear Remove the 3rd gear (1) and the roller bearing (2).
tapered roller bearing from the transmission shaft (1). Remove the synchronizer ring (3). Remove the retaining ring
(5) securing the hub (4).
Figure 64 Figure 67
1
1
51962
51959
Using a hydraulic press, extract the 6th gear (2) and the Using a hydraulic press, remove the 4th gear (3), the
internal ring (1) of the tapered roller bearing from the synchronizer ring (2) and the synchronizer assembly (1).
transmission shaft. Remove the half roller bearings (4).
Figure 65 Figure 68
1 1
51424
51960
Remove the sleeve (2) for engaging the 3rd-4th gear from the
Using a hydraulic press, remove the 5th gear (2) from the hub (1) and, taking care over the plugs (3) coming out with
transmission shaft (1). their relative balls (4) and springs (5), recover them.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
Figure 69
51964

1. Transmission shaft assembly - 2. Tapered roller bearing - 3. Transmission shaft with reverse gear toothing (A), 1st gear (B), 2nd
gear (C) - 4. Tapered bearing - 5. 4th gear - 6. Synchronizer ring - 7. Sliding sleeve - 8. Ball - 9. Spring - 10. Plug - 11. Hub - 12. Retaining
ring - 13. Half roller bearings - 14. 3rd gear - 15. 5th gear - 16. 6th gear.
Figure 70
52509
INPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY DRAWING

1 - Input shaft - 2. Cog-wheel
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
Figure 71
90233
MAIN SHAFT ASSEMBLY DRAWING

1. Single cone synchronizer ring - 2. Roller bearing - 3. Retaining ring - 4. Sliding sleeve - 5. Plug - 6. Ball - 7. Spring - 8. Hub - 9.
5th gear - 10. Main shaft with 3rd gear toothing (A), 4th gear toothing (B) - 11. Roller bearing - 12. 2nd gear - 13. Dual cone
synchronizer - internal ring C, middle ring D, synchronizer ring E - 14. Bushing - 15. 1st gear - 16. Spacer ring -
17.* Reverse gear - 18.* Ring with external toothing - 19.* Ring with internal toothing - 20.* Spacer ring. - 21.• Reverse gear -
22.• Synchroniser ring - 23.• Gear.
* Transmission without synchronised reverse
• Transmission with synchronised reverse
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 72
85977
1ST-2ND GEAR DUAL CONE SYNCHRONIZER ASSEMBLY

Figure 73
85978
3RD - 4TH - 5TH - 6TH GEAR SINGLE CONE SYNCHRONIZER ASSEMBLY
Figure 74
86130
SINGLE CONE SYNCHRONIZER ASSEMBLY REVERSE GEAR
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
CHECKS
Transmission With a feeler gauge, check the distance S on two diametrically
opposite points.
The transmission and relative covers must show no sign of
cracking. If the measured value S is less than 0.8 mm, replace the
The mating surfaces of the covers and transmission must not synchronizer ring.
be damaged or deformed. Remove any remains of sealant Turn the synchronizer ring (1) so as to ensure correct coupling
from them. on the cog-wheel.
The seats of the bearings, reverse gear shaft and gear control
rods must be neither damaged nor too worn.
Hubs - sliding sleeves - forks

be damaged. The sliding sleeve must run freely on the hub.
The plugs and balls for positioning the sliding sleeve must be
neither damaged nor worn. The toothing of the sliding sleeves
must not be damaged. The forks must be sound with an end
float, in the radial groove of the sleeve, no greater than 1 mm.
Bearings
of wear or overheating. They must only be removed if they are
to be replaced.
Shafts - gears
The seats on the shafts, for bearings, must be neither damaged
nor worn. The toothing of the gears must be neither damaged
nor worn.
Check the wear on the synchronizer rings, proceeding as
follows:
D-type dual cone synchronizers for 1st/2nd gears
After this check, the synchronizer rings must be Figure 76

! marked on their respective gears to avoid swapping
- See that the friction surface is not undulated.
BK-type single cone synchronizers for 3rd/4th/5th/6th

gears
Figure 75
4
52511
Position the internal ring (3), middle ring (2) and the
synchronizer ring (1) on the tapered cog-wheel (4) of the gear.
Turn the synchronizer ring (1) so as to ensure correct coupling
between the parts.
Applying a uniform force of 50 N on the synchronizer ring (1),
measure the distance S on two diametrically opposite points
52510 with a feeler gauge.
Arrange the synchroniser ring (1) on the respective gear or If the average measured value S is less than 1.5 mm, replace
reverse taper ring (2). all the rings.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 77 Figure 79
85916
85918
6TH/5TH GEAR SYNCHRONISERS 1ST/2ND GEAR SYNCHRONISERS

A. synchronization reserve 6th/5th gear: 1 ÷ 1,4 mm A. synchronization reserve 1st/2nd gear: 1,6 ÷ 2,0 mm
B. 6th/5th release clearance: 0,3 ÷ 0,7 mm B. 1st/2nd release clearance: 0,9 ÷ 1,5 mm
Figure 78 Figure 80
85917 85919
3TH/4TH GEAR SYNCHRONISERS REVERSE GEAR SYNCHRONISER

A. synchronization reserve 1st/2ndgear: 1 ÷ 1,4 mm A. Synchronization reserve: 0.9 ÷ 1,4 mm
B. 1st/2nd release clearance: 0,3 ÷ 0,7 mm B. release clearance: 0,35 ÷ 0,85 mm
1. Hub - 2. 6th gear - 3. Synchronizer ring - 4. Sliding sleeve - 5. th gear cog-wheel - 6. 3rd gear cog-wheel -
7. th gear cog-wheel - 8. 2nd gear cog-wheel - 9. Reverse gear - 10. Middle ring - 11. Ring - 12. Reverse gear -
13. Reverse gear ring
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


Figure 81 Figure 84
51969
51966 Mount the retaining ring (1) whose thickness produces null
Clamp the transmission shaft (1) in a vice and position the half end float in its seat.
roller bearings (2) on it.
Check the end float of the 4th gear (2). It should be
Figure 82 0.15 ÷ 0.40 mm.
Figure 85
1
1
51967
51970
Mount the 4th gear (2) and position the synchronizer ring (1)
on this. Mount the sliding sleeve (1) on the hub (2). Put the springs (5),
Figure 83 them under the sliding sleeve (1).
Figure 86
51968 51971
Heat the hub (2) to a temperature of 110° ÷ 150°C and

mount it on the transmission shaft (1), taking care that the Position the synchronizer ring (2) on the hub (3) so that its
protrusions (3) of the synchronizer ring are positioned protrusions enter the seats in the hub (3). Mount the roller
correctly in their seats in the hub (2). bearing (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 87 Figure 90
1 1
51977
Mount the retaining ring (1) whose thickness produces null

end float in its seat.
51974
Figure 91
Mount the 3rd gear (1).
1
Figure 88
51978
Heat the internal rings (1 - 3) of the tapered roller bearings to

a temperature of approx. 80°C and, with a suitable punch (1),
mount them on the transmission shaft (2).
51975
Mounting the main shaft
With a hydraulic press, mount the 5th gear (1) pre-heated to
approx. 170°C.
NOTE Mount the synchronizer rings on their respective gears
Check the end float of the 3rd gear (2). It should be according to the marks made during disassembly or
0.15 ÷ 0.40 mm. when checking in the case of replacement.
Figure 89 Figure 92
51976
51973
With a hydraulic press, mount the 6th gear (1) pre-heated to Tighten the main shaft (1) and position the roller bearing (2)
approx. 170°C. on it.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 93 Figure 95
51982
51980
Mount the 2nd gear (4) and position the ring (3), middle ring plugs (4) and balls (3) into the seats in the hub (1), settling
(2) and synchronizer ring (1) on it, taking care that the tongues them under the sliding sleeve (2).
(→) of the middle ring (2) enter the slots (→) in the gear (4).
Figure 96
51983
Position the synchronizer ring (3), middle ring (2) and ring (1)
on the hub (4), taking care that the tongues (→) of the ring
Figure 94 (1) and the projections (→) of the ring (3) enter the seats in
the hub (4).
Figure 97
51981
Heat the hub (2) to a temperature of 80° ÷ 110°C and mount

it on the main shaft (1), taking care that the projections (3) of
the synchronizer ring and the tongues (→) of the ring (3,
Figure 93) are positioned correctly in the seats in the hub (2). 51984
Check the end float of the gear (4). It should be Position the roller bearing (2). Mount the 1st gear (1) taking
0.25 ÷ 0.5 mm. care that the tongues (3) of the middle ring enter the slots in
the gear (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 98 For transmission with synchronised reverse, proceed as

follows
Figure 101
85961
Heat the spacer ring (2) to a temperature of approx. 80° ÷ 85950
110°C and mount it on the main shaft (1). Check the end float Fit reverse gear (1).
of the gear (4); this should be 0.15 ÷0.3 mm. Fit sliding sleeve (2) on reverse gear hub (1).
Heat the bushing (3) to a temperature of approx. 80° ÷ 110°C Insert the springs (5), the pads (3) and the balls (4) in the hub
and mount it on the main shaft (1). seats (1) and arrange them with respect to the sliding sleeve
Mount the roller bearing (5). (2).
Figure 102
For transmission without synchronised reverse, proceed as
follows
Figure 99
85951
Fit the synchroniser ring (2).

Heat the gear ring (3) to 110° ÷ 150° and fit on primary shaft
51988
(1).
Mount the reverse gear (4), heat the hub (2) to a temperature Check reverse gear play (4) which must be 0.15 ÷ 0.4 mm.
of 80° ÷ 110°C and mount it on the main shaft (1). Check the
clearance of the gear (4); it should be 0.15 ÷0.4 mm.
Figure 103
Mount the sliding sleeve (3).
1
Figure 100
51952
51989
Turn the main shaft over and position the half roller bearings
Heat the ring with internal toothing (3) and the spacer ring (2) (3) on it.
to a temperature of 80° ÷ 110°C and mount them on the Mount the 5th gear (2) and position the synchronizer ring (1)
main shaft (1). on it.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
Figure 104 Rods - forks - selector - driver

Figure 107
51990
Heat the hub (2) to a temperature of approx. 80° ÷ 110°C

and mount it on the main shaft (1) taking care that the projec-
tions (3) of the synchronizer ring are positioned in the seats
in the hub (2).
51992
end float in its seat. 1. Rod with 3rd/4th gear engagement fork - 2. Plugs - 3. Rod
with 5th/6th gear engagement fork - 4. Main rod - 5. Rod with
Figure 105 reverse gear engagement fork - 6. Rod with 1st/2nd gear en-
gagement fork.
1
Check the state of the plugs (2) of the 3rd/4th gear engage-
ment fork and replace them if they are worn.
To replace the forks of the selector and driver from their re-
spective control rods it is sufficient to remove the retaining
For assembly, carry out these steps in reverse order, replacing
the spring pins.
NOTE Spring pegs must be positioned with the cutting

edge placed level.
51991
Mount the sliding sleeve (2).

Put the springs (3), plugs (5) and balls (4) into the seats in the
hub (1) and position them under the sliding sleeve (2).
Figure 106 Mounting the transmission

The nuts and screws must be tightened to the re-
quired torque unless specified otherwise, with the
thread dry and degreased.
Adjusting the transmission shaft bearing end

float
NOTE The transmission shaft bearing end float is only ad-
85952
justed if the bearings, transmission shaft gears, trans-
mission shaft, transmission or rear cover have been
Heat the bearing (2) to 80° ÷ 110°C and fit on primary shaft replaced or if too much clearance has been found.
(1). Fit the circlip (4) and synchroniser ring (3).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 108 Where:

A = measured end float, e.g. 0.18 mm;
B = average bearing pre-load, e.g. 0.02 mm;
C = adjustment value used for the measurement 1.65 mm;
S = 0.18 + 0.02 + 1.65 = 1.85 mm
Then mount the rear cover, transmission shaft and external
ring of the front bearing.
Figure 110
51993
Determine the thickness S of the ring (1) for adjusting the

transmission shaft bearing end float, proceeding as follows:
- position the thinner adjustment ring (1) 1.65 mm thick in
the seat in the transmission (3);
- heat the seat of the bearing (2) to approx. 60°C. Mount
the external ring of the bearing (2) with the punch
99374091 and grip 99370007, see Figure 110;
51996
- mount the transmission shaft complete with the internal
rings of the tapered roller bearings; Position the adjustment ring (1, Figure 108) of the thickness
determined with the above measurement. Heat the bearing
- mount the external ring of the rear bearing in the rear seats of the box to a temperature of approx. 80°C and
cover in a similar manner to the front one (see mount:
Figure 111);
- the external ring (3) of the front tapered roller bearing
- mount the rear cover on the transmission; with punch 99374091 (2) and grip 99370007 (1);
- screw on the 8 fixing screws so that between one screw - the ball bearing (6) with a general punch;
and another there is a hole for a free screw and tighten - the bushing with ball bearing (9) and the roller bearings
them to the required torque; (4-5) with a general punch.
- turn the transmission shaft to settle the bearings; Position the retaining plates (7) and secure them to the box,
tightening the screws (8) to the required torque.
51997
52512 Heat the bearing seats of the rear cover (1) to a temperature
- using a comparator (2) zeroed on the 5th gear toothing of approx. 80°C and mount:
of the transmission shaft (1) measure its end float A - the external ring (3) of the tapered roller bearing with
through the opening for the power take-off connection punch 99374091 (2) and grip 99370007 (1);
and note it down. - the ball bearing (4) and the bushing with ball bearings (7)
The thickness S is given by: with a general punch.
Position the retaining plates (6). Secure these to the rear
S=A+B+C cover, tightening the screws (5) to the required torque.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 112 During this operation, check that the output shaft goes into the
supporting ball bearing and the control rods (3 -4 - 5) go into
their respective seats.
Figure 114
52000
Screw tool 99370234 pin (7) into output shaft hole (2) and
fit bushing (4) and spacer (5) on tool.
Screw on the nut (6) and at the same time lower the hoist so
the output shaft (2) is positioned on the rear ball bearing (3).
Remove tools 99360522 (1) and 99370234 (4-5-6-7).
74989
Clamp the main shaft in a vice (4).

Tighten the primary shaft (4) in a vice. Fit tool 99360522 (6) on
the input transmission shaft (1) and fasten with the circlip (7).
Couple the secondary shaft (9) to the primary shaft (4) and
fasten by tightening the screw (8) on the tool (6). Figure 115
Fit the 3rd/4th gear engagement fork (14) onto the respective
sliding sleeve.
Position the forks with their rods (2 - 3 - 5) on the sliding sleeves
and secure them with the sleeves of tool 99360522 (6).
Couple the reverse gear (13) with the shafts (4 and 9) and
fasten it to them with the part (12) of the bracket (10) tighten
the screw (11).
Figure 113
52001
Place the roller bearings in the reverse gear.

Mount the spindle (2) and the mounting (1) so that the rel-
evant holes for the fixing screw are aligned with the relevant
74990 hole of the rear cover (4).
Hook hoist to tool 99360522 (1), lift the unit (2) as previously Screw down the screw (3) fixing the spindle (2) and mounting
mounted, and partially insert it into the rear cover (6). (1) to the rear cover (4) and tighten it to the prescribed
torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 116
NOTE When mounting the transmission, check that the shafts
and control rods are positioned correctly in their re-
spective seats and that the rod (2, Figure 116) stays
connected to the 3rd/4th gear engagement fork (1).
Figure 119
52004
Mount the 3rd/4th gear control rod (2) in the rear cover (4),
connecting it to the relative fork (1), and the main rod (3).
Figure 117
1
51933
Apply LOCTITE 242 to the thread of the pins (1).

Screw the pins (1) into the box, checking that their ends go
into the hole of the 3rd/4th gear engagement fork link (1,
Figure 116) and then tighten them to the required torque.
NOTE If during these assembly operations the fork (1,

Figure 116.) comes free of the control rod, it will not
be possible to mount the pins (1) until they have been
51936
reconnected.
Put the pawls (4) and springs (3) in the rear cover (1) and drive
in the retaining cups (2) with a suitable punch. Figure 120
Apply LOCTITE 5206 on gearbox attachment.
Figure 118
52003
Screw on the screws (2) securing the rear cover (3) to the
transmission (1) without fully tightening them.
90230
Mount the centring pins (4) in the rear cover (3) and in the
Warm up the front bearing inner ring (2) at 90÷110°C and fit transmission (1).
the gearbox (1) on the rear cover.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

51932 52006
Mount the push rod (1) and the spring (2). Screw on the plug Mount the cover (1) protecting the input shaft and tighten the
(4) with a new washer (3), tightening it to the required torque. screws (2) to the required torque.
51931
52007
Fit a new retaining ring (2) securing the front bearing (3) onto
Mount the O-ring (2) in the rear cover (1) with the key
the input shaft (1).
99374454 (4) and the grip 9937006 (3).
52008
Fit the transmission shaft coupling (1) onto the output shaft.
52005
If there is any interference, use the tool 99370234 (2) for as-
Using the key 9937455 (3), mount the O-ring (2) in the trans- sembly with the lever 99370317 (3) to lock the coupling.
mission (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

52009 51924
Mount the washer (3) and screw on the screw (4). Apply sealant to the thread of the plugs (1 - 3), screw them
into the box, tightening them to the required torque.
Lock the rotation of the flange (1) with the lever 99370317
(5) and tighten the screw (4) to the required torque. Position the driver (4) on the rod (5).
Mount the tachograph sensor (2) and the reversing light Secure it with the screw (2) after applying LOCTITE 242 onto
switch. its thread.
51925
52118
Mount the rod (1) preventing engagement of more than one Fit a new gasket (1) onto the transmission.
gear at the same time, in the position marked during disas-
sembly. Apply LOCTITE 510 on the screw threading (2).
Mount the side cover (3) and tighten the fixing screws (2) to
Mount the control box as described under the relevant hea-
ding.
Mount the oil drainage plug, tightening it to the required torque.
and grade.
Mount the oil filler and level indicator cap, tightening it to the
required torque.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY 6 S 380 O.D. TRANSMISSION 83
6 S 380 O.D. Transmission
Page
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
GEAR SELECTION AND ENGAGEMENT . . . . . 86
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
OVERHAULING THE TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . 99
- Gear control box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
- Check levers mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
- Disassembling the drive input shaft . . . . . . . . . 107
CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
- Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
- Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
- Shafts - gears . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

end float 117
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

84 6 S 380 O.D. TRANSMISSION DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
GENERAL
The 6 S 380 O.D. transmission is mechanical with synchronized The input and main shafts are supported, in the transmission,
engagement of forward gears. by watertight, non-adjustable ball bearings.
It is composed of a light alloy box (which also serves as a clutch The transmission shaft is supported, in the transmission, by
cover), a rear cover (where the speed engagement controls roller bearings that can be adjusted axially by means of ring
and gearing are housed) and a control box. shims.
There is an opening on the side of the transmission to apply 6th, 5th, 4th, 3rd and reverse gears (new version transmissions)
a power take-off. are synchronised by means of single taper free synchroniser
rings; double taper wheels are used for 1st and 2nd gear.
Drive transmission is accomplished by a set of helical-toothed
constant mesh gears, for both forward and reverse gears. Control inside the transmission is accomplished with five rods:
a main rod to select and engage gears; four rods equipped with
forks for engaging gears.
transmission and reverse gear.
The outer engagement lever is provided with two
counterpoised weights. They dampen the control (Bowden)
wire engagement thrust and consequently attenuate noise.
Figure 1
85939
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

PRINT 603.43.351/D

The combined action of the selector lever (2) and the engagement lever (1) cause the rotation and axial movement of the rod (4)
in two subsequent steps to engage the required gear by means of the rods (8-7-6 and 9).
Neutral arrangement and/or 3rd/4th gear 1st/3rd gear selection election and engagement
selection and engagement arrangement arrangement
Figure 2 Figure 3
SECTION A-A
SECTION A-A
84147
3rd/4th gear selection 84148
According to the angular position of the selector lever (2), the This arrangement is obtained by moving the selector lever (2)
slider (3) turns with the rod (4) (which is integral) and the anticlockwise. In this way, the selector (4) is inserted in the
selector (5) arranges the slider on the 3rd/4th gear rod (9). At 1st/2nd gear engagement rod (5).
the same time, the slider (3) moves the rod (10) to prevent By moving the lever (1), the slider (3) will axially move the
the simultaneous engagement of two gears, to keep the 3rd 1st/2nd gear engagement rod (5).
and 4th gear engagement rod (9) free and to prevent
movement of the other rods by engaging the grooves in the
rods.
3rd/4th gear engagement
According to the movement of the engagement lever (1), the
slider (3) axial moves the rod (4) (which is integral), the
selector (5) (previously arranged) and consequently the
chosen 3rd and 4th gear engagement rod (9).
Neutral position coincides with the 3rd/4th gear selection
arrangement.
In this case, the vertical axis of the selector lever (2) is exactly
at 90° with respect to the horizontal axis of the control
corresponding to no angular variation of the rod (4).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

5th/6th gear selection and engagement Reverse gear selection and engagement
arrangement arrangement
Figure 4 Figure 5
84150
84149
This arrangement is obtained by moving the selector lever (2)
anticlockwise. In this way, the selector (4) is inserted in the re-
This arrangement is obtained by moving the selector lever (2) verse gear engagement rod (5).
clockwise. In this way, the selector (4) is inserted in the 5th/6th By moving the lever (1), the slider (3) will axially move the re-
gear engagement rod (5). verse gear engagement rod (5).
By moving the lever (1), the slider (3) will axially move the
Safety device
5th/6th gear engagement rod.
The transmission is equipped with a device which prevents the
simultaneous engagement of two gears.
It consists of a suitably shaped rod (6) fitted transversally in the
transmission box.
The slider (3), moves the rod (6) under the action of the lever
(2). This keeps the selected gear engagement rod free and
prevents movement of the other gears by engaging their
respective grooves.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

PRINT 603.43.351/D
TRANSMISSION 6 S 380 O.D.
Type Mechanical
Input torque 320 Nm

Weight 63 kg
6 forward speeds
Speeds
1 reverse speed
Speed engagement:
Forward speeds
- 5th/6th - 3rd/4th Single-cone synchronizer
- 1st/2nd Dual-cone synchronizer
clip-on, in new version transmission with

Reverse speed
single taper synchroniser ring
Gear ratio
First 5.375
Second 3.154
Third 2.041
Fourth 1.365
Fifth 1
Sixth 0.791
Reverse 4.838
Shaft bearings:
O.D.. = Over Drive
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Transmission shaft bearing end play 0 ÷ -0.05 mm
Shim thickness for transmission shaft bearing

-
end play adjustment
Main shaft
- hubs for sliding sleeves 80° ÷ 110oC
- 1st-R gear bushes and gear 110° ÷ 150oC
- front bearing* 90° ÷ 110oC
Transmission shaft
- bearings 80oC (max 120oC)
- 5th-4th gears 170o ÷ 160oC
Gear end float:

1st - 3rd - 4th - R - 5th gear 0.15 ÷ 0.40 mm
2nd gear 0.25 ÷ 0.5 mm

0 ÷ 0.15 mm
ring end float

-
ring thickness
Retaining ring end float:
- transmission shaft front bearing 0 ÷ 0.1 mm
- main shaft roller bearing 0 ÷ 0.1 mm
Transmission shaft rear bearing retaining
-
ring thickness
LOCTITE 510
Sealant LOCTITE 242
LOCTITE 5206

Quantity 2.2 litres
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

PRINT 603.43.351
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Figure 6
52506
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
Nm kgm
1 Plug retaining spring and reverse gear hardening push rod 32 ±10% 3.2 ±10%
2 M22x1.5 plug 50 5
3D 3rd and 4th gear fork articulation pins 45D 4.5
4 Plugs for rod preventing gear engagement 32 3.2
5 Clutch housing, screw to fasten clutch housing to crankcase 80 8
7J Screw securing p.t.o. side cover 46 ±15% 4.6 ±15%
8 Screw securing control cable mounting 23 ±15% 2.3 ±15%
11 Side plug on rear cover 35 3.5
12* Screw securing rear cover 23 ±15% 2.3 ±15%
13 Speedometer transmitter fixing 50 5
14 Screw locking sleeve for transmission coupling on main shaft 235 23.5
15 Fixing switches and reversing lights 40 4
20D Screw securing driver to main rod 9.5D 0.9
21D 5th and 6th gear fork articulation pins 45 4.5
: Spread LOCTITE 5206 sealant on the contact surfaces

F Spread LOCTITE 242 on the thread
J Spread LOCTITE 510 on the thread
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99341003 Single-acting bridge
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
99341015 Constrictor
99341017 Pair of brackets with hole
99341025 Grips
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99360522 Tool to extract and insert main shaft, transmission shaft

and rod - fork assembly
99370234 Tool for fitting rear bearing and sleeve on main shaft
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS

(use with 99322205-99322225)
99374091 Punch for fitting bearing external races

(dia. 55 ÷ 69 mm use with 99370007)

(use with 99370006)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 7
87899
Figure 8
C-C
87881
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 9
M-M
87900
Figure 10
G-G
87901
Figure 11
P-P
87902
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 12 Figure 14
E-E N-N
87885 87887
Figure 13 Figure 15
R-R F-F
87886 87888
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 16
D-D
87889
Figure 17 Figure 18
A-A
87890 87891
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D

Figure 19 Figure 22
51385
Remove the rev sensor (4). 90208 With a punch (3), remove the spring pin (4) and extract the
Fit the gearbox (1) with the bracket 99371057 (5) and secure shaft (2) from the internal lever (1).
this to the brackets 99322225 (3) on the rotary stand Repeat these steps for the other shaft.
99322205 (2).
Remove the plug (4) and drain off the lubricating oil. NOTE The coupling lever is bound to the stem by two snap
pins.
The used oil must be disposed of according to the law
in force.

Disassembly Figure 23
Figure 20
51386
85941
Shift to neutral. Use a punch on the point shown by the arrow and eject the
Take out the fixing screws (1) and remove the gear control box O-rings and roller bushes (2) from the box (1).
(2).
Figure 21
Assembly
Figure 24
52507
respective shafts (2 and 6). Loosen the nuts (4) for the
retaining screws (5). Thoroughly clean the oil vapour vent (3).
Extract the levers (1 and 7) from the shafts (2 and 6) and With a suitable punch, mount the roller bearings (1) in the
extract these from the box (8). Take off the caps (4). box (2).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 25 Figure 28
51388
Using a suitable punch, mount the O-rings (1) in the box (2),
positioning them at the height shown. 85941
Pack the gap between the O-ring and roller bearing with
grease. Thoroughly clean the mating surfaces of the gear control box
(2) and apply LOCTITE 5706 sealant on them.
Figure 26
and shafts are positioned correctly in their respective seats.

Figure 29
87896
Figure 27
85943

levers.
52508 lever (3) and the outside of the bracket (4) there is a
Lubricate the roller bearings (1, Figure 25) with TUTELA MR3 distance Y of 135 mm.
9) and levers (1 and 10) on the shafts (3 and 6) in the position
marked during disassembly without tightening the nuts for the Then tighten the nuts for the screws to the required tightening
fixing screw (7). torque.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


Figure 30 Figure 33
51924
Shift to neutral. 90250
Dismantle the gear control box as described under the
relevant heading. Extract the sleeve (3) from the main shaft.
Remove the two side plugs (1 - 3). Remove the screw (2) and
take off the rod (5) dragging device (4). NOTE If difficult, remove the sleeve (3) with extractor made
up of link 99341003 (1) and grips 99341017 (2) and
NOTE The screw threading (2) is treated with LOCTITE block (4).
242.
Figure 34
Figure 31
1
1
51928
51925
NOTE When putting away the sleeve (1) take care not to
Mark the assembly position of the rod (1) preventing
damage the phonic wheel (→) obtained by machining.
engagement of more than one gear at the same time and
remove it from the transmission.
Figure 32 Figure 35
1
1
51926
Block rotation of the sleeve (1) by applying the lever 51829

99370317 (3). With the bushing (2) remove the screw (5)
with the washer beneath (4). Remove the screws (1) and take off the cover (2) protecting
Take out the lever 99370317 (3). the input shaft (3).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 36 Figure 39
51930
90209
Perforate the o-ring (2) with a suitable hook and ram extractor Remove the two fork knuckle pins (1) which control the 3rd
99340205 (1) and remove the o-ring from the transmission — 4th speed and the two fork knuckle pins (2) which control
box. the 5th — 6th speed.
Figure 40
Figure 37
1
1
51931 51934
Remove the circlip (2) retaining the front bearing (3) from the Push the two locating pins (2) downwards until taking them
input shaft (1). out of the rear cover (4).
Remove the screws (3) securing the rear cover (4) to the
transmission (1).
Figure 38 Figure 41
74957
51932
Fit the drive input shaft (1) with tool 99345003 (2) and
secure this onto the gearbox (4), with the screws (3); screw
Take out the plug (4) with the washer (3), and extract the down the screw (5) of tool (2) to extract the gearbox from
spring (2) and the push rod (1). the bearing (6).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

PRINT 603.43.351
Figure 42 Figure 45
51936
Drill the cups (2), screw a special screw into them. 90212
Using the screw, extract the cups (2) from the rear cover (1). Mount the tool 99360522 (3) onto the rods (4, 5 and 6), on
Remove the springs (3) and pawls (4). the input shaft (1) and on the transmission shaft (9).
Secure the tool 99360522 (3) on the input shaft (1) with the
Figure 43
retaining ring (2) and with the screw (8) to the transmission
shaft (9).
Insert the part (13) of the bracket (11) into the reverse gear
(14) and tighten the screw (12).
Hook the tool 99360522 (3) onto the lift.
Apply the extractor composed of the bridge 99341004 (16)
and ties 99341012 (15) onto the rear cover (7).
NOTE In order not to damage the rear cover (7), place

special protections between it and the ties (15).
Using the extractor screw and the lift on the main shaft (10),
remove the main shaft (10) from the rear ball bearing and ex-
tract the shaft-rod assembly from the rear cover (7).
90210
Remove the rod (1) controlling the 3rd/4th gear and the main
rod (2) from the rear cover (3).
Figure 46
Figure 44
90211
90213
Take out the screw (3) and remove the reverse gear shaft (1) Remove the rod (1) from the rear cover (2).
with the mounting (2) from the rear cover (4).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 47 Figure 49
74960

90214 ring (2) of the transmission shaft bearing.
Clamp the primary shaft (6) in a vice.

Remove the rods (10 and 11) with the relevant forks. Remove
the forks (3 and 4) and the small blocks. Figure 50
1
Support the secondary shaft (2), slacken the screw (1)
and remove the secondary shaft (2).
Remove the RM gear (4).

Remove the snap ring (8) and the tool 9936522 (9).
Remove the input shaft (7).
51943

99348004 (2), extract the bushing with the ball bearings (3).
Disassembling the rear cover bearings
Figure 48 Figure 51
51951a
51944
Remove the screws (1) securing the plates (2). Turn over the rear cover (4).
Take out the O-ring (6).
Turn over the rear cover (4) and remove the bearing (3).
Using a suitable punch, remove the ball bearing (5). Remove
the tachograph sensor (7) and the reversing light switch (1)
with the washer (2) and extract the push rod (3).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
Disassembling the transmission bearings

Figure 55
Figure 52
51948

99348004 (2), extract the roller bearing (4-3).
74962
Disassembling the main shaft
NOTE Mark the assembly position of each synchronizing de-
vice on the respective gear.
Figure 53
Figure 56
1
51946
85944
Tighten the primary shaft (1) in a vice. Remove the
99348004 (2), extract the bushing with the ball bearings (3).
synchroniser ring (4) and the circlip (2). Remove the circlip (3)
from its housing.
Figure 54 Figure 57
51410

Take out the plates (2). 85945
Turn over the transmission. Using a suitable punch, remove Remove the sliding sleeve (2) for engaging 5th - 6th gear from
the ball bearing (3). the hub (1) and, taking care as the plugs (5) come out with the
balls (4) and springs (3), recover them.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 58 Figure 61
85949
Remove the reverse gear engagement sliding sleeve (2) from

85946 the reverse gear (1). Retrieve hub (1) and pads (3) with
respective balls (4) and springs (5).
Use extractor 99348001 (6) as shown in the figure to extract
the primary shaft (1), the 5th gear (7), the synchroniser ring (5),
the hub (4), the circlip (3) and the roller bearing (2).
Figure 62
Figure 59
51954
Take out the synchronizer ring (4), middle ring (3), ring (2) and
roller bearing (1).
85947 Using a hydraulic press, remove the 2nd gear (10), ring (9),
middle ring (8), synchronizer ring (7), synchronizer assembly
Remove the roller half cages (1). (6) and the bushing (5). Take out the roller bearing (11).
Figure 60
Figure 63
90215
Use the hydraulic vice to remove from the primary shaft (1):
the 1st speed gear (8), the spacer (7), the bush (6), the roller
cage (5), the R.M. gear (4) together with the coupling 51424
elements, the synchronising ring (3) and the serrated ring (2). Remove the sliding sleeve (2) for engaging 1st-2nd gear from
the hub (1) and, taking care as the plugs (3) come out with
their relative balls (4) and springs (5), recover them.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
Disassembling the drive input shaft Figure 67

Figure 64
1
51956
To replace the cog-wheel (1), use the same general tools for
51959
disassembly as for assembly, heat it to a temperature of 80ºC.
Using a hydraulic press, extract the 6th gear (2) and the
internal ring (1) of the tapered roller bearing from the
transmission shaft.
Disassembling the transmission shaft
Figure 65
Figure 68
51960
90217
Using a hydraulic press, remove the 5th gear (2) from the
transmission shaft (1).
Take out the retaining ring (1) holding the 5th gear (2).
Figure 66 Figure 69
90216 51961
Using general tools, extract the internal ring (2) of the rear Remove the 3rd gear (1) and the roller bearing (2).
tapered roller bearing from the transmission shaft (1). Remove the synchronizer ring (3). Remove the retaining ring
(5) securing the hub (4).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
Figure 70 Figure 71
51962 51424
Using a hydraulic press, remove the 4th gear (3), the Remove the sleeve (2) for engaging the 3rd-4th gear from the
synchronizer ring (2) and the synchronizer assembly (1). hub (1) and, taking care over the plugs (3) coming out with
their relative balls (4) and springs (5), recover them.
Remove the half roller bearings (4).
Figure 72
90218

1. Transmission shaft assembly - 2. Tapered roller bearing - 3. Transmission shaft with reverse gear toothing (A), 1st gear (B),
2nd gear (C) - 4. Tapered bearing - 5. 4th gear - 6. Synchronizer ring - 7. Sliding sleeve - 8. Ball - 9. Spring - 10. Plug -
11. Hub - 12. Retaining ring - 13. Half roller bearings - 14. 3rd gear - 15. 6th gear - 16. 5th gear.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

3Print 603.43.351/D
Figure 73
90219
PRIMARY SHAFT AND INPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY

1. Input shaft with 5th speed gear. - 2. Retaining ring - 3. Roller bearing - 4. Single cone synchronizer ring - 5. Sliding sleeve -
6. Plug - 7. Ball - 8. Spring - 9. Hub - 10. 6th gear - 11. Main shaft with 3rd gear toothing (A), 4th gear toothing (B) -
12. Roller bearing - 13. 2nd gear - 14. Dual cone synchronizer - internal ring C, middle ring D, synchronizer ring E -
15. Bushing - 16. 1st gear - 17. Spacer ring - 18.• Reverse gear - 19.• Synchroniser ring - 20.• Gear.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 74
85977
1ST-2ND GEAR DUAL CONE SYNCHRONIZER ASSEMBLY

Figure 75
85978
3RD - 4TH - 5TH - 6TH GEAR SINGLE CONE SYNCHRONIZER ASSEMBLY
Figure 76
86130
SINGLE CONE SYNCHRONIZER ASSEMBLY REVERSE GEAR
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
CHECKS
Transmission With a feeler gauge, check the distance S on two diametrically
opposite points.
The transmission and relative covers must show no sign of
cracking. If the measured value S is less than 0.8 mm, replace the
The mating surfaces of the covers and transmission must not synchronizer ring.
be damaged or deformed. Remove any remains of sealant Turn the synchronizer ring (1) so as to ensure correct coupling
from them. on the cog-wheel.
The seats of the bearings, reverse gear shaft and gear control
rods must be neither damaged nor too worn.
Hubs - sliding sleeves - forks

be damaged. The sliding sleeve must run freely on the hub.
The plugs and balls for positioning the sliding sleeve must be
neither damaged nor worn. The toothing of the sliding sleeves
must not be damaged. The forks must be sound with an end
float, in the radial groove of the sleeve, no greater than 1 mm.
Bearings
of wear or overheating. They must only be removed if they are
to be replaced.
Shafts - gears
The seats on the shafts, for bearings, must be neither damaged
nor worn. The toothing of the gears must be neither damaged
nor worn.
Check the wear on the synchronizer rings, proceeding as
follows:
D-type dual cone synchronizers for 1st/2nd gears
After this check, the synchronizer rings must be Figure 78

! marked on their respective gears to avoid swapping
- See that the friction surface is not undulated.
BK-type single cone synchronizers for 3rd/4th/5th/6th

gears
Figure 77
4
52511
Position the internal ring (3), middle ring (2) and the
synchronizer ring (1) on the tapered cog-wheel (4) of the gear.
Turn the synchronizer ring (1) so as to ensure correct coupling
between the parts.
Applying a uniform force of 50 N on the synchronizer ring (1),
measure the distance S on two diametrically opposite points
52510 with a feeler gauge.
Arrange the synchroniser ring (1) on the respective gear or If the average measured value S is less than 1.5 mm, replace
reverse taper ring (2). all the rings.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 79 Figure 81
90220
85918
5TH - 6TH GEAR SYNCHRONISERS 2ND-1ST GEAR SYNCHRONISERS

A. synchronization reserve 6th-5th gear: 1÷1,4 mm A. synchronization reserve 2nd-1st gear: 1,6÷2,0 mm
B. 5th-6th release clearance: 0,3÷0,7 mm B. 1st-2nd release clearance: 0,9÷1,5 mm
Figure 80 Figure 82
85917 85919
3TH/4TH GEAR SYNCHRONISERS REVERSE GEAR SYNCHRONISER

A. synchronization reserve 1st-2nd gear: 1÷1,4 mm A. Synchronization reserve: 0.9÷1,4 mm
B. 1st-2nd release clearance: 0,3÷0,7 mm B. release clearance: 0,35÷0,85 mm
1. Hub - 2. 5th gear - 3. Synchronizer ring - 4. Sliding sleeve - 5. 6th gear cog-wheel - 6. 3rd gear cog-wheel -
7. 4th gear cog-wheel - 8. 2nd gear cog-wheel - 9. 1st gear cog-wheel - 10. Middle ring - 11. Ring - 12. Reverse gear -
13. Reverse gear ring
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


Figure 83 Figure 86
51969
51966 Mount the retaining ring (1) whose thickness produces null
Clamp the transmission shaft (1) in a vice and position the half end float in its seat.
roller bearings (2) on it.
Check the end float of the 4th gear (2). It should be
Figure 84 0.15 ÷ 0.40 mm.
Figure 87
1
1
51967
51970
Mount the 4th gear (2) and position the synchronizer ring (1)
on this. Mount the sliding sleeve (1) on the hub (2). Put the springs (5),
Figure 85 them under the sliding sleeve (1).
Figure 88
51968 51971
Heat the hub (2) to a temperature of 110° ÷ 150°C and

mount it on the transmission shaft (1), taking care that the Position the synchronizer ring (2) on the hub (3) so that its
protrusions (3) of the synchronizer ring are positioned protrusions enter the seats in the hub (3). Mount the roller
correctly in their seats in the hub (2). bearing (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 89 Figure 92
90222

51974
Figure 93
Mount the 3rd gear (1).
Figure 90
90223
Heat the internal rings (1-3) of the tapered roller bearings to

a temperature of approx. 80°C and, with a suitable punch (1),
mount them on the transmission shaft (2).
51975
Mounting the main shaft
With a hydraulic press, mount the 6th gear (1) pre-heated to
approx. 170°C.
NOTE Mount the synchronizer rings on their respective gears
Check the end float of the 3rd gear (2). It should be 0.15÷0.40 according to the marks made during disassembly or
mm. when checking in the case of replacement.
Figure 91 Figure 94
90221 51973
With a hydraulic press, mount the 5th gear (1) pre-heated to Tighten the main shaft (1) and position the roller bearing (2)
approx. 170°C. on it.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 95 Figure 97
51982
51980
Mount the 2nd gear (4) and position the ring (3), middle ring plugs (4) and balls (3) into the seats in the hub (1), settling
(2) and synchronizer ring (1) on it, taking care that the tongues them under the sliding sleeve (2).
(→) of the middle ring (2) enter the slots (→) in the gear (4).
Figure 98
51983
Position the synchronizer ring (3), middle ring (2) and ring (1)
on the hub (4), taking care that the tongues (→) of the ring
Figure 96 (1) and the projections (→) of the ring (3) enter the seats in
the hub (4).
Figure 99
51981
Heat the hub (2) to a temperature of 80° ÷ 110°C and mount

it on the main shaft (1), taking care that the projections (3) of
the synchronizer ring and the tongues (→) of the ring (3,
Figure 95) are positioned correctly in the seats in the hub (2). 51984
Check the end float of the gear (4). It should be Position the roller bearing (2). Mount the 1st gear (1) taking
0.25 ÷ 0.5 mm. care that the tongues (3) of the middle ring enter the slots in
the gear (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

85961
Heat the spacer ring (2) to a temperature of approx. 80° ÷ 51952
110°C and mount it on the main shaft (1). Check the end float Turn the main shaft over and position the half roller bearings
of the gear (4); this should be 0.15 ÷0.3 mm. (3) on it.
Heat the bushing (3) to a temperature of approx. 80° ÷ 110°C Mount the 6th gear (2) and position the synchronizer ring (1)
and mount it on the main shaft (1). on it.
Mount the roller bearing (5).
Figure 104
Figure 101
51990
85950
Heat the hub (2) to a temperature of approx. 80° ÷ 110°C
Fit reverse gear (1). and mount it on the main shaft (1) taking care that the projec-
Fit sliding sleeve (2) on reverse gear hub (1). tions (3) of the synchronizer ring are positioned in the seats
Insert the springs (5), the pads (3) and the balls (4) in the hub in the hub (2).
seats (1) and arrange them with respect to the sliding sleeve
(2). Mount the retaining ring (4) whose thickness produces null
Figure 102
Figure 105
85951
51991
Fit the synchroniser ring (2).
Heat the gear ring (3) to 110° ÷ 150° and fit on primary shaft Mount the sliding sleeve (2).
(1).
Check reverse gear play (4) which must be 0.15 ÷ 0.4 mm. Put the springs (3), plugs (5) and balls (4) into the seats in the
hub (1) and position them under the sliding sleeve (2).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
Figure 106 Mounting the transmission

The nuts and screws must be tightened to the re-
quired torque unless specified otherwise, with the
thread dry and degreased.
Adjusting the transmission shaft bearing end

float
85952
NOTE The transmission shaft bearing end float is only ad-
justed if the bearings, transmission shaft gears, trans-
mission shaft, transmission or rear cover have been
Heat the bearing (2) to 80÷110°C and fit on primary shaft (1). replaced or if too much clearance has been found.
Fit the circlip (4) and synchroniser ring (3).
Rods - forks - selector - driver Figure 108

Figure 107
51993
Determine the thickness S of the ring (1) for adjusting the

transmission shaft bearing end float, proceeding as follows:
- position the thinner adjustment ring (1) 1.65 mm thick in
the seat in the transmission (3);
90224
- heat the seat of the bearing (2) to approx. 60°C. Mount
the external ring of the bearing (2) with the punch
1. Rod with reverse gear engagement fork - 2. Main rod -
99374091 and grip 99370007, see Figure 110;
3. Rod with 1st-2nd gear engagement fork. - 4. Fork control
rod (5).- 5. 3rd-4th gear engagement fork - 6. Fork control - mount the transmission shaft complete with the internal
rod (7) - 7. 5th-6th gear engagement fork rings of the tapered roller bearings;
Check the state of the plugs (2) of the 3rd-4th-5th-6th gear en- - mount the external ring of the rear bearing in the rear
gagement fork and replace them if they are worn. cover in a similar manner to the front one (see
To replace the forks of the selector and driver from their re- Figure 110);
spective control rods it is sufficient to remove the retaining - mount the rear cover on the transmission;
For assembly, carry out these steps in reverse order, replacing - screw on the 8 fixing screws so that between one screw
the spring pins. and another there is a hole for a free screw and tighten
them to the required torque;
NOTE Spring pegs must be positioned with the cutting edge - turn the transmission shaft to settle the bearings;
placed level.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

52512 51997
- using a comparator (2) zeroed on the 5th gear toothing

of the transmission shaft (1) measure its end float A Heat the bearing seats of the rear cover (1) to a temperature
through the opening for the power take-off connection of approx. 80°C and mount:
and note it down. - the external ring (3) of the tapered roller bearing with
punch 99374091 (2) and grip 99370007 (1);
The thickness S is given by:
- the ball bearing (4) and the bushing with ball bearings (7)
S=A+B+C with a general punch.
Where:
Position the retaining plates (6). Secure these to the rear
A = measured end float, e.g. 0.18 mm; cover, tightening the screws (5) to the required torque.
B = average bearing pre-load, e.g. 0.02 mm;
C = adjustment value used for the measurement 1.65 mm;
S = 0, 18 + 0, 02 + 1, 65 = 1, 85
Figure 112
Then mount the rear cover, transmission shaft and external
ring of the front bearing.
Figure 110
90225
51996
Clamp the primary shaft (13) in a vice, fit on it the synchronis-
Position the adjustment ring (1, Figure 108) of the thickness ing ring and the input shaft (8).
determined with the above measurement. Heat the bearing Fit tool 99360522 (10) on the input transmission shaft (8) and
seats of the box to a temperature of approx. 80°C and fasten with the circlip (9).
mount: Couple the secondary shaft (2) to the primary shaft (13) and
- the external ring (3) of the front tapered roller bearing fasten by tightening the screw (1) on the tool (10).
with punch 99374091 (2) and grip 99370007 (1); Fit the clutch forks: 3rd — 4th speed (4) and 5th — 6th speed (3)
- the ball bearing (6) with a general punch; on the relevant sliding sleeves.
Couple the rods (11 and 13), fit the relevant forks on the slid-
- the bushing with ball bearing (9) and the roller bearings ing sleeves and clamp the rods with the sleeves of tool
(4-5) with a general punch. 99360522 (10).
Position the retaining plates (7) and secure them to the box, Couple the reverse gear (7) with the shafts (2 and 13) and
tightening the screws (8) to the required torque. fasten it to them with the part of the bracket (5) tighten the
screw (6).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

eft
90226 90227
Fit the rod (3) in the rear cover (4). Place the roller bearings (2) in the reverse gear (1).
Hook hoist to tool 99360522 (1), lift the unit (2) as previously Fit the stem (2) and the support (3) so that the respective
mounted, and partially insert it into the rear cover (4). holes for the fastening screw are aligned with the relevant hole
on the rear cover (5).
During this operation, check that the output shaft goes into the
Drive in the fastening screw (6) of the stem (3) and the
supporting ball bearing and the control rods (5 -6) go into their
support (4) on the rear cover (5) and tighten it to the
respective seats.
prescribed torque.
90210
52000
Screw tool 99370234 pin (7) into output shaft hole (2) and Fit the control rod (1) of the 3rd — 4th speed and the main rod
fit bushing (4) and spacer (5) on tool. (2) in the rear cover (3).
Screw on the nut (6) and at the same time lower the hoist so
the output shaft (2) is positioned on the rear ball bearing (3).
Remove tools 99360522 (1) and 99370234 (4-5-6-7).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 117
NOTE When fitting the gearbox, check that the shafts and
the control rods fit correctly in the respective seat and
that the fork (1, Figure 117) does not disconnect from
the clutch rod (2, Figure 117) for the 3rd — 4th speed.
Figure 120
90229
1
Apply some grease on the pin of the dragging device (2) and
fit the clutch fork (1) for the 3rd — 4th speed on this device.
Figure 118
51931
Fit a new retaining ring (2) securing the front bearing (3) onto
the input shaft (1).
51936
Put the pawls (4) and springs (3) in the rear cover (1) and drive
in the retaining cups (2) with a suitable punch.
Apply LOCTITE 5206 on gearbox attachment.
Figure 121
Figure 119
90231
Screw on the screws (2) securing the rear cover (3) to the
transmission (1) without fully tightening them.
90230
Mount the centring pins (4) in the rear cover (3) and in the
Warm up the front bearing inner ring (2) at 90÷110°C and fit transmission (1).
the gearbox (1) on the rear cover.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

90209
52005
NOTE Make sure that the clutch control rods are all in Using the key 9937455 (3), mount the O-ring (2) in the trans-
neutral position. mission (1).
Apply LOCTITE 242 to the thread of the pins (1).

Figure 125
Screw the pins (1) into the box, checking that their ends go
into the hole of the 3rd/4th gear engagement fork link (1,
Figure 117) and then tighten them to the required torque.
Drive in the pins (2) and check that their ends fit in the knuckle
hole of the clutch fork for the 5th — 6th speed and tighten it to
NOTE If during these assembly operations the fork (1,

Figure 117.) comes free of the control rod, it will not
be possible to mount the pins (1) until they have been
reconnected.
52006
Mount the cover (1) protecting the input shaft and tighten the
screws (2) to the required torque.
Figure 123
Figure 126
51932
52007
Mount the push rod (1) and the spring (2). Screw on the plug
Mount the O-ring (2) in the rear cover (1) with the key
(4) with a new washer (3), tightening it to the required torque.
99374454 (4) and the grip 9937006 (3).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

51924
52008
Apply sealant to the thread of the plugs (1 - 3), screw them
Fit the transmission shaft coupling (1) onto the output shaft. into the box, tightening them to the required torque.
If there is any interference, use the tool 99370234 (2) for as- Position the driver (4) on the rod (5).
sembly with the lever 99370317 (3) to lock the coupling.
Secure it with the screw (2) after applying LOCTITE 242 onto
its thread.
Figure 128
Figure 131
52009
Mount the washer (3) and screw on the screw (4).

Lock the rotation of the flange (1) with the lever 99370317
(5) and tighten the screw (4) to the required torque.
Mount the tachograph sensor (2) and the reversing light
switch.
Figure 129
52118
Fit a new gasket (1) onto the transmission.

1
Apply LOCTITE 510 on the screw threading (2).
Mount the side cover (3) and tighten the fixing screws (2) to
Mount the control box as described under the relevant hea-
ding.
Mount the oil drainage plug, tightening it to the required torque.
51925 and grade.
Mount the rod (1) preventing engagement of more than one Mount the oil filler and level indicator cap, tightening it to the
gear at the same time, in the position marked during disas- required torque.
sembly.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY POWER TAKE OFF 123
TRANSMISSION
Power take off
Page
ASSEMBLY STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
POWER TAKE OFF ELECTRIC ACTUATOR . . 128
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

124 POWER TAKE OFF DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TYPE Hidrocar 20Z1 Hidrocar 20 Z2

Application 5 S 200 6 S 300
Gear ratio I, PTO(*) output revs., normal PTO(*) input revs. 1 0.910
PTO(*) output rated torque at 1500 rpm (Nm) 120 180
Expected duration at rated torque and at 1500 rpm hours 500
Rotation direction (with respect to engine) Opposite
Control Electric
Assembly side (with respect to running direction) Left side
Torque obtainable from gearbox (Nm) 175 303
Oil capacity (litres) ~ 0.6 ÷ 0.4
(*) = Power Take Off
Drive gear taper roller bearing axial backlash 0 ÷ 0.1 mm
Drive gear taper roller bearing axial backlash

by shims
adjustment
Drive gear taper roller bearing axial backlash

0.1 - 0.2 - 0.3 - 0.5 mm
adjusting ring thickness
Figure 1
62092
Power take offs are applied to secondary shaft on gearbox left side instead of cover (1).
NOTE Fill and check gearbox oil level.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TIGHTENING TORQUES
Figure 2
62181
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
Nm kgm
1 M16x1.5 actuator fixing tang 50 5
2 Switch fixing 50 5
3* Flange fixing screw 25 2.5
- M10 nuts for fixing PTO to gearbox 35 ÷ 39 3.5 ÷ 3.9
* Smear screw thread with LOCTITE 242
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 3
62093
POWER TAKE OFF COMPONENTS
Figure 4
ASSEMBLY STANDARDS
Parts (*): sealing rings and bearings shall be smeared with
grease POLIMER 400.
Adjusting ring (♦) thickness shall guarantee taper roller
bearing axial backlash equal to 0 ÷ 0.1 mm.
Screw thread (•) shall be smeared with Loctite 242.
Sealing ring (1) shall be fitted with 6 mm sinking from power
take off housing (2) surface.
62094
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

POWER TAKE OFF ELECTRIC ACTUATOR

Description
Figure 5
62095
The linear actuator (1) provides motion to control rod (5) Operation
controlling power takeoff connection and disconnection. POWER TAKEOFF CONNECTION
It is fixed to power takeoff through the bottom side (2), PTO connection (Figure 5) is divided into two different
screwing it on the power takeoff box. phases:
Control rod motion is generated by a system composed of The first phase consists in moving forward worm screw (7),
electric motor and worm screw (7) which, being blocked in rod (5) and sleeve (3), which, coming into contact with shaft
rotation, linearly moves along two directions enabling to toothing (4), creates axial backstop of the rod and worm
connect and disconnect the PTO. screw in an intermediate position as to the whole stroke.
Axial power load is controlled by a spring, set inside actuator The axial backstop of worm screw (7) preloads the spring
(1), providing approx. 350 N force on power takeoff control inside the actuator and switches the electric motor off; the
rod (5). pretensioned spring exerts energises control rod (5) and
keeps the axial load even after electric motor switching off.
The second phase consists in stroke continuation if sleeve (3)
toothing sustains a relative rotation as to the shaft (4)
toothing and therefore stops the axial backstop previously
set by the two toothing contrast.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 6
62096
In this case, the spring inside the actuator, previously It is therefore possible to install on PTO having different
preloaded, provides a first motion to the elements (7, 5 and stroke values without modifying or adding compensation
3) and causes the electric motor, previously stopped, starting. elements.
Subsequently, the stroke starts again until it meets a new POWER TAKEOFF DISCONNECTION
obstacle, represented by rod (5) limit stop on the power
The PTO disconnection phase (Figure 6) is divided into two
takeoff box.
motions:
At this point, another axial backstop condition is created and The first motion consists in the worm screw return (7)
the above-mentioned operation is repeated: rod (5) tension through the reversal carried out on the electric motor.
and electric motor switching off.
The second motion consists in the control rod retrocession
As long as the PTO engagement toothings stay on contact (5) through spring (6) and consequent shaft (4) sleeve (3)
with each other, the electric motor is switched off because disengagement.
the pressure on the toothings (3 and 4) is kept by the spring,
inside the actuator.
The axial load on the engagement toothings is calibrated NOTE The retrocession motion of the worm screw (7) do
(about 350 N) and gradually applied because the action not depend on the movement carried out by the
spring (inside the actuator) carries out a determined stroke control rod (5); this guarantees, if the sleeve (3)
before being completely loaded. Toothing mouths (3 and 4) cannot be disengaged, the immediate backing of the
shall therefore be protected against violent impacts assuring, worm screw (7) without causing overloads to the
as to traditional mechanical or pneumatic system, less electric motor.
engagement element wear and consequently, an higher The PTO will be disconnected when the backstop
number of turns to be implemented before component condition is over.
deterioration. This event can occur if during the disengagement
The functionality is more serviceable since the engagement request the shaft (4) is still in rotation or
is softer and more silent as to the traditional systems. pretensioned by a residual torque.
Worm screw (7) limit stop is determined by axial load and
distance covered by control rod (5).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY PROPELLER SHAFTS 1
SECTION 5
5056 Propeller shafts
Page
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
TIGHTENING TORQUES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
PROPELLER SHAFT REMOVAL AND REFITTING 11
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
CHECKING PROPELLER SHAFTS ON VEHICLE . 11
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

2 PROPELLER SHAFTS DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


Name mm
Complete spider assembly (radial) in the fork housings 0,03
Transmission shaft max. off-centring
- measured at centre 0,4
- measured at extremities 0,25
- measured on tang 0,15
Max. working angle 20º
4x2 Vehicles
Figure 1
62123
GKN-TYPE ARTICULATED PROPELLER SHAFT
Figure 2
50826
DANA-TYPE ARTICULATED PROPELLER SHAFT
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

4x2 Vehicles
Figure 3
GKN-TYPE CONNECTING SHAFT 62122
Figure 4
50827
DANA-TYPE CONNECTING SHAFT
Figure 5
75213
GKN-TYPE CONNECTING SHAFT
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Propeller shaft length (mm) Figure 1-2

PITCH
MODEL VERSION L
(mm) L1
GKN supply DANA supply
29L.9/11 VAN
29L.9/11 CHASSI CAB

3000 813 2120 ÷ 2210 2120 ÷ 2205
35S.9/11 VAN
35S.9/11 CHASSI CAB
29L.9/11 CHASSI CAB 1134 2565 ÷ 2655 -

3450
35S.9/11 CHASSI CAB 1135 - 2580 ÷ 2665
35S.13/15/17 VAN
3000 763 2075 ÷ 2165 2075 ÷ 2160
35S.13/15/17 CHASSI CAB
35S.13 /15/17 CHASSI CAB 3450 1085 2520 ÷ 2610 2520 ÷ 2605
35C-40C.9/11/15 VAN
3000 652 2080 ÷ 2170 2080 ÷ 2165
35C-40C.9/11/15 CHASSI CAB
35C.13/15/17 VAN
35C.13/15/17 CHASSI CAB
40C.13 CHASSI CAB
45C.11 VAN 3000 602 2035 ÷ 2125 2035 ÷ 2120
45C.11 CHASSI CAB
50C.11/13/15 VAN
50C.11/13 CHASSI CAB
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Propeller shaft length (mm)

Front shaft
PITCH Rear shaft Figure 1-2
MODEL VERSION Figure 3-4
(mm)
L
L L1
29L.9/11 VAN
3300 891 343 1540 ÷ 1630 1540 ÷ 1625
35S.9/11 VAN
29L.9/11 CHASSI CAB

3750 891 666 1980 ÷ 2070 1980 ÷ 2065
35S.9/11 CHASSI CAB
29L.9/11 VAN
3950 891 866 2180 ÷ 2270 2180 ÷ 2265
35S.9/11 VAN
35S.13/15/17 VAN 3300 841 343 1540 ÷ 1630 1540 ÷ 1625
35S.13/15/17 CHASSI CAB 3750 841 666 1980 ÷ 2070 1980 ÷ 2065
35S.13/15/17 VAN 3950 841 866 2180 ÷ 2270 2180 ÷ 2265
35C-40 C.9/11 VAN 3300 730 608 1650 ÷ 1740 1650 ÷ 1735
35C-40 C.9/11 CHASSI CAB 3450 730 607 1815 ÷ 1905 1815 ÷ 1900
35C-40 C.9/11 CHASSI CAB 3750 730 652 2090 ÷ 2180 2090 ÷ 2175
35C-40 C.9/11 VAN 3950 730 986 2315 ÷ 2405 2315 ÷ 2400
35C-40 C.9/11 CHASSI CAB 4100 730 1024 2450 ÷ 2540 2450 ÷ 2530
45C.11 CHASSI CAB 3450 680 607 1800 ÷ 1905 1815 ÷ 1900
45C.11 CHASSI CAB 3750 680 652 2090 ÷ 2180 2090 ÷ 2175
45C.11 VAN 3950 680 986 2295 ÷ 2385 2315 ÷ 2400
35C.13/14/15/17 VAN 3300 680 607 1650 ÷ 1740 1660 ÷ 1745
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


Front shaft
PITCH Rear shaft Figure 1-2 - (*) 5
MODEL VERSION Figure 3-4 (*)
(mm)
L
L L1
35C.13/14/15/17 CHASSI CAB 3750 680 652 2090 ÷ 2180 2110 ÷ 2195
35C.13/14/15/17 VAN 3950 680 986 2295 ÷ 2405 2315 ÷ 2400
35C.14/15/17 CHASSI CAB 680 986 - 2315 ÷ 2400
35C-40C.13/14//15/
CHASSI CAB 3450 680 607 1800 ÷ 1905 1815 ÷ 1900
17
35C-40C.13/14/15/
CHASSI CAB 4100 680 1024 2450 ÷ 2540 2460 ÷ 2545
17
45C.11/13 VAN 3300 680 607 1650 ÷ 1740 1650 ÷ 1735
50C.11/13/15 VAN 3300 680 607 1650 ÷ 1740 1650 ÷ 1735
45C-50C.14/15/17 VAN 3300 (*) 680 (*) 690 ÷ 790
50C.11/13/15 CHASSI CAB 3450 680 607 1800 ÷ 1905 1815 ÷ 1900
50C.11/13/15 CHASSI CAB 3750 680 652 2090 ÷ 2180 2090 ÷ 2175
50C.11/13/15 VAN 3950 680 986 2295 ÷ 2405 2315 ÷ 2400

Central shaft
PITCH Front shaft Rear shaft Figure 1-2-(S) 5
MODEL VERSION Figure 3-4-(S) 5
(mm) Figure 3-4
34
L L
L1
L GKN supply DANA supply GKN supply DANA supply
45C.11/13/14/17
CHASSI CAB 3750 (S) 680 (S) 755 ÷ 855 (S) 755 ÷ 855 - (S) 1080÷2180 (S) 1080÷1190
50C.11/13/14/17
45C.11/13/14/17 746 722 1950÷2040 1965÷2050

CHASSI CAB 4350 680
50C.11/13/14/15/17 (S) 755 ÷ 855 (S) 755 ÷ 865 (S)440 (S) 1630÷1720 (S) 1630÷1715
45C.11/13/17 730 1056 2380÷2470 2380÷2465

CHASSI CAB 4750 680
50C.11/13/15/17 (S) 755 ÷ 855 (S) 755 ÷ 865 (S)781 (S) 2100÷2190 (S) 2100÷2185
45C.14/17
VAN 3950 (S) 680 (S) 1120 ÷ 1220 - (S) 900÷1000
50C.14/17
(S) Vehicles with Telma retarder
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004


Front shaft
(mm)
L
L L1
60C-65C.15/17 VAN 3300 670 614 1630 ÷ 1720 1630 ÷ 1715
60C-65C.15/17 CHASSI CAB 3450 670 626 1780 ÷ 1870 1790 ÷ 1875
60C-65C.15/17 CHASSI CAB 3750 670 660 2075 ÷ 2165 2085 ÷ 2170
60C-65C.15/17 VAN 3950 670 995 2280 ÷ 2370 2280 ÷ 2365

Front shaft Central shaft
MODEL VERSION Figure 3-4 Figure 3-4
(mm)
L
L L L1
60C-65C.15/17 CHASSI CAB 4350 670 801 724 1885 ÷ 1975 1885 ÷ 1970
60C-65C.15/17 CHASSI CAB 4750 670 730 1065 2350 ÷ 2440 2350 ÷ 2435

PITCH Front shaft Central shaft Figure 5 Rear shaft Figure 5.1.2
(mm) L L
L1
L GKN supply DANA supply GKN supply DANA supply
CHASSIS
60C-65C.15/17 COWL
3750 670 (S) 970÷1070 - - (S) 825÷925 -
CHASSIS
60C-65C.15/17 COWL
4350 670 (S) 970÷1070 - - (S) 1395÷1495 -
CHASSIS
60C-65C.15/17 COWL
4750 670 (S)1080÷1180 - 408 - (S) 1705÷1790
(S) Vehicles with Telma retarder
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DIAGNOSTICS
The main operating faults of the propeller shaft are as follows:
1- noise and vibrations
NOISE AND VIBRATIONS

1
Deformation of shaft. Replace shaft.

YES
NO
Shaft unbalanced. Check balancing of shaft and determine the points

YES where to weld the counterweights.
NO
Excessive play between the splined profiles. Replace the shaft.

YES
NO
Nuts and bolts fastening shaft to either transmission or After a careful check, tighten up the loose screws and
rear axle sleeves loose. YES nuts, and eventually replace any damaged ones.
NO
Universal joints seized-up or excessively worn. Overhaul or replace the universal joints.
YES
NO
Insufficient lubrication of the parts. Lubricate the parts at the appropriate nipples.
YES
NO
Elastic support fixing screws loose. Tighten the screws to the required driving torque.
YES
(Continues)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Elastic dowel of central support in bad condition. Replace the support.

YES
NO
Central elastic support bearing in bad condition or Replace the support.

excessive play. YES
NO
Flange fixing screws or ring nuts on propeller shaft tang Tighten the screws or the ring nuts to required driving
loose. YES torque.
TIGHTENING TORQUES
TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
Ring nut for fixing to connecting shaft 250 ± 25 25.4 ± 2.5
M10 x 1,5 63.5 ± 6.5 6.5 ± 0.6
Nut for screw for fixing flanges to propeller shaft
M12 x 1.25 116.5 ± 11.5 11.8 ± 1.2
Nut, linkage shaft to chassis side member fixing screw 62.5 ± 6.5 6.3 ± 0.6
TOOLS
99370618 Support for removal-refitting propeller shaft
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

505620 PROPELLER SHAFT REMOVAL AND REFITTING

Figure 6
52123
Removal CHECKING PROPELLER SHAFTS ON

VEHICLE
NOTE When overhauling the propeller shaft, always begin
by removing the rear shaft.
Figure 7
Arrange the support 99370618 on the hydraulic jack and
apply the support to the propeller shaft.
Remove the fixing bolts from the flange and remove the shaft;
for the intermediate and front axles, also remove the chassis
shaft support.
Refitting
Repeat the same operations for removal in the opposite
order and observe the following:
- make sure that the arrows shown on the moving part
and on the shaft are aligned;
- make sure that the holes of the front flange are aligned
52124
with those of the rear flange;
- the nuts for the flange coupling screws must be replaced The plates welded to the propeller shafts are counterweights.
and never reused; If the plates are missing the shaft must be re-balanced.
- the flange coupling screws must be inserted into the By operating on the propeller shaft and at the same time, in
holes of the flange from the side of the universal joint; the opposite direction, on the sliding sleeve, check that there
is not too much slack between the splines.
- the nuts and screws must be tightened to the required By operating on the sleeve forks. check that the spiders are
driving torque; not worn; if they are, replace them.
- the flange of the moving part of the propeller shaft must
be connected to the output shaft flange.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AXLES 1
SECTION 6
5250 Rear axles
Page
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
REAR AXLE 450210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
REAR AXLE 450517/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

2 REAR AXLES DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AXLES 3
DIAGNOSTICS
The main rear axle operating faults are as follows:
1 - Wheel hubs noise;

2 - Rear axle noise;
3 - Noise at release;
4 - Noise during acceleration;
5 - Cornering noise.
1 WHEEL HUBS NOISE
Insufficient lubrication. Check that there are no leaks from gaskets or the rear
YES axle casing and top up oil to correct level.
NO
Wheel hub bearings inefficient. Remove the hub and replace inefficient parts.
YES
NO
Bad adjustment of wheel hub bearings. Adjust bearings.

YES
2 REAR AXLES NOISE
Lubricating oil level low. Check that there are no leaks from gaskets or the rear
NO
Drive shaft splines to fit the differential crown wheels Overhaul the rear axle and replace worn or damaged
damaged. YES parts.
NO
Bad adjustment of hub bearings. Adjust the bearings clearance.

YES
(Continues)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

4 REAR AXLES DAILY
Bad adjustment or wear on differential gears or bearings. Locate the trouble and overhaul the unit.
YES
3 NOISE AT RELEASE
Improper fitting clearance between pinion and ring bevel Remove the gear housing inspection cover and adjust
gear. YES clearance between pinion and ring bevel gear.
4 NOISE DURING ACCELERATION
Insufficient lubrication. Check that there are no leaks from gaskets or the rear
NO
Gear housing bearings badly set or deteriorated. Overhaul the unit.

YES
NO
Bad tooth contact between pinion and ring bevel gear. Adjust the contact.
YES
5 CORNERING NOISE
Improper clearance between planetary gears and crown Overhaul or replace the unit.
wheels. YES
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AXLE 450210 5
Rear axle 450210
Page
REAR AXLE REMOVAL - REFITTING . . . . . . . . 7
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
OVERHAULING THE REAR AXLE ASSEMBLY . 19
- Air breather disassembly - assembly . . . . . . . . 19
- Wheel hub overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
REPAIRING THE DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
- Disassembling the differential unit . . . . . . . . . . 22
- Gear housing removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
- Checking the parts comprising the differential 25
- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
- Assembly of gear housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
- Assembling the bevel pinion assembly . . . . . . 27
- Assembly of differential unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

6 REAR AXLE 450210 DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

525010 REAR AXLE REMOVAL - Figure 1

REFITTING
Removal
Position the vehicle on level ground and lock the front wheels.
Loosen rear wheel fixing screws.
Lift the vehicle at the back and set it on stands.
Put the hydraulic trolley 99321024 under the rear wheels. Take
out the screws securing the wheels and remove the guard.
Unscrew the handbrake adjustment nut (2). Free the cables
from the chassis frame, unhooking the retaining clamps (1).
Unscrew the screws (3) for the nuts securing the propeller shaft
(4).
Disconnect the electric cables for indicating brake lining wear
(11) and for the speed sensors, if present.
Disconnect the braking corrector adjustment tie (16) from the
axle housing.
Unscrew the nuts (10) securing the shock absorbers (12).
Disconnect the brake hydraulic system pipes (13) from the axle
housing.
Unscrew the screws (7) securing the connecting rods fastening
the stabilizer bar (6) to the axle.
Disconnect the pipe (17) from the axle housing oil vapour vent.
Position a hydraulic jack equipped with the mounting
99370617 under the axle.
Remove the screw (14) and the nut securing the leaf springs (5)
to the shackles (15) and put them on the ground.
Unscrew the nuts (8) of the brackets (9) securing the axle to
the leaf spring (5).
Lower the hydraulic jack and extract the axle.
Refitting
For refitting, carry out the operations described for removal in
reverse order, taking the following precautions:
- Check the thread of the brackets joining the leaf springs to
the axle. If there are any irregularities, rectify the thread
(operation 500412) or replace the brackets.
- Bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system as described
under the relevant heading (operation 784010).
- Adjust the handbrake control ties as described under the
relevant heading (operation 502710).
- Lock the nuts or screws to the required tightening torque.
- The self-locking nuts must not be reused.
- The lubricating oil in the axle housing should be at the right
level. 50970
- Check the state of the flexible pads (18) and replace them
if they have deteriorated (operation 500417).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DESCRIPTION The rolling torque of the bearings is adjusted with adjustment

rings between the housing and the spacer rings.
The rear axle is the load-bearing type with a single reduction
using a hypoid crown wheel and pinion. The clearance between pinion and crown wheel is adjusted
by changing the thickness and/or position of the adjustment
The axle housing is made of pressed sheet steel with hot
rings, though the total thickness must be the same as that of
pressed arms.
the adjustment rings removed.
The central portion, seat of the differential unit, is equipped
The gear housing may be of two different sizes depending on
with cooling fins.
the ratio of the crown wheel and pinion.
The bevel pinion is supported by two pre-lapped tapered
Differential gear unit consists of two planetary gears and four
roller bearings to hold the bearing pre-load better.
sun gears.
The bearings are factory lubricated by the manufacturer with
The drive shafts are supported inside the arms of the axle
rustproof protective oil.
housing by UNIT BEARINGS lubricated for life, which require
The rolling torque of the bearings of the bevel pinion is no adjustment.
adjusted by changing the thickness of the adjustment ring
The brakes are disc brakes with floating brake calipers.
between the two tapered roller bearings.
The disc brakes are splined onto the end of the drive shafts
In addition, it is possible to adjust the position of the bevel
and secured with pins that also serve as centring for the
pinion with respect to the ring bevel gear by changing the
wheel rims.
thickness of the ring between the axle housing and the bevel
pinion rear bearing external ring. The brake calipers are secured with flanges welded onto the
end of the arms of the axle housing.
The gear housing is supported by two tapered roller bearings,
also pre-lapped and lubricated with rustproof protective oil. The brake calipers are equipped with the parking brake
device.
Figure 2
51857
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Type of rear axle:

450210
Simple reduction type
DIFFERENTIAL UNIT
15/44 (1/2.93) - 13/41 (1/3.15) - 12/41 (1/3.41) - 12/43

Reduction bevel gear pair ratio
(1/3.58) - 12/47 (3.91) - 10/41 (1/4.10) - 9/40 (1/4.44) - 11/49
(No. of teeth: pinion/crown)
(1/4.45) - 9/44 (1/4.88) - 8/41 (1/5.12) - 8/45 (1/5.63)
Bevel pinion bearings 2 with taper rollers
Bevel pinion bearings rolling torque

(bearings lubricated and without
gasket) Nm 2.3 ÷ 3.3
New bearings
kgm 0.23 ÷ 0.33
Adjustment of pre-load of bevel
By means of adjustment ring
pinion bearings
Bevel pinion bearings pre-load 5.125 ÷ 6.150 mm

> adjustment ring thicknesses with progression of 0.025 mm.
Temperature of assembly of inner
-
bearing ring on bevel pinion
Position of bevel pinion with

By means of adjustment ring
respect to differential casing
Thickness of adjustment rings 3.2 ÷ 4.1 mm

> placed between bevel pinion and
differential casing with progression of 0.05 mm.
Bearings for gear housing 2 with taper rollers
Differential casing bearings rolling

torque (bearings lubricated and
without gasket)
- 15/44 - 13/41- 12/41
- 12/43 - 12/47 - 10/41:
DaNm 0.27 ÷ 0.39
kgm 0.27 ÷ 0.39
- 11/49 - 9/40 - 9/44
- 8/41 - 8/45:
DaNm 0.26 ÷ 0.37
kgm 0.26 ÷ 0.37
Adjustment of differential casing

By means of adjustment rings
bearings rolling torque
Thickness of adjustment rings of 2.550 ÷ 3.350 mm

> differential casing bearings rolling
torque with progression of 0.025 mm.
Clearance between pinion and ring
bevel gear with reduction ratios
- 13/41 - 12/43 - 9/43 - 8/45: 0.13 ÷ 0.18 mm
- 10/41 - 9/40: 0.15 ÷ 0.20 mm
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Type of rear axle:

450210
Adjustment of clearance between

pinion and ring bevel gear
Clearance between planetary and

0.05 ÷ 0.15 mm
crown wheels
WHEEL HUBS
Wheel hub bearings UNIT-BEARING
Wheel hub bearings end play -
Wheel hub bearings rolling torque

Nm -
kgm -
Adjustment of wheel hub bearings Not adjustable

end play Tighten fixing ring nut to torque
Rear axle oil TUTELA W140/M-DA (SAE 85 W 140)

Quantity Litres 1.85
Dry rear axle weight :
- With ABS kg 112.1
- Without ABS kg 110.6
- Max capacity (GRW) kg 2240
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TIGHTENING TORQUES
Figure 3
51859
SECTIONAL VIEW OF 450210 REAR AXLE DIFFERENTIAL
TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
1 Bevel pinion retaining nut 400 ÷ 500 40 ÷ 50
2 Screw securing half-housing and ring bevel gear 89 ÷ 108 8,9 ÷ 10,8
3** Oil filler plug 49 ÷ 62 4.9 ÷ 6.2
4 Screw securing caps to differential housing 100 ÷ 120 10 ÷ 12
5 Screw securing gearing inspection cover to the axle housing 80 ÷ 95 8 ÷ 9.5
6 Screw securing gearing inspection cover to the axle housing 31.5 ÷ 38.5 3.15 ÷ 3.85
(alternative mounting)
*** Oil drainage plug 49 ÷ 62 4.9 ÷ 6.2
* = Apply LOCTITE 5910 on the housing
** = Apply LOCTITE 577 on the plug thread
*** = Apply LOCTITE 573 on both sides of the gasket
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 4
51813
SECTIONAL VIEW OF 450210 REAR AXLE DIFFERENTIAL
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 5
87906
SECTIONAL VIEW OF 450210 REAR AXLE HUB
TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
1 Wheel fixing screw 160 16
2 Screw securing cover and guard in sheet metal to the axle housing 64 ÷ 79 6.4 ÷ 7.9
3 Screw securing disc and drive shaft 13 ÷ 21 1.3 ÷ 2.1
4 Screw securing cover and guard in sheet metal 10 ÷ 16 1 ÷ 1.6
5 Screw securing brake caliper 176 ÷ 217 17.6 ÷ 21.7
6 Ring nut securing drive shaft 300 ÷ 350 30 ÷ 35
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99305121 Hot air drier
99322215 Front and rear axle overhaul stand
99340204 Tool to extract bearing and drive shaft from rear axle housing
99341003 Single-acting rear axle
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
99341015 Clamp
99345057 Extractor reaction block
99355176 Shaft bearing ring nut wrench
99370006 Handle, interchangeable drift
99370007 Grip for interchangeable punches
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99370241 Tool for fitting drive shaft bearing
Tool to determine thickness of adjustment of bevel pinion

99370286 (use with 99395728)
99370317 Reaction lever with extension for flange retaining
Universal mounting to support axles during removal and refitting

99370617
99372236 Tool to move brake caliper piston back
Punch to fit external races of bearings (diameter 55 ÷ 69 mm use

99374091 with 99370007)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
Punch to fit external races of bearings (diameter 69 ÷ 91 mm use

99374092 with 99370007)
Key to fit differential bevel pinion gasket (use with 99370006)

99374456
99389819 Dynamometric wrench (0 ÷ 10 Nm) with 1/4” square connection
Dial gauge with mounting to be used with the tools to determine

99395728 the thickness of adjustment of the bevel pinion
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

525010 OVERHAULING THE REAR AXLE 525030 Wheel hub overhaul

ASSEMBLY
Figure 8
The drive shafts, brake disc and calipers, air breather

! and differential can all be removed and refitted even
with the unit mounted on the vehicle.
Before positioning the rear axle assembly on the stand for

overhauling, drain off the oil by unscrewing the side plug of
the axle housing.
Figure 6
51802
Take out the screws (1) and remove the brake caliper (2)
with its brake linings from the mounting.
The caliper must not be violently knocked or

! dropped.
Prevent the rubber caps coming into contact with
sharp metal tools.
Do not dirty or wet the rubber caps with mineral grease or
oil.
51800 Do not dirty the pads with liquids or grease.
Set the entire rear axle assembly on stand 99322215. Do not operate the parking brake lever before mounting on
the disc.
The identification data of the rear axle unit are given This makes the piston come out, decreasing the gap between
! on the plate (1) fixed near to the leaf spring the two brake linings and jeopardizing wearability on the disc.
attachment support. Should this be done unexpectedly, it is necessary to take
down the brake linings and move the piston back with tool
99372236, taking the precautions given in the BRAKES
section.
Figure 9
525013 Air breather disassembly - assembly
Figure 7
51803
Take out the pins (1 - 2) centring/fixing the brake disc (3) to

the drive shaft (4) and remove the brake disc (3).
75002
NOTE Check brake disk as described in Brakes section. On
Check that the air breather (1) is not clogged; otherwise, putting away the brake disk, do not damage phonic
disassemble and clean it thoroughly before refitting. wheel toothing (if phonic wheel is present).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 10 Figure 13
51804 51807
Remove the screws (2) securing the guard (1) and cover (3) Using the wrench 99355176 (1), remove the ring nut (2)
to the axle housing (4). securing the bearing (4) to the drive shaft (3).
Figure 11 Figure 14
51805 51808
Extract the drive shaft (2) from the axle housing (1). Set the drive shaft (1) suitably on the hydraulic press and, with
the extractor 99348001 (3), extract the bearing (2).
If this proves difficult, use tool 99340204 (3) applied as shown
in the figure to extract the drive shaft (2).
Figure 12 Figure 15
51809
Take out the screw (1) and remove the cover (3) from the
guard (2).
51806
Clamp the drive shaft (1) in a vice. Assembly

Position the guard (2) on the cover (3) and tighten the fixing
Lift the deformation (⇒) of the washer on the ring nut (2). screws (1) to the required torque.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 16 Figure 18
51810 51812
Set the tool 99370241 (4) on the press and position the Mount a new seal (3) onto the annular groove of the bearing
bearing (3) and guard (2) with the cover on it. (4).
Put the drive shaft (1) into the bearing (3) and with the action Lubricate the seal (3) and the external surface of the bearing
of the press (driving load 3300 ÷ 18000 N) insert it to the (4) with TUTELA MR3 grease.
limit.
Fit the drive shaft (2) assembled in this way into the axle
housing.
NOTE The bearing (3) must not be heated. Tighten fixing screws (1) to the prescribed torque.
Figure 17
Figure 19
51811
Fit the washer (2) and ring nut (1).

51803
Using the wrench 99355176 (3) tighten the ring nut (1) to
Notch the washer (2) (⇒) on the milling of the ring nut (1) Mount the brake disc (3) onto the drive shaft (4) and tighten
as shown in the figure. the fixing pins (1 - 2) to the required torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 20 Figure 22
51816
51802 Mark the position of the caps (1 and 2), take out the screws
(3) and remove them.
NOTE The brake lining with the wear indicator must be
mounted on the piston side of the brake caliper.
Rest the brake caliper (2) with the brake linings on the
mounting.
NOTE Should brake calliper piston be moved backward,

use tool 99372236 and follow the
recommendations set out in the BRAKES section.
Tighten the screws (1) securing the caliper (2) to the

required torque.
After assembly, fill the axle housing with TUTELA W140/M
- DA oil in the required quantity and grade.
526210 REPAIRING THE DIFFERENTIAL
Disassembling the differential unit
NOTE Before repairing the differential it is necessary to

drain off the oil and dismantle the drive shafts, as Figure 23
described under the heading of overhauling the
wheel hub (operation 525030).
Figure 21
Extract the differential unit (1) from the axle housing.
NOTE Note the assembly position of the adjustment rings

(2) of the spacers (3) and of the external rings (4)
51815
of the tapered roller bearings to position them for
Unscrew the screws (1) with their lock washers and spring
assembly in the same position.
washers (if any) and take off the gearing inspection cover (2)
with its gasket (if present).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Gear housing removal Figure 27

Figure 24
18224
51818
Use a universal beater to remove the long pin (2) and the two
Use tool 99341003 (1), brackets 99341009 (2), clamp short pins (3) from gear housing (1).
99341015 (3) and reaction block 99345057 (4) to remove
taper roller bearing inner rings (5 - 7) from gear housing (6). Figure 28
Figure 25
18222
20378
NOTE Mark cover (1) and gear housing (4).
Remove the spider (1) and the 4 planetary gears (2) with the
relevant shoulder washers (3) from the gear housing.
Loosen screws (2), remove ring bevel gear (3) and gear
housing (4) cover (1).
Figure 29
Figure 26
62099
Remove from gear housing (1) the sun gear (2) on cover side 18226
including shoulder washer (3).
Use a universal beater to remove the long pin (4) and the two Remove the sun gear (1) on gear housing side and the
short pins (5) from gear housing (1). shoulder washer.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 30 Figure 33
51824 61866
Raise the securing ring (⇒) on the flange (1) nut (3). Remove the seal (1) and the internal ring (2) of the front
bearing.
Using tool 99370317 (2), block rotation of the coupling (1).
Remove the nut (3).
Figure 34
Figure 31
51828
Use a punch to remove the external rings (3 - 4) of the

tapered roller bearings from the axle housing (1) and take out
51825 the adjustment shim (2).
Extract from the bevel pinion (2) on the flange (1).
Figure 35
Figure 32
51826 74727
Using a bronze punch, strike in the direction shown by the With axle 99341003 (2), brackets 99341011 (1), press
arrow to eject the bevel pinion (1), with the rear bearing, the 99341015 (5) extract the internal ring (3) on the bevel pinion
fixed spacer and adjustment ring from the axle housing (2). (4).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 36
61868
DIFFERENTIAL UNIT COMPONENTS

1. Nut - 2. Transmission coupling sleeve - 3. Seal ring - 4. Front bearing - 5. Pinion shim ring - 6. Fixed spacer - 7. Fixed ring -
8. Adjuster ring - 9. Rear bearing - 10. Bevel pinion - 11. Bevel ring - 12. Fixed ring - 13. Adjuster ring - 14. Bearing -
15. Gear casing - 16. Crown wheel thrust washer - 17. Cross - 18. Crown wheel - 19. Gear casing - 20. Screw -
21. Fixed ring - 22. Adjuster ring - 23. Bearing - 24. Planetary gear thrust washer - 25. Planetary gear - 26. Short pin -
27. Long pin.
Checking the parts comprising the differential

NOTE If it is necessary to replace the ring bevel gear or
Carefully clean the single components of the differential pinion, replace both parts since they are supplied
locking. in pairs.
Lubricate the bearings and rotate the roller cage freely;
rotation must be even and without signs of stiffness. Check Check the planetary gears with their shoulder washers, the
the support surfaces of the ring bevel gear and the striking pin and the crown wheels with their shoulder washers.
surface of the half-casing so that the ring bevel gear fits Replace all the sealing elements, the bevel pinion retaining
perfectly. Deformations of such parts, could determine nut and the gear housing bearing adjustment ring nut with
vibration of the ring bevel gear fastening screws, thus new parts.
compromising the perfect operation of the unit.
Assembly
Carefully clean all the threads in order to obtain
! exact adjustments and accurate tightening torque. NOTE The tapered roller bearings are supplied as spare
parts, lubricated with rustproof oil.
They must not be washed or heated for assembly.
Check that the splined section for the flange-pinion The differential housing support bearings must
connection is not badly worn, if it is, replace the pinion. both be from the same supplier.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Assembly of gear housing Figure 40

Figure 37
18237
18226
Assemble the cover and make the marks made during

Position the crown wheel (1), gear housing side, complete disassembly coincide. Assemble the ring bevel gear and fasten
with shoulder washer, into its own housing. this to the half-casing by means of the fixing screws.
By means of a dynamometric wrench (1) tighten the fixing
Figure 38 screws (2) to the required tightening torque.
Figure 41
20379
2
Position the two planetary gears (1) complete with shoulder
washers, spider (2) and then insert the long pin (3).
18240
Figure 39 Only for axles with differential lock.

Using tool 99305121, heat thrust ring (1) to a temperature
of 120ºC ÷ 150ºC for 15’ and fit on the gear casing (2) from
the side with the differential lock.
20380
Position the other two planetary gears (1) complete with

shoulder washers and then insert the two short pins (2).
Rotate the planetary gears-crown wheel unit and check that
it is free without stiffness.
Assemble the other crown wheel complete with shoulder
washer.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 42 Figure 45
51837
Using the punch 99374091 (3) and grip 99370006 (4), mount 18243
the external ring (2) of the tapered roller bearing in the axle Mount the internal ring (2) of the tapered roller bearing on
housing (1). the dummy pinion 99370286 (1) without the washer
supplied.
NOTE New bearings are lubricated with rustproof oil and
must therefore not be washed or heated for
assembly.
Figure 43
Figure 46
51838
Set adjusting ring (4), removed at disassembling, into rear axle

casing (5).
Using the punch 99374092 (2) and grip 99370007 (1), mount
the external ring (3) of the tapered roller bearing.
Assembling the bevel pinion assembly
Figure 44
51839
Position the dummy pinion 99370286 (1), assembled as

shown in Figure 45, on the external ring (2) of the tapered
roller bearing.
On the opposite side, fit the taper bearing internal ring (3)
18241 on the dummy pinion (1) and the transmission shaft flange
On a surface plate (2), zero a dial gauge (1) set on the (4) .
mounting 99395728 (3) and pre-load it slightly. Screw on the nut (5) so that the dummy pinion turns freely
with no end float.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 47 Figure 48
51840 18246
Fit the mounting 99395728 (2) with the dial gauge (1) on the
dummy pinion 99370286 (3). NOTE If the value marked on the pinion is preceded by a
positive sign (+), it must be subtracted from the
Orientate the, previously zeroed, dial gauge so as to position value of the sum divided by two for both seats,
the rod on the lowest portion of the seat of the bearing whereas it has to be added if it is preceded by a
supporting the gear housing and note the difference A1. negative sign (-).
Repeat the same operation on the seat of the other bearing
and note the difference A2.
Unscrew the retaining nut, the transmission connection
Thickness S to be added to adjusting ring thickness (4, flange and remove it and the bearing from the dummy pinion.
Figure 49) used for measuring, for pinion positioning is Remove the dummy pinion with the mounting 99395728,
obtained by the following formula: dial gauge and rear bearing from the axle housing.
S = A1 + A2 − ( B)
2
A1 indicates the value measured on the right-hand seat.
A2 indicates the value measured on the left-hand seat.
B indicates the value marked on the bevel pinion (see
Figure 48). Figure 49
For example:
S = 1.05 + 1.10 − (− 0.05) = 2.15 + 0.05 = 1.125

2 2
51838
If required, replace adjusting ring (4) with a new one having

the calculated thickness, after removing bearing outer ring (3)
from rear axle casing (5) by beater.
Then fit the new adjusting ring (4) into rear axle casing (5).
Using the punch 99374092 (2) and grip 99370007 (1), mount
the external ring (3) of the tapered roller bearing.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 50 Figure 53
18251
51845
Using a suitable punch (1) and a hydraulic press, mount the
internal ring (2) of the tapered roller bearing on the bevel Mount the bevel pinion (1) in the axle housing so as to enter
pinion (3). the internal ring (2) of the tapered roller bearing.
Figure 51 Tap on the end of the pinion (1) so that the transmission shaft
flange retaining nut (3) can be fitted.
18252
Position the fixed spacer (3) and the adjustment ring (2), used
previously to obtain the required rolling torque, on the bevel
pinion (1).
Figure 52
Figure 54
62097
Position the axle casing as indicated in the figure. 51846
Fit the taper bearing internal ring (1) and the transmission
Use tool 99370317 (2) to prevent the flange (1) from
shaft flange (2).
rotating.
Position a suitable pipe (3) on the stand so that the flange (2)
and the taper bearing internal ring (1) are correctly Tighten the bevel pinion retainer nut to the required torque
supported. with a torque wrench (3).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 55 Figure 57
74728 51849
Using the torque wrench 99389819 (1), measure the rolling NOTE Position the caps (2) making the marks made
torque of the bevel pinion.
during disassembly coincide.
NOTE The rolling torque must be measured at an ambient

temperature of 25°C, making the pinion turn at a Screw on the screws (1) and tighten them to the required
speed of 50 rpm after it has made 10 turns. torque with the dynamometric wrench (3).
If the reading differs from the prescribed value, disassemble

the pinion (1, Figure 53), replace the adjuster ring (2,
Figure 51) with a ring of the correct thickness.
Refit the pinion and repeat the rolling torque check.
Figure 58
Assembly of differential unit

Figure 56
74728
Check the total rolling torque with the torque wrench

99389819 (1).
44594 NOTE The rolling torque must be measured at an ambient

temperature of 25°C, making the pinion turn at a
fit the differential unit and support bearings in the axle casing. speed of 50 rpm after it has made 10 turns.
Refit the spacers and adjuster rings in exactly the original
positions and in the following order: adjuster ring (1), spacer
(2 and 4) and adjuster ring (3). If the value of the measurement is not as required, replace
the adjustment rings (1 and 3, Figure 56) with another one
of a suitable thickness.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 59 Figure 61
51850
Correct contact
Position the dial gauge 99395684 (1) with a magnetic base
and measure the clearance between the pinion and crown 44604
wheel on four opposite teeth of the crown wheel (2).
The average of the measurements must equal the required Figure 62
value.
If a different clearance is found, remove the caps (3) again and
swap over the assembly position of the adjustment rings (1
and 3, Figure 56).
If this is not sufficient, replace the adjustment rings with ones
of a different thickness, but the total thickness must still be
the same as that of the adjustment rings removed.
This is so as not to change the total rolling torque.
Apply a thin layer of Prussian blue on ring gear teeth by brush.
Turn the pinion and measure the impression of the contact Excessive contact on tooth
of the pinion toothing on the crown wheel toothing. bottom or flank.
Here we illustrate the possible contacts with the corrections Move away pinion and put
to obtain precise coupling of the crown wheel and pinion. ring gear to pinion to adjust
clearance.
44605
Figure 63
Figure 60
Excessive contact on heel

of tooth.
44603
Move the ring bevel gear
A = Coupling depth E = Greater base towards the pinion and
B = Crest F = Heel then move the pinion away
C = Side G = Top land from the ring bevel gear to
D = Play H = Contact surface adjust clearance.
44606
I = Lateral surface
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 64 Figure 67
Excessive contact in the

upper part or crest of the
tooth.
51852
Move the pinion towards
the ring bevel gear and then Lubricate the internal lip of the seal (1).
move the ring bevel gear
away from the pinion to With the key 99374456 (2) and grip 99370006 (3), mount
adjust clearance. 44607 the seal in the axle housing.
Figure 68
Figure 65
Excessive contact on the

top land of the tooth.
51846
Move the ring bevel gear
away from the pinion them Mount the coupling (1) and with the tool 99370317 (2) block
move the pinion towards its rotation with the torque wrench (3).
the ring bevel gear to adjust
clearance. 44608 Tighten the bevel pinion retaining nut to the required torque.
Figure 66 Figure 69
* DIRECTION OF
51851 ROTATION OF
After having determined the prescribed coupling clearance, THE NUT
51853
tool 99370317 (2) prevents the flange (1) from rotating. Deform the collar of the nut (1) as shown in the figure at the
Unscrew the retaining nut and extract the flange (1) from the milling of the bevel pinion (2).
bevel pinion.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 70 Figure 72
62098
51854
Following the order shown in the figure, tighten the screws
Thoroughly clean the flange of the axle housing. to the torque of:
Apply LOCTITE 5910 sealant on the flange of the axle - flanged screws (for solution without gasket) 80 ÷ 95 Nm;
housing to form a bead of approx. 5 mm diameter.
- screws with washer (for solution with gasket) 31.5 ÷
It must be uniform (no lumps), without any air bubbles, thin 38.5 Nm.
areas or gaps.
Complete assembly taking the following precautions:
Any flaws must be corrected in as short a time as possible.
Mount the drive shafts as described under the heading:
Avoid using too much material to seal the joint. ”525030 overhauling hubs”.
Too much sealant would tend to come out on both sides of Apply LOCTITE 577 thread-locking oil on the oil drain plug
the joint. thread, screw it into the axle housing, tightening it to the
required torque.
After applying the sealant, the joints need to be assembled
immediately (10 - 20 minutes). Add lubricating oil in the required quantity and grade through
the hole.
To seal at a later date, there is product 21623 capable of
softening or liquefying the above-mentioned sealant. Apply LOCTITE 577 thread-locking oil on the inspection
plug thread, screw it into the axle housing, tightening it to the
It is essential to clean the surface to be sealed in order to
required torque.
achieve good future sealing.
Take the assembly off the stand.
NOTE The assembly should be put back on its mounting

to prevent the dust guards and/or brake discs from
getting damaged.
Figure 71
51855
Mount the cover (1) and screw on the screws (2).

- Flanged screws (for solution without gasket).
- Screws with washer (for solution with gasket).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 35
Rear axles 450311/1

450511
Page
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
- Wheel hub overhaul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
- Replacing the wheel hub bearing . . . . . . . . . . 49
DIFFERENTIAL REPAIR OPERATIONS . . . . . . . 52
- Disassembly of differential locking . . . . . . . . . . 52
- Differential locking removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
- Assembling the differential locking device . . . . 52
- Differential locking refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
- Adjusting the differential locking device . . . . . 53
- Disassembling the differential unit . . . . . . . . . . 53
- Disassembly of gear housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
- Assembly of gear housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
- Differential unit refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

36 REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 37
REAR AXLE REMOVAL - REFITTING

Removal
Figure 1
Loosen the nuts securing the rear wheels.
Lift the vehicle at the back and set it on stands.
Put the hydraulic trolley 99321024 under the rear wheels. Take out
the nuts securing the wheels.
Unscrew the handbrake adjustment nut (4). Free the cables from the
vehicle crosspiece, unhooking the retaining clamps (3).
Unscrew the screws (6) securing the propeller shaft.
Disconnect the electric cables for indicating brake lining wear (2) and
(13), for the ABS speed sensors, if present.
Disconnect the braking corrector adjustment tie (14) from the axle
housing.
Unscrew the nuts (5) securing the shock absorbers.
Disconnect the oil pipe (1) from the fitting secured to the axle
housing.
Unscrew the screws (9) securing the stabilizer bar (10) to the axle.
Disconnect the pipe (16) from the axle housing oil vapour vent.
For axles with differential locking only
Release the spring (17) and remove the differential locking flexible tie
(18) support bracket (19) from the axle housing.
Disconnect the electric cable of the differential locking indicator
transmitter (15).
For all vehicles
Position a hydraulic jack equipped with the mounting 99370617
under the axle.
Unscrew the nuts (7) of the brackets (8) securing the axle to the leaf
spring (11).
Lower the hydraulic jack and extract the axle.
Refitting
reverse order, observing the required tightening torques for the
screws and/or nuts.
Afterwards, check that:
- Check the thread of the brackets joining the leaf springs to the
axle. If there are any irregularities, rectify the thread (operation
500412) or replace the brackets.
- Bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system as described under
the relevant heading (operation 784010).
- Check the state of the flexible pads (12) and replace them if they
have deteriorated (operation 500417).
- The lubricating oil in the axle housing should be at the right level. 52121
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

38 REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 39
DESCRIPTION The clearance between pinion and crown wheel is adjusted

by changing the thickness and/or position of the adjustment
The rear axle is the load-bearing type with a single reduction
rings, though the total thickness must be the same as that of
using a hypoid crown wheel and pinion.
The gear housing is composed of two half-housings.
pressed arms.
It may be of two different sizes depending on the ratio of the
The central portion, seat of the differential unit, is equipped
crown wheel and pinion.
with cooling fins.
The gearing of the differential is composed of four planetary
The bevel pinion is supported by two pre-lapped tapered
gears and two crown wheels.
roller bearings to hold the bearing pre-load better.
The wheel hubs are keyed, with UNIT BEARINGS lubricated
The rolling torque of the bearings of the bevel pinion is
for life, onto the arms of the axle housing.
adjusted by changing the thickness of the adjustment ring
between the two tapered roller bearings. The bearings need no adjustment.
In addition, it is possible to adjust the position of the bevel The brakes are disc brakes with floating brake calipers.
pinion with respect to the ring bevel gear by changing the
thickness of the ring between the axle housing and the bevel The disc brakes are keyed onto the wheel hubs.
pinion rear bearing external ring. The brake calipers are secured with flanges fixed onto the
arms of the axle housing.
The gear housing is supported by two tapered roller bearings.
The parking brake is the drum type, built into the brake disc.
The rolling torque of the bearings is adjusted with adjustment
rings between the spacer rings and the external rings of the
bearings.
Figure 2
51858
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

40 REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 DAILY
Type of rear axle:

450311/1 450511
Electric control mechanical differential locking on request
15/44(1/2.93) - 14/43 (1/3.07) -
DIFFERENTIAL UNIT 13/41 (1/3.15) - 13/43 (1/3.30)
- 14/47 (1/3.35)
(1/3 35) - 13/47 13/43(1/3.30) - 14/47(1/3.35) -
(1/3.61) - 12/47 (1/3.91) - 13/47(1/3.61) - 12/47(1/3.91) -
11/46(1/4.18) - 9/40(1/4.44) -
Reduction bevel gear pair ratio 11/46(1/4.18) - 9/40(1/4.44) - 9/44(1/4.88) - 9/47(1/5.22) -
(No. of teeth: pinion/crown) 9/44(1/4.88) - 9/46(1/5.11)
- 9/47(1/5.22) - 8/45(1/5.62) - 8/45(1/5.62)
7/41(1/5.85)
Bevel pinion bearings 2 with taper rollers
Bevel pinion bearings rolling torque

(lubricated bearings and gaskets)
Nm 1.2 ÷ 2.4
New bearings
kgm 0.12 ÷ 0.24
Adjustment of pre-load of bevel
pinion bearings
> Bevel pinion bearing preload 1 ÷ 1.975 mm

adjusting ring thickness with progression of 0.025 mm.
Temperature of assembly of inner

80 °C ÷ 90 °C
Position of bevel pinion with

respect to differential casing
Thickness of adjusting ring placed 1 ÷ 1.975 mm

> between bevel pinion bearing and
differential carrier. with progression of 0.025 mm.
Bearings for gear housing 2 with taper rollers
Differential casing bearings rolling

torque
Nm 2 ÷ 2.8
kgm 0.20 ÷ 0.28
Adjustment of differential casing

bearings rolling torque
Differential carrier bearing rolling 1 ÷ 1.95 mm

> torque adjusting ring thickness with progression of 0.05 mm.
Clearance between pinion and ring

0.15 ÷ 0.20 mm
bevel gear
Adjustment of clearance between

pinion and ring bevel gear
Clearance between planetary and

0.12 ÷ 0.18 mm
crown wheels
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 41
Type of rear axle:

450311/1 450511
WHEEL HUBS
Wheel hub bearings Unit-Bearing
Wheel hub bearings end play -

Nm -
kgm -
Adjustment of wheel hub bearings Non-adjustable

end play Tightening to fixing ring nut torque
Rear axle oil TUTELA W140/M-DA

Quantity Litres 1.9
Dry rear axle weight :
- With ABS kg 154.6
- Without ABS kg 153
- Max capacity (GRW) kg 3100 3700
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

42 REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 DAILY
Figure 3
51862
SECTIONAL VIEW OF DIFFERENTIAL
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 43
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Figure 4
44588
SECTIONAL VIEW OF REAR AXLE DIFFERENTIAL WITH DIFFERENTIAL LOCKING
TORQUE
COMPONENT
Nm kgm
1 Bevel pinion retaining nut 400 ÷ 500 40 ÷ 50
2 Screw securing half-housing and ring bevel gear 200 ÷ 210 20 ÷ 21
Screw securing mounting for differential locking to the axle housing or securing cover 21 ÷ 25 2.1 ÷ 2.5
3
for differential locking mounting seat cover
4 Screw securing gearing inspection cover to the axle housing 21 ÷ 26 2.1 ÷ 2.6
5 Screw securing caps to axle housing 96 ÷ 117 9.6 ÷ 1.17
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

44 REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 DAILY
Figure 5
SECTIONAL VIEW OF HUB 87907
TORQUE
COMPONENT
Nm kgm
1 Wheel retaining nut 290 ÷ 349 29 ÷ 34.9
2 Screw securing drive shaft to the wheel hub 63 ÷ 76 6.3 ÷ 7.6
3 Ring nut retaining wheel hub bearing 618 ÷ 667 61.8 ÷ 66.7
4 Screw securing brake disc to wheel hub 69 ÷ 76 6.9 ÷ 7.6
5 Screw securing caliper mounting to shoe mounting 180 ÷ 220 18 ÷ 22
6 Screw securing shoe mounting to axle housing 85 ÷ 97 8.5 ÷ 9.7
7 Screw securing guard 8 0.8
** Screw securing sensor mounting 5÷7 0.5 ÷ 0.7
* Spread the surface of the drive shaft - wheel hub union with B-type sealant.
** When assembling the screws securing the timing sensor mounting, apply a few drops of LOCTITE 245 thread-lock onto
the thread of the corresponding holes of the bracket welded onto the axle arm.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 45
TOOLS
99305121 Hot air drier
99321024 Hydraulic trolley for removing and refitting wheels
99322215 Driving and steering axle overhaul stand
99341001 Double effect bridge
99341005 Reaction bridge
99341010 Pair of retainers
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

46 REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 DAILY
TOOLS
99345056 Counter block for pullers
65 mm. diam. box wrench for disassembly - assembly wheel hub locking
99355087 ring
99370006 Handle, interchangeable drift
Tool for measuring thickness of bevel pinion adjustment rings (to be

99370309 used with 99395728)
99370317 Lever and relevant extension bar to retain flanges
99370497 Tool for assembly of wheel hub
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 47
TOOLS
99370498 Tool for assembly of wheel hub bearing and phonic wheel
99370617 Axle universal support during removal/installation
Keying tool for assembly of differential bevel pinion gasket (to be used
99374022 with 99370006)
99389819 Torque wrench (0 to 10 mm) with 1/4” square attachment
Dial gauge with support to be used with the tools to determine the
99395728 adjustment thickness of the bevel pinion
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

48 REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 DAILY
525010 OVERHAULING THE REAR AXLE Figure 8

ASSEMBLY
This chapter deals with overhaul operations different from
those described for rear axle 450210.
Adjustment data, tightening torque and tools are those
specified in this chapter.
Figure 6
44611
Take off the brake linings (1). Take out the screws (⇒) and
remove the mounting (2).
Figure 9
44609
Set the entire rear axle assembly on stand 99322215.
The identification data of the rear axle unit are given

! on the plate (1) fixed near to the leaf spring
attachment support.
525030 Wheel hub overhaul

Figure 7
44612
Take out the screws (⇒) and remove the drive shaft (1).
Figure 10
44610
Disconnect the pipe (2) from the support bracket (1). Take
out the screws (⇒) and remove the brake caliper from the
mounting.
44613
NOTE The thread of the screws securing the brake caliper
is treated with adhesive. Therefore, they must not
be reused, but replaced with new ones every time Lift up the notch (⇒) of the ring nut (1). Using the wrench
they are removed. 99355087 (2) remove the ring nut (1), take out the washer
and extract the wheel hubs (3).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 49
525031 Replacing the wheel hub bearing Figure 14
Figure 11
45164
44614 The new bearing should be mounted in the wheel hub with
If the hub is fitted with a phonic wheel (2), take it out with a press and tool 99370498.
the extractor (1) 99341001 as shown in the figure.
Otherwise, take out the bearing guard ring. Figure 15
Figure 12
44617
Mount the brake disc (1) on the wheel hub (2) and tighten
44615 the fixing screws (⇒) to the required torque.
Take out the screws (⇒) and remove the brake disc (1) from
the wheel hub. Check the brake disc as described under the Figure 16
Brakes heading.
Figure 13
44618
44616
If it is necessary to replace the pins of the wheel hub (1),
The bearing (1) is removed from the wheel hub with the aid before mounting the new ones, check that the mating surface
of an ordinary punch. of the pin head is free from burrs, dross and blisters.
The pins should be driven in by applying a load on their head
no greater than 2000 kg.
After driving them home, check that the pins are perfectly in
touch with the hub: maximum orthogonal tolerance 0.2 mm.
NOTE Bearing (1) driving load is 2100 ÷ 5000 kg.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

50 REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 DAILY
Figure 17 Figure 20
44619
Stand the bearing of the wheel hub (2) on a special mounting

that permits rotation. With a magnetic dial gauge (1) check
44621
the off-centring of the brake disc on both sides.
Off-centring must not exceed 0.1 mm.
NOTE Check and, if necessary, adjust the clearance
Figure 18 between the parking brake drum and shoes as
described in the Brakes section.
Mount the inserter 99370497 (2) on the sleeve.

Lubricate the sleeve with TUTELA W140/M-DA oil and key
1 the wheel hub (1).
45165
The phonic wheel (2) should be mounted in the hub with the
punch 99370498 (1), checking after assembly that the
”phonic” wheel rests perfectly in its seat in the hub.
Figure 21
Figure 19
44622
44620
Check the orthogonality of the phonic wheel (2), proceeding

as follows:
Position the feeler of the magnetic dial gauge (1) on the
phonic wheel. Mount the washer (1) and a new ring nut (2). Using the
wrench 99355087 (3), tighten the ring nut (2) to the required
Making the wheel hub (3) turn, check that the maximum torque.
error of orthogonality of the phonic wheel (2) is no greater Notch the fixing ring nut (2) on the milling of the axle housing
than 0.1 mm. arm.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 51
Figure 22 Having to move the brake caliper piston back, keep to

the instructions given in the BRAKES section.
Mount only new screws (2, Figure 24).

! Every time they are removed, they must be replaced.
Figure 25
44623
Mount the support (2) and tighten the fixing screws (1) to
Figure 23
44610
Connect the pipe (2) to the support bracket (1).
44611
Mount the brake linings (1).
The brake lining with the wear indicator must be

! mounted from the piston side of the brake caliper.
Figure 26
Figure 24
44626
Apply IVECO 1905685 sealant on the contact surfaces of the

drive shaft (2) with the wheel hub (1).
44624 Mount the drive shaft (2) in the sleeve.
Apply the brake caliper (3) to the mounting (1) and tighten Tighten the screws (3) securing the drive shaft (2) to the hub
the fixing screws (2) to the required torque. (1) to the required torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

52 REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 DAILY
526210 DIFFERENTIAL REPAIR Assembling the differential locking device

OPERATIONS
Assemble the differential locking device by following the
526260 Disassembly of differential locking removal operations in the reverse order.
Re-attach the differential locking device to the rear axle
Figure 27 casing as follows:
Differential locking refitting
Figure 29
61869
Remove the spring (1).

Unscrew and remove the 4 screws (2) including washers and
then disconnect the differential locking device (3).
If required, remove the unit as described in the following
paragraphs.
61869
Mount a new O-ring on the differential locking attachment

plane.
Position the previously assembled support (3) so as to insert
the control lever in the spline on the sliding sleeve.
Insert the 4 screws (2) complete with washers and spring
washers and tighten the screws to the driving torque of 23
Nm (2.35 kgm).
Assemble the spring (1).
Adjust the differential locking device by following the
procedures below.
Differential locking removal
Figure 28
23227
Remove gasket (4).

By means of a normal beater knock out the elastic pin (2),
remove the lever (1) complete with ring and washer.
Finally, remove the control lever (3) from the support (5).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 53
Figure 30
61871
DIFFERENTIAL LOCKING DEVICE COMPONENTS

1. Flexible tie rod bracket (Bowden) - 2. Rear axle casing - 3. Spring - 4. Gasket - 5. Sealing ring - 6. Gasket - 7. Sleeve
control lever (9) - 8. Elastic pin to fix lever (7) to lever (12) - 9. Differential locking sliding sleeve - 10. Spring coupling
plate (11) - 11. Lever return spring (12) - 12. Transmission lever - 13. Adjusting screw nut - 14. Adjusting screw -
15. Differential locking device body.
Adjusting the differential locking device Figure 31
Engage the sliding sleeve (9). Once this has been done,
loosen the nut (13), move the adjustment screw (14) so that
it is contact with the control lever (7). After this, unscrew the
adjustment screw by 9.5 turns (corresponding to 9.5 mm.
travel of the screw) and lock it with the fastening nut (13).
Disassembling the differential unit
NOTE Before carrying out repair operations on the

differential unit you must drain off the oil and 18216
disassemble the drive shafts. For the rear axle, you
must disassemble the differential locking as Unscrew the screws (1) complete with tab washers and
described in the relevant paragraphs. spring washers and remove the gear housing inspection
cover (2) complete with gasket.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

54 REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 DAILY
Figure 32 Disassembly of gear housing

Figure 34
44600
44598
Extract the support bearing inner rings (3 and 5) and shoulder
Mark the position of the caps (1 and 2) and remove them. ring (2) from the gear housing and, by means of the puller tool
99348001 (4), extract the counter block (1).
NOTE The thrust ring (2) is only present with rear axles
fitted with differential locking.
Figure 35
18222
Figure 33
NOTE Mark the cover (1) and the gear housing (4).
Unscrew the screws (2), remove the ring bevel gear (3) and
the gear housing (4) cover (1).
Figure 36
44599a
Take out the gear housing (1).

Note the assembly position of the adjustment rings (3) and
take them out of the housing together with the spacer rings
(2). 62099
NOTE In the case of reuse, do not swap over the assembly Remove the crown wheel (2) on the cover side with its thrust
positions of the external rings (4) of the tapered washer (3) from the gear housing (1).
roller bearings. Using a generic beater to remove the long pin (4) and the
two short pins (5) from the gearing case (1).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 55
Figure 37 Figure 38
20378 18226
Remove the crown wheel (1) on the gear housing side with
Remove the spider (1) and the four planetary gears (2) with
the thrust washers.
their shoulder washers (3) from the gear housing.
Figure 39
51863
PARTS COMPRISING THE DIFFERENTIAL UNIT

1. Nut - 2. Transmission connection coupling - 3. Seal - 4. Front bearing - 5. Pinion shim ring - 6. Fixed
spacer - 7. Spacer ring - 8. Adjustment ring - 9. Rear bearing - 10. Bevel pinion - 11. Ring bevel gear - 12. Fixed ring -
13. Adjustment ring - 14. Bearing - 15. Thrust ring (axle with differential locking) - 16. Gear housing - 17. Crown wheel
thrust washer - 18. Spider - 19. Crown wheel - 20. Gear housing cover - 21. Screw - 22. Planetary gear thrust washer - 23.
Planetary gear - 24. Short pin - 25. Long pin.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

56 REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 DAILY
Assembly of gear housing Figure 43

Figure 40
18237
18226
Assemble the cover and make the marks made during

Position the crown wheel (1), gear housing side, complete disassembly coincide. Assemble the ring bevel gear and fasten
with thrust washer, into its own housing. this to the half-casing by means of the fixing screws.
By means of a torque wrench (1) tighten the fixing screws (2)
Figure 41 to the required tightening torque.
Figure 44
20379 2
Position the two planetary gears (1) complete with thrust
washers, spider (2) and then insert the long pin (3).
18240
Figure 42
Only for axles with differential lock.
Using tool 99305121, heat thrust ring (1) to a temperature
of 120ºC ÷ 150ºC for 15’ and fit on the gear casing (2) from
the side with the differential lock.
20380
Position the other two planetary gears (1) complete with

thrust washers and then insert the two short pins (2).
Rotate the planetary gears-crown wheel unit and check that
it is free without stiffness.
Assemble the other crown wheel complete with thrust
washer.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 57
Differential unit refitting

Figure 45 Figure 47
62100 18252
Using a suitable punch, with a grip, drive the external ring (4) Heat the internal ring (4) of the tapered roller bearing to
for the front bearing into the axle housing (1). 80°C ÷ 90°C for approximately 15 min. and drive it, with a
Position the spacer ring (2), thickness 2 mm, and using a suitable punch, onto the bevel pinion (1).
suitable punch drive in the external ring (3) of the rear Position the spacer ring (3) and adjustment ring (2),
bearing. calculated beforehand to obtain the required rolling torque,
Determine the adjustment thickness and position of the on the bevel pinion (1).
bevel pinion as described for axle 450210.
Remove the external ring (3) of the tapered roller bearing.
Position the adjusting ring (5) of the calculated thickness on
the spacer ring (2).
Refit the external ring (3) of the tapered roller bearing.
Figure 46
Figure 48
51865
Lubricate the internal ring of the front bearing and position

it in the housing.
Using the key 99374022 (1) and grip 99370006 (2), mount
the pre-lubricated seal.
Determine the bevel pinion rolling torque adjustment ring as
described for axle 450210. 51866
Position the axle housing as shown in the figure.

On the stand, set a pipe (3) of such diameter and length as
NOTE The rolling torque of the bevel pinion must be to provide a solid supporting surface for the flange (2) and
measured with lubricated bearings and seals. the internal ring (1) of the front bearing above, already
mounted in the axle housing.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

58 REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 DAILY
Figure 49 Figure 51
20384
4
Position the sliding sleeve in the rear axle housing for
51867
differential locking (if present). Mount the external rings (1)
Insert the bevel pinion (1), assembled as shown in the figure, for the gear housing support bearings and then position the
in the internal ring of the front bearing (2) and in the flange previously mounted gear housing in the rear axle housing.
(3).
Figure 52
NOTE Strike the top of the bevel pinion until it is possible
to fit the nut (1, Figure 50) securing the flange (3).
Take out the support pipe (4).
Complete assembling the pinion by fully tightening
the nut.
Block rotation of the transmission flange with the retainer

tool 99370317.
Using a suitable Allen wrench and the torque wrench, tighten
the bevel pinion retainer nut (1, Figure 50) to the required
torque.
To be on the safe side, check the rolling torque of the bevel 44594
pinion with the dynamometer 99389819.
Mount the spacers and adjustment rings in the same number,
thickness and position found during disassembly, in the
following order: spacer (1), adjustment ring (2), adjustment
ring (3) and spacer (4).
Figure 50
* DIRECTION OF ROTATION
OF THE NUT
51868
Make a cut in the collar of the nut (1) by the milling of the
bevel pinion (2) as shown in the figure.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 59
Figure 53
18262
Complete assembly by checking the total rolling torque and

the bevel pinion coupling clearance as described for axle
450210.
Position a new seal ring over the gear housing inspection
attachment surface.
Mount the cover (3), insert the fixing screws (2) complete
with tab washers and spring washers.
Tighten the screws (2) with the torque wrench (1) to the
required tightening torque.
NOTE Do not tighten the screws to a torque greater than

the value indicated since this would impair the
sealing effect of the gasket placed between the
coupling plane and the gear housing inspection
cover.
Mount the differential locking device (if present) and adjust

it as described under the relevant heading.
Mount the drive shafts as described under heading: “525030
Overhauling the Hubs”.
Screw on the oil drainage plug and tighten it to the required
torque.
Add lubricating oil in the required quantity and grade through
the hole.
Screw on the oil filler plug and tighten it to the required
torque.
Take the assembly off the stand.
The assembly should be put back on its mounting to

! prevent the dust guards and/or brake discs from
getting damaged.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

60 REAR AXLES 450311/1 - 450511 DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AXLE 450517/2 61
PRINT 603.43.351
Rear axle 450517/2
Page
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
- Air breather disassembly - assembly . . . . . . . . 74
- Overhaul of wheel hubs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
- Stud replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
DIFFERENTIAL REPAIR OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . 79
- Differential locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
DIFFERENTIAL REPAIR OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . 80
- Differential unit removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
- Gearing case removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
- Differential components check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
- Rear axle casing check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
- Gearing case refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
- Differential unit refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

62 REAR AXLE 450517/2 DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
REAR AXLE REMOVAL - REFITTING

Removal Figure 1
Loosen rear wheel fastening nuts.
Lift the rear part of the vehicle and position it on proper stands.
Fit hydraulic truck 99321024 under the rear wheels, remove wheel
fastening nuts and then remove wheels.
Loosen handbrake lever adjustment nut (4). Release cables (2) from
vehicle cross member by releasing the retaining clips (5), and from
the side member brackets by loosening clamp fastening screws (3).
Loosen propeller shaft fastening screws (6).
Release cables from clamps and disconnect the brake lining (1) and
(7) wear indication electrical cables of ABS sensors, if any.
Loosen shock absorber (14) fastening nuts (16).
Loosen the screws (17) fastening the stabilizer bar (10) to the rear
axle.
Disconnect brake oil pipes from connection (13) and secure them
to the chassis to prevent oil draining from system.
Disconnect pipe (15) from rear axle casing oil vapour bleed.
Position the hydraulic jack fitted with support 99370617 under the
rear axle.
Loosen the nuts (8) of the brackets (9) fastening the rear axle to the
leaf spring (10).
Lower the hydraulic jack and remove the rear axle.
Refitting
reverse order, observing the required tightening torques for the
screws and/or nuts.
- Check the thread of the brackets joining the leaf springs to the
axle. If there are any irregularities, rectify the thread (operation
500412) or replace the brackets.
- Bleed the air from the brake hydraulic system as described under
the relevant heading (operation 784010).
- Check the state of the flexible pads (12) and replace them if they
have deteriorated (operation 500417).
- The lubricating oil in the axle housing should be at the right level. 61988
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
DESCRIPTION The clearance between pinion and crown wheel is adjusted

The rear axle is the load-bearing type with a single reduction by changing the thickness and/or position of the adjustment
using a hypoid crown wheel and pinion. rings, though the total thickness must be the same as that of
pressed arms. The gear housing is composed of two half-housings.
The central portion, seat of the differential unit, is equipped It may be of two different sizes depending on the ratio of the
with cooling fins. crown wheel and pinion.
The bevel pinion is supported by two pre-lapped tapered The gearing of the differential is composed of four planetary
roller bearings to hold the bearing pre-load better. gears and two crown wheels.
The rolling torque of the bearings of the bevel pinion is ad- Wheel hubs are supported by two ”SET RIGHT” type bear-
justed by changing the thickness of the adjustment ring be- ings set on the sleeve.
tween the two tapered roller bearings.
The bearings need no adjustment.
In addition, it is possible to adjust the position of the bevel pin-
The brakes are disc brakes with floating brake calipers.
ion with respect to the ring bevel gear by changing the thick-
ness of the ring between the axle housing and the bevel pinion The disc brakes are keyed onto the wheel hubs.
rear bearing external ring.
Perrot type brake callipers are supported by flanges welded
The gear housing is supported by two tapered roller bearings. to rear axle casing arms.
The rolling torque of the bearings is adjusted with adjustment The parking brake is the drum type, built into the brake disc.
rings between the spacer rings and the external rings of the
bearings.
Figure 2
62983
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Type of axle:
Bearing with single reduction and 450517/2
mechanical control differential
locking
DIFFERENTIAL UNIT
Reduction bevel gear pair ratio

1/3.91 (11/43) - 1/4.30 (10/43)* -
(tooth no.: pinion/crown wheel), on
1/4.56 (9/41)* - 1/5.13 (8/41)*
request
Bearings for bevel pinion 2 taper rollers
Bevel pinion bearing rolling torque

(lubricated gaskets and bearings)
Nm 2÷3
New bearings
kgm 0.20 ÷ 0.30
Bevel pinion bearing preload
through adjustment rings
adjustment
> Bevel pinion bearing preload 1∗ - 2 mm

adjustment ring thickness * with 0.025 mm progression
Temperature for fitting inner

80 °C ÷ 90 °C
Bevel pinion position with reference

By means of shims
to differential casing
Thickness of adjustment rings 3.45 ÷ 4.35 mm

> between bevel pinion and
differential casing with 0.025 mm progression
Bearings for gearing case 2 taper rollers
Differential case bearing rolling

torque
Nm 2.6 ÷ 3.9
kgm 0.26 ÷ 0.39
Adjustment of differential case

Through adjustment rings
bearing rolling torque
Thickness of adjustment rings for 2.65 ÷ 3.20 mm

> differential case bearing rolling
torque with 0.05 mm progression
Backlash between pinion and crown

0.15 ÷ 0.20 mm
wheel
Adjustment of backlash between

Through adjustment rings
pinion and crown wheel
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
Type of axle: 450517/2
WHEEL HUBS
Wheel hub bearings Two ”SET-RIGHT” type taper rollers
Hub bearing end play 0.16 max.
Wheel hub bearing rolling torque

Nm 0÷4
kgm 0 ÷ 0.4
Wheel hub bearing end play

Fastening nut tightening to torque
adjustment
Rear axle oil Tutela W140/M-DA (SAE 85 W140)

Amount Litres 3
kg 2.7
Max. capacity GAW kg 5000
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Figure 3
62879
450517/2 (R0537) REAR AXLE DIFFERENTIAL SECTION
TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
1Bevel pinion retaining nut 533 ÷ 589 53.3 ÷ 58.9
2Screw fastening gearing inspection cover to rear axle casing* 26 ÷ 21 2.6 ÷ 2.1
Screw fastening crown gear to 12RDAC5 half casing* 309.5 ÷ 342.5 30.9 ÷ 34.2
3
Screw fastening crown gear to 10RDAC5 half casing 266 ÷ 294 26.6 ÷ 29.4
4 Screw fastening half casings 61 ÷ 74 6.1 ÷ 7.4
5 Screw fastening differential locking device or cover 23 2.3
6 Screw fastening caps to rear axle casing 102 ÷ 113 10.2 ÷ 11.3
* Before tightening the screws, smear their threaded holes with IVECO sealant 1905683.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 4
74729
Figure 5
62878
ABS VERSION
TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
1 Wheel fastening nut 283.8 ÷ 342.6 28.3 ÷ 34.2
2** Screw fastening axle shaft to wheel hub 56 ÷ 69 5.6 ÷ 6.9
3 Wheel hub bearing retaining ring nut 441 ÷ 540 44.1 ÷ 54
4 Safety screw 9.5 ÷ 11.5 0.9 ÷ 1.1
5 Screw fastening brake disc to wheel hub 54 ÷ 59 5.4 ÷ 5.9
6 Screw fastening brake calliper to rear axle 150 ÷ 177 15 ÷ 17.7
7 Screw fastening brake shoe support to rear axle casing 52 ÷ 57 5.2 ÷ 5.7
8*** Rpm sensor support fastening screw 5÷7 0.5 ÷ 0.7
* Smear axle shaft-wheel hub connecting surface with IVECO sealant 1905685.
** Smear the threads of the screws acting as plugs with IVECO sealant 1905683.
*** Apply LOCTITE 243 on hole threads.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
TOOL No. DESCRIPTION
99305121 Hot air operated equipment
99306004 300 kg hydraulic crane
99306010 Equipment for bleeding air from brake and clutch system
99321024 Hydraulic truck for removing - refitting wheels
99322215 Stand to overhaul axles
99345056 Counter block for pullers
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99348001 Puller with locking device
99357080 Wrench (91.5 mm) for wheel hub bearing adjustment nut
99370006 Handle for interchangeable beaters
99370007 Handle for interchangeable beaters
99370296 Tool to find bevel pinion shims (to be used with 99395728)
99370317 Counter lever and relevant extension to retain flanges
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
99370617 Universal support to hold axles during removal/refitting
Beater to fit in place bearing outer races (91-134) (to be used with
99374093 99370007)
Element to fit in place wheel hub internal gasket (to be used with
99374132 99370006)
99374201 Element to fit in place differential bevel pinion gasket
99389819 Dynamometric wrench (0-10 Nm) connection 1/4”
Tool to check hub rolling torque (to be used with dynamometric

99395026 wrench)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99395684 Dial gauge with magnetic base
Dial gauge with support to be used with the tools for finding proper
99395728 bevel pinion shims
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

525010 OVERHAULING THE REAR AXLE 525013 Air breather disassembly - assembly
ASSEMBLY
Figure 8
The drive shafts, brake disc and calipers, air breather

! and differential can all be removed and refitted even
with the unit mounted on the vehicle.
Figure 6
62882
Take out the screws (1) and remove the brake caliper with its
brake linings from the mounting.
525030 Overhaul of wheel hubs

62880
Removal
Before positioning the rear axle assembly on the stand for
overhauling, drain oil by loosening rear axle casing plug. Dis- Figure 9
connect brake fluid pipes (2) from brake callipers (1) and from
rear axle casing and pipes (3) from rear axle casing.
Figure 7
62883
Take out the screws (1) and remove the brake caliper (2) with
its brake linings from the mounting.
The caliper must not be violently knocked or

! dropped.
62881
Prevent the rubber caps coming into contact with
Set the entire rear axle assembly on stand 99322215. sharp metal tools.
Do not dirty or wet the rubber caps with mineral
grease or oil.
NOTE The identification data of the rear axle unit are given
on the plate (1) fixed near to the leaf spring attach- Do not dirty the pads with liquids or grease.
ment support. Check proper brake calliper and brake lining
conditions as described in ”Brake” section.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 10 Figure 13
62889
62892
Rotate the wheel hub (1) to set downward one of the two
screws (2) located between hub reliefs; remove the screws Loosen bearing retaining ring nut (1, Figure 12) using wrench
and drain oil completely from wheel side. Remove the other 99357080 (1).
screws fastening the axle shaft (3) to the wheel hub (1).
Figure 14
Figure 11
62893
62890 Remove the safety washer (1).
Remove the axle shaft (2) from the wheel hub (1).
Figure 15
Figure 12
62891 62894
Remove ring nut (1) safety screw (2). Sling the brake disc (1) with rope and hoist, remove the wheel
hub (2) including: brake disc (1), front (3) and rear bearings,
sealing ring and spacer.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Stud replacement
Figure 16 Figure 19
62884
62887
Remove front bearing (1) inner ring and spacer (2).
Remove screws (4) and disconnect the brake disc (5) from the If it is necessary to replace the pins of the wheel hub (1), before
wheel hub (3). mounting the new ones, check that the mating surface of the
pin head is free from burrs, dross and blisters.
NOTE Check the brake disc as described in the ”Brake” The pins should be driven in by applying a load on their head
section. no greater than 2000 kg.
After driving them home, check that the pins are perfectly in
touch with the hub: maximum orthogonal tolerance 0.2 mm.
Figure 17
Refitting
Figure 20
62885
Remove phonic wheel (1), if any, using suitable equipment.

Remove sealing ring (2) and the rear bearing inner ring (4) set
below from the wheel hub (3).
Figure 18
62888
Use handle 99370007 (1) and beater 99374093 (2) to fit

taper roller bearing outer rings into the wheel hub.
32445
Use a suitable punch to remove the rear taper roller bearing NOTE This operation shall be performed using a press until
outer ring (1). Repeat this operation to remove the front positioning the rings at 5 mm from their abutting
taper roller bearing outer ring. end, their fitting shall be then completed by hand.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Refitting
Figure 21 Figure 23
62932
62938
Lubricate rear taper roller bearing inner ring (4) with SAE W
140 M-DA oil and fit it to wheel hub (5).
Use tool 99374132 (2) provided with proper handle
99370006 (1) to fit sealing ring (3). NOTE Check and, if necessary, adjust the clearance
between the parking brake drum and shoes as
described in the Brakes section.
NOTE Use tool 99374132 (2) side to position the sealing

Lubricate the sleeve and the sealing ring supporting ring (1)
ring (3) at 1.5 mm from wheel hub side surface.
with TUTELA W140/M-DA (SAE 85W140) oil.
Fit the phonic wheel, if any, on the wheel hub.
NOTE Phonic wheel fitting shall be performed after heating

it at 150ºC.
When fitting is over, check whether the phonic
wheel is resting perfectly on the hub seat.
Figure 24
Check whether phonic wheel squareness and
oscillation is lower than 0.2 mm.
Figure 22
62897
Use suitable rope and hoist to fit wheel hub (1) on sleeve (4).
Lubricate spacer (2) and outer bearing inner ring (3) with
Tutela W140/M-DA and fit them on sleeve (4).
62896
Fit the brake disc (3) on the wheel hub (1) and tighten the
fastening screws (2) to the specified torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 25 Figure 28
62891
62898 After checking the end play and the rolling torque, check
whether one of the adjustment nut (1) holes is coinciding with
Fit the safety washer (3) so that the clip is guided properly into one of the safety washer holes otherwise loosen the
rear axle casing sleeve groove. adjustment nut (1) until it is possible to fit the fastening screw
Tighten ring nut (4) with wrench 99357080 (1) and (2). Tighten the fastening screw (2) and the adjustment nut to
dynamometric wrench (2), tighten the new ring nut (4) to the the specified torque.
specified torque.
Figure 29
Figure 26
62902
Smear the contact surface between axle shaft (3) and wheel
hub (1) with IVECO sealing compound 1905685.
62899 Fit axle shaft (3), tighten the fastening screws (2), excluding
those set between the two wheel hub marks (see Figure 30)
Position the dial gauge 99395684 (1) with a magnetic base with tool 99370317 (4) lock wheel hub (1) rotation.
on the wheel hub (3) and rest the rod on the sleeve (2).
Check whether wheel hub end play is falling between 0 and Figure 30
0.16 mm.
Figure 27
62903
Set horizontally to ground the two holes (1) located between

62900 the wheel hub marks and pour through 0.2 l of W140 M-DA
Use tool 99395026 (2) and the dynamometric wrench oil on each wheel side.
99389819 (1) to check whether the wheel hub rolling torque Smear the threaded section of the screws acting as plug with
is falling between 0 and 4 Nm (0 - 0.4 kgm). IVECO sealant 1905683 and tighten to the specified torque.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
526210 DIFFERENTIAL REPAIR

OPERATIONS
Figure 31 526260 Differential locking
Figure 33
62904
Position brake calliper (1) including the brake lining on the 62906
supporting flange (2).
Remove the 4 screws (1) including washers and disconnect
Tighten the fastening screws to the specified torque.
the differential locking device (2).
When refitting, replace the gasket located between
NOTE The brake lining with the wear sensor shall be fitted differential locking device and rear axle casing.
on brake calliper piston side. Tighten screws (1) to the specified torque.
Comply with BRAKE section requirements to
move back the brake calliper piston.
Figure 34
Figure 32
62907
DIFFERENTIAL LOCKING DEVICE SECTION
62880 Differential locking device engagement/disengagement lever

stroke shall be equal to 5 mm.
Remove the rear axle assembly from the overhaul stand. Refit
brake fluid pipes (2 and 3) to rear axle casing and brake
callipers (1).
Fill rear axle casing with oil in the specified amount and
quality.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Gearing case removal

526210 DIFFERENTIAL REPAIR
OPERATIONS Figure 38
Differential unit removal
NOTE Before performing differential repair, drain oil and

remove axle shafts as described previously.
Figure 35
33081
Remove gearing case supporting bearings (1 and 2) using

puller 99348001 (3) and counter block 99345056 (4).
Figure 39
33077
Remove gearing (1) inspection cover including the gasket.
Figure 36
33082
Clamp the gearing case (2) in a vice and remove the ring
bevel gear (1) from the gearing case (2).
33078
Remove caps (1) after marking them. Figure 40
Figure 37
33079
33083
Remove the spacer (1) and remove the gearing case (3) in- Mark gearing half-boxes (1 and 2), loosen the fastening
cluding the crown wheel (4) and the outer rings (2) for sup- screws, position the gearing case on a bench and remove the
porting bearings. Remove the other spacer and the adjust- two half-boxes.
ment rings. Do not reverse the outer races of the gearing
case supporting bearings.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 41 Figure 44
33088
33084
Use a bronze beater in arrow direction to remove the bevel
Remove sun gears (5) and planetary gears (2) including the pinion (1) including the rear bearing, the fixed spacer and the
spider (6) from the gearing half-box (4). Recover the shoul- adjustment rings from the rear axle casing (2).
der washers (1 and 3).
Figure 42 Figure 45
33089
33086
Remove the sealing ring (1) and the front taper roller bearing
Remove bevel pinion retaining nut safety crimp and loosen from the rear axle casing (2). Use a bronze beater to remove
the nut using the counter lever 99370317 (1). the front taper roller bearing outer ring.
Figure 43 Figure 46
33090
33087
Use a bronze beater to remove the rear taper roller bearing
Remove transmission connection flange (1). outer ring (1) from the rear axle casing (2).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Gearing case refitting

Figure 47 Figure 48
33092
33091
Fit in place the sun gear (2) with the shoulder washer set
Use puller 99348001 (3) to remove the rear taper roller below in gearing half-box (1).
bearing (2) from the bevel pinion (1).
Differential components check Figure 49
Carefully clean each differential component.

Lubricate the bearings and rotate the roller cage freely. The
rotation must be even and without sign of stiffness. Check the
ring bevel gear contact surfaces and the half-box striker plate
to ensure that the crown wheel adheres perfectly. Deforma-
tions on these surfaces cause the crown wheel fastening
screws to vibrate, thus jeopardizing the correct operation of
the unit.
NOTE Carefully clean all threads in order to obtain exact

adjustments and accurate tightening torque. 33084
Fit in place the planetary gears (2) with shoulder washers (3),
the spider (6) and the sun gear (5) with shoulder washer (1)
in the gearing half-box (4).
Check that the splined section for flange-pinion connection

is not badly worn, otherwise replace the pinion.
Figure 50
NOTE When replacing the crown wheel or pinion it is

necessary to replace both parts since they are
supplied in pairs.
Check the planetary gears and the relevant shoulder

washers, the spider and the crown wheels with the relevant
shoulder washers.
Replace all sealing elements, the bevel pinion retaining nut
and gearing case bearing adjustment nut with new parts.
33094
Rear axle casing check
Fit between them the half-boxes (1 and 2) and tighten the
Check whether rear axle casing is not deformed. fastening screws to the specified torque.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 51 Figure 54
33095 33098
Use beater 99374093 (1) to fit in place front taper roller

Heat in air-circulation furnace at 100ºC for approx. 15’ the bearing outer ring on rear axle casing. (See Figure 17 for ring
taper roller supporting bearing (1) on toothing side and fit it adjustment on beater 99374093).
down onto the gearing case (2) completely.
Figure 52 Figure 55
33096
33099
Heat in air-circulation furnace at 100ºC for approx. 15’ the Use beater 99374093 (1) to fit in place rear taper roller
taper roller supporting bearing (1) on toothing opposite side bearing outer ring on rear axle casing (2) without adjustment
and fit it down onto the gearing case (2) completely. ring.
Figure 53 Figure 56
33097
33100
Pour few drops of LOCTITE 270 into crown wheel (1) holes, On surface plate (2), set to zero dial gauge 99395728 (1) on
fit the crown wheel (1) on the gearing case (2) and tighten support (3) and slightly preload it.
the fastening screws to the specified torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 57 Figure 59
33101
33103
Fit the rear bearing (2) on the false pinion 99370296 (1). Set dial gauge 99395728 (1) including support (3) on false
pinion 99370296 (2).
Direct suitably the dial gauge previously set to zero (see
Figure 51) to position the rod to the bottom of the gearing
case supporting bearing housing.
Figure 58 Repeat this operation for the other bearing and take note of
both found values.
Pinion adjustment ring thickness is obtained through the
following formula:
A1 + A2
S= -(+B)
2
”S” = thickness of the adjustment rings to be positioned

between bevel pinion rear bearing outer ring and rear axle
casing.
”A1” = value found on right housing
”A2” = value found on left housing
33102 ”B” = reference value marked on bevel pinion (see Figure 60)
Position the false pinion 99370296 (1) including the rear
bearing (2) into its seat on rear axle casing (3). Example:
Fit the front bearing, the transmission connecting flange and 3.90 + 4.10
the bevel pinion retaining nut and tighten so as to remove S= - ( ± 0.05)
end play and to enable false pinion rotation. 2
8.00
S= - 0.05
2
S = 4.00 - 0.05
S = 3.95
Adjustment ring thickness shall therefore be: 3.95 mm.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 60 Figure 62
33104
32481
Heat the rear bearing (1) to 100°C for approx. 15’ into an
NOTE If the value marked on the pinion is preceded by air-circulation furnace and then fit it down onto the bevel
positive sign (+), it shall be subtracted from the pinion (2).
value obtained by the sum divided by two of the
housings, whereas it shall be added if preceded by
negative sign (-).
Figure 63
32482
Figure 61
Position the fixed spacer (2) and the adjustment ring (3),
previously used to obtain the specified rolling torque, on the
bevel pinion (1).
Figure 64
33099
Choose an adjustment ring having the same thickness ob-

tained by using the formula shown in Figure 59 and fit it into
the rear axle casing after removing rear taper roller bearing
outer ring previously mounted.
Use beater 99374093 (1) to fit definitely the rear taper roller 33111
bearing outer ring into rear axle casing (2).
Position the complete bevel pinion into the rear axle casing.
Heat the front bearing (1) to 100°C for approx. 15’ into an
air-circulation furnace and then fit it down onto the bevel
pinion (2).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 65 Figure 68
32480
74730
Using the torque wrench 99389819 (1), measure the rolling

Fit the seal ring (2) in the axle casing with tool 99374201 (1). torque of the bevel pinion.

Figure 66 temperature of 25°C, making the pinion turn at a
speed of 50 rpm after it has made 10 turns.
If the value is incorrect disassemble the pinion (2, Figure 64),

and replace the adjuster ring (3, Figure 63) with a suitable
ring.
Refit the pinion and repeat the rolling torque check.
33113
Fit the transmission connecting flange (1) and the bevel

pinion retaining nut (2).
Differential unit refitting
Figure 67 Figure 69
33116
74731
Assemble the flange (3) and prevent rotation with tool Fit gearing case supporting bearing outer rings (2) and then
99370317 (1). position the gearing case (1), previously fitted, in the rear axle
Using the torque wrench (2), tighten the bevel pinion flange casing.
(3) retaining nut to the correct torque value.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 70 Figure 72
33107
Use dynamometric wrench 99389819 (1) to check total

33117
rolling torque:
Cd
Insert the spacer (2), adjuster ring (1), adjuster ring (4) and Ct = Cp + ( x 0.99)
then spacer (3). R
Ct = total rolling torque
Cp = bevel pinion bearing rolling torque
Figure 71
Cd = 2 ÷ 2.8 Nm (0.2 ÷ 0.29 kgm)
R = Rear axle reduction ratio

Example:
2.8
Ct = 2.5 + ( x 0.99)
3.91
Ct = 2.5 + 0.71
Ct = 3.21 Nm (0.33 kgm)
If the value is incorrect, replace the adjuster rings (1 and 4,
Figure 70) with rings of the correct thickness.
Figure 73
33119
Refit caps (1) taking into account the marks made at removal.
Use dynamometric wrench 99389827 (2) to tighten the
fastening screws to the specified torque.
Set gearing case supporting bearings and check total rolling
torque.

temperature of 25°C, making the pinion turn at a
speed of 50 rpm after it has made 10 turns. 33121
Position magnetic dial gauge 99395684 (1) and check the

clearance between the pinion and crown on four equidistant
teeth on the crown. The average of the measurements must
equal the required value. If a different clearance is found, remove
the caps (3) again and swap over the assembly position of the
adjustment rings (1 and 4, Figure 70).
If this is not sufficient, replace the adjustment rings with ones
of a different thickness, but the total thickness must still be
the same as that of the adjustment rings removed.
This is so as not to change the total rolling torque.
Apply a thin layer of Prussian blue on ring gear teeth by brush.
Turn the pinion and measure the impression of the contact
of the pinion toothing on the crown wheel toothing.
Here we illustrate the possible contacts with the corrections
to obtain precise coupling of the crown wheel and pinion.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 74 Figure 77
44603
Excessive contact on heel
E = Greater base of tooth.
A = Coupling depth F = Heel Move the ring bevel gear to-
B = Crest
G = Top land wards the pinion and then
C = Side move the pinion away from
H = Contact surface
D = Play I = Lateral surface the ring bevel gear to adjust
44606
clearance.
Figure 75 Figure 78
Excessive contact in the

upper part or crest of the
tooth.
Correct contact Move the pinion towards
the ring bevel gear and then
move the ring bevel gear
44604
away from the pinion to ad-
44607
just clearance.
Figure 76 Figure 79
Excessive contact on side Excessive contact on the

of tooth. top land of the tooth.
Move the pinion away from Move the ring bevel gear
the ring bevel gear and then away from the pinion them
move the ring bevel gear to- move the pinion towards
wards the pinion to adjust the ring bevel gear to adjust
clearance. 44605 clearance. 44608
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 80 Figure 82
33122 33123
Fit a new sealing gasket on gearing inspection cover connec-

tion surface. Apply Loctite 270 on the thread of the holes for Fit oil drain plug (2). Pour 3 litres of W140MDA oil through
screws to secure cover (1). Fit cover (1) and use dynamo- the proper hole and fit inspection and filling plug (1).
metric wrench to tighten the fastening screws to the speci-
fied torque.
NOTE Do not tighten screws at higher torque value since

this shall jeopardize the effect of the sealing gasket
located between the connection surface and the
gearing inspection cover.
Figure 81
* NUT ROTATION
DIRECTION
51853
Crimp nut (1) collar on bevel pinion (2) milling as shown in

the figure.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLES 1
SECTION 7
5206 Axles
Page
This section contains:
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
AXLE 5817 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
AXLE 5818 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
AXLE 5819 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
AXLE 5823 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
WHEEL GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

2 AXLES DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLES 3
AXLES
DIAGNOSTICS
Front axle main working faults:
1 - Stiff steering;
2 - Wobble;
3 - Noise.
1 STIFF STEERING
Front wheels not aligned. Align front wheels.

YES
NO
Irregular wheel toe-in. Adjust front wheel toe-in.

YES
NO
Irregular tyre pressure. Inflate tyres to prescribed pressure.

YES
NO
Elements involved in the stub axle rotation on the pin Check and replace the elements deteriorated.
inefficient. YES
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

4 AXLES DAILY
2 WOBBLE
Irregular wheel camber. Check the tie rod assembly, adjust or repair the
YES deformed parts.
NO
Front wheels not aligned. Align front wheels.

YES
NO
Irregular wheel toe-in. Correctly adjust toe-in.

YES
NO
Steering gear tie rod king-pins inefficient. Replace defective parts.

YES
NO
Irregular play of wheel hub bearings. Replace the wheel hubs.

YES
NO
Eccentric wheels: Replace the wrong rim.

eccentric, deformed rim YES Deflate and centre the tyre on the rim.
tyre assembled on wrong rim.
NO
Unbalanced wheels. Balance the wheels.

YES
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLES 5
3 NOISE
Wheel hub bearings worn. Replace worn bearings and adjust end play.
YES
NO
Stabiliser bar elastic inserts worn or relevant fixing Replace elastic inserts, tighten fixing nuts.
brackets loosen. YES
NO
Play between torsion bar-suspension arm splines. Replace worn parts and adjust torsion bar pre-loading.
YES
NO
Suspension arm bushes and/or articulation pins worn. Replace worn parts.
YES
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

6 AXLES DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5817 7
Axle 5817
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
REMOVING AND REFITTING AXLE 5817 . . . . 13
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
OVERHAULING AXLE 5817 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
- Wheel hub removal and refitting . . . . . . . . . . 15
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
- Replacing phonic wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
STUB AXLE REMOVAL-REFITTING . . . . . . . . . 17
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

8 AXLE 5817 DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5817 9
DESCRIPTION
Print 603.43.351
The front axle 5817 is composed of a load-bearing cross The wheel hubs are supported on the pins of the stub axles
member on which are mounted the suspensions and power by UNIT - BEARINGS that need neither lubrication nor
steering. adjustment.
The stub axles turn, by means of swivel heads, on the ends The wheel rims are secured onto the wheel hubs by five
of the suspensions. screws.
The steering levers are cast on the king-pin of the stub axles
to which are secured the brake calipers.
Figure 1
52247
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

10 AXLE 5817 DAILY
Axle type 5817
WHEEL HUBS
Wheel hubs bearings UNIT BEARING
Hub bearings end play -
Wheel hub bearings Not Adjustable

play adjustment Fixing nut torque tightening
WHEEL GEOMETRY
Wheel camber angle

0º ± 20’
(vehicle at static load)
Wheel caster angle

3º ± 20’
Wheel toe-in
2 ± 1 mm
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5817 11
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Figure 2
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅
49355
AXLE 5817
TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
1 Screw securing caliper mounting to stub axle 170 ÷ 196 17 ÷ 19.6
2 Screw securing brake disc to wheel hub 19.5 ÷ 24 1.9 ÷ 2.4
3 Nut securing wheel hub 256 ÷ 314 25.6 ÷ 31.4
4 Screw securing wheel 160 16
5 Screw securing stub axle guard 6 ÷ 7.5 0.6 ÷ 0.7
- Screw securing caliper to caliper mounting 176 ÷ 217 17.6 ÷ 21.7
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

12 AXLE 5817 DAILY
TOOLS
99305354 Portable optical reading tool for checking wheel trim
99306010 Apparatus to purge air from brakes and clutch
99321024 Hydraulic trolley for removing/refitting wheels
99322215 Guide to wheel hub assembly
99347074 Puller for steering tie rod king-pins
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5817 13
Print 603.43.351
REMOVING AND REFITTING AXLE 5817 Figure 3

Removal
Set the vehicle on solid, level ground.

Lock the rear wheels with scotches, remove the wheel rim
guards and loosen the screws or nuts fixing the wheel.
Lift the front of the vehicle and rest the chassis frame on
supports.
Take out the screws or nuts fixing the wheel and remove them
with tool 99321024.
From underneath the vehicle:
- remove the central guard (15) under the engine by taking
out the screws securing it to the side guards and to the
front cross member of the chassis frame;
- remove the engine side guards (6) and (19) by taking out
the screws securing them to the chassis frame;
- remove the gearbox side guards (5) and (20) by taking out
the screws securing them to the chassis frame and the nuts
securing them to the cross member under the gearbox
(23);
- disconnect the brake fluid pipe (21) from the retaining
blocks on the axle (22);
- drain off the power-steering fluid and disconnect the pipes
(11) and (12) in correspondence with the fittings on the
hydraulic power steering (13);
- disconnect the power steering column in correspondence
with the coupling (14).
If it is decided to leave the brake callipers on the axle, proceed
to:
- disconnect the electrical connection (1) signalling brake
lining wear and the ABS sensor (4) if there is one;
- disconnect the brake fluid pipes in correspondence with
the fittings (7) and (18) after draining the system.
If it is decided to leave the brake callipers on the vehicle,
proceed to:
- disconnect the brake fluid pipes from the axle (22) in
correspondence with the brackets (8, 10, 16, 17);
- then disconnect the brake callipers (3) from their
respective stub axles by taking out the screws (2) and
supporting the callipers to prevent any strain on the pipes.
To complete removing the axle:
- unscrew five of the six fixing screws (9) on both sides of
the chassis frame;
- put a hydraulic lift under the axle and take out the last two
screws;
- lower the hydraulic jack and extract the axle.
Refitting
Reverse the steps described for removal tightening the screws
or nuts to the prescribed torque.
Adjust the load of the torsion bar as illustrated under the
specific heading.
Top up the power-steering fluid.
If the brake callipers have been left on the axle, restore the
brake fluid level and bleed off any air.
Check and adjust the front wheel geometry.
75583
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

14 AXLE 5817 DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5817 15
Print 603.43.351/D
REPAIRS
520610 OVERHAULING AXLE 5817 Figure 6
Figure 4
52250
52248
Remove the two centring pins (2) and detach the brake disc
Remove the wheel rim cup. (1) from the wheel hub (4).
Free the screws (1) securing the wheel rim. Remove the cup (3) from the wheel hub (4).
Lift the vehicle and put the stands (2) under the structural
members in a forward position.
NOTE Check the state of the brake disc and linings as
Unscrew the screws (1) and remove the entire wheel. described in the BRAKE SYSTEM section.
520620 Wheel hub removal and refitting

Removal
Figure 5
Figure 7
61667
52251
Take out the screws (1) and remove the mounting with the
brake caliper (2) from the stub axle.
Support the brake caliper suitably to prevent strain on the oil Lift the deformation (⇒) of the nut (1) and unscrew this with
pipe. a suitable wrench.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

16 AXLE 5817 DAILY
Print 603.43.351
Figure 8 Refitting
Figure 10
61668
Extract the wheel hub (1) from the pin of the stub axle (2). 61668
Lubricate the surface of the stub axle pin (2) with TUTELA
NOTE If any trouble is found with the wheel hub or MR3 grease and key the wheel hub (1).
bearing, the assembly needs to be replaced since
the parts are not supplied as single spares.
NOTE The wheel hub must be keyed without forcing.. If
When repairing the wheel hub (1), take care not there are difficulties, do not assemble since the
to damage the phonic wheel (3). bearing may be damaged.
Extract the wheel hub, check the cause of the
difficulties and eliminate them.
526712 Replacing phonic wheel
Figure 9
Figure 11
52253
The phonic wheel (2) is extracted from the wheel hub (1)
with general tools: minimum extraction load 300 kg.
The phonic wheel should be mounted on the wheel hub after
heating it to a temperature of 150°C. 52254
On completing assembly, make sure the phonic wheel sits in

its seat in the hub properly. After keying the hub (1), position the washer (2) and screw
on the nut (3).
Check that the orthogonality and oscillation of the phonic
wheel is no greater than 0.3 mm. Tighten the nut (3) to the required torque with the Allen
wrench (4).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5817 17
Figure 12
NOTE The brake lining with its wear indicator must be
mounted from the piston side of the brake caliper.
If it is necessary to move the brake caliper piston
back, use tool 99372236, taking the precautions
given in the BRAKES section.
Tighten brake calliper (2) fixing screws to the prescribed

torque.
Figure 15
52255
Deform the collar of the nut (1) by the milling (⇒) of the pin
(2).
Figure 13
62101
Fit the wheel on the brake plate as shown in the figure and
tighten wheel fixing screws to the prescribed torque.
Fit wheel rim cup.
522820 STUB AXLE REMOVAL-REFIT-

TING
Removal
Figure 16
52250
Mount the cup (3) in the wheel hub (4).

Mount the brake disc (1) and secure it to the wheel hub (4)
with the two centring pins (2).
Figure 14
61672
Remove the wheel hubs as described under the relevant

Remove nut (1) and withdraw crankpin (2) from stabiliser bar
(3).
52257
Rest the brake caliper (2) with the brake linings on the stub
axle (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

18 AXLE 5817 DAILY
Figure 17 Figure 19
52259 61670
Remove screws (5) and remove protection (4) from stub With the hydraulic jack under the bottom suspension arm (3)
axle (6). oppose the action of the transverse leaf spring.
Remove nut (2) fixing kingpin (1) to lever (3). Remove the nuts (2 - 6) securing the swivel head pin (1 - 5)
to the stub axle (4).
NOTE Fit the proper setscrew wrench into kingpin (1) to

stop its rotation, if required. NOTE To block rotation of the swivel head pins (1 - 5),
insert a suitable Allen wrench into the hexagon
sunk into them.
Figure 20
Figure 18
61669
52260
Using the extractor 99347074 (2), remove the link pins (1 -

3) of the stub axle (4) and put this aside.
Using the extractor 99347074 (1), remove the pin (2) of the
swivel head from the steering lever of the stub axle (3).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5817 19
Refitting Figure 23
Figure 21
61672
61671
Insert the pins of the swivel heads (1 - 2) of the top and Connect stabiliser bar (3) to crankpin (2), screw new nut (1)
bottom suspension arms into the seats of the stub axle (3). and tighten it to the prescribed torque.
Then screw on the self-locking nuts (5) and lock them at the
required torque.
NOTE Once removed, self-locking nuts (5) must not be

reused.
To block rotation of the swivel head pins (1 - 2),
insert a suitable Allen wrench (4) into the hexagon
sunk into them.
Figure 22
52259
Connect the pin of the swivel head (1) of the power steering
tie to the lever (3) of the stub axle (6) and tighten the fixing
nut (2) to the required torque.
NOTE Once removed, self-locking nuts (2) must not be

reused.
To block rotation of the swivel head pin (1), insert
a suitable Allen wrench into the hexagon sunk into
them.
Mount the guard (4) on the stub axle and secure it, tightening
the screws (5) to the required torque.
Refit the wheel hub as described in the relevant chapter
(operation 520620).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

20 AXLE 5817 DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5818 21
Axle 5818
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
SPECIFICATION AND DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
OVERHAULING AXLE 5818 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
STUB AXLE REMOVAL AND REFITTING . . . . 27
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

22 AXLE 5818 DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5818 23
DESCRIPTION
Axle 5818 differs from axle 5817 for wheel hub, brake disc and wheel rim fixing to brake disc that is implemented by nut studs
without stabiliser bar.
SPECIFICATION AND DATA
Axle type 5818
WHEEL HUBS
Wheel hub bearings Not Adjustable

play adjustment Fixing nut torque tightening
WHEEL GEOMETRY
Wheel camber angle

0º ± 20’
Wheel caster angle

3º ± 20’
Wheel toe-in
2 ± 1 mm
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

24 AXLE 5818 DAILY
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Figure 1
49354
FRONT AXLE 5818
PART TORQUE
Nm kgm
1 Screw securing caliper mounting to stub axle 170 ÷ 196 17 ÷ 19.6
2 Ring nut securing wheel hub 257 ÷ 314 25.7 ÷ 31.4
3 Screw securing ring nut 20 ÷ 24 2 ÷ 2.4
4 Screw securing cover and brake disc to wheel hub 98.1 ÷ 107.9 9.8 ÷ 10.7
5 Nut securing wheel 284 ÷ 342 28.4 ÷ 34.2
6 Screw securing guard to stub axle 6 ÷ 7.5 0.6 ÷ 0.7
Stud fixing to brake disc
7 85 ÷ 104 8.5 ÷ 10.4
(apply IVECO 1905683 sealant on the thread)
– Screw securing caliper to caliper mounting 154 ÷ 170 15.4 ÷ 17
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5818 25
TOOLS
99347074 Puller for steering tie rod king-pins
99370496 Wheel hub fitting guide
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

26 AXLE 5818 DAILY
520610 OVERHAULING AXLE 5818

The overhauling operation different from the ones Figure 4
concerning the axle 5817 are described below.
To remove and refit axle 5818, proceed in a similar manner
as for axle 5817.
Adjustment values, tightening torque values and equipment
are those specified in this chapter.
Figure 2
52265
Loosen the screw (3).

With the socket wrench (4), remove the nut (2) securing the
wheel hub (1) to the pin of the stub axle.
Extract the wheel hub (1) from the pin of the stub axle.
NOTE If any trouble is found with the wheel hub or

19603 When putting aside the wheel hub, take care not
to damage the phonic wheel.
Free the screws (1) securing the wheel rim.
Lift the vehicle and put the stands (3) under the structural
members in a forward position.
Unscrew the nuts (1), take off the protection (2) and remove
the entire wheel.
Remove the mounting with the brake caliper as described for 526712 Replacing phonic wheel
axle 5817.
Figure 5
Figure 3
44647
The phonic wheel (2) should be extracted from the wheel

hub (1) with general tools.
52264 The phonic wheel should be mounted on the wheel hub after
Take out the screws (2), take off the cover (1) and remove heating it to a temperature of 150°C.
the brake disc (3) from the wheel hub (4). On completing assembly, make sure the ”phonic” wheel sits
in its seat in the hub properly and is positioned at the distance
NOTE Check the state of the brake disc, wheel pins and Check the oscillation of the phonic wheel (2). Tolerance
linings as described in the BRAKE SYSTEM section. must be no greater than 0.1 mm.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5818 27
Refitting Figure 8
Figure 6
52268
52266 Assemble the brake drum (1) on the wheel hub. Position the
Assemble the tool 99370496 (2) on the stub axle pin, cover (2), lock the wheel hub rotation with the lever (3) and
lubricate the external surface of the tool (2) using TUTELA tighten the fixing screws to the prescribed torque.
MR3 grease and assemble the wheel hub (1). Using a magnetic dial gauge, check the eccentricity of the
brake disc: it must not exceed 0.125 mm.
Refit the mounting with the brake caliper to the stub axle,
tightening the fixing screws to the required torque.
Figure 9
Figure 7
Assemble:
- the wheel on the brake drum;
- the nut protection and screw the fixing nuts.
52267 Tighten the nuts fixing the wheel to the prescribed torque
according to the diagram shown in figure.
NOTE The wheel hub must be keyed without forcing.. If 522820 STUB AXLE REMOVAL AND
there are difficulties, do not assemble since the REFITTING
bearing may be damaged.
Extract the wheel hub, check the cause of the Perform stub axle removal and refitting as described for
difficulties and eliminate them. axle 5817, without considering the points concerning
the stabiliser bar since the latter is lacking on axle 5818.
When the wheel hub has been keyed (1), position the
washer, screw the nut (2) and using the socket wrench (4)
tighten the nut (2) to the prescribed torque.
Tighten the check screw (3) of the nut to the prescribed
torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

28 AXLE 5818 DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5819 29
Axle 5819
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
AXLE 5819 OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
- Stub axle removal and refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

30 AXLE 5819 DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5819 31
DESCRIPTION
The front axle 5819 has independent wheels. The brake calipers and steering levers are secured on the
king-pin of the stub axles.
It is basically composed of:
The hubs are supported on the stub axle pins by
- stub axles; Unit-Bearings, which need no adjustment or lubrication.
- wheel hubs;
- suspension arms.
The stub axles are also the end elements of the suspension.
They are connected to the top and bottom suspension arms
by swivel heads that allow turning the stub axle.
Figure 1
30772
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

32 AXLE 5819 DAILY
Axle type 5819
WHEEL HUBS
Wheel hub bearings play Not Adjustable

adjustment Fixing nut torque tightening
WHEEL GEOMETRY
Wheel camber angle

0o 30’ ± 20’
Wheel caster angle

1o 35’ ± 20’
Wheel toe-in
2.5 ± 1
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5819 33
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Figure 2
52256
FRONT AXLE 5819
PART TORQUE
Nm kgm
1 Screw securing caliper to caliper mounting 154 ÷ 170 15.4 ÷ 17
2 Screw securing guards to stub axle 15 ÷ 22 1.5 ÷ 2.2
3 Screw securing caliper mounting to stub axle 154 ÷ 170 15.4 ÷ 17
4 85 ÷ 104 8.5 ÷ 10.4
(apply IVECO 1905683 sealant on the thread)
5 Screw securing plate and brake disc to wheel hub 94 ÷ 115 9.4 ÷ 11.5
7 Screw securing ring nut 20 ÷ 24 2 ÷ 2.4
8 Nut securing wheel 284.5 ÷ 343.3 28.4 ÷ 34.3
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

34 AXLE 5819 DAILY
TOOLS
99322215 Driving and steering axle overhaul stand
99347074 Tool for extracting steering tie rod king-pins
Wrench for spindle pin ring nut

99357144
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5819 35
TOOLS
99370496 Tool for wheel hub assembly
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

36 AXLE 5819 DAILY
REPAIR OPERATIONS Refitting

520610 AXLE 5819 OVERHAUL
Figure 5
The following paragraphs describe the overhaul operations
that differ from axle 5818 operations.
To remove and refit axle 5819, proceed in a similar manner
as for axle 5823.
Adjustment values, tightening torque values and equipment
are those specified in this chapter.
520611 Stub axle removal and refitting
Removal
Figure 3
19028
Set upper and lower lever kingpins (6 and 8) into stub axle
seat (4) then tighten self-locking nuts (1 and 5) to the
prescribed torque.
Refit steering lever (3) on stub axle by tightening the relevant
fixing screw and nut (7) to the prescribed torque.
Refit dust cover (2) to stub axle by means of the proper
screws indicated with arrows.
19026
NOTE Self-locking nuts (1 and 5) cannot be reused after

Remove wheel hub as described in the relevant chapter removing.
(operation 520620) concerning axle 5817.
Refit wheel hub as described in the relevant
Remove from stub axle (5): chapter (operation 520620) concerning axle 5818.
- dust cover (2) by loosening screw (7);
- steering lever (3) by loosening screw (8);
Loosen kingpin (1 and 6) fixing nuts from stub axle (5).
Figure 4
19027
Use tool 99347074 (3) to remove kingpin (1) from stub axle
(2) then remove the latter.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5823 37
5206 Axle 5823
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
REMOVING AND REFITTING AXLE 5823 . . . . 43
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
AXLE 5823 OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
- Wheel hub removal and refitting . . . . . . . . . . 45
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
- Re-fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

38 AXLE 5823 DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5823 39
DESCRIPTION
The front axle 5823 has independent wheels. The brake calipers and steering levers are secured on the
king-pin of the stub axles.
It is basically composed of:
The hubs are supported on the stub axle pins by
- stub axles; Unit-Bearings, which need no adjustment or lubrication.
- wheel hubs;
- suspension arms.
The stub axles are also the end elements of the suspension.
They are connected to the top and bottom suspension arms
by swivel heads that allow turning the stub axle.
Figure 1
62909
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

40 AXLE 5823 DAILY
Axle type 5823
WHEEL HUBS
Hub bearings end play 0.11 ÷ 0.14
Wheel hub bearings play Not Adjustable

adjustment Fixing nut torque tightening
WHEEL GEOMETRY
Wheel camber angle

1o ± 20’
Wheel caster angle

2o 30’ ± 20’
Wheel toe-in
2.5 ± 1 mm
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5823 41
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Figure 2
74742
FRONT AXLE 5823
COMPONENT TORQUE
Nm kgm
1 Screw securing guards to stub axle 176 ÷ 217 17.6 ÷ 21.7
2 Screw securing caliper to stub axle 6 ÷ 7.5 0.6 ÷ 0.7
3 52 ÷ 64 5.2 ÷ 6.4
(apply LOCTITE 270 sealant on the thread)
4 Nut securing wheel 284.5 ÷ 343.3 28.4 ÷ 34.3
5 Screw securing brake disc to wheel hub 98 ÷ 108 9.8 ÷ 10.8
7 Ring nut fastening screw 19.6 ÷ 23.5 1.9 ÷ 2.3
8 Cover fastening screw 98 ÷ 108 9.8 ÷ 10.8
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

42 AXLE 5823 DAILY
TOOLS
99321024 Hydraulic truck for removing - refitting operations
99322215 Stand to overhaul axles
99347074 Tool to remove drag link joints and wishbones
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5823 43
REMOVING AND REFITTING AXLE 5823 Figure 3

Removal
Set the vehicle on solid, level ground.

supports.
Take out the screws or nuts fixing the wheel and remove them
with tool 99321024.
Remove the front right and left mudguard (1).
Remove the right and left mudguards under the bumpers (17).
To help remove the front suspension mounting (2), free the top
screw stay (14) in correspondence with the screw (15) fixing
to the suspension arm (13).
Remove the front suspension mounting (2) by taking out the
chassis frame fasteners (16).
Fit the top screw stay (14) back onto the suspension arm (13).
The same steps must be performed on both left and right.
Adjust the load on the right and left torsion bars (9).
Undo the nut (11) and unscrew the threaded pin (12) until the
torsion bar (9) is entirely ”discharged”.
Remove the fasteners (10) fixing the mounting (8) to the
chassis frame.
Extract the mounting (8) from the torsion bar (9).
If it is decided to leave the brake callipers on the axle, proceed
to:
- disconnect the electrical connection (3) signalling brake
lining wear and the ABS sensor (5) if there is one;
- disconnect the brake fluid pipes in correspondence with
the fittings (7) after draining the system;
- if it is decided to leave the brake callipers on the vehicle,
proceed to:
- disconnect the brake callipers (4) from their respective
stub axles by taking out the screws (6) and supporting the
callipers to prevent any strain on the pipes.
75581
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

44 AXLE 5823 DAILY
From underneath the vehicle: Figure 4

- remove the central guard (7) under the engine by taking
out the screws securing it to the side guards (8) and to the
front cross member of the chassis frame;
- remove the right and left side guards (8) of the engine by
taking out the screws securing them to the chassis frame;
- remove the right and left side guards (9) of the gearbox by
taking out the screws securing them to the axle (11) and
to the cross member (12) under the gearbox;
- disconnect the brake fluid pipe (10) from the retaining
blocks on the axle;
- drain off the power-steering fluid and disconnect the pipes
(4) and (5);
- disconnect the power steering column (3) in
correspondence with the coupling (6);
- place the removal bracket on the hydraulic jack and put it
all under the axle;
- undo the chassis frame bottom fixing screws (2) and the
top fixing nuts (1);
- lower the hydraulic jack and extract the axle (11).
Refitting
Reverse the steps described for removal tightening the screws
or nuts to the prescribed torque.
Adjust the load of the torsion bar as illustrated under the
specific heading.
Top up the power-steering fluid.
If the brake callipers have been left on the axle, restore the
brake fluid level and bleed off any air.
Check and adjust the front wheel geometry.
75582
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5823 45
520610 AXLE 5823 OVERHAUL

Overhaul operations described in this sections are those Figure 7
differing from axle 5817.
Figure 5
62913
Stop wheel hub (1) rotation.

Remove the screws (2) and remove the cover (3).
62911 Figure 8
Loosen wheel rim fastening nuts (1).

Lift the vehicle and set the supporting stands under the side
members in forward position.
Loosen nuts (1), remove protection (2) and remove the
entire wheel.
62914
520620 Wheel hub removal and refitting Remove the screws (2) and remove wheel hub (1) from hub
(3).
Removal
Figure 6 Figure 9
62912
62915
Remove the screws (1) and remove the support including the
brake calliper (2) from the stub axle. Remove the brake disc (1) from the wheel hub (2).
Suitably support the brake calliper to prevent oil pipe NOTE Check brake disc and lining conditions as described
! tensioning. in the BRAKE SYSTEM section.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

46 AXLE 5823 DAILY
Figure 10 Re-fitting
Figure 12
62916
Loosen the screw (3). 62918
With the socket wrench (4), remove the nut (2) securing the
wheel hub (1) to the pin of the stub axle. Screw tool 99370496 (2) on kingpin (1), grease tool external
surface (2) with Tutela MR3.
Extract the wheel hub (1) from the pin of the stub axle.
NOTE If any trouble is found with the wheel hub or

When repairing the wheel hub (1), take care not
to damage the phonic wheel (3).
Figure 13
526712 Replacing phonic wheel
Figure 11
62919
Refit the wheel hub (1).

62917
The possible extraction of the phonic wheel (2) from the NOTE The wheel hub must be keyed without forcing.. If
wheel hub (1) is made using normal tools. there are difficulties, do not assemble since the
bearing may be damaged.
The phonic wheel must be heated up to a temperature of Extract the wheel hub, check the cause of the
150°C before the assembly on the wheel hub. difficulties and eliminate them.
When the assembly is ended, make sure that the “phonic”
wheel perfectly rests on the hub housing and that is
positioned at the dimension shown in figure. When the wheel hub has been keyed (1), position the
washer, screw the nut (2) and using the socket wrench (4)
Check that the orthogonality and oscillation of the phonic (2) tighten the nut (2) to the prescribed torque.
wheel is no greater than 0.1 mm. Tighten the check screw (3) of the nut to the prescribed
torque.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY AXLE 5823 47
Figure 14 Figure 16
52268
Refit cover (1).

Stop wheel hub rotation using the proper lever (3) and
62915
tighten the fastening screws (1) to the specified torque.
Fit brake disc (1) on wheel hub (2). Figure 17
Figure 15
62912
Rest brake calliper (2) and brake linings on stub axle (1).
NOTE The brake lining with the wear sensor shall be fitted
62921 on brake calliper piston side.
Comply with BRAKE section requirements to
Fit flange (1) on wheel hub. Stop wheel hub rotation using move back the brake calliper piston using tool
the proper lever (3) and tighten the fastening screws (2) to 99372236.
the specified torque.
Use the gauge with magnetic base to check brake disc
mismatching: it must be lower than 0.125 mm. Tighten brake calliper (2) fastening screws (1) to the specified
torque.
Figure 18
Wheel stud replacement
Replace wheel studs if found damaged by removing them
from the wheel hub.
Smear new stud threads with Loctite 270 and tighten to the
specified torque.
Once refitting is over, check stud squareness, max. error is
0.2 mm.
89007
Fit the wheel on the flange and tighten the fastening screws
to the specified torque according to the sequence shown in
the figure.
Refit wheel rim cap.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

48 AXLE 5823 DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY WHEEL GEOMETRY 49
Wheel geometry
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
WHEEL GEOMETRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
CHECKING CHARACTERISTIC ANGLES . . . . . 55
- Positioning jaws and projectors . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
- Electronic balancing of rim eccentricity . . . . . . 56
- Wheel alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
- Checking toe-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
- Front wheel deviation test

(vehicle wheelbase check) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
- Checking camber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
- Checking king-pin angle and caster angle . . . . . 58
- Checking steering angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
- Checking rear axle alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
- Calculating thickness of spacers to be fitted

between tie rod mountings and
chassis side members (with the exception of
vehicles equipped with 5-mm thick chassis or
with transverse leaf-spring suspension) . . . . . . 60
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

50 WHEEL GEOMETRY DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DESCRIPTION
In order to have a good vehicle ground holding, a low Camber angle
consumption of tyre and to enable the driving wheels to return
to straight running after steering, the front wheels are adjusted Figure 2
at defined assembly angles: ß
- wheel camber angle;
- king-pin camber angle;
- caster angle;
- wheel toe-in.
These angles, accurately calculated, enable the correct balancing
of the forces created when the vehicle is moving, in the different
load conditions, tending to change the position of the wheels
on the ground.
32957
The king-pin camber angle (β) is the angle formed by the axis
passing through the king-pin and the vertical to the ground,
looking at the vehicle from the front.
When the projection of the king-pin axis is near to the contact
point of the wheel with the ground (opposite tendency to the
wheel camber) the angle is positive, it is difficult to say that it
is impossible to have the king-pin camber angle negative.
The wheel camber angle (α) and the king-pin camber angle (β)
enable wheel axis and the king-pin axis to come nearer as much
as possible to the contact centre of the tyre on the ground.
In this way, reduced tyre wear and lower steering torque are
obtained.
Wheel camber angle
Figure 1
Caster angle
Figure 3
a a
γ + γ _
A B
A B
32958
32956
The caster angle (γ) is the angle formed by the king-pin axis with
the vertical to the ground, looking at the vehicle from one side.
The camber angle (α) is the angle formed by the axis passing
If the projection formed by the king-pin axis falls in front of the
through the wheel centre line and the vertical to the ground,
wheel contact point with the ground, in the direction of travel
looking at the vehicle from the front.
of the vehicle, the caster angle is by convention positive (A); it
The camber angle is positive (A) when the upper part of the is negative (B) if it falls behind the wheel contact point with the
wheel tends toward the outside; it is negative (B) when the ground; it is equal to zero if it is perfectly vertical to the contact
wheel upper part tend toward the inside. point.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

This angle makes it possible to keep the front wheels straight Figure 5
when the vehicle is running straight and allows the wheels to
return spontaneously to running straight from the position
taken in the bend, as soon as the steering wheel is released by
the driver. A
32960
The toe-in is negative if B is lower than A.
Wheel toe-in Figure 6

Figure 4
A
A
B
B
32961
32359
The toe-in is equal to zero if B is equal to A.
The wheel toe-in results from the difference between the

distances A and B (value expressed in mm) measured on the
horizontal axis of the rims, looking at the vehicle from the top.
In this way a light drive and a low tyre consumption is obtained.
The toe-in is positive if B is higher than A.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

WHEEL GEOMETRY
MODELS
29L - 35S 35 (1) 35 (2).40 - 45. - 50. 60C - 65C
WHEEL GEOMETRY - - - -
Wheel camber angle

0o ± 20’ 0º 30’ ± 20’ 1º ± 20’
(vehicle at static load) (± 20’)
Wheel caster angle 1º 35’ ± 20’ 2º 30’ ± 20’

3o ± 20’
Wheel toe-in 2.5 ± 1

(vehicle at static load) mm 2±1
Steering angle:
b
a Internal a 47o 30’ ± 30’ 43º 37º 7’
External b 39o ± 30’ 36º 30’ 45º 6’
a
Stub axle king-pin camber α 13.38° 7°
(1) Front suspension with transverse leaf spring

(2) Front suspension with torsion bar
TIGHTENING TORQUES
TORQUE
PART
Nm kgm
Nut fixing king-pin to the side tie rod of the steering box 15 ÷ 20 1.5 ÷ 2
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
99305354 Tool for checking wheel geometry
99347074 Puller for king-pins
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

CHECKING CHARACTERISTIC ANGLES

Before proceeding with the checks, it is necessary to perform Figure 9
a preliminary inspection at some of the vehicle members, which
can affect the geometry: if malfunctions are found, it is necessary
to eliminate them in order to avoid wrong detection.
The check to be performed are the following:
- tyre pressure;
- wheel hub bearing play
- play between steering tie rod pins and stub axle levers;
- shock absorber efficiency;
- unallowed deformation of the wheel rims.
Figure 7
23311
Lift the vehicle front part and position the floating wheels (1)
locking them with the locks (2).
Figure 10
33137
- Ensure the presence of spacers (1) between side

members (2) and tie rod (4) attachment mountings (3)
(with the exception of vehicles equipped with 5 mm thick
side members). If not, proceed as described on page 60.
NOTE The checks and possible operations on the wheel

geometry must be carried out with the vehicle at
static load. Make sure, periodically, that the optical
unit are perfectly calibrated.
Perform the geometry check using the tool 99305354. 25114
Position the clutch jaw (1) fitted with fixing pins (2). Operating
the handgrip (3), lock the jaw on the wheel, making sure that
Positioning jaws and projectors it is perfectly secured.
Figure 8
Figure 11
1
2
1
2
3
33137
Place the vehicle with the wheel in straight running position on 32818
a level surface. Lift the rear of the vehicle and position the Assemble the detecting unit (1) on the jaws (3) and constrain
board (3). Lower the vehicle, brake the rear wheels and apply it with the screw (2). Repeat the operation on the other
the hook (1) with the slide rule (2). wheel.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Electronic balancing of rim eccentricity Figure 13
Figure 12
25120
Press the brake pedal locking it with the suitable tool (1)
positioned against the seat.
NOTE The wheels must be braked during the whole

measuring cycle.
32819
Connect the detectors plugs (7) to the transformer (6) and

switch on the switch (8); loosen the locking screw (2) of the
detector and lift the detector lens guard (7).
Make sure that the laser beam does not hit the eyes
of people, it will severely damage their sight.
Press the push-button ”out of centre” (1) for at least two Wheel alignment
seconds, the display (3) shows nine lines.
Manually rotate the wheel slowly in the running direction and Figure 14
project the light signal on the slide rule scale (5).
Stop the wheel when the signal read on the slide rule (5) has
reached the maximum value and note down the value (e.g. 12).
Rotate the wheel again until the minimum value is reached and
note it down (e.g. 8).
Calculate the mean value of the amplitude: 12 + 8 = 20 : 2 =
10 and position the wheel on the mean value calculated
marking its position.
Press the push-button ”out of centre ” again (1) until the LED
(4) of the wheel camber is lighted and on the display (3) a
fictitious value is shown.
52269
Repeat the operations on the other wheel.
Lower the vehicle so that the wheels, in the position previously Using the level (4) arrange horizontally the detectors (3) and
marked, completely rest at the centre of the floating discs (9). fix them to their position with the screw (2).
Loosen the floating discs (9) from their bases extracting the Move the slide rules (1) until they are centred by the light signal
pins (10). transmitted by the detector (3) and note down the values.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 15 Figure 17
13952
If the values are different, steer the wheels until the light signal
indexes are set to two values equal (A) and exactly the mean 52270
value of the two previous readings. Repeat the same operations on the opposite detector and
In this way a perfect wheel alignment is obtained. read the toe-in value on the scales (in millimetres): the result
of the algebraic sum of the two values must be the prescribed
value.
Figure 18
32295
The positive or negative toe-in adjustment is carried out as

Checking toe-in follows:
Loosen the nuts (3) on the joint heads (2, right and left).
Figure 16 Turn tie rods (1) up to obtain the toe-in of each wheel equal
to half of the prescribed value.
Then tighten the nuts (3) to the prescribed torque.
Front wheel deviation test (vehicle wheelbase

check)
The front wheel deviation test and toe-in reading are carried
out at the same time.
The partial toe-in values, to be detected on the proper
straightedges divided into millimetres, must have the same
value and their sum must correspond to the whole toe-in
value.
25122
If between the readings there is a difference (e.g.: -2 and + 3),
it means that there is a deviation between the two wheels: a
Keeping the detectors in horizontal position and the wheels wheel onward as to the other wheel, equal to 5 lines of the
perfectly aligned, move the lens guard (2) using the lever (1) toe-in scale.
The number of lines is calculated by the algebraic sum
Operate the lever (3) and direct the light signal index on the
[+3-2(-1)=5] or counting the lines included between the two
slide rule scale (4) corresponding to the rim diameter.
values.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Each line corresponds to a deviation of 2 mm, so the deviation Checking king-pin angle and caster angle
between the two wheels is equal to 10 mm (5 x2).
For vehicles with torsion bar suspension: Figure 20
After determining which is the defective wheel, check its
conditions and the exact assembly dimension of the upper and
lower tie rods of the wheel suspension.
If the tie rods have been subject to deformations, replace
them; if the assembly dimension is wrong, screw or unscrew
the tie rod on the king-pin so that the vehicle wheel base is
adjusted and the wheel are on the same axis.
NOTE In order not to change wheel caster angle, a

lengthening or shortening of the lower tie rod must
correspond to a lengthening or shortening of the
upper tie rod.
32823
When the front wheels are aligned to the rear ones, loosen
the knurled knobs (3) and zero the graduated sector (2) on
For vehicles with transverse leaf spring the index (1) of the floating disc.
suspension:
The deviation error may be due to deformation of the frame
or of the assemblies connected to the wheels. Figure 21
32824
Steer the wheel 20° toward the inside; press twice the king-pin
camber push-button (2), the LED lights up and the display (1)
Checking camber shows 9 horizontal lines.
Figure 19 Figure 22
32821 32825
When the front wheels are aligned to the rear ones and the
detectors are on an horizontal plane, press the key wheel Steer the wheels 20° toward the outside, press the king-pin
camber (2) the LED lights up and the display (1) shows the camber push-button (2) and the display (1) shows the king-pin
camber angle value. camber angle.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 23 - Steer the wheels until the floating disc index of the wheel
inside the bend in correspondence with the prescribed
steering angle.
NOTE For steering angles higher than 30°, it is necessary to

consider as reference index the mark 20° (1).
- under the above conditions, check on the other wheel

that the steering angle value is as expected;
- reverse steering and check again.
If different values are found, possible causes can be:
32826 - wrong centering of the steering box;
Without moving the wheel, press the caster angle - deformations caused by impacts;
push-button (2), the LED lights up and the display (1) shows
- deviation error between axles (front and rear axles)
the caster angle value.
higher than 20 mm.
Repeat these operations on the other wheel.
NOTE The king-pin camber angle and the wheel caster

angle are stored, after detection, by the instrument
and can be recalled when necessary pressing the
push-button relevant to the concerned angle.
For regulating the caster angle proceed as follows:

- set wheels in a straight running condition;
- press the kingping angle button until its relevant LED starts
blinking;
- screw and unscrew, as required, lower tie rod joint head, Checking rear axle alignment
considering that the joint head can’t carry out more than
one turn. Figure 25
Checking steering angles

Figure 24
44933
Apply the slide rule (1) to the front wheels checking that the
33134
cursor (2) is exactly in the middle of the two ring splines of the
shaft (3)
This check is carried out during the king-pin camber check of Apply the detectors to the rear wheels and proceed as already
during the caster angle check, making the following operations: described for the front axle wheels.
- if the prescribed steering angles exceed 30°, the mark
20°(1) on the floating disc (2) and the mark 30° (3) on
the graduated selector (4) mast be considered as initial
reference values.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 26 Proceed as follows.

Measure external chassis width A1 at the axle.
If chassis width is not 864 mm (reference value A), subtract
your reading (for example, A1 = 859 mm) from the reference
value: 864 - 859 = 5 mm.
Divide this figure by 2 (5 : 2 = 2.5 mm).
2.5 mm is therefore the thickness of the compensating spacers
that should be fitted to each side member.
Spacers are supplied as spare parts in the following
thicknesses: 1 - 1.5 - 2 mm.
44934
Project the light signal on the slide rule (1) and mark the value
shown.
Repeat the measure on the other wheel and check that the
value is equal to the noted down value, otherwise carefully
check the vehicle rear axle assembly
If no malfunctions are detected, check that the frame is not
deformed, sticking to the procedures described in the section
”Body and frame”.
Figure 28
Calculating thickness of spacers to be fitted

between tie rod mountings and chassis side
members (with the exception of vehicles
equipped with 5-mm thick chassis or with
transverse leaf-spring suspension)
Figure 27
46952
Proceed as follows to install compensating spacers (1).

Dismantle:
- Rh and lh front engine guard (5 and 6).
- Engine oil sump guard (3).
- Rh and lh wheel guard (4 and 7).
46951
Introduction - Rh and lh side engine guard (2 and 8).

The external width of the chassis with reference to tie rod Position spacers (1) of the thickness calculated before, fit
mountings attachment point can vary from vehicle to vehicle mounting (10), screw in screws (11) and lock them to a torque
depending on chassis assembling tolerances and side member of 14.25 kgm (142.5 Nm).
thickness.
Reassemble all previously dismantled guards.
Therefore, width A (864 mm) is considered as an acceptable
reference value on which to base correct wheel geometry. When assembly is completed, check and adjust wheel
The above value results from the sum of chassis internal width geometry as required following directions provided in the
B (854 ± 2 mm) plus thickness D1 - D2 of a 4 mm thick chassis. relevant chapters.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY SUSPENSIONS 1
SUSPENSIONS
SECTION 8
Suspensions
Page
FRONT AND REAR MECHANICAL

SUSPENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
REAR AIR SUSPENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

2 SUSPENSIONS DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY FRONT AND REAR MECHANICAL SUSPENSIONS 3
FRONT AND REAR MECHANICAL SUSPENSIONS
Front and rear

mechanical suspensions
Page
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FRONT MECHANICAL SUSPENSIONS . . . . . . 9
REAR MECHANICAL SUSPENSIONS . . . . . . . . 53
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

4 FRONT AND REAR MECHANICAL SUSPENSIONS DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DIAGNOSTICS
FRONT AND REAR MECHANICAL SUSPENSIONS
Main possible suspension defects
1 - noisy suspension;
2 - the vehicle tends to drift to one side;
3 - excessive suspension flexibility;
4 - excessive suspension stiffness.
1 NOISY SUSPENSION
Insufficient lubrication. Lubricate carefully.

YES
NO
Shock absorbers noisy or inefficient. Check and if necessary replace shock absorbers.
YES
NO
Wheel bearings worn and with excessive backlash. Replace bearings or adjust backlash.
YES
NO
Wishbone spring bushes worn. Detach wishbones and replace bushes.

YES
NO
Wishbone articulated heads worn. Replace wishbone articulated heads.

YES
NO
Tie-rod articulated heads worn Replace tie-rod articulated heads.

YES
(vehicles with torsion bar suspension).
(Continues)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Steering knuckle nuts or fastening ring nuts loose Check and tighten nuts and fastening ring nuts to driving
YES torque.
(vehicles with torsion bar suspension).
NO
Stabilizer bar spring bushes worn. Replace spring bushes.

YES
NO
Stabilizer bar fastening screw nuts loose. Check and tighten to torque.
YES
NO
Suspension fastening nuts and screws loose. Check and tighten suspension fastening nuts and screws
YES to torque.
NO
Torsion bar toothing worn. Detach torsion bars and replace them and adjust
YES pre-loading.
NO
Toothing of torsion bar rear supports or of wishbones Replace rear support or upper wishbones and adjust
worn. YES torsion bar pre-loadings.
NO
Leaf spring supports loose. Check the supports and replace chassis fastening
YES screws or rivets if they are loose.
NO
Leaf spring pack loose for central fastening pin failure. Overhaul leaf springs and replace central pin and its
YES self-locking nut.
(Continues)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Leaf spring pack loose for spring fixing brackets Check leaf spring fixing brackets and replace fastening
fastening rivets failure. YES rivets.
2 THE VEHICLE TENDS TO DRIFT

TO ONE SIDE
Tyre pressure low or incorrect. Check and accurately inflate tyres to the prescribed
YES pressure.
NO
Incorrect front wheel geometry. Check and correct wheel geometry.

YES
NO
Too much front wheel bearing play. Replace the wheel hubs.
YES
NO
Inefficient hydraulic shock absorbers. Remove shock absorbers and replace them.
YES
NO
Torsion bar broken. Replace torsion bar and adjust pre-loading.

YES
NO
Incorrect torsion bar pre-loading adjustment. Check and adjust torsion pre-loading.
YES
NO
Leaf spring broken. Overhaul the leaf spring and replace if necessary.
YES
(Continues)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Incorrect vehicle loading. Check the load and arrange it evenly over the loading
YES area.
3 EXCESSIVE SUSPENSION
FLEXIBILITY
Torsion bars yielded. Replace torsion bars and adjust pre-loading.

YES
NO
Incorrect torsion bar pre-loading adjustment. Check and adjust torsion bar pre-loading.
YES
NO
Shock absorbers inefficient. Check and replace the shock absorbers if necessary.
YES
NO
Leaf spring central pin broken. Replace the component.

YES
NO
Leaf spring leaves yielded or broken. Overhaul the spring and replace the unusable
YES components or, if necessary, the entire spring.
4 EXCESSIVE SUSPENSION STIFFNESS
Incorrect torsion bar pre-loading adjustment. Check and adjust torsion bar pre-loading.
YES
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY FRONT MECHANICAL SUSPENSIONS 9
PRINT 603.43.351/D
Front mechanical suspensions

Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
ARTICULATED QUADRILATERAL SUSPENSION
WITH TRANSVERSE LEAF SPRING . . . . . . . 11
- Front leaf spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
- Front suspension stabilizer bar (axle 5817) . . . 13
- Front shock absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
VEHICLE SUSPENSIONS 29 L - 35 S WITHOUT
SWAY BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
- Shock absorber data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
- Vehicles 29 L - 35 S (without sway bar) . . . . . 16
- Vehicles 29 L - 35 S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
- Vehicles 35 C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
- Vehicles 29 L - 35 S - 35C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
- Check the clearance of upper swinging arm
articulated head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
- Check the clearance of lower swinging arm
OVERHAULING THE SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . 21
- Suspension arms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
- Replacing suspension arm bushings . . . . . . . . . 21
- Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
- Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
STABILIZER BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

10 FRONT MECHANICAL SUSPENSIONS DAILY
Print 603.43.351
Page Page
LEAF SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
TORSION BAR SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 - Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
- Axle 5819 - vehicles 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C . 27 - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 TORSION BAR SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 - Axle 5823 - vehicles 60C - 65C . . . . . . . . . . . 43
- Front shock absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 - Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
- Stabilizer bar diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 - Front shock absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

- Stabilizer bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
- Vehicles 35 C - 40 C - 45 C - 50 C . . . . . . . . 31
EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
- Check the clearance of upper swinging arm
articulated head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 SUSPENSION OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
- Check the clearance of lower swinging arm - Lower tie rod articulated heads replacement . 48
TORSION BARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
OVERHAULING THE SUSPENSION . . . . . . . . . 35
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
TIE RODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
- Rubber bush replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
- Replacing swivel heads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 - Torsion bar preload adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
TORSION BARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
- Replacing silentbloc and limit stops . . . . . . . . . 37
- Replacing link pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
- Adjusting torsion bar pre-load . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
STABILIZER BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

MECHANICAL FRONT SUSPENSIONS

DESCRIPTION
The front suspension has independent wheels of the type:

- with an articulated quadrilateral with a transverse leaf spring for axles 5817 and 5818;
- with longitudinal torsion bars for axle 5819 and 5823.
ARTICULATED QUADRILATERAL SUSPENSION WITH TRANSVERSE LEAF SPRING

(vehicles 29l - 35s - 35c)
The suspension comprises:
- two top triangular suspension arms, composed of a sheet-metal shell, connected by elastic bushings to the crosspiece by pins
articulated to the stub axle;
- two bottom triangular suspension arms, composed of two sheet-metal half-shells welded together, connected by elastic
bushings with metal reinforcement to the crosspiece and pins articulated to the stub axle.
The bottom suspension arms have reaction points for the leaf spring and the bottom mountings of the shock absorbers;
- a single-blade leaf spring, made of composite material for axles 5817 mounted on vehicles 29 L and 35 S, steel for axles 5818
mounted on vehicles 35 C; the spring is kept inside the crosspiece by two top reaction plugs fitted on the ends of the spring
housed in the seats in the bottom suspension arms.
The steel leaf spring, due to the resistance it provides for the rolling movements of the vehicle, makes mounting the front
stabilizer bar superfluous;
- two double-acting hydraulic shock absorbers with integrated limit stops;
- stabilizer bar on vehicles 29 L - 35 S.
Figure 1
62102
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004


Front leaf spring
Models: 29 L - 35 S
Transverse Nº 1
Spring length (mm) 1313.2

Sheet thickness
measured at (mm) A 39.92 ± 0.50
Sheet width
B 56.0 ± 0.5
measured at (mm)
C
81.0 ± 0.5
Figure 2
SECT. A-A
52322
COMPOSITE LEAF SPRING
NEW LEAF SPRING CHECK DATA

29 L 35 S
STATIC LOAD (N) 19865 21040
SAG WITH STATIC LOAD (mm) 71.7 68.4
DYNAMIC LOAD (N) 34270 37005
SAG WITH DYNAMIC LOAD (mm) 123.7 120.4
FLEXIBILITY ± 5%1 (mm/kN) 277 307.0
DISTANCE BETWEEN SUPPORT PLUGS (mm) 540 600
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Front leaf spring
Models: 35 C
Transverse Nº 1
Spring length (mm) 1365 ± 3
Sheet thickness (mm) 20 ± 0.2
Sheet width (mm) 80 ± 0.5
Figure 3
50824
STEEL LEAF SPRING
NEW LEAF SPRING CHECK DATA

LOAD CAMBER FLEXIBILITY
POSITION (mm)
daN kg mm/100 daN mm/100 kg
STATIC LOAD 845.1 861.5 70.25
8 31
8.31 8 15
8.15
DYNAMIC LOAD 1453.3 1481.4 120.8
Front suspension stabilizer bar (axle 5817)
Models: 29 L - 35 C
Stabilizer bar diameter (mm) 18
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Front shock absorbers

Models: 29 L - 35 S - 35 C
Mannesmann - Sachs Arvin Meritor
Distance between centre of eyes:
Open (mm) 405  3
Closed (mm) 320  3
Stroke (mm) 85
TOOLS
99321024 Hydraulic trolley for wheel removal and refitting
99347074 Extractor to take out link pins
99374179 Tool for disassembling and reassembling suspension arm flexible bushings
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

VEHICLE SUSPENSIONS 29 L - 35 S WITHOUT SWAY BAR

(recent production with rebound pad integrated in shock absorbers).
Figure 4
85872
1. Built-in rebound - 2. Reaction pad.
Shock absorber data
Models: 29 L - 35 S
Alvin Meritor
Length between eyebolt centres:
Open (mm) 405  3
Closed (start of damping) (mm)

380  3
Closed (pad squeezed) (mm)

340  3
Stroke (mm)
65
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TIGHTENING TORQUES
Vehicles 29 L - 35 S (without sway bar)
Figure 5
85873
TORQUE
COMPONENT
Nm kgm
1 Screw for nut securing steering gear housing 50 ÷ 61 5 ÷ 6.1
2 M12 screw for nut securing leaf spring mounting to the cross member 100 ÷ 124 10 ÷ 12.4
3 M10 screw for nut securing leaf spring mounting to the cross member 39 ÷ 48 3.9 ÷ 4.8
4 Nut for screw securing shock absorber top and bottom 124 ÷ 152 12.4 ÷ 15.2
5 Screw for nut securing shock absorber mounting to bottom suspension arm 39 ÷ 48 3.9 ÷ 4.8
6 Nut securing bottom suspension arm ball joint to the stub axle 160 ÷ 180 16 ÷ 18
7 Nut securing steering gear housing tie rod ball joint to the stub axle 68 ÷ 83 6.8 ÷ 8.3
9 Nut securing hub to stub axle 256 ÷ 314 25.6 ÷ 31.4
11 Nut securing top suspension arm ball joint to the stub axle 125 ÷ 140 12.5 ÷ 14
12 Nut securing ball joint to the steering gear housing tie rod 70 ÷ 100 7 ÷ 10
- Nut fixing stabilizer bar reaction link rod 35 ÷ 53 3.5 ÷ 5.4
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

PRINT 603.43.351
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Vehicles 29 L - 35 S
Figure 6
SECTION B-B
SECTION D-D
SECTION M-M
SECTION E-E
49353
TORQUE
COMPONENT
Nm kgm
9 Nut securing hub to stub axle 256 ÷ 314 25.6 ÷ 31.4
- Nut fixing stabilizer bar reaction link rod 35 ÷ 53 3.5 ÷ 5.4
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TIGHTENING TORQUES
Vehicles 35 C
Figure 7
SECTION B-B
SECTION D-D
SECTION M-M
SECTION E-E
49351
TORQUE
COMPONENT
Nm kgm
8 Nut securing wheel 284 ÷ 342 28.4 ÷ 34.2
9 Screw securing cover and brake disc to wheel hub 98.1 ÷ 107.9 9.8 ÷ 10.7
10 Screw retaining ring nut securing hub to stub axle 20 ÷ 24 2 ÷ 2.4
11 Ghiera fissaggio mozzo al fuso snodo 257 ÷ 314 25.7 ÷ 31.4
12 Stud to brake disc (apply LOCTITE 242 or 270 sealant to the thread) 85 ÷ 104 8.5 ÷ 10.4
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TIGHTENING TORQUES
Vehicles 29 L - 35 S - 35C
Figure 8
SECTION H-H SECTION N-N
7
3
4 5
SECTION L-L SECTION F-F SECTION G-G
49352
TORQUE
COMPONENT
Nm kgm
Screw for nut securing suspension arm to the top cross member and bottom to 170 ÷ 280 17 ÷ 28
1-2
the cross member
3 Screw securing disc guard to the axle stub 6 ÷ 7.5 0.6 ÷ 0.7
4 Nut for screw securing cross member to chassis frame 83 ÷ 101 8.3 ÷ 10.1
5 Nut for screw securing cross member to chassis frame 83 ÷ 101 8.4 ÷ 10.1
6 Screw securing caliper mounting to the axle stub 170 ÷ 196 17.0 ÷ 19.6
7 M14 screw securing covers to the cross member 151 ÷ 184 15.1 ÷ 18.4
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

REPAIRS
Check the clearance of upper swinging arm Figure 11
articulated head
Figure 9
88673
By suitable lever (3) resting on articulated spindle (4), lift

swinging arm (2) as much as possible and reset comparator
88671
(1).
Adjust vehicle on flat ground and lock rear wheels.
Unloosen rear wheels securing nuts.
By a hydraulic jack, lift the vehicle on front side and rest it on
two supporting stands.
Unscrew wheels securing nuts and detach wheels again by In operation, take care not to damage the protection
hydraulic truck 99321024. ! cowling of articulated head .
Check that protection cowlings (1 and 2) of articulated heads
are not damaged.
Figure 10 Figure 12
88674
88672
By suitable pliers (2) applied on articulated head (1) and on
articulated spindle (4), apply strong pressure on head and
Apply the magnetic base of comparator 99395684 (1) to spindle and check comparator (3) hand displacement
brake disk (4) and position comparator tracer point on the corresponding to articulated head clearance.
top of the articulated head (2) of upper swinging arm (3). If detected value is between 1.5 and 2.0 mm, the swinging arm
Pre-load comparator by approximately 4 mm. needs to be replaced, as described in relating chapter.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Check the clearance of lower swinging arm

articulated head Figure 15
Figure 13
61665
Take out the nut (6) and remove the shock absorber (5) from
the mounting (8) of the bottom suspension arm, extracting
the screw (7).
88692 Take out the nuts (2), extract the screws (3) and remove the
bottom suspension arm (4) from the mountings of the cross
The check of the clearance of the articulated head (2) of
member (1).
lower swinging arm (1) is similar to the one of upper swinging
arm.
If detected value is between 1.5 and 2.0 mm, the swinging arm
needs to be replaced, as described in relating chapter.
500760 OVERHAULING THE SUSPEN- Replacing suspension arm bushings

SION Disassembly
Suspension arms
Removal
Figure 14 Figure 16
52325
61664
Remove the stub axle as described under the relevant If there is damage to the caps (3) protecting the link
heading (operation 520611 including removal of the wheel ! pins (2) or if these have too much play, replace the
hubs operation 520620). suspension arm (1).
Take out the nuts (2), extract the screws (3) and remove the
top suspension arm (4) from the mountings of the cross
member (1). Using general tools, extract the flexible bushings (4) from the
suspension arms (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Assembly
Figure 19
NOTE The flexible bushings of the bottom suspension arms

are equipped with metal reinforcement.
Figure 17
52328
Insert the spacer (2) into the bushing (1).

Apply the parts (3 - 4 - 5) of the tool 99374179, as shown
in the figure.
Screw on the nut (5) to fully insert the spacer (2) into the
flexible bushings (1).
52326
Insert the bushing (2) into the suspension arm (1).

Apply the parts (3 - 4 - 5 - 6) of the tool 99374179, as shown
in the figure.
Screw on the nut (6) to make the bushing (2) flush with the
suspension arm (1).
Remove the parts of tool 99374179.
Refitting
Figure 18 Figure 20
52327 74994
Insert the bushing (7) into the suspension arm (1). To refit the bottom (5) and top (1) suspension arms to the
Apply the parts (2 - 3 - 5 - 6) of the tool 99374179, as shown crosspiece (2), reverse the steps described for removal
in the figure. tightening the nuts (6 - 3) for the fixing screws (4 - 7) to the
prescribed torque.
Screw on the nut (6) to make the bushing (7) flush with the
suspension arm (1).
Remove the parts of tool 99374179. Self-locking nuts, once removed, must be replaced
! with new ones.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

528030 STABILIZER BAR 500910 FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS

Removal Removal
Figure 21 Figure 22
74995 74996
FRONT STABILIZER BAR FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER

VEHICLES 29 L - 35S VEHICLES 29 L - 35S
Unscrew the nuts (3) fixing the link rods to the stabilizer bar Set the vehicle on level ground. Lock the rear wheels with a
(1), scotch, remove the wheel rim guards and loosen the screws
Unscrew the screws (4) fixing the stabilizer bar (1). or nuts fixing the wheel.
If necessary, unscrew the fixing nuts and remove the reaction Lift the front of the vehicle and rest the chassis frame on sup-
link rods (2). ports.
Take out the screws or nuts fixing the wheel and remove
them with tool 99321024.
Check that the bushings and/or elastic elements are Unscrew the top and bottom bolts (2) and remove the shock
not worn or deteriorated; if they are, replace the rel- absorbers (1) from the vehicle.
evant part.
Check that the bushings and/or elastic elements are

not worn or deteriorated; if they are, replace the rel-
evant part.
Refitting
For refitting, carry out the removal operations in re-
verse order and keep to the required tightening tor-
ques. Check the efficiency of the shock absorbers with a suitable
instrument.
Refitting
For refitting, carry out the removal operations in re-
verse order and keep to the required tightening tor-
ques.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

PRINT 603.43.351
LEAF SPRING Figure 23

Removal
Set the vehicle on level ground.
Lock the rear wheels with chocks. Take off the wheel rim
guards and loosen the screws or nuts securing the wheel.
stands.
Take out the screws or nuts securing the wheel with tool
99321024.
On the right-hand side:
- using a hydraulic jack, slightly lift the stub axle so as to
limit the load of the leaf spring;
- disconnect the electrical connection (1) for indicating
brake lining wear;
- disconnect the ABS speed sensor (4) (if there is one);
- take out the screws (2) securing the brake caliper to
the axle stub and remove it. Remove the brake linings
from the brake caliper (3) and support this adequately
to prevent strain on the brake pipes;
Check the state of the brake linings and brake disc

! as described in the BRAKES section.
- take out the nut locking the link pin of the tie rod (20)
and, with tool 99347074 (19), remove the link pin (20)
of the steering tie rod from the stub axle;
- take out the nut (21) and, with tool 99347074 (19),
remove the link pin (22) of the top suspension arm
from the stub axle;
- take out the nuts (16) and screws (18) securing the
shock absorber mounting (15) to the bottom
suspension arm;
- lower the hydraulic jack;
Repeat the similar operations on the left-hand side;
- take out the nuts (6 and 5) and screws (10 and 11) and
remove the covers (8, 9 and 12) from the cross
member (7).
Note the assembly position of the bottom flexible

! plugs (13) on the cover (8).
Remove the leaf spring (17).
Note the assembly position of the top flexible plugs

! (14) in the cross member (7).
For axle 5817 (vehicles 29L - 35S), remove nut (24)

! and disconnect crankpin (25) from stabiliser bar (23).
61662
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Refitting Figure 24
Carry out the operations described for removal in reverse

order, but you must take the following precautions:
- fit the top flexible plugs (2) in the cross member (1) at
the position found during disassembly;
- fit the flexible plugs (4) onto the ends of the new leaf
spring (3);
- fit the leaf spring (3) into the cross member and
support it with a hydraulic lift;
- with two lifts arranged under the stub axles, lift them
together, checking that the flexible plugs (4) of the leaf
spring (3) get correctly positioned in the honeycomb
of the bottom suspension arms (5 and 8) and the
centre line (⇒) of the leaf spring is aligned with the
central holes (⇒) della traversa (1), of the cross
member (1), max. error ±2 mm;
- then complete refitting by tightening the screws or
nuts to the required torque;
- position the bottom flexible plugs (6) on the cover (7)
at the position found during disassembly;
- mount the cover (7) and tighten the screws and nuts
to the required torque.
The nylon self-locking nuts must be replaced with

! new ones every time they are taken down.
NOTE To block rotation of the pins of the swivel heads

(9 - 10), insert a suitable Allen wrench into the
hexagon sunk in it.
For axle 5817 tighten the nut (24) (Figure 23) fixing
! the link rod to a torque of 44 ± 9 Nm.
61663
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
TORSION BAR SUSPENSION

(Axle 5819 - vehicles 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C)
Description The hydraulic shock absorbers are the double-acting
telescopic type.
The torsion bar suspension is composed of:
The side tie rods are mounted at the front to the chassis
- two bottom suspension arms.
frame mounting by means of adjustable link pins, and at the
- two top suspension arms; rear to the transverse levers.
- two longitudinal torsion bars; The purpose of the stabilizer bar, mounted on the bottom
reaction screw stays, is to maintain the parallelism between
- two hydraulic shock absorbers;
the axis of the wheels and the chassis frame, cancelling any
- two bottom reaction tie rods; load unbalance on the wheels mounted on the same axle.
- two top reaction tie rods; The purpose of the rubber pads fixed on the top mounting
of the shock absorbers is to limit the upward movement of
- a stabilizer bar; the suspension.
- two rubber pads.
The longitudinal torsion bars are anchored at the front to the
top suspension arms and at the rear to a mounting secured
to the chassis frame.
Figure 25
ASSEMBLY DRAWING OF FRONT TORSION BAR SUSPENSION
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Torsion bar suspension with independent wheels, stabilizer bar Models

and hydraulic shock absorbers 35 C 40 C 45 C 50 C
Torsion bar diameter mm 29
378 ± 0.15 mm
Top tie rod adjustment distance
220.4 ± 0.15 mm
364.5 ± 0.15 mm
Bottom tie rod adjustment distance
300.4 ± 0.15 mm
Models: 35 C - 40 C - 45 C - 50 C
Mannesmann - Sachs Arvin Meritor
Open mm 430  3 444  3 mm
Closed mm 280  3 286  3 mm
Stroke mm 150 158 mm
Stabilizer bar diameter
Models: 35 C - 40 C - 45 C - 50 C
Stabilizer bar diameter mm 16 20
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99321024 Hydraulic trolley for wheel removal - refitting
99347060 Extractor to take out tie rod link pins
99347074 Extractor to take out steering tie rod link pins and suspension arms
99357144 Wrench for ring nut securing link pins
Tool for disassembling and reassembling front suspension flexible

99374241 bushings
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

PRINT 603.43.351
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Vehicles 35 C - 40 C - 45 C - 50 C
Figure 26
62103
TORQUE TORQUE
DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
Nm kgm Nm kgm
1 Nut, reaction rod mounting upper fastening to chassis fixing screw 126 ÷ 154 12.8 ÷ 15.7 13 Ring nut, ball joint to upper/lower arms 83 ÷ 152 8.5 ÷ 15.5
2 Nut, reaction rod ball joint to mounting 98 ÷ 137 10 ÷ 14 14 Nut, ball joint to steering knuckle 157 ÷ 177 16 ÷ 18
3 Nut, reaction rod and knckle joint stiffener to chassis fixing screw 33 ÷ 49 3.4 ÷ 5.0 15 Nut, fixing will 335 ÷ 410 34 ÷ 41.8
4 Nut for screw fixing cross member to reaction rod support 126 ÷ 154 12.8 ÷ 15.7 16 Nut fixing steering box rod ball joint to stub axle lever 68 ÷ 83 6.8 ÷ 8.3
5 Nut, ball joint to upper tie rod 98 ÷ 137 10 ÷ 14 17 Hexagonal-head slotted nut, torsion bar to supension arm 84 ÷ 103 8.5÷10.5
6 Nut, upper tie rod to upper arm fastening screw 150 ÷ 183 15.3 ÷ 18.7 18 Nut, cross member upper fastening to bracket on chassis side member upper wing fixing 47 ÷ 58 4.8 ÷ 5.9
7 Nut, shock absorber upper and lower fastening screw 116 ÷ 142 11.8 ÷ 14.5 screw
8 Nut, lower bracket fastening screw suspension adjustment unit 151 ÷ 184 15.4 ÷ 18.8 19 Nut, cross member upper anchoring bracket to chassis side member upper wing fixing screw 18 ÷ 22 1.8 ÷ 2.2
9 Nut, torsion bar adjusting lever pin 254 ÷ 311 25.9 ÷ 31.7 20 Nut, upper and intermediate bracket fastening screw (suspension adjustment unit) 94 ÷ 115 9.6 ÷ 11.7
10 Nut, cross member to chassis side member lower wing fixing screw 72 ÷ 88 7.3 ÷ 9 - Screw for nut fixing front tubular cross member to side members 42 ÷ 51 4.2 ÷ 5.2
11 Nut for steering box fixing screw 50 ÷ 61 5 ÷ 6.1 - Nut, stabilizer bar clamps fixing screw 18 ÷ 22 1.8 ÷ 2.2
12 Nut, lower arms to cross member anchoring screw 206 ÷ 252 21.0 ÷ 25.7 - Rubber plug nut 68 ÷ 83 6.9 ÷ 8.5
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

REPAIRS
Check the clearance of upper swinging arm Figure 29
articulated head
Figure 27
88677
Remove screw (3) and detach tie rod (2) from lower
88675 swinging arm (1).
Adjust vehicle on flat ground and lock rear wheels.
Unloosen rear wheels securing nuts. Figure 30
By a hydraulic jack, lift the vehicle on front side and rest it on
two supporting stands.
Unscrew wheels securing nuts and detach wheels again by
hydraulic truck 99321024.
Check that protection cowlings (1) of articulated heads are
not damaged.
Figure 28
88678
By suitable jack (2), positioned under wheel hub (1), load

suspension.
Figure 31
88676
Remove nut (5) and dismount shock absorber (1) from lower
swinging arm (2).
Unloosen nut (4) for the screw to secure lower swinging arm
(2) to cross member (3).
88679
Apply the magnetic base of comparator 99395684 (1) to

brake disk (2) and position comparator tracer point on the
top of the articulated head (4) of upper swinging arm (3).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 32 Figure 34
88680 88682
Pre-load comparator (1) by approximately 4 mm and reset By suitable pliers (2) applied on articulated head (3) and on
it by suitable lever (4), lift upper swinging arm (3) as much lower swinging arm (1), apply strong pressure on head and
as possible and detect the displacement of comparator (1) arm and write down comparator (4) hand displacement
hand corresponding to the clearance of articulated head (2). corresponding to articulated head clearance.
If detected value is between 1.5 and 2.0 mm, the articulated If detected value is between 1.5 and 2.0 mm, the swinging arm
head (2) needs to be replaced, as described in relating needs to be replaced, as described in relating chapter.
chapter. Remount dismounted parts in order to make checks.
See Figure 29: the nut for screw (3) to secure tie rod
! (2) to lower swinging arm (1) and see Figure 28: the
nut (4) for the screw to secure lower swinging arm
(2) to cross member (3): they must be tightened at
prescribed torque with the vehicle lowered and
vehicle empty weight weighing down on suspension.
Check the clearance of lower swinging arm

articulated head
Figure 33
88681
Position comparator (1) tracer point with magnetic base

99395684 on the top of the articulated head of lower
swinging arm (2).
By suitable lever, lower swinging arm (2) and reset
comparator (1).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

PRINT 603.43.351
500760 OVERHAULING THE SUSPENSION

Figure 37
TIE RODS
Removal
Figure 35
75360
Take out the nut (3) for the screw (4) securing the tie rod
(1) to the top suspension arm (2) and remove the screw (4)
from this. Take out the nut securing the link pin (5) to the
44664 mounting (7). Using the extractor 99347074 (6), remove the
Remove the stabilizer bar as described under the relevant swivel head (5) from the mounting (7). Remove the screw
heading (operation 528030). stay (1) from the vehicle.
Take out the nut for the screw (2) securing the tie rod (3) If removing the mounting (7), so as not to change the
to the bottom suspension arm (1) and remove the screw (2) ! wheel geometry, not the number and thickness of
from this. the spacers (if there are any) under the mounting to
Take out the nut securing the link pin (5) to the mounting (4). mount them in the same way when refitting the
Using the extractor 99347060, remove the swivel head (5) mounting (7).
from the mounting (4).
500764 Replacing swivel heads
Figure 38
220 ± 0.5
2
378 ± 0.8
44666
Loosen the nut (2) and unscrew the swivel head (1) from the
top tie rod (3).
Screw the new swivel head (1) onto the tie rod (3)
Figure 36 positioning it at the values shown in the figure.
Figure 39
1
300.4 ± 0,.6
3
364.5 ± 0.7
19056
75359 Loosen the nut (2) and unscrew the swivel head (1) from the
bottom tie rod (3).
Using the extractor 99347060 (1), detach the stub axle (2) Screw the new swivel head (1) onto the tie rod (3)
from the mounting (4) Figure 25. positioning it at the values shown in the figure.
Remove the screw stay (3) from the vehicle. Tighten the nut (2) to the prescribed torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

500666 TORSION BARS

Refitting Removal
Figure 40 Remove the lower and upper tie-rods as described in the
relevant paragraph (operation 500761) and go on as follows:
Figure 42
44668
Refit the top tie rod (5) to the top suspension arm (3) and 44935
to the mounting (6). Remove the nut which fastens the articulated head (2) of the
Tighten the nut securing the link pin (1) to the required gearbox tie-rod to the steering knuckle; with the puller No.
torque. 99347074 (1) remove the articulated head (2).
Figure 43
The nut (4) for the screw securing the tie rod (5) to
! the lever (3) must be tightened when the load of the
empty vehicle weighs on the suspension.
Figure 41
74997
Loosen the nut (2) and unscrew the threaded pin (1) until
the torsion bar (3) is fully ”unloaded”.
Take out the nuts (4) for the screws securing the mounting
(5) to the chassis frame.
Remove the mounting (5) from the torsion bar (3).
Figure 44
44664
Refit the bottom tie rod (3) to the bottom suspension arm
(1) and to the mounting (4).
Tighten the nut securing the link pin (5) to the required
torque.
The nut (2) for the screw securing the tie rod (3) to
! the bottom lever must be tightened when the load
of the empty vehicle weighs on the suspension.
Re-fit the stabilizer bar. 44671

Remove the nuts securing the link pins (1) from the top (4)
and bottom (6) suspension arms to the stub axle (5).
At the end of the re-fitting check the wheels Support in an appropriate way the steering knuckle (5)
! geometry as described in the relevant paragraph. together with brake caliper and wheel hub and with the tool
Then tighten the nuts, which fasten the articulated No. 99347074 (2) remove the steering knuckle (5) from the
head to the relevant tie-rods, to the prescribed levers (4 and 6).
torque. Place the steering knuckle (5) on a support without straining
the brake fluid hose and the electrical wires.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 45 Replacing link pins

Figure 48
1
2
44672
19061
Take out the nut (5), remove the screw (4) and recover the Straighten the safety lock (1) of the ring nut (2).
two washers.
Disconnect the bottom suspension arm (3) from the cross
member (1) extracting the bushing (2). Figure 49
Figure 46
4
5
1 6
1
2
2
19602
44673
Using tool 99357144 (1) loosen the ring nut and extract the
Remove the split pin (6), the nut (5) and the washer (4). link pin (2) from the suspension arm.
Disconnect the top suspension arm (2) from the cross
member (3) extracting the torsion bar (1).
Replacing silentbloc and limit stops Figure 50
Figure 47
19603
19045
Mount the new link pin (4) on the top and bottom
Silentbloc is replaced using tool 99374241 (1); the limit stops suspension arm (1).
(2) are replaced with general tools.
Loosen the ring nut (3) with its safety lock (2).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 51 Figure 54
52370
19604
Position the top suspension arm (2) in the cross member.
With the tool No. 99357144 (1) fasten the ring nut (3,
Then insert the torsion bar (1), with the washer (3), in the
Figure 50) to the prescribed torque.
cross member and in the suspension arm.
Figure 52
Figure 55
2
1
19605
Bend a tongue of the safety lock (1) in the slot of the ring nut
(2).
44674
Place the washer (1) and screw the nut (2) without tightening
Refitting it.
Figure 53
1 Figure 56
1
2
19046
The letters AD - AS, printed in the back of torsion

! bars, indicate respectively the right bar and the left 19052
one.
Moreover the splined part has a double tooth (1) which, at Position the bottom suspension arm in the cross member
the reassembly, must correspond to the double spline (2) of and insert the bushing (1).
the upper lever. Insert the screw with its washers and screw the nut without
tightening it.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 57 Figure 60
44675
Connect the stub axle (3) to the link pins of the top (1) and 44697
bottom (4) suspension arms. Tighten the fixing nuts (2) to
the required torque. Fit the stabilizer bar (1) back onto the bottom screw stays (2)
with the clamps (3), taking care that the screws (4) go into
Figure 58 the slots in the stabilizer bar.
Complete fitting the suspension back on by mounting the
shock absorber.
74998
Lubricate the grooved portion of the torsion bar (3).
Assemble the torsion bar (3) and the support (1) so that the
splines (2) of the toothed bush and of the torsion bar coincide.
Fix the support (1) to the chassis tightening the fastening
screw nuts to the prescribed torque.
Figure 61
Figure 59
7768
Refit the wheels, mount the nut guard and screw on the fixing
nuts; lower the vehicle, removing the stands..
Following the order shown in the figure, tighten the fixing
nuts to the required torque.
44676
Then tighten the torsion bar fixing nuts to the required
Refit the tie rods (4 and 7) to the suspension arms (1 and 6) torque and mount the safety split pins on them.
without tightening the nuts for the screws (3 and 5) to their
torque; connect the link pin (2) of the steering gear housing Tighten the nuts for the screws securing the top and bottom
tie rod to the lever of the stub axle and tighten the nut to the tie rods to their respective levers to the required torque.
required torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Adjusting torsion bar pre-load

Figure 62 Figure 63
20986
74999
TORSION BAR PRE-LOADING CONTROL DIAGRAM If the value is different, act on the adjusting screw (1) as much
H = mm, distance from ground of the side frame upper as you need it, but remember that, before acting on the
thread, measured as near as possible the suspension screw, it is necessary, to lift the vehicle with the hydraulic jack,
connecting area so that the wheels are lifted from the ground. This is
RSC = mm, loaded wheel radius necessary if you do not want to damage the screw.
Ensure that the wheel pressure complies with the prescribed Once the vehicle has reached the right position, lock the
one and check, with the suitable gauge, that the thread depth screw with the lock nut (2).
of tyres is more or less the same on both wheels.
Measure on both sides of the vehicle, the distance from
ground (H) of the side frame upper thread, measured as near
as possible the suspension connecting area.
The height H must correspond to the value given in the table
below.
HEIGHT OFF GROUND (H in millimetres) OF THE TOP EDGE OF THE CHASSIS FRAME IN RELATION TO THE
WEIGHT FOR MODELS 35C/40C/45C/50C WITH TORSION BAR DIAMETER 29 mm.
Tyres
Weight on the front wheels
(Kg)
195/75 R 16 6. 50 R 16
1200 610 629
1220 608 627
1240 606 625
1260 604 623
1280 603 622
1300 601 620
1320 599 618
1340 597 616
1360 596 615
1380 594 613
1400 592 611
1450 588 607
1500 584 602
1550 579 598
1600 575 593
1650 571 589
1700 566 585
1750 562 580
1800 558 576
1850 553 571
1900 549 567
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

528030 STABILIZER BAR 500910 FRONT SHOCK ABSORBERS

Removal Removal
Figure 64 Figure 65
75001
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER

Vehicles 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C
Set the vehicle on level ground.
75000
FRONT STABILISER BAR supports.
Vehicles 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C Take out the screws or nuts fixing the wheel and remove
them with tool 99321024.
Unscrew the screws (2) fixing the half-brackets (3) and Unscrew the top and bottom bolts (2), then remove the
remove the stabilizer bar (1) from the vehicle, recovering the shock absorbers (1) from the vehicle.
rubber plugs (4).
Check that the bushings and/or elastic elements are Check that the bushings and/or elastic elements are
not worn or deteriorated; if they are, replace the not worn or deteriorated; if they are, replace the
relevant part. relevant part.
Refitting Using a suitable instrument, check the efficiency of the shock

absorbers.
To fit it back on, perform the steps carried out for
removal in reverse order, keeping to the prescribed Refitting
tightening torques.
To fit it back on, perform the steps carried out for
removal in reverse order, keeping to the prescribed
tightening torques.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

PRINT 603.43.351
TORSION BAR SUSPENSION

(Axle 5823 - vehicles 60C - 65C)
Description The hydraulic shock absorbers are the double-acting
telescopic type.
The torsion bar suspension is composed of:
The side tie rods are mounted at the front to the chassis
- two bottom suspension arms;
frame mounting by means of adjustable link pins, and at the
- two top suspension arms; rear to the transverse levers.
- two longitudinal torsion bars; The purpose of the stabilizer bar, mounted on the bottom
reaction screw stays, is to maintain the parallelism between
- two hydraulic shock absorbers;
the axis of the wheels and the chassis frame, cancelling any
- two bottom reaction tie rods; load unbalance on the wheels mounted on the same axle.
- two top reaction tie rods; The purpose of the rubber pads fixed on the top mounting
of the shock absorbers is to limit the upward movement of
- a stabilizer bar; the suspension.
- two rubber pads.
The longitudinal torsion bars are anchored at the front to the
top suspension arms and at the rear to a mounting secured
to the chassis frame.
Figure 66
ASSEMBLY DRAWING OF FRONT TORSION BAR SUSPENSION
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

PRINT 603.43.351/D
Torsion bar suspension with independent wheels, stabilizer bar Models

and hydraulic shock absorbers 60 C - 65 C
Torsion bar diameter mm 33
378 ± 0.8 mm
Top tie rod adjustment distance
220 ± 0.5 mm
369 ± 0.5 mm
Bottom tie rod adjustment distance
300.4 ± 0.5 mm
363.5 ± 0.5 mm
Lower linkage adjustment (for recently manufactured vehicles)
299 ± +0.3
0 mm
377 ± 0.15 mm
219 ± 0.15 mm
Models: 60 C - 65 C
Mannesmann - Sachs ARVIN
Open mm 430  3 400  3
Closed mm 280  3 280  3
Stroke mm 150 120
Stabilizer bar
60 C - 65 C
Models: Truck Cut Chassis
Twin cab Vans Semi-Glazed
Chassis Cabs Away Cowls
Stabilizer bar diameter mm 20 22
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

PRINT 603.43.351
TIGHTENING TORQUES
Figure 67
62103
TORQUE TORQUE
DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
Nm kgm Nm kgm
1
Nut, reaction rod mounting upper fastening to 13 Ring nut, ball joint to upper/lower arms 83 ÷ 152 8.5 ÷ 15.5
140 14
chassis fixing screw 14 Nut, ball joint to steering knuckle 157 ÷ 177 16 ÷ 18
2 Nut, reaction rod ball joint to mounting 98 ÷ 137 10 ÷ 14 15 Nut, fixing will 284.5 ÷ 343.3 28.4 ÷ 34.3
3 Nut, reaction rod and knckle joint stiffener to chassis fixing screw 41 4.1 16 Nut fixing steering box rod ball joint to stub axle lever 83 ÷ 68 8.4 ÷ 6.9
4 Nut for screw fixing cross member to reaction rod support 140 14 17 Hexagonal-head slotted nut, torsion bar to supension arm 84 ÷ 103 8.6÷10.5
5 Nut, ball joint to upper tie rod 98 ÷ 137 10 ÷ 14 18 Nut, cross member upper fastening to bracket on chassis side member upper wing fixing
52.5 5.2
6 Nut, upper tie rod to upper arm fastening screw 150 ÷ 183 15.3 ÷ 18.7 screw
7 Nut, shock absorber upper and lower fastening screw 116 ÷ 142 11.8 ÷ 14.5 19 Nut, cross member upper anchoring bracket to chassis side member upper wing fixing screw 20 2
8 Nut, lower bracket fastening screw suspension adjustment unit 151 ÷ 184 15.4 ÷ 18.8 20 Nut, upper and intermediate bracket fastening screw (suspension adjustment unit) 104 10.4
9 Nut, torsion bar adjusting lever pin 197 ÷ 241 20 ÷ 24 - Screw for nut fixing front tubular cross member to side members 42 ÷ 51 4.2 ÷ 5.2
10 Nut, cross member to chassis side member lower wing fixing screw 80 8 - Nut, stabilizer bar clamps fixing screw 24.5 2.4
11 Nut for steering box fixing screw 50 ÷ 61 5.1 ÷ 6.2 - Rubber plug nut 68 ÷ 83 6.9 ÷ 8.5
12 Nut, lower arms to cross member anchoring screw 206 ÷ 252 21.0 ÷ 25.7
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

PRINT 603.43.351
EQUIPMENT
99347027 Tool for removing front suspension rubber bushes
99347060 Extractor to take out link pins
99347074 Extractor to take out link pins and suspension arms
99357144 Tool for link pins fixing screw
99374166 Tool for refitting front suspension rubber bushes
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

REPAIR OPERATIONS
500760 SUSPENSION OVERHAUL Figure 70
NOTE It differs from suspension overhaul with torsion bars

for vehicles: 35C, 40C, 45C, 50C for the following
points.
500764 Lower tie rod articulated heads

replacement
Figure 68
61984
Loosen the nut (3) and loosen the threaded pin (2) until the
torsion bar (1) is completely ”released”.
NOTE Take note of the number of pin (2) threads above

nut (3); these data shall provide the starting point to
adjust the torsion bar after assembling..
NOTE For left torsion bar disconnect the fuel tank.

62926
Loosen the nut (2) and unscrew the articulated head (1)
from the upper tie rod (3).
Screw the new articulated head (1) on the tie rod (3).
Position it according to the values show in the above figure.
Figure 71
500666 TORSION BARS
Removal
Figure 69
62925
Remove the nut (2), withdraw the screw (3) and disconnect
the shock absorber (4) from the upper support (1).
Remove the nut (7) fastening the articulated head (6) from
the upper lever (5) to stub axle (8).
62924
Suitably support the stub axle (8) including the brake calliper
Remove the nut fastening the steering box tie rod kingpin (4) and the wheel hub and using tool 99347074 remove the
from stub axle lever; use puller 99347074 (2) to remove the lever (5) from the stub axle (8).
kingpin (4). Rest the stub axle (8) on a proper stand to prevent brake fluid
Remove suspension lever (1) upper tie rod (3). pipes and electric cables tensioning.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 72 Rubber bush replacement

Removal
Figure 75
62931
Remove the circlip (1) from the sleeve (2) and remove it.
62929
Apply tool 99347027 (5) as shown in the figure.

Figure 73
Hold the screw (6), tighten the nut (4) and remove the
rubber bushes (3 and 7) from the cross member (1).
NOTE The rubber stop plug (2) is pressure-fitted to cross

member (1) and no tool is required for its
replacement.
Refitting
62927
Figure 76
Remove the lock nut (6), the nut (7) and withdraw the
washer (5).
Remove the torsion bar (2) with the washer (1) from the
upper lever (3) and remove it from the bracket (4).
Figure 74
62930
Position rubber bushes (2-5) in cross member (1).

Apply tool 99374166 (4) to bushes (2-5) as shown in the
figure.
62928 Hold the screw (6) and tighten the nut (3) until fitting in place
Remove the torsion bar (2) including the circlip (3) and the the rubber bushes (2-5).
washer (4) from the adjustment lever (5) and remove it from
the bracket (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 77 Figure 80
62928
Set the adjustment lever (5) in the bracket (1) and insert the
torsion bar (2) including the washer (4) and the circlip (3). 44674
Set the washer (1) and screw the nut (2) without locking it.
Figure 78
Figure 81
3
19046
The rear part of the torsion bars is marked with

! AD-AS to identify respectively the right bar and the
left bar.
44675
The splined part is provided with a double tooth (1), that shall
coincide at refitting with the double space (2) of the upper Connect the stub axle (3) to the upper lever (1) ball joint;
lever. tighten the fastening nut (2) to the specified torque.
Figure 79 Figure 82
52370 62931
Set the upper lever (2) in the cross member, then insert the Fit the sleeve (3) on the torsion bar (1) and in the adjustment
torsion bar (1), including the washer (3), into cross member lever (2) so that the marks on these components coincide as
and lever, making the double tooth coinciding with the shown in the following figure.
double space of the lever.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 83
62934
AD. Right torsion bar AS. Left torsion bar
1. Bracket - 2. Adjustment lever - 3. Sleeve - 4. Torsion bar - 5. Washer - 6. Circlip - A. Front reference mark on sleeve (3)
- B. Front reference mark on adjustment lever (2) - C. Rear reference mark on sleeve (3) - D. Reference mark on torsion
bar (4) - E. Reference mark on left torsion bar - F. Reference mark on right torsion bar.
After refitting torsion bar (4)/ sleeve (3)/ adjustment lever (2), secure the sleeve (3) to the bracket with the circlip (6). Refit
the fuel tank (if removed).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 84 Check whether tyre pressure is the specified one and then
using the proper gauge, check whether tyre tread depth is
almost the same on both wheels.
Measure on both vehicle sides the height (H) from ground
of side member upper edge - measured as close as possible
to suspension connection area
Height (H) shall correspond to the value specified in the
following table.
Figure 86
62935
Refit the tie rod (6) to the lever (3) without tightening to
torque the nut for screw (7); connect the articulated head
(4) of the steering box tie rod to the stub axle lever and
tighten the nut to the specified torque.
Connect the shock absorber with the screw (5) and the nut
(1) and tighten the latter to the specified torque.
Refit wheels, fit nut protection and tighten the fastening nuts;
remove stands and lower the vehicle.
Then tighten to the specified torque the following 62936
components:
- wheel fastening nuts;
- nut and lock nut fastening the torsion bars to the If a different value is found, operate on the adjustment screw
relevant levers; (1) as required, taking into account that before performing
- nuts for screws fastening the upper tie rods to the this operation the vehicle shall always be lifted from ground
relevant levers. with hydraulic jack to prevent screw damaging.
Adjust torsion bar preload as described in the following Once proper vehicle setup is obtained, lock the screw with
paragraph. the lock nut (2).
Torsion bar preload adjustment

Figure 85
Load on front Tyres

wheels
(Kg) 225/75 R 16 7.00 R 16
1400 672,0 691,0
1500 665.6 684.6
1700 652.6 671.6
1800 646,0 665,0
1900 639.4 658.4
2100 626.1 645.1
2300 612.8 631.8
2400 606.1 625.1
20986
2500 599.5 618.5
TORSION BAR PRELOAD CHECK DIAGRAM

H = mm, height from ground of side member upper edge
measured as close as possible to suspension connection area
RSC (Loaded radius):
- with 225/75R16 tyres, 345 mm with 2500 kg load
- with 7.00R16 tyres, 364 mm with 2000 kg load
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR MECHANICAL SUSPENSIONS 53
Rear mechanical suspensions

Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
CHARACTERISTICS AND DATA . . . . . . . . . . . 56
- Rear leaf spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
- Rear shock absorbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
- Vehicles 29 L - 35 S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
- Vehicles 35 C - 40 C - 45 C- 50 C . . . . . . . . . 76
- Vehicles 60 C - 65 C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
REAR LEAF SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
- Vehicles: 29 L - 35 S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
- Vehicles: 35 C - 40 C - 45 C - 50 C -
60 C - 65 C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
- Disassembling the leaf spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
- Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
- Assembling the leaf spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
- Replacing the bushings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
REAR SHOCK ABSORBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
STABILIZER BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

54 REAR MECHANICAL SUSPENSIONS DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DESCRIPTION
The rear suspension is composed of: The parabolic leaf spring is formed by leaves which have a
greater thickness in the middle than at the two ends.
- two leaf springs which, according to the vehicle, can be of
a semi-elliptic type with double flexibility or of a parabolic Leaves are spaced by means of shims and this reduces much
type with simple flexibility.; of the internal friction.
- two stop bumpers; The low internal friction and the particular form of the leaves
make the parabolic leaf spring more ”soft”, this makes driving
- two hydraulic double acting shock absorbers; easier.
- stabilizer bar. Hydraulic double-acting telescopic shock absorbers, hinder
The semi-elliptic leaf spring is very stiff because all leaves the wheel movement both upwards and downwards, allowing
forming the leaf spring have the same thickness from one end a great driving stability.
to the other. The stabilizer bar must keep the geometry between the wheel
Moreover, leaves are placed one against the other and this axle and the chassis and arrange the load evenly over the
causes a great internal friction which limits the movements of wheels on the same axle.
the leaf spring.
Figure 87
52371
REAR SUSPENSION
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

CHARACTERISTICS AND DATA

Rear leaf spring
Vehicles: 29 L - 35 S
mm
Parabolic springs No 2
L
Spring length 1500 ± 3
(measured at eye centres)
S
Leaf thickness (measured at centre) 24 (22)*
S Gap between leaves -
Leaf width 80 ± 0.5
L
CONTROL DATA WITH NEW SPRING:
Spring flexibility with static load 8.6 mm/kN
D Main leaf eye inner diameter

40 ± 0.5
(Bush seat)
D = bush outer diameter 40 +0

−0.1
D d
d = bush inner diameter 16.5 +0.2

−0
(*) Alternatively
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Rear leaf spring

Vehicles: 35 C - Camper version
mm
L
S
Leaf thickness (measured at centre) -
S Gap between leaves 15
L
D Main leaf eye inner diameter 40 ± 0.5

(Bush seat)

−0.1
D d

−0
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Rear leaf spring

Vehicles: 35 C
mm
L
S
Leaf thickness (measured at centre) 19
S 3
Gap between leaves
(1 x 3 + 1 x 25)*
L

(Bush seat)

−0.1
D d

−0
(*) For versions with maximum front load = 1900 kg
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Rear leaf spring

Vehicles: 40 C chassis cowls
mm
L
S
L
Main spring flexibility with static load 7.6 mm/kN

(Bush seat)

−0.1
D d

−0
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Rear leaf spring

Vehicles: 40 C
mm
L
S Leaf thickness (measured at the centre) 18

thickness of the auxiliary leaf (measured at the centre) 18
L

40 ± 0.5
(Bush seat)

−0.1
D d

−0
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Rear leaf spring

Vehicles: 45 C
mm
L
S
Leaf thickness (measured at centre) 22 (23)*
L

40 ± 0.5
(Bush seat)

−0.1
D d

−0
(*) Alternatively
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Rear leaf spring

Vehicles: 50 C
mm
L
S
L
Main spring deflection with static load
Auxiliary spring deflection with static load

40 ± 0.5
(Bush seat)

−0.1
D d

−0
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Rear leaf spring

Vehicles: 60 C - 65 C
mm
L
S Thickness of the main leaves (measured at the centre) 18 (19)*

thickness of the auxiliary leaf (measured at the centre) 28
L
Main spring deflection with static load 9.3 mm/kN
Flexibility with static load after aux. spring action 3.4 mm/kN

40 +0.5
−0.2
(Bush seat)
D = bush outer diameter 40 +0.02

−0.07
D d

−0
(*) Alternatively
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Rear leaf spring

Vehicles: 35 C
mm
Semi-elliptical springs No 2
L
(measured at centre of eyes)
Leaf thickness (measured at the centre),

S main leaf (1st - 4th) 9
auxiliary leaf (1st - 2nd) 15
S Gap between leaves --
L

(Bush seat)

−0.1
D d

−0
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Rear leaf spring

mm
L

S main leaf (1st - 4th) 9
auxiliary leaf (1st - 3rd) 15
L

(Bush seat)

−0.1
D d

−0
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Rear leaf spring

Vehicles: 45 C - 50 C (semi-elliptical with leaf spring)
mm
L

S master leaf (1st - 7th) 9
additional leaf (1st - 6th) 8
L
Main spring flexibility with static load 15 mm/kN

(Bush seat)

−0.1
D d

−0
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Rear leaf spring

Vehicles: 45 C
mm
L

additional leaf (5th - 7th) 15
S Gap between leaves -
L

(Bush seat)

−0.1
D d

−0
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Rear leaf spring

mm
L

L

(Bush seat)

−0.1
D d

−0
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Rear leaf spring

Vehicles: 50 C
mm
L

L

(Bush seat)

−0.1
D d

−0
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Rear leaf spring

Vehicles: 50 C
mm
L
S Leaf thickness (measured at the centre)

22 (24)*
master leaf
S Gap between leaves 3 (10)*
L

40 ± 0.5
(Bush seat)

−0.1
D d

−0
(*) Alternatively
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Rear leaf spring

mm
L

additional leaf (1st - 2nd) 22
L

(Bush seat) 40 +0.5
−0.2

−0.07
D d

−0
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Rear leaf spring

mm
L
Spring length 1415

auxiliary leaf thickness (1st - 10th) 7
L

(Bush seat) 40 +0.5
−0.2

−0.07
D d

−0
(*) Alternatively
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Rear shock absorbers
Models: 29 L - 35 S
Arvin Meritor Sachs
Open 475 ± 3 mm 480 ± 3 mm
Closed 302 ± 3 mm 300 ± 3 mm
Stroke 173 mm 180 mm
Models: 35 C - 40 C - 45 C - 50 C
Arvin Meritor Sachs
Open 571 ± 3 mm 565 ± 3 mm
Closed 350 ± 3 mm 345 ± 3 mm
Models: 60 C - 65 C
Arvin Meritor Sachs
Open 564 ± 3 mm 565 ± 3 mm
Closed 347 ± 3 mm 345 ± 3 mm
Rear stabilizer bar
45 C - 50 C
Models: 29 L - 35 S - 35 C - 40 C 45 C - 50 C
Truck 60 C - 65 C
Vans
Chassis Cabs
Stabilizer bar diameter (mm) 18 20 22 28
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TOOLS
99306064 Hydraulic trolley to support leaf spring during removal and refitting
99370617 Bracket for removal - refitting and/or support of rear axle
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TIGHTENING TORQUES
Vehicles 29 L - 35 S
Figure 88
SECTION A-A
SECTION E-E SEEN FROM C
SECTION B-B
SECTION D-D
50813
NOTE The diagram refers to vans with wheelbase 3000 - 3300 mm.
TORQUE
COMPONENT
Nm kgm
1 M16 nut for screw securing front leaf spring 139 ÷ 170 13.9 ÷ 17
2 M10 screw for nut securing stabilizer bar support cap 26.4 ÷ 35.3 2.6 ÷ 3.5
3 M10 nut for screw securing stabilizer bar support 26.4 ÷ 35.3 2.6 ÷ 3.5
4 M16 nut for screw securing top and bottom shock absorber 124 ÷ 152 12.4 ÷ 15.2
5 M16 screw for nut securing rear leaf spring 139 ÷ 170 13.9 ÷ 17
6 M16 screw for nut securing shackle to rear mounting 130 ÷ 170 13 ÷ 17
7 M10 screw for nut securing stabilizer bar anchoring connecting rod to the rear axle 26.4 ÷ 35.3 2.6 ÷ 3.5
8 Nut for screw securing shock absorber top mounting to the chassis frame 47 ÷ 58 4.7 ÷ 5.8
9 M12 nuts for stands securing leaf spring to the rear axle 98 ÷ 120 9.8 ÷ 12
10 M10 nuts for screws securing leaf spring rear mounting 43 ÷ 53 4.3 ÷ 5.3
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TIGHTENING TORQUES
Vehicles 35 C - 40 C - 45 C- 50 C
Figure 89
SECTION A-A SEEN FROM B
50814
TORQUE
COMPONENT
Nm kgm
1 M16 nut for screw securing front leaf spring 139 ÷ 170 13.9 ÷ 17
Nuts for stands securing leaf spring to the rear axle M 14 74.5 ÷ 91.2 7.4 ÷ 9.1
2 M16 113 ÷ 170 11.3 ÷ 17
3 M16 nut for screw securing top and bottom shock absorber 124 ÷ 152 12.4 ÷ 15.2
4 M10 nut for screw securing stabilizer bar support cap 26.4 ÷ 35.3 2.6 ÷ 3.5
5 M10 nut for screw joining stabilizer bar anchoring connecting rods 26.4 ÷ 35.3 2.6 ÷ 3.5
6 M16 screw for nut securing connecting rod to mounting 179.4 ÷ 220.6 17.9 ÷ 22
7 M16 screw for nut securing rear leaf spring 139 ÷ 170 13.9 ÷ 17
8 M16 screw for nut securing shackle to rear mounting 139 ÷ 170 13.9 ÷ 17
9 M10 screw for nut securing connecting rod mounting to the chassis frame 43 ÷ 53 4.3 ÷ 5.3
10 M8 screw for nut securing buffer to the chassis frame 26.4 ÷ 35.3 2.6 ÷ 3.5
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TIGHTENING TORQUES
Vehicles 60C - 65C
Figure 90
62937
TORQUE
COMPONENT
Nm kgm
1 Screw for front leaf spring fastening nut 186 ÷ 152 18.6 ÷ 15.2
2 M16 nut for upper and lower shock absorber fastening screw 92 ÷ 74 9.2 ÷ 7.4
3 Nut for stands fastening leaf spring to rear axle 150 ÷ 190 15.3 ÷ 19.3
4 Nut for screw fastening brackets and spacers to stabilizer bar supporting rod
5 Screw for rear leaf spring fastening nut 186 ÷ 152 18.6 ÷ 15.2
6 Screw for nut fastening connecting rods to support 186 ÷ 152 18.6 ÷ 15.2
7 Nut for screw fastening stabilizer bar spacer and rod to support 109.9 ÷ 137.7 11.2 ÷ 14
8 M10 screw for nut fastening support to chassis 26.4 ÷ 32.3 2.7 ÷ 3.3
9 Screw for nut fastening cross member to chassis 71.7 ÷ 87.7 7.3 ÷ 8.9
10 Nut fastening bumper to chassis 49 ÷ 40 4.9 ÷ 4
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

REAR LEAF SPRING

Figure 91
A
4 2
1 5
3
50972A
REAR SUSPENSION WITH SINGLE-BLADE PARABOLIC LEAF SPRING
Removal Refitting
To re-fit, carry out the removal operations in reverse, taking

Set the vehicle on level ground. Lock the front wheels with the following precautions.
chocks. Loosen the screws securing the rear wheels.
Put the bracket 99370617 on a hydraulic lift, position it under
the rear axle and lift the vehicle. Check the threads of brackets which fasten the leaf
Rest the chassis frame on stands, keeping the bracket in springs to the axle; if they are damaged, re-machine
contact with the rear axle. the threads (operation 500412) or replace the
Take out the nuts securing the wheels with tool 99321024. brackets.
Check the conditions of bumpers (6), if they are damaged,
Take out the nuts (4) and remove the brackets (5) joining the replace them (operation 500417).
leaf springs (2) to the rear axle.
Position the trolley 99306064 under the leaf spring (2) and
fasten this to the trolley support with the brackets.
Take out the nuts and remove the screw (3) securing the leaf Tighten the nuts to the prescribed driving torque.
spring (2) to the front mounting (1). Following the order shown in the figure.
Take out the nut and remove the screw (7) securing the leaf
spring (2) to the shackle (8) of the rear mounting (9). After replacing the leaf springs and the hydraulic shock
Lower the trolley 99306064 and extract the leaf spring. absorbers, it is necessary to check the efficiency of the braking
control and, if necessary, carry out its adjustment (operation
796910. See Braking System Section).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Vehicles: 35 C - 40 C - 45 C - 50 C - 60 C - 65 C
Figure 92
50973
REAR SUSPENSION WITH SEMI-ELLIPTICAL LEAF SPRING

Removal Refitting
Set the vehicle on level ground. Lock the front wheels with To re-fit, carry out the removal operations in reverse, taking
chocks. Loosen the screws securing the rear wheels. the following precautions.
Put the bracket 99370617 on a hydraulic lift, position it under
the rear axle and lift the vehicle rest the chassis frame on
stands, keeping the bracket in contact with the rear axle.
Take out the nuts securing the wheels with tool 99321024. Check the threads of brackets which fasten the leaf
springs to the axle; if they are damaged, re-machine
Take out the nuts (5) and remove the brackets (4) joining the the threads (operation 500412) or replace the
leaf springs (3) to the rear axle. brackets.
Position the trolley 99306064 under the leaf spring and fasten
Check the conditions of bumpers (9), if they are
this to the trolley support with the brackets.
damaged, replace them.
spring (3) to the front mounting (1).
spring (3) to the shackle (7) of the rear mounting (6).
Operating the hydraulic lift, lower the rear axle to be able to
remove the centring setscrew of the leaf spring from it and
extract the leaf spring. Tighten the nuts to the prescribed driving torque.
Following the order shown in the figure.
After replacing the leaf springs and the hydraulic shock

When lowering the rear axle, make sure the brake absorbers, it is necessary to check the efficiency of the braking
control and, if necessary, carry out its adjustment (operation
! system pipes are not put under strain.
796910. See Braking System Section).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

REPAIRS
Disassembling the leaf spring Assembling the leaf spring
Ensure that the leaf contact surfaces are perfectly smooth and
Leaf springs must be disassembled only Figure 93 if it clean.
Before re-assembling the leaves, grease contact surfaces with
! is necessary to replace the main leaf (1) or the first leaf
a little of CA IG Grease.
(4), in this case go on as follows.
Re-assemble the pack as follows (see Figure 93):
In case other leaves are broken or yielded, replace the
whole leaf spring. - place the main leaf (1) with the end eyes in the end pin
of the 1st leaf (4);
- place the other leaves, included the one with the clip (5),
near the former ones, rest them on one side and align
them in the bench vice;
- insert through the central hole of the leaves, the central
Figure 93
pin (7), then lock the pack in the vice;
- insert the nut (2) on the central pin (7) and lock;
1
3 Figure 94
2
4
6
7
19075
19074
Place the leaf spring in the vice of the suitable bench, clamping - close the two side retaining clamps (5) by folding the ends
it near the central pin; remove the relevant nut and extract the back as shown in the figure.
central coupling pin.
Unscrew the fastening nut (2) of the central pin (7) and
extract the pin. Open the pack side clips (5), lifting the two
ends that are bent on the main leaf. Open the vice and
disassemble the leaf spring. 500454 Replacing the bushings
The leaf spring bushings (3) are replaced with the hydraulic
press and a suitable punch.
Side clips (5) fastened with a rivet (6) to the leaf, can
! be re-used, provided that they do not show signs of
breakage when they are re-bent to hold the pack. In
this case, it is necessary to replace them with new
ones to be fixed to the leaf with new rivets.
Checks
Carefully clean, with diesel oil or solvent, all

components; ensure that the bushes are firmly driven
in the spring eyes and shackles.
Check that the internal surface is not ovalized and that
the pins are not worn or strained, in case they are,
replace them.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

500940 REAR SHOCK ABSORBERS

Removal Refitting
Remove the shock absorber (1) extracting the upper To re-fit shock absorbers carry out the removal
and lower fastening nuts or bolts (⇐) of the shock operations in reverse and comply with the prescribed
absorber. torques.
Figure 95
50975
REAR AXLE SHOCK ABSORBERS VEHICLES 29 L - 35 S

Figure 96
50977
REAR AXLE SHOCK ABSORBERS VEHICLES 35 C - 65 C
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

528960 STABILIZER BAR

Removal Refitting
Remove the shock absorber bar (1) from its points of For refitting, carry out the removal operations in
connection by taking out the fixing nuts and bolts (⇐). reverse and comply with the prescribed torques.
Check that the bushings and/or flexible parts are not

! worn or deteriorated, if they are, replace them.
Figure 97
50975a
REAR STABILIZER BAR VEHICLES 29 L - 35 S
Figure 98
50978
REAR STABILIZER BAR VEHICLES 35 C - 65 C
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY REAR AIR SUSPENSIONS 83
PRINT 603.43.351/D
Rear air suspensions

Page Page
DIAGNOSTIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 - Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
REAR PNEUMATIC SUSPENSIONS - - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
VB-TECHNIEK TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
- Level sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
- Blink - code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
AIR SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
REAR PNEUMATIC SUSPENSIONS -
WABCO TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 - Air spring replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
- Blink-code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 - Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
- Failure code table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 LOAD SENSING VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
PNEUMATIC SUSPENSIONS - WABCO TYPE - Load sensing valve replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
(for R 29L - 35S vehicles) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
- Air system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
- Load sensing valve adjustment on vehicle . . . . 98
- Rear leaf spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
REAR SUSPENSION OVERHAUL . . . . . . . . . . . 99
LEAF SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
- Stabilizer bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
- Levelling and height values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
ELECTRIC SYSTEM WABCO (ECAS) . . . . . . . . 91
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM WABCO (ECAS) . . . . . . 92
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM ON VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . 93
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
- Vehicles without ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
REAR STABILIZER BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
- Vehicles with ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
CHASSIS SELF-LEVELLING, LIFTING AND
LOWERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 PANHARD REACTION BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
MAIN SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 - Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
PNEUMATIC SUPPLY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
- Specifications and data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 AIR SUSPENSIONS TYPE VB-TECHNIEK (FOR
VEHICLES 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C - 60C - 65C) 101
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
- ECU programming/setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
LEVEL SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
- Pneumatic system (for vehicles 35 C - 40 C) . 102
- Level sensor replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
- Rear leaf spring (vehicles 35 C - 40 C) . . . . . . 102
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

84 REAR AIR SUSPENSIONS DAILY
Page Page
- Rear leaf spring (vehicles 45 C - 50 C) . . . . . . 103 REAR SUSPENSION OVERHAUL
(vehicles 30 C - 35C - 40C - 45 C) . . . . . . . . 115
LEAF SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
- Levelling and height values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
VB TECHNIEK ELECTRIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . 104
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
VB-TECHNIEK ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
(60 C - 65 C VEHICLES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 - Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM (VEHICLES: 60 C - 65 C) 107 - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

PANHARD REACTION BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM ON VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . 108
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
- Vehicles without ABS
(35C - 40C - 45 C - 50 C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
- Vehicles with ABS (35C - 40C - 45 C - 50 C) . 109 REAR STABILIZER BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
- 60 C - 65 C vehicles without ABS . . . . . . . . . . 110 - Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
- 60 C - 65 C vehicles with ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
CHASSIS SELF-LEVELLING, LIFTING

AND LOWERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
MAIN SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

ELECTROCOMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
- ECU programming/setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
LEVEL SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
- Level sensor replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
- Level sensor adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
AIR SPRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
- Air spring replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
LOAD SENSING VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
- Load sensing valve replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
- Load sensing valve adjustment on vehicle . . . . 114
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
DIAGNOSTIC
Pneumatic suspension main failures:
1 - Poor or irregular pneumatic system supply;
2 - Vehicle irregular conditions.
1 POOR OR IRREGULAR PNEUMATIC

SYSTEM SUPPLY
Pneumatic system pipe leaks or breakage. Tighten or replace loosen or damaged connections.
YE Replace broken or damaged pipes.
S
NO
Electrocompressor malfunctioning. Overhaul or replace.

YE
S
2 VEHICLE IRREGULAR CONDITIONS
Pneumatic system pipe leaks or breakage. Tighten or replace loosen or damaged connections.
YES Replace broken or damaged pipes.
NO
Faulty pneumatic and/or electric connections. Find and reset faulty connections.
YES
NO
Level sensor malfunctioning. Adjust levers and replace level sensor if required.
YES
NO
ECU malfunctioning. Replace ECU.

YES
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

REAR PNEUMATIC SUSPENSIONS - VB-TECHNIEK TYPE

Blink - code
Blink-code led is set between the rear part of the ECU and the electrocompressor box to which it is secured.
Each time the ignition key is turned to ”MAR”, the led goes on and then goes off after five seconds. The following situations can then
take place:
Led blinking Failure Check

Always OFF Power Fuses, power cable
Always ON Level sensor Sensor, levers and power cable operation
Fast blinking Electrocompressor overload (if five minutes later Air springs, compressor, pneumatic circuit
the elctrocompressor restarts, failure can be due to
air leak or vehicle use under overload conditions)
Slow blinking Electrocompressor overload (manual lifting push Never depress lifting push button for more than
button have been depressed for more than two two minutes
minutes)
Dimmed light Light dims out if levelling push buttons are de- Push buttons and wiring, never depress the push
pressed at the same time or if one push button is buttons at the same time
faulty
REAR PNEUMATIC SUSPENSIONS - WABCO TYPE

Certain electric or pneumatic failures can be detected through Modus or IWT.
In case of component assembling or replacement it shall be necessary to perform system setting to guarantee proper operation of
the entire system.
Diagnostic connector is set on the right side of the engine compartment. Use adapter 99331043 to connect with diagnostic
equipment.
According to detected failures, the red warning light set on the dashboard goes on as follows:
- FIXED LIGHT: indicates failures;

- BLINKING LIGHT: indicates electrocompressor excessive temperature
Blink-code
The Blink-Code system ”displays” one failure at a time. To identify every failure stored in the ECU it is therefore necessary to repeat
the code activation procedure several times.
The Blink-Code can be activated by grounding the Diagnostic socket line L (pin 2) for 2 seconds at least with ignition key set to ”MAR”.
Should line L be grounded for more than 5 seconds, the Blink-Code shall not be activated and ECU is reset for standard operation.
The Blink-Code consists of two figures (Tens and Units):
- Tens blinking 2 sec. (Slow)
- Units blinking 0.5 sec. (Fast)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Failure code table

FAILURE TYPE FAILURE CODE
ECU
Checksum errors
Parameter error 01
Level sensor setting data error 02
ROM internal memory fault 03
WABCO data error 04
Level sensor value error 05
Pressure sensor setting data error 07
RAM memory fault 06
PIN 1 cut-off (battery power) 08
WABCO specific data 80
Internal relay valve fault 09
Vehicle speed signal (cut-off/short circuit to +Vbatt) 81
Level sensor failure: cut-off/short circuit to +Vbatt

RH rear level sensor 10
LH rear level sensor 11
Level sensor failure: short circuit to ground

Solenoid valve/relay failure: cut-off/short circuit to +Vbatt

Compressor relay 30
LH rear compressor solenoid valve 31
RH rear compressor solenoid valve 32
Intake/exhaust solenoid valve 35
Solenoid valve/relay failure: short circuit to +Vbatt

Compressor relay 40
LH rear compressor solenoid valve 41
RH rear compressor solenoid valve 42
Intake/exhaust solenoid valve 45
Plausibility during air bellows lifting/inflating

Plausibility during air bellows lowering/deflating

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

GENERAL
These pneumatic suspensions show high flexibility and significant Electronic-control pneumatic suspensions enable, through the
vibration damping. Their main characteristic is that the distance proper push buttons located in the cab, to change manually the
between chassis and road level, irrespectively of vehicle load, distance between chassis and road level and therefore the
remains constant due to the effect of the automatic adjustment height of the vehicle load bed.
of the system. The following two types of pneumatic suspensions are
currently adopted:
Electronic-control pneumatic suspensions are activated
automatically when starting the vehicle. - WABCO pneumatic suspensions for 29L - 35S vehicles
- VB - Techniek pneumatic suspensions for 35C - 40C - 45C
- 50C - 60C - 65C vehicles.
PNEUMATIC SUSPENSIONS - WABCO TYPE (for 29L - 35S vehicles)
WABCO system in addition to known advantages offered by The above mentioned operations are bound to preset
pneumatic suspension, enables the following: operating conditions and to the relevant system safety
requirements.
- significant air consumption reduction; The ECU controls automatically the chassis level (distance from
- ready response to the different adjustment processes; road level), through the real values provided by sensors and
compares these values to the rated ones stored in its memory.
- friendly systems;
If the driving position is changed, the electronic control unit
- high safety performance; governs the electro-pneumatic assemblies, by means of which
- complete system diagnostic. the actual level is corrected in relation to the nominal level set
or saved by the driver.
The WABCO system controls automatically the rated level of
vehicle pneumatic suspensions.
Figure 1
62350
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 2
62349

Air system components
COMPONENT
Pneumatic supply unit
- Type: WABCO 415 403 402 0
Operating temperature - 30ºC to 65ºC
Max. operating pressure 12.7 bar
Rated voltage 12V DC
Pressure control 14 to 17.1 bar
Level sensors
- Type: WABCO 441 050 012 0
ECU
- Type: WABCO 446 055 450 0
Rated voltage 12V
Double circuit load sensing valve (vehicles without ABS)
- Type : BOSCH NM/FV/98-347 (ref. 796803)
Ratio 0.15
Pneumatic actuator
- Type : ELLENA EE6492
Operating temperature - 20ºC to 80ºC
Operating pressure max 8 bar
Air tank (litres) 31
Rear air spring (Mod. 29 L - 35 S)
Max. diameter 171 mm
Min. length 350 mm
Max. length 150 mm
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351/D
Rear leaf spring
mm
No 2
Spring length
(measured between eye centre and air spring 1073 ± 6
connection)
Leaf thickness
24 ± 0.3
(measured at the securing point to rear axle)
- 0,05
Bush seat inner diameter 40 - 0,2
-0
D = bush outer diameter 40.2 - 0.15

−0
Mannesmann ARVIN
Sachs MERITOR
Length between eye centres:
Open mm 460 ± 3 460 ± 3 480 ± 3
Closed mm 315 ± 3 315 ± 3 315 ± 3
Stroke mm 145 145 165
Stabilizer bar
Models: 29 L - 35 S
Levelling and height values
Distance between upper chassis edge and road level

Suspension condition Max. distance (mm)
(mm)
Max. height 620 + 40
Self-levelling 580 -
Min. height 520 - 60
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
ELECTRIC SYSTEM WABCO (ECAS)

Figure 3
61099
Legend
20000 Battery 52502 Key switch
25926 Relay for enabling suspension lifting and stopping 53051 Suspension lifting control switch
the lowering function 53052 Suspension lowering control switch
25927 Relay for enabling suspension lowering and 58713 Failure warning led
stopping the lifting function 58918 Board with 32 optical indications plus instruments
42354 Pneumatic suspension system failure switch 78233 Vehicle lifting solenoid valve unit
52090 Suspension levelling switch 86023 Vehicle lifting/lowering control unit
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

PNEUMATIC SYSTEM WABCO (ECAS)

Electronic-control
Figure 4
000216T
Legend
1 - ECU (ECAS). 15 - Right chassis control solenoid valve.
2 - Manual chassis levelling control switch. 16 - Left chassis control solenoid valve.
3 - Chassis lifting control switch. 17 - Choke valve.
4 - Chassis lowering control switch. 18 - Drier filter
5 - Warning light ECAS. 19 - Air spring discharge solenoid valve.
6 - Stop light switch. 20 - One-way valve.
7 - Speedometer - tachograph.
21 - Compressor.
8 - Right air spring.
22 - One-way valve
9 - Right level sensor.
10 - Hydraulic load sensing valve*. 23 - Intake filter.
11 - Load sensing valve control pneumatic cylinder*. 24 - Compressor motor
12 - Left level sensor. 25 - Motor control relay
13 - Left air spring. 26 - Diagnosis socket
14 - Electrocompressor and distribution valve unit. * For vehicles without ABS only.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

PRINT 603.43.351
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM ON VEHICLE

Vehicles without ABS
Figure 5
62353
Legend
1 - Warning light.
4 - Chassis lifting control push button.
5 - Chassis lowering control push button.
6 - ECU.
7 - Manual chassis levelling control push button.
8 - Hydraulic load sensing valve.
9 - Load sensing valve control pneumatic cylinder.
10 - Left air spring.
11 - Pneumatic supply unit.
12 - Left level sensor.
13 - Centralised diagnostic socket.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Vehicles with ABS

Figure 6
62354
Legend
1 - Warning light.
4 - Chassis lifting control push button.
5 - Chassis lowering control push button.
6 - ECU.
7 - Manual chassis levelling control push button.
8 - Left air spring.
9 - Pneumatic supply unit.
10 - Left level sensor.
11 - Centralised diagnostic socket.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

CHASSIS SELF-LEVELLING, LIFTING AND Figure 8

LOWERING
Figure 7
62356
This unit produces the compressed air required to supply the

pneumatic system and enables to bleed air from the
pneumatic system to lower the load bed.
62355 766175 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT
Operation
Figure 9
The system consists of the following:
- Pneumatic supply unit (electrocompressor, solenoid
valve unit);
- One ECU;
- Two level sensors;
- Two air springs;
- Three levelling push buttons (1, 2, 3);
- One warning light (4).
Level sensors send to ECU the signals corresponding to
chassis-road distance. The ECU processes these signals,
generates accordingly activation signals and sends them to the
electrocompressor.
Turn the ignition key to ”MAR” and depress push buttons (1,
2, 3) for lifting, lowering or activating the self-levelling function
of the chassis.
This system enables vehicle running up to 20 km/h under
whatever height and level condition. When this speed is
exceeded, chassis automatic levelling is activated.
62357
Variation operations are indicated by warning light (4) blinking.
MAIN SYSTEM COMPONENTS The ECU is the mastermind of the system.

It controls every logic function of suspensions under both
790560 PNEUMATIC SUPPLY UNIT static and dynamic stage.
ECU receives signals from the control switches set in the cab
Specifications and data and lifts and lowers the load bed accordingly. It also receives
Type Wabco signals from the level sensors and controls the
Lubrication Dry operation electrocompressor and the air spring to keep the vehicle in the
Max. operating pressure 12.7 bar self-levelling condition.
Operating temperature -30 C° to 65° C
Rated voltage 12V DC ECU indicates any system failure through the dedicated
warning light set on the instrument panel.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

ECU programming/setting Level sensor replacement

WABCO ECU is not requiring programming since it is Removal
supplied already programmed.
Figure 11
Setting can be performed by MODUS, IWT and IT2000
diagnostic systems and shall be performed when replacing the
following:
- ECU;
- level sensor;
- level sensor levers.
Connect the diagnostic tool to the 38-pin socket and proceed
as follows to obtain correct setting:
- check and adjust to 110 mm the level sensor lever length,
if required;
- lift the chassis by depressing the proper video push
button (max. lifting);
- position the proper spacers between chassis and rear
axle; 62460
- lower the chassis completely by depressing the proper

video push button (max.lowering); Disconnect the electrical connection (2), loosen the screw
(⇒) and disconnect the levers. Loosen the fastening screws
- set ECU by depressing the proper video push button. and remove the level sensor (1).
Refitting
Reverse removal operations to perform refitting.
768822 LEVEL SENSOR Perform level sensor and ECU setting as shown in the
Figure 10 relevant paragraphs ”ECU programming/setting” and
”Level sensor adjustment”.
Level sensor adjustment

Figure 12
62358
Level sensors inform constantly the ECU on distance changes

between chassis and road level.
62584
Level sensors consists of a coil secured to the chassis and a
small piston.
When chassis height changes, a cam and a lever linked to the
axle make the piston move inside the coil, thus modifying its Operate on adjustment screws and set relay lever X value to
inductance. 110 mm.
These changes will be used by the ECU in the different stages Perform ECU setting as shown in the relevant paragraphs
of the system. ”ECU programming/setting”.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

500731 AIR SPRING 784310 LOAD SENSING VALVE

Figure 13 Figure 15
62359
Air spring is an elastic element dedicated to contain pressure

air and to change its extension irrespectively of the applied
load. 62361
Vehicles not fitted with ABS/EBS/ABD systems have been

provided with the following components to obtain brakeforce
Air spring replacement distribution:
Removal
- double circuit load sensing valve;
Figure 14 - load sensing valve pneumatic actuator.
The load sensing valve controls automatically the braking
torque produced by brakes on the rear axle, according to the
load applied on the rear axle, measured and transferred to the
load sensing valve of the pneumatic actuator.
The following diagram shows the brakeforce distribution ratio
corresponding to 0.15 as a function of pneumatic pressure
change inside air springs.
Figure 16
62360
Position the vehicle on level ground.
Lift the rear part of the vehicle and rest the chassis on the
proper stands.
Use the hydraulic jack to support the rear axle.
Bleed the system and disconnect the air spring (3) supply pipe
(2).
Loosen upper (1) and lower fastening nuts.
62362
Lower the rear axle and remove the air spring (3). Legend
A Hydraulic output pressure in bar;

Refitting B Hydraulic control pressure in bar;
C Pneumatic control pressure in bar;
D Characteristic curves, 0.15 ratio (without load);
E 1:1 ratio (with load);
F Pneumatic pressure/load characteristic curves.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Load sensing valve replacement Perform required operations in the following sequence:
Removal - position the vehicle with the rear wheels set on the brake
Figure 17 test bed 99336914;
- connect gauges 99372269 or Modus to pressure control
intakes set upstream and downstream connector;
- should gauges not be fitted with valves for automatic
bleeding, bleed air by loosening the suitable ring nuts
Figure 19
62433
Bleed the system, loosen the screws (3) and disconnect the
pneumatic actuator (2).
Loosen the fastening screws of the load sensing valve (1) and
remove it including the pneumatic actuator (2).
62578
Refitting
- Loosen nut (1);
- apply 5 kg to plate (3) in point (2);
Perform load sensing valve adjustment as shown in the - start engine;
relevant paragraphs ”Load sensing valve adjustment - disconnect the pneumatic actuator (4);
on vehicle”. - with engine running at idle, depress the brake pedal
gradually until obtaining 100 bar pressure read on the
Load sensing valve adjustment on vehicle gauge set upstream connector. This value shall be constant
This device shall be checked and adjusted, if required, at and shall be read on vehicle with load and without load;
regular intervals by checking the values indicated on the plate - simulate the fully laden condition by lifting completely the
(Figure 18) located on the internal part of the engine hood. relay lever (3) and the unloaded condition by lowering the
lever completely;
- read output pressure value under both vehicle conditions
(laden and unloaded); obtained values shall comply with
Should the plate or the relevant technical data be those indicated on the plate, otherwise replace the load
! missing, ask the manufacturer for a duplicate sensing valve;
specifying the following: - operate the relay lever (3) to check whether the load
- Vehicle type and wheelbase sensing valve piston is sliding smoothly into its seat,
- Rear axle weight otherwise replace the load sensing valve;
- Load sensing valve No. - reconnect the pneumatic actuator (4);
- load the vehicle to obtain 1500 kg weight on the rear axle
evenly distributed on the right and left side of the vehicle
Figure 18
with ± 5 kg tolerance;
- with engine running at idle and 100 bar pressure read on
the gauge set upstream the connector, check whether the
output pressure value read on the gauge set downstream
the connector is corresponding to the values indicated on
the plate, otherwise replace the load sensing valve;
- stop the vehicle, tighten nut (1) to the specified torque and
remove applied loads.
Perform this check with gradually increasing pressure.

!
To check the load sensing valve, every braking system
component shall be in perfect operating conditions. When
replacing the leaf spring for special set-up, a new plate is
required with properly corrected values.
62577
- when tests are over, check brake performance.
LOAD SENSING VALVE PLATE
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

500730 REAR SUSPENSION OVERHAUL

500450 LEAF SPRING
Removal
Figure 20
62365
Position the vehicle on level ground. Lift the rear part of the Refitting
vehicle and rest the chassis on the proper stands. Use the
hydraulic jack to support the rear axle.
Bleed the system, remove the wheel, loosen the air spring
lower fastening screw (1). Loosen shock absorber lower Reverse removal operations to perform refitting.
fastening nut (3) and disconnect it.
Loosen nuts (2) and remove the U bolts (4) and the elements
securing the leaf spring to the rear axle.
Loosen and remove the pin (6) and remove the leaf spring (5). 528960 REAR STABILIZER BAR
Refitting Removal
Figure 22
500940 REAR SHOCK ABSORBERS

Removal
Figure 21
62364
Operate on both vehicle sides.
Loosen the screws (1) and the nut (3). Remove the stabilizer
bar (4) including the joints (2).
Refitting
62363
Lift the rear part of the vehicle and use the jack to support the
rear axle. Loosen the upper (3) and the lower (1) fastening
nuts and remove the shock absorber (2).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

PANHARD REACTION BAR

Removal
Figure 23
62368
Loosen the ”Panhard” reaction bar (4) fastening screws (3 and Refitting
5) and remove it.
Loosen the relay rod (2) fastening screws (1 and 6) and Reverse removal operations to perform refitting.
remove it.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

AIR SUSPENSIONS TYPE VB-TECHNIEK (for vehicles 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C - 60C - 65C)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The VB - TECHNIEK system is controlled by an electronic With each start, the control unit runs a test on all the system
control unit that keeps the settings, depending on the signals components and when the handbrake is released it restores
sent by the level sensors, in all working conditions. the set driving position.
A supply unit, which includes all the appliances, distributes and It is possible, with the vehicle stationary and the handbrake
discharges the air from the springs. engaged, to lift or lower the chassis frame. During these
operations, a red light on the dashboard warns of not being
For vehicles with no ABS, there is a braking load apportioning
in the driving position.
valve, governed by an air-operated actuator.
Suspension assembly diagram (for vehicles 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C)

Figure 24
62351
Figure 25
62435
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

SUSPENSIONS

Pneumatic system (for vehicles 35 C - 50 C)
COMPONENT
Air supply unit
- Type: VB TECHNIEK 1252131010
Level sensor
ECU
Hydraulic load sensing valve (vehicles without ABS)
- Type: VB TECHNIEK (for vehicles 35 C - 40 C) 1252081065
(for vehicles 45 C - 50 C) 1252081070
Rear air spring
Max. diameter 240 mm
Min. length - mm
Max. length - mm
Air tank -
Rear leaf spring (vehicles 35 C - 40 C)
mm
Single blade
No 2
Leaf length
(measured between eye centre and air spring 1080
connection)
Leaf thickness
35
Leaf width 60
Bush seat inner diameter 39
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

PRINT 603.43.351
Rear leaf spring (vehicles 45 C - 50 C)
mm
Twin blade
No 2
Leaf length
(measured between eye centre and air spring 1080
connection)
Leaf thickness
-
Leaf width 60
Bush seat inner diameter 39
Length between eye centres:
Open 471 ± 3
Closed 313 ± 3
Stroke 158
Stabilizer bar
Models: 35 C - 40 C - 45 C - 50 C
Levelling and height values
Distance between upper chassis edge and road level

Suspension condition Max. distance (mm)
(mm)
Max. height 640 + 60
Self-levelling 580 -
Min. height 550 - 30
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

VB TECHNIEK ELECTRIC SYSTEM

Figure 26
Legend 62448
20000 Battery 53052 Suspension lowering control switch

40046 Inductive type level sensor 58713 Failure warning led
42102 Hand brake ON switch 58719 Hand brake ON warning led
52052 Key switch 58918 Board with 32 optical indications plus instruments
53051 Suspension lifting control switch 85160 Chassis setup change control device
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
PRINT 603.43.351/D
PNEUMATIC SYSTEM
VB TECHNIEK Electronic-control pneumatic suspensions
Vehicles: 35 C - 40 C - 45 C - 50 C
Figure 27
73732
Legend
1 - ECU 13 - Air duct connection
2 - Hand brake ON switch 14 - Pneumatic bleeding valve
3 - Warning light 15 - Level sensor
4 - Chassis lifting control switch 16 - Left air spring
5 - Chassis lowering control switch 17 - Compressor
6 - Air spring bleeding solenoid valve 18 - Supply filter
7 - Throttling valve 19 - Compressor motor
8 - Single-acting exhaust valve 20 - Motor thermal sensor
9 - Single-acting delivery valve 21 - Exhaust silencer
10 - Drier filter 22 - Motor control relay
11 - Right air spring
12 - Pneumatic control load sensing valve* * Only for vehicles without ABS.attery
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

VB-TECHNIEK ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (60 C - 65 C VEHICLES)

Figure 28
86166
Legend
20000 Battery 53052 Suspension lowering control switch
40046 Chassis height sensor, inductive type, rear axle 58713 VTB failure warning led
58719 Handbrake engaged led
42102 Handbrake engaged indication switch
58918 Instrument panel with 32 optical indications plus
52502 Key switch instruments
53051 Suspension raising control switch 85610 Chassis position variation control device
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

PNEUMATIC SYSTEM (vehicles: 60 C - 65 C)

VB TECHNIEK Electronic-control pneumatic suspensions
Figure 29
86154
Legend
1 - electronic control unit 13 - RH air spring
2 - manual mode activation button 14 - air exhaust valve
3 - raising button 15 - compressor
4 - lowering button 16 - compressor electric motor
5 - VBT warning light 17 - filter
6 - tachograph 18 - brakeforce distributor
7 - electric motor relay 19 - silencer
8 - exhaust solenoid valve (for washing) 20 - exhaust solenoid valve
9 - throttle valve 21 - LH air spring
10 - single-acting exhaust valve 22 - level sensor
11 - single-acting feed valve
12 - drier filter * Only for vehicles without ABS
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

PNEUMATIC SYSTEM ON VEHICLE

Vehicles without ABS (35C - 40C - 45 C - 50 C)
Figure 30
000364T
Legend
1 - VBT warning light
2 - Suspension control unit (ECU, pneumatic supply unit)
3 - Chassis lifting control switch
4 - Chassis lowering control switch
6 - Level sensor
7 - Load sensing valve pneumatic actuator
8 - Load sensing valve
9 - Left air spring
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Vehicles with ABS (35C - 40C - 45 C - 50 C)

Figure 31
000365T
Legend
1 - VBT warning light
2 - Suspension control unit (ECU, pneumatic supply unit)
3 - Chassis lifting control switch
4 - Chassis lowering control switch
6 - Level sensor
7 - Left air spring
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

60 C - 65 C vehicles without ABS

Figure 32
86155
Legend
1 - VBT warning light 9 - Brakeforce distributor
2 - Suspension control unit 10 - LH air spring
3 - Chassis raising control button 11 - Exhaust solenoid valve
4 - Chassis lowering control button
12 - Filter
5 - Manual control button
6 - RH air spring 13 - Relay
7 - Level sensor 14 - Electric compressor
8 - Brakeforce distributor air actuator 15 - Control unit
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

60 C - 65 C vehicles with ABS

Figure 33
86156
Legend
1 - VBT warning light 8 - LH air spring
2 - Suspension control unit 9 - Exhaust solenoid valve
3 - Chassis raising control button
10 - Filter
4 - Chassis lowering control button
11 - Relay
5 - Manual control button
6 - RH air spring 12 - Electric compressor
7 - Level sensor 13 - Control unit
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

CHASSIS SELF-LEVELLING, LIFTING MAIN SYSTEM COMPONENTS

AND LOWERING 790560 ELECTROCOMPRESSOR
Figure 34 Figure 35
62440
This unit produces the compressed air required to supply the

pneumatic system and enables to bleed air from the
pneumatic system to lower the load bed.
766175 ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT

62355
Figure 36
Operation
- Electrocompressor (two models 60 C - 65 C);
- One ECU;
- One level sensor;
- Two air springs;
- Two levelling buttons (1 and 2) in 30 C - 35 C - 40 C -
50 C models;
Three buttons (1, 2, 3) in 60 C - 65 C models;
62441
- One warning light (4). The ECU is the mastermind of the system.
The level sensor sends signals which are proportional to the It controls every logic function of suspensions under both
chassis-road clearance to the ECU. The ECU processes these static and dynamic stage.
signals are consequently operates the electrical compressor
(or compressors) for raising or lowering the chassis. ECU receives signals from the control switch set in the cab and
lifts and lowers the load bed accordingly. It also receives signals
The chassis is automatically levelled when the engine is running from the level sensor and controls the electrocompressor and
and the handbrake is lowered (35 C - 40 C - 45 C - 50 C the air spring to keep the vehicle in the self-levelling condition.
vehicles). In 60 C - 65 C vehicles, button (3) must not be
pressed in addition to handbrake operation. ECU indicates any system failure through the blinking of the
dedicated led.
To change load bed height depress push buttons (1 and 2) for
lifting or lowering the chassis.
Chassis lifting or lowering can be performed just with stopped ECU programming/setting
vehicle and hand brake ON.
No ECU programming/setting is required; only the level
In 60 C - 65 C vehicles, this operation can be activated also sensor adjustment according to the specified adjustment
when the vehicle is moving (up to 20 km/h) with handbrake value shall therefore be performed.
off and levelling button pressed.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

768822 LEVEL SENSOR Level sensor adjustment

Figure 37 Figure 39
50870
62585
The level sensor sends to ECU variable signals according to Level sensor (1) adjustment shall be performed each time this
chassis-road level distance. sensor or the adjustment tie rod (2) are removed or replaced.
Apply the handbrake, raise the chassis by means of the button
Level sensor replacement in the cab and insert the following shims between chassis and
Removal axle:
Figure 38 - 90 mm for 30 C - 35 C - 40 C vehicles;
- 110 mm for 45 C - 50 C - 60 C - 65 C vehicles.
Lower down the chassis completely by depressing the proper
push button located in the cab.
Check and adjust control lever X value to 11 mm if required.
Adjust level sensor (1) position by operating on the fastening
screws (3) to obtain reaction lever verticality. Secure the level
sensor.
500731 AIR SPRING

62442 Figure 40
Disconnect the electrical connection, disconnect the levers

(⇒), loosen the fastening screws (2) and remove the level
sensor (1).
Refitting
Perform level sensor adjustment as shown in the
relevant paragraph ”Level sensor adjustment”.
62443
Air spring is an elastic element dedicated to contain pressure

air and to change its extension irrespectively of the applied
load.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Air spring replacement Load sensing valve replacement

Removal Removal
Figure 41 Figure 43
62458
62444
Bleed the system.
Position the vehicle on level ground.
Lift the rear part of the vehicle and rest the chassis on the Disconnect pneumatic and hydraulic pipes, loosen the
proper stands. fastening screws and remove the load sensing valve (2)
Use the hydraulic jack to support the rear axle. including the pneumatic actuator (1).
Bleed the system and disconnect the air spring (2) supply pipe Refitting
(1).
Loosen upper and lower fastening screws (⇒). Reverse removal operations to perform refitting.
Lower the rear axle and remove the air spring (2).
Refitting Perform load sensing valve adjustment as shown in the
relevant paragraphs ”Load sensing valve adjustment
on vehicle”.
Load sensing valve adjustment on vehicle
This device shall be checked and adjusted, if required, at
784310 LOAD SENSING VALVE regular intervals.
Figure 42 Figure 44
62612
Remove the load sensing valve and the cover.

62445 Refit the load sensing valve and operate on screw (1) to set
Vehicles not fitted with ABS system have been provided with dimension X, between load sensing valve push rod (2) and
the following components to obtain brakeforce distribution: pneumatic actuator screw (1), to the value shown in table
- single-circuit load sensing valve; Remove the load sensing valve and refit it with its cover.
- load sensing valve pneumatic actuator.
The load sensing valve controls automatically the braking VEHICLE X
torque produced by brakes on the rear axle, according to the 35C - 40 C 2.9 ÷ 3.3 mm
load applied on the rear axle, measured and transferred to the
load sensing valve of the pneumatic actuator. 45C - 50 C 2 ÷ 2.5 mm
The load sensing valve used on vehicles with this type of
suspension is set to 0.25 ratio.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

500730 REAR SUSPENSION OVERHAUL (vehicles 30 C - 35C - 40C - 45 C)

500450 LEAF SPRING
Removal
Figure 45
62459
Position the vehicle on level ground. Refitting

Lift the rear part of the vehicle and rest the chassis on the
proper stands.
Use the hydraulic jack to support the rear axle.
Bleed the system and remove the wheels.
Only for right leaf spring: loosen the screws (1) fastening the
”Panhard” bar support (2) and disconnect it.
Loosen the air spring lower fastening screw (⇒).
Loosen the fastening nuts and remove the U bolts (4).
Loosen the screw (3) fastening the leaf spring (5) to the rear
axle.
Loosen and remove the pin (6).
Remove the leaf spring (5).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

500940 REAR SHOCK ABSORBERS 5289600 REAR STABILIZER BAR

Removal Removal
Figure 46 Figure 48
62446 62447
Lift the rear part of the vehicle and use the jack to support the Operate on both vehicle sides and loosen the screws (⇒)
rear axle. fastening the stabilizer bar to the chassis. Loosen the nut and
remove the pin (3).
Loosen the upper (3) and the lower (1) fastening nuts and
remove the shock absorber (2). Remove the stabilizer bar (1) including the joints (2).
Refitting Refitting
Reverse removal operations to perform refitting. Reverse removal operations to perform refitting.
PANHARD REACTION BAR

Removal
Figure 47
Refitting 62434
Loosen the fastening screws (1 and 3), withdraw the relevant

pins and remove the ”Panhard” reaction bar (2).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY WHEEL AND TYRES 1
SECTION 9
5025 Wheel and Tyres
Page
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
- Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
STATIC WHEEL BALANCING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
TYRE PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
HOW TYRE BEHAVIOUR DEPENDS

ON PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

2 WHEEL AND TYRES DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DESCRIPTION
The wheel rim represents the rigid structure of the wheel and
Figure 2
is identified by the following dimensions:
- diameter of the rim, measured at the base of the
circumferential groove (i.e., on the surface on which the
air chamber rests);
- width of the circumferential groove in the wheel rim (i.e.,
the distance between the surfaces on which the cover
rests).
The tyre has the following functions:
- to absorb the greater part of the jolts caused by roughness
of the road surface by utilising the elasticity of air;
- to generate on the ground the motive force supplied by
the engine necessary for the vehicle to move;
- to ensure the maximum grip and stability of contact
between the tyre and the road, with satisfactory tyre life;
- to withstand the forces generated by sudden braking,
hard acceleration and by the thrust of centrifugal force on
bends;
- to ensure the stability of the vehicle even at high speeds;
to ensure the steerability of the vehicle.
Figure 1
44929
S = Tyre section rated width (mm)

H = Tyre height
D = Max. utilisation diameter (Rx2)
R = Radius under load (static)
Ø = Fitting diameter
E = Min. distance between centres in case of paired tyres
e = Tyre deflection
CdR = Rolling circumference
44928
1. Tyre section rated width (mm)

2. Tyre height-width ratio percentage e.g., H/S = 0.75
3. Tyre structure (R = Radial)
4. Wheel rim diameter in inches
5. Load and speed index symbols
113: tyre load index on simple axis: 1150 kg
111: tyre load index on paired axis: 1090 kg
Speed category (N= 140 km/h)
6. Designation of the manufacturer’s tyre:
XC A Tubeless (TL): tyre to be used with no inner tube.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Tyre pressure
bar (kg/cm2) 3,0 3,25 3,5 3,75 4,0 4,5 4,75 5,0 5,25 5,5 6,0
205/70 R15 kg front 1350 - 1500 - - - - - - - -
106/104Q rear - - 1500 1650 1740 1900 - - - - -
215/70 R15 kg front 1460 - 1600 - - - - - - - -
109/107Q rear - - 1600 1700 1830 2060 - - - - -
225/70 R15 kg front 1550 1650 - - - - - - - - -
112/110Q rear - 1740 1860 1960 2020 2240 - - - - -
bar (kg/cm2) 3,0 3,25 3,5 3,75 4,0 4,25 4,5 4,75 5,0 5,25 5,5 6,0
195/65 R16 kg front - - 1400 1450 1550 1650 1700 1800 - - - -
104/102Q rear 2230 - 2600 - - - - - - - - -
185/75 R16 kg front 1300 - 1480 - 1590 - - 1800 - - - -
104/102Q rear 2440 2600 2760 - 2990 - - 3400 - - - -
195/75 R16 kg front 1350 - 1520 1600 1700 1750 1850 1900 - - - -
107/105P rear 2560 - 2890 3100 3200 3400 3550 3700 - - - -
225/75 R16 kg front 1950 - 2100 - 2260 - - - - 2640 - -
118/116 rear 3630 - 3930 - 4240 - - - - 5000 - -
+6.50 R16 kg front - - 1370 1570 1680 1750 1840 1940 2000 - - -
106/107L rear - - 2600 3050 3240 3400 3560 3720 3900 - - -
+7.00 R16 kg front - - - - 1840 - 2000 2120 2200 - 2380 2570
117/116L rear - - - - 3600 - 3890 4150 4260 - 4360 5000
NOTE The pressures indicated refer to cold tyres and an outside temperature of 20ºC.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TOOLS
99305037 Electronic equipment for front wheel balancing on the vehicle
DIAGNOSTICS
Main tyres malfunctions:
1 - excessive wear;
2 - irregular wear;
3 - vehicle pulls to one side.
1 EXCESSIVE WEAR
Excessive speed on particularly uneven ground. Reduce speed.

YES
NO
Sudden variations in speed, violent or harsh braking. Avoid all unnecessary acceleration or braking.
YES
NO
Excessive speed with tyre pressures too low. Check tyres pressures cold.
YES
NO
Tyres pressures too high. Reduce pressures.

YES
NO
Truck overloaded. Consult data on loads permitted.

YES
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

2 IRREGULAR WEAR
Difference in tyre pressures between one pair of Check pressure.

wheels and the other. YES
NO
Tyre pressures too low; wear more accentuated on the Increase tyre pressure.
outsides of the tread than in the middle. YES
NO
Tyre pressure too high, with excessive wear in the Reduce pressure.
middle of the tread. YES
NO
Insufficient toe-in of front wheels; substantial wear on Check and adjust toe-in.
the inside surfaces of the tread. YES
NO
Front wheel geometry incorrect. Restore normal wheel geometry.

YES
NO
Distortion of wheel rims causing imbalance. If possible, repair the rims or replace; then balance the
YES wheels.
NO
Tyres incorrectly fitted to rims. Fit the tyre correctly and balance the wheel.
YES
(continues)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Rear axle out of parallel due to breakage of the leaf

Overhaul the suspension.
spring centre pin, or springs of different lengths, or bent YES
springs.
NO
Excessive toe-in of front wheels; excessive wear of the Check and adjust toe-in.
outside surfaces of the tread. YES
3 VEHICLE PULLS TO ONE SIDE
Front wheels out of balance. Balance the wheels.

YES
NO
Front tyres at different pressures. Check pressures ensuring that both are at the correct
YES value.
NO
Excessive difference in wear between a pair of tyres. Replace excessively worn tyre.
YES
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

502511 STATIC WHEEL BALANCING

Figure 3 Turn up the spin switch (6) to the second speed and place the
balancing machine against the tyre.
While the wheel is being spun, it will be found that the
stroboscopic effect on the wheel will make the reference
mark appear stationary; the pointer of the instrument (1),
moving from the value zero, reaches a maximum value on the
scale and then returns to zero.
When the pointer has begun to fall back, withdraw the
balancing machine, turn off the spin-up switch (6) completely
and brake the motor by means of the brake lever (7).
The wheel continues to revolve due to inertia and the
reference mark made on the tyre moves; the point to which
the reference mark has moved should therefore be noted.
Read off from the instrument (1) the value shown by the
pointer, multiply it by 10, giving the value of the balance weight
The front wheels can be balanced on the vehicle using the to be fitted to the rim.
electronic unit 99305037; this has the advantage of balancing
the wheel together with the other rotating masses.
The operation must be carried out as follows: Figure 5
- raise the front of the vehicle and make sure that the
wheels are free to rotate;
- position the imbalance detector (1) under the axle close
to the wheel being examined, arranging the height so that
the spin-up wheel of unit 99305037 (2) is in contact with
the tyre; position a support stand under the opposite side
of the axle and lower the hydraulic jack;
16998
Figure 4 Fit the balance weight calculated in this way as shown in the
figure.
If during the test, the pointer of the instrument (1, Figure 4)
remains in the green area of the box, the wheel is balanced.
NOTE If the weight required to balance the wheel is more

than 60 ÷ 80 grams, divide the weight in half and
position the two parts so formed with one half on
the inside and one half on the outside of the rim,
making sure that they are in the same position.
Figure 6
16997
- connect the cable (3) of the imbalance detector to unit

99305037;
- make a reference mark on the tyre by drawing a radial
mark with chalk or using a strip of gummed paper;
- turn switch (2) to the static balancing position and
sensitivity switch (4) to notch no. 5 on the graduated
scale;
- turn on switch (5) for instrument light (1) and strobe lamp
23885
switch (8);
To correct the residual imbalance, repeat the operations
- turn the spin-up switch (6) of unit 99305037 to the first already carried out as above; depending on the new reading
speed position so as to make the wheel rotate. of the instrument (1, Figure 4), refer to the diagram in the
figure and proceed as follows to adjust:
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

- If the weight is in the zone marked with the letter A, this Figure 7
means that it is too light, and in that case weight must be
added as indicated by the instrument (1, Figure 4).
- If the weight is in the bottom zone marked with the letter
C, this means that it is too heavy and in that case the
weight must be reduced as shown by the measuring
instrument.
- If the weight is found to be in the zones marked with the
letters B or D, do not remove or add any weight but
instead move it 5 cm upwards in the direction of the
arrows, see Figure 6.
- 40%
502510 TYRE PRESSURE
The tyre pressures must be checked with the tyres cold. EFFICIENCY 40%
Take great care that the pressure is correct since, if it is higher
than required, a harsh ride and excessive wear of the centre
of the tread will result, while if it is lower, the load is not Figure 8
distributed over the whole tread but is concentrated at either
side, causing premature wear of these areas and also damaging
the internal structure of the tyre.
Unequal pressures between tyres affects the driving stability
of the vehicle and impairs operating safety.
Tyre abnormal wear can occur in different areas of tread.
+ 20%
EFFICIENCY 90%
HOW TYRE BEHAVIOUR DEPENDS ON Figure 9

PRESSURE
Schematic views to demonstrate how tyre behaviour and
performance depend on pressure.
NOTE The value shown inside each tyre indicates the level
of pressure of the tyre, while the efficiency relates
to the life of the tyre.
CORRECT
EFFICIENCY 100%
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY STEERING GEAR 1
Print 603.43.351
SECTION 10
5014 Steering gear
Page
STEERING GEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
- General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
POWER STEERING SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA 4
- Steering gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
SPECIFIC TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
POWER STEERING TYPE TRW . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
POWER STEERING TYPE ZF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
CHECKS AND OPERATIONS ON THE VEHICLE 16
- Checking maximum pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
- Checking hydraulic steering centre

(for ”ZF” power steering only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
- Bleeding the air from the hydraulic system . . . . 16
SWIVEL HEADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
PROTECTION CASINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
STEERING GEAR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
- Vehicles equipped with an Air-Bag . . . . . . . . . . 16
SAFETY STANDARDS TO BE OBSERVED DURING

REPAIR OR MAINTENANCE OPE- RATIONS
ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH AIR-BAG SYSTEM
PROVIDED BY SUPPLIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
- Preliminary Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
- Repairs and inspections required after an accident 17
- Accidents with or without Air-Bag

module activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

2 STEERING GEAR DAILY
PRINT 603.43.351/D
Page
- Accidents with Air-Bag module activation . . . . 17
- Painting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
- Risks for health . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
- Overexposure effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
- Safety Standards to observe when handling Air-Bag

modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
- Air-Bag module scrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
- Safety Standards to observe when handling

pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
- Pretensioners scrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
- Operations on system components . . . . . . . . 20
- Removing and scrapping activated Air-Bag module

and pretensioner from vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
- Removing and scrapping non-activated Air-Bag

module from a repairable vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 20
- Air-Bag module deployment

Remote activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
- Activating Air-Bag modules and electronic

pretensioners installed on unrecoverable vehicles 21
- Upper steering gear shaft removal . . . . . . . . . . 23
- For vehicles equipped with Air-Bag . . . . . . . . . 23
- For all vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
- Lower steering gear shaft removal . . . . . . . . . . 24
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
- Hydraulic power steering removal . . . . . . . . . . 25
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
- Steering linkage replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
- Rubber bushing replacement procedure . . . . . 26
POWER STEERING PUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
- Power steering pump overhaul procedure . . . 28
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
STEERING GEAR It has two functions:

General - angle driving between spin axis of the steering control and
Generally, the steering gear members consist of: a full steering the wheels’ steering axis.
gear control, a steering box, the linkage joining the driving
wheels and, for the hydraulic-type steering box of: an hydraulic - gear down through the coupling ratio the resistant
pump, an oil tank and oil piping. moment opposing the wheels under the steering effect.
In vehicle system 35C-65C with F1C engine, there is installed The value of this ratio and the wheel geometry characteristics
a pipe coil (A) to cool oil. (toe-in - camber - caster), determine the stress and the type
The rotary movement given to the steering wheel by the of steering, more or less direct; this increases or decreases the
driver is transmitted to the steering box by three shafts joined driver sensitivity of the vehicle attitude on road; besides, it
one another by universal joints. determines the steering caster action degree, that is, the
The universal joints allow the transmission of the rotary spontaneous return to straight normal running when the
movement on different planes. steering wheel is released after steering.
The upper shaft, on which the steering wheel is keyed, is
housed and supported in the upper support by elastic bushes. The tie rods joining the steering levers mounted on stub axles
In addition, the indicator automatic switch-off and the antitheft using knuckle heads are joined by ball joints at the end of the
steering lock are keyed to the support. rack rod. Operating the tie rod the wheel camber is adjusted.
The steering box is of the type: pinion - rack rod with hydraulic The hydraulic pump is of the blade type and is flanged to the
power. engine auxiliary member unit, it has the overpressure valve
incorporated.
Figure 1
88735
STEERING GEAR DIAGRAM
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

PRINT 603.43.351/D
POWER STEERING SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA

Steering gear
Steering gear Hydraulic
Power steering Pinion and rack type

Type ZF* TRW
Operating pressure X 100 bar
Maximum delivery volume -
No. of steering wheel turns 3.8
Rack travel in both steering
180  1.5
1 5 mm
directions:
Type TEXAND F020 SHELL-ALVANIA LS00
Lube oil pinion side kg - 0.060
pipe end side kg - 0.030
Power steering pump blade type with pressure relief valve incorporated
Motor 8140 FIA F1C
Type ZF 7684 955124 ZF 7684 955138 ZF 7612 955117 ZF 7682 955133
Minimum RGM RPM 500 460 500 750
Maximum RGM RPM 3500 2980 8500 3500
Maximum pressure bar 80 + 10 100 + 10 115 + 10
Minimum delivery dm3/min - -
Adjusted delivery dm3/min 7 8 9 ± 0,75 9 ± 0,8
Turning circle (theoretical value) [m]
Wheelbase [mm] MODELS

29 L - 35 S 35 C (1) 35 C (2) - 40 C - 45 C - 50 C 60 C - 65 C
Tyres 205 - 225/70 R 15 195/65 R 16 195/75 R 16 225/75 R 16
3000 10.37 10.34 11.04 -
3300 11.25 11.22 11.98 11.79
3450 11.69 11.66 12.46 12.25
3750 12.57 12.54 13.40 13.17
3950 13.15 13.12 14.03 13.78
4100 - 13.56 14.50 (3) 14.24
4350 - - 15.29 (4) 15.01
4750 - - 16.55 (4) 16.24
(1) Front suspension with trasverse leaf spring.
(2) Front suspension with torsion bar.
(3) Models 35C-40C only
(4) Models 45C-50C only
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
TIGHTENING TORQUES
52376
TORQUE
DESCRIPTION
Nm kgm
1 Screw, steering box fastening nut 50 ÷ 61 5 ÷ 6.1
2 Nut, ball joint to steering arm 68 ÷ 83 6.8 ÷ 8.3
3 Nut, ball joint to track arm 70 ÷ 100 7 ÷ 10
SPECIFIC TOOLS
99347074 Knuckle pivot extractor (4x2 vehicles)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

PRINT 603.43.351/D
DIAGNOSTICS
Main hydraulic power steering operating faults:

1 - Steering stiff when turning right and left; 6 - Excessive play at the steering wheel;
2 - Steering stiff only when turning left or right; 7 - Loss of oil;
3 - Steering stiff when the wheel is turned quickly; 8 - Insufficient pressure in the circuit;
4 - When steering, heavy jolts are felt at the wheel; 9 - The vehicle tends to move sidewards;
5 - Torsional vibration of the steering wheel; 10 - Hydraulic power steering pilot light always lighted.
STEERING STIFF
1 WHEN TURNING
RIGHT AND LEFT
Insufficient oil in system. Open tank and check oil level. With engine running, top
YES up oil to upper mark on dipstick and bleed system.
NO
Air in hydraulic circuit. Check suction tube and pump shaft seal for leaks. Bleed
YES system and top up the oil.
NO
Pump regulating valve jammed or blocked. Replace the power steering pump
YES
NO
Insufficient oil pump delivery. Overhaul or replace pump.

YES
NO
Universal joint not serviceable. Make joint free to slide by moving it to and from several
YES times so that it tilts under its own weight.
NO
Internal power steering failure Replace the power steering unit

YES
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

STEERING STIFF ONLY WHEN

2 TURNING LEFT OR RIGHT
Incorrect position of hydraulic centre (when wheel is Replace the power steering unit
released, the steering returns to one end of travel by YES
itself): (ZF steering case only)..
STEERING STIFF WHEN THE WHEEL

3
IS TURNED QUICKLY
Regulating valve in pump blocked. Replace the power steering pump

YES
NO
Insufficient pump delivery (gears worn). Replace the hydraulic pump

YES
NO
Air in steering system. Check suction tube and pump shaft seal for leaks. Bleed
YES system and top up the oil.
WHEN STEERING, HEAVY JOLTS

4 ARE FELT AT THE WHEEL
Play in universal joint. Fit a new seal.

YES
NO
Internal failure of hydraulic power steering. Replace the power steering unit
YES
NO
Insufficient oil in system. Top up oil and bleed system.

YES
(Continue)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
Front wheel geometry incorrect. Check and adjust according to specifications in the section
YES ”Axles”.
NO
Wheels out of balance. Balance in accordance with instructions given in the

YES section ”Wheels and tyres”.
NO
Steering rod joints loose on the levers. Replace any worn parts.
YES
NO
Irregular pump operation. Replace pump.

YES
NO
Leakage of oil from hydraulic power steering circuit Check coupling seals for serviceability, replacing any
couplings. YES which are worn.
5 TORSIONAL VIBRATION OF THE

STEERING WHEEL
Wheels out of balance. Balance in accordance with instructions given in the

YES section ”Wheels and tyres”.
NO
Wrong wheel toe-in. Adjust in accordance with characteristic data for

YES described in the section ”Axles”.”
NO
Air in hydraulic system. Check suction tube and pump shaft seal for leaks. Bleed
YES system and top up the fluid.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

PRINT 603.43.351/D
6 EXCESSIVE PLAY AT THE

STEERING WHEEL
Play in ball joints and/or elastic supports loosen. Secure the supports
YES Replace the ball joints.
NO
Play in universal joint. Replace universal joint.

YES
NO
Internal failure of hydraulic power steering. Replace the power steering unit
YES
7 LOSS OF OIL
Tank cover not secured. Secure cover.

YES
NO
Seal gaskets worn. Replace the power steering unit

YES
In any case it is necessary to determine the place and the reason why there is oil leakage, eliminate the cause, top up oil in
the tank with the engine started up to the upper mark of the dipstick.
INSUFFICIENT PRESSURE
8
IN THE CIRCUIT
Hydraulic pump not operating correctly. Replace the power steering pump
YES
(Continue)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Oil leaking from couplings in power steering Check coupling seals for serviceability, replacing any
circuit. YES which are worn.
NO
Insufficient oil level in the tank. Top up level and bleed circuit.
YES
THE VEHICLE TENDS TO Replace the power steering unit

9 MOVE SIDEWARDS
10 HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING PILOT

LIGHT ALWAYS LIGHTED
Hydraulic power steering oil level low. Top up oil.

YES
NO
Oil pressure sender malfunction. Check the windings and in case replace oil pressure
YES sender.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
POWER STEERING
Description
Figure 2
3
1 2
4 E
24103
HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM DIAGRAM
HIGH PRESSURE LOW PRESSURE
The power steering system consists of: Figure 3

- a tank (A);
1
- a blade pump (B) with delivery regulating valves (C);
- a series of connecting pipings (D);
- an hydraulic power steering (E). 2
The oil tank, in the engine compartment, feeds the blade pump.
This pump is able to provide a feeding pressure ranging from
a minimum of approx. 4 bar to a maximum of approx. 80 + 10. 3
The oil come to the steering box, which is similar to a A
mechanical steering as for general building features, from the 6
pump. 4
In fact, its operation is mechanical for pinion to rack coupling,
The rack rod is joined to the wheels with two side tie rods.
The system is self-bleeding; bleeding is performed by
completely steering to the right or to the left with the engine
started and the vehicle stopped. 5
The oil level check must be performed with the engine started.
24104
The distributor consists of:

NOTE The description below concerns the TRW hydraulic - a drive shaft (1) (joined to the steering column);
power steering and due to their similarity, it also
applies to the ZF hydraulic power steering. - a distributing valve (4);
- a wrench bar (3);
The hydraulic part of the steering box consist of: - a pinion (6).
- a distributor (3); The drive shaft is elastically joined by the wrench bar to the
- an hydraulic cylinder (1); pinion by means of the pin (2). The distributing valve, trigged
on the drive shaft is integral with the pinion by means of a pin
- a double-acting piston (4) integral with the rack rod. (5); it has holes and splines in order to receive and distribute
The hydraulic connection between distributor and hydraulic the oil flow to the hydraulic cylinder. Besides, a stiff joint (A)
cylinder is achieved using two stiff pipes (2). The distributor (3) ensures the mechanical working of the hydraulic power
is integral with the hydraulic power steering pinion. steering in case of failure of the hydraulic system, through a
bayonet joint.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

POWER STEERING TYPE TRW

Operation
Figure 4
24105
The hydraulic cylinder (1) is integral part of the hydraulic power steering, The double-acting piston (2) (integral with the rack rod)
slides in the hydraulic cylinder and divides it into two separate chambers A and B.
The power steering is obtained by sending oil under pressure into one of the hydraulic cylinder chambers and discharging it into the
other one. The power generated by the oil pressure on the side surface of the piston causes the movement of the piston and, as
a result, of the rack. The feeding of one of the two hydraulic cylinder chambers occurs when the torque applied to the steering wheel
causes the wrench of the bar; in this condition, the port of the drive shaft and the relevant ports of the distributing valve are joined
depending on the rotary direction of the steering wheel. If the amount of torque applied to the steering wheel does not cause the
wrench of the bar (low wheel resistance), the power steering does not intervene and the steering operates as a mechanical one.
Figure 5
24106
HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING OPERATION DIAGRAM: NEUTRAL POSITION

The oil coming from the pump through the joint (3) goes into the distributing valve, circulates in it and returns in the tank through
the joint (4), simultaneously passing through the chambers (2) and (1).
The drive shaft (A), since it is not subject to wrench, is centred with respect to the distributing valve (B) and drives the oil coming
from the pump directly into the tank through the ports (C). The chokes caused by the shaft (A) position with respect to the
distributing valve (B) cause a pressure of ~ 3.5 bar in the right and left chamber through the ports (D) and (E).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 6
24108
HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING OPERATION DIAGRAM: RIGHT STEERING

The oil coming from the pump through the joint (3) goes into the distributing valve and it is sent to the hydraulic cylinder chamber
(1) causing the movement of the piston.
This movement pushes the oil contained into the chamber (2), through the joint (4), into the tank, passing again in the distributing
valve. The movement of the piston in the direction of the arrow shows a right steering.
The drive shaft (A), rotating clockwise with respect to the distributing valve (B), drives the oil under pressure coming from the pump
through the ports (C), to the left chamber along the ports (E) and joins the discharge and the right chamber circuit by means of the
ports (D).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 7
24107
HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING OPERATION DIAGRAM: LEFT STEERING

The oil coming from the pump through the joint (3) goes into the distributing valve and it is sent to the hydraulic cylinder chamber
(2) causing the movement of the piston. This movement pushes the oil contained into the chamber (1), through the joint (4), into
the tank passing again in the distributing valve.
The movement of the piston in the direction of the arrow shows a left steering.
The drive shaft (A), rotating clockwise with respect to the distributing valve (B), drives the oil under pressure coming from the pump
through the ports (C), to the left chamber along the ports (D) and joins the discharge and the right chamber circuit by means of
the ports (E).
POWER STEERING TYPE ZF

Operation
Figure 8
HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING OPERATION DIAGRAM: NEUTRAL POSITION

19594
With the steering wheel positioned to straight running, the bush (2) is arranged so that the passage of both feeding and discharge
oil of the operating cylinder is closed.
The oil pressures in the right and left chamber of the operating cylinder are balanced.
The oil under pressure coming from the power steering pump (4) through the piping (5) feeds the distributor (1) central grove, flows
in the bush (2) splines, goes out from it and, through the piping (6) returns in the tank (3).
The neutral position of the hydraulic power steering is obtained and, therefore, the vehicle straight ride.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 9
19595
HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING OPERATION DIAGRAM: RIGHT STEERING
The oil under pressure coming from the power steering (4) pump, through the piping (5), feeds the distributor (1) passing in the
central groove.
The rotation of the steering wheel causes a semi-rotation of the bush (2), this one is positioned so that the oil flows in its three splines
and is sent to: the distributor upper groove, in case of right steering (Figure 9), or in the distributor lower groove, in case of left steering
(Figure 10). The latter sends it to the relevant feeding piping (depending on the steering direction) of the operating cylinder chambers.
Meanwhile, the oil contained in the chamber opposite to the fed one returns in the distributor. From the latter one, it flows in the
discharge grooves of the bush (2) then, through the piping (6), returns in the tank (3).
In this way the hydraulic interlocking is obtained.
Figure 10
19596
HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING OPERATION DIAGRAM: LEFT STEERING
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

PRINT 603.43.351/D
The only possible interventions on the power steering 520636 SWIVEL HEADS
! and mechanical steering systems are: replacement of 501438 PROTECTION CASINGS
ball joints, replacement of protective rubber boots,
linkages and rubber bushings. Follow the instructions Figure 12
provided in the specific paragraphs.
Replace the power steering system if problems 4
referred to this system only are found.
5
1
6
2
3
CHECKS AND OPERATIONS ON THE
VEHICLE
Checking maximum pressure 32875
Figure 11
Check that the protection casings of the knuckle heads are in
perfect condition and that their pivots do not present play,
otherwise replace them as described below.
Loosen the nut (3) securing the knuckle head (2) to the tie rod
(4).
Remove the nut fixing the knuckle head to the steering gear
lever and using the extractor (1) 99347074 remove the
knuckle head.
Unscrew knuckle head from the tie rod of the steering box
noting down the number of turns needed to disassemble.
Remove the fixing brackets (5) and extract the protection
casing (6).
In order to re-fit the assembly, perform the above operation
in reversed order, sticking to the following instructions:
- carefully clean the steering gear tie rod knuckle;
19598
- lubricate the protective boot seats on the power steering
Join a pressure gauge (2) on the oil delivery piping on the box to facilitate assembly;
power steering pump (1). Rotate the steering wheel up to the - screw up the knuckle head with the same number of turns
limit stop, speed up the engine and read on the pressure gauge used to disassemble it;
the maximum pressure value, which mast be of 80 bar.
- fit a new o-ring on the power steering box;
- tighten the nuts of the prescribed torque;
Checking hydraulic steering centre (for ”ZF” - Adjust toe-in as shown in the respective section.
power steering only)
501410 STEERING GEAR CONTROL
Lift the front of the vehicle and put the wheels in the straight
ride position. Vehicles equipped with an Air-Bag
Start the engine and fully speed up; if the steering gear put itself
in steering position, the hydraulic steering centre is wrong and
the hydraulic power steering must be changed.
Before doing any work on steering gear control
! components:
501430 Bleeding the air from the hydraulic
system - steering wheel;
Check the oil level in the tank, if necessary top up.
Lift the front part of the vehicle, start the engine and make it - steering control lever system;
idle for a certain period. - steering gear shaft
Check that there is no oil leakage from the hydraulic circuit and
check the tank level. Strictly observe the safety standards described in the following
Slowly rotate the steering wheel in the two steering directions paragraphs for Air-Bag system components.
so that the air contained in the hydraulic system goes out.
Check again the oil level in the tank and, in case top up.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
SAFETY STANDARDS TO BE OBSERVED

DURING REPAIR OR MAINTENANCE OPE-
RATIONS ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED WITH Component removal and refitting shall be performed
AIR-BAG SYSTEM PROVIDED BY SUPPLIER ! EXCLUSIVELY by skilled and authorised personnel.
Failure to comply with the following procedure can
The following Standards shall be strictly observed result in unintentional activation of the system, severe
! when performing any type of repair or maintenance injury or repairs not required. IT IS ABSOLUTELY
operations on vehicles equipped with Air-Bag safety FORBIDDEN TO DISASSEMBLE Air-Bag MODULE
system. COMPONENTS.
Preliminary Standards
Air-Bag modules shall be handled with the utmost care. System components are designed to operate just on vehicles
! Use, transport and storage of these components are of the specified make and type. Air-Bags must therefore not be
governed by the handling procedures described in the adapted, reused or installed on other vehicles.
following paragraphs. Mount and use them only on the vehicles for which they have
been designed and produced.
Before starting any bodywork repair operation, welding or Any reuse, adaptation or installation on a different
whatever work requiring to remove the Air-Bags or the control ! type of vehicle can result in sever injury or death for
unit, proceed as follows: passengers in case of collision.
- set ignition key to ”STOP” and take it out;
- always disconnect the battery, i.e.: disconnect the two
terminals from the relevant pole and insulate them Repairs and inspections required after an
properly by tape; accident
- wait for at least 10 minutes before proceeding; Any safety system component damaged after an
- disconnect control unit connector. ! accident must be replaced.
Do not attempt to repair the control unit, the coil
Store modules with the cover set upwards, inside a metallic cable or the Air-Bag modules.
key-locked cabinet that must be used just with this purpose and
that must not contain other type of materials, especially if
flammables.
Accidents with or without Air-Bag module
Adopted connectors wired to Air-Bag modules are provided activation
with short-circuit clip. It is impossible to activate units
Certain system components must be inspected after any
accidentally until Air-Bag modules are connected to a power
crash, whether the Air-Bag deployed or not. These
source with suitable properties.
components are the following:
A system component not activated in case of collision is to be
- steering column;
considered still ”live” (active).
- steering column support;
Live components that shall be removed from vehicles (due to
defects, warranty expiry or other reasons) shall be returned to - electronic control unit anchoring area and modules;
the suitable Centre using the following procedure.
- coil cable;
- dashboard (in the area of the passenger Air-Bag).
If any faulty condition is found, replace the faulty component.
Accidents with Air-Bag module activation

In case of front impact with total system activation, the
following components must be replaced:
- Air-Bag modules;
- pretensioners;
- electronic control unit;
- coil cable.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Inspect cables and connectors to find any burning, external Safety Standards to observe when handling
insulation melting or damages due to excessive heat. Air-Bag modules
If any faulty condition is found on coil cable, electronic control Driver and passenger Air-Bags usually activate in case of
unit anchoring area and modules, replace the faulty collision through the action of the electronic activation
component. control. Gas (mainly nitrogen) produced under these
conditions are not toxic.
Personnel operating on safety system shall strictly observe the
Painting following safety standards.
Since modules and pretensioners are designed to withstand Personnel operating on these devices shall be suitably trained
the temperatures developed during standard baking operation and must observe the following precautions:
on bodywork, no special safety requirement shall be observed - when removing or replacing activated Air-Bags, wear
during painting or baking.
protective polyethylene gloves and goggles and handle
Do not use open flames when working near the modules. just one module at a time;
Electronic control units (including the Air-Bag one) shall always
be removed when temperature in certain rooms is equal to or - always place the Air-Bag module with the cover and
exceeds 85°C. exhaust hole upwards. Never put something on Air-Bag
cover;
Risks for health - once servicing is over rinse hands with water and neutral
soap, in case of eyes contact with residual powders rinse
Precautions to be observed when handling live Air-Bag are the immediately with fresh water;
following:
- before starting servicing, disconnect both battery cables
- wear protective polyethylene gloves and goggles; (first the negative one), insulate terminals by tape and wait
- wash hands and any exposed body part with water and at least 10 minutes before proceeding;
soap after handling live modules. - metal components of the Air-Bag are hot after explosion,
avoid to touch these components for at least 20 minutes
Overexposure effects from module activation;
Since system is completely sealed there is no potential danger - do not repair Air-Bags but send faulty modules to
of exposure to propelling gas. supplier. Do not heat the Air-Bag module by welding,
Propelling gas mixture is at solid state, it is therefore impossible percussion, drilling, mechanical machining, etc.;
to inhale gas even in case of gas generator cartridge breakage. - never install on vehicle a damaged or fall Air-Bag module;
There is no risk for health in case of gas leakage.
Avoid in any case contact with the skin and do not swallow the - it is prohibited to store Air-Bag modules together with
propelling gas. flammable material or fuels;
In case of: - gas generators must not come into contact with acids,
- contact with the skin: rinse immediately with water and greases or heavy metals since contact can result in
soap; formation of poisonous, noxious gas or explosive
compounds;
- contact with eyes: rinse immediately with fresh water for
15 minutes at least; - never use open flames when working near Air-Bag
modules or system components.
- inhalation: bring immediately the injured person to open
air;
- swallow: make the injured person vomit if conscious.
Always call the doctor in any of the above cases.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Spare parts shall be stored in their original package and Safety Standards to observe when handling
temporary storing shall follow the same procedure as for live pretensioners
modules disconnected from vehicle, i.e. storage into dedicated
In case of front impact, driver and passenger pretensioners
metallic key-locked cabinet (resistant to shocks and provided
usually activate just a minute before Air-Bag modules
with grids to enable natural ventilation). Cabinet shall be
Personnel operating on these devices shall be suitably trained
provided with proper warning plates (RISK OF EXPLOSION
and must observe the following precautions:
- NO OPEN FLAMES - NO OPENING BY
UNAUTHORISED PEOPLE). - when handling activated pretensioners, i.e. with activated
propelling gas, wear protective gloves and goggles;
- once servicing is over rinse hands with water and neutral
Air-Bag module scrapping soap, in case of eyes contact with residual powders rinse
Air-Bag modules must not be scrapped together with the immediately with fresh water;
vehicle, but must be previously removed and activated as
described in the following pages. - disconnect both battery cables (first the negative one),
Air-Bag units must always be activated before scrapping. insulate terminals by tape and wait at least 10 minutes
An Air-Bag module not exploded during an accident is to be before proceeding;
considered still ”live”. - pretensioner produce heat during activation, it is
Live materials MUST NOT BE ACTIVATED but must be sent therefore necessary to wait at least 10 minutes before
to a specialised centre (in Italy to GECMA in Chivasso) operating;
specifying on the freight note:
- protect pretensioners against fall or shock during handling
- Air-Bag DEVICE CONTAINING PYROTECHNIC or transport; damaged or fallen pretensioners must not
CHARGE TO BE DEACTIVATED. be used and must be returned to supplier communicating
Devices must be sent using their original packages only. Should the reason for;
the original package be not available, a new one shall be - never carry pretensioners by the seat belt;
requested to SPARE PARTS.
In case of Air-Bag device replacement, the original package - pretensioners must be protected against sparks and open
shall obviously be kept in good conditions to send the flames and must not stay in contact with surfaces with
non-activated device. temperatures exceeding 100°C for more than 6 hours;
FOREIGN MARKETS shall observe local current laws and - propelling gas not burnt is flammable, therefore
regulations. generator components must never be disassembled,
damaged or tampered;
- it is prohibited to store pretensioners together with
flammable material or fuels;
- gas generators must not come into contact with acids,
greases or heavy metals since contact can result in
formation of poisonous, noxious gas or explosive
compounds;
- seat belts with pretensioners shall be stored in proper
key-locked compartments or cabinets, suitably aerated
and away from open flames and heat sources.
Failure to observe these procedures can result in
! unintentional Air-Bag module activation and severe
injury. Live Air-Bag units must NOT be disposed of
using the common disposal procedure. Live Air-Bag
units contain substances dangerous for health that can
cause severe injury if the sealed container is damaged
during disposal.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Propelling gas residues shall be considered with attention.

After any impact involving pretensioner activation, These residues that are mostly concentrated on the generator
! the seat belt is unserviceable and must be replaced. body or in small amount in the bag can contain copper or
chlorides (e.g. potassium chloride). Combustion residues are
very alkaline and corrosive.
Always wear skin protections and goggles. Activated Air-Bags
must always be stored in dry and well ventilated places.
Pretensioners scrapping
Non-activated pretensioners (not installed on vehicle) must
always be activated before scrapping. Non-activated
pretensioners installed on vehicle must not be scrapped
together with the vehicle, but must be previously removed. Removing and scrapping non-activated
Pretensioner not activated during an accident is to be Air-Bag module from a repairable vehicle
considered still ”live” and therefore it is necessary to follow the
procedure described in this manual.
Never cut the cables or tamper the connector
! between vehicle wiring and Air-Bag module.
Operations on system components Connector contains a safety clip.
Once servicing operations are completed, the system shall be
tested by Modus, I.W.T. or equivalent diagnostic equipment.
Air-Bag components are provided at installation with a label
with a removable part showing system and components date If connector is cut or removed from Air-Bag unit, the safety
of installation. clip is disabled and this can result in unintentional activation
The removable part is detached and data are stored together and severe injury.
with the test report provided by Modus, by the workshop that Air-Bag systems have a backup power supply located in the
has installed the components. control unit. This power supply shall be deactivated by
After 10 years from installation, unless prior replacement, a new disconnecting the two battery terminals and waiting for at
Air-Bag system (cable and components) shall be installed. As least 10 minutes before starting any operation on whatever
said above components technical data and the date of Air-Bag component.
installation will be filed. Keep the bag and the external bag cover in opposite direction
to body when handling a live Air-Bag module. When placing
a live Air-Bag on the bench or some surface like that, set the
Removing and scrapping activated Air-Bag bag and the cover facing upwards and far from people. Never
module and pretensioner from vehicle place objects near a live Air-Bag, since in case of module
Always wear gloves and goggles when handling activated deployment objects will be thrown away like shells.
Air-Bag or pretensioner. Wash hands and exposed skin with
water and neutral soap after handling activated Air-Bag or
pretensioner. In case of exposure to secondary products, rinse
eyes immediately with fresh water. Failure to observe these
indications can result in severe injury.
To remove and scrap activated Air-Bag module and
pretensioner proceed as follows: Always store live Air-Bag modules an pretensioners
- follow instructions contained in this manual to remove ! in fresh, dry, close and safe place. Do not expose to
activated Air-Bag module and pretensioner; open flames or temperatures exceeding 150°C.
Never cut, drill, solder or weld an Air-Bag module or
- disconnect Air-Bag module and pretensioner mechanical its components. Failure to observe these indications
fixings; can result in unit damages, fire, unintentional
- disconnect component connector form Air-Bag wiring; deployment and severe injury.
- put Air-Bag module and pretensioner in the proper sealed
nylon bag;
- send to authorised collection/disposal centre;
- dispose of, recycle or scrap deployed Air-Bag module and
pretensioner using the suitable procedure.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Damaged live Air-Bag modules and pretensioners (e.g. electric Air-Bag module deployment
connection breakage), shall be store far from corrosive or Remote activation
oxidising substances. Failure to observe these indications can General instructions:
result in fire and/or severe injury. - activation procedure can be performed in open area,
suitably defined and fenced, far from flammable materials,
liquids or other substances and far from people. Set the
Air-Bag module on a firm surface and lock it;
Air-Bag modules and pretensioners are provided
! with backup power supply giving the electrical pulse - clean this area from any material (glass, instruments, parts,
required to bag deployment when the accident etc.) which could become like shells during deployment;
damages the battery or the cables before the sensor - check whether connector C2 is disconnected from
activates the gas generator. remote activation device (10 m).
- connect electric connector C1, specified by vehicle
Figure 13 manufacturer, to remote activation Air-Bag module;
- connect connector C2 to remote activation device;
A - connect remote activation device to 12V circuit or
equivalent device;
- stand protected;
- wear goggles and protective clothes;
- depress double activation push-button;
- wait for approx. 20 minutes before touching the activated
C1 Air-Bag module since it is hot;
- dispose of, recycle or scrap, as required, activated Air-Bag
Lb modules as described in the relevant chapters.
Activating Air-Bag modules and electronic

C2 pretensioners installed on unrecoverable
vehicles
This procedure is to be used when scrapping a vehicle with one
or more live Air-Bag modules. This procedure is valid whether
L Air-Bag system and/or electronic pretensioners are sound or
not.
It is recommended to activate pyrotechnic charges on vehicles
by directly connecting the electric connector of each module
C2 to remote activation device.
+12V 8663
Deployment procedure shall be performed outdoor,

AIR-BAG MODULE REMOTE ACTIVATION DIAGRAM ! away from people and in a well defined area. Check
for absence of objects and flammable fluids near
modules and pretensioners. Do not remain on the
vehicle during activation and remember to close the
doors. Stand protected (e.g. behind a wall, a vehicle,
C1 = Air-Bag module connector etc.) against thrown-away objects, if any. Let
C2 = remote activation device connector (Air-Bag generators and modules cool down after deployment
connector with safety clip, counterparts with male (20 min. at least before proceeding). Failure to
pins on Air-Bag side) observe these indications can result in severe injury.
Lb = braid length = approx. 1 m
L = main cable, safety distance 10 m
A fenced area
B Remote activation device
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

General instructions: Figure 14
- follow all WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS and safety ABP ABG

instructions reported in this manual;
C1 C1
- bring the vehicle outside in the provided area;
- remove from the area around the Air-Bag covering all Lb Lb
materials and slugs (glasses, tools, components etc.) and
make sure that no inflammable liquids are nearby;
- disconnect the two battery cables (first the negative C2 C2
cable) and wait for at least 10 minutes before proceeding;
Lb
- use a connecting braid (L= about 1 m) with specific C2
C1
terminal connector for the electric connection with the
module to activate;
PTG
- reach the electric module connection (Air-Bag or
electronic pretensioner), following the instructions of this
manual;
- disconnect connector C1 of the pretensioner or Air-Bag
module;
- check whether connector C2 is disconnected from
remote activation device;
- connect the electric connector C1 of the pretensioner or
Air-Bag module to the connecting braid of the remote
activation device; L
- connect connector C2 to remote activation device;
C2
- place people in a safe place;
- connect the remote control device to a 12 Volts circuit A
or equivalent device;
- press the double activation push-button to activate all
pretensioners and Air-Bag modules at the same time; +12V
8664
- after activating the Air-Bag modules and pretensioners,

leave them cooling before touching them (about 20 VEHICLE PYROTECHNIC CHARGES ACTIVATION DIAGRAM, SINGLE
minutes); ACTIVATION
- after activating the Air-Bag modules and pretensioners, ABG= driver Air-Bag
the vehicle can be scrapped - by squashing or crushing -
ABP = passenger Air-Bag
and/or recycled, depending on the cases.
C2 = remote activation device connector
C1 = specific pyrotechnic charge connector
L = main cable, safety distance 10 m
Lb = braid length
PTG = driver pretensioner
A. Remote activation device
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
541415 Upper steering gear shaft removal

Figure 15 Figure 17
62107
62108
Disconnect the battery (2) cables (1-3) first the negative cable - Lift the Air-Bag module (1) in order to disconnect
(1) then the positive one (3) and insulate them taping the connector (2);
terminals.
- Remove the Air-Bag module (1) from the steering wheel
(3).
After removal, non-activated Air-Bag modules must

! be stored with plate laying on the surface in a suitable
key-locked cabinet.
For vehicles equipped with Air-Bag For all vehicles

Follow the safety standards given in the relevant chapter and Remove fixing nut (4).
wait for 10 minutes before proceeding.
Figure 16 Figure 18
62109
62108
Set front wheels in straight running and mark (→) steering

For vehicles without Air-Bag, remove the pressure-fit cover wheel assembly position (1) on upper steering gear shaft (2)
(2) on the steering wheel. Remove the steering wheel (1) from the shaft (2).
For vehicles with Air-Bag, turn the steering wheel and position For vehicles with Air-Bag, make sure not to extract or damage
it as shown in the figure, in order to easily reach the screws (1 coil device cable (3).
and 3) and remove them.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Mark universal joint (6) assembly position on lower shaft (8)

Make sure that steering wheel removal has lifted the and loosen the fixing screw (7).
! top cap of the coil device. If the top cap turns, it will Remove the screws (4-5) and disconnect the upper steering
be necessary to block it by bringing it to the outside. gear shaft (1) from the lower steering gear shaft (8).
If you hear a ”click”, it means that the cap is blocked. To replace or disassemble switch (12) it is necessary to
For any removals of the winding device, meticulously unscrew screws (11) using a proper punch or drill them in
observe what specified in “Electric System” section. order to eliminate the most of material to remove them. Make
sure not to damage switch thread in case of reuse.
At refitting, the new screws (11) must be tightened till the
hexagonal head is sheared from its rod.
Figure 19
Refitting
For refitting reverse removal operations and observe the

following recommendations:
- reconnect shafts and refit steering wheel matching the
marks made during removal operations;
- at refitting, the self-braking nuts and the steering wheel
fixing nut must always be replaced;
- tighten nuts and screws to the prescribed torque;
62110 - after tightening steering wheel fixing nut to upper shaft, it
is necessary to crimp the nut;
Remove the two screws (2) and remove the upper protection (1).
Remove the three screws (4) and remove the lower - when refitting is completed, carry out operation test on
protection (3). indicator switch and horn.
Figure 20
541413 Lower steering gear shaft removal
Figure 21
62111
62112
Cut electric cable fixing clamps and disconnect connectors
(9-10-13). Loosen screw (3) locking indicator switch retaining
clamp to gear shaft (1). Remove the upper steering gear shaft as described in the relevant
Remove the indicator switch (2) from the gear shaft (1). chapter (operation 541415). Lift cover (1) from floor. Unscrew
the three fixing screws (2) of lower shaft (3) support (4).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 22
3
4 6
5 7
2
8
9
10
62113
Mark universal joint (6) assembly position on hydraulic power

steering (3) shaft. Refitting
Loosen screw (7) and remove hydraulic power steering lower
shaft. For refitting reverse removal operations and observe the
following recommendations:
Refitting - after refitting the hydraulic power steering to the front
cross member or to the driving axle, turn the pinion up
For refitting reverse removal operations, complying with to bring the rack to the end of the stroke. Turn again the
pinion to the opposite direction for a number of turns
upper steering gear shaft refitting operations.
equal to half of the turns required to the rack to complete
the whole stroke (approx. 2 turns);
- in this position, set steering wheel in straight running
5014 HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING condition and connect the elastic joint to hydraulic power
541413 Hydraulic power steering removal steering pinion fork or the universal joint to the hydraulic
power steering.
- At refitting, the self-braking nuts must not be reused but
Proceed as follows to remove the hydraulic power steering: replaced with new ones.
Loosen front wheel fixing screws or nuts.
Lift the front part of the vehicle, support it by proper stands - tighten screws and nuts to the prescribed torque;
and brake rear wheels. - fill hydraulic power steering system tank in and carry out
Position tool 99321024 near the wheels, remove wheel fixing the drainage as described in the relevant section;
screws or nuts. Remove the wheels. - check and adjust toe-in as described in the relevant
Remove cap (1) from hydraulic power steering oil tank. section.
Disconnect pipes (4-5) from hydraulic power steering (3) and
drain system oil into a suitable container.
Steer wheel hubs in both directions to drain out oil from the The only repair operations to carry out on hydraulic
system. ! power steering and mechanical steering are the
Remove nuts (8) fixing kingpins (10) to steering levers (9) and following: joint head replacement and rubber boots
remove the latter using extractor 99347074. replacement. In these cases, follow the operations
Loosen the screw (7) fixing the universal joint (6) to the described in the relevant section.
hydraulic power steering shaft (3). If defects depending only on the hydraulic power
Remove the fixing screws (2) and remove the hydraulic power steering are found, replace it.
steering (3).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351/D
Steering linkage replacement

Removal Refitting
Figure 23 Figure 25
86010
86012
Use suitable pincers to loosen the retainer clamps (2 and 4),

remove the protective boot (3) from the power steering box POWER STEERING SYSTEM SPARE PARTS
(1) and move it aside to access the steering linkage connection 1. O-ring - 2. Clamp - 3. Protective boot - 4. Clamp -
(5) to the rack rod. 5. Steering linkage - 6. Nut - 7. Head - 8. Tube - 9. Tube -
10. Power steering unit - 11. Rubber bushing.
Figure 24
Reassemble by reversing the disassembly sequence; observe
the following precautions:
- replace o-rings (1) and clamps (2 and 4) with new parts;
- lubricate (→) protective boot (3) seats on power steering
unit (10) to facilitate assembly of the boots;
- tighten steering linkage joints (5) at 100 ± 10 Nm (10 ±
1 kgm).
Rubber bushing replacement procedure

Use a suitable ram to remove/refit rubber bushings (11).
86011
Tighten the rack rod (2) in a vice with lead covered jaws,
loosen the joint (3) and remove the steering linkage (4).
Remove the o-ring (1). Repeat the operations to remove the
opposite steering linkage. Follow the removal/refitting
operations described in the respective sections to reuse ball
joints.
Do not take the rack rod (2) to end of stroke after

removing the linkage (4) to avoid damaging the
power steering o-rings.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

501450 POWER STEERING PUMP

8140 engine power steering pump
Figure 26
19597
8140 ENGINE POWER STEERING PUMP OPERATION

Operation As soon as the hydraulic force (pressure difference multiplied

Rotating the shaft (5) and the rotor (8) joined to it and the by the piston surface (4)) exceeds the spring force, the piston
blades (6) able of a radial motion, are pressed by their moves leftward so that the exceeding oil returns in the suction
centrifugal force and by the oil pressure against the guide track channel (11) of the pump, through the free hole. In this way
of the stator (7). the steering gear is fed by a delivery of hydraulic oil almost
Each couple of near blades forms a chamber, which has as side constant at any speed of the pump (and therefore of the
limits thrust plates (9 and 10). engine).
The suction and delivery chambers are arranged so that the An overpressure valve (3) is fitted in the delivery relief piston (4).
radial hydraulic stresses exerted on the rotor (8) balance one When an overpressure occurs in the hydraulic circuit, the oil
another. pressing on the valve (3) increasing the pressure, overcomes
Four splines both made on the front plate cover side (10) and the spring resistance and through an hole, discharge in the
in the internal plate (9), make the oil under pressure reach the suction channel (11) of the pump.
surfaces of the blades directed to the rotation centre, helping In this way, the oil pressure adjustment is obtained.
in this way the centrifugal force.
The oil coming from pressure chambers comes to the delivery
relief valve through holes and then, through a choke (2) at the
delivery joint (1)
The oil under pressure downstream the choke is sent, through
suitable holes, to the side fitted with spring of the delivery relief
piston (4).
Increasing the number of turns, and therefore the pump
delivery, an increasingly higher difference in pressure between
the chambers upstream and downstream the choke is caused
on the side fitted with spring of the piston (4).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

F1A engine power steering pump Power steering pump overhaul procedure
Replace the power steering pump if poor operation is found.
Figure 27
86013
F1C engine power steering pump
Figure 28
89008
Operation of the power steering pumps for FIA/F1C engines

is similar to that of 8140 engines.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY HYDRO-PNEUMATIC SYSTEM - BRAKES 1
Print 603.43.351
SECTION 11
78 Hydro-pneumatic system
52 Brakes
Page
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR AIR/HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
(MISCELLANEOUS AND GENERATORS) . . 3

SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS (VALVES) . . . 4

(TANKS AND ACCUMULATORS) . . . . . . . . 10

(CONVERTERS, CYLINDERS AND CALIPERS) 11

(CALIPERS AND CYLINDERS) . . . . . . . . . . . 12

(SEMI-COUPLINGS AND COUPLING HEADS) 13

(INDICATORS AND SWITCHES) . . . . . . . . . 15

SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS (BRAKES) . . . 16
PIPES AND COUPLINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
- General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
- Re-flanging rigid pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
- Bending rigid pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
- Cutting rigid pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
- Replacing flexible hoses with threaded couplings 19
- Replacing flexible hoses with quick

release couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
BRAKING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
- Outline diagram for vehicles 29L - 35S . . . . . . 22
- Outline diagram for vehicles

35C - 40C - 45C - 50C - 60C - 65C . . . . . . . . 23
- Outline diagram for vehicles 29L - 35S

with ABS - ABD - EBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
- Outline diagram for vehicles 35C - 40C - 45C -

50C - 60C - 65C with ABS - ABD - EBD . . . . 25
- Braking system main components layout . . . . . 26
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

2 HYDRO-PNEUMATIC SYSTEM - BRAKES DAILY
Print 603.43.351/D
Page Page
- Location of the main brake system components on

vehicles with ABS - ABD - EBD . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 ANTI-SKID DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 - Antilock braking system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
- Service brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 - Electronic braking distribution device (EBD) . . 51

- Emergency brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 - Anti-skid braking device (ABD) . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
- Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 - Electro-hydraulic control unit/modulator . . . . . 51
BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
- Rev sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
- Front and Rear disc brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
- Phonic wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
BRAKE REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
- Front brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
- Replacing brake linings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA -
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 - Brake caliper removal and refitting . . . . . . . . . . 54
SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA - BRAKES . . . . . 44 REAR BRAKES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
- Replacing brake linings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
- Functional check of vacuum brake system . . . . 46
- Brake caliper removal and refitting . . . . . . . . . . 57
BRAKING SYSTEM MAIN COMPONENTS . . . . 47
OVERHAUL OF BRAKE CALIPERS . . . . . . . . . . 57
- Vacuum pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
- 2x42 - 2x44 - 2x46 - 2x52
- Vacuum servo brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Brembo brake calipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
- Bleeding air from the hydraulic circuit . . . . . . . 48 - 1x52 Brembo brake calipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
- Bleeding air from the hydraulic OVERHAULING BRAKE DISCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

circuit with de-aerator device . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
MACHINING AND GRINDING OF DISC BRAKES 59
- Mechanically controlled load sensing valve (vehicles
35C - 40C - 45C - 50C - 60C - 65C) . . . . . . . 49
WHEEL NUT TIGHTENING SEQUENCE . . . . . 60
- Regulation of load proportioning valve on vehicle 49
OVERHAULING PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . 60
- Dual mechanically controlled load sensing valve
(vehicles 29L - 35S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 - Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
- Adjusting the load sensing valve . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 - Adjusting parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR AIR/HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS

(MISCELLANEOUS AND GENERATORS)
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
HYDRAULIC FLOW
AIR FLOW
ELECTRICAL LINE
ABLE TO ROTATE
CROSSOVER OF CONNECTED LINES
PRESSURE TEST POINT
QUICK-RELEASE COUPLING
COCK
1 2
COCK WITH OUTLET
SILENCER
COMPRESSOR 0 2
0 2
ENERGY SAVING COMPRESSOR
4
VACUUM PUMP 3 2
HYDRAULIC PUMP 0 2
HYDRAULIC HAND PUMP
32780
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR AIR/HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS (VALVES)
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
CONDENSATE SEPARATOR
FILTER 1 2
DEHUMIDIFIER 1 2
4
DEHUMIDIFIER 21 1
22
DEHUMIDIFIER WITH BUILT-IN 21 1

REGULATOR 22
23
AUTOMATIC CONDENSATION
DRAIN VALVE
CONTROLLED CONDENSATION
DRAIN VALVE
HAND CONDENSATE DRAIN VALVE
7
CONTROLLED ANTI-ICING UNIT 1 2
AUTOMATIC ANTI-ICING UNIT

1 2
21 23
PRESSURE REGULATOR WITH 1
INDEPENDENT CIRCUIT
22 24
PRESSURE CONTROLLER 1 21
PRESSURE CONTROLLER 1 21
23
PRESSURE CONTROLLER
(GOVERNOR) 1 2
PRESSURE LIMITING VALVE 1 2
32782 32783
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
PROPORTIONAL REDUCING VALVE 1 2
MATCHING VALVE 1 2
21 23
FOUR CIRCUIT PROTECTION VALVE 1
22 24
21
THREE CIRCUIT PROTECTION VALVE 1 23
22
21
TWO CIRCUIT PROTECTION VALVE 1
22
NON-RETURN AIR INLET VALVE 1 2
NON-RETURN AIR INLET VALVE 1 2
SAFETY VALVE
CHECK VALVE 1 2
2
CHECK VALVE 2
1
2
DOUBLE SHUT-OFF VALVE
11 12
U
DIFFERENTIAL DOUBLE SHUT-OFF
VALVE M S
THROTTLE VALVE WITH QUICK

RETURN 1 2
THROTTLE VALVE
CONTROL VALVE 1 2
32783 32784 32785
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
DUMP VALVE 1 2
BRAKE CONTROL VALVE

11 A 21
12 P 22
BRAKE CONTROL VALVE

11 21
BRAKE CONTROL VALVE 11 21
4
12 22
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL VALVE 21

11 22
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL VALVE

1 2
BRAKE VALVE
1 2
CONTROL VALVE
1 2
CONTROL VALVE 21
1 22
RETARDER CONTROL VALVE

13 R 23
4
SERVO CONTROL VALVE
1 2
32786
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
41 42
SERVO CONTROL VALVE
1 2
SERVO CONTROL VALVE FOR

SINGLE LINE
1 2
41 42 43
TRAILER BREAKING TRIPLE CONTROL
VALVE
1 2
42
41 43
TRAILER BREAKING TRIPLE CONTROL
VALVE WITH BUILT-IN SERVO
SWITCHING 11 22
12
1 2
LOAD PROPORTIONING VALVE
11 21
DUAL LOAD PROPORTIONING
VALVE 12 22
12
LOAD PROPORTIONING VALVE 21
WITH BY-PASS 11
LOAD PROPORTIONING VALVE 1 2

WITH BUILT-IN RELAY
4
4
LOAD PROPORTIONING VALVE

WITH BUILT-IN RELAY WITH AIR 1 2
CONTROL
41 42
32786 32787
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
LOAD PROPORTIONING VALVE 1 2

WITH AIR CONTROL
41 42
LOAD PROPORTIONING 1 2
VALVE WITH AIR CONTROL
4
PROPORTIONAL REDUCING VALVE 1 2
4
SLAVED PROPORTIONAL
REDUCING VALVE
1 2
2
SLAVED LIMITING VALVE 1
LEVELLING VALVE
21 22
1 2
LEVELLING VALVE
12 23
HAND OPERATED SUSPENSION
RAISING CONTROL VALVE 11 21
LEVELLING VALVE WITH 23 24

BUILT-IN TRAVEL LIMITER
21 22
32787 32788
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
2
42
PROPORTIONAL CONTROL VALVE
41
1
13
HAND OPERATED SUSPENSION 11 21
CONTROL VALVE WITH ELECTRICAL
MONITORING
12 22
1 3
ELECTROPNEUMATIC VALVE
1 2
ELECTROPNEUMATIC VALVE 1 2
ELECTROPNEUMATIC VALVE 21
1 22
VR ABS HZ2
HYDRAULIC MODULATOR FOR ABS VL HZ1
HL HR
4
AUGMENTER VALVE
1 2
32788
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004


(TANKS AND ACCUMULATORS)
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
COMPRESSED AIR TANK
BRAKE FLUID RESERVOIR
AIR SPRING
32789
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


(CONVERTERS, CYLINDERS AND CALIPERS)
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
VACUUM SERVO BRAKE
VACUUM SERVO BRAKE
DUAL CIRCUIT MASTER CYLINDER
SINGLE CIRCUIT MASTER CYLINDER
AIR/HYDRAULIC CONVERTER
AIR/HYDRAULIC CONVERTER
HYDRAULIC BRAKE CYLINDER
SLAVE CYLINDER
BRAKE CYLINDER
SPRING CYLINDER
COMBINED BRAKE CYLINDER
FIXED DISK BRAKE CALIPER
32790 32791
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004


(CALIPERS AND CYLINDERS)
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
FLOATING DISK BRAKE CALIPER
FLOATING DISK BRAKE CALIPER

WITH PARKING
MECHANICAL FLOATING DISK BRAKE

CALIPER
SERVO CLUTCH
SERVO CLUTCH
32791
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


(SEMI-COUPLINGS AND COUPLING HEADS)
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
A
”ISO” SEMICOUPLING
M
ISO VERSION
A
”ISO” SEMICOUPLING
M
ISO JOINT VERSION
A
”CUNA” SEMICOUPLING
B
ITALY VERSION
M
”CUNA” SEMICOUPLING
A
”NATO” SEMICOUPLING
M
NATO VERSION
32792 32793
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004


(SEMI-COUPLINGS AND COUPLING HEADS)
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
4
1 5
2 3
SEMI-COUPLING
V
Z
A
VERSION WITH SINGLE DUCT
A
M
SEMI-COUPLING
V
Z
A
12
22
SEMI-COUPLING 4
12
A
22
M
SEMI-COUPLING 4
1 2
32793
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


(INDICATORS AND SWITCHES)
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE GAUGE
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
LAMP
MECHANICAL OPERATED SWITCH
PRESSURE SWITCH
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH
AUDIBLE WARNING
SENSOR
32794
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

GRAPHIC SYMBOLS FOR AIR/HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS (BRAKES)
DESCRIPTION SYMBOL
SINGLE CYLINDER HYDRAULIC BRAKE
TWIN CYLINDER HYDRAULIC BRAKE
DUAL SERVO HYDRAULIC BRAKE
DUAL SERVO HYDRAULIC BRAKE

WITH PARKING BRAKE
SINGLE CAM OPERATED BRAKE
TWIN DUAL CAM OPERATED BRAKE
32795
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
799512 PIPES AND COUPLINGS

General Figure 3
The pipes in the braking systems of commercial vehicles are
currently of two types:
- flexible nylon hose with single or two-ply structure and in
the following diameters 6-8-10-12-16 mm supplied as
spares in metre lengths;
- rigid metal pipes of the following diameters:
4.75-6.35-8-10-12 mm. Pipes from ∅ 4.75 to ∅ 10 mm
are supplied as spares in straight lengths of 4, 5 and 6 m,
while those which are over 10 mm diam. are supplied as
spares ready cut, bent and flared.
31973
Re-flanging rigid pipes
Deburr pipe (1), insert union fitting (2) on this and position it
Figure 1 between blocks (3) bearing against pin (5). Lock pipe (1) with
screw (4).
Figure 4
1
A
C 31971
TYPES OF RE-FLANGING OF RIGID PIPES 31974
A type re-flanging Move pin (4) to neutral position. Tighten screw (1) until matrix
die (2) comes up against blocks (3), thus forming the end of
Figure 2 the pipe (5).
B type re-flanging
Figure 5
31972
Position of press 99386523 (3) the blocks (1) so that the

stamped numbers indicating the diameter of the pipes to be
worked are facing towards the due (2). The choice of the
31975
matrix die (2) depends on the diameter of the pipe to be
re-flanged. Additionally, the diameter of the pipe that can be Fix matrix die (2) to press 99386523 (1).
re-flanged is stamped on the matrix die. For re-flanging follow the instructions given above for A type
re-flanging.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

C type re-flanging
Figure 6 Figure 9
31976 31979
Fit nut (2) and ring (3) over the pipe (1). Position pipe (1) in tool (3) and bend the pipe by acting on lever
(2).
Figure 7 Figure 10
31980
31977
To remove the pipe (2) from the tool (3) use lever (1).
Fit union fitting (2) and tighten so that ring (3, Figure 6) is locked
over the pipe (1).
Bending rigid pipes Cutting rigid pipes

Figure 8 Figure 11
31978 31981
Position pipe (2) in tool (3) 99386523 and tighten screw (1).
Fit tool (1) 99386523 and select components (2) and (3) By holding the pipe (2) still, rotate the tool (3) until the pipe
according to the diameter of the pipe to be bent. has been completely cut.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

After having cut the pipe, deburr and shape the ends as - Re-flange the support ring when fitted on the vehicle or
described previously. at the test bench on a union fitting.
- The pressure and the final distance of the pressure ring
NOTE By turning tool (3) around the pipe (2), screw (1) front edge from the reinforcement bush should be in
becomes loose. To completely cut the pipe, you must accordance with those shown in the table below.
tighten the screw (1) as soon as it becomes loose.
NOTE When the hose is incorrectly fitted, do not reuse the

Replacing flexible hoses with threaded hose once the bush and support ring have been
couplings removed.
Carefully follow the instructions below:
Hose Distance between Fitting
Figure 12 bush edge and ring pressure
mm edge mm (*) (N/mm2)
6x1 da 1 a 1.5 0.040

Twin-layer
8x1 da 2 a 2.5 0.050
10 x 1.5 da 2 a 2.5 0.050
Single layer 12 x 1.6 da 2 a 2.5 0.060
16 x 2.34 da 3 a 3.5 0.060

10397
- only use type approved hoses;

(*) See reference h, Figure 14.
- check the condition of the new hose, that must be free
from cracks, cuts or scores;
- cut the hose at 90°, with respect the to axis, to the required
length by means of pipe-cutter pliers 99387050; Figure 14
Fit the following in the specified order over the hose:
- nut (3), pressure ring (2) (the thickest part should be facing
the nut (3)) and the reinforcement bush (1);
- the bush must be in perfect condition (it must be free from
deformation or hammer dents).
Figure 13
10399
1. Reinforcement bush - 2. Pressure ring - 3. Nut -

10398 4. Union fitting - 5. Hose - h. Distance between bush edge
and ring edge (see table)
ASSEMBLY OF REINFORCEMENT BUSH
A = CORRECT ASSEMBLY Introduce the end of the prepared hose into the union fitting
B = INCORRECT ASSEMBLY until the reinforcement bush flange rests in the appropriate
seat:
- Fit the reinforcement bush with tool 99372219 ensuring
contact between its flange and end of the hose. - to lock the nut on the union fitting, tighten this up by hand
and then by means of a box wrench and dynamometric
- Make sure that the end of the hose penetrates into the wrench; this must tightened up to the required driving
rake throat of the flange. torque.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

When fitting the hose to the vehicle, some important points Replacing flexible hoses with quick release
should be borne in mind: couplings
- bends must comply with minimum radii, so as to avoid
constrictions;
Swivel couplings:
Diameter of pipe Minimum radius of curvature
mm mm Figure 16
6x1 ∼ 40
8x1 ∼ 50
10 x 1.5 ∼ 60
12 x 1.6 ∼ 75
16 x 2.34 ∼ 100
Make sure that the hoses are not in contact with sharp
! edges or with sharp metal parts or sources of heat, 39306
but are at a minimum safe distance of 15mm from
these. screw the coupling into the threaded seating provided on the
air valve, and tighten it to the driving torque indicated in the
table.
- when hoses run through chassis members or metal parts,
make sure that the holes through which they pass are
fitted with rubber grommets, and that these are in good Banjo couplings:
condition;
- avoid sliding the hose along sharp edges which might Figure 17
cause cuts;
- when the hose has to be attached to existing pipe work,
take into account of the additional heat to which it may
be subjected (power steering pipe work). In this case the
hose must be protected with shields;
- when the hose has been connected, check that it is not
under tension between the attachment points, instead
leaving it slightly slack to take up the more substantial
variations in temperature, especially for short lengths;
- before fitting, thoroughly clean the hoses by blowing
compressed air through them to safeguard operation of 1
the system.
39307
Figure 15
- check that the seal ring (1) is in its seal;
- tighten the coupling until the seal gasket is in contact with
the valve;
- direct the valve correctly and, by keeping the moveable
part still, lock the hexagonal nut to the driving torque
indicated in the table.
Swivel and banjo couplings:
13132
COUPLING DRIVING TORQUE (Nm + 10%)
- Protect the hoses if grinding or welding operations are
THREAD
carried out on the vehicle; a notice is fitted in the cabin
indicating the precautions to be observed to avoid M 10 x 1.0 mm 22
damage.
M 12 x 1.5 mm 24
For greater safety and convenience in working, it is
M 14 x 1.5 mm
! advisable to remove the hoses during these 28
operations.
M 16 x 1.5 mm 35
When fitting is finished, check that all seals (unions, couplings,
M 22 x 1.5 mm 40
etc.) are completely free from leaks.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 18 Figure 20
39308
- Insert the hose (2) by hand into the coupling (1), with a
force between 30 and 120 N according to the diameter
of the hose, so that reference mark L1 is inside the hose
while mark L2 remains visible.
33977
- only use type approved hoses;

Figure 21
- check the condition of the new hose, that must be free
from cracks, cuts or scores;
- cut the hose at 90°, maximum error 15°, with reference
to the axis. Use pipe-cutter pliers 99387050 to cut to the
required length;
Figure 19
33978
When removing couplings (1) on pneumatic components, check

the condition of the seal ring (2) and, if necessary, replace.
A
COUPLING SEAL RING DIMENSIONS
33976
THREAD
A = Mark to identify end of tube travel M 10 x 1.0 10.1 x 1.6
- use indelible ink to clearly mark two reference notches on M 12 x 1.5 11.0 x 2.0
both diametrically opposite faces of the pipe at an angle
of ≥ 75°, set to distances L1 and L2, to ensure correct M 14 x 1.5 -
fitting in place.
M 16 x 1.5 15.0 x 2.0
M 22 x 1.5 -
NOTE L1 and L2 vary according to the diameter of the hose
and are to be measured at the longer part of the hose
(see Figure 18).
Whenever a hose is removed from a quick release
D L
0
+0,5
-0,5
L1 +1
-0,5
L2 +1 ! coupling, the coupling itself must be replaced. Spare
quick release couplings are supplied complete.
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
6 19.8 17 22
8 20.5 18 23 Quick release and threaded couplings are not

12 25 22 28 ! interchangeable. This also applies to flexible hoses
used with quick release couplings and flexible hoses
16 27.1 24 30
used with threaded couplings.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

BRAKING SYSTEM
Outline diagram for vehicles 29L - 35S
Figure 22
52378
1. Pressure reducer - 2. Vacuum tank (2 litres) - 3. Servo brake - 4. Hydraulic pressure test point - 5. Dual mechanical operated
load proportioning valve (for vehicles with mechanical suspensions) - 6. Parking brake lever - 7. Rear brake caliper -
8. Rear brake disc - 9. Dual pneumatic operated load proportioning valve (for vehicles with pneumatic suspensions) -
10. Front brake disc - 11. Front brake caliper - A. From pneumatic suspension circuit.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Outline diagram for vehicles 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C - 60C - 65C
Figure 23
52379
1. Pressure reducer - 2. Vacuum tank (2 litres for 35C, 40C vehicles, 5 litres for 45C / 50C / 60C / 65C vehicles) -
3. Servo brake - 4. Hydraulic pressure test point - 5. Dual mechanical operated load proportioning valve (for vehicles with
mechanical suspensions) - 6. Parking brake lever - 7. Rear brake caliper - 8. Rear brake disc - 9. Parking drum brake - 10. Dual
pneumatic operated load proportioning valve (for vehicles with pneumatic suspensions) - 11. Front disc brake - 12. Front brake
caliper - A. From the pneumatic suspension circuit.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Outline diagram for vehicles 29L - 35S with ABS - ABD - EBD
Figure 24
74938
1. Electro-hydraulic modulator - 2. Vacuum pump - 3. Vacuum tank - 4. Servo brake - 5. Hydraulic pressure test point -
6. Parking brake lever - 7. Rear brake caliper - 8. Rear brake disc - 9. Electronic control unit -
10. Wheel revolutions sensor - 11. Phonic wheel - 12. Front brake disc - 13. Front brake caliper.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Outline diagram for vehicles 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C - 60C - 65C with ABS - ABD - EBD
Figure 25
52381
1 Electro-hydraulic modulator - 2. Vacuum pump - 3. Vacuum tank - 4. Servo brake - 5. Hydraulic pressure test point -
6. Parking brake lever - 7. Parking drum brake - 8. Rear brake disc - 9. Rear brake caliper - 10. Electronic control unit -
11. Wheel revolutions sensor - 12. Phonic wheel - 13. Front brake disc - 14. Front brake caliper.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

26
Print 603.43.351/D
Base - May 2004

Figure 26
Vehicles 29L - 35S
HYDRO-PNEUMATIC SYSTEM - BRAKES
Braking system main components layout

52382
1. Servo brake - 2. Front brake caliper - 3. Front brake disc - 4. Vacuum pump - 5. Vacuum tank - 6. Pressure test points -
7. Brake-force corrector - 8. Rear brake disc - 9. Rear brake caliper.
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
Print 603.43.351
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
Figure 27
Vehicles 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C - 60C - 65C
52383
1.Servo brake - 2. Front brake caliper - 3. Front brake disc - 4. Vacuum pump - 5. Vacuum tank - 6. Pressure test point - 7. Proportional load valve - 8. Rear brake disc - 9.
Rear brake caliper
27
Base - May 2004

28
Print 603.43.351/D
Base - May 2004

FRONT LH BRAKE PIPING
Figure 28
REAR RH
Vehicles 29L - 35S
FRONT RH BRAKE PIPING

REAR LH
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM WIRING
Location of the main brake system components on vehicles with ABS - ABD - EBD
74992
1. Vacuum brake - 2. Electrohydraulic modulator - 3. Front brake disk - 4. Phonic wheel - 5. Wheel revs sensor - 6. Vacuum device - 7. Vacuum chamber -
8. Electronic control unit - 9. Front brake caliper - 10. Hydraulic pressure check sockets - 11. Rear brake disk - 12. Rear brake caliper - 13. Brake lights indicator switch (on
vehicles with EDC there are two switches), inform the ABS - EDC control unit that the vehicle is braking - 14. Hydraulic accumulator -
DAILY
15. Electrohydraulic modulator - 16. Electronic control unit.
Print 603.93.281
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
REAR BRAKES PIPING
Figure 29
FRONT BRAKES PIPING
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM WIRING

Vehicles 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C - 60C - 65C
74993
1. Vacuum brake - 2. Electrohydraulic modulator - 3. Front brake disk - 4. Phonic wheel - 5. Wheel revs sensor - 6. Vacuum device - 7. Vacuum chamber -
8. Electronic control unit - 9. Front brake caliper - 10. Hydraulic pressure check sockets - 11. Rear brake disk - 12. Rear brake caliper - 13. Brake lights indicator switch (on vehicles
with EDC there are two switches), inform the ABS - EDC control unit that the vehicle is braking - 14. Hydraulic accumulator -
15. Electrohydraulic modulator - 16. Electronic control unit.
29
Base - May 2004

DESCRIPTION BRAKES
Service brake Front and Rear disc brakes
The service brake is of the pedal type with two independent - Front BREMBO 2x42 (model 29L - 35S);
hydraulic circuits. Both circuits are served from the
vacuum-type servo brake. - Front BREMBO 2x44 (model 25L - 35S Model Year
2004);
The load proportioning valve is inserted in the hydraulic circuit
of the rear brakes so as to compensate the braking action of - Front BREMBO 2x44 (model 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C);
the rear wheels as a function of the load being carried. - Front BREMBO 2x52 (model 60C - 65C);
By means of a servo brake the pedal acts on the twin section - Rear BREMBO 1x52 (model 29L - 35S);
master cylinder that puts the brake liquid under pressure.
- Rear BREMBO 2x44 (model 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C).
Movement of the pistons in the caliper casing, as a
consequence of the hydraulic pressure, causes the brake - Rear BREMBO 2x46 (model 60C - 65C).
linings to be compressed on both surfaces of the brake disc An electric wire is embedded in the brake linings which is
and therefore brings the vehicle to a standstill. connected to a tell-tale light on the driving panel to indicate
the lining wear.
Emergency brake
Incorporated in the service brake, the twin circuit system

allows a single axle to brake even when the other brake is
faulty, by acting on the service brake pedal.
Parking brake
Mechanical design consisting of a hand lever and associated

linkages and wires that act on the rear wheel bakes.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
DIAGNOSTICS
4 - Delayed action of parking brake
Main operating faults in the brake system: 5 - Vehicle skids when braking
1 - Rear axle service brake is inefficient or irregular
6 - Rapid brake lining wear
2 - Front axle service brake is inefficient or irregular
7 - Too long or abnormal travel of brake pedal
3 - Inefficient or no parking brake
8 - Noisy brakes
REAR AXLE SERVICE BRAKE IS

1 INEFFICIENT OR IRREGULAR
Leaks or breakage in pneumatic system pipes. Tighten or replace damaged fittings. Replace broken or
YES damaged pipes.
NO
Worn or vitrified brake linings. Overhaul or replace the brake linings.

YES
NO
Automatic clearance device is faulty (caliper 1x52). Replace the brake caliper.
YES
NO
Rear brakes are faulty. Overhaul the rear brakes, replacing worn parts.
YES
NO
Servo brake is faulty. Overhaul or replace servo brake

YES
NO
Load proportioning valve is faulty (vehicles without Adjust and, if necessary, replace the load
ABS). YES
proportioning valve.
(Continue)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Brake liquid has not been periodically changed. Replace brake liquid.
YES
NO
Presence of air in hydraulic system. Bleed-off any air from hydraulic system.
YES
NO
ABS system is faulty. Make diagnosis with Modus.

YES
FRONT AXLE SERVICE BRAKE IS

2 INEFFICIENT OR IRREGULAR
Leaks or breakage in pneumatic system pipes. Tighten or replace loose or damaged fittings. Replace
YES broken or damaged pipes.
NO

YES
NO
Overhaul or replace servo brake

Servo brake is faulty.
YES
NO
Brake caliper is faulty. Overhaul and, if necessary, replace brake caliper.

YES
(Continue)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Front brakes are faulty. Overhaul and, if necessary, replace any worn parts.
YES
NO
Brake liquid has not been periodically changed. Replace brake liquid.
YES
NO
Presence of air in hydraulic system. Bleed-off any air from hydraulic plant.
YES
NO
ABS system is faulty. YES Make diagnosis with Modus.
3 INEFFICIENT OR
NO PARKING BRAKE
Tie-rods are faulty. Adjust or overhaul tie-rods and replace any worn
YES parts.
NO

YES
NO
Rear brakes are faulty. Overhaul the brakes and replace any worn parts.
YES
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351/D
DELAYED ACTION OF PARKING

4 BRAKE
Tie-rods are faulty. Overhaul tie-rods and replace any worn parts.
YES
NO
Shoe return springs are faulty. Replace shoe return springs.

YES
NO
Rear calipers are faulty (calipers 1x52). Overhaul calipers and replace any worn parts.
YES
NO
Parking drum brake is faulty (2x44 calipers). Adjust or overhaul the parking drum brake and replace
YES any worn parts.
5 VEHICLE SKIDS WHEN BRAKING
Leaks or breakage in hydraulic system pipes. Tighten or replace loose or damaged fittings. Replace
YES broken or damaged pipes.
NO
Load proportioning valve is faulty (vehicles without Adjust and, if necessary, replace load proportioning
ABS). YES valve.
(Continue)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
Front brakes are faulty. Overhaul front brakes.

YES
NO
Rear brakes are faulty. Overhaul rear brakes.

YES
NO
ABS system is faulty. Make diagnosis with Modus.

YES
RAPID BRAKE
6 LINING WEAR
Load proportioning valve is faulty (vehicles without Adjust and, if necessary, replace load proportioning
ABS). YES valve.
NO
Brakes are faulty. Overhaul brakes.

YES
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351/D
TOO LONG OR ABNORMAL TRAVEL

7 OF BRAKE PEDAL
Servo brake is faulty. Replace servo brake.

YES
NO
Automatic clearance device is faulty (calipers 1x52). Replace automatic clearance device.
YES
NO
Brake liquid with low boiling point due to: Replace brake liquid (use type Tutela DOT SPECIAL).
- Failure to perform yearly change YES
- Presence of water in system

- Use of wrong liquids.
NO
Presence of air in hydraulic system. Bleed-off any air from hydraulic system.
YES
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351
8 NOISY BRAKES
Worn brake linings. Replace brake linings.

YES
NO
Foreign bodies between discs and brake linings. Remove all foreign bodies from between brake linings
YES and discs.
NO
Disk brakes off-centred. Adjust or replace disc brakes.

YES
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351/D
TIGHTENING TORQUES
TORQUE
COMPONENT
Nm kgm
Screw securing cover and brake disc to wheel hub (Front axle 5818 - 5823) 98.1 ÷ 107.9 9.8 ÷ 10.7
Screw securing brake disc to wheel hub (Front axle 5817) 19.5 ÷ 24 1.9 ÷ 2.4
Screws to fasten wheel (Front axle 5817 - Rear axle 450210) 160 16
Screws to fasten wheel (Front axle 5818) 284 ÷ 342 28.4 ÷ 34.2
Screws to fasten brake caliper support to stub axle (Axle 5818 - 5817) 176 ÷ 217 17,6 ÷ 21,7
Screws to fasten cover to stub axle (Front axle 5818 - 5817 - 5823) 6 ÷ 7.5 0.6 ÷ 0.7
Ring nut securing brake disc to wheel hub (Front axle 5817 - 5823) 256 ÷ 314 25.6 ÷ 31.4
Ring nut securing wheel hub (Front axle 5818 - 5819) 257 ÷ 314 25.7 ÷ 31.4
Screw securing ring nut (Front axle 5818 - 5819 - 5823) 20 ÷ 24 2 ÷ 2.4
Screw securing caliper to caliper mounting (Front axle 5818 - 5819 - 5823) 176 ÷ 217 17,6 ÷ 21,7
Nut securing wheel (Rear axle 450311/1 - 450511) 290 ÷ 349 29 ÷ 34.9
Screw securing disc and drive shaft (Rear axle 450210) 13 ÷ 21 1.3 ÷ 2.1
Screw securing drive shaft to wheel hub (Rear axle 450311/1 - 450511) 63 ÷ 76 6.3 ÷ 7.6
Screw securing brake caliper (Rear axle 450210) 176 ÷ 217 17.6 ÷ 21.7
Ring nut retaining wheel hub bearing (Rear axle 450311/1 - 450511) 618 ÷ 667 61.8 ÷ 66.7
Screws securing brake disc to wheel hub (Rear axle 450311/1 - 450511) 69 ÷ 76 6.9 ÷ 7.6
Screws securing caliper moutning to shoe mounting (Rear axle 450311/1 - 450511) 180 ÷ 220 18 ÷ 22
Fixing stud to brake disc (spread IVECO 1905683 sealant on the thread) 85 ÷ 104 8.5 ÷ 10.4
(Front axle 5818 - 5819)
Screw to fasten brake caliper support to stub axle (Front axle 5819) 154 ÷ 170 15.4 ÷ 17
Screw securing plate and brake disc to wheel hub (Front axle 5819) 94 ÷ 115 9.4 ÷ 11.5
Nut securing wheel (Front axle 5819 - 5823 - Rear axle 450517/2) 284.5 ÷ 343.3 28.5 ÷ 34.3
Screw to fasten cover and sheet metal guard to rear axle box (Rear axle 450210) 81 ÷ 100 8.1 ÷ 10
Screw to fasten cover and sheet metal guard (Rear axle 450210) 10 ÷ 16 1 ÷ 1.6
Ring nut securing drive shaft (Rear axle 450210) 300 ÷ 350 30 ÷ 35
Screw securing shoe mounting to rear axle box (Rear axle 450311/1 - 450511) 85 ÷ 97 8.5 ÷ 9.7
Screws securing sheet metal guard (Rear axle 450311/1 - 450511) 8 0.8
Screw securing caliper to caliper mounting (Front axle 5817) 176 ÷ 217 17.6 ÷ 21.7
Sensor support retaining screw (Rear axle 450311/1 - 450511 - 450517/2) 5÷7 0.5 ÷ 0.7
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TIGHTENING TORQUES
TORQUE
COMPONENT
Nm kgm
Screw securing brake disc to wheel hub (Front axle 5823) 98 ÷ 108 9.8 ÷ 10.8
Screws to fasten brake caliper support to stub axle (Axle 5823) 176 ÷ 217 17.6 ÷ 21.7
Ring nut securing wheel hub (Front axle 5823) 363 ÷ 441 36.3 ÷ 44.1
Screw securing drive shaft to wheel hub (Rear axle 450517/2) 56 ÷ 69 5.6 ÷ 6.9
Screw securing brake caliper (Rear axle 450517/2) 150 ÷ 177 15 ÷ 17.7
Ring nut retaining wheel hub bearing (Rear axle 450517/2) 441 ÷ 540 44.1 ÷ 54
Screws securing brake disc to wheel hub (Rear axle 450517/2) 54 ÷ 59 5.4 ÷ 5.9
Fixing stud to brake disc (spread IVECO 1905683 sealant on the thread) 52 ÷ 64 5.2 ÷ 6.4
(Front axle 5823)
Screw securing shoe mounting to rear axle box (Rear axle 450517/2) 70 7
Brake shoe/axle casing retaining screw (Rear axle 450517/2) 52 ÷ 57 5.2 ÷ 5.7
Calliper guide bushing socket head screw 28 ÷ 32 2,8 ÷ 3,2
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
TOOLS
99301005 Brake disc assembly
99306010 Appliance to bleed air from brake and clutch systems
99355087 Wrench (65 mm) for wheel hub nut (450311/1 - 450511)
99355176 Wrench for ring nut retaining drive shaft bearing (rear axle 450210)
99357080 Spanner (91.5 mm) for adjusting wheel hub bearings nut
(Rear axle 450517/2)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

99370241 Tool for mounting drive shaft bearing (rear axle 450210).
99370496 Guide for mounting wheel hub (front axle 5819 - 5818)
99370497 Guide for mounting wheel hub (rear axle 450311/1 - 450511)
Tool for driving bearing and phonic wheel onto wheel hub (rear axles
99370498 450311/1 - 450511)
99370713 Guide for mounting wheel hub (front axle 5823)
99372236 Tool to retract brake caliper piston (rear axle 450210)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351/D
99372249 Parking brake shoes adjusting tool
Pair of gauges to check pressure and to adjust hydraulic brakeforce

99372269 distributor
99374132 Tool for fitting wheel hub internal seal (use with 99370006)
(Axle 450517/2)
99386523 Flanging tool for brake system pipes
99389819 Torque wrench (0 ÷ 10 Nm) with square 1/4” connection.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA - HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

DESIGNATION
Vacuum pump
- BOSCH D.151-B
Emptying time (4.5 litre tank) at a pressure of: 0.5 bar 4.5 S
0.8 bar 12.5 S
Vacuum servo brake
- BOSCH 136.905 (single-chamber)
Pneumatic cylinder diameter 279.4 mm
Hydraulic (or master) cylinder diameter 23.81 mm
Stroke 21 + 21 mm
Stroke 20.5 + 20.5 mm
Stroke 21 + 21 mm
- BOSCH 0204021854 (dual)
Stroke 20.5 + 20.5 mm
- BOSCH 0204021934 (dual)
Pneumatic cylinder diameter 254 mm
Stroke 23.5 + 17.5 mm
Pneumatic operated load proportioning valve
- BOSCH 26/08094 - BOSCH 796801
Ratio 0.25
- BOSCH 796803
Ratio 0.15
Braking calibrator for pneumatic suspensions
- BOSCH 0204031150
Ratio 0,25
Electro-hydraulic control unit/modulator
- BOSCH 0 265 219 441 (vehicles 65C)
- BOSCH 0 265 219 442 (vehicles 65C)
- BOSCH 0 265 219 426 (vehicles 35C - 50C)
- BOSCH 0 265 219 427 (vehicles 35C - 50C)
- BOSCH 0 265 220 500 (vehicles 29L - 35S)
- BOSCH 0 265 220 501 (vehicles 29L - 35S)
- BOSCH 0 265 231 450 (vehicles 29L - 35S MY04*)
- BOSCH 0 265 231 451 (vehicles 29L - 35S MY04*)
- BOSCH 0 265 231 452 (vehicles 35C - 50C MY04*)
* MY04: Model Year 2004
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

SPECIFICATIONS AND DATA - BRAKES
5817
FRONT AXLE DISC BRAKES 5818 5819 5823
J
Brake caliper cylinders:

∅ - quantity 2 2 2
- diameter ∅ mm 42 44 44 52
Brake lining thickness:
S - normal S mm 12 15
- min. allowed S mm 2.9 ÷ 3.4 (*)
2760.2
∅ Disc brake diameter ∅ mm 2760,2 2900.2
2900,2
Disc brake thickness:

220.2
- normal S mm 220.2
260,1
S
- min. allowed S mm 19
(*) Remaining thickness of friction material to have the light on (cutting cable)
J Vehicles Model Year 2004
AXLE WHEEL HUBS
Type of front axle 5817 5818 5819 5823
Wheel hub bearings UNIT-BEARING
- 0.110 min
Wheel hub bearings end play mm
- 0.140 max
Not adjustable
Wheel hub bearing axial clearance adjustment Retaining nut torque
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

450511
REAR AXLE DISC BRAKES 450210 450517/2
450311/1
Brake caliper cylinders:
∅ - quantity 1 2 2
- diameter mm 52 44 46
Brake lining thickness: 15
S - min. allowed S mm 2.9 ÷ 3.4 (*)
+0,2
∅ Disc brake diameter mm 276 0.2 289 −0
306 0.2
Disc brake thickness:

- normal S mm 16 0.1 22 0.1 22 0.1
S - min. allowed S mm 13 19 19
Parking drum brake
Drum diameter:
+0,15 +0,15
- Nominal ∅ mm 172 −0 190 −0
Max 173 mm 191
S Brake lining thickness:
- Nominal S mm 4.25 mm 6.2
- Min. allowed S1 mm Min. 1.5 mm 3.5
Brake lining diameter:

∅
- Nominal ∅ mm 71.2 ÷171.5 189.2 ÷189.5
B k lilining
Brake i width
idth L mm ~42
42
L
G
Cl
Clearance b
between
t b
brake
k lilinings
i anddd
drum G mm 0 2÷0 5
0.2÷0.5 0 3÷0 4
0.3÷0.4
(*) Remaining thickness of friction material to have the light on (cutting cable)
450511
AXLE WHEEL HUBS 450210 450517/2
450311/1
Wheel hub bearings UNIT-BEARING SET-RUGHT
Wheel hub bearings end play mm - 0.16

Nm - 0÷4
kgm - 0 ÷ 0.4
Not adjustable
Adjustment of wheel hub bearings end play
Retaining nut torque
Rear axle oil TUTELA W140/M-DA (SAE 85 W 140)
Quantity Litres 1.85 1.90 3
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Print 603.43.351
CHECKS
Device Designation Checks

Pressure Reducer Connect a vacuum meter to the intake line.
At full operation the pressure reduction must reach the value
of 0.80 ÷ 0.85 bar. If this value is not obtained, check if there
are any leaks in the pressure piping and servo brake
components.
Check that the distance between the top of the rotor and
cover (with unit fitted) is comprised in the range 0.07 ÷
0.14mm.
Vacuum servo brake Check the functionality and that there are no leaks. With the
vacuum meter fitted on the piping between the pressure
reducer and servo brake with engine at full speed, check that
the pressure reduction values are in the range 0.80 ÷ 0.85 bar
with the pedal both released and pressed fully down for a
period of 1 minute of rotation of the engine.
Brake liquid compensation tank Check the level of the brake liquid and eventually top up with
Tutela DOT SPECIAL to the specified level. Change the brake
liquid once per year.
Load proportioning valve Check that the values measured with special manometers, via
the test points, correspond to those indicated on the
self-adhesive plate applied to the inside of the vehicle.
Disk brake caliper Check the condition of the brake linings; check for scratches
on the discs and the efficiency of the pistons.
Pipes and fittings Ensure that metal pipes are in perfect condition, with no dents
or cracks. Also make sure that they are not near sharp edges
of the body work or chassis that could damage them.
Check that the rubber and cloth flexible hoses are not in
contact with oil or mineral grease, or rubber solvents. Press
hard on the brake pedal and check that the pipes are not
blown, and check that there are no leaks.
Check that all brackets fastening the pipes are securely fixed
- loose fastenings cause vibrations that could give rise to
breakage.
Check that there are no leaks from fittings, otherwise tighten
them fully, taking care when tightening not to cause irregular
pipe torsion.
In all the above cases the parts are to be replaced if there is a
minimum of doubt as to their efficiency.
Apart from their condition, it is recommended to replace hoses
after considerable mileage, or after a period of long vehicle use.
This will avoid sudden breakage due to age and fatigue.
Functional check of vacuum brake system

With the engine stopped, press the brake pedal a few times in order to annul the vacuum in the servo brake. Press the pedal once
again and keep it pressed, in the brake position, by putting a certain pressure on it. Start the engine and check the pedal stroke:
- if the stroke of the pedal increases, this implies that the servo brake and pipes are satisfactory;
- if the pedal remains still, this implies that the outside has penetrated into the vacuum plant that is not perfectly sealed, or the
servo brake is faulty.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

BRAKING SYSTEM MAIN COMPONENTS
790530 Vacuum pump

Figure 30
32277
This is the component which generates a reduction in

pressure for operation of the servo brake.
Diagnostics
TROUBLE POSSIBLE CAUSES CURE

Oil leakage from cover Incorrect driving torque Lock screws to correct driving torque indicated in appropriate
between power reducer and table.
engine.
Cover seal surface not Check the seal surfaces, replace any defective parts or place
completely flat. them on a flat surface.
Broken seal between pump Replace seal.
and engine.
Poor efficiency Excessive backlash between Replace blades, or the entire pressure reducer.
the blades and sliding surfaces.
Bad sealing of connecting pipes Check the seal and eventually replace the connecting pipes or
or uni-directional valve. replace the uni-directional valve.
Insufficient lubrication. Carefully clean the oil pipes.
794101 Vacuum servo brake
Figure 31
This is a device which increases the force applied by the pedal

and consists of two main components:
- a power reducer pneumatic section;
- an hydraulic section (master cylinder and brake liquid
tank).
The servo brake is manufactured in such a way that in case
the pneumatic section fails, the brakes can still work. In this
case the braking action is obtained by one master cylinder.
32279
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

784010 Bleeding air from the hydraulic circuit Having terminated this operation connect the load
Front brake circuit proportioning valve control rod.
Figure 32
Finish bleeding-off air from the brake circuit, top up
! to the maximum level with Tutela DOT SPECIAL
brake liquid.
45021
784010 Bleeding air from the hydraulic
circuit with de-aerator device
One end of a transparent plastic pipe (2) should be fitted to Front brake circuit
the bleeder screw (1) with the end placed into a container
(3) that has been partially filled with brake liquid. Figure 34
Repeatedly press the brake pedal
By maintaining the brake pedal in the down position unscrew
the bleeder screw (1) one full turn.
Tighten the bleeder screw, repeatedly press the brake pedal.
Repeat the above operation until the brake liquid comes out
in a uniform manner.
Bleed off the air from the opposite brake assembly. Check
that the level of brake liquid in the relevant tank is always
sufficient.
This operation will allow the air in the hydraulic circuit liquid
piping to be expelled.
52399
Rear brake circuit
Figure 33
As an alternative you can bleed-off air from the brake circuit
with the deaerator device 99306010 by following the
procedures below:
- load the air tank (4);
- fill the tank with brake liquid (5);
- one end of a transparent plastic pipe (6) should be fitted
to the bleeder screw with the end placed into a
container that has been partially filled with brake liquid;
- replace the brake liquid tank cover with one (7) taken
from the box supplied with the deaerator;
45022
- insert the deaerator 99306010 pipe (1) on the cover of
the brake liquid tank;
- unscrew the bleeder screw one full turn, open the cock
Disconnect the load proportioning valve control rod and valve (3) until there is a reading of 1 ÷ 1.2 bar on the
lock it at the top so as to set the proportioning valve in the manometer (2).
fully open position.
When the brake liquid comes out in a uniform manner from
Bleed off the air from the hydraulic circuit as described for the the circuit, close the bleeder screw and discharge air from the
front brake circuit. aerator tank (4). Repeat this operation for all wheels.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
784310 Mechanically controlled load sensing Figure 37

valve (vehicles 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C
- 60C - 65C)
Figure 35
52385 52387
The load proportioning valve automatically adjusts, as a function LOAD PROPORTIONING VALVE PLATE
of the load acting on the rear axle, the braking torque produced The operations are to be carried out in the following order:
by the brakes of the axle itself. This valve has the important job, - set the vehicle with its rear wheel on a weighing machine
especially when the vehicle is light without any load, to limit the 99336914 or on the brake test bench;
braking torque that would otherwise block the rear wheels with - connect the pressure gauges 99372269 or Modus to the
a consequent skidding and jerking of the vehicle. pressure test points upstream from the load
Figure 36 proportioning valve;
- if the pressure gauges are not equipped with a valve for
automatic bleeding, bleed off the air through the
pressure gauges by unscrewing the appropriate ring nuts;
- load the vehicle so as to have a load (B) on the rear axle
divided equally between the right- and left-hand sides of
the vehicle with a tolerance of ±5 kg;
Figure 38
52386
PERFORMANCE CURVE
A. Inlet pressure (Bar) - B. Outlet pressure (bar)
Ratio = 0.25
Regulation of load proportioning valve on
vehicle
To stop the vehicle from skidding or the wheels from being
locked when braking, you must check the device at regular
intervals and eventually adjust if necessary. This consists in
verifying the values indicated on the plate (Figure 37) applied
on the inside of the bonnet.
52388
If there is no plate or if the data is missing, ask the
manufacturer for a duplicate by indicating: - loosen the nut (1);
!
- Vehicle type - connect a weight (A, page 50) to the plate (5) at point
- Number of leaf springs (2);
- Vehicle pitch - tighten the nut (1) at the specified torque and remove
the loads (A and B).
- Weight of rear axle
- start up the engine;
- Number of load proportioning valve
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

- Load the vehicle to obtain the loading sequence shown 784310 Dual mechanically controlled load
in the table in fig. 37, equally shared on the rear axle on sensing valve (vehicles 29L - 35S)
the left and right sides of the vehicle with a tolerance of
± 5 kg.
Figure 40
Figure 39
52390
The load sensing valve automatically regulates the braking
torque generated by the brakes of the rear axle according to
52389
the load weighing on the rear axle.
- with the engine idling and a pressure of 100 bar, shown It has the important function, especially when the vehicle has no
on the pressure gauge (3) upstream from the sensing load, of limiting the braking torque that would lock the rear
valve, check that the outlet pressure shown on the wheels causing the vehicle to skid.
pressure gauge (2) downstream from the sensing valve
corresponds to the values given on the rating plate,
otherwise replace the sensing valve; Figure 41
- Proceed as follows if the pressure read downstream of
the corrector do not correspond to the values shown in
Figure 37.
- Disconnect the bar (4, Figure 38) from the axle.
- in addition, use the transmission lever (3, Figure 38) to
check that the load sensing valve stem runs smoothly in
its seat, otherwise replace the sensing valve;
- reconnect the adjustment rod (4, Figure 38) to the rear
axle;
Perform the check by gradually increasing the

! pressure. 52391
To check the load sensing valve, all the components of the

braking system must be in full working order. In addition, in the A. Inlet pressure (in bar) - B. Outlet pressure (in bar)
case of replacing the leaf springs for special versions it is Ratio = 0.15
necessary to install a new rating plate whose values are correct.
Adjusting the load sensing valve
- Once the checks have been completed, verify the This adjustment is similar to that described above,
operation of the brakes by testing them. using the following loads.
TABLE OF LOADS FOR ADJUSTING THE LOAD
SENSING VALVE
Model Load (A) Load (B)
kg kg TABLE OF LOADS FOR ADJUSTING THE LOAD
35C 3.5 1500 SENSING VALVE
40C 3 1500
45C 4 1800
50C semi-elliptic and Model Load (A) Load (B)
double flex. parabolic leaf springs 9 1800 kg kg
50C single flex. parabolic 29L 9 1500
leaf springs. 4.5 1800 35S 6,5 1500
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ANTI-SKID DEVICES
The following devices are integrated in a single system with 526716 Electro-hydraulic
a single control unit. control unit/modulator
Antilock braking system (ABS) Vehicles 29L - 35S

This system comprises an electro-hydraulic modulator and
an electronic control unit mounted on the modulator, Figure 42
located in the engine bay, four sensors and four phonic
wheels that measure the number of turns of the wheels.
The tendency for one or more wheels, whether front or rear,
to lock, which is detected by the sensors through the pulses
of the phonic wheels, is communicated to the electronic
control unit that, by means of the electro-hydraulic
modulator, independently or simultaneously regulates the
pressure in the hydraulic circuit of the front and rear axles.
Electronic braking distribution device (EBD)

This system acts at a level prior to ABS operation. It ensures
a sensitive control over the tendency of the rear wheels to
lock with respect to the front ones, when braking, by
optimizing the braking force in the different conditions of 52392
load, travel and state of use of the vehicle.

This device substitutes the function of the mechanically
operated load sensing valve. If this device fails, braking takes
place with the same pressure on front and rear brakes.
Anti-skid braking device (ABD)

This system acts by automatically braking the wheels that on Veicoli 29L - 35S MY04 (ABS 8)
starting tend to skid.
It operates with speeds up to 40 km/h. Figure 43
89013
1. Hydraulic accumulator - 2. Electro-hydraulic

modulator - 3. Electronic control unit
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Vehicles 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C - 60C - 65C 526713 Rev sensor
Figure 44
566712 Phonic wheels
Figure 46
35383
52393
The system for measuring the speed of rotation of the wheels
is composed of the wheel speed sensor and the phonic wheel.
The phonic wheel is housed or incorporated in the brake disc
of the wheel and turns at the same speed as the wheel. By
Vehicles 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C - 60C - 65C MY04 (ABS 8) induction in the sensors it generates alternating voltages whose
frequency is in proportion to the speed of rotation of the
Figure 45 respective wheel. These voltage signals are transmitted to the
control unit for processing.
89012
1. Hydraulic accumulator - 2. Electro-hydraulic modulator -

3. Electronic control unit
The electronic control unit has the task of controlling the

electro-hydraulic modulator solenoid valves according to the
signals from the wheel speed sensors.
The electro-hydraulic modulator modulates the pressure of
the brake fluid in both front and rear circuits according to the
control signals from the control unit.
The devices comprising the control unit and

electro-hydraulic modulator of the various models
! are not interchangeable.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

5274 BRAKE REPAIRS

Front brakes Figure 49
The following operations have been carried out on vehicles
with 2x44 Brembo front calipers.
They should be considered similar also for 2x42 - 2x52
Brembo front calipers unless stated otherwise.
527417 Replacing brake linings
The braking system effects safety. All repairs and

! servicing operations must be exclusively carried out
by skilled, qualified personnel.
79524
The oil inlet hose to the calliper must not be Disconnect the wear sensor connection (2). Loosen the
disconnected during the operations that follow. screw (1). Remove the bushing (4) by using a screwdriver as
! a lever. Remove the calliper body (3) from the support by
making it turn on the other bushing to extract the brake pads.
Figure 47 Figure 50
455026
Set the vehicle on level ground and lock the rear wheels. Loosen 45845
the nuts (1) securing the front wheels. Lift the front of the Remove the brake linings (1).
vehicle with a hydraulic lift and rest it on two stands (3).
Unscrew the nuts (1), take off the cover (2) and remove the Figure 51
wheel.
For 2x42 calipers
Figure 48
79253
Retracting the pistons will increase the level of brake

52272
fluid in the reservoir. For this reason, check the fluid
does not spill out of the reservoir and damage
Remove the protective rubber plug (1).
vehicle paintwork during the operation.
Use a retractor or other suitable device (2) to retract the

pistons (1).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 53
Be careful not to damage the surface of the pistons
! and the protective boots in contact with the tool.
Clean the pad resting surface with suitable materials and

products (e.g. with a damp cloth). Avoid using nitro thinner
or petrol, etc., which could damage protective boots.
Inspect the state of the dust caps. If they are out of shape or
broken, it is necessary to replace them. Remove the dirt from
the brake caliper with a wire brush, without damaging the
dust caps. Check the surfaces of the brake disc and make sure 46487
there is no corrosion or scoring. Small surface cracks are
acceptable, but it is then necessary to grind the brake disc as
Use a torque wrench (3) to tighten the screws (1) at the
described under the relevant heading. Replace worn brake
specific torque.
discs.
Connect the wear sensor connection (2).
The screw (1) is treated with threading locking
! adhesive, therefore every time the screw (3) is
We suggest that both brake discs be renewed also removed it must be changed.
! in case one of them only needs to be replaced.
As regards brake lining pairs, always replace a For 2x42 calipers
complete series for each axle.
Figure 54
Always overhaul both brake calipers also in case one
of them only seems to be damaged.
Figure 52
52272
Fit on the protective rubber plug (1).

527413 Brake caliper removal and refitting
Removal
For 2x42 calipers
79526
Figure 55
Insert new brake liners (1) in the brake calliper mount and
check that they slide in their seats.
52273
Remove the protective rubber plugs (1 and 2).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

For all brake calipers For 1x52 calipers

Figure 56 Figure 58
50734
52274
Remove the protective rubber plug (1).
Disconnect the lining wear sensor electrical connection (2).
Disconnect the pipe (3) from the caliper (4) and drain off the For all brake calipers
brake fluid.
Unscrew the screws (1 and 5) and remove the brake caliper Figure 59
(4).
Refitting
Check the pistons are fully retracted inside the

caliper body.
Refit by carrying out the operations described for
removal in reverse order, observing the required
tightening torques.
Every time the screws (1 and 5, Figure 56) are
! removed, they must be replaced.
46287
Drive slowly without prolonged, sudden brake
! application during the first period of use of new
brake pads because braking efficiency is reduced. Disconnect the wear sensor connection (2). Unscrew the
screws (1) and turn the brake caliper (3) over.
Press the brake pedal repeatedly to restore pressure in the If the liners are replaced in vehicles with leaf spring
system and correct brake pedal stroke. suspensions, extract both bushings and entirely separate the
calliper body from the mount.
527440 REAR BRAKES
The following operations have been carried out on vehicles
with 2x44 and 2x46 Brembo rear calipers.
They should be considered similar also for 1x52 Brembo rear Figure 60
calipers unless stated otherwise.
527447 Replacing brake linings
Figure 57
45045
Set the vehicle on level ground, loosen the nuts (1) securing
the wheels. 46849
Lift the front of the vehicle with a hydraulic lift and rest it on Remove the brake linings (1).
two stands (2).
Retract the pistons are shown in Figure 51.
Unscrew the nuts (1) and remove the wheels.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Inspect the state of the dust caps. If they are out of shape or Using tool 99372236 (1) retract the piston (3) by pushing
broken, it is necessary to replace them. constantly in line with the piston axis with a force of approx.
300 ÷ 400 N while turning the tool clockwise until the piston
Remove the dirt from the brake caliper with a wire brush, (3) is fully retracted.
without damaging the dust caps.
Clean the pad resting surface with suitable materials and During this operation, take care not to twist the
products (e.g. with a damp cloth). Avoid using nitro thinner ! protective cap (2) or let it swell out.
or petrol, etc., which could damage protective boots.
Let the air out of the cap by moving it away from the
Check the surfaces of the brake disc and make sure there is brake caliper.
no corrosion or scoring. Small surface cracks are acceptable,
but it is then necessary to grind the brake disc as described
under the relevant heading. Replace worn brake discs. For all brake callipers
Figure 63
We suggest that both brake discs be renewed also

! in case one of them only needs to be replaced.
As regards brake lining pairs, always replace a
complete series for each axle.
Always overhaul both brake calipers also in case one
of them only seems to be damaged.
Figure 61
46290
Tighten the screw (3) to the required torque with a torque

wrench (1).
Connect the wear sensor connection (2).
The screw (1) is treated with threading locking

! adhesive, therefore every time the screw (3) is
removed it must be changed.
46850
Fit the new linings (1) to the brake caliper mounting. Ensure For 1x52 calipers
linings are free to slide in their seats.
Figure 64
Push brake caliper pistons (2) as far as they can go. Then
position the caliper on the brake linings.
For 1x52 calipers

Figure 62
50734
Fit on the protective rubber plug (1).

For all brake callipers
Drive slowly without prolonged, sudden brake

! application during the first period of use of new
brake pads because braking efficiency is reduced.
51223
Press the brake pedal repeatedly to restore pressure in the
system and correct brake pedal stroke.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

527443 Brake caliper removal and refitting Remove the retaining clip (1) and unhook the parking brake
Removal rope.
For 1x52 calipers Removal
Figure 65
Refit by carrying out the operations described for

removal in reverse order, observing the required
tightening torques.
Replace the hose if anomalies are found.
Every time the screws (1 and 4, Figure 66) are

! removed, they must be replaced.
527413 OVERHAUL OF BRAKE CALIPERS

51753 2x42 - 2x44 - 2x46 - 2x52 Brembo brake calipers
Remove the protective rubber plugs (1 and 2). Disassembly
For all brake calipers
Figure 68
Figure 66
46046
45033
Disconnect brake shoe wear sensor electrical connection (3). Place the caliper on a work bench. Insert a block of wood (2)
Disconnect the calliper (5) hose (2) from the pipe with a so that the pistons can be removed without damaging them,
suitable tool (cap the pipe to prevent leakage of brake fluid). and to make the operations safe for the technician.
Loosen the screws (1 and 4) and remove the brake calliper
(5). By means of a gun (3), introduce air into the brake caliper the
pistons (1) are extracted.
Remove the dust boots from the respective seats.
NOTE Remove the hose at the bench.
Figure 69
For 1x52 calipers
Figure 67
45034
Remove the dust covers (1 and 2) and keep the sliding bushes
(3).
50735
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 70 Re-assembly
Lubricate the pistons and seal rings with brake liquid
Tutela DOT SPECIAL.
Figure 71
45035
Remove the seal rings (1) from the brake caliper cylinder
seats.
Cleaning and checking of main components 45035

For all types of brake calipers
Insert the seal rings (1) into the relevant seats of the caliper
When washing the metal components use hot water casing.
with Fiat LCD type detergent.
By means of a metal brush, remove any dirt from the
Figure 72
brake caliper, then eliminate any residual dirt with
the use of a brush. Carefully clean the seats of the
guide pins, sliding bushes, pistons and the pistons
themselves.
By means of a suitably sized synthetic brush, remove
all traces of grease from the seats of the sliding
bushes. Open the bleeder valves, then carefully blow
compressed air into the brake caliper casing.
By means of a piece of canvas soaked in methylated
spirits or similar, carefully clean the sliding surfaces.
Check the wear on the sliding bushes, pistons and
relevant seats on the brake caliper casing. Make sure
that the sliding surfaces are neither damaged or
45036
worn.
Insert the bushes and pistons into the seats and Insert the dust boots (4 and 5) in their seat on the brake
check that they are free to slide, otherwise restore calliper (1). Fit the cylinders (2) and the sliding bushings (3)
or replace as necessary. and make sure they slide freely.
Correct sliding if required by lubricating the bushings with
Klueber glk1pf grease.
A regular braking effect depends a great deal on the Insert the dust covers into the relevant sears on the pistons
! condition of the sliding surfaces. (2) and on the sliding bushes (3).
1x52 Brembo brake calipers

Check wear of brake liners and safety springs.
Replace the parts which are either deformed or
worn. The 1x52 callipers (rear, 29 L - 35 S vehicles) are
! equipped with an automatic brake liner wear
It is recommended to replace the piston dust covers tensioner device and the components cannot be
and seal rings even if they do not show any signs of removed.
deformations or defects. Consequently, replacement/overhauling operations
on the piston, dust boot and internal components
must only be carried out by specialised personnel.
Only the sliding bushings can be overhauled. The
removal/refitting procedure is the same as that
described for the other callipers.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

527411 OVERHAULING BRAKE DISCS Figure 75
Figure 73
45040
45038
By means of the lathe 99301001 (1), machine both working
To take down and fit back the brake disk (1) follow the surfaces of the drum brake.
procedures described in the “axles” section.
Check the wear on the surfaces of the drum brakes.
During this grinding operation, gradually move the
When values different from those indicated in the ! sequential wheel towards the working surface in
specifications and data table are found, machine and grind the order to completely remove the swarf left over from
disk brakes and, if necessary, replace them. turning.
527411 MACHINING AND GRINDING OF

DISC BRAKES
Figure 74
45039
- Fit the disk brake (1) complete with the wheel-hub to

the late arbor 99301005 (2);
- fit a set of spacers on the shaft to remove unit end play,
tighten the lock nut and apply the lathe support;
- place the tool-holder (3) along the axis of the drum
brake (1) then adjust the work depth of the tools;
- turn down the drum brake (1) by passing over the
surface a few times depending on the condition of the
surface itself.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

WHEEL NUT TIGHTENING SEQUENCE OVERHAULING PARKING BRAKE

Figure 76
Dismantling parking drum brake
Figure 78
52746
5817 - 450210 AXLE TIGHTENING ORDER

45048
Tighten the screws at the specified torque in the order Release shoe (1) return springs (2 and 5). Save the adjusting
shown. device (3).
Remove retaining brackets (4 and 6) and detach shoes (1).
Figure 77
Figure 79
52747
AXLE TIGHTENING ORDER

(EXCEPT FOR 5817 AND 450210)
45049
Remove shoe retaining pins (3) and parking brake wire

Tighten the screws at the specified torque in the order hitching device (4).
shown.
NOTE Disjoin support (1) and withdraw sensor (2) to

remove ABS sensor (2).
To reassemble the sensor (2), push it as far as it will
go inside support (1) and fasten the latter to the rear
axle.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

For models 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C

Figure 80
45047
VIEW OF THE PARKING DRUM BRAKE

For models 60C - 65C
Figure 81
62674
VIEW OF THE PARKING DRUM BRAKE
Check inner disc diameter to establish whether it can Check brake jaw conditions and replace if anomalies are
be reused. found.
Measure the inner disc diameter with a sliding gauge If the brake lining surface is oily, trace the cause and repair the
without moving the arms to an angle. fault.
Measure the drum diameter in several spots to The minimum brake seal thickness is 3.5 mm for models 60C
determine ovality and wear. Also examine depth of - 65C, and 1.5 mm for models 35C - 40C - 45C - 50C.
scoring on the braking surface. If this is not so, even if only slightly above or below the
Max permitted ovality and/or eccentricity tolerance specified value, replace them.
is 0.1 mm. Check serviceability of shoe return springs.
Replace the disc if wear or evident signs of overheating are
found (see specifications and data table).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Assembly - lift the rear of the vehicle, resting the chassis frame
on the stands;
Figure 82
- loosen the lock nut (3);
- take the parking brake lever, in the cab, onto its third
catch;
- screw down the tightener screw (2) until the rear
wheels are hard to turn by hand;
- operate 3-4 times the lever in the cab to set parts,
then check whether the stroke is of approx. 6 steps;
- lock the lock nut (3);
- lower the vehicle.
B. For further adjustments, it is necessary to proceed as fol-
lows:
74991 Case 1 — With disk removal
Loosen the tensioner under the chassis in the middle of the - lift the rear of the vehicle, resting the chassis frame
vehicle. on the stands;
Reverse disassembly operations to reassemble.
- loosen the screw (2) completely;
Using a sliding gauge, measure the diameter of the brake seal
(2), check that the values correspond with those indicated on - remove the disc as described in the ”REAR AXLES”
the specifications and data tables, if not, adjust the device (1) section;
until the correct values and data are obtained. - run the checks described on page 61;
- use the adjustment device (1, Figure 82) to obtain
the distances given in the ”Specifications and Data”
table;
- mount the disc and wheels. Firmly apply the parking
brake a few times to settle the sheaths of the ropes;
- take the parking brake lever, in the cab, onto its third
catch;
- screw down the tightener until the rear wheels are
hard to turn by hand;
5027 Adjusting parking brake - lock the tightener lock nut;

(vehicles with parking drum brake) - lower the vehicle.
Figure 83 Case 2 — Without removing disks

- lift the rear part of the vehicle resting the chassis on
the supporting stands provided for the purpose and
remove wheels;
- loosen the lock nut (3);
Figure 84
52277
A. Play recovery is not automatic. Minor lever stroke exten-

sion (corresponding to approximately 2 notches in addi-
tion to the normal lever stroke which is 7 notches) by
means of the tensioner (1) as shown below:
86295
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

- remove the brake upper slot rubber plug (3); Vehicles with parking brake on brake disc
- use tool 99372249 (1) to operate the manual ad- Clearance recovery is automatic, but if the ropes are
juster internal ring nut (2) and widen the shoes until removed or replaced it is necessary to adjust their length in
the disk can no longer be turned using just the hands; accordance with points A and B.
- always with tool 99372249 (1), loosen the above

mentioned adjusting ring nut (2) by 3 notches and
check whether the disk is free to turn;
- refit the rubber plug into the slot;
- refit rear wheels;
- set the lever in the cab to the third position;
- screw the tightener screw (2, Figure 81) until wheels
can no longer be turned using just the hands;
- operate 3-4 times the lever in the cab to set parts,
then check whether the stroke is of approx. 6 steps;
- lock tightener lock nut;
- lower the vehicle.
Should new brakes/disks be replaced at the same

time, drum brakes are not to be adjusted. Only adjust
! the main cable tightener since brakes are adjusted
yet to the rated installation value.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY CAB AIR-CONDITIONING 1
BRAKES
SECTION 12
5501 Bodywork
5001 Chassis Frame
5532 Cab air-conditioning
NOTE For bodywork and chassis frame see publication

No. 603.43.606.
Page
SAFETY STANDARDS TO OBSERVE WHEN
WORKING ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED
WITH THE AIR-BAG SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
CAB AIR-CONDITIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
- General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
VENTILATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM MAIN
COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONAL
DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
AIR-CONDITIONING AND HEATING . . . . . . . . 6
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
- Air-conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
- Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
AUTOMATIC AIR-CONDITIONING/HEATING . 7
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
MAIN COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
- Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
- Condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
- Drier filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
- Expansion valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
- Evaporator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
CONTROL AND SAFETY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . 10
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
- Three-level pressure switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
- Outside air temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . 10
“M. MARELLI” TYPE HEATER/AIR-CONDITIONER
UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

2 CAB AIR-CONDITIONING DAILY
Page Page
- General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 ANTI-FROST SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

- Electronic control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - Removal - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM CONTROLS - Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
AND LOCATION OF VENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
HEATER/AIR-CONDITIONER UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . 13
ELECTRIC FAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
- Removal and Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
- Removal - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
”M. MARELLI” TYPE HEATER/AIR-CONDITIONER
UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 HEATER RADIATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
- Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - Removal - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

PROCEDURE FOR EMPTYING AND REFILLING THE - Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS WITH
R134A REFRIGERANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
- R134A refrigerant recovery and refilling MIXING ACTIVATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

station (99305146) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CONTROL FASCIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
SAFETY STANDARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
OPERATION FLOW CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
RECOVERING REFRIGERANT
FROM THE VEHICLE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - Removal - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
CREATING A VACUUM IN THE SYSTEM . . . . . . 24 - Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
RESTORING OIL IN THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
TREATED AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
FILLING THE SYSTEM WITH REFRIGERANT . . . . 27
CHECKING THE PRESSURES IN THE SYSTEM . . 29
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
OPERATIONS PRIOR TO DISCONNECTING
THE STATION FROM THE SYSTEM . . . . . . 29 - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
LEAK FINDER FOR AIR-CONDITIONING EVAPORATOR UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
SYSTEMS WITH HFC R134A (9905147) . . . . 29
REPAIRS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
- Air-conditioner unit control unit . . . . . . . . . . . 30
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
EXPANSION VALVE AND EVAPORATOR
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 PIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 - Removal - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 - Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
- Removal - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 COMPRESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 - Compressor Removal - Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Page Page
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 HEATER UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 - Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
POLLEN FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
THREE-LEVEL PRESSURE SWITCH AND
DRIER FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
CONDENSER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
DIAGNOSTIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
FAILURES OF THE ELECTRIC TYPE
(MARELLI AIR-CONDITIONER) . . . . . . . . . . 36
- Self-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
- Diagnosis by error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
- Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
- Diagnosis by IWT, MODUS and UNITESTER 39
- Diagnosis by IWT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
FAILURE OF THE MECHANICAL TYPE . . . . . . . . 44
”MARELLI” TYPE HEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
ELECTRIC FAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
HEATER CONTROL CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

SAFETY STANDARDS TO OBSERVE The system subjects the air to thermodynamic

WHEN WORKING ON VEHICLES transformations that affect its temperature, relative humidity
EQUIPPED WITH THE AIR-BAG SYSTEM and purity. This is accomplished by:
- Ventilation, or introducing air taken from the outside
(therefore with the temperature and humidity of the
surrounding environment) into the cab.
- Air-conditioning, or cooling and de-humidifying the air,
Before doing any work, you MUST observe the with the possibility of heating it afterwards as preferred
! SAFETY rules given in section 10 “Steering system” so as to change the temperature and humidity in the cab.
VENTILATION
Description
Ventilation is the function of drawing in fresh air from the
outside, cleaned of pollen and dust by a special filter, or
CAB AIR-CONDITIONING recycling the air in the cab.
General This system is composed of a shell, designed to house the
electric fan unit, air ducts, fresh air intake and recycled air
The purpose of the air-conditioning system is to make the intake. The electric fan has several speeds to draw in and
cab comfortable as regards the following parameters: circulate large masses of air.
- temperature and relative humidity of outside air;
- temperature and relative humidity in the cab.
Figure 1
35858
CAB VENTILATION DIAGRAM
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM MAIN COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM

Figure 2
52279
A. Refrigerant liquid inlet - B. Refrigerant liquid outlet - H. High-pressure circuit - L. Low-pressure circuit.
1. Condenser - 2. Three-level pressure switch - 3. Drier filter - 4. Compressors - 5. Heater/fan unit - 6. Evaporator -
7. Expansion valve - 8. Pollen filter.
AIR-CONDITIONING AND HEATING Heating

Description Heating is accomplished by a radiator, in the heater unit, in
This is accomplished by integrating an air-conditioning and a which the engine coolant circulates.
heating system.
Special doors allow air to pass through the radiator only
This integration makes it possible to change the temperature when the heating function is activated.
and humidity in the cab.
The main components of the air-conditioning and heating
Air-conditioning system comprise:
Air-conditioning is accomplished by taking advantage of the - compressor (4);
high capacity of some gases to lower temperature - condenser (1);
considerably in their phase of expansion, thereby making it - drier filter (2);
possible to absorb heat from the cab. - three-level pressure switch (3);
This condition is obtained by two different levels of pressure - expansion valve (7);
(high, when the refrigerant fluid is in its liquid state, and low, - evaporator (6);
when the fluid is in its gaseous state) that are established and - heater/fan unit (5);
maintained during operation of the system. - pollen filter (8).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

AUTOMATIC AIR-CONDITIONING/HEATING
Description The following figure illustrates the vehicle layout of the main
The automatic air-conditioning/heating system is controlled components of the automatic air-conditioning/heating
by an electronic control unit that governs the system and the layout of the contactors and fuses on the
air-conditioning and heating functions so as to obtain and fuse/contactor-holder unit.
maintain the required conditions in as stable a manner as
possible.
Figure 3
52280
1. Air-conditioning system filler coupling (high pressure) - 2. Pollen filter - 3. Air-conditioning system drainage
coupling (low pressure) - 4. Low-pressure pipe - 5. High-pressure pipe - 6. High-pressure pipe - 7. Condenser -
8. High-pressure pipe - 9. Drier filter - 10. Three-level pressure switch - 11. Compressor - 12. 5A fuse
(air-conditioner/heater) - 13. 5A fuse (engine electronic control unit) - 14. 5A fuse (miscellaneous lighting) -
15. 30A fuse (cab heater) - 16. 10A fuse (engine electronic control unit) - 17. 3A fuse (air-conditioner) -
18. 3A fuse (panel) - 19. Contactor turning off air-conditioner compressor - 20. Contactor turning on air-conditioner
compressor - 21. Contactor controlling electromagnetic coupling - 22. 25A fuse (engine electronic control unit) -
23. Fuse/contactor-holder unit - 24. Heater/air-conditioner unit.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

MAIN COMPONENTS
553239 Compressor 553232 Condenser
Figure 4 Figure 6
52281
The compressor is located between the evaporator and the 52283

condenser. Its function is to:
- draw refrigerant fluid in the form of vapour at low The condenser is a heat exchanger located between the
pressure and low temperature from the evaporator compressor and the drier filter. Its function is to transform the
through the inlet (2); refrigerant fluid from its gaseous to its liquid state.
- compress the refrigerant fluid drawn up and introduce
it at high temperature and high pressure into the This transformation is made by the refrigerant fluid releasing
condenser through the outlet (1). heat to the outside air. This is why the condenser is installed
The compressor is driven by the electromagnetic friction on the vehicle so as, in the best conditions, to take advantage
device mounted on the compressor shaft. of the air stream produced by the forward motion of the
vehicle.
When the vehicle is stationary or in a traffic jam, the flow of
air needed to transform the refrigerant fluid is produced,
Figure 5 under the control of the three-level pressure switch, by the
fan for cooling the engine coolant.
553234 Drier filter

Figure 7
52282
The electromagnetic friction device is composed of an 52284

electromagnetic coil (2), a pulley (1) and a front disc (3).
The drier filter is located between the condenser and the
When the system is not running, the pulley (1) turns idle on expansion valve. It has the following functions:
the bearing (4) since it is driven by the engine via the V-belt. - reserve tank for excess refrigerant fluid during variable
On switching on the air-conditioning system, the filling phases;
electromagnetic coil (2) attracts the front disc (3) on the - filtering element for the solid particles generated by
pulley (1) that comes to be virtually keyed onto the compressor wear;
compressor shaft and makes it rotate. - eliminating the moisture formed in the system.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

553233 Expansion valve 553231 Evaporator

Figure 8 Figure 9
52285
52286
The expansion (block) valve is located between the drier The evaporator is a heat exchanger located between the
filter and the evaporator. expansion valve and the compressor.
Its function is to control and proportion the flow of Its function is to:
refrigerant fluid to get the highest refrigerating capacity out - change the state of the refrigerant from a liquid, at the
of the system and to lower the pressure of the refrigerant (at inlet, to a gas, at the outlet;
the filter outlet) to a pre-set value so that the fluid, circulating - absorb the heat in the cab and thereby produce the
in the evaporator, can be drawn up by the compressor in a required refrigerating effect.
completely gaseous form.
To be able to perform these functions, an electric fan draws
This valve has two passages for the refrigerating fluid:
warm, moist air from the cab and conveys it onto the
- the bottom one enabling the refrigerant to pass (5) from evaporator.
the drier filter to the evaporator (2). Along this route
Since this air is at a higher temperature than the refrigerant,
there is a spring (4) that, appropriately set, makes it
it gives some of its heat to the refrigerant and cools down,
possible to obtain such a leap in temperature
while the moisture it contains condenses on the evaporator
(overheating) as to make sure that the refrigerant, at the
fins in the form of droplets.
evaporator inlet, is entirely in its gaseous state. In
addition, there is also a modulating element, in this case This produces cold, dehumidified air.
a ball (3) housed in the gauged pipe that controls the
This change takes place with considerable heat absorption.
flow rate of refrigerant to the evaporator;
A special channel collects the condensation formed and
- the top one enabling the refrigerant to pass (1) from the discharges it outside.
evaporator to the compressor (6). Along this route
there is a temperature sensor (7) that, depending on the The considerable cooling of the radiating pack is due to the
temperature at the evaporator outlet, makes it possible change in state, from liquid to gas, of the refrigerant.
to control the flow rate of refrigerant, by means of the
modulating element (3), and control the overheating, by
means of the spring (4).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

CONTROL AND SAFETY DEVICES

Description 553242 Outside air temperature sensor
The system is equipped with specific devices that, by checking
the pressure and temperature, make it possible to protect the
system from possible trouble and provide optimal operation.
553235 Three-level pressure switch
Figure 11
Figure 10
52287
The three-level pressure switch is mounted on the pipe

connecting the drier filter to the expansion valves. It has the
task of operating the electric fan for the condenser and 52288
radiator when the vehicle is stationary or running at low
speed, so there is no air stream caused by the forward motion This is mounted on the left-hand external rear-view mirror
of the vehicle, and it is therefore necessary to activate in the position shown in the figure.
refrigerant condensation by forced ventilation.
In addition, it has the task of disconnecting the
electromagnetic coupling of the compressor pulley when the
pressure of the fluid (high pressure side), in spite of the action
of the condenser and radiator fan, reaches dangerous limits
or when the heating load conditions are not sufficient to
make the refrigerant evaporate.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

553230 “M. MARELLI” TYPE HEATER/AIR-CONDITIONER UNIT

Figure 12
52289
General 553248 Electronic control unit

A special casing, configured so as to permit insulation, houses
the radiator-heater, evaporator, fan unit, internal air Figure 13
(recirculation air) and external air (fresh air) intakes, direction
flaps, ducts and vents for the flow of treated air.
This unit has to control the following parameters and
functions automatically under the control of the control unit:
air temperature at vents, fan speed, air distribution,
recirculation, and compressor activation.
The system needs to make provision for the possibility of
adjusting the following parameters and functions manually:
fan speed on 5 positions, air distributor on 4 positions (5 in
automatic mode), recirculation, and compressor activation.
The manual controls have priority over automatic mode and
are kept in memory until the user deliberately cancels the 52290
command, returning control of the relative function to
automatic mode. The automatic air-conditioning/heating system is controlled
by an electronic control unit that governs both systems
If one of the parameters is changed manually, the others (air-conditioning and heating) and determines the mixture
remain under automatic control. and quantity of air to be introduced into the cab to provide
The air temperature at the vents is always controlled the required conditions.
automatically to produce the temperature shown on the To obtain the required temperature in the cab, the control
display in the cab (unless the system is not in operation). unit also takes into account the data from the sensor that
measures the outside air temperature.
The control unit therefore governs the following functions:
- switching the air-conditioning system on and off;
- using external or recycled air; the hot/cold air mixture;
- the amount of air to introduce into the cab (with the
different fan speeds).
Every time the battery is disconnected, when it is
reconnected the control unit automatically zeroes the
positions.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEM CONTROLS AND LOCATION OF VENTS

Figure 14
52291
1. Central vents - 2. Demisting vents - 3. Side vents - 4. Air-conditioning system warning light - 5. Switch to activate the
function of recycling air inside the cab - 6. Switch to turn off the air-conditioner - 7. Air distribution knob: A. air towards face
/ B. air towards face and feet / C. air towards feet / D. air towards feet and windscreen / E. air towards windscreen / F.
MAX/DEF position: the system prepares for demisting - 8. Knob for air temperature control with end positions to activate HI
and LO functions (max and min air temperature) - 9. Fan knob with relative operating speed manual/automatic/off -
10. Vent for driver’s feet - 11. Vent for passenger’s feet.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

HEATER/AIR-CONDITIONER UNIT
Removal and Refitting Figure 15
Removal
- First of all, disconnect the battery cables, drain off the

engine coolant and discharge the gas in the air-conditioning
system following the procedures described under the
relevant headings.
- Remove the steering column from the fascia following the
procedure described under the relevant heading.
- Remove the bottom covering of the fascia on the
passenger’s side (25) lifting it off the dual locks.
- Remove the covering of the instrument panel (31) lifting
it off the dual locks after unscrewing the fixing screws (26).
- Remove the central bottom covering (18) lifting it off the
dual locks after unscrewing the fixing screws (15).
- Remove the glove compartment (30) after unscrewing the
fixing screws (28).
- Remove the upright covering (27) after unscrewing the
fixing screws (29) on both sides of the vehicle.
- Remove the fascia side covering (10) after unscrewing the
fixing screws (9) on both sides of the fascia.
- Remove the door to the fuses (11).
- Remove the bonnet opening knob (1) after unscrewing
the retaining screw (2).
- Remove the instrument fascia (32) after unscrewing the
fixing screws (14) and disconnecting the electrical
connections (6).
- Remove the switch panel (17) after unscrewing the fixing
screws (19) and disconnecting the electrical connections
(16).
- Lift off the heater control knob (22).
- Remove the air-conditioning/heating controls mask (21)
lifting it off the dual locks and disconnect the electrical
connection (23).
- Unscrew the screws (20) securing the control unit to the
fascia covering.
- Remove any loudspeakers (13) on both sides of the fascia
after unscrewing the fixing screws (12) and disconnecting
the electrical connection.
- Remove the fuse and contactor holder mounting (8) after
unscrewing the fixing screws.
- Lift off any controls on the covering (e.g., the headlamp
height adjustment control (7) and disconnect the relevant
electrical connections.
- Unscrew the screws (24) securing the fascia covering to
the framework and remove the covering (5) from the
vehicle.
- Unscrew the nut (4) holding the bonnet opening rod (3).
52292
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

- Disconnect the ventilation duct (1) unscrewing the fixing Figure 16

screws (12).
- Disconnect the demisting duct (2) unscrewing the fixing
screws (11).
- Remove the radio mounting box (8) unscrewing the fixing
screws (9).
- Disconnect the duct distributing air towards the feet (6)
unscrewing the fixing screws (5) and (7). Remove the
bonnet opening cable from the framework.
Operations from the bonnet side (Detail B).
- Unscrew the fixing nuts (21). Remove and shift the
expansion liquid reservoirs (22).
- Remove the seal clamps (19) and disconnect the delivery
and return pipes (17) and (18) for the heater water.
- Unscrew the screws (14) and disconnect the pipes (13)
and (16) supplying the evaporator.
- Unscrew the nuts (15) securing the flange.
- Unscrew the nuts (20) securing the heater on the union
side.
Operations in the cab.
- Unscrew the nuts (4) and screws (10) and move the
framework back together with the heater unit.
- Disconnect the electrical connections from the heater unit
and cut the cabling retainer clamps.
- Unscrew the screws (24) securing the heater unit (23) to
the cross member (3) (detail C).
Refitting
For refitting, position the fascia covering and retain it at the

point shown in detail D. Then continue by carrying out the
operations described for removal in reverse order, observing
the required tightening torques for the screws and/or nuts.
- the engine coolant is at the right level;
- the gas in the air-conditioning system is at the right
pressure;
- the system and components involved in the above
procedure work properly.
52293
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

553230 ”M. MARELLI” TYPE HEATER/

AIR-CONDITIONER UNIT Figure 17
Components
1. Strip on A.I. flange - 2. Treated air sensor - 3. Front door

hatch - 4. Distribution bushing - 5. Recirculation door - 6. LH
air intake box - 7. Cond. drain pipe retaining bracket - 8. Mixing
actuator - 9. Rear box - 10. Distribution bushing - 11.
Complete distribution door - 12. Strip - 13. Strip - 14.
Radiating mass - 15. Wiring harness - 16. Tie rod - 17.
Distribution lever - 18. MAX DEF cam - 19. Fan potentiometer
- 20. Mixing potentiometer - 21. Control mounting - 22. Knob
adapter ring - 23. Prism - 24. Complete microswitch - 25.
Control pin - 26. Knob - 27. Cap spring - 28. Cap - 29.
Condensation drain pipe - 30. Strip - 31. Condensation drain
tub - 32. Control unit - 33. Condensation drain tub strip - 34.
Front box - 35. Self-tapping insert - 36. Mixing/foot door lever
- 37. Bushing - 38. Transmission - 39. Vent./demist. door lever
- 40. Water pipe fixing U-bolt - 41. Distribution cam - 42.
Control mounting bracket - 43. Anti-frost sensor - 44. Wiring
retainer clamp - 45. Fan strip - 46. Electric fan - 47. Connection
cover - 48. Motor mounting - 49. Spacer - 50. Connector
bracket - 51. Electronic control - 52. Evaporator - 53.
Distribution bushing - 54. Complete distribution door - 55.
Evaporator strip - 56. Pipe - 57. OUT O-ring - 58. Expansion
valve - 59. OUT O-ring - 60. Fixing screw - 61. IN O-ring - 62.
IN O-ring - 63. Pipe passage strip - 64. Pipe strips - 65. A.I.
actuator - 66. A.I. door lever - 67. RH air intake box - 68. Tie
rod
52294
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

PROCEDURE FOR EMPTYING AND

REFILLING THE AIR-CONDITIONING NOTE This procedure does not describe the phases of
SYSTEMS WITH R134A REFRIGERANT loading and unloading refrigerant to and from
R134A refrigerant recovery and refilling external and internal containers or maintenance.
station (99305146) Therefore, please refer to the operating and
maintenance manual of the appliance.
This station has been made to be used on all air-conditioning/
heating systems for motor vehicles using R134A gas.
By connecting the station to a refrigerating system the gas it The station is composed of:
contains can be recovered, cleaned and made ready to be 1 control panel;
reloaded into the system or be transferred to an external
container. In addition, it is possible to see the amount of oil 2 container to restore any oil recovered when unloading;
taken from the system, restore it and ”empty” the system. 3 flexible hoses;
To be operative, the station needs to absorb approximately 4 container to collect any oil recovered from the system;
3 kg of refrigerant.
5 filler cylinder with graduated scale revolving.
For prompt use it is advised to have at least 2 kg of refrigerant
in the filler cylinders and to keep the station as level as possible.
Figure 18
50631
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

CONTROL FASCIA
Figure 19
50634
Figure 20
FILLER CYLINDER OIL TANK
50632
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Control fascia diagram legend

M1 Low pressure gauge
M2 High pressure gauge
M3 Filler cylinder pressure gauge
LOW Low-pressure valve
HIGH High-pressure valve
REF Refrigerant filler and drain valve
V1 Valve on low-pressure pipe
V2 Valve on high-pressure pipe
V3 Oil injection valve for A/C system
V5 Oil drainage valve
V9 A/C system washing refrigerant service valve
10 Moisture indicator
VS Safety and drainage valve
L3 Alarm warning light
L4 Maximum level warning light
L5 Minimum level warning light
A Unit process / bottle heater switch
LA1 Unit process indicator light
LA2 Bottle heater indicator light
B Refrigerant process / vacuum process switch
LB1 Refrigerant process indicator light
LB2 Vacuum process indicator light
C Recovery recycle cycle / Filling switch
LC1 Recovery recycle cycle indicator light
LC2 Filling indicator light
D Vacuum / vacuum test switch
LD1 Vacuum indicator light
LD2 Vacuum test indicator light
Filler cylinder legend

1 Pressure values in bar (vertical lines, revolving top
cylinder).
2 Weight of load in grams (oblique lines, revolving top
cylinder) 50 g division between lines.
3 Tank level viewer (internal cylinder).
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

SAFETY STANDARDS - never expose the unit or operate it in acidic or wet

environments or close to open containers of inflammable
substances;
This station is exclusively for professionally trained
operators who must be familiar with refrigerating - the unit must operate in places with good ventilation;
systems, refrigerant gases and the damage
pressurized equipment can cause, therefore: - never alter the settings of the safety valves and control
systems;
- never use bottles or other storage containers that are not
approved and are not fitted with safety valves;
- always wear gloves and goggles when working with
refrigerant gases. Contact of refrigerant liquid with the - never load any container over 80% of its maximum
eyes can cause blindness; capacity;
- avoid all contact with skin (low boiling point -30°C can - never leave the unit powered if it is not to be used
cause frostbite); immediately. Cut off the mains power supply when it is
not planned to use the equipment.
- never inhale the vapours of refrigerant gases;
- before connecting the station with a system or external
container, check that all the valves are closed;
- before disconnecting the station, check that the cycle is The station is equipped with special fittings to avoid
over and all the valves are closed. This will prevent contamination with systems using R12. Do not attempt to
dispersing refrigerant gas into the atmosphere; adapt this unit for use with R12.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

OPERATION FLOW CHART
Preparing the station
First recovery
Wait 3-5 minutes
Second recovery
Drain off oil

from the system
Operate on the system
Vacuum for 5-10 minutes

with first vacuum test
Is there any NO Vacuum for 30 minutes

YES leakage? with second vacuum test
NO Is there any YES

leakage?
Load oil
into the system
Search for leakage with Load up to 200 g

electronic leak finder refrigerant
NO Search system for leakage

Is there any Fully load
YES leakage? the system with electronic leak finder
Pressure check NO Is there any YES

leakage?
Are the values

acceptable? NO
YES
Disconnect the station

from the system
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

RECOVERING REFRIGERANT pipe with a smaller diameter (H) connecting the drier
FROM THE VEHICLE SYSTEM filter with the evaporator);
Before starting to disconnect the pipes from the - connect the pipe marked LOW under the pressure gauge
air-conditioner, check whether it is possible to do the repairs to the evaporator outlet (the outlet is the one on the pipe
without discharging the gas. with a larger diameter (L) connecting the evaporator with
the drier);
If this is not possible, the following operations must be carried
- open the valves V1 and V2;
out:
- open the LOW and HIGH cocks.
- connect the pipe marked HIGH under the pressure gauge
to the evaporator inlet (the inlet is the one on the
Figure 21
52295
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

- connect the station to the electricity mains (220 V - 50 - put the switches A, B and C back onto position 0;
Hz); - close the V1, V2, LOW and HIGH valves.
- press the switch A (Process Unit) onto position 1
The respective indicator light LA1 will come on;
- press the switch B (Refrigerant Process) onto position 1;
- the respective indicator light LB1 will come on;
- press the switch C (Recovery Recycle) onto position 1. NOTE If the refrigerant reaches the maximum level
The recovery and recycling operation will start (maximum level indicator light L4 on), the recovery
automatically. The respective indicator light LC1 will cycle must be stopped immediately by pressing
come on to signal the operation in progress. switch C onto position 0 and transferring the
On completing this operation the unit will automatically refrigerant from the filler cylinder to a suitable
stop and the indicator light LC1 go out. Wait for a few external bottle.
minutes so that any pockets of refrigerant at low pressure
remaining in the system can increase their pressure, by
absorbing heat, and be able to be recovered. The station - Continue the operations following the instructions given
will automatically repeat the recovery cycle if the above on the following pages.
conditions occur;
Figure 22
50636
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

CREATING A VACUUM IN THE SYSTEM After a few minutes of operation (10 at most) if the system
has no leaks the indicator light LD2 VACUUM TEST will also
This operation should be carried out if all the repairs have
come on. From this time on, evacuation should be continued
been performed and the system components have been
for at least two hours to obtain a good evacuation.
properly refitted. This operation is the phase prior to refilling,
therefore proceed as follows:
NOTE Do not run the vacuum cycle when there is even The indicator light LD2 vacuum test fails to come on
minimal pressure in the station or system. if there is a leak. Stop evacuation, eliminate the leak
and repeat the evacuation procedure.
- Connect the pipes to the specific system connections and

open the V1-V2/LOW and HIGH valves. - At the end of the time programmed for evacuation, press
- Press the switch A (Process Unit) onto position 1. the switch D (vacuum test) onto position 2 and leave the
The respective indicator light LA1 will come on. system in this state for 3-5 minutes.
The indicator light LD2 VACUUM TEST is on if the
- Press the switch B (Vacuum Process) onto position 2. system has a good seal. The indicator light LD2 VACUUM
The respective indicator light LB2 will come on. TEST goes out if there is a leak. Eliminate the leak and
- Press the switch D (Vacuum) onto position 1. The system repeat the evacuation cycle.
will automatically start being evacuated and the respective - Put the switches D and B back onto position 0 and
indicator light LD1 will come on to signal the operation proceed with the following phase.
in progress.
Figure 23
50637
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

It is possible that at the end of each recovery cycle the station 3 Quantify and record the amount of oil discharged.
may have recovered lubrication oil from the compressor, 4 Eliminate the recovered oil correctly.
which should be drained off into a specific graduated container This oil cannot be reused.
(1). The same amount of new oil as has been removed must
1 Slowly open the valve V5 (Oil Discharge). be added to the system.
2 When all the oil has been discharged into the container (1)
close the valve V5.
Figure 24
50638
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

RESTORING OIL IN THE SYSTEM - disconnect the metering device (1) from the injection
valve V3 and fit the protective cap back on.
If during the recovery and recycle phase, oil from the system
has been removed, it must now be replenished:
NOTE Keep the oil containers well sealed in order to avoid
- take the metering device supplied with the right amount contamination. In particular, remember that oil is
of lubricant for the system concerned, or previously extremely hygroscopic:.
measured;
- connect the metering device (1) to the lubricant injection
valve V3; - never open the oil injection valve V3 if the system has
positive pressure;
- open the valve V3 and then carry out the system vacuum
phase for a few moments; - oil should only be injected with a vacuum in the system;
- open the valve mounted on the metering device - the oil level must never fall under the suction pipe (air
container (1). The oil will be drawn into the system; would get into the system).
- close the valve V3 and the valve on the metering device
container when the required quantity of lubricant has
been drawn in;
Figure 25
50639
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

FILLING THE SYSTEM WITH

REFRIGERANT NOTE To transfer refrigerant from an external bottle to
Before refilling, it is wise to be aware of some important rules: the filler cylinder and vice versa, refer to the
equipment manual.
- know the quantity of refrigerant to use (it is normally Considering that the amount of refrigerant depends
written on an adhesive plate affixed on the vehicle); on its pressure, to know the actual weight it is
- the filler cylinder is equipped with a minimum level check necessary to turn the outside of the filler cylinder so
that prevents introducing incondensable gas into the the line of the diagram matches the level viewer. In
system. this way we can know the exact quantity of
This is why the last approx. 600 g of refrigerant it contains refrigerant in the cylinder (starting weight).
When calculating the weight of the refrigerant, in
cannot be used; addition to the 600 g that cannot be used,
- therefore, before filling, check that the cylinder contains remember to increase the load by approximately
a sufficient quantity for filling (maximum quantity that can 100 g (this is the weight of refrigerant contained in
be used 3800 g); the station-system connecting pipes). The right
- if the pressure inside the filler cylinder indicated on the quantity of refrigerant to introduce into the system
will therefore be given by: 600 g + 100 g + (quantity
pressure gauge (2) is greater than as required, which can referred to the system capacity).
be seen on the filler cylinder window approx. 10 bar max, Always check before filling that the indicator on the
discharge the excess pressure through the valve (1) on ”console” shows the refrigerant contains no
the pressure gauge assembly to bring it down to the right moisture, in which case the indicator will be bright
level, reading the value on the pressure gauge. green. If this is not so, replace the filters in the station
as instructed in the equipment manual.
Figure 26
50640
COULANT
QUANTITY CONTAINED OIL QUANTITY TO BE
R134 COULANT COULANT TOTAL
IN THE PIPINGS ADDED INTO SYSTEM
VEHICLE COMPRESSOR QUANTITY PROVIDED QUANTITY TO BE SET
(150 cm length) AT EACH ND 8 TYPE
FOR IN SYSTEM ON CHARGING TOOL
THAT ARE USED FOR CHARGING
RECHARGING
DAILY (8140 engine): 100 [g] for low pressure
WITH CAB, VAN, SPECIAL SC 08 720 g pipe, 100 [g] for high 920 g 30 g
ITEMS, 6+1 pressure pipe
DAILY (8140 engine): 100 [g] for low pressure
WITH CAB, VAN, SPECIAL DENSO 10 PA 17 720 g pipe, 100 [g] for high 920 g 40 g
DAILY (F1A engine): 100 [g] for low pressure
100 [g] for low pressure
DAILY (F1A engine):
DENSO 10 PA 17 1200 g pipe, 100 [g] for high 1400 g 40 g
COMBI
pressure pipe
DAILY (F1C engine): 100 [g] for low pressure
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

When the cylinder contains the necessary quantity for filling - having loaded 200 ÷ 500 g of refrigerant, depending on
(both pipes must already be connected to the system the size of the system, stop filling by moving the switch C
connectors since the vacuum operation has already been (Charge) onto position 0;
performed), proceed as follows: - check the system is properly sealed with the electronic
- close the LOW valve, keep the HIGH and V1 - V2 valves leak finder;
open; - complete filling the system until the pre-calculated
- press the switch B (Refrigerant process) onto position 1, residual weight in the cylinder is reached;
the indicator light LB1 will come on; (Residual weight = Total weight - System capacity weight)
- press the switch C (Charge) onto position 2, the - complete filling, move the switches C - B and A onto
respective indicator light LC2 will come on and refrigerant position 0 (A had been moved for the vacuum).
will flow from the station into the system; Check again there is no leakage;
- close the HIGH valve.
NOTE When filling, if the level of refrigerant in the cylinder
falls under the required quantity the system will stop
and the Minimum Level indicator light (L5) will
come on.
Figure 27
50641
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

CHECKING THE PRESSURES IN THE LEAK FINDER FOR AIR-CONDITIONING

SYSTEM SYSTEMS WITH HFC R134A (9905147)
After filling, leave the pipes connected and carry out the Tool L-780A makes it possible to identify leakage of HFC
following check: 134A gas from the system extremely accurately in the order
of 3.3 g a year with the switch on maximum sensitivity.
- close the HIGH and LOW valves, V1 and V2 open;
This instrument requires no settings, the operator only needs
- turn on the engine, switch on the air-conditioner and to select the desired sensitivity.
check on the pressure gauges M1 and M2 that the
pressures correspond, normally: low pressure no less than The instrument warns the operator of any gas leakage with a
1 bar, high pressure 15 ÷ 18 bar, depending on the system buzzer and a LED that flashes in proportion to the
specifications. concentration of gas.
OPERATIONS PRIOR TO In addition, the LED indicates the battery is flat if it goes out.
DISCONNECTING THE STATION FROM
THE SYSTEM
Always observing the above safety rules, carry out the Operating temperature is between 0 C and 50°C.
following operations:
The instrument is equipped with a flexible probe to reach
- check that all the valves are closed: LOW - HIGH, V1 - particularly difficult fittings or parts.
V2;
The two levels of sensitivity are:
- disconnect the pipes of valves V1 - V2 and put the caps
back onto the system valves; - low sensitivity = 16.5 g/year;
- high sensitivity = 3.3 g/year.
- Check the system again with the leak finder.
NOTE Normally, with the air-conditioner switched on, air NOTE Before checking vehicles, wait for the engine to cool,
should come out of the vents at a temperature the hot parts can falsify the test.
lower than 5°C and after a period of operation to
stabilize the temperature of the ducts.
Figure 28 Figure 29
50642 50643
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

REPAIRS
553248 Air-conditioner unit control unit ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER
Removal - Refitting Removal - Refitting
Removal Removal
Figure 31
Figure 30
52297
- Turn over the bottom door on the passenger side.

- Disconnect the electrical connections (1) and (2).
- Unscrew the fixing screws (3) and remove the electronic
control (4).
Refitting
Refit the control unit by carrying out the operations
ANTI-FROST SENSOR
Removal - Refitting
Removal
Figure 32
52296
- Turn over the bottom door on the passenger side (1).

- Disconnect the electrical connections (2) and (3).
- Unscrew the fixing screws (4) and remove the control
unit (5).
Refitting
Refit the control unit by carrying out the operations
52298
- Remove the glove compartment by following the

procedure described above.
- Disconnect the electrical connection (1), remove the
anti-frost sensor (2) through the slot A illustrated in the
detail after turning over the bottom door on the
passenger side.
Refitting
Refit the anti-frost sensor by carrying out the
operations described for removal in reverse order.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

553237 ELECTRIC FAN

Removal - Refitting - Remove the seal clamp.
Removal
- Disconnect the pipes from the heater.
Figure 33
- Remove the fascia covering, following the procedure
described above, so as to access the radiator fixing
points.
- Unscrew the screw (2) securing the stand anchoring the
pipe (3), unscrew the screw (4) securing the pipes to the
heater.
- Extract the radiator (5) from the heater and remove the
seals (1) and (6).
Refitting
Refit the radiator by carrying out the operations for
removal in reverse order, taking care to replace the
seals (1) and (6) if they are damaged.
52299 553252 MIXING ACTIVATOR

- Turn over the bottom door on the passenger side, Removal - Refitting
following the procedure described above. Removal
- Disconnect the electrical connections (1), (2) and (3). Figure 35
- Unscrew the screw (7) and remove the connector
bracket (8) to access the fixing screw (4).
- Unscrew the fixing screw (4), remove the electric fan (5)
and the gasket (6).
Refitting
Refit the electric fan by carrying out the operations
for removal in reverse order, taking care to replace
the gasket (6) if it is damaged.
553215 HEATER RADIATOR

Removal - Refitting
Removal
Figure 34
52301
- Remove the fascia covering, following the procedure

described above.
- Disconnect the electrical connection (3) from the
activator, (2) located at the point shown in the figure.
- Unscrew the fixing screws (1) and remove the activator
52300
(2) from its seat.
- Drain off the engine coolant.

- Unscrew the fixing screws and move the expansion tub Refitting
to one side so as to be able to access the heater coolant For refitting, carry out the procedure described for
inlet/outlet couplings. removal in reverse order.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004
553253 AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR 553241 TREATED AIR SENSOR

Removal - Refitting
Removal Removal - Refitting
Removal
Figure 36
Figure 37
52302
52303
- Remove the glove compartment, following the

procedure described above. - Remove the fascia covering and partially remove the
- Disconnect the electrical connection (1) from the heater unit, without taking it out of the vehicle, following
actuator, located at the point shown. the procedure described above, to access the sensor.
- Unscrew the fixing screws (3) and remove the actuator - Disconnect the electrical connection (2), lift up and
(2) from the heater unit. remove the sensor (1) from the heater unit.
Refitting
Refit the unit by carrying out the procedure Refitting
described for removal in reverse order, checking the For refitting, carry out the procedure described for
cogged sector couples correctly. removal in reverse order.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

553231 EVAPORATOR UNIT

Removal - Refitting
Removal
Figure 38
52304
- Remove the heater/air-conditioner unit, following the Refitting

procedure described in the above figures. For refitting, carry out the procedure described for
- Disconnect the electrical connections from the actuators removal in reverse order, taking care to replace the
and sensors. radiator and evaporator gaskets if they are damaged.
- Lift up and remove the temperature sensors (1) and (11).
- Remove the adhesive strip from the duct connection bay,
unscrew the fixing screws (10) and take out the moulding
(9) complete with drain pipe and control unit.
- Unscrew the screws securing the pipe (6), the screw (8)
securing the bolt (7) and carefully remove the radiator (5)
from the heater.
- Unscrew the fixing screws (4) and separate the front (3)
and rear (2) boxes.
- Remove the air duct gasket (13).
- Take out the evaporator unit (12) with the expansion
valve and pipe.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

553233 EXPANSION VALVE AND EVAPORATOR PIPE

Removal - Refitting
Removal
Figure 39
52305
- Remove the evaporator unit, following the procedure Compressor Removal - Refitting
described above. Removal
- Remove the seals (1) and (4) from the evaporator (2)
from the pipe (3), if they are damaged replace them when
refitting. Figure 40
- Unscrew the fixing screws (10) and remove the expansion
valve (7), O-rings (5), (6), (8), (9) and the pipe (3).
Refitting
For refitting, carry out the procedure described for
removal in reverse order, taking care to replace the
radiator and evaporator gaskets if they are damaged.
Check the state of wear of the seals. They need to
be replaced if they are damaged or worn.
553239 COMPRESSOR
Specifications and data
COMPRESSOR
Type SCO 8 C
Displacement cm3 80 52306
Stroke mm 33
- Drain the air-conditioning system, following the
Rev. No.:
procedure described under the relevant heading.
Max RPM 7800
Refrigerant R 134 a
- Unscrew the fixing screws (3) and (5) and remove the
(ecological) inlet (2) and outlet (1) pipes from the compressor.
Oil type ND - OIL 8 - Slacken the drive belt, following the instructions given
Refrigerant amount kg 0.72 under the relevant heading.
Oil amount 80 ± 20 cm3 - Disconnect the electrical connection (4), unscrew the
Airtightness test 3.14 MPa fixing screws (6) and remove the compressor (7) from
Pressure test High 530 MPa the vehicle.
Low 250 MPa
ELECTROMAGNETIC FRICTION Refitting
Torque min 26 Nm For refitting, carry out the procedure described for
Voltage rating V 12 removal in reverse order. Check the state of wear of
Absorbed pressure W max 35 the seals. They need to be replaced if they are
Weight kg 1.5 damaged or worn.
Belt 4k-type
Pulley actual diameter mm 105
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

553261 POLLEN FILTER

Removal - Refitting - Disconnect the electrical connection (1) of the
Removal three-level pressure switch (3).
Figure 41 - Unscrew the fixing screw (2) and remove the pipe (4),
unscrew the fixing screw (5) and remove the pipe (6).
- Unscrew the screw (7) and loosen the bracket (8).
- Take the drier filter (9) out of its seat.
Refitting
removal in reverse order, checking the soundness and
correct position of the seals on the pipes. They need
to be replaced if they are damaged or worn.
553232 CONDENSER
Removal - Refitting
Removal
52307 Figure 43
- From inside the engine bay, lift up the protective cover
(1) and remove the pollen filter (2).
Refitting
removal in reverse order.
553235 THREE-LEVEL PRESSURE

SWITCH AND DRIER FILTER
Removal - Refitting
Removal
Figure 42
52309
- Partially carry out the procedure for removing the engine

until you can access the condenser, which is located in
front of the radiator.
- Drain the air-conditioning system, following the
procedure described above.
- Unscrew the screw (2) and remove the pipe (1),
unscrew the screw (6) and remove the pipe (5).
- Unscrew the fixing screws (3) and remove the
condenser (4).
Refitting
removal in reverse order, checking the soundness
52308
and correct position of the seals on the pipes. They
- Drain the air-conditioning system, following the pro- need to be replaced if they are damaged or worn.
cedure described above.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

DIAGNOSTIC
FAILURES OF THE ELECTRIC TYPE (Marelli air-conditioner)
Self-diagnosis
Suitable control logics enable the control unit to memorise and to display certain system failures (constant and/or intermittent).
In response to these failures, the control unit controls system operation by replacing the detected anomalous values with proper
recovery values which guarantee minimum system operation.
When failure is detected, the control unit displays the message ”Error Cli” on the instrument panel.
- To have a preliminary information, it is possible to display any detected failure on the instrument panel by following a special
procedure.
- For a more complete and in-depth diagnosis it is however indispensable to use the service network testers, i.e.: MODUS
(release 2.1) and IWT (Release 1.4).
NOTE Fan electric module control is not provided in self-diagnosis, it can therefore be detected with the available release
only.
Diagnosis by error codes

To find the failing component proceed as follows:
- set temperature setting knob to ”HI”;
- set fan speed control knob to ”0”;
- set air distribution knob to ”MAX DEF”.
Figure 44
75450
1 Required temperature setting knob - 2 Fan speed control knob - 3 Air distribution knob - 4 ”ECON” switch -
5 Air recycling switch
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 45
000277t
- Set key switch to service position (+15)
Figure 46
000278t
- Operate within 10 seconds, the fan speed control knob with the following sequence: ”0” ⇒ ”AUTO” ⇒ ”0” ⇒ ”AUTO”
⇒ ”0”.
Figure 47
- Error code is now displayed on instrument panel.

Other errors, if any, are displayed every 3 seconds. 000279t
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Error codes
Figure 48
000279t
These are the error codes that can appear on the display of the panels during diagnosis in place of “Cli” .
12 Blown air sensor circuit short to ground

14 Blown air sensor circuit open or short
32 Outside air temperature sensor positive short to ground
34 Outside air temperature sensor circuit open or short
42 Inside air temperature sensor positive short to ground
44 Inside air temperature sensor circuit open or short
52 Evaporator temperature sensor positive short to ground
54 Evaporator temperature sensor circuit open or short
65 Air mixing ratio-motor malfunctioning
82 Required temperature potentiometer positive short to ground
84 Required temperature potentiometer circuit open or short
92 Ventilation control potentiometer positive short to ground
94 Ventilation control potentiometer circuit open or short
B2 Air mixing potentiometer signal positive short to ground
B4 Air mixing potentiometer signal circuit open or short
D5 Fan control electronic module malfunctioning
E2 Potentiometer powering 10 ECU pin positive short to ground
E3 Potentiometer powering 10 ECU pin short to positive
F6 Supply voltage higher than max. limit
F7 Supply voltage lower than min. limit
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Diagnosis by IWT, MODUS and UNITESTER

Figure 49
61545
The above figure shows 99331048 ER1 + ER2 tool connection to ventilation and heating system ECU and to IWT.
Detail (A) shows IVECO TESTER connection.
NOTE IWT can measure lines on control unit wiring and pin-out.
With MODUS, this measurement can only be performed using UNITESTER.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Diagnosis by IWT
Preliminary operations
IWT software memorises the list of components and the relevant failures and enables their reading on the particular screen displays.
It also enables to analyse for every type of failure the measurement in Kohm or Mohm for every component circuit and it displays
in any case the optimum operation parameters.
It also displays operation procedure by the REPAIR function.
Repair manual using IWT will be added in next edition.
It is however important to remind that before proceeding with troubleshooting diagnosis, the following three main factors shall
be checked:
1. Identification:
Check and prove control unit identity consistency between vehicle and IWT data.
If the control unit is not of the preset type, ”not compatible control unit” message is displayed.
Therefore, diagnosis cannot be correct.
Figure 50
IDENTIFICATION PARAMETERS FAILURES
35C13/P MARELLI AIR-CONDITIONER AIR-CONDITIONER

MARELLI SOFTWARE 509300500000
MARELLI SOFTWARE DATE 04-12-97
IVECO H.W. 0500326588
IVECO H.W. DATE 02-05-97
61546
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

2. Failures:
If failures are found, follow repair procedure shown on the screen display using the proper icons.
If no failure is found, perform check by screen display ”PARAMETERS” (see point 3).
Figure 51

CURRENT INTERMITTENT
MIXING MOTOR
LIST
SENSORS
POTENTIOMETERS
CONDITIONS
MIXING MOTOR
REPAIR
61547
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

3. Parameters:
Check for system response by operating vehicle controls until finding the control which gives no signal on IWT screen display.
The following parameters are also checked:
- COMPRESSOR, RECYCLE, MAX DEF
Figure 52
MIXING KNOB POSITION LOW °C

MIXING MOTOR POSITION 0%
REQUIRED TEMPERATURE 22 °C
VENTILATION KNOB POSITION AUTO Position
AIR FLOW RATE 130 m3h
INTERNAL TEMPERATURE 29 °C
EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE 28 °C
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE 25 °C
BLOWN AIR TEMPERATURE 29 °C
POTENTIOMETER POWER VOLTAGE 4.65 Volt
BATTERY VOLTAGE 13.40 Volt
61548
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 53
COMPRESSOR OFF
RECYCLE DYNAMIC
MAX. DEF OFF
61549
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

FAILURE OF THE MECHANICAL TYPE
2 SYSTEM NOISY
Low compressor oil level. Check compressor oil level and refill if required.
NO
YES
Enough refrigerant in the system. Add refrigerant until gauges show normal pressure
NO values.
YES
Regular clearance between front plate and Check clearance, disconnect compressor if required
electromagnetic friction. NO and adjust clearance.
YES
Enough compressor oil level. Check compressor oil level and refill if required.
NO
YES
Enough refrigerant in the system. Insufficient refrigerant in the system: hiss in evaporator
NO housing near expansion valve.
Add refrigerant until gauges show normal pressure
values.
Excessive refrigerant in the system: noise or vibrations
in drain pipe, compressor vibrations.
Drain out the system and add refrigerant until gauges
show normal pressure values
YES
No moisture in the system. Excessive moisture in the system: noisy expansion

NO valve.
Replace expansion valve.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Proper system sealing. Check system and compressor and remove refrigerant
NO leakage, if any.
YES
Proper electromagnetic friction operation. Check friction electrical connections and replace the
NO electromagnetic friction if required.
4.1 COMPRESSOR NOISE
Compressor drive belt in good conditions. Replace drive belt.

NO
YES
Compressor drive belt in normal working conditions. Check and adjust belt tension.
NO
YES
Proper compressor screws and bolts tightening. Check and tighten compressor screws and bolts.
NO
YES
Serviceable compressor. Drain out system and replace compressor.

NO
YES
Serviceable electromagnetic friction pulley bearing. Check pulley sliding and replace it if required.
NO
YES
Serviceable belt tensioner. Replace belt tensioner.

NO
(continued)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

STRANGE NOISE WITH FRICTION

4.2
CONNECTED
Compressor fixing elements are in good conditions. Check and tighten compressor screws and bolts to the
NO prescribed torque.
YES
Serviceable electromagnetic friction. Check whether failure is due to mechanical or electrical

NO troubles and operate accordingly.
YES
Regular compressor oil level. Check oil level and refill if required.
NO
YES
Serviceable compressor. Drain out system and replace compressor.

NO
STRANGE NOISE WITH FRICTION

4.3
DISCONNECTED OR VIBRATIONS
Proper clearance between front plate and Check clearance, disconnect compressor if required
electromagnetic friction pulley. NO and adjust clearance
YES
Serviceable electromagnetic friction power system. Check electric system.

NO
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

553210 ”MARELLI” TYPE HEATER

Removal - Refitting - remove the two screws (1) fixing controls to dashboard;
Removal
- then remove the complete unit (7) including controls (6)
from the passenger compartment.
For removing/refitting the heater unit, carry out the procedure
described on pages 13 and 14 concerning heater/fan unit Refitting
removal and refitting, taking into consideration just the
common parts: dashboard covering, instrument panel, control,
air outlets, refrigerant tank and pipes, radio mounting box and For refitting, carry out the procedure described for removal
cross member. in reverse order and observing the prescribed tightening
torque for screws and/or nuts. When refitting procedure is
over, check the following:
Remove the control panel shown in the figure before
performing the following removals: - proper engine coolant level;
- withdraw air recycle control selector (2); - regular operation of system and components involved in
the described procedure.
- take off the heater control panel knob (3);
- unscrew screw (4) set behind the panel;
- disconnect connection (6) and remove mask (5) by
removing it from velcro (⇒) fixing;
Figure 54
60727
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

553213 ELECTRIC FAN

Removal - Refitting
- remove frame (7) and connector (8) bracket fixings (6);
Removal
- remove fan (5) after removing both M5x16 motor fixings
(9).
- Remove lower covering (1) on passenger side from
velcro fixings;
Refitting
- unscrew the three M4x12 fan fixing screws (3);
- disconnect electrical connections (2);
For fan refitting, carry out the procedure described for removal
- remove motor support (4) including the fan; in reverse order. Replace seal if damaged.
Figure 55
60726
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

553218 HEATER CONTROL CABLES

Removal - Refitting Figure 56
Removal
- First of all disconnect battery cables;

- remove dashboard lower covering (14) on passenger side
from velcro fixings (⇐) and release it from hinges;
- remove dashboard (2) covering from velcro fixings after
unscrewing fixing screws (1);
- remove switch panel (8) after unscrewing fixing screws
(7) and disconnecting electrical connections (4);
- lift off heater control knob (11);
- unscrew screw (10) set behind knob (11);
- detach air recycle cursor (9);
- remove control mask (12) from velcro fixings after
disconnecting electrical connection (13).
- To facilitate control unit removal from compartment
proceed as follows:
- unscrew the two screws (19) fixing the unit to the
dashboard;
- remove control unit from compartment (3) set neat
multiple meter;
- remove the three cables from control unit by releasing
them from clamps (15) and pins (16). (Detail A);
- remove cables from heater unit (Details B-C-D) by
releasing them from clamps (5) (17) and pins (6) and (18).
Refitting
For refitting, carry out the procedure described for removal in

reverse order. Check for matching between doors and control
knobs.
60728
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 57 553210 HEATER UNIT

Components
1. Complete distribution door - 2. Rear box - 3. Pipe strip - 4.
RH air intake box - 5. Tie rod - 6. Distribution bushing - 7. Strip
on A.I. flange - 8. Doors - 9. LH air intake box - 10. Recycle
air intake control transmission - 11. Bowden clip - 12. A.I. door
lever - 13. Wiring - 14. Mixing flexible transmission - 15. Mixing
control lever - 16. Recycle air intake lever - 17. Control pin -
18. Spring - 19. Cap - 20. Cap, cap spring - 21. Complete
distribution - temperature knob - 22. Knob prism - 23. Recycle
air intake cursor - 24. Clamp - 25. Control mounting - 26. Light
guide cable - 27. Connecting rod - 28. I.A.- REC flexible
transmission - 29. Distribution control lever - 30. Switch - 31.
Distribution flexible transmission - 32. Connection cover - 33.
Motor mounting - 34. Connector bracket - 35. Frame bracket
- 36. Electric fan - 37. Self-tapping insert - 38. Mixing/foot door
lever - 39. Transmission - 40. Distribution cam - 41. Mixing
bowden clamp - 42. Control fixing bracket - 43. Mixing/foot
door lever - 44. Vent/def door lever - 45. Wiring retainer
clamp - 46. Fan strip - 47. Water pipe fixing U-bolt - 48.
4-speed resistor - 49. Bushing - 50. Front box - 51. Complete
distribution door - 52. Distribution bushing - 53. Radiating
mass - 54. Side gasket - 55. Gasket on tub - 56. Water pipe
assembly. - A. Flexible transmission.
60920
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY PASSENGER’S COMPARTMENT HEATING AND VENTILATION SYSTEM 51
Print 603.43.351
Passenger’s compartment heating

and ventilation system
Page
SAFETY STANDARDS TO OBSERVE WHEN

WORKING ON VEHICLES EQUIPPED
WITH THE AIR-BAG SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
PASSENGER’S COMPARTMENT HEATING AND
VENTILATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
- General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
VENTILATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM AND MAIN HEATING
AND VENTILATION SYSTEM
COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
HEATING AND VENTILATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . 54
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
- Air-conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
- Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
ADDITIONAL COOLING SYSTEM CONTROLS
AND AIR VENTS LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
ADDITIONAL HEATING SYSTEM CONTROLS . 56
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
ADDITIONAL COOLING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
ADDITIONAL HEATER UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
ADDITIONAL HEATER CIRCUIT ENABLING
SOLENOID VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
- Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
- Refitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

52 PASSENGER’S COMPARTMENT HEATING AND VENTILATION SYSTEM DAILY
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

SAFETY STANDARDS TO OBSERVE Figure 58

WHEN WORKING ON VEHICLES
EQUIPPED WITH THE AIR-BAG SYSTEM
Inlet air
Before doing any work, you MUST observe the
! SAFETY rules given in section 10 “Steering system” Cool air
Warm air
Conditioned air
PASSENGER’S COMPARTMENT HEATING
AND VENTILATION SYSTEM Air flowing out the vehicle
NOTE The following pages describe the heating and

ventilation system variations for COMBI versions
with OPT. 6652 - 6658.
General
Purpose of the heating and ventilation system is to enhance
comfort inside the cab as regards the following parameters:
- temperature and relative humidity of outside air;
- temperature and relative humidity in the cab.
The system subjects the air to thermodynamic transformations
that affect its temperature, relative humidity and purity. This is
accomplished through the following functions:
- ventilation, i.e.: air taken from the outside (therefore with
temperature and humidity of the surrounding
environment) is blown into the cab;
- air-conditioning, i.e.: air cooling and dehumidification, with
the possibility of heating it afterwards as preferred in order
to change temperature and humidity in the cab.
VENTILATION
Description
The ventilation function provides the intake of outside air,
purified from pollen and dust through a proper filter provided
for the purpose, or air recirculation inside the passenger’s
compartment.
- heater / heater fan unit, set under the driver’s panel
covering that also includes a part of the heating and
ventilation system components.
- additional heater fan, adjustable at different speeds to
provide air flowing inside the passenger’s compartment
under whatever conditions of use.
- air ducts (fresh air intake and air recirculation).
- additional air heater, set at the base of the last rear seat
row.
PASSENGER’S COMPARTMENT VENTILATION DIAGRAM 86412
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

HEATING AND VENTILATION SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM AND MAIN HEATING AND VENTILATION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Description Figure 59
This is accomplished by combining an air-conditioning system
with a heating system.
This integration enables to change temperature and relative
humidity inside the passenger’s compartment.
Air-conditioning
Air-conditioning is accomplished by taking advantage of the
power of certain ”cooling” gases to lower temperature
considerably at their expansion stage, thereby enabling to
absorb heat from the passenger’s compartment.
This condition is obtained by two different pressure levels
(high pressure when coolant is at liquid state and low pressure
when coolant is at gaseous state) that are established and
maintained during system operation.
Heating
Heating is implemented through a radiator, located in the
heater unit, where engine coolant flows.
Special doors let air flow through the radiator only when the
heating function is activated.
The main heating and ventilation system components are the
following:
- compressor (4);
- condenser (1);
- drier filter (2);
- three-level pressure switch (3);
- expansion valve (13);
- evaporator (12);
- heater/heater fan unit (5);
- pollen filter (14);
- cooler/heater fan unit (8-9) set in the rear area of the
passenger’s compartment;
- passenger’s compartment conditioning circuit enabling
solenoid valve (6);
- additional cooler expansion valve;
- heater/additional heater fan unit (10-11), set in the rear
area of the passenger’s compartment;
- additional heater circuit enabling solenoid valve (15);
86414
A. Coolant inlet to heater - B. Coolant outlet from heater - C. Coolant delivery to additional heater - D. Coolant return from additional heater - E. Coolant return to engine - H. Heating and
ventilation system high pressure circuit - L. Heating and ventilation system low pressure circuit - W. Engine coolant circuit for passenger’s compartment heating - V. Ventilation flow.
1. Condenser - 2. Drier filter - 3. Three-level pressure switch - 4. Compressor - 5. Heater/heater fan unit - 6. Solenoid valve - 7. Expansion valve - 8. Additional cooler 1. Additional heater fan -
10. Additional heater - 11. Additional heater fan - 12. Cooler - 13. Expansion valve - 14. Pollen filter - 15. Solenoid valve.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ADDITIONAL COOLING SYSTEM CONTROLS AND AIR VENTS LAYOUT
Figure 60
86415
1. Passenger’s compartment air intake - 2. Adjustable air vents - 3. Additional cooling system control selector
DESCRIPTION Selector controls additional cooling circuit enabling valve

The additional cooling system integrates the basic air opening and heater fan speed.
conditioning system and implements air cooling and Passenger’s compartment air recovered through air intake (1)
distribution to the passenger’s compartment area. is conveyed by the heater fan through the additional cooler,
This system can therefore be activated just when the main air it is then cooled, forced into ducts and distributed through the
conditioning system is working yet. To start cool air adjustable air vents (2).
distribution to the passenger’s compartment, use selector (3)
set at the end of the upper duct.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

ADDITIONAL HEATING SYSTEM CONTROLS

Figure 61
86416
1. Additional heater on button - 2. Additional heater circuit enabling solenoid valve - 3. Additional heater unit - 4. Heater fan -
5. Coolant return pipe - 6. Coolant delivery pipe.
DESCRIPTION This button controls solenoid valve (2), that deviates the
The passenger’s compartment additional heater unit (3) is return pipe flow from cab heater to additional heater (3) and
located under the last passenger seat row and can be turned heater fan (4) that warms and drives air from the passenger’s
on just with engine running and cab heater operating in compartment through the radiator. Heater fan revs cannot be
“heating” mode. adjusted.
The additional heater is activated through button (1) set on
the instrument panel.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ADDITIONAL COOLING UNIT Figure 64

Removal - Refitting
Removal
Place the vehicle on pit or lift taking the required safety

precautions.
Disconnect battery negative and positive terminals.
Drain out coolant from the cooling system as described in the
relevant section of this Manual.
Figure 62
86419
- Disconnect the electrical connection (2) and release

cables from anchoring clip (1).
86417
- Disconnect power cable electrical connection (4) and
- Loosen the fastening screws (1) and remove the release cables from anchoring clips.
additional cooling unit protection cover (2).
- Remove the sealant bead (6), loosen the fastening screws
Figure 63 and remove cool air distribution duct cover (7).
- Loosen the fastening screws (3), and remove the cooling
unit (5) from the wall.
- Turn with extreme care the whole cooling unit to make
the delivery and return pipes come out of the slot on the
floor. Then, remove the unit from the vehicle.
Refitting
For refitting, reverse the removal procedure and top up

coolant as described in the relevant section of this Manual.
Check for regular operation of the components involved in
86418 the above described procedure.
- Loosen connections and disconnect delivery (1) and

return (2) pipes.
- Loosen the fastening screws (3) and remove the flange
(4), withdrawing it from pipes.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

ADDITIONAL HEATER UNIT Set the vehicle on level ground taking the required safety
Removal - Refitting precautions.
Figure 65 Prepare a proper container to collect engine coolant.
Removal
- Release the anchoring clips (1) and remove rear seat

lower side upholstery (2).
- Loosen the fastening screws (3) and remove the
additional heater rear protection (4).
86420
Figure 66
86421
Set the container for collecting engine coolant near the Refitting
additional heater delivery and return pipes.
- Disconnect the heater fan power cable electrical
connection (3) and release it from the anchoring clips, if For refitting, reverse the removal procedure and top up engine
any; coolant as described in the relevant Section.
- Loosen clamp (7) and disconnect the additional heater
engine coolant delivery pipe (6). Plug the pipe end
properly to prevent leaks;
- Loosen clamp (5) and disconnect the additional heater
engine coolant delivery pipe (4). Plug the pipe end
properly to prevent leaks;
- Loosen the fastening screws (1) and remove the
additional heater (2) from the vehicle.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ADDITIONAL HEATER CIRCUIT ENABLING SOLENOID VALVE

Removal - Refitting
Set the vehicle on level ground taking the required safety precautions.
Prepare a proper container to collect engine coolant.
Figure 67
86422
Set the container for collecting engine coolant near the - Loosen clamp (6) and disconnect coolant delivery pipe
additional heater delivery and return pipes. (5) to additional heater;
Plug the pipe end properly to prevent leaks;
- Loosen clamp (3) and disconnect coolant return pipe (4)
Removal from additional heater;
- Release the anchoring clips and move aside the expansion

tank breather pipe (2) to clear the work area.
- Disconnect the additional heater circuit enabling solenoid
valve (9) power cable electrical connection (1);
- Loosen clamp (11) and disconnect coolant return pipe
(10) to engine;
- Loosen clamp (8) and disconnect coolant return pipe (7) Refitting
from cab heater;
For refitting, reverse the removal procedure and top up engine

coolant as described in the relevant Section.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE 1
Print 603.43.351/D
SECTION 13
Scheduled maintenance
Page
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
- Table of maintenance services . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
8140 ENGINE VEHICLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
- Inspection and/or maintenance interventions . . 4
- Extra plan operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
F1A ENGINE VEHICLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
- Extra plan operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
F1C ENGINE VEHICLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
- Extra plan operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
DIAGRAM OF CHECK AND/OR MAINTENANCE

POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE DAILY
Print 603.43.351
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Print 603.43.351/D
MAINTENANCE
Table of maintenance services

The Extra Plan operations (designated with the letters EP) are complementary to standard services (designated with letter M for
Maintenance).
They are maintenance operations to be carried out at regular time or mileage intervals and concern optional components that
are not present on all models.
Important! The correlation between kilometres and months only applies in cases where the distance travelled by the vehicle
corresponds roughly to the specified average annual mileage. This is indicated only in order to suggest a hypothetical maintenance
programme,. Note that the time intervals specified for Extra Plan operations (designated by letter T for Time) are to be adhered
to regardless of the actual mileage covered.
The kilometre frequency for engine lubrication is in relation to a percentage of sulphur in diesel of under 0.5%.
NOTE: If using diesel with a percentage of sulphur above 0.5%, the oil-change frequency has to be halved.
Use engine oil: ACEA B5 (Urania Daily)

ACEA E3/E5 (Urania LD5)
To schedule the work, keep to the following chart:
8140 ENGINE VEHICLES
Engine Engines Type of Standard Services Extra Plan Time Operations

Oil Type Usage EO M1 M2 EP1 T1 T2 T3 T4
Every
Mileage less
10,000 km
than
Engine or
ACEA B5 40,000 km/year
8140.63 PC/NA 200 hours
Dail (1)
Urania Daily (Pre-combustion Every E
Every E
Every E
Every EEvery year EEvery year
Mileage more
chamber) 7,500 km 30,000 km 90,000 km 120,000 km at the at the Every Every
than or or or start of start of 2 years 3 years
ACEA E3/E5 or
40,000 km/year
Urania Turbo LD5 150 hours 600 hours 1,800 hours 2,400 hours spring
p g winter
Engines
8140.43C ID/TCA
8140.43S ID/TCA
(1) IVECO recommend Urania Daily for benefits in terms of “fuel economy”. IVECO have already introduced this lubricant with new vehicles
D Average speed calculated at 50 km/h

D The fuel filter of the 8140.43R/B/S/N engines (common rail) must be replaced when the warning light on the
instrument panel comes on. Every 30,000 km if there is no signal.
D If fuel containing a percentage of sulphur higher than 0.5% is used, the mileage for changing the engine oil must be
halved.
D In the case of very low mileage or anyhow under 30,000 km/year, the engine oil and filter must be changed every
12 months.
D In the case of mileage under 40,000 km/year, the gearbox and axle oil must be changed at least every three years.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Inspection and/or maintenance interventions (8140 engine vehicles)

Engine
8140.63 PC/NA
EO M1 M2
(Pre-combustion
chamber)
Type of intervention
Mileage less than Every 10,000 km
40,000 km/year or 200 hours Every 30,000 km Every 90,000 km
Mileage more than Every 7,500 km or 600 hours or 1,800 hours
40,000 km/year or 150 hours
LUBRICATION, CHANGING OIL, FILTERS AND CHECKING FLUIDS
1 Changing engine oil • • •
1 Changing engine oil filter • •
2 Changing fuel filter • •
3 Checking hydraulic brake system fluid level • •
4 Changing fuel pre-filter •
CHECKS IN THE ENGINE BAY
• Checking state of auxiliary drive belts •
• Changing auxiliary drive belts (1) •
• Changing timing belt (1) •
• Changing pre-combustion chamber glow plugs •
CHECKS UNDER THE VEHICLE
7 Checking steering box rack covers • •
8 Checking wear of brake discs and shoes • •
6 Cleaning rear axle oil breather •
7 Checking steering column, articulation and linkage •
9 Checking steering box fixing •
10 Checking universal joints and propeller shaft fixing •
CHECKS IN THE CAB
• Checking parking brake travel • •
EXTERNAL CHECKS
11 Checking headlight adjustment •
DIAGNOSTICS
Check-up engine EDC system with MODUS-IT •
• 2000 (vehicles with common rail injection system
ON-ROAD TESTS
• Functional testing on the road • •
Extra plan operations (to be carried out possibly in combination with maintenance service)
EPI EVERY 120,000 km
- Change engine oil
- Rear axle differential oil changing procedure
TI EACH YEAR - especially in early springtime
- Check state of pollen filters.
In the case of low mileage, change the filters once a year, early each spring.
T2 EACH YEAR - before the winter season
- Check coolant density.
- Check pre-combustion chamber glow plug operation.
- Change supplementary heater fuel filter.
T3 EVERY TWO YEARS
- Change brake fluid and bleed brake fluid system.
T4 EVERY THREE YEARS - even if there is no indication of the air filter clogging
- Change cartridge and clean air filter container.
- Change engine coolant.
The timing system, alternator and air-conditioning compressor driving belts must be changed on reaching the first time/mileage
limit of the following: 90,000 km-1800 hours-4 years.
In harsh conditions of use (dusty and/or hot), the timing system driving belt must be changed every 60,000 km.
(1) Replace every four years. Replace every 60.000 km under harsh conditions of use (dust and/or heat).
(*) If the “clogged filter” warning lamp lights up on the instrument panel, the filter must be replaced before the programmed replacement interval
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

F1A ENGINE VEHICLES

Standard Services Extra plan Time Operations
Engine oil
Engine-oil Engine
M1 M2 EP1 EP2 T1 T2 T3 T4
ACEA B5 Every Every Every Every
Urania Daily (1) Every year Every year
40,000 km 120,000 km 240,000 km 240,000 km Every Every
Engine F1A at the start at the start
ACEA E3/E5 or or or or 2 years 3 years
of spring of winter
Urania Turbo LD5 800 hours 2,400 hours 4,800 hours 4,800 hours

D If using oils according to specification, the replacement interval for engine oil and filter must be reduced to 30,000
km
D If fuel containing a percentage of sulphur higher than 0.5% is used, the mileage for changing the engine oil must
be halved.
12 months.
D In the case of mileage under 40,000 km/year, , the gearbox and axle oil must be changed at least every three years.
Inspection and/or maintenance interventions (F1A engine vehicles)
M1 M2
Typ off intervention
Type Every 40,000 km Every 120,000 km
or 800 hours or 2,400 hours

1 Changing engine oil • •
2 Changing fuel filter * • •
4 Visually checking fuel pre-filter clogging •
5 Changing mechanical gearbox oil •
6 Changing rear axle oil •
CHECKS IN THE CAB
EXTERNAL CHECKS
DIAGNOSTICS
• Check-up engine EDC system with MODUS-IT 2000 •
ON-ROAD TESTS
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

EPI EVERY 80,000 km or 1600 hours (.12 and EGR engine vehicles only)
- Check air flow meter with MODUS - IWT IT 2000 devices
- Air flow meter replacement (1)
EP2 EVERY 240,000 km or, anyhow, every 5 years (or 4,800 hours)
- Changing the timing system driving belt (2).
- Changing the automatic tensioner of the timing system driving belt.
- Changing the automatic tensioner of the belt driving the alternator and hydraulic pump
- Changing the pre-heating glow plugs.


T3 EVERY TWO YEARS

- Change cartridge and clean air filter container (3).
- Change engine coolant.
(1) Replacement is mandatory also if the flow meter does not appear faulty following the test.
(2) The timing belt must be replaced in any case every 5 years.
(3) Early air cleaner obstruction is generally due to particular environmental conditions. For this reason it may need to be replaced when indicated by the
sensor regardless of the replacement interval also if not specifically stated.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

F1C ENGINE VEHICLES

Standard Services Extra plan Time Operations
Engine oil
Engine-oil Engine
M1 M2 EP1 T1 T2 T3 T4
Every Every Every
Every year Every year
ACEA B5 40,000 km 120,000 km 240,000 km Every Every
Urania Daily (1) Engine F1C at the start at the start
or or or 2 years 3 years
of spring of winter
800 hours 2,400 hours 4,800 hours

D If using oils according to specification, the replacement interval for engine oil and filter must be reduced to 30,000
km
D If fuel containing a percentage of sulphur higher than 0.5% is used, the mileage for changing the engine oil must
be halved.
12 months.
D In the case of mileage under 40,000 km/year, , the gearbox and axle oil must be changed at least every three years.
Inspection and/or maintenance interventions (F1C engine vehicles)

M1 M2
Typ off intervention
Type Every 40,000 km Every 120,000 km
or 800 hours or 2,400 hours

1 Changing engine oil • •
2 Changing fuel filter * • •
4 Visually checking fuel pre-filter clogging •
5 Changing mechanical gearbox oil •
6 Changing rear axle oil •
CHECKS IN THE CAB
EXTERNAL CHECKS
DIAGNOSTICS
• Check-up engine EDC system with MODUS-IT 2000 •
ON-ROAD TESTS
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

EP1 EVERY 240,000 km or, anyhow, every 5 years (or 4,800 hours)
- Changing the automatic tensioner of the belt driving the alternator.
- Changing the pre-heating glow plugs.


T3 EVERY TWO YEARS

- Change cartridge and clean air filter container. (1)
- Change engine coolant (2).
(1) Early air cleaner obstruction is generally due to particular environmental conditions. For this reason it may need to be replaced when indicated by the
sensor regardless of the replacement interval also if not specifically stated.
(2) Paraflu11 needs to be diluted at 50% with water, while Paraflu FE is already diluted at 50% with water.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DIAGRAM OF CHECK AND/OR MAINTENANCE POINTS

Figure 1
60391
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS
NOTE For the engines (8140..) use tool 99360091 and
The figures given below are for the maintenance remove the oil filter (1), for engines (F1A) use tool
work on the engines (8140..).
99360076.
NOTE After checking or changing parts, test the operation Before refitting the new cartridges, moisten the seal
of the vehicle. with engine oil.
Screw the oil filter (1) on by hand until it is in contact with

EO SERVICE (8140.63 engine with pre-chamber the mounting and then tighten by 3/4 of a turn (tightening
vehicles only) torque 25 Nm). Screw the plug back on under the sump.
1. Changing engine oil Pour oil into the engine through the filling-pipe (1) of the
Figure 2 required grade and quantity (see fluids table in the GENERAL
section).
2. Changing the fuel filter
Figure 4
60384
Take out the dipstick (2).

From underneath the vehicle, remove the soundproofing
guard, and fit it back on after completing the operation. 75424
Remove the plug from the oil sump and drain the engine oil
off into a special container. Pour oil into the engine through NOTE For the engines (8140..) use tool 99360091 and
the filling-pipe (1) of the required grade and quantity (see
fluids table in the GENERAL section). remove the fuel filter (1), for engines (F1A) use tool
99360076.
M1 SERVICE
NOTE M1 service is replaced by the “engine oil changing” Screw the new one on by hand (tightening torque 18 ± 2 Nm)
procedure described in the EO service section with taking care to check that the rubber gasket and seal surface are
the addition of the following operations. clean and in a perfect state of repair.
For 8140.63 and 8140.43C engines
Bleed the air from the supply as described hereunder.
1. Changing engine oil filter
Figure 3
Figure 5
52311
52313
Take out the dipstick (2). From underneath the vehicle,
remove the soundproofing guard, and fit it back on after Loosen the air bleeder screw (2) and operate the priming
completing the operation. Remove the plug from the oil pump piston (1) until all the air in the system has been ejected
sump and drain the engine oil off into a special container. then close the bleeder screw (2).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

M2 SERVICE
NOTE If the engine stops due to running out of fuel, with
air consequently getting into the system, it is NOTE The M2 service comprises some of the operations
necessary (if bleeding as described above is not in the M1 service as well as the following
sufficient) to loosen the fittings of at least two operations.
injectors, turn the engine by starting and after
bleeding the air close the fittings again.
4. Changing the fuel pre-filter
3. Checking hydraulic brake system fluid level (on the chassis frame)
Figure 7
Figure 6
75425
52314 Disconnect the pre-filter retaining clamp (1) and the clamps
(2) connecting the fuel pipes. Remove and replace the fuel
Check the level of brake fluid. If it is low, top it up (see fluids pre-filter (3).
table in the GENERAL section).
NOTE For vehicles with 8140 engine.

4. Visually checking fuel pre-filter This operation is described in EP1 service section.
clogging (F1A-FIC engines)
Visually check that the fuel pre-filter is not clogged;
if it is, change it as described in the M2 Service
“Changing fuel pre-filter (on chassis frame)”. 5. Changing gearbox oil
• Checking state of auxiliary drive belts Figure 8
Visually check that the belts are not worn or
deteriorated, in which case replace them as
described in the ”ENGINE” section.
7. Checking steering box rack covers

Remove the soundproofing guard from
underneath the vehicle.
If the covers are damaged at all, replace them as
described in the ”STEERING GEAR” section.
8. Checking wear of brake discs and

shoes
If the wear is found to be too great, replace the
brake discs or shoes as described in the ”BRAKES”
section. 52318
• Checking parking brake travel The lubrication oil should be drained off when it is warm.
Check that the vehicle stays braked with a lever Place a special container under the plug (1). Take out the
travel of: plug and drain off the oil.
- five catches. Screw the plug back on. Unscrew the filler plug and pour
in lubricating oil of the required grade and quantity (see
If it does not, adjust it as described in the ”BRAKES” fluids table in the GENERAL section).
section. Fit the plug (2) back on.
Remove the oil vapour vent and clean it thoroughly.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

6. Changing rear axle oil • Changing auxiliary drive belts

This should be done as described in the ”ENGINE”
NOTE For vehicles with 8140 engine. section.
This operation is described in EP1 service section.
• Changing timing belts (Engines:
8140-F1A)
Figure 9 This should be done as described in the ”ENGINE”
section.
For vehicles with 8140 engine.
• Changing pre-combustion chamber
glow plugs
This should be done as described in the ”ENGINE”
section.
NOTE For vehicles with 8140 engine.

6. Cleaning rear axle oil breather

75433
NOTE The oil change described refers to the Rear Axles Figure 11
4050210 - 450311/1 - 450511.
The lubricating oil has to be drained off while it is hot.

Place a container under the plug near the arrow; remove the
plug and drain off the oil.
Screw the plug back on. Unscrew the plug (2) and pour in the
prescribed quantity of lubricating oil (see fluids table under the
GENERAL INFORMATION heading).
To get off I leak it some vapors oil (1) and to carefully clean it.
Figure 10
62882
Take out the screws (1) and remove the brake caliper with
its brake linings from the mounting.
NOTE Cleaning the oil breather pipe as described here,

refers to the rear axle 450517/2, for rear axles
4050210 - 450311/1 - 450511 refer to Figure 9.
33123 7. Checking steering column,

articulation and linkage
NOTE The oil change described refers to the Rear Axles Steering linkage
450517/2. - Check that the nuts and screws securing the
clamps to the tie rods have not deteriorated
and are tightened to the required torque.
The lubrication oil should be drained off when it is warm.
- The tie rods must not be damaged, likewise the
Place a special container under the plug (2). Take out the plug
threaded portion must be sound.
and drain off the oil.
Screw the plug (2) back on. Unscrew the plug (1) and pour
in lubricating oil of the required grade and quantity (see fluids
table in the GENERAL section).
Remove the oil vapour vent and clean it thoroughly.
(Shown in Figure 11).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Swivel heads 11. Checking headlight adjustment

- Clean the swivel heads of the tie rods.
Figure 13
- This must be done with dry canvas or raw
cotton. Use no solvents.
- Check that the swivel heads, in their
components, have no points of corrosion, with
sections affected to a depth greater than 1 mm.
In particular, check the sheet metal cover close
to the rolled section.
- Check the protecting casing: it must be secured
to the body and to the pin of the joint with a
retaining ring and must not rotate.
- The casing must be neither damaged nor
deteriorated.
- Crush the protective casings by hand and check
that lubrication grease comes out. 46311
- Check that the nuts and split pins have not Set the unloaded vehicle on level ground, with the tyres at the
deteriorated. required pressure, opposite a light-coloured wall.
Draw two crosses on the wall corresponding to the centres
9. Checking steering box fixing of the two headlights.
Position the switch (for vehicles fitted with one) onto ”0”.
Remove the soundproofing guard from underneath
Set the vehicle at a distance of 10 metres and switch on the
the vehicle.
low beam. The distance between the crosses and the points
If there is any damage, refer to the ”STEERING
P, corresponding to the angle of the headlamps, must be
GEAR” section.
10 cm (1% as indicated on the plate).
After making the check, fit the soundproofing guard
back on.
• Check-up engine EDC system with
MODUS-IT2000 (UNIJET injection system)
10. Checking universal joints and propeller
shaft flange fixing
Figure 12
52124
The plates welded onto the propeller shafts are there for
balancing.
If there are no plates, it is necessary to balance the shaft again.
Turning the propeller shaft and at the same time the sliding
sleeve in the opposite direction, check there is not too much
clearance between the splines.
Acting on the forks of the couplings (in the direction of the
arrows shown in the figure), check that the spiders are not
worn. Replace them if they are.
If there is any damage, refer to the ”PROPELLER SHAFTS”
section.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DAILY ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC SYSTEM 1
SECTION 14
7600 Electric/Electronic system
Page
ABBREVIATIONS AND GRAPHIC SYMBOLS . . . 7
GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR LAYING ELECTRIC

CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
GENERAL WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
TECHNICAL CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
POWER NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
- General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
- Power network assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
- Positive network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
- Negative network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
- Earth points on the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
CONCEPT OF EARTH AND ELECTROMAGNETIC

COMPATIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
- Practical advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
- Ultrasonic cable welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
MAIN COMPONENTS OF POWER

NETWORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
- BOSCH KCBI 14V 110A Alternator . . . . . . . . 23
- EV 12V - 2.3 kW Starter motor . . . . . . . . . . . 24
- Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
- Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
- Interconnection center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
- General remote control switch (T.G.C.) . . . . . 28
ONBOARD CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
- Components of the injection system (E. 8140) 29
- Engine cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
8140.43C ID/TCA (.11) ENGINE HARNESS . . . . . 30
8140.43S UNIJET (.13) ENGINE HARNESS . . . . . . 32
INJECTION CABLE - V.G.T (.15) . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

2 ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC SYSTEM DAILY
Page Page
F1A UNIJET (.10 - .12) ENGINE HARNESS . . . . 36 - Connection between cab/bonnet cable and total
power takeoff cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
INJECTION CABLE - F1A (.10 - .12) WITH AND WIĆ
THOUT EGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 - Connection between cab/bonnet cable and total
power takeoff cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
TRUCK CHASSIS CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
- Connection between cab/bonnet cable and
A.B.S. PARALLEL CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 antitheft cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
AIR-BAG CABLE WITH ONE-CONNECTOR CONĆ - Connection between cab/bonnet cable and
TROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 antitheft cable with central door locking . . . . 69
AIR-BAG CABLE WITH TWO-CONNECTOR CONĆ - Connection between cab/bonnet cable and right
TROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 door cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
VAN INTERIOR DOME LAMP CABLES 1/2 . . . . 48 - Connection between cab/bonnet cable and left
door cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
VAN INTERIOR DOME LAMP CABLES 2/2 . . . . 50
- Connection between cab roof lamp and left
front clearance light cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
TRUCK INTERIOR DOME LAMP CABLES . . . . . 52
- Connection between cab roof lamp and right
JUNCTION CONNECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 front clearance light cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
- Connection between cab/bonnet cable and injection - Connection between cab/bonnet cable and fog
cable (Unijet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 lamp cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
- Connection between cab/bonnet cable and air bag - Connection between right tail light cable and
cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 rear roof lamp cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
- Connection between cab/bonnet cable and rear - Connection between frame cable and side
differential lock cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 clearance lights cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
- Connection between cab/bonnet cable and cable - Connection between cab/bonnet cable and ABS
for tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
- Connection between frame cable and right tail - Connection between cab/bonnet cable and
lamp cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 ABS cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
- Connection between frame cable and right tail - Connection between cab/bonnet cable and
lamp cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 climate control system cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
- Connection between frame cable and left tail - Connection between cab/bonnet cable and
- Connection between frame cable and left tail - Connection between cab/bonnet cable and
- Connection between cab/bonnet cable and roof VENDOR-DERIVED BUS VERSION . . . . . . . . . . 82
lamp cable inside cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
- General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
- Connection between cab/bonnet cable and 13
pin current socket cable or rear door opening/
closing cable (van) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 - Perspective view of Vendor-derived Bus
version interior lighting harness . . . . . . . . . . . 83
brake wear/air cleaner clogged cable . . . . . . . 63 - Diagnostic connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
- Connection between cab/bonnet cable and RELAY AND FUSE HOLDER SUPPORT . . . . . . . 86
self-levelling suspension cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
- Identification of fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
self-levelling suspension cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 - Identification of relays/diode holders . . . . . . . 88
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Page Page
OPTICAL INDICATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
- Interface bride with the new tool with 32-way - Camshaft pulley and timing sensor . . . . . . . . . 137
connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
- Flywheel and rpm sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
- Flywheel and camshaft sensor specifications . . 139
- Warning lights assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
- Pre-filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
- Instrument assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
- Electric pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
- Connector assembly (cable input side view) . 94
- Fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
SWITCH ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
- High pressure pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
STALK UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
- High-pressure pump (F1A engine) . . . . . . . . . 143
- Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
- Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
- Pressure regulator (F1A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
- Rail (pressure accumulator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
- Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
- Rail (pressure accumulator - F1A) . . . . . . . . . 147
- System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
- Flow limiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
- Key teaching procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
- Pressure limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
ABS/EBD/ABD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
- Fuel pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
- General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
- Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
SYSTEM WITH 4 CROSSED CHANNELS (X) . . 116
- Fuel outlets unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
- Location of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
- Air flow meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
- Sensor on phonic wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
- Atmospheric pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
- Electrohydraulic control unit/modulator . . . . . 119
- Engine coolant temperature sensor . . . . . . . . 153
- Electrohydraulic modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
SYSTEM WITH 4 PARALLEL CHANNELS (11) . 125
- Brake pedal switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
- Electrohydraulic control unit/modulator . . . . . 126
- Clutch pedal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
- Electrohydraulic modulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
- Electromagnetic junction fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
- Pressure increase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
- Preheat plug electronic centre
- Electronic control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 (F1A/F1C engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
ELECTRONIC INJECTION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . 133 - Preheat plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
- Common rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 EDC MS6.3 / EDC16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
- Common rail (F1A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 - Electronic injection control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
- Hydraulic system (Common Rail - F1A) . . . . 136
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Page Page
- Bosch MS6.3 control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 - Pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
- Control unit connection to the injection cable on - Air temperature/pressure sensor

engine side (housing A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 (without EGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
- Control unit connection to cab-bonnet cable - Atmospheric pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

(housing B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
- Engine coolant temperature sensor . . . . . . . . 194
- EDC system components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
- Blink Code (up to chassis no. 5383302/
D187233) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 - Fuel filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
- Common Rail 8140.43B - 8140.43S - - Brake pedal switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
8140.43N - EDC MS6.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
- Clutch pedal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
- F1A Common Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
- Injectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
- EDC16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
- Electromagnetic junction fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
- Bosch EDC16 control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
CLIMATE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
- Control unit connection to the injection cable
on engine side (housing A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
- General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
- Control unit connection to cab-bonnet cable
(housing K) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 - Operating logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
- Accelerator pedal sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 - Electronic control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
- Camshaft sensor (F1A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 - Outside air temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . 206
- Injection cable F1A (.10 - .12) . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 - Inside temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
- Joint connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 - Blown air temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
- Diagnostic connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 - Evaporator temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . 208
- Diagnostic connector pin description table . . 180 - Required temperature potentiometer . . . . . . 208
- High-pressure pump (F1A engine) . . . . . . . . . 181 - Ventilation control potentiometer . . . . . . . . . 209
F1C ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 - Electronic fan control module . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
- Injection cable F1C (.14 - .17) . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 - Air mixing gear motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
- Connection between cab/bonnet cable and - Re-circulation gear motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

injection cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
- Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
- R.p.m. / timing sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
- Safety pressure switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
- Timing sensor (stroke) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
SYSTEM SELF-DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
- RPM sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
- Diagnostics through blink code . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
- Timing sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
- Blink codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
- High-pressure pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
AIR BAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
- General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
- Rail (pressure accumulator) F1C . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Page Page
- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 - Arrangement of components . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
- Preliminary rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 MAIN COMPONENTS OF THE SYSTEM . . . . . . 241
- Operations after an accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 - Remote-control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
- Painting work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 - Electronic central control unit (ECU) . . . . . . . 243
- Health hazards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 - Arrangement of the switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
- Effects of over-exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 - Electronic volumetric-detection module . . . . 248
- Rules of safety in handling air bag modules . . . 220 - Siren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
- Air bag module scrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 ERROR CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
- Rules of safety in handling pretensioners . . . . 221 - Error code table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
- Scrapping pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 AIR SUSPENSIONS ECAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
- Operations on system components . . . . . . . . 222 - WABCO electronically controlled air

suspensions (ECAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
- Removing and scrapping an activated air bag
module and pretensioner from a vehicle . . . . 222 - Vehicles with braking system without ABS . . . 256
- Removing or scrapping an air bag module that has - Vehicles with ABS system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
not been deployed from a reparable vehicle . 222
- Electronic Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
- Deployment of an air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
- Level sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
- Deployment of air bag modules and electronic
pretensioners still on board of irreparable vehicles 224 - Pneumatic supply unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
- Electronic control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 - Brake action compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
- One-connector electronic control unit pin-out 226 - Chassis lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
- ECU pin-out to the two connectors . . . . . . . 229 - Chassis lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
- Drivers air bag module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 - Chassis leveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
- Clock spring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 VB TECHNIEK PNEUMATIC SUSPENSIONS . . . . 267
- Passenger's air bag module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 - Vehicles with braking system without ABS . . . 269
- Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 - Vehicles with ABS system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
- Driver's/passenger's pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . 235 SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
- Centre passenger's pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . 236 - Electronic Control Unit (35C - 40C - 45C) . 271
DOOR-BLOCKER WITH ANTI-THEFT - Electronic control unit (60C - 65C - 50C) . . 272
PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
- Level sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
- General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
- Brake action compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
- System components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
ROTATING SLIDING DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
- Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
- Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Page
SYSTEM COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
- Electronic center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
- Optical and sound warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
- Sound device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
- Description and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
- Emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
- Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
- Description of opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
- Description of closing cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
- Operating diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
ELECTRONIC TACHOGRAPH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
- Removing the lower dashboard cover . . . . . . 284
- Electronic tachograph control unit housing

assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
- Assembling the tachograph control unit support

on the dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
- Removing the instrument cluster module . . . . 286
- Operations on gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
- Operation in bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
CIRCUIT CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ABBREVIATIONS AND GRAPHIC SYMBOLS
Indicates a general warning II6 Connector between cables:

II = connector number
A Ampere 6 = cell number
kW KiloWatt
NB Note Well 7777 Cable colour code

m2 Identification of an earth point
IWT IVECO Wiring Tester
V Volt Consult
Ω Ohm
60 O
Reed fuse on control box
Connection to a power earth point 4 = fuse number
5A
4
5A = capacity
59-60 = terminal identification
59 O
Connection to a signal earth point
720303C Code of connector between cables:

Electronic component or control unit
72030 = connector code
3C = cell identification co-ordinates
Base equipment Optional equipment
Optional electrical connection in a

Base electrical connection
base circuit chart
Connection to earth through metal

Connection to earth by cable
agglomerate
Cables symbol
No protection
Protection with continuous PVC tape
Protection with 30 mm spiral PVC tape
The symbol identifies a knot
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR LAYING ELECTRIC CIRCUITS

- Engine off
- Ignition switch off
- Handbrake engaged
- Neutral gear
- Fluids at normal level
GENERAL WARNINGS
Do not ever disconnect the system batteries and do not open the general current switch with the i.c. engine running.
! Do not start the engine without first connecting the batteries in a permanent manner.
- Before doing any work on the vehicle chock the wheels appropriately.
- Do not use quick chargers to start the engine. Starting must only be carried out with separate batteries or with the special
trolley.
- Make sure that the polarity on the battery terminals is correct when starting from an auxiliary trolley.
- The incorrect polarisation of the power voltage of electronic control units (for example incorrect polarisation of the batteries)
may lead to their destruction.
- When needing to disconnect the battery from the system, firstly always disconnect the battery negative cable that goes to
the engine from the negative terminal of the battery itself.
- Before connecting the battery to the system, make sure that it is well insulated.
- When seeking faults, insert a wander fuse between the battery negative terminal and the engine earth cable.
- Before removing any electrical and/or electronic components, disconnect the ground cable from the negative terminal of
the battery.
- Disconnect the battery from the system when charging it with external equipment.
- Disconnect the external charging equipment from the mains before removing its grippers from the terminals of the battery.
- Do not insert or remove the connector of electronic control units with the power on.
- With temperatures above 80 °ºC (drying ovens) remove the electronic control units
- During electric welding work disconnect the connectors of electronic control units.
- During connection, tighten the nuts of the connectors (temperature, pressure sensors, etc.) only with the specified tightening
torque.
Key storing procedures are affected by electromagnetic noise (mobile phones, etc.). Therefore, during key storing:
! 1. Pay attention that there are no noise sources in the cab or near keys.
2. Keys not inserted in panel must be at least at 1 metre distance.
Measurements in electronic control units, plug connections and electric connections to components may be carried
! out only on appropriate testing lines, with special plugs and sockets. Never use improper means such as metal wires,
screwdrivers, clips or the like. In addition to the danger of a short circuit, damage to the plug connectors may also result
and this would subsequently cause contact problems.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

TECHNICAL CODES
03000 Self-rectifying alternator with built in voltage regulator
08000 Starter motor
12006 Motor for adjustable mirrors
12010 Motor for locking right door
12011 Motor for locking left door
12012 Compressor for air conditioning system
12025 Power takeoff motor
12026 Motor, winch control
12027 Motor for opening or closing left side door lock
19005 Thermal starter
19010 Heater plug
20000 Starter battery
22001 Horn
22039 Bell for parking lights on signal
25003 Relay for switching on fog lights
25006 Brake lights relay
25014 Relay for enablement of parking lights with engine off
25023 Relay for disconnection of low beam lights with parking lights on
25104 Relay for switching off Retarder with ABS engaged
25209 Relay for switching off services during starting
25222 Relay for allowing connection of thermal starter
25223 Relay for allowing connection of thermal starter fuel tank with atmosphere
25307 Relay for controlling air conditioning compressor
25336 Relay for engine cooling electromagnetic joint
25337 Relay for disconnecting air-conditioning system compressor
25340 Relay, compressor operation, signal to EDC
25620 Relay for fuel filter clogged signal
25704 Relay for switching NC/NO signal for third steering axle
25705 Relay for enabling point switching on
25810 Relay for controlling diesel heating circuit
25811 Ignition timer relay (KSB)
25818 Relay for switching on heated windscreen
25837 Relay for connection of fuel pump
25858 Relay for EDC connection
25926 Relay for enablement of suspension lifting and stopping of suspension lowering function
25927 Relay for enablement of suspension lowering and stopping of suspension lifting function
25928 Relay, rear window heating
28002 Engine stopping electromagnet
30003 Multifunctional side headlight
30011 Fog light
32002 Front direction indicator
33001 Side direction indicator
33004 Side marker lamp
34000 Multifunctional rear light
34007 Stop light
34009 Rear fog lamp
35000 Number plate light
37001 Front dimensions light
39020 Ashtray light
39022 Courtesy light for cabin interior with adjustable spot light
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

39025 Lamp for lighting rear hatch

39026 Lamp for lighting side hatch
40011 Electronic tachograph
40030 Sender unit for electronic tachometer
40031 Sender unit for electronic tachograph
40046 Inductive type chassis height sensor (rear axle)
42035 Absolute pressure sensor
42102 Switch signalling handbrake applied
42350 Switch signalling body tilted
42351 Switch signalling air filter blocked
42354 Switch for air suspension system failure
42374 EDC clutch switch
42550 Switch signalling engine oil pressure
42552 Fuel filter clogged indicator switch
42608 Coolant pressure signalling 3-switch assembly
44031 Sender unit, fuel level indicator with w/lamp contact
44033 Insufficient brake fluid level gauge control
44036 Insufficient radiator coolant level gauge control
44037 Insufficient power assisted steering fluid level gauge control
44044 Engine oil low level indicator control
47034 Engine coolant temperature sensor (EGR)
47035 Engine coolant temperature sensor
47104 Switch for engaging engine cooling electromagnet coupling
47106 Switch for engaging diesel fuel heating
47109 Switch for connection of ignition timer (KSB)
47207 Switch/sender unit, engine water temperature indicator
48035 Engine rpm sensor
48042 Engine rpm sensor (on timing gear)
52005 Switch with built in w/l for heated rear view mirrors
52036 Switch with built in w/l for engaging windscreen heater
52082 Switch with built-in w/lamp, fog lights
52083 Switch with built-in w/lamp, hazard lights
52084 Switch with incorporated warning light for switching on rear differential lock
52090 Suspension levelling switch (ECAS)
52091 Switch with incorporated warning light for switching on rearscreen heating
52093 Switch for tail hatch locking safety
52310 Switch for adjustable mirrors
52312 Switch controlling headlamp alignment adjustment
52502 Ignition switch for services with starting
53004 Switch for headlamp washer
53041 Switch for checking EDC system
53051 Suspension lifting switch
53052 Suspension lowering switch
53300 Switch for driver's side electric window
53302 Switch for passenger side electric window
53501 Switch signalling vehicle stopped
53503 Switch signalling reversing lights
53505 Rear differential lock engaged indicator switch
53509 Switch for switching on interior lights
53565 Switch for signalling brake pedal fully pressed
53590 Switch for bonnet open signal
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

54032 8 function steering column switch unit

58700 Led, battery charging failure
58701 Led, EDC failure
58702 Led, preheating on
58703 Led, ABS failure
58709 Trailer direction indicators ON LED
58710 Water in fuel pre-filter indicator LED
58713 Led, ECAS system failure
58715 Total power take off (PTO) ON indicator LED
58717 Led, Immobilizer on
58718 Brake system failure warning led
58719 Led per segnalazione freno a mano inserito
58720 Led, radiator water level
58722 Led, engine oil pressure (low)
58725 Led, air cleaner restriction
58728 Power steering fluid level w/lamp
58730 Engine oil level w/lamp
58735 Led for indicating rear differential lock on
58918 32-optical indicator panel
61002 3 diode holder container 3A (with + common)
61101 Diesel fuel heater resistor
61102 Rheostat for antipollution device (EGR)
61103 Variable resistance for ignition timer control (KSB)
61106 Windscreen heater resistor
61124 Resistance for rearscreen heating
64000 Electric windscreen washer pump
65000 Windscreen wiper unit
66005 Headlamp washer pump
66010 Headlamp washer timer
68000 Radio equipment
68001 Speaker
72016 13-pole coupling for 12V connection to trailer
72027 38-pole coupling for connection with IVECO
78000 Solenoid valve for connection with atmosphere from fuel tank for thermal starters
78013 Pressure regulator solenoid valve
78015 Solenoid valve to cut out third pumping element
78208 Transmission total power take-off solenoid valve
78209 Solenoid valve for antipollution devices (EGR)
78233 Vehicle raising solenoid valve assembly
78247 Solenoid valve for electronic injection
78248 Solenoid valve for variable geometry turbine order
80000 Motor for right electric window
80001 Motor for left electric window
82000 Windscreen defrosting control unit
82010 Joint between cab-bonnet cable and climate control cable
84020 Outdoor temperature sensor
85000 Cigar lighter
85005 Electrically adjustable heated rear view mirror
85022 Engine cooling electromagnet coupling
85028 Locking device for rear differential
85036 Heated air-suspended seat (driver's side)
85038 Heated air-suspended seat (driver's opposite side)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

85130 Immobilizer
85131 Volumetric sensor
85132 Antitheft device self-supplying syren
85150 4-channel methane control unit
85151 EDC injection pump
85152 Accelerator load sensor (EDC)
85156 Turbofan air pressure temperature sensor, (EDC)
85157 Pressure adjustment sensor
86002 Sensors for front brake shoe wear
86003 Sensors for rear brake shoe wear
86011 Electronic control unit, pre/after-heating system
86012 Electronic control unit for signalling water in fuel filter
86013 Sensor, water in fuel filter
86020 Antipollution device control unit (EGR)
86023 Vehicle raising/lowering control unit
86029 Electronic control unit for central door locking
86046 Electronic control unit for trailer lights control
86047 Electronic control unit for switching on total power takeoff
86060 Airbag control unit
86061 Air bag
86062 Pretightener
88000 ABS system electronic control unit
88001 ABS system sensor
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

POWER NETWORK
General
Never disconnect the battery from the system with the engine running.
! When needing to disconnect the battery from the system, always firstly disconnect the earth cable on the engine from
the battery negative terminal.
Before connecting the battery to the system, make sure that the system is well insulated.
Disconnect the battery from the system when charging it.
The purpose of the electric system is to generate, regulate, store and distribute the energy needed to make the vehicle
components work.
For this reason the supply of the base electric system is ensured by a generator (14V, 50 - 110A alternator) and a 12 V, 110
Ah battery.
The battery is located in a special compartment on the left front side of the bonnet.
Figure 1
Earth points
m4 m6
ms3
m1
ms8
m2 m3
ms7 m7
m5
7389
EARTH POINTS
m1. Engine earth - m2. Frame earth - m3. Bonnet power earth - ms3. Bonnet signal earth - m4. Bonnet right side earth
m5. Bonnet left side earth - m6. m7. Cab inside earths - ms7. Cab inside signal earth - ms8. Air bag signal earth
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Power network assembly

Figure 2
A m6 B C D m7 E F G
8633
I H m3 m2 m1
POWER NETWORK ASSEMBLY
A. Control box - B. Instrument cluster with warning lights - C. Ignition switch - D. Stalk unit - E. Relay/fuse holder Support
- F. Starter motor - G. Earth cables of frame and tail lighting components - H. Battery - I. Alternator
Figure 3 A m6 B C D m7 E F
73720
I H m3 m2 m1 O N M L G
POWER NETWORK ASSEMBLY WITH TELMA SPEED LIMITER
A. Control box - B. Instrument cluster with warning lights - C. Ignition switch - D. Stalk unit - E. Relay/fuse holder Support
- F. Starter motor - G. Earth cables of frame and tail lighting components - H. Battery - I. Alternator - L. Relays -
M. Electromagnets - N. Ground point - O. Ground cable for Telma speed limiter
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Positive network Figure 4

The battery positive terminal is connected through a 50 mm2
cable to terminal 30 of the starter motor. Two 16 mm2 and
one 6 mm2 cables are also connected to the battery positive
terminal cable. The first two cables are connected to
alternator and interconnection central unit, while the other
cable feeds 60A fuse for pre-heating glow plugs central unit.
At the terminal of the battery positive cable in vehicles with
ABS a 6 mm2 cable connects the 40A fuse that supplies the
ABS electronic control unit.
In the vehicles that are provided with a cab/bonnet cable
preset for various options, a 4 mm2 cable is also connected
to battery positive cable pin; via ultrasound weld, it feeds key
switch, 38-pole diagnosis connector and instrument panel
with warning indicators.
8627
CONNECTIONS TO BATTERY POSITIVE TERMINAL
Figure 5
8628
CONNNECTION OF STARTER MOTOR TERMINAL 30

TO BATTERY POSITIVE TERMINAL
Figure 6
8629
POSITIVE NETWORK CONECTION TO ALTERNATOR
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 7
In the immediate vicinity of the battery, there is the control
box; this has the task of providing the battery + supply,
through internal bridges to the different electric functions of
the vehicle.
A 6 mm2 cable and a 10 mm2 cable are connected to it;
through ultrasonic welds they supply certain components and
part of the fuses and relays located on the support on the
lower left part of the dashboard.
In particular, the components and electric functions supplied
by the 6 mm2 cable are:
- interior lighting, radio-receiver, cigar lighter
- services cut-off relay during starting
- headlamp washer
- 13-pin current socket
8630 - socket for converter
CONTROL BOX AND ITS CONNECTIONS
The 10 mm2 cable supplies:
Figure 8 - ignition switch (base vehicle)
- stalk unit (exterior lights and hazard warning)
- stop lights
- horns
- EDC switching on relay
- instrument cluster with warning lights
- modus diagnostics enable relay
- heated fuel filter
- climate control system
- door locking
Lastly, a 2.5 mm2 cable can be connected to the control box

which supplies fuse 33 (20A), where applicable, of the
relay/fuse holder support relating to the additional heater
8631
control unit.
RELAY/FUSE HOLDER SUPPORT
Figure 9
15/A 30
50 15
8632
POSITIVE NETWORK CONNECTION TO IGNITION

SWITCH
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Negative network Figure 11

The battery negative terminal is connected to with a brown
50 mm2 cable to the earth point m1 to be found on the
left-hand side of the crankcase, next to the starter motor.
From this point, two copper braids are connected to earth
points m2 on the front of the left sidemember and m3, on the
bonnet under the vacuum servobrake. At m3 the wirings
concerning the frame and engine are connected. Near m3,
there is another earth point, called ms3 which, through a 2.5
mm2 cable performs the signal earth function for the ABS
electronic control unit.
A 6 mm2 cable also connects the battery cable pin to the
ultrasound weld on which the earth cables of immobilizer
electronic central unit, EDC system function control switch, m1
EDC electronic central unit and diagnosis connector
converge.
8622
EARTH POINT ON ENGINE
Figure 10 Figure 12
m2
8623 8624
EARTH POINT ON FRAME EARTH POINT ON LOWER BONNET (m3-ms3)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 13
Earth point m4 to which the components concerning the
front and right side lighting, windscreen wiper, windscreen
washer, windscreen washer pump and air cleaner clogged
signal switch are connected, is located in the bonnet near the
right front direction indicator.
Earth point m5 to which the components concerning the left
front lighting and the fuel oil heating device are connected,
is located near the left front direction indicator.
m4
Earth points m6 and m7 are respectively located on the right
and left of the cab, near the upper hinges of the doors. To
these are connected the components in the dashboard (stalk
unit, instruments, warning lights, switches), in the doors,
where applicable (power window switches, motors for power
window/door locking, rear-view mirror aiming) and in the
upper part of the cab (roof lamp, front clearance lights).
8625
Near m7 earth point, there is the ms7 signal earth; from here,
a 1.5 mm2 cable is connected to an ultrasound weld towards
EARTH POINT ON BONNET RIGHT-HAND SIDE which the signal earth cables of cab/bonnet cable electronic
components like steering column stalk and instrument panel
Figure 14 with warning indicators for diagnosis converge.
Lastly on the floor panel, next to the handbrake lever, there
is an earth point (ms8) specific for the air bag electronic
control unit.
m5
8626
EARTH POINT ON BONNET LEFT-HAND SIDE

Figure 16
Figure 15
m7
m6
7379 ms7 7380
EARTH POINT ON CAB RIGHT-HAND SIDE EARTH POINT ON CAB LEFT-HAND SIDE
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Earth points on the vehicle

Figure 17
m6 m7
ms7
m3
ms8
m4 ms3
m3
m5
m1
m2
7390
Earth connection Location Components concerned

m1 Left crankcase Battery negative terminal-connection to
earth points m2 and m3
8634
m2 Front part of left sidemember Connection to earth point m1
8635
m3 Lower bonnet Connection to earth point m1 -

ms3 (under vacuum power steering) components on frame and engine -
electronic ABS control unit
8636
m4 Bonnet Fuel oil heating resistance - air cleaner

m5 (near right and left side direction indicator) clogged signal switch - front and side lights
- windscreen washer pump
8637
m6 Cab inner right side Stalk unit - windscreen electric demister

control unit - cigar lighter- ashtray light -
hazard warning light switch - radio-receiver
unit
7395
m7 Cab inner left side Instrument cluster with warning lights -

front clearance lights - headlamp aiming
control - relays on relay/fuse holder support
- interior lighting
7396
ms7 Cab inner left side Instrument cluster with warning lights - stalk
unit - low engine coolant fluid level indicator
control - transmitter for electronic
tachograph
7397
ms8 Centre floor Air bag electronic control unit
8638
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

CONCEPT OF EARTH AND ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY

The electric system is traditionally a single-pole system. The body, the frame, the metal container of electromechanical
components act as equipotential return conductor to the generator, as any point of their metal structure or any negative terminal
not isolated is at the same reference potential or EARTH. This is why the earth has been chosen as reference to the whole system,
conventionally giving it the value of zero.
Due to obvious reasons of construction, in the negative network of the system there are various earth points located on the
vehicle in relation to the location of the components on the frame, engine and body.
On the other hand, ideally, all the equipment should be connected to only one earth point in order to provide them, particularly
for electronic devices, a clearly defined earth reference.
For the above-mentioned reasons it is necessary to distinguish the supply earth or system earth, characterised by strong direct
current intensity (> 1 A for electromechanical components), from the analogue earth, characterised by wave shapes at
determinate frequencies and very low current intensity (mA, µA) of electronic systems.
The definition of signal earth or analogue earth depends on the sensitivity of the electronic systems to EMC (electromagnetic
compatibility), as parasite signals emitted by the systems on board or outside the vehicle, induce failures and/or deterioration of
the systems themselves. The best solution for a signal earth is connection with the battery negative terminal.
In order to minimise both continuous and transient disturbance or interference generated by parasite radiation, it is of the utmost
importance to always bear in mind that the satisfactory efficiency of the reference plane or system earth depends on the excellent
conductivity characteristics (contact resistance tending towards zero) in each of its connection points.
Briefly, we can say that the earth understood as equipotential electrical conductor, i.e. as potential reference for all the
electric/electronic components on board, is subdivided into system earth and analogue earth.
Figure 18
6616
IDEAL EQUIPOTENTIAL EARTH NETWORK

Ba. Battery - R. Loads - Rz. Frame impedance - M1, M2, M3. Earth
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Practical advice
The negative cables connected to an earth point must be as short as possible and connected to one another in a "star" connection,
trying to tighten them neatly and adequately.
Additionally, for electronic components the following instructions should absolutely be followed:
- Electronic control units must be connected to the system earth when they have a metal container.
- The negative cables of electronic control units must be connected to both a system earth point, for example the dashboard
earth (avoiding "serial" or "chain" connections), and to the negative terminal of the battery/ies.
- Though they are not connected to the system earth/battery negative terminal, analogue earths (sensors) must be perfectly
insulated. Therefore, particular care should be given to the parasite resistances of the terminals: oxidation, clinching defects,
etc.
- In the presence of jointing connectors the unscreened section d, near them, should be as short as possible.
- The cables should be laid on parallel with the reference plane, i.e. as near as possible to the frame/body structure.
- Additional electromechanical systems should be carefully connected to the system earth and must not be set at the side
of the cables of electronic components.
Figure 19
88039
SCREENING BY METAL BRAID OF A CABLE TO AN ELECTRONIC COMPONENT

C. Connector - d. Distance ! 0
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Ultrasonic cable welding

In order to eliminate earth, supply, outer/inner lighting bridges between components, ultrasonic welding points have been used.
These are not easily identifiable as they appear along the cables inside the corrugated tube of the various harnesses and they are
isolated from the cables through heat-shrinking sheaths or insulating plastic.
Generally, the cables of the components converge on one side in the different welding points, while on the other only one cable
connects them with the earth or supply.
It is also possible to have several welding points connected to one another in which several cables converge on both sides of
the welding. In this case, the earth or supply cable will be connected to the last weld of the series.
Ultrasonic welding brings considerable advantages, including:
- reduction of electromagnetic interference outside the vehicle
- the almost total reliability of the electric system, due to elimination of the bridges, with lower possibility of faults.
Figure 20
A
B
4886 8576
ULTRASONIC WELDING
A. Wiring diagram - B. Technical layout
8577
CONNECTION BETWEEN COMPONENTS

A. Connection through bridges - B. Connection through ultrasonic welding point
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

MAIN COMPONENTS OF POWER

NETWORK 03000
BOSCH KCBI 14V 110A Alternator
Specifications for use

Figure 21
Vehicle electric system rated voltage: 12 V
Suitable for coupling with battery of any capacity
It must work with the battery connected.
Connection with inverted polarity is not allowed.
Operating specifications
Rated voltage 14 V
Rated current delivery 110A
Drive side direction of rotation clockwise
Maximum continuous speed ≤ 12.000 min-1
Storage temperature -40 °C / +110 °C
8649
WIRING DIAGRAM
Figure 22
8656
TECHNICAL VIEW
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

EV 12V - 2.3 kW Starter motor Figure 24

Figure 23 08000
74023 8642
WIRING DIAGRAM PERSPECTIVE VIEW

Figure 25
5
2
4
3
1
7 10
9
8
6 5260
PERSPECTIVE BLOWN-UP VIEW

1. Support - 2. Pinion engagement control electromagnet - 3. Pinion - 4. Pinion engament fork - 5. Rotor - 6. Frame -
7. Inductors - 8. Brush holder support - 9. Cover - 10. Screw
Fast diagnosis
Defect Possible causes Remedy

Low drawing torque 1. Low battery Recover
2. Oxidized or loose circuit connecĆ Check starter motor and battery conĆ
tions nections
3. Faulty brushes Check brush slide length and pressure
4. Field coils short circuited Replace coils
5. Rotor cut out or short circuited Replace rotor
6. Oval collector Grind correct or replace
Low drawing torque but engine does 1. Defective free wheel or electromaĆ Replace
not start gnet
Pinion disconnected 1. Worn toothed crown Recover
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Battery
The battery shown below has a 12Vdc 110Ah 460 A power supply voltage and is installed on the left side of the engine
compartment near the EDC control unit (Ref. A of figure).
Requirements
- Case and cover in polypropylethylene plastics PR. 50.100. Matt white case.
- C.S. plugs, blacK. Grids: positive and negative made of Pb Ca.
- Cover integral polypropylene
- Separator: envelope-type polyethylene
- Battery for tropical duty" marked with red color.
- Environmental precautions" plate according to Law no. 126 of 10/04/91 Standards for user information".
- Adhesive label with Selective disposal" acc. to EEC Directive no. 93/86.
Figure 26
73721
Fast diagnosis
Defect Possible causes Remedy

Start defect 1. Low battery Check battery charge; if regular check
recharge circuit
2. Loose, oxidized or burnt out conĆ Recover
tacts
3. Starter circuit defective Cf. start section
Low voltage at component leads 1. Battery at half power Check battery charge; if regular check
recharge circuit
2. Oxidized connections Sand and replace
Electrolyte level often low 1. Over voltage Check recharge circuit and/or connecĆ
tion tightness
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Ignition switch 52502

Figure 27 Figure 28
30
0
II
50 15/A 15 1171 1125

SWITCHING SEQUENCE
WIRING DIAGRAM 0. Stop - I. Drive - II. Starting
Figure 29
0
115º
I
44º
II
15/A 30
50 15
8654
PERSPECTIVE VIEW WITH ASSOCIATED CONNECTIONS AND KEY ROTATION TECHNICAL LAYOUT
Cable colour
Position Under current Live circuit Terminal Function code
0 30 - 30 Supply 7777
I 30 -15 Services 15 Services 8887

30 - 15/A Users
15/A User cut-off relay during 8850
starting
30 - 15 Services
II 30 - 50 Starting 50 8888
Starting
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Interconnection center
This is a shunt center distributing battery positive power via internal jumpers.
Figure 30
8630
PERSPECTIVE VIEW OF THE JUNCTION BOX AND ASSOCIATED CONNECTORS AND THEIR SURFACE WITH
CONTACT BLADES
Figure 31
73722
VIEW OF THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT LOCATION
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

General remote control switch (T.G.C.)

The general remote control switch is installed in vertical position to the vehicle chassis near the battery using special mounting
brackets. The remote control switch closing is controlled by switch 53008 and the associated relay to energize TGC from inside
cab 25226.
Figure 32
73717
GENERAL REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ONBOARD CABLES Figure 33

Components of the injection system (E. 8140)
1. Injector 1
2. Injector retainer screw and bracket 2
3. Injector retainer screw and bracket 3
4. Rail sound-absorbing protection (pressure
accumulator)
4 8
5. High pressure pipe 5 9
6. Pump backflow pipe 6
7. High pressure pump 7
8. Thermal starter supply pipe
9. Fuel outlets unit
COMPONENTS OF THE INJECTION SYSTEM
Figure 34
4
Components of the injection system
5
1. Thermal starter supply pipei 1
2. Brackets
6
2
3. Brackets 7
4. Connection pipe with intercooler 3
8
5. Thermal starter
9
6. Piping
7. After warming solenoid valve
8. Intake manifold
9. Boosting air pressure sensor
COMPONENTS OF THE FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM -

INJECTION
Figure 35
Engine cable
All engine cabling is in one bundle assembly.
In case of need replace the entire bundle assembly and not
individual cables or cable sections.
CABLE ON ENGINE
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

8140.43C ID/TCA (.11) ENGINE HARNESS

Figure 36
74002
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 37
WELDING 8140.43C
74003
Component
Description
code
00000 Ground
03000 Self-rectifying alternator with incorporated voltage regulator
08000 Starter motor
12012 A/C compressor
19005 Thermostarter
28002 Engine shutdown solenoid
42550 Engine oil low pressure indicator switch
44044 Low engine oil level indicator control
47030 Transmitter for engine water temperature thermometer
47104 Engine cooling electromagnetic coupling
47105 Diesel oil heating switch
47109 Spark advance variator switch (KSB)
48035 RPM sensor
61103 Variable resistance for spark advance variator (KSB)
70066 40A one-way fuse holder
72030 Engine service harness connector to cab/hood harness
78000 Solenoid valve for fuel tank connection to atmosphere
85022 Electromagnetic coupling for engine cooling
86011 Pre-post-heating electronic control unit
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

8140.43S UNIJET (.13) ENGINE HARNESS

Figure 38
74008
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Component code Description

00000 Ground
03000 Self-rectifying alternator with integrated voltage regulator
08000 Starter motor
72030 Engine service harness connector to cab/hood harness
78000 Solenoid valve for fuel tank connection to atmosphere
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

INJECTION CABLE - V.G.T (.15)

Figure 39
74010
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


85150 EDC center
I Connection to hood cab cable
47035 Coolant temperature sensor
78015 Radialjet pump control electro valve
78247 Electrical injection electro valve
48042 rpm sensor on distributor
78013 Pressure adjustment electro valve
47106 Fuel heat on switch
85156 EDC blower air pressure sensor
61101 Fuel heat resistor
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

F1A UNIJET (.10 - .12) ENGINE HARNESS

Figure 40
74267
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


00000 Ground
03000 Self-rectifying alternator with integrated voltage regulator
08000 Starter motor
C1 Engine service harness connector to cab/hood harness
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

INJECTION CABLE - F1A (.10 - .12) WITH AND WITHOUT EGR

Figure 41
74268
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


85150 EDC center
I Connection to hood cab cable
47035 Coolant temperature sensor
78247 Electrical injection electro valve
48042 rpm sensor on distributor
78013 Pressure adjustment electro valve
47106 Fuel heat on switch
D 85156 EDC blower air pressure sensor
61101 Fuel heat resistor
19010 Preheat plug
25231 Plug insert centre
70064 1-way fuse holder
* 85159 Environment air temperature and pressure sensor for EDC
* 78209 EGR electro valve
D Without EGR
* With EGR
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TRUCK CHASSIS CABLE

Figure 42
74017
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 43
WELDING
74018
Component
Description
code
22000 Horn
34000 Multifunctional rear floodlight
35000 License plate light
40032 Transmitter for tachometer and tachograph
42351 Air filter clogged sensor
44031 Fuel oil level indicator transmitter with contact for min. level indicator
44033 Brake fluid low indicator control
47106 Diesel olio heating switch
53503 Backup light switch
61101 Diesel oil preheating resistor
85151 EDC injection pump
86002 Front wheel pad wear indicator sensors
86003 Rear wheel pad wear indicator sensors
86012 Water-in-fuel-filter indicator sensor
C2-C4 Chassis harness connector to cab/hood cables
C3 Chassis harness connector to side clearance lights
M2 Ground
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

A.B.S. PARALLEL CABLE

Figure 44
74015
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 45
WELDING
74016
Component
Description
code
70060 40A one-way fuse holder
72048 Cab-hood harness to ABS harness connector
88000 ABS electronic control unit
88001 ABS sensor
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

AIR-BAG CABLE WITH ONE-CONNECTOR CONTROL UNIT

Figure 46
II
74021
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


86060 AIRBAG control unit
86061 Passenger airbag ć Driver airbag
86062 Passenger pretensioner ć Central pretensioner ć Driver pretensioner
II Dashboard harness connector
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

AIR-BAG CABLE WITH TWO-CONNECTOR CONTROL UNIT

Figure 47
II
74022
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


86060 AIRBAG control unit
86061 Passenger airbag ć Driver airbag
86062 Passenger pretensioner ć Central pretensioner ć Driver pretensioner
II Dashboard harness connector
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

VAN INTERIOR DOME LAMP CABLES 1/2
Figure 48
74012
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 49
WELDING 1/2
Component
Description
code
C12 Cab-hood harness to dome lamp harness connector
C15 Dome lamp connectors to slide door bridle
C16 Dome lamp connectors to electrical lock contacts
37001 Front clearance lamp
39022 Interior door lamp with adjustable spot
39026 Side door lighting dome lamp
42102 Parking brake on indicator switch
53509 Interior lighting switch
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

VAN INTERIOR DOME LAMP CABLES 2/2

Figure 50
CHASSIS HARNESS CONNECTOR TO REAR DOME LAMP HARNESS
74013
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 51
WELDING 2/2
74014
Component
Description
code
37002 Rear clearance lamp
39025 Liftgate lighting dome lamp
C11 Chassis harness connector to rear dome lamp harness
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

TRUCK INTERIOR DOME LAMP CABLES

Figure 52
74019
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

JUNCTION CONNECTORS
Connection between cab/bonnet cable and injection cable (Unijet)
Figure 53
8587
I F1A
I 8588 0000 0077
7740 8159 7740 8159

8159
5577 9990 0000
5577 5000
7740 1311
8150 1310
8150 0077 0077 8150 8847 8150
5577
9990 0000 0000 9990
8589
74269
Cable colour
Ref. Ref. (F1A) Function
code
1 5000 To pin 36 of EDC electronic control unit
2 3 8150 Fuel pump engagement relay
3 4 7740 Relay engagement for engine cooling electromagnetic joint control
4 5 9990 Air conditioning compressor switching off
I 5 6 8159 Fuel oil heating circuit switching on
6 8 0000 Earth
7 1 5577 Fuel oil heating resistance supply
8 16 0077 Fuel oil heating resistance earth
10 8150 Preheat plug centre positive (pin-86)
11 1310 Preheat plug centre control (pin-D1), (EDC pin-B37)
12 1311 Preheat plug centre control (pin-ST), (EDC pin-B42)
13 0000 Preheat plug centre mass (pin-31)
2 8847 Speed adjustment sensor positive
7 - Free
9 - Free
14 - Free
15 - Free
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and air bag cable
Figure 54
8587
8590
II
2292 8087 S BR
6711 6722 AR G
0000 6750 AR HN
8591
Cable colour
Ref. Function
code
1 6722-AR Supply (+15)
2 6750-AR Supply (+15)
3 8087-S Supply (+15) for air bag electronic control unit
II 4 2292-BR To diagnostic connector
5 0000-HN Earth
6 6711-G To air bag failure warning light
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and rear differential lock cable

Figure 55
8587
III
8592
7777 7777
2222 6660 6660 2222
8879 3400 3400 8879
8593
Cable colour
Ref. Function
code
1 2222 Tachometric signal
2 8879 Supply (+15)
3 7777 Supply (+30)
III 4 - Spare
5 3400 Rear differential lock engagement
6 6660 To rear differential lock on warning light
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and cable for tachometer

Figure 56
8587
B
7772 0000
0000
5156
D
5517
8594
0058
5517
5517
5516
2300
2400
8596
8595
Cable colour
Ref. Function
code
1 7772 Supply (+30)
2 - Spare
3 5156 Supply (+15)
40011A 4 - Spare
(white) 5 0000 Earth
6 0000 Earth
7 - Spare
8 - Spare
1 5517 Supply (+15)
2 0058 Earth
40011B 4 5516 To transmitter for tachometer
(yellow) 5 - Spare
6 - Spare
7 - Spare
8 - Spare
1 - Spare
2 - Spare
3 - Spare
40011D 4 2400 To instrument cluster with warning lights
(brown) 5 - Spare
7 2300 To instrument cluster with warning lights
8 - Spare
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Connection between frame cable and right tail lamp cable
Figure 57
8597
72025A
2283 0003
0003 2283 8598
4418 0000 0000 4418

8599
Cable colour
Ref. Function
code
1 2283 Rear fog guard
2 0000 Earth
72025A
3 4418 Rear roof lamp supply
4 0003 Switching on interior lights
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Connection between frame cable and right tail lamp cable
Figure 58
8597
8600
72025B
1125 2227 1125

2227
1172 3335 3335 1172

8601
Cable colour
Ref. Function
code
1 1125 Direction indicator
2 1172 Stop light
72025B
3 3335 Side light
4 2227 Reversing light
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Connection between frame cable and left tail lamp cable
Figure 59
8597
72026A
8602
2283 2283
2227 0000
0000 2227
8603
Cable colour
Ref. Function
code
1 2227 Reversing light
72026A 2 2283 Rear fog guard
3 0000 Earth
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Connection between frame cable and left tail lamp cable
Figure 60
8597
72026B 6804
1177
1177
1120 3334
3334 1120
8605
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 1120 Direction indicator
72026B 2 1177 Stop light
3 3334 Side light
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and roof lamp cable inside cab
Figure 61
8587
72031
8608
3339 3339
6662 3330 3330 6662
4418 4418
0000 0000
0000 0003
9074 8904 8904

0205
9074 8903 8903 0204
8609
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 4418 Supply (+30)
2 3330 Left front clearance light
3 3339 Right front clearance light
4 - Spare
5 6662 Handbrake on signal
6 0000 Earth
72031
7 8904 To motor for side door closing control (van)
8 8903 To motor for side door closing control (van)
9 9074-0204 To switch for turning on interior lights (van)
10 9074-0205 To switch for turning on interior lights (van)
11 - Spare
12 0000-0003 Turning on roof lamp
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and 13 pin current socket cable or rear door
opening/closing cable (van)
Figure 62
8587
72032A
8612
7777 7777 7777 7777
8901 8881 8881 8901
8902 1386 6120 8902
8593
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 8901 To pin 8 connector A of electronic control unit for central door locking
2 8902 To pin 7 connector A of electronic control unit for central door locking
72032A 3 7777 Supply (+30)
4 7777 Supply (+30)
5 1386-6120 Trailer direction indicator on signal
6 8881 Supply (+15)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and brake wear/air cleaner clogged cable
Figure 63
8587
72036
8598
8016 6663
6663 8016
8016 0000
0000 8016
8601
8599
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 8016 Brake wear signal
2 8016 Brake wear signal
72036
3 0000 Earth
4 6663 Air cleaner clogged signal
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and self-levelling suspension cable

Figure 64
8587
72037A 8592
1194 7772 1194

7772
8090 2294 2294 8090
8091 8420 8420 8091
8593
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 8090 Supply (+15)
2 8091 To pin 26 of electronic control unit for vehicle raising/lowering control
3 1194 To 38-pin diagnostic connector (cell 15)
72037A
4 7772 Supply (+30)
5 8420 Suspension levelling control
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and self-levelling suspension cable
Figure 65
8587
72037B
8612
6008 1363 1363 6008
5411 5411
8613
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 6008 Self-levelling suspension system failure signal
72037B 2 5411 Tachometric signal
3 1363 Positive with vehicle stop signal switch engaged
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and total power takeoff cable

Figure 66
8587
72038A 8592
9135 9136 9136 9135
9133 0057 0057 9133
9134 0056 0056 9134

8593
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 9133 To electronic control unit for switching on total power takeoff (connector P2 cell 3)
72038A
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and total power takeoff cable

Figure 67
8587
72038B 8612
9131 9131
0000 0000 8613
Coble
Ref. Function
colour code
1 9131 To switch for total power takeoff engaged signal
72038B 2 0000 Earth
3 - Spare
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and antitheft cable

Figure 68
8587
72039A 8608
9070 8879 4442 0200
1545 8914
7741 8911
8912 8912
0000 8913 0000

8913
8916 8915 8915 8916

8609
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 7741-8911 Supply (+30)
2 - Spare
3 8879-4442 Supply (+15)
4 9070-0200 To switch for locking rear door (van)
5 1545-8914 To volumetric sensor
72039A 6 8912 To volumetric sensor
7 8913 To volumetric sensor
10 0000 Earth
11 - Spare
12 - Spare
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and antitheft cable with central door locking
Figure 69
8587
72039B 8592
8910 9141
8909 9073 9142 9140
0000 0000
8593
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 8909-9140 Supply (+15)
2 0000 Earth
3 8910-9141 Supply (+30)
72039B
4 - Spare
5 - Spare
6 9073-9142 To self-powered siren for alarm
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and right door cable

Figure 70
8587
8614
72040
8859 8002 8862 0000 0026 8809
8857 8830 0000 8806

0000
8858 8861 8861 8808
8906
8906
8905 1111 0000 8905
0000 8615
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 8861 Supply (+15/A)
2 0000 Earth
3 8862-0000 Connection between switches for passenger's door power window
4 8002-0026 Connection between switches for passenger's door power window
5 8830 Heated rear-view mirror
6 - Spare
7 8859-8809 Electrically-operated aimable mirror
72040 10 - Spare
11 1111 To connection between cab/bonnet cable and left door cable
12 0000 Earth
13 - Spare
14 - Spare
15 8905 To door closing control motor
17 - Spare
18 - Spare
19 - Spare
20 - Spare
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and left door cable

Figure 71
8587
8614
72041
0000 0000
8859 8002 8862 8862 8002 8809
8857 8830 8861 8861 8830 8857
8858 8829 8829 8858
8906 0026 0026 8906

8905 1111 0000 8905
5532 5532 5532 5532
0000
8615
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 8829 Supply (+15)
2 8861 Supply (+15/A)
3 8862 Connection between switches for passenger's door power window
4 8002 Connection between switches for passenger's door power window
5 8830 Heated rear-view mirror
6 0000 Earth
8 8857 Electrically-operated aimable mirror
9 8858 Electrically-operated aimable mirror
10 0026 Earth
72041
11 1111 To connection between cab/bonnet cable and left door cable
12 0000 Earth
13 5532 To outside temperature sensor
14 5532 To outside temperature sensor
17 - Spare
18 - Spare
19 - Spare
20 - Spare
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Connection between cab roof lamp and left front clearance light cable
Figure 72
8587
72042A
8616
3330 0000 0000 3330
8617
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 0000 Earth
72042A
2 3330 Front clearance light
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Connection between cab roof lamp and right front clearance light cable
Figure 73
8587
72042B
8616
3339 0000 0000 3339
8617
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 0000 Earth
72042B
2 3330 Front clearance light
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and fog lamp cable

Figure 74
8587
8618
72043
2228 0000 0000 2228
8619
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 0000 Earth
72043
2 2228 Fog lamps
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Connection between right tail light cable and rear roof lamp cable
Figure 75
8587
8590
72046
1125 0000 0000
0000 0003 0003 0000
1172 4418 4418 1172

8591
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 0003 Switching on roof lamp
2 4418 Supply (+30)
72046 3 0000 Earth
4 1125 Positive with direction indicators/hazard warning lights on
5 1172 Additional stop light
6 0000 Earth
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Connection between frame cable and side clearance lights cable

Figure 76
8597
72047 8602
3334 3334
0000 3335
3335 0000
8603
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 0000 Earth
72047 2 3334 Vehicle right side clearance lights
3 3335 Vehicle left side clearance lights
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and ABS cable

Figure 77
8587
72048A 8612
2888 1888 8818 8817
8613
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 2888-8817 To 38-pin diagnostic connector (cell 4)
72048A 2 - Spare
3 1888-8818 To 38-pin diagnostic connector (cell 3)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and ABS cable

Figure 78
8587
72048B 8592
0315 6005 6674 0315
8847 6670 6670 8847
1173 6673 6673 1173
8593
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 8847 Supply (+15)
2 1173 Positive with switch for vehicle stop engaged signal
3 0315 Switching off retarder
72048B
4 6005-6674 ABD device on signal
5 6673 EBD device failure signal
6 6670 ABS device failure signal
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and climate control system cable
Figure 79
8587
82010A
8592
0000 7551
R M
7711 5532 CN R
4411 5532 C H
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 7551-R Supply (+30)
2 4411-H Positive with side lights on
3 0000-M Earth
82010A
4 7711-R Supply (+15/A)
5 5532-C Outside temperature detection
6 5532-CN Outside temperature detection
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 80
8587
82010B 8612
8163 5532 G L
8613
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 8163-L To set of 3 switches for coolant fluid pressure signal
82010B 2 - Spare
3 5532-G To instrument cluster with warning lights (connector B pin 11)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


Figure 81
8587
8604
82010C
0000
0000
1196 2296
2296 1196
8605
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
82010C 2 Ċ Spare
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

VENDOR-DERIVED BUS VERSION Figure 82

General Information
Within this handbook, school-buses are included in the Bus
version. If compared to other vehicles, Buses are provided
with different interior lighting harness.
The TGC switch position on dashboard panel is shown in the
Push-button location Figure 82 while the main switch is
located in the engine compartment near the oil filter
(Figure 83). To turn the TGC off, turn the ignition key-switch
to STOP and turn off the general safety switch 52029
Figure 84 ref. 1, on the left of the steering wheel.
A perspective view of the interior lighting harness is provided
in Figure 85.
Figure 84 ref. 2 shows the fan control switch.
73728
TGC CONTROL SWITCH
Figure 83
73717
VOLTAGE MAINS REMOTE SWITCH
Figure 84
1 2
73712
1. General safety switch - 2. Fan control switch
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Perspective view of Vendor-derived Bus version interior lighting harness
Figure 85
73716
1. Interior lighting - 2. Driver loudspeaker provisions - 3. Fan
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Diagnostic connector Figure 86

Near the positive terminal of the battery there is a diagnostic
connector. It is fastened by 2 screws to a special bracket fitted
on the body and access to it is gained by unscrewing the
protective cap; suitably connected to the diagnostic system
(IWT, MODUS), it allows quick identification of the cause of
faults in the various electronic devices.
The diagnosis connector on F1 engine vehicles is located on
the conveyor unit lower party on the passenger side.
The table on the following page shows the correspondence
between the various electronic systems and the connector
pins referring to them.
NOTE The connector shown is seen from the pin side.
8620
38-PIN DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR
Figure 87
9
3 16
22
29
1 35
4 38
10
17
23 36
30
8621
DENTIFICATION OF THE PINS OF THE 38-PIN

DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

System Pin Function
EDC/EGR/Methane 1 L
2 K
ABS/EBD/ABD 3 L
4 K
Air Bag/Retarder 6 K
Tachometer (connector A cell 2 instrument cluster) 8 K
Supply +15/A services 11 Input
Immobilizer/Central door locking/Alarm 12 K
Climate control system 13 L
14 K
Self-levelling suspension 15 L
16 K
Engine timing signal (connector B pin 28 EDC control unit) 23 -
Engine timing earth (battery -) 24 Screening
Supply +30 27 Battery +V
Engine rpm 28 RPM
Vehicle speed 29 -
Earth 30 -
- With EDC16: pins 1/23 are not connected.

- Can Line pin 21/22.
The unused pins are not indicated.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

RELAY AND FUSE HOLDER SUPPORT

Figure 88
8631
52
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Identification of fuses
N
N. F
Functions
1. Additional heater 30
2. Immobilizer/Warming/EDC 5
3. - -
4. Instrument cluster (+30) 5
5. Instrument cluster (+15) 5
6. Stalk unit (rear fog guard, flasher) 5
7. Stalk unit (low beams) 10
8. Stalk unit (high beams) 15
9. Stalk unit (side lights) 15
10. Windscreen wiper 15
11. Stalk unit (direction indicators/hazard warning lights) 15
12. Stalk unit (horns) 15
13. Reversing light 5
14. Side light, clearance, no. plate light 5
15. Side light cluster lighting 5
16. Left low beam headlamp 10
17. Right low beam headlamp 10
18. Left high beam headlamp 10
19. Right high beam headlamp/headlamp aming 10
20. Interior lighting/radio/cigar lighter 10
20. Interior lighting/radio 10
21. Electric windscreen defrosting unit 30
21. Cigar lighter 15
22. Heated fuel filter 15
23. EDC electronic control unit 25
24. EDC 10
25. Stop lights 5
26. 13-pin current socket 15
29. 38-pin diagnostic connector 5
30. Fog lamps 10
31. Climate control, additional heater, engine cooling 5
31. Compressor, timer, engine fan 10
32. Climate control 5
33. Additional heater 20
34. Headlamp washer 20
35. Rear differential lock 5
36. ABS, EBD, ABD failure warning light 5
37. ABS 5
39. Heated mirrors 10
39. Heated mirrors, heated rear-screen, heated windscreen 15
40. Power windows 30
40. Power windows (left) 20
10/
41. Heated rear-screen, heated windscreen
20
42. Self-levelling suspensions 5
43. Air bag failure warning light 5
44. Self-levelling suspensions (Wabco) 40
45. Air-bag 5
46. - -
46. Power windows (right) 20
47. Electric fuel pump 10
48. Door locking/alarm 30
49. Door locking/alarm 5
50. Rear differential lock 30
51. Total power takeoff 10
52. Front differential lock (4x4) 30
53. Self-levelling suspensions Techniek) 30
54. Electric hatch (van and 6+1) 15
55. Rototranslating door 15
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Identification of relays/diode holders

Code Function
25035 Switching on external lights
25003 Switching on fog lamps
25006 Switching on stop lights
25704 Total power takeoff engagement control
25104 Switching off Retarder with ABS on
25209 Loads cut-off during starting
25222 Thermal starter engagement enable
25223 Thermal starter fan control
25307 Climate control compressor engagement
25336 Engine cooling
25337 Climate control compressor disengagement
25340 Compressor on signal
25620 Fuel filter clogged signal
25705 Diagnostics enable
25810 Heated fuel filter circuit control
25811 Advance variator control (KSB)
25818 Heated windscreen switching on
25837 Electric fuel pump switching on
25858 EDC switching on
25926 Suspension raising enable
25927 Suspension lowering enable
25928 Rear-screen heating switching on
61002A Anti-return from Trinary
61002B Anti-return from TGC (bus)
66010 Timer for headlamp washer
Fuse 39 must be replaced with a 10A fuse if the following optionals are present on the vehicle at the same time:
! - heated wing mirrors with heated driver's seat;
- heated wing mirrors with heated driver's and passenger's seat;
- heated wing mirrors with electric aiming with heated driver's seat;
- heated wing mirrors with electric aiming with heated driver's and passenger's seat.
Fuse 41(39 for F1A) must be replaced with a 15A fuse if the following optionals are present on the vehicle at the
same time:
- heated windscreen with heated rear-screen.
Fuse 55 must be replaced with a 15A fuse if both the seats are heated.
Fuse 70060 (40A) relating to the ABS, device is located in the engine compartment, near the control box.
For the F1A, plug preheat centre 25231is located on the engine compartment to the right of the EDC centre and
is powered by 60A fuse 70064.
The previous indications (fuses/remote control switches) can be changed. Should it occur, make reference to the indications
on the sticker label next to the fuses.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

OPTICAL INDICATORS Figure 89

A table is shown below with pin out 58918 in 4-connector
version, as well as a 2-connector version one.
1 2 1 2 1 2
D6 B5 * B15 A2 B3 B156
C20 A5 B2 A17 B1 A22
B17 A29 B12 A18 B10 A21
B16 A14 C8 A4 C5 B26
B6 A30 * B4 A3 A1 A23
B8 A32 * B14 A19 C4 B24
B9 A16 A2 A6 A3 A7
B20 A15 C18 B14 C13 B27
C19 B13 A8 A11 C3 B25
C10 B15 D3 B29 B11 B2
A4 A8 B19 A13 C14 B1
A10 A9 D9 B30 C9 B23
A9 A10 D12 B9
A11 A24 B18 A12
A12 A25 C11 B11
A5 A26 C15 B22 1 2
D8 B3 C12 B21 * B4 A19
D4 B4 D1 B6 * B14 A2
C1 B12 A6 A27 * B15 A3
D11 B10 D10 B8 * Variant for verĆ
B5 A20 D2 B7 sions
i .11/.13/.15.
11/ 13/ 15
B13 A1 D5 B31
C6 B18 C2 B32
C7 B20 A7 A28
C16 B19 B7 A31
C17 B17 D7 B28
74024
058918 PIN OUT OF THE PREVIOUS VERSION
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Interface bride with the new tool with 32-way connectors

Figure 90
77025
1 2
Blue Green
0742528t
REAR VIEW OF 32-WAY CONNECTOR UNIT

1. Blue colour seat A" for 32-way female holder connector complete with terminals
2. Blue colour seat B" for 32-way female holder connector complete with terminals
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Warning lights assembly
Figure 91 58918
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
21 31
13 14 23 24
15 30 25
20
26
22
19 16 29
18 17 28 27
33
34
8655
Component
Ref. Description
code
1 58706 Rear fog guard
2 58002 High beam headlamps
3 58732 Side lights
4 58708 Hazard warning lights
5 58707 Tractor direction indicators
6 58709 Trailer direction indicators
7 58700 No battery charge
8 58718 Brake system failure (under TEST)
9 58722 Low engine oil pressure
10 58730 Low engine oil pressure (under TEST)
11 58719 Handbrake on (under TEST)
12 58728 Low power steering fluid level (under TEST)
13 58710 Water in fuel filter (under TEST)
14 58725 Air cleaner clogged (under TEST)
15 58701 EDC failure
16 58702 Engine warming
17 58734 EBD failure
18 58703 ABS failure
19 58713 ECAS failure
20 58735 Rear transversal differential lock
21 58720 Low engine coolant fluid level (under TEST)
22 58704 ABD on
23 58721 High gearbox oil temperature (under TEST)
24 58723 Emergency handle lock (under TEST)
25 58733 EGR failure
26 58717 Immobilizer engaged
27 58731 Seat heating
28 58724 Door open indicator
29 58705 Airbag failure
30 58715 Total power takeoff (PTO) on
31 58714 Emergency handle activated (under TEST)
32 58711 Retarder on
33 44031 Low fuel level (under TEST)
34 47207 High engine coolant fluid temperature (under TEST)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Instrument assembly
Figure 92
1 2
9 8 7 6 5 4
8655
Ref. Description
1 Electronic tachometer
2 Electronic gyrometer
3 Engine coolant fluid temperature gauge with incorporated warning light
4 Instrument lighting adjustment button
5 Trip meter reset button
6 Display for: clock, outside temperature (only with climate control), total odometer (km), trip meter (km)
7 Clock adjustment button (minutes)
8 Clock adjustment button (hours)
9 Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Rear view
Figure 93
4 1
3 2
8643
Ref. Description
1 Seat "A" for 12-way, blue, female holder connector complete with terminal
2 Seat "B" for 20-way, blue, female holder connector complete with terminal
3 Seat "C" for 20-way, black, female holder connector complete with terminal
4 Seat "D" for 12-way, black, female holder connector complete with terminal
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Connector assembly (cable input side view)

Connector A
Figure 94
8643
2400 5520
5595 6663
2300 5530
2287
2285
4411 1123
1114 1129
A 8644
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 2400 Tachograph failure warning light
2 5595 To cell 8 of diagnostic connector (serial line K)
3 2300 Speed indication from tachograph
4 4411 Side lights on warning light
5 1114 Hazard warning lights on warning light
6 5520 Low engine coolant fluid level warning light
7 6663 Air cleaner clogged warning light
A
8 5530 Water in fuel oil filter warning light
9 2287 Rear fog guard on warning light
10 2285 High beam headlamps on warning light
11 1123 Direction indicators on warning light
12 1129 Direction indicators on warning light
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Connector B
Figure 95
8643
5517 0058
5614 5532
5584 5155
0000 2222
2222
8150-5553
0000 5156
6673 6660
6670 6008
6659 6674
8645
B
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
2 5614 Rev counter signal
3 - -
4 5584 To cell 28 of diagnostic connector (engine rpm repeater)
5 0000 To pin 14 of connector B of electronic control unit for EDC
6 0000 Earth for warming on warning light
7 6673 EBD Failure warning light
8 6670 ABS failure warning light
9 6659 Supply (+15) for ABD, ABS and EBD failure warning lights
10 0058 To electronic tachometer transmitter
B 11 5532 To pin 2 of connector B of air conditioning system electronic control unit
12 - -
13 5155 To pin 4 of connector B of EDC electronic control unit (tachometric signal repeaer)
14 2222 Tachometric signal repeater for rear differential lock
15 2222 Tachometric signal repeater
16 8150 Positive for EDC failure and warming on warning lights (Unijet)
5553 Positive for warming on warning light
17 5156 EDC failure warning light
18 6660 Rear differential lock warning light
19 6008 Self-levelling suspension system failure warning light
20 6674 A.S.R. pilot lamp
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Connector C
Figure 96
8643
7778 0000
6722
6711 4411
8879 8888
7772
5556
0000 5555
5552 5557
5506 5528
6770 9075
8646
C
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 - Retarder on warning light (bus)
2 9075 Door open warning light
3 5528 Engine coolant fluid temperature gauge
4 5557 Fuel level gauge
5 5555 Fuel reserve warning light
6 8888 Supply (+50)
7 4411 Positive with exterior light switch on
8 - To pin A1 of radio receiver set
9 0000 Connection to signal earth ms7
10 - Fog lamp pilot lamp
C
11 6770 Sensor for immobilizer on signal
12 5506 Low engine oil level sensor
13 5552 Engine coolant fluid high temperature warning light
14 0000 Earth
15 5556 Low engine oil level sensor
16 7772 Supply (+30)
17 8879 Supply (+15)
18 6711 Air bag failure warning light
19 6722 Supply (+15) for air bag failure signal
20 7778 Supply (+15) for battery charge failure warning light
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Connector D
Figure 97
8643
6660
5583
1386 5525
8016 6662
7778 5503
8647
D
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 5503 Low engine oil pressure warning light
2 6662 Handbrake engaged warning light
3 5525 Low power steering fluid level warning light
4 - -
5 - Rotary translating door failure warning lamp (bus)
6 7778 Battery charge failure warning light
D
7 8016 Brake failure warning light
8 1386 Trailer direction indicators on warning light
9 - Handle lock pilot lamp
10 - -
11 5583 EGR failure warning light
12 6660 Total power takeoff (PTO) on warning light
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

SWITCH ASSEMBLY
All the switches and push buttons of this module incorporate a warning led.
Figure 98
CARRIAGE - VAN - MIXED
VENDOR
PERSONS-VENDOR
COMBI
GOODS-SHIELDED
74271
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Legend
Vehicles
Position Function CARRIAGE - VAN - MIXED
Standard Optional
1 Emergency lights X
2 Fog lights X
3 Heated rearview mirrors X
4 Rear glass X
5 Rear differential lock X
6 Level compressed air suspension X
7 Lower compressed air suspension X
8 Lift compressed air suspension X
9 Electrical manhole opens X
10 Electrical manhole closes X
11 Heated windshield X
12 Light washer X
13 Cap
14 Rear door lock X
15 Speed limiter adjustment X
16 Cap
VENDOR PERSONS-VENDOR GOODS-SHIELDED
2 Fog lights X
4 Rear glass X
5 Air heating X
12 Light washer X
13 Rotary travel holder X
14 Rear door lock X
16 Battery sectioner reset X
COMBI
2 Fog lights X
4 Rear glass X
5 Air heating X
12 Light washer X
13 Cap
14 Rear door lock X
16 Cap
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

STALK UNIT
54032
Figure 99
C D
E F A
G
B
8651
WIRING DIAGRAM
A. Exterior light switch - B. Rear fog guard button - C. Direction indicator switch -
D. High beam headlamp/flasher switch - E. Windscreen wiper switch - F. Windscreen washer pump button -
G. Horn button
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 100
8640
2201 2201 0000 7728

0000 2284
3333 2200 1123 2283
3333 2200 1129 2283
8881 8886 1116
8882 8873 9071 7774
8879
P2 7728
P1 8641
TECHNICAL VIEW OF COMPONENT AND CONNECTORS OF CAB/BONNET CABLE TO BE CONNECTED TO

STALK UNIT
Cable
Ref. Function
colour code
1 - -
2 Input from alarm 9071
3 Input from hazard warning lights 7728
4 Supply (+30) for horn button 7774
5 Horns 1116
P1 6 Left-hand direction indicator 1129
((Black)) 7 Right-hand direction indicator 1123
8 Signal earth 0000
9 Positive with fog lights on 2284
10 Supply (+30) for direction indicators and hazard warning lights 7728
11 Rear fog guard and rear fog guard on warning 2283
12 Supply (+15) 2283
1 Windscreen wiper first speed 8881
2 Windscreen wiper second speed 8882
3 Supply (+15/A) for windscreen wiper 8879
4 Windscreen wiper reset input 8873
5 Electric pump for windscreen washer 8886
P2 6 Supply (+30) for side lights switch 3333
((Blue)) 7 Side lights 3333
8 Supply (+15/A) for switching on low beam headlamps 2201
9 Power earth 0000
10 Low beam headlamps 2201
11 Supply (+15/A) for switching on high beam headlamps 2200
12 High beam headlamps 2200
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Functions
Figure 101
C
E
A B
7409
EXTERIOR LIGHTING KNURLED RING ROTATION

SECTION F-F
REAR FOG GUARD KNURLED RING ROTATION

SECTION G-G
7433
A.-B. Positions of stalks - C. Horn control - D. Exterior lights knurled ring - E. Rear fog guard knurled ring
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Technical view Position Electrical function

A Position "0"
A1 Right lane change (unstable)
A2 Right direction
A3 Left lane change (unstable)
A4 Left direction
A5 Light flashing
A6 High beam headlamps
A7 Side light switch position "0"
7410 A8 Side lights
A9 Low beam headlamps plus high beam and fog guard enable
A10 Rear fog guard stable position (on or off)
A11 Rear fog guard unstable position off
Rear fog guard unstable position on only with light switch at position A9
of rear fog guards on
A12 Horn
B Windscreen wiper reset
B1 Intermittent device
B2 First Speed
B3 Second speed
7411
B4 Second speed unstable
B5 Windscreen washer
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Cruise Control Figure 102

The cruise control is operated by push-buttons (Figure 102)
installed on the windscreen wiper control lever with following
functions:
- adjust engine idle speed;
- read and adjust drive rpm;
- set and store travel speed.
Cruise control is deactivated by pressing the clutch pedal, the
brake pedal and keeping the accelerator pedal pressed for
over 10 seconds or by turning the switch to OFF".
Cf. the Use and Maintenance Handbook on board the vehicle
for further information on use.
000245t
CRUISE CONTROL
Figure 103
EEC HOMOLOGATION STAMP AREA
TECHNICAL VIEW OF THE COMPONENT

A. Connector (Cruise control)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS
Immobilizer
In order to increase protection against attempted theft, the vehicles have been fitted with an electronic engine block system called
"Immobilizer" which is activated automatically removing the ignition key. In fact, the keys are fitted with an electronic
Transponder" that sends a code signal to a special electronic control unit which, only allows the engine to be started if it
recognises the code sent. del motore.
Figure 104
EDC
2
4
000245t
WARNING LIGHT MAIN SYSTEM COMPONENTS

1. Immobilizer electronic control unit - 2. Electronic key containing the transponder - 3. Aerial used for sending/reading
the key code - 4. Code card containing the code for emergency starting
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

System components
This is located behind the steering wheel column.
It is able to communicate with "EDC" central unit by a "CAN line".
The main functions of the control unit are:
- recognising insertion and rotation of the key in the ignition switch,
- activating and reading the secret code emitted by the Transponder,
- managing control and processing the codes,
- communicating with the "EDC" control unit,
- memorising any faults,
- system diagnostics.
Figure 105
3 4
1 3
1
B
A 00290t
Pin Function
A1 Aerial
A2 Aerial
A3 Ċ
B1 CAN line L for EDC control unit pin 39 (EDC 16 - pin 61)
B2 Line K for 38-pin diagnostic connector pin 12
B3 Negative for Immobilizer failure warning lamp
B4 CAN H line for EDC control unit pin 8 (EDC 16 - pin 62)
B5 Ċ
B6 Earth
B7 Key-operated positive supply
B8 Ċ
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Electronic keys Figure 106

An electronic device called Transponder" is fitted in the key
grip which is not supplied by any battery, it is not removable
and contains and transmits the secret code.
Inserting the key, the Transponder" is activated, then, when
it receives the radio waves emitted by the aerial (fitted on the
ignition switch block), it automatically answers transmitting
the secret code.
If the two codes correspond, the control unit enables starting,
otherwise it shuts off the flow of fuel thereby preventing the
engine from starting.
The keys provided are two. Each key contains a

! Transponder" with the corresponding secret code.
It is highly to carry out the correct key teaching
procedure.
000291t
ELECTRONIC KEYS
Aerial
Figure 107
This is fitted coaxially with the ignition switch and it has the
task of:
- supplying the energy to the Transponder" for sending
the secret code
- receiving the signal from the Transponder and sending it
to the control unit.
It is connected to the control unit on pins A1/A2.
8659
000292t
AERIAL
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 108 Code card

Card containing the Electronic code and the Mechanical code.
- Electronic code or PIN code
Code absolutely necessary for the starting procedure in
the event of an emergency.
- Mechanical code
Code needed for request to duplicate the mechanical
part of the key.
CODE CARD
000293t
Warning light
This is located on the instrument cluster and informs the
Figure 109
driver whether the system is working properly or of any
possible faults.
Moving the ignition key to drive the control unit tests the
system turning on the warning light for about 4 seconds".
If it goes out after this time, this means that the key has been
recognised and the system is working, if it does not it indicates
the possible system faults.
000294t
WARNING LIGHT
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Key teaching procedure Emergency procedure

In the event of loss or replacement of the keys it will be It is absolutely necessary to enter the PIN code" given on
absolutely necessary to follow a precise procedure solely the Code Card, only using the accelerator pedal as
described below:
through the diagnostic tools.
- Move the ignition key to Drive.
- Connect the diagnostic tool.
- After about ~ 2 seconds the EDC warning light starts
Key teaching
to flash quickly
- Engage the first key and turn it to drive.
- Press the accelerator pedal and keep it pressed for
- Wait for the code" warning light on the cluster to go out about ~ 15 seconds.
and turn the key to stop.
- The EDC warning lamp starts flashing slowly.
- Engage the new key and turn it to drive, repeat the
operations described previously. - When the number of flashes corresponds to the first
digit of the PIN code press the accelerator completely
If the code warning light does not go out during the teaching and then release it again. (During this press the EDC
procedure, this means that the operation has not been carried warning light stays off).
out correctly.
- Continue with the reading and corresponding pressing
Possible causes: on the accelerator pedal for the remaining four
numbers of the PIN code".
- The same key has been engaged twice.
- At the end of the sequence if the code entered is
- The key has not been turned to stop in useful time.
correct and there are no system faults, the EDC
- An attempt has been made to teach more than three warning light stops flashing. The operation has been
keys. concluded correctly.
- Keys already used with another control unit have been - Start the vehicle.
used.
- Aerial reception problems.
NOTE After following this procedure the control unit

memorises the keys and will no longer make this
operation possible without entering the PIN
code.
The keys enabled for starting will never be more
than three.
A previously memorised key but not included in
the last teaching process is no longer able to
start the vehicle.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

System self-diagnostics
After the initial test, depending on the behaviour of the code" warning light, the system is capable of informing the operator
of possible system faults, as follows:
- Warning light "flashing continuously" with a frequency of "0.3 sec. ON" and 3 sec. OFF" means that there is an error or
that the emergency starting procedure has not been carried out correctly.
- Warning light "flashing continuously" with a frequency of 0.3 sec. ON" and " 0.3 sec. OFF", means that no key teaching
procedure has been carried out.
- Warning light "always on" means that the key teaching procedure has not been carried out correctly.
For preliminary information, it is possible to display any fault codes on the warning light module of the instrument cluster activating
the Blink code.
For complete, more thorough diagnosis it is however indispensable to use the tools available to the service network, such as
MODUS.
Diagnostics through the Blink Code
To activate the Blink code it is necessary to earth line K for at least 2 seconds with the ignition key at drive to display the first
error.
Repeat this operation (line K at earth) to display any other faults.
The table below shows the various error codes that may appear during diagnostics.
Figure 110
000294t
Number of
Type of fault
blinks
1 Not connected or not configured central unit
2 Central unit not communicating with EDC
Central unit not communicating during installation
3 Central unit not installed
4 -
Short circuit/disturbance on communication line between control unit and "EDC"
5 Key with unknown code
6 Key with code not detected
7 Aerial not connected
8 Internal control unit fault
9 Short circuit on alarm disable line
Ċ Code" warning light short circuit
Ċ Code" warning light open circuit
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

If after accurate diagnosis it is necessary to replace one or more components, proceed as described below
!
PART TO BE PARTS TO BE
OPERATIONS AND NOTES
REPLACED ORDERED
One or two keys • Parts Keys ⇒ Cut the keys according to the mechanical code.
(with one still ⇒ Perform "Key memorising" in Immobilizer diagnostics (*).
available) NB. In this procedure also enter the remaining working keys
Addition of a otherwise the will NO LONGER be enabled for starting.
key
Steering lock • KEYS KIT with: ⇒ Change the steering lock and ratchets.
and/or ratchets 2 cut Parts keysSteering ⇒ Perform "Key
Key memorising"
memorising in Immobilizer diagnostics ((*).
).
ALL the keys lock + Ratchets ⇒ State the new mechanical code on the Code Card.
Ratchets (excluding • KIT with: ⇒ Change the ratchets.
steering lock) 2 traditional keys + NB. Traditional keys means keys without Transponder.
ratchets
Code card • Code Card ⇒ Complete the "Code Card Duplicate Request Form" printing it
(due to loss) from MODUS and send it as mentioned in the ORDER
MANAGEMENT form of the IVECO SPARES warehouse
concerned.
Aerial • Aerial ⇒ Replace.
ECU Immobilizer • KIT ECU ⇒ Cut the keys according to the mechanical code.
Including: ⇒ Perform "Key memorising" in Immobilizer diagnostics (*).
Immobilizer ECU - NB. At the end of this operation, check that the electronic code
2 keys to be cut shown on the screen corresponds to the one printed on the Code
New Code Card Card, if it is different, put the one on the screen on the Code Card.
⇒ In EDC diagnostics perform "new key recognition".
⇒ Put the old mechanical code on the new Code Card.
⇒ Scrap the old keys as it will be NO LONGER possible to use
them.
⇒ Complete the "New Immobilizer Installation Form" printing it
from MODUS and send it as mentioned in the ORDER
MANAGEMENT form of the IVECO SPARES warehouse
concerned.
EDC control unit • EDC control unit ⇒ The system recognises the new actuator automatically the first
time the ignition key is moved to Drive.
NB. To order the EDC Control Unit complete the specific form
printing it from Modus and sending it to the Market Technical help
Desk.
(*) With release MODUS 2.0 (Windows), 1.6C (DOS) or IWT 1.4, before "Storing new keys", it is necessary to
! disconnect EDC central unit. Once the operation has been completed, clear the fault memory to prevent the error
from staying memorised on the actuator.
⇒ For subsequent releases keep to any new instructions given on the screen.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

ABS/EBD/ABD skidding (or slipping) between the tyre and the road in the
contact area.
General
The braking of a vehicle in motion and the consequent The figure shows the indicative trend of the longitudinal µl"
deceleration and stopping space mainly depend on the grip and transversal µt" rip coefficients in relation to the
between the tyre surface and the type of road surface. percentage of slipping "S".
With a perfectly efficient braking system, further The diagram reveals that the maximum value of the
improvement of braking can be obtained only acting on the longitudinal grip coefficient is not when the wheel is locked,
tyre friction characteristics or on the quality of the road but for a much lower slipping value.
surface.
Even in these optimum conditions, absolute braking safety Therefore, the road-tyre grip can be exploited to optimise
is not however guaranteed when needing to cope with longitudinal or transversal control of the vehicle. Namely, it
particular critical situations, such as low grip due to the is possible to utilise the grip trying to make the braking
conditions of the wet or icy road surface: this compels the distance as short as possible or to ensure the best possible
driver to moderate the braking action to prevent one or handling.
more wheels from partially locking, with the possibility of
An excellent compromise is obtained using slip rates near
dangerous skidding.
the point S* in which there is a high µl value which ensures
The friction between the tyre and the road surface does not optimum braking and a µt value that offers good lateral
correspond to the friction between rigid bodies but to the roadholding.
Figure 111
WHEEL
VEHICLE
TRANSVERSAL GRIP
LONGITUDINAL GRIP
STABLE UNSTABLE
AREA AREA
OPTIMUM AREA
TREND OF WHEEL LONGITUDINAL AND TRANSVERSAL GRIP IN RELATION TO SLIPPING
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

In order to better understand the logic of the system and the Experimentation has made it possible to establish that the
parameters that govern it a few basic concepts should be most effective braking condition is obtained for optimum
briefly examined. slipping values contained between about ∼ 5% and 20%.
Due to the effect of the braking action the tyre, that before
was rolling freely, undergoes a deformation, called "braking" The need to contain the slipping values within precise limits
deformation, in its area of contact with the road and slows is imposed by the behaviour of the tyres under the braking
down rotation reducing its peripheral speed, to a higher action, during which the braking friction coefficient comes
extent than the linear speed of the vehicle. into play.
At the limit, with the wheels completely locked under the The higher this coefficient, the more braking is effective.
braking action, and thus with a wheel peripheral speed of
zero, there is the maximum deviation between the wheel If the relation between slipping S and the friction coefficient
rotation speed and the linear speed of the vehicle. U is represented on Cartesian axes µ, we see how there are
Slipping varies its values within the limits set by the two the highest friction coefficient values for slipping values
extreme conditions in which the wheel and vehicle speed between an average of 5% and 20%.
may be in.
As the friction coefficient is directly proportionate with the
When the wheel is free, not braked, thus turning at the same
applicable braking force, the result is that the "ABS" device
speed as the vehicle, the slipping coefficient is 0%.
acts in such a way as to apply the maximum braking force
When the braked wheel is completely locked and the exactly in correspondence with the best friction coefficient,
vehicle continues moving forwards due to inertia, the and this system tends to bring any type of vehicle within this
skidding coefficient amounts to 100%. sector.
Figure 112
FRICTION COEFFICIENT
S. Slipping % - A. Dry asphalt - B. Wet asphalt - C. Ice
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 113
A The locking of one or more wheels, due to excessive pressure
on the brake pedal, (anyway higher than allowed by the grip)
can cause loss of steering control of the vehicle if both front
wheels lock, skidding, resulting in about-facing, if both rear
wheels lock.
The need for abrupt braking on a bend, compels the driver to
immediate action to avoid losing control of the vehicle,
resulting in skidding.
Lastly, the so-called panic braking (caused by a sudden
obstacle), compels the driver to press the brake pedal as
forcibly as possible in the desperate attempt to stop in time..
So what is the solution even for the most expert drivers?
B Being able to avail of a braking system capable of fully

exploiting all the grip available without locking the wheels,
except at a minimum pre-established speed.
The ABS Antibrake Locking System has been developed
exactly to obtain this.
A device inserted in the braking system, with the task of
preventing wheel locking when the brake operating pressure
is too high in relation to the grip of the tyre on the ground.
Therefore, the purpose of the "ABS" device is to ensure
vehicle stability (under all braking conditions) preventing
locking of the wheels regardless of the conditions of the road
surface, thereby ensuring total use of the grip available.
A Also in the vent of emergency braking, the system makes it
possible to maintain "steerability" of the vehicle, i.e. acting on
the steering to avoid obstacles, without the danger of skidding.
Keeping the rotation and grip of the wheels within the
optimum parameters, the system makes it possible to obtain
those braking distances that only an expert driver would be
able to approach; this way even the less expert driver is able
to act like one of the best.
The diagram opposite shows some examples of braking
without ABS and with ABS.
In order to be able to intervene effectively the system must
not only be precise in response, but also very quick.
This is now possible thanks to electronic information which
warrants reliability, precision and rapidity, with a minimal
number of components and lower system cost.
B
VEHICLE BRAKING TREND

WITHOUT AND WITH ABS
A. Vehicle without ABS - B. Vehicle with ABS
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

In addition to the ABS, the system in question also ABD - Automatic Brake Differential
incorporates the EBD and ABD functions. This device comes into action automatically braking the
EBD - Electronic Brake Force distribution driving wheel that has less grip when moving off or travelling
This device replaces and optimises the function of the and tends to skid transferring the torque through the
present hydraulic braking action proportioning valve, better differential to the wheel with higher grip.
controlling the braking force on the rear wheels. It cuts in up to a speed of about 40 km/h and does not
interfere with the normal braking system.
It is obtained by adding specific software to the ABS and it
acts in a determinate interval before the cutting in of the It cuts in up to a speed of about 40 km/h and does not
ABS. interfere with the normal braking system.
It ensures control on any locking of the rear wheels in The driver is informed when this system is engaged by the
relation to the front ones, optimising the braking force in the flashing of th yellow warning light on the dashboard.
different load, driving and conditions of use of the vehicle.
Figure 114
ABS EBD
A C B
SYSTEM WARNINGS ON DASHBOARD

A. ABS failure warning light 58703 - B. EBD failure warning light 58734 - C. ABD failure warning light 58704
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

SYSTEM WITH 4 CROSSED CHANNELS (X)

The system shown is used on the following vehicles: 29 L - 35 S
Figure 115
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
13 12 11 10 9
1. Electrohydraulic modulator - 2. Vacuum pump - 3. Vacuum tank - 4. Vacuum servobrake - 5. Hydraulic control sockets
- 6. Parking brake lever - 7. Rear brake caliper - 8. Rear disk brake - 9. Electronic control unit - 10. Sensor -
11. Phonic wheel - 12. Front brake disk - 13. Front brake caliper
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Location of components
Figure 116
7 8
4
1
12
11
10
3
9 13 5
1. Eectrohydraulic modulator - 2. Vacuum pump - 3. Vacuum tank - 4. Vacuum servobrake - 5. Hydraulic control sockets
- 7. Rear brake caliper - 8. Rear disk brake - 9. Electronic control unit 88000 - 10. Sensor 88001- 11. Phonic wheel -
12. Front brake disk - 13. Front brake caliper
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Sensor on phonic wheel The distance between the sensor and the wheel, called gap,
must clearly have a pre-established value so that correct
The sensors supply the electronic control unit all the useful
signals are supplied (0,8 to ÷ 1,6 mm).
information, with the necessary continuity, for it to be able
to control the solenoid valves. The resistance rating of each single sensor detected at the
ends of the connector is between 1÷ 2 kΩ.
The signals are obtained by magnetic flux lines which are
closed through the teeth of an iron toothed wheel facing the The toothed wheel is called phonic wheel because the signal
sensor and turned with the wheel. it generates has the frequency of a sound wave.
The passage from solid to hollow, due to the presence or The frequency of this signal serves to define the wheel
absence of the tooth determines a change of the magnetic rotation speed.
flux which is enough to create an electromotive force
The changes of the frequency, i.e. the rapidity with which the
induced at the terminals of the sensor and thus an alternate
signals follow one another serve to define the acceleration
electric signal, which is sent to the electronic control unit.
and deceleration values.
Figure 117
SENSOR ON PHONIC WHEEL

A. Phonic wheel
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Electrohydraulic control unit/modulator MC1 - Diagonal supply LF/RR

The component integrates both the electronic part and the MC2 - Diagonal supply RF/LR
hydraulic modulator for system management.
LF - Left front axle output
It comprises the following:
RR - Right rear axle output
A - Electronic control unit
RF - Right front axle output
B - Electrohydraulic modulator
LR - Left rear axle output
C - Accumulator
It is connected to the electric system through a 31-pin
It is connected to the hydraulic system by the following connector.
connections:
Figure 118
RR
MCI LR
MC2
LF
RF
C B
CONTROL UNIT/ELECTROHYDRAULIC MODULATOR
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Electrohydraulic modulator Pressure increase

The figure schematically shows the connection of the Operating the brake pedal, the pressurised oil can reach the
modulator and its internal components. brake calipers as both the drive solenoid valves "6" and the
supply solenoid valve "11" are open.
Figure 119
1. Vacuum servobrake - 2. Electronic control unit - 3. High pressure accumulator - 4. Recovery pumps - 5. Recovery
pump drive motor - 6. ABD control solenoid valves (setting 90 bar) - 7. One-way safety valves - 8. ABD intake solenoid
valves - 9. ABD one-way valves - 10. Low pressure accumulator - 11. Supply solenoid valves - 12. Discharge solenoid
valves - 13. One-way quick pressure reduction valves - 14. Font axle disk brakes - 15. Rear axle disk brakes
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Pressure lowering At the same time, supplying the motor "5" that drives the
If the sensors detect the tendency of a wheel or wheels to pumps "4" it will be possible to recover the excess oil volume
lock, they inform the control unit which reduces the braking in the high pressure accumulators "3".
force activating the supply solenoid valves "11" and the
discharge solenoid valves "12".
Figure 120
SYSTEM OPERATING LAYOUT SHOWING THE PRESSURE MAINTENANCE PHASE
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Pressure maintenance
Once the optimum braking force has been reached, the
control unit can keep it constant, no longer energising the
discharge solenoid valves "12", the motor "5" and the
associated recovery pumps "4", while the supply solenoid
valves "11" continue being supplied.
Figure 121
SYSTEM OPERATING LAYOUT SHOWING THE PRESSURE MAINTENANCE PHASE
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Cutting in of EBD device If both failure warning lights turn on (ABS and EBD) this
If the sensors detect that one or both wheels tend to lock means an EBD system failure.
in relation to the front wheels, they inform the control unit Under these conditions the braking force will not be
which suitably supplies the supply solenoid valves "11" of the distributed between the axles, therefore rear wheel locking
rear axle to optimise the braking force. may occur with the possibility of skidding.
A fault on certain system components causes the ABS
system to be cut off (displayed by turning on the special
warning light), still leaving the EBD system operational.
Figure 122
FP. Rear axle braking force - FA. Front axle braking force - A. Servobrake distribution curve - B. Ideal distribution -
C. Curve - distribution curve of any porportioning valve - D. EBD system distribution curve
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Cutting in of ABD device During this phase the maximum pressure is limited by the
If the sensors detect that one or both rear axle wheels tend drive solenoid valves "6" and cannot exceed 90 bar.
to skid, they inform the control unit which supplies the intake
solenoid valves "8" and the drive valves "6". The driver is informed of the cutting in of this system by the
At the same time, supplying the motor "5" which drives the flashing of the corresponding warning light on the
pumps "4" it will be possible to generate the pressure to be dashboard.
sent to the brake calipers concerned.
The braking force generated in this manner is modulated by If the warning light turns on and glows steadily, there is an
solenoid valves "11" and "12". ABD system failure.
Figure 123
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓÓÓ ÓÓÓÓÓÓ
ABD DEVICE OPERATING LAYOUT
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

SYSTEM WITH 4 PARALLEL CHANNELS

(11)
The system shown in Figure 124 is used on the following
vehicles: 35 C - 40 C - 45 C - 50 C - 65C.
Figure 124
1. Electrohydraulic modulator - 2. Vacuum pump - 3. Vacuum tank - 4. Vacuum servobrake - 5. Hydraulic control
sockets - 6. Harking brake lever - 7. Harking drum brake - 8. Hear brake disk - 9. Hear brake caliper - 10. Electronic
control unit - 11. Sensor - 12. Phonic wheel - 13. Front brake disk - 14. Front brake caliper
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Electrohydraulic control unit/modulator F - Front axle supply

This component integrates both the electronic part and the R - Rear axle supply
electrohydraulic system control modulator.
LF - Left front axle output
It comprises the following:
RF - Right front axle output
A - Electronic control unit
LR - Left rear axle output
B - Electrohydraulic modulator
RR - Right rear axle output
C - Accumulator
It is connected to the electric system through a 31-pin
It is connected to the hydraulic system by the following connector.
connections:
Figure 125
F
LR
RF
RR
C B
CONTROL UNIT/ELECTROHYDRAULIC MODULATOR
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Electrohydraulic modulator Pressure increase

The figure shows the layout of the connection of the Operating the brake pedal, the pressurised oil can reach the
modulator and its internal components. brake calipers as both the drive solenoid valve "7" and the
supply solenoid valves "12" are open.
Figure 126
1. Vacuum servobrake - 2. Electronic control unit - 3. High pressure accumulators - 4. Recovery pumps -
5. Recover pump drive motor - 6. Accumulator for rear axle system - 7. ABD drive solenoid valve (90 bar setting) -
8. One-way abd valve - 9. Intake abd solenoid valve - 10. ABD one-way valve - 11. Low pressure accumulators -
12. Supply solenoid valves - 13. Discharge solenoid valve - 14. One-way quidk pressure relief valves - 15. Front axle disk
brake - 16. Rear axle disk brakes
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Pressure reduction At the same time, supplying the motor "5" which drives the
If the sensors detect that a wheel or wheels tend to lock, pumps "4", it will be possible to recover the excess oil in the
they inform the control unit which reduces the braking force high pressure accumulators "3".
activating the supply solenoid valves "12" and the discharge
solenoid valves "13".
Figure 127
OPERATING LAYOUT OF THE SYSTEM SHOWING THE PRESSURE REDUCTION PHASE
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Pressure maintenance energising the discharge solenoid valves "13", the motor "5"
and the corresponding recovery pumps "4"; while the supply
Once the optimum braking force has been reached, the
solenoid valves "12" continue being energised.
control unit is able to keep it constant by no longer
Figure 128
OPERATING LAYOUT OF THE SYSTEM SHOWING THE PRESSURE MAINTENANCE PHASE
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Cutting in of the EBD device If both failure warning lights turn on (ABS and EBD) this
If the sensors detect that one or both rear wheels tend to means an EBD system failure.
lock in relation to the front wheels, they inform the control Under these conditions the braking force will not be
unit which appropriately supplies the supply solenoid valves distributed between the axles, therefore rear wheel locking
"12" of the rear axle, in order to optimise the braking force. may occur with the possibility of skidding.
A fault on certain system components causes the ABS
system to be cut off (displayed by turning on the special
warning light), still leaving the EBD system operational.
Figure 129
FP. Rear axle braking force - FA. Front axle braking force - A. Servobrake distribution curve - B. Ideal distribution curve -
C. Any proportioning valve distribution curve - D. EBD system distribution curve
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Cutting in of the ABD device During this phase the maximum pressure is limited by the
If the sensors detect that one or both rear axle wheels tend drive solenoid valves "6" and cannot exceed 90 bar.
to skid, they inform control unit which supplies the intake The driver is informed of the cutting in of this system by the
solenoid valves "9" drive valves "7". flashing of the corresponding warning light on the
At the same time, supplying the motor "5" which drives the dashboard.
pumps "4" it will be possible to generate the pressure to be If the warning light turns on and glows steadily, there is an
sent to the brake calipers concerned. ABD system failure.
The braking force generated in this manner is modulated by
solenoid valves "12" and "13".
Figure 130
Ú
Ú
ABD DEVICE OPERATING LAYOUT
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004


The following table shows the pin out of the control unit in question.
Figure 131
27 20 19
31 16
26
15 1
Cable
Pin Function
colour code
1 Right rear sensor Ċ
2 Right rear sensor Ċ
3 Right front sensor (only for 35 C - 40 C - 45 C - 50 C - 65 C vehicles) Ċ
4 Right front sensor Ċ
5 Right front sensor (only for 29 L - 35 S vehicles) Ċ
6 Left front sensor Ċ
7 Left front sensor Ċ
8 Left rear sensor Ċ
9 Left rear sensor Ċ
10 Ċ Ċ
11 Line K to pin 4 38-pin connector for diagnostics 8817
12 Line L to pin 3 38-pin connector for diagnostics 8818
13 Negative for third brake relay 0315
14 Positive from stop light switch 1173
15 Key-operated positive 8847
16 Earth 0000
17 Direct positive 7772
18 Direct positive 7772
19 Earth 0000
20 Negative for ABS failure warning light 6670
21 Negative for EBD failure warning light 6673
22 Ċ Ċ
23 Ċ Ċ
24 Negative for ABD operating warning light 6674
25 Ċ Ċ
26 Ċ Ċ
27 Ċ Ċ
28 Ċ Ċ
29 Ċ Ċ
30 Ċ Ċ
31 Ċ Ċ
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ELECTRONIC INJECTION SYSTEM

Common rail
General In the common rail a special pump continuously keeps the
In order to reduce the emission of particulate, particularly fuel at high pressure, regardless of the stroke and of the
high injection pressures are required. cylinder that is to receive injection, and accumulates it in a
common duct for all the injectors.
The system on the new Daily makes it possible to inject the
fuel at pressures reaching 1350 bar, while the pressure Therefore, fuel already at the injection pressure is always
obtained with electronic system management optimises the present at the inlet of the injectors.
work of the engine limiting emissions and consumption. When the solenoid valve of an injector is energised by the
In other diesel systems the high pressure is generated only electronic control unit, injection takes place in the
at the moment of injection for each single cylinder (injection corresponding cylinder.
pump or injector-pump).
Figure 132
14 13 12 11
1
2
3
4
6 7 8 9 10
High pressure
Low pressure
Thermostarter supply
FUEL FEED AND RECIRCULATION DIAGRAM

1. Heat starter plug - 2. Heat starter electro valve - 3. Electrical injector - 4. Rail hydraulic accumulator - 5. 3rd pump
cutout electro valve - 6. High-pressure pump - 7. Fuel filter - 8. Electrically driver pump - 9. Prefilter - 10. Reservoir -
11. Pressure regulator valve - 12. Connection - 13. Pressure limiter valve - 14. Flow limiter
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 133
In reality the system is much more complex, as the various
control and adjustment components have to be integrated.
The MS6.3 electronic control centre monitors the entire 9
system: it receives data from sensors and activates the
actuators as required based on input signal processing.
8
10
7
6 11
5
HYDRAULIC LAYOUT
5. Pre-filter - 6. Electric pump - 7. Filter with
overpressure valve - 8. Pressure regulator - 9. Pressure
limiter - 10. Fuel outlets unit - 11. Thermal starter
Figure 134
B
C
OPERATING LAYOUT D
1. 3rd impeller cut-off device - 2. Flywheel rpm sensor - 3. High pressure pump - 4. Pressure regulator - 5. Other actuators
(thermal starter, heated filter, fan control, ac control) - 6. Electronic control unit with built-in atmospheric pressure sensor -
7. Other sensors (accelerator, brake, clutch, vehicle speed, water temperature, air temperature) - 8. From rail pressure
sensor - 9. Fuel tank - 10. Pre-filter - 11. Electric pump - 12. Fuel filter - 13. Filter overpressure valve - 14. Outlets unit
with calibrated hole - 15. Rail pressure limiter - 16. Air flow meter - 17. Common rail - 18. Injectors - 19. Timing sensor on
camshaft - A. To thermal starter - B. Electric circuit - C. Low pressure fuel - D. High pressure fuel
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Common rail (F1A) Preheat plugs are provided for cold starts.
It differs from the Common rail system on previous engines
in that injected fuel pressure is 1600 instead of 1350 bars.
Figure 135
0003343t
1. High pressure pump - 2. Piping - 3. Pressure regulator - 4. Water in filter sensor - 5. Fuel filter with water separator -
6. Fule filter clogging sensor - 7. Fuel semperature sensor - 8. Fuel pressure line to filter - 9. Fuel return line to tank -
10. Fuel return line to filter - 11. High pressure piping to common rail - 12. Low pressure return line from rail - 13. Over
pressure valve - 14. Common rail - 15. Fuel pressure sensor - 16. High pressure line between rail and electro injectors -
17. Electro injectors - 18. Return line from electro injectors
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Hydraulic system (Common Rail - F1A)

The hydraulic system consists of a low and high-pressure circuit, the former consisting of the following piping:
- connecting high-pressure output to the Rail;
- Common Rail;
- connecting the Rail and supplying electro injectors.
The low-pressure circuit consists of the following piping:
- fuel aspiration from tank to prefilter;
- supplying the pump and prefilter;
- supplying the high-pressure pump via the fuel filter.
The Rail exhaust circuit and the electro injectors complete the supply circuit.
The following are mandatory for safety reasons because of high-pressure levels inside this hydraulic system:
- avoid improper connection of high pressure piping junctions;
- avoid connecting high pressure piping with the engine running (useless and hazardous attempts at purging must be avoided!)
Low-pressure circuit integrity is essential to proper system operation, so mishandling and modifications must be avoided, with
immediate action required in case of leaks.
Figure 136
0003340t
1. High pressure pump - 2. High pressure line - 3. Electro injector recriculation line - 4. Electro injectors - 5. Common
rail - 6. Over pressure valve - 7. Bypass valve - 8. Filter - 9. Priming pump - 10. Tank - 11. Mechanical supply pump -
12. High pressure pump limiter valve - 13. Pressure regulator
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 137 SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Camshaft pulley and timing sensor
Motor 8040
5 teeth (4 + 1 for timing detection) are machined on the
pulley opposite an inductive sensor equal to the one on the
flywheel.
5 holes (4 + 1 timing recognition hole) are provided on the
F1A engine pulley.
The sensor is of the inductive type and is used by the
electronic control unit to detect the engine stroke during
synchronisation (when starting).
When assembling the sensor:
ensure the dimension illustrated working on the slots of the
bracket and measuring with a thickness gauge
- make sure that the sensor is perpendicular in relation to
the wheel tightening the nuts.
Figure 138
Motor F1A
0003320t
TIMING RECOGNITION HOLES
0003321t
TECHNICAL VIEWS OF PULLEY AND SENSOR

1. Camshaft pulley - 2. Sensor 1. Camshaft pulley - 2. Sensor
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Flywheel and rpm sensor Figure 140

The flywheel has a set of 58 holes (60 - 2), as illustrated, for
generating the signal for the inductive sensor.
It is the same as the one on the camshaft and is positioned on
the crankcase and detects the passage of the 58 holes on the
flywheel.
The change in the signal caused by the lack of 2 holes
(synchronism gap) which takes place at each rotation of the
crankshaft is the reference signal that allows the control unit
to recognise the advance in relation to the TDC of piston pair
1-4.
This signal is also used by the control unit to detect the engine
rotation speed, the duration of injection and to control the
rev counter.
When assembling the sensor:
- ensure the dimension illustrated working on the slots of
the bracket and measuring with a thickness gauge. HOLES FOR GENERATING SIGNALS ON THE
- make sure that the sensor is perpendicular in relation to FLYWHEEL
the wheel tightening the nuts.
The F1A engine crankshaft sensor features a slatted sound Figure 141
wheel on the crankshaft front.
This features 58 (60-2) teeth and the sensor detects their
passage.
1
Figure 139
TECHNICAL VIEW OF FLYWHEEL AND SENSOR

1. Flywheel - 2. Sensor
Figure 142
0003319t
TECHNICAL VIEW OF THE SOUND WHEEL AND

SENSOR
RPM SENSOR ON CRANKCASE
1. Sound wheel ć 2. Crankshaft sensor
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 143 Flywheel and camshaft sensor specifications

These are inductive sensors.
The flywheel sensor (48035) is connected at pins 29 and 37
of connector A of the control unit.
It is also used to control the electronic rev counter on the
instrument cluster.
The timing sensor (48042) is connected at pins 4 and 31 of
connector A of the control unit.
The resistance at 20 °C is approx. ~ 860 Ohm.
SENSOR AND CONNECTION CABLE
Figure 144
SENSOR CONNECTOR AND WIRING DIRAGRAM
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Pre-filter The pipes are fitted with quick couplings.

This is a simple transparent filter like the one in petrol supply It is connected to pins 7 and 8 of connector A of the control
systems. unit.
Replace it only when a sight check reveals traces of impurity. Specifications
Electric pump Delivery pressure: 2,5 bar
Flow rate: > 155 litres/h
Rotary volumetric pump with integrated by pass (Figure 145) Supply: 13,5 V - < 5 A
located outside the fuel tank. Coil resistance at 20 °C: 28.5 Ohm
It is on the left-hand side of the frame in an accessible area.
There is no need to bleed the fuel supply system.
Figure 145
TECHNICAL VIEW AND CROSS SECTION OF ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Fuel filter
Cartridge degree of filtering: 5 micron
Differential operating pressure (obstruction indicator): 0.6 bar
The fuel temperature sent by the sensor to the electronic injection control unit allows very accurate calculation of the flow rate
of the fuel to be injected in the cylinders.
It is located in a fairly accessible position in the left front part of the engine compartment.
1. Actuated by ECU via relay with fuel temperature below 3°C.
2. Filtering element
3. Shows presence of water through a warning lamp on instrument panel.
4. Differential pressure sensor calibrated at 0,6 bar : any clogging is shown by warning lamp
5. It is a NTC sensor connected to EDC for fuel temperature reading enabling electronic control to calculate the amount of
diesel oil to be injected into the cylinders.
6. Installed on filter support for excess fuel return to tank.
Engine 8040 Engine F1A
6 4
5 2
1 3
4
1 2 4
3
3
73731 003312t
FUEL FILTER
1. Heater - 2. Filtering element - 3. Condensation indicator 1. Clogged filter sensor - 2. Fuel temperature sensor -
- 4. Obstruction indicator - 5. Fuel temperature sensor - 3. Water sensor - 4. Heater
6. Discharge
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

High pressure pump The pump is lubricated and cooled by the fuel itself.
This pump has three radial pistons (total displacement 0,7 The 3rd impeller cut-off solenoid valve (78015) serves to
cc) controlled by the timing gear belt, with no need for increase the part of fuel oil that lubricates the radialjet pump,
calibration. it is used above 4200 rpm (when power is no longer needed)
and keeps the intake valve open also when the cylinder is
Each impeller unit comprises:
compressing. It sends one third of the capacity of the high
- a piston (5) operated by a cam (2) integral with the pressure pump back to low pressure.
pump shaft (6)
The on-off time is considerably lower than conventional
- a plate inlet valve (3) injection pumps.
- a ball delivery valve (4) The control solenoid valve is connected to pins 20 and 21
The delivery pressure to the rail is modulated between 250
and 1350 bar by the electronic control unit, acting on the
pressure regulator solenoid valve.
Figure 148
3 4 6 1
8
1
6 9 5
7 2 2
TECHNICAL VIEW AND CROSS SECTION OF HIGH PRESSURE PUMP

1. Cylinder - 2. Cam - 3. Plate inlet valve - 4. Ball delivery valve - 5. Piston - 6. Pump shaft - 7. Low pressure fuel inlet -
8. High pressure fuel delivery - 9. Fuel backflow
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

High-pressure pump (F1A engine) The amount of fuel to be sent to the pump is set by pressure
regulator (7).
This pump is similar to the 8140 engine one.
The pressure regulator stops fuel inflow to the pump based
It differs in Rail line pressure, modulated at between 250 and
on PWM input from the centre.
1600 bars by the electronic centre by acting on the pressure
regulator electro valve and is not provided with a 3rd pump During pump compression, fuel reaches a pressure level
cutout electro valve (78015). sufficient to open the pressure valve to common rail (2), and
supplies it via output (1).
Pump (3) is oriented on the pump shaft cam.
During aspiration the pump is powered via supply conduit
(5).
Figure 149
13
12
1 11
7 10
2
7
72595
5 6
72597
1. Output for rail pressure Ć 2. Rail pressure valve Ć 3. Pump Ć 4. Pump shaft Ć 5. Pump supply conduit Ć 6. Pressure
regulator supply conduit Ć 7. Pressure regulator Ć 8. High pressure pump Ć 9. Fuel input connection from filter - 10. Fuel
output connection to filter support - 11. Fuel input connection from centre heat exchanger - 12. Fuel output connection
from mechanical pump to filter - 13. Supply mehanical pump
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Pressure regulator When, after processing the various engine operating

parameters, the electronic control unit determines the need
This is located on the high pressure pump and modulates the
for a different injection pressure, it modulates a command
fuel pressure to the rail (and thus to the injectors) on the
signal in PWM to the regulator solenoid valve which
basis of the commands received from the electronic control
discharges the excess pressure in the pump backflow duct.
unit.
The modulated pressure is checked through the pressure
It mainly comprises:
sensor on the rail by the control unit, which, if necessary,
- a ball shutter (1) suitably modifies the intensity of the command signal to
reach the required result.
- a valve (3) control pin (2)
The control solenoid valve (78013) is connected to pins 9
- a preloading spring (4)
and 20 of connector A of the control unit.
- a coil (5)
When the solenoid is not energised, the delivery pressure
depends only on the spring preload.
Figure 150
3 2 5 4
1 6
PRESSURE REGULATOR CROSS SECTION

1. Ball shutter - 2. Ppin - 3. Valve - 4. Preloading spring - 5. Coil - 6. Body - 7. Anchor
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Pressure regulator (F1A) When solenoid (1) is not activated, the magnetic core is
moved to its rest position by preload spring (6).
Similar to the one installed on the 8140 engine and mounted
on the CP3 pump low-pressure circuit. In these conditions, cylinder (3) is in a position to offer
maximum fuel passage cross-section.
When the engine control centre pilots the pressure
regulator via the PWM signal, solenoid (1) is activated, which Control electro valve 78013 is connected to centre
in its turn generates movement of magnetic core (2). connector A pins 9 and 20.
Core movement causes cylinder (3) axial displacement by
fuel delivery partialization.
Figure 151
003386t
4
1 1
2 2
3
5
3 6
4
6
75574 75575
1. Solenoid Ć 2. Magnetic core Ć 3. Cylinder Ć 4. Fuel input Ć 5. Fuel output Ć 6. Preloiad spring Ć 7. Connector
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Rail (pressure accumulator) Screwed onto the rail there is a fuel pressure sensor. The
signal sent by this sensor to the electronic control unit is
The volume of the rail is small in size (29 cc) to allow quick
feedback information on the basis of which correct actuation
pressurising when starting, at idle speed and in the event of
of the rail pressure is checked.
high loads.
It has however sufficient volume to minimise the plenum
effect caused by opening and closing of the injectors and
operation of the high pressure pump.
Common Rail for engines with serial numbers over 3089322

Temporary solution with simulated flow limiters and over pressure valve connected to the fuel discharge unit.
Figure 152
2
3
1
5 4
1. Common Rail - 2. Simulated flow limiter - 3. Simulated over pressure valve seat - 4. Pressure sensor -
5. Fuel input from high-pressure pump
Common Rail for engines produced since end-October 2000

Final Common Rail solution without flow limiters and over pressure valve. The new Common Rail features different pressure
sensor layout and discharge unit connection predisposition.
Figure 153
2
4
5
1
1. Common Rail - 2. To electrical injectors - 3. Pressure sensor - 4. Fuel discharge unit attachment -
5. Fuel input from high-pressure pump
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Rail (pressure accumulator - F1A) - high-pressure pump operation

The hydraulic accumulator is mounted in the cylinder head - electro injector opening.
on the side opposite aspiration.
The fuel sensor and overpressure valve are positioned on
Its some 22-cm3 volume dampens fuel pressure oscillations the hydraulic accumulator.
due to:
Figure 154
3
1 5
75576
1. Common rail - 2. To electro injectors - 3. Fuel pressure sensor - 4. Overpressure valve -

5. Fuel input from high pressure pump
Figure 155
Over pressure valve
The over pressure valve protects system components in
the event that fuel pressure exceeds rated 1750 bars.
A The piston's conical end normally keeps discharge to
tank open.
B In the event of fuel pressure being over 1750 bars in
the rail, the piston is relocated and excess pressure is
discharged into the tank.
70500
70502
IVER PRESSURE VALVE

1. Body - 2. Piston - 3. Stop - 4. Spring - 5. Direct
discharge to tank - 6. Seat on the rail
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 156 Flow limiters

These are located on the rail fuel outlet and their function is
to protect the engine or vehicle in the event of internal leaks
(for example, atomiser blocked open) and external leaks
(example: high pressure pipe damaged).
Under these circumstances they also allow, within certain
limits, the system to work through the components that are
still intact.
The passage of fuel from the rail to the injectors takes place
through the holes machined on the small diameter of the
piston.
Under normal conditions, the fuel pressure is exerted on both
sides of the piston, held n the open position by the spring.
In the event of a heavy loss of pressure downstream of the
limiter, the inlet pressure becomes preponderant and moves
the piston from the opposite side, obstructing the fuel outlet.
Pressure limiter
The pressure limiter (1500 bar) screwed in the rail, serves to
protect the system components in the event of a failure to the
pressure regulator on the pump.
If the pressure of the fuel in the rail exceeds 1500 bar the
piston is raised and the excess pressure is eliminated.
TECHNICAL VIEW OF COMPONENT AND LIMITER

CONNECTOR
Fuel pressure sensor
Figure 157
This is fitted at the centre of the rail and measures the existing
VOLTAGE fuel pressure in order to determine the injection pressure.
The injection pressure value is used as feedback for closed
4.8V loop pressure control and to determine the duration of the
electric command for injection.
4.5V
It is connected to pins 6, 13 and 33 of connector A of the
control unit.
It is supplied at 5 Volt.
0.5V
0.2V Minimum
0 bar PRESSURE 1500 bar
PRESSURE LIMITER OPERATING GRAPH
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Injectors Figure 158

The solenoid valve controls the lift of the atomiser needle.
On the fuel inlet union a filter protects the injector for
impurities. The injector is constructively the same as
conventional ones, except that there is no needle return
spring.
Access to the injectors is gained by releasing the side
soundproof cover from the cylinder head. The fuel recovery
pipe has a quick coupling.
The injector comprises two parts:
- actuator - atomiser composed of pressure rod (1), pin
(2) and nozzle (3)
- control solenoid valve comprising a coil (4) and drive
valve (5).
10
1st phase: rest position
The coil (4) is not activated and the shutter (6) is in the closed 13
position.
The same fuel pressure acts in both the control area (7) and
in the pressure chamber (8), but as the shutter (6) is closed, 9
4
the needle (2) cannot be raised.
2nd phase: start of injection
11
The coil (4) is energised and causes the shutter (6) to move 5
upwards. 6
The fuel of the control volume (9) flows towards the backflow 14
duct (10) causing a drop in the pressure in the control area 7
(7). 12
At the same time, the pressure of the fuel in the pressure
chamber (8) causes the needle (2) to rise, resulting in fuel 12 1
injection to the cylinder.
3rd phase: end of injection
The coil (4) is not activated and makes the shutter (6) return
to the closed position, which re-creates a balance of forces
that makes the needle (2) return to the closed position and
consequently end injection. 15
Injectors (78247)
The solenoid valve is of the N.C. type. 2
The injectors are connected individually to the control unit at
the following pins: 8
- A12 / A40 cylinder 1 injector
- A23 / A42 cylinder 3 injector 3
INJECTOR WIRING DIAGRAM AND CROSS SECTION

1. Pressure rod - 2. Needle - 3. Nozzle - 4. Coil - 5. Pilot
valve - 6. Ball shutter - 7. Control area - 8. Pressure
chamber - 9. Control volume - 10. Backflow duct -
11. Control duct - 12. Supply duct - 13. Electrical
connection - 14. High pressure fuel inlet - 15. Spring
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 159 Fuel outlets unit

All the outlets, overpressure and backflows of the various
hydraulic components converge in this unit.
3 Part of them is made available to the thermal starter, while the
2 rest returns to the fuel tank.
4
In the unit there is a 2,3 mm diameter drain hole.
This hole regulates the whole outlet system to maintain a
5 constant counter pressure of 0,5 bar, which is indispensable
for correctly supplying the thermal starter and it ensures flow
rates which prevent overheating of the fuel.
The calibrated hole is made in a union similar to

! the other unions. In the event of work on the
FUEL OUTLET UNIT system, take care not to fit another different
1. Fuel outlet to tank - 2. Return from injectors - union in its place as this would cause serious
3. Delivery to thermal starter - 4. Leading from high operating failures.
pressure pump - 5. Arrival from filter
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Air flow meter Figure 161

This component incorporates a temperature sensor and a
pressure sensor.
It is fitted on the engine intake manifold (Figure 162) and
measures the maximum flow rate of the intake air which is
used to accurately calculate the amount of fuel to be injected
at each cycle.
It is connected to the control unit on pins A2 / A3 / A19 / A34.
Pin 1 sensor - Pin A19 ECU - earth -
Pin 2 sensor - Pin A2 ECU - temperature signal
Pin 3 sensor - Pin A3 ECU - 5V - supply
Pin 4 sensor - Pin A34 ECU - 0 ÷ 5V
pressure signal -
Course of sensor in relation to the temperature:
Temperature Resistance
- 40 °C 48.50 kOhm 8660
AIR FLOW METER
- 20 °C 15.67 kOhm
0 °C 5.86 kOhm Figure 162
20 °C 2.50 kOhm
40 °C 1.17 kOhm
60 °C 0.59 kOhm
80 °C 0.32 kOhm
100 °C 0.18 kOhm
120 °C 0.11 kOhm
Course of sensor in relation to the pressure:
See graph opposite.
003323t
1. Air flow meter location
Figure 160
Figure 163
VOLTAGE
4.65V
19
34
0.4V
0.2 bar ABSOLUTE PRESSURE 2.5 bar
AIR FLOW METER OPERATING GRAPH AIR FLOW METER CONNECTION
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 164 Air delivery gauge

Used in the EGR version to replace the one mounted on the
engine aspiration manifold.
The gauge is of the heated film type and is located o their
aspiration conduit between the turbine and the air filter.
The gauge contains the aspired air temperature sensor.
It is connected to the centre on pins A5 / A17 / A18 / A26
/ A28.
Pin 1 sensor - Pin A5 ECU - temperature signal
Pin 2 sensor - Pin A17 ECU - 5V power supply
Pin 3 sensor - Pin A18 ECU - mass
Pin 4 sensor - Pin A26 ECU - reference voltage
Pin 5 sensor - Pin A28 ECU - pressure signal
003333t
1. Connector - 2. Gauge body - 3. Air input grid
The operating principle is based on a heated membrane

Figure 165 inserted in a measurement canal through which air to the
engine flows.
The hot film membrane is kept at a constant temperature
some 120 °C above incoming air level by the heating resistor.
The air mass traversing the measurement canal tends to
subtract heat from the membrane so current must cross the
resistor to maintain constant film temperature.
Current absorbed is proportional to the air mass flowing to
the engine and is measured with a Wheatstone bridge and the
signal is forwarded to the electronic centre.
003334t
TECHNICAL VIEW OF GAUGE CONNECTOR
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 166 Atmospheric pressure sensor

This is integrated inside the control unit.
It measures the atmospheric pressure to correct the flow rate
in relation to the altitude.
Engine coolant temperature sensor

This is an NTC sensor located on the thermostat box.
It detects the temperature of the coolant fluid to give the
control unit information about the engine temperature
conditions.
It is connected to pins 1 and 30 of connector A of the control
unit.
Course of the sensor in relation to the temperature:
- 40°C 48.30 kOhm
- 20°C 15.46 kOhm
COURSE OF SENSOR RESISTANCE IN RELATION TO
TEMPERATURE Ą Ą0°C 5.89 kOhm
Ą 20°C 2.50 kOhm
Figure 167 Ą 40°C 1.17 kOhm
Ą 60°C 0.59 kOhm
Ą 80°C 0.32 kOhm
100°C 0.19 kOhm
120°C 0.11 kOhm
Fuel temperature sensor

This is an NTC sensor located on the fuel filter.
It detects the temperature of the fuel to give the control unit
information about the fuel oil temperature conditions.
unit.
It is exactly the same as the engine coolant temperature
sensor.
TECHNICAL VIEW OF ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
NTC
003324t
LOCATION OF F1A ENGINE COOLANT

TEMPERATURE SENSOR
WIRING DIAGRAM 1. EDC - 2. Signal instrument panel signal
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 170
The accelerator pedal position sensor is of the potentiometric
type with incorporated N.O. minimum switch.
It gives the electronic control unit a value proportionate with
the operating angle of the pedal itself determining fuel
delivery.
It is supplied at 5 Volt.
The potentiometer resistance is approx. ~ 1 kOhm.
It is connected at pins 2, 13, 27, 29 and 35 of connector B of
the control unit.
LOCATION OF SENSOR ON ACCELERATOR PEDAL
Figure 171
SENSOR WIRING DIAGRAM
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 172 Brake pedal switches

Two switches are located on the brake pedal; N.C. 53565 si
connected directly to electronic centre pin B31 and 53501 is
connected to the centre via remote switch 25006 for stop
light actuation and to generate a redundant signal on the
centre increasing system reliability degree.
003326t
1. Brake pedal switches
Figure 173
Clutch pedal switch
An N.C. switch connected to electronic centre pin B38 is
mounted on the clutch pedal.
The clutch pedal actuated signal" is used by the centre to
identify gear condition selected and gear shifts.
In absence of the pedal pressed switch signal, the centre
disenables the Cruise Control function.
003327t
1. Clutch pedal switch
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Electromagnetic junction fan Engine coolant temperature

The fan is provided with an electromagnetic junction Activated at over 96 °C and deactivated at under 84 °C
monitored by the electronic centre pin A39 that activated Over supply air temperature
the junction remote control switch, to optimise water
Activated at over 75 °C and deactivated at under 65 °C
cooling.
Fuel temperature
The electrical fan remote control switch is activated or
deactivated by the centre according to the temperature of: Activated at over 20 °C and deactivated at under 10 °C
- the coolant
- over supply air
- the fuel
Figure 174
003328t
ELECTROMAGNETIC JUNCTION TECHNICAL VIEW0 (F1A)

1. Coil
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Preheat plug electronic centre Figure 175

(F1A/F1C engine)
EDC central unit effects the timing of the functioning of glow
plugs pre-heating central unit depending on engine
temperature, which, in turn, activates the glow plugs.
The preheat centre contains an intelligent" remote control
switch that sends a feed-back to the control centre for
information on any preheat centre defect or plug earth shirt
circuit.
Preheat centre pin-out

31 - Mass
86 - Start switch (+15)
ST - EDC electronic centre (pin B42)
DI - EDC electronic centre (pin B37)
30 - Battery positive (+30)
G1 - Preheat plugs
G2 - Preheat plugs
G3 - Preheat plugs
003332t
G4 - Preheat plugs
PREHEAT CENTRE
Figure 176
Preheat plugs
CONTROL VALUES
With constant di 11V power supply:
- maximum current absorbed 18 A
- in 5" 11 ± 1,5 A
- in 30" 6 ± 0.9 A
- temperature after 7" 850°C
003331t
- torque 8-10 Nm
ELECTRICAL DIAGRM
Figure 177
75579
PREHEAT PLUS
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

EDC MS6.3 / EDC16 Checking quantity of fuel injected

Electronic injection control According to the signals from the sensors and the mapped
values, the control unit:
The system calculates injection on the basis of the
processing of the following parameters: - operates the pressure regulator;
- Engine rpm - varies the "pilot" injection time to 2200 rpm;
- Engine coolant fluid temperature - varies the "main" injection time.
- Intake air capacity - Checking idling adjustment
- Battery voltage The control unit processes the signals from the various
sensors and regulates the amount of fuel injected:
- Fuel pressure
- Accelerator pedal position
Fuel pressure ranges from 400 to 1350 bars (1600 for F1
engines), according to engine rpm and load operating Within certain thresholds the speed takes account of the
conditions. battery voltage.
The lower pressure is compensated by longer injection Fuel cut-off in release phase
times and vice versa, always taking account of the loads In the phase of releasing the throttle pedal the control unit
required. actuates the following logic elements:
Up to 2800 rpm pre-injection is also carried out in order to - it cuts off supply to the electro-injectors;
reduce the typical noise of direct injection.
- it partially reactivates supply to the electro-injectors
Pre-injection advance angles, the distance between before reaching idling speed;
pre-injection and main injection and advance angles of main
injection vary according to the instantaneous engine - it operates the fuel pressure regulator.
operating conditions.
Checking cylinder balancing on idling
System diagnosis is performed by means of diagnostic According to the signals received from the sensors, the
instruments (no Blink Code is used). control unit controls the regularity of the torque at idling
speed:
- it varies the amount of fuel injected into the single
Immobilizer recognition electro-injectors (injection time).
When the control unit receives the signal of the key on Checking regular engine rotation (anti-sawing)
"MAR" it communicates with the immobilizer control unit It ensures regular engine rotation at a constant rate while
to enable starting. increasing revs.
The control unit processes the signals received from the
Checking fuel temperature sensors and determines the amount of fuel to be injected via:
With the fuel temperature greater than 75°C, detected by - the pressure regulator;
the sensor on the fuel filter, the control unit operates the
pressure regulator to decrease the line pressure (injection - the electro-injector opening time.
times are not changed). If the temperature exceeds 90°C, Checking smokiness at exhaust on acceleration
the power is reduced to 60%.
from the air introduction meter and engine speed sensor, the
Checking engine coolant temperature control unit determines the optimum amount of fuel to
The control unit, depending on the temperature: inject:
- of the engine coolant, turbocharging air and fuel, - it operates the pressure regulator;
operates the electromagnetic fan (Baruffaldi) and - it varies the electro-injector injection time.
switches on the coolant temperature warning light.
Checking exhaust gas recirculation (E.G.R. if present)
Depending on the engine load and the signal from the
accelerator pedal sensor, the control unit limits the amount
of air taken in, actuating partial suction of the exhaust gases.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Checking top speed limit Checking injection pressure closed cycle

Depending on the number of revs, the control unit actuates Depending on the engine load, determined by processing the
two action strategies: signals from the various sensors, the control unit operates
the regulator to obtain optimum line pressure.
- at 4250 rpm it cuts off the fuel, decreasing the
electro-injector opening time Over 5000 rpm it
deactivates the electro-injectors. Fuel supply
The fuel supply is calculated in relation to:
Checking regular rotation on acceleration - accelerator pedal position
Regular progression is assured in all conditions by the
- engine speed
control of the pressure regulator and the electro-injector
opening time. - quantity of air introduced.
The outcome may be corrected in relation to:
Preheat plug centre control (F1 Engine)
- the water temperature.
During:
Or to avoid:
- the start step
- noise
- the after start step
- smoke
the injection centre times the heater starter (or preheat
plugs for the F1 Engine) according to engine temperature. - overloading
- overheating
Checking activation of air-conditioning system
The control unit operates the air-conditioning compressor:
- switching it on/off when the relative switch is pressed;
- action of external devices (ABS), ABD, EDB
- momentarily turning it off (approximately 6 sec.) if the
engine coolant reaches the set temperature. - serious trouble decreasing the load or stopping the
engine.
Checking fuel pump After determining the mass of air introduced by measuring
Irrespective of the speed, the control unit: its volume and temperature, the control unit calculates the
corresponding mass of fuel to inject into the relevant cylinder
- supplies the auxiliary fuel pump with the key on MAR;
(mg per delivery) also taking into account the temperature
- cuts off auxiliary pump supply if the engine is not started of the diesel.
up within a few seconds. The mass of fuel calculated in this way is first converted into
volume (mm3 per delivery) and then into degrees of throw,
Checking diesel warming or duration of injection.
It times operation of diesel warming in relation to ambient
temperature. Correcting flow rate according to water temperature
A cold engine meets with greater resistance during
Checking cylinder position operation: friction is high, the oil is still very viscous, and the
various clearances are not yet optimized.
During each turn of the engine, the control unit recognizes In addition, the injected fuel tends to condense on the metal
which cylinder is in the power stroke and operates the surfaces that are still cold.
injection sequence for the appropriate cylinder. The fuel supply for a cold engine is therefore greater than for
a warm one.
Checking pilot and main injection timing
According to the signals from the various sensors, including
the absolute pressure sensor built into the control unit, the
control unit determines the optimum point of injection
according to internal mapping.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Correcting flow rate to avoid noise, smoke or overloading Engine starting

The behaviour that could lead to this kind of trouble is well During the first few turns of the engine, the timing and
known. cylinder no. 1 recognition signals (flywheel sensor and
The designer has therefore included special instructions in camshaft sensor) are synchronized.
the control unit to avoid it. The accelerator pedal signal is ignored on starting. Starting
delivery is set only according to water temperature, by a
De-rating special map.
When the control unit detects such speed and acceleration
of the flywheel as to be able to consider the engine started
decreasing the delivery to a varying degree, in proportion to up and no longer driven by the starter motor, it re-enables
the temperature reached by the coolant.
the accelerator pedal.
Turbine rpm setting (.15 - .17) Cold starting

(for the variable geometry turbo-compressor)
If even just one of the three temperature sensors (water, air
By changing its geometry, adjusted turbine speed is or diesel) records a temperature lower than 10°C, pre-post
monitored by the electronic centre via an electrical signal
feeding the compressed air actuator electro valve. Based on
On inserting the key contact, the pre-heating indicator goes
signals from the accelerator pedal position and suction on and remains on for a period varying depending on
manifold air temperature/pressure engine rpm sensors, the
temperature (air is heated by the pre-heating glow plugs that
electronic centre processes the field-back signal to properly
are located on cylinder head for F1 engines), then it blinks.
modulate turbine actuator pilot electro valve opening. Thereafter, the engine can be started up.
When the motor is running this indicator light goes out, while
Injection timing electronic test the glow plugs continue to be powered for a certain length
The advance (start of delivery, expressed in degrees) may be of time (variable) for post-heating.
different from one injection to the next, also differentiated If, with the indicator light flashing, the engine is not started
from one cylinder to another. It is calculated, similarly to the up within 20-25 seconds (inattention time), the operation
delivery, in relation to the engine load (accelerator position, is cancelled so as not to run down the batteries pointlessly.
engine speed and air introduced). The pre-heating curve is also variable in relation to the
The advance is appropriately corrected: battery voltage.
Warm starting
- according to the water temperature. If the reference temperatures all exceed 10°C, when the key
And also to obtain: makes contact the indicator light comes on for
approximately 2 sec., for a short test, and then goes out. It
- lower emissions, noise and overloading; is now possible to start up the engine.
- better vehicle acceleration.
An extremely high advance is set on starting, depending on Run up
the water temperature. When the key makes contact, the control unit transfers the
Feedback from the start of delivery is supplied by the change information stored in memory when the engine was last
in impedance of the injector solenoid valve. stopped into the main memory (see After Run) and makes
a diagnosis of the system.
Speed governor
The electronic speed governor has both features of After run
governors: Whenever the engine is switched off with the key, the
control unit stays powered for a few seconds by the main
- idling and top speed relay.
- all speeds This makes it possible for the microprocessor to transfer
some data from the main memory (volatile) to a non-volatile
It is stable in ranges where conventional, mechanical memory, which can be erased and written over (EEPROM),
governors are imprecise. so as to make it available at the next start up (see Run Up).
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


- fault memory.
It is extremely important for this procedure not to be

! broken off, for example by switching off the engine with
the battery cut-out, or by disconnecting the battery
cut-out before 10 seconds have passed since switching
off the engine.
If this happens, the functioning of the system is ensured,
but repeated interruptions may damage the control
unit.
Cut - off
This function cuts off fuel delivery when the vehicle is
decelerating (accelerator pedal released).
Cylider balancing
Individual cylinder balancing contributes to increasing
comfort and handling.
This function permits individual, customized control over the
delivery of fuel and the start of delivery for each cylinder,
even differently from one cylinder to another, to
compensate for the hydraulic tolerances of the injector.
The differences in flow (delivery specifications) between the
various injectors cannot be evaluated directly by the control
unit. This information is supplied by Modus reading the bar
code of each injector at the time of assembly.
Synchronisation search
is anyhow able to recognize the cylinders into which the fuel
is to be injected.
If this occurs when the engine is already running, the
combustion sequence has already been acquired, so the
already been synchronized.
If this occurs when the machine is at a standstill, the control
unit energizes a single solenoid valve. Within at most 2 turns
of the crankshaft, injection will take place in that cylinder, so
the control unit just needs to get synchronized on the firing
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Bosch MS6.3 control unit

Figure 178 85150
B A
7420
PERSPECTIVE VIEW
A. Housing for injection cable connector - B. Seat for cabin-bonnet cable (UNIJET motor drive)
Figure 179
7406
LOCATION ON THE VEHICLE
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Control unit connection to the injection cable on engine side (housing A)

Figure 180
7421
VIEW OF BOSCH 43-WAY CONNECTOR FROM CABLE INPUT SIDE
Cable
Pin Function
colour code
1 To engine coolant temperature sensor 5154
2 To turbo-blower air pressure and temperature sensor for EDC (without EGR) 5151
4 To engine rpm sensor on camshaft (cams) White
5 To temperature sensor and ambient air pressure for EDC (with EGR) 5151
6 Fuel pressure adjustment sensor earth 0000
7 Control to relay for switching on fuel pump 8150
8 Common EDC centre mass ć Centre monitored remote control switches - EGR electro valve 0000
9 To solenoid valve for pressure adjustment 9925
10 To solenoid valve for electronic injection (injector 2 - cylinder 3) Ċ
11 Spare Ċ
13 To solenoid valve for pressure adjustment 5590
14 Spare Ċ
15 Sensor (fuel temperature) for switching on fuel warming 5592
16 Spare Ċ
17 To ambient air temperature and pressure sensor for EDC (with EGR) 8150
19 Air temperature and pressure sensor earth (without EGR) 0165
20 Earth shared by control unit and radialjet and pressure solenoid valves (no radialjet for F1A) 0000
21 To solenoid valve for radialjet pump control (not for F1A) 9917
22 Spare Ċ
25 To solenoid valve controlling anti-pollution system (EGR.) (.13 - F1A) 5577
27 To speed limiter adjustment sensor 8847
29 To sensor for engine rpm White
30 Earth shared by control unit and temperature sensors 0150
31 To engine rpm sensor on camshaft (cams) Black
32 Control to relay for heated fuel oil filter 8159
33 To sensor for fuel pressure adjustment 5591
35 Control to relay for engaging conditioner compressor 9990
36 To solenoid valve actuator for VGT (.15) or to WASTE GATE solenoid valve (.13) 5000
37 To engine rpm sensor (.13 - .15 - F1A) Black
38 Spare -
39 Control to relay for engine cooling joint 7740
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Control unit connection to cab-bonnet cable (housing B)

Figure 181
7422
VIEW OF BOSCH 43-WAY CONNECTOR FROM CABLE INPUT SIDE
Cable
Pin Function
colour code
1 To cruise Control 8156
2 To load sensor on accelerator for EDC 5157
3 Spare Ċ
4 To instrument panel module A1 rpm indicator repeater 5155
5 Spare Ċ
6 Compressor engaged signal to EDC 8162
7 To diagnostic socket 2299
8 To alarm control unit Green
9 EDC control unit supply 8150
11 Control to relay for connection with fuel tank for thermal starter (not for F1A) 0000
12 To earth signal (battery negative) 0000
14 Instrument panel module A20 rpm indicator repeater mass 0000
15 Spare Ċ
16 To instrument panel module A17 rpm signal 5614
17 Spare Ċ
18 Spare Ċ
20 To key-operated fuse 2 8051
21 To instrument panel module Al A30 engine preheat warning leds 0000
23 To instrument panel module Al EDC A29 defect warning leds 5156
25 To Cruise Control 8155
26 Supply with stop lights on 8153
30 Spare Ċ
31 Supply when brake pedal is pressed 8158
34 Spare Ċ
36 Spare Ċ
37 F1A preheat centre control 1310
38 To clutch pressed signal relay for EDC 0160
39 To alarm control unit White
40 Control to relay for EDC engagement 8150
42 Heater starter insertion remote control switch control/F1A preheat centre control 0000 / 1311
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

EDC system components
Component
Ref. Description
code
1 58918 Instrument panel tachometer
2 58918 Instrument panel rev counter
3 42374 Clutch pedal switch
4 53565 Brake pedal switch
5 85152 Idling switch and accelerator pedal position sensor
6 47106 Fuel temperature sensor (F1A engine)
7 47106 Fuel temperature sensor
Fuel filter clogging sensor (8140 engine)
8 85157 Fuel pressure sensor (F1A engine)
9 85157 Fuel pressure sensor (8140 engine)
10 47035 Coolant temperature sensor
11 85156 Air delivery sensor
12 48042 Distribution sensor
13 48035 Crankshaft sensor (F1A engine)
14 48035 Flywheel sensor (8140 engine)
15 78247 Electro injectors
16 19005 Hot starter
78000 Hot starter electro valve (8140 engine)
17 25231 Plug preheat centre (F1A engine)
18 19010 Preheat plug (F1A engine)
19 85151 Fuel electro pump
20 78015 3rd pump cutout electro valve (8140 engine)
21 78013 Pressure regulator (8140 engine)
22 78013 Pressure regulator (8140 engine)
23 12012 AC compressor
24 78209 EGR modulating electro valve
25 85159 Air delivery sensor
26 58701 EDC warning light
27 58702 Preheat warning light
28 54032 Cruise Control/PTO controls
29 85130 Start key with Immobilizer
30 72027 Diagnosis connection
31 78248 VGT control electro valve (for 8140.43N engine)
32 85022 Fan electromagnetic connection
(*) On version without EGR
(**) On version with EGR
J Only on 8140 engines
F Only on F1A engines
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 182
77024
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Blink Code (up to chassis no. 5383302/ D187233) The order in which the errors are shown is the one in which
they occurred.
With the ignition switch off, press the diagnostic button.
To remove the error list from the memory, proceed as
Two series of blinks of the EDC warning light, at intervals
follows:
with a brief pause, will indicate the code of the first error
memorised. - With the ignition key off, press the diagnostic button
Press the button again to move to the next error. - keeping the button pressed, switch the ignition on
Each time the last error is reached, the first one will be - keep the button pressed for 5 seconds
repeated.
- release the button
The list of the errors contains all the errors memorised and
- Switch the ignition off.
not only the active ones.
The error codes are given in the following table.
Common Rail 8140.43B - 8140.43S - 8140.43N - EDC MS6.3

(Software version 5.5)
Warning light Reduction level

Blink-Code Warning light
EDC (*)
VEHICLE
1.1 on Vehicle speed
1.3 off Cruise Control
1.4 flashing Accelerator pedal X
1.5 off Clutch switch
1.6 on Brake switch
1.7 off Brake/accelerator plausibility Idling setting
1.8 off Diagnostic warning light / Main EDC warning
1.9 off Conditioner control relay
ENGINE 1
2.1 flashing H2O temperature sensor X
2.2 off Air temperature sensor
2.3 on Fuel oil temperature sensor
2.4 flashing Boosting pressure sensor X
2.5 off Atmospheric pressure sensor
2.7 flashing Fuel pump
2.8 off Fuel filter heater control relay
2.9 on Fan control relay
ENGINE 2
3.1 flashing Cylinder 1 balancing
3.5 off Battery voltage
3.6 off Thermal starter warning light
3.7 off Thermal starter
3.8 off Thermal starter solenod valve
3.9 off Preheat monitoring
TURBINE
4.4 flashing VGT monitoring
4.5 on VGT electro valve
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Warning light Reduction level

Blink-Code Warning light
EDC (*)
INJECTORS
5.1 flashing Cylinder injector 1
5.7 on Bearing 1 (cylinders 1-4)
5.8 on Bearing 2 (cylinders 2-3)
ENGINE RPM
6.1 flashing Engine rpm sensor X
6.2 flashing Camshaft revolution sensor X
6.4 flashing Over-revving
INTERFACE
7.1 off PWM signal
7.2 off CAN bus inactive
7.3 off CAN bus control
7.4 off CAN message control
FUEL PRESSURE/EGR
8.1 flashing Fuel pressure control X or
Engine cutout
8.2 flashing Fuel pressure sensor X
8.3 flashing Pressure regulator
8.4 off 3rd impeller cut-off solenoid valve
8.5 on EGR control
8.6 on EGR valve
8.7 on Debit meter X
8.8 off EGR atmospheric pressure sensor
CENTER
9.1 flashing Control unit error X or
Engine cutout
9.2 on Control unit EEPROM fault
9.3 flashing Immobiliser - EDC communication
9.4 on Main relay
9.5 off After run Test
9.6 flashing Engine stop test (ECU)
Engine stop test (ECU)
9.7 flashing Sensor supply X or
Engine cutout
9.8 flashing Control unit error Start impossible
9.9 flashing ECU operating system Engine cutout
F1A Common Rail

Differs for the following codes:
3.6 off Preheat warning light

3.7 off Preheat plug centre
3.8 off Preheat plug centre
3.9 off Preheat monitoring
8.4 off (Not used)
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

EDC16
The EDC.16 control unit offers a few innovations compared to the control unit used with system EDC MS6.3.
- latest-generation hardware and software;
- possibility of processing a greater number of signals (both input and output);
- preset for the control of new additional functions and devices, which will be adopted later for technological improvement
of the product range or compliance with forthcoming anti-pollution rules.
The variants compared with the MS6.3 system are as follows:
- new sensor on the accelerator pedal;
- new sensor on the distributing shaft (phase);
- engine cable;
- bonnet/cab cable;
- new connectors for control unit connection.
The EDC.16 system replaces the MS6.3 system on engines F1A (.10 - .12). It is present on F1C engines.
Diagnosis is only performed by using the diagnostic instruments available. No Blink Code is provided.
The other features are the same as the 6.3 system.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Bosch EDC16 control unit

Figure 183
K A
85711
PERSPECTIVE VIEW
A. Engine side injection cable connector - K. Bonnet/cab cable connector
Figure 184
7373
LOCATION ON THE VEHICLE
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Control unit connection to the injection cable on engine side (housing A)

Figure 185
85708
85710
Cable
Pin Function
colour code
1 0000 Cylinder injector 3
8 0000 Rail pressure sensor negative
11 0174 Distributing shaft sensor negative (phase)
12 red Drive shaft sensor
13 5153∗ Boosting air pressure and temperature sensor power supply
19 0000 Pressure regulator negative
20 7158 Distributing shaft sensor positive
21 − Drive shaft sensor braided wire
23 0165∗ Boosting air pressure and temperature sensor negative
27 white Drive shaft sensor
28 5591 Rail sensor power supply
29 8152 Air flow meter power supply (available with EGR)
37 5151 Air flow meter air temperature signal (available with EGR)
40 5152∗ Boosting air pressure sensor signal
41 0150 Water temperature sensor negative
42 8153 Air flow meter signal
43 5591 Rail pressure signal
44 8151 Air flow meter negative (available with EGR)
49 9925 Pressure regulator
50 9160 Distributing shaft sensor signal (phase)
51 0150 Fuel temperature sensor negative
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Cable
Pin Function
colour code
52 5592 Fuel temperature sensor signal
53 5151∗ Boosting air temperature sensor signal
58 5154 Water temperature sensor signal
60 8150 EGR solenoid valve
F Power seats
f Signal seats
(*) Available when the EGR is not provided
- Pins not highlighted are not used
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Control unit connection to cab-bonnet cable (housing K)
Figure 186
85708
85709
Cable
Pin Function
colour code
1 - +30 (main relay)
2 0000 Earth
4 0000 Earth
5 8150 +30 (main relay)
6 0000 Earth
8 0150 Accelerator pedal sensor negative (pin 5)
9 5157 Accelerator pedal sensor signal (pin 4)
13 - Signal from power takeoff (if any) state selector
16 - Negative from power takeoff (if any) state selector
17 - Signal from brake pedal pressed for stop light ignition
25 2299 K line
28 8051 +15
30 0159 Accelerator pedal sensor negative (pin 3)
31 5157 Accelerator pedal sensor signal (pin 6)
38 8155 Cruise Control (resume)
42 - Speed limiter button
45 5158 Accelerator pedal sensor power supply (pin 2)
46 5158 Accelerator pedal sensor power supply (pin 1)
48 5614 Engine speed sensor (revs counter)
52 1310 To preheating spark plug actuation remote-control switch pin D1
54 8162 Signal from air-conditioning ON compressor remote-control switch
56 8157 Cruise Control (set +)
57 - Auxiliary speed limiter (where available)
58 - Signal from clutch switch
61 - CAN L line
62 - CAN H line
68 8150 Fuel filter heating remote-control switch positive
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Cable
Pin Function
colour code
Positive to the remote-control switch for engine water recirculation shut-off solenoid valve
70 9990
control with auxiliary heater ON
71 5156 EDC warning light negative
72 8150 Main relay (negative)
75 5155 Vehicle speed signal (tachometer)
77 8154 Cruise Control (off)
78 8156 Cruise Control (set -)
80 8158 Brake pedal signal
90 7740 Positive for engine cooling electromagnetic joint control
91 - Fuel electric pump remote-control switch negative
92 0000 Pre-heating warning light negative
93 1311 To pre-heating spark plug actuation remote-control switch pin ST
- Pins not highlighted are not used
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Accelerator pedal sensor injection system as an accelerator pedal position set by the
driver. (At the output of these potentiometers, a variable
A new sensor which incorporates two potentiometers (no
voltage is available which corresponds to the potentiometer
idling switch is provided) is available on the accelerator
resistance value.)
pedal. The ratio between the signals from the two
potentiometers is 2:1 (one potentiometer exhibits a twofold It is connected to the EDC control unit connector K pins
resistance value compared with the other). Both of these 9-30-45-31-8-46. The potentiometers are powered with
signals (V) are detected by the control unit that processes 5 V voltage supplied by the control unit itself.
them according to stored threshold values and manages the
Figure 187
EDC MS6.3 EDC 16
85714
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 188 Camshaft sensor (F1A)

A semiconductor layer, immersed in a magnetic field and
through which current flows, generates a potential difference
(called Hall voltage) at its ends.
If current intensity remains constant, the generated voltage
depends only on the magnetic field strength: periodical
variation of field strength is enough to obtain a modulated
electric signal.
The smooth portion of the phonic wheel (distributing shaft
pulley) covers, while moving, the sensor, thus blocking the
magnetic field with resulting low output signal.
On the contrary, the sensor generates a high signal next to
the openings and when a magnetic field is available.
Phase sensor signals are acquired, and the engine position is
recognized according to the sequence of the phonic wheel
notches.
The mounting function makes it possible to identify signal
errors and interferences (if any).
0003320t
The resulting signal is supplied to the processor that controls
the injection system.
1. Phase identification holes
Figure 189
0003321t
1. Distributing shaft pulley - 2. Sensor
Figure 190
2
1 3
85712 85713
PERSPECTIVE VIEW
1. Power supply positive - 2. Signal output - 3. Earth
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Injection cable F1A (.10 - .12)

Figure 191
85723
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Joint connector
Connection between cab/bonnet cable and injection cable (Unijet)
Figure 192
8587
I 8588
7740 8159 7740

8159
5577 5577 5000
I F1A
8150 0077 0077 8150 0000 0077

9990 0000 0000 9990
8159
8589 9990 0000
I F1A (EDC16) 7740 1311
8150 1311 8150

1131
5577
5577 8150 1310
8847 8150
5577
8150 0077 0077 8150

74269
1310 0000 0000 1310
Ref. (F1A Cable colour

Ref. Ref. (F1A) Function
EDC16) code
1 5000 To pin 36 of EDC electronic control unit
2 3 8150 Fuel pump engagement relay
3 4 7740 Relay engagement for engine cooling electromagnetic joint control
4 5 9990 Air conditioning compressor switching off
I 5 6 8159 Fuel oil heating circuit switching on
6 8 0000 Earth
7 1 1 5577 Fuel oil heating resistance supply
8 16 8 0077 Fuel oil heating resistance earth
10 2 8150 Preheat plug centre positive (pin-86)
11 4 1310 Preheat plug centre control (pin-D1), (EDC pin-B37)
12 5 1311 Preheat plug centre control (pin-ST), (EDC pin-B42)
13 6 0000 Preheat plug centre mass (pin-31)
2 8847 Speed adjustment sensor positive
7 - Free
9 - Free
14 - Free
15 - Free
3 8150 Positive after key for air flow meter
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Diagnostic connector Figure 194

Near the positive terminal of the battery there is a diagnostic
connector. It is fastened by 2 screws to a special bracket fitted
on the body and access to it is gained by unscrewing the
protective cap; suitably connected to the diagnostic system
(IWT, MODUS), it allows quick identification of the cause of
faults in the various electronic devices.
The table on the following page shows the correspondence
between the various electronic systems and the connector
pins referring to them.
NOTE The connector shown is seen from the pin side.
The diagnosis connector on F1A engine vehicles is located on

the conveyor unit lower party on the passenger side.
85620
38-PIN DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR
9
3 16
22
29
1 35
4 38
10
17
23 36
30
8621
38-POLE DIAGNOSIS TAKEOFF DENTIFICATION OF THE PINS OF THE 38-PIN

DIAGNOSTIC CONNECTOR
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004
Diagnostic connector pin description table
System Pin Function
EDC/EGR/Methane 1∗ L
2 K
ABS/EBD/ABD 3 L
4 K
Air Bag/Retarder 6 K
Tachometer (connector A cell 2 instrument cluster) 8 K
Supply +15/A services 11 Input
Immobilizer/Central door locking/Alarm 12 K
Climate control system 13 L
14 K
Self-levelling suspension 15 L
16 K
Engine timing signal (connector B pin 28 EDC control unit) 23∗ -
Engine timing earth (battery -) 24 Screening
Supply +30 27 Battery +V
Engine rpm 28 RPM
Vehicle speed 29 -
Earth 30 -
(*) In vehicles equipped with F1 engine and EDC 16 electronic control unit, diagnosis connector pins 1 and 23 are free.
Pin 21/22 CAN line
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

High-pressure pump (F1A engine) The amount of fuel to be sent to the pump is set by pressure
regulator (7).
This pump is similar to the 8140 engine one.
The pressure regulator stops fuel inflow to the pump based
It differs in Rail line pressure, modulated at between 250 and
on PWM input from the centre.
1600 bars by the electronic centre by acting on the pressure
regulator electro valve and is not provided with a 3rd pump During pump compression, fuel reaches a pressure level
cutout electro valve (78015). sufficient to open the pressure valve to common rail (2), and
Pump (3) is oriented on the pump shaft cam.
(5).
Figure 196
1
7
85846
2
7
3
5 6
72597
1. Rail delivery output - 2. Rail delivery valve - 3. Pplunger - 4. Pump shaft - 5. Plunger supply duct - 6. Pressure regulator
supply duct - 7. Pressure regulator - 8. High-pressure pump - 9. Mechanic feed pump - A. To the tank - B. Return from
hydraulic accumulator (rail) - C. Fuel filter return - D. Delivery to hydraulic accumulator (rail) - E. From the tank
- F. Return from injectors.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

F1C ENGINE
Figure 197
*** *
**
87246
1. Injectors - 2. Common-Rail pressure sensor - 3. Pre-heating glow plugs - 4. Air temperature sensor - 5. Pre-heated
diesel oil filter - 6. Diesel oil temperature sensor - 7. High pressure sensor - 8. Pre-heating glow plugs central unit -
9. Sectioning by cab cable - 10. Pre-heating central unit positive - 11. Fuse - 12. Central unit - 13. Engine r.p.m. sensor -
14. Water temperature sensor for EDC - 15. Camshaft r.p.m. sensor - *. Water temperature transmitter for thermometer -
**. Oil filter clogged sensor - ***. Engine oil level sensor
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Injection cable F1C (.14 - .17)

Figure 198
with .17 (VGT)

*
90164
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Connection between cab/bonnet cable and injection cable
Figure 199
8587
I 8588
8159
8159
5577 5577 5000
8150 0077 0077 8150
9990 0000 0000 9990
8589
Cable colour
Ref. Function
code
1 5577 Heated diesel oil filter positive
2 8150 Pre-heating central unit (pin 86)
3 - -
4 1310 Pre-heating central unit (pin-D1)
I 5 1311 Pre-heating central unit (pin-ST)
6 0000 Pre-heating central unit earth (pin-31)
7 - -
8 0077 Heated diesel oil filter earth
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

R.p.m. / timing sensors
Figure 200
88056
1. R.p.m. sensor - 2. Phonic wheel on drive shaft - 3. Timing sensor - 4. Phonic wheel on camshaft
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Timing sensor (stroke)
Figure 201
88264
88267
1. Phonic wheel on camshaft - 2. Identification slots - 3. Sensor
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

RPM sensor Figure 203

A phonic wheel is fitted on the drive shaft. As the sensor
detects existing teeth passing, it provides the central unit with
the signal that is necessary to determine engine r.p.m.'s.
The variation of the signal generated by the lack of some teeth
(synchronisation gap) occurring at each drive shaft turn is the
reference signal which enables the central unit to detect the
lead of the pair of pistons 1-4 with respect to PMS.
This signal is also used by the control unit to detect the engine
rotation speed, the duration of injection and to control the
rev counter.
87792
Phonic wheel mounting
Figure 204
Figure 202
87793
1. Phonic wheel
0003319t
TECHNICAL VIEW OF THE SOUND WHEEL AND

SENSOR
1. Sound wheel - 2. Sensor
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 205 RPM sensor

These are inductive sensors.
The flywheel sensor (48035) is connected at pins 27 and 12
Timing sensor
A semiconductor layer, immersed in a magnetic field and
through which current flows, generates a potential difference
(called Hall voltage) at its ends.
If current intensity remains constant, the generated voltage
depends only on the magnetic field strength: periodical
variation of field strength is enough to obtain a modulated
electric signal.
RPM SENSOR AND CONNECTION CABLE
The smooth portion of the phonic wheel (distributing shaft
pulley) covers, while moving, the sensor, thus blocking the
Figure 206 magnetic field with resulting low output signal.
On the contrary, the sensor generates a high signal next to
the openings and when a magnetic field is available.
Phase sensor signals are acquired, and the engine position is
recognized according to the sequence of the phonic wheel
notches.
The mounting function makes it possible to identify signal
errors and interferences (if any).
The resulting signal is supplied to the processor that controls
the injection system.
The sensor (48042) is connected to the central unit at pins
A20/50/11.
SENSOR CONNECTOR AND WIRING DIRAGRAM
Figure 207
2
3 1
85712
TIMING SENSOR
1. Earth - 2. Signal output - 3. Power supply positive
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

High-pressure pump The amount of fuel to be sent to the pump is set by pressure
regulator (7).
Pressure delivered to the rail is modulated between 250 and
1600 bars by the electronic central unit by operating on the The pressure regulator stops fuel inflow to the pump based
solenoid valve of pressure regulator. on PWM input from the centre.
Pump (3) is oriented on the pump shaft cam. During pump compression, fuel reaches a pressure level
sufficient to open the pressure valve to common rail (2), and
(5).
Figure 208
B–B
88072
1. Output for rail pressure - 2. Rail pressure valve - 3. Pump - 4. Pump shaft - 5. Pump supply conduit - 6. Pressure
regulator supply conduit - 7. Pressure regulator - 8. High pressure pump - 9. Fuel input connection from filter - 10. Fuel
output connection to filter support - 11. Fuel input connection from centre heat exchanger - 12. Fuel output connection
from mechanical pump to filter - 13. Supply mehanical pump
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Pressure regulator When solenoid (1) is not activated, the magnetic core is
moved to its rest position by preload spring (6).
When the engine control centre pilots the pressure
regulator via the PWM signal, solenoid (1) is activated, which In these conditions, cylinder (3) is in a position to offer
in its turn generates movement of magnetic core (2). maximum fuel passage cross-section.
Core movement causes cylinder (3) axial displacement by Control electro valve 78013 is connected to centre
fuel delivery partialization. connector A pins 19 and 49.
Figure 209
003386t
4
1 1
2 2
3
5
3 6
4
6
75574 75575
1. Solenoid - 2. Magnetic core - 3. Cylinder - 4. Fuel input - 5. Fuel output - 6. Preloiad spring - 7. Connector
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Rail (pressure accumulator) F1C - high-pressure pump operation

The hydraulic accumulator is mounted in the cylinder head - electro injector opening.
on the side opposite aspiration.
On hydraulic accumulator there is located the fuel pressure
By its volume, it damps fuel pressure oscillations owing to: sensor.
Figure 210
88418
1. Rail - 2. Pressure sensor
Pressure sensor
Fitted to a rail end, it measures fuel pressure present to the purpose of determining existing fuel pressure. Pressure value is used
to control pressure and determine injection electric control duration (85157).
It is connected to the central unit at pins A 8/43/28. It is fed at 5 V.
Figure 211
VOLTAGE
4.8V
4.5V
0.5V
0.2V Minimum
0 bar PRESSURE 1500 bar
PRESSURE LIMITER OPERATING GRAPH
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 212 Air delivery gauge with EGR

Used in the EGR version to replace the one mounted on the
engine aspiration manifold.
The gauge is of the heated film type and is located o their
aspiration conduit between the turbine and the air filter.
The gauge contains the aspired air temperature sensor.
It is connected to the central unit on connector "A".
Pin 1 sensor - Pin A37 - temperature signal
Pin 2 sensor - Power supply (+15)
Pin 3 sensor - Pin A44 - mass
Pin 4 sensor - Pin A29 - reference voltage
Pin 5 sensor - Pin A42 - pressure signal
* If present
003333t
GAUGE
1. Connector - 2. Gauge body - 3. Air input grid
The operating principle is based on a heated membrane

inserted in a measurement canal through which air to the
Figure 213 engine flows.
The hot film membrane is kept at a constant temperature
some 120 °C above incoming air level by the heating resistor.
The air mass traversing the measurement canal tends to
subtract heat from the membrane so current must cross the
resistor to maintain constant film temperature.
Current absorbed is proportional to the air mass flowing to
the engine and is measured with a Wheatstone bridge and the
signal is forwarded to the electronic centre.
003334t
TECHNICAL VIEW OF GAUGE CONNECTOR
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Air temperature/pressure sensor Figure 214

(without EGR)
This component incorporates a temperature sensor and a
pressure sensor (85156).
It is fitted on the engine intake manifold and measures the
maximum flow rate of the intake air which is used to
accurately calculate the amount of fuel to be injected at each
cycle.
It is connected to the central unit on connector "A".
Pin 1 sensor - Pin A23 - earth -
Pin 2 sensor - Pin A53 - temperature signal
Pin 3 sensor - Pin A13 - 5V - supply -
Pin 4 sensor - Pin A40 - 0 ÷ 5V
pressure signal
Course of sensor in relation to the temperature
8660
- 40 °C 48.50 kOhm AIR FLOW METER
- 20 °C 15.67 kOhm
0 °C 5.86 kOhm Figure 215
20 °C 2.50 kOhm
40 °C 1.17 kOhm
60 °C 0.59 kOhm
80 °C 0.32 kOhm
100 °C 0.18 kOhm
120 °C 0.11 kOhm
Course of sensor in relation to the pressure:
See graph opposite.
AIR FLOW METER CONNECTION
Figure 216
VOLTAGE
4.65V
0.4V
0.2 bar ABSOLUTE PRESSURE 2.5 bar
AIR FLOW METER OPERATING GRAPH
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 217 Atmospheric pressure sensor

This is integrated inside the control unit.
It measures the atmospheric pressure to correct the flow rate
in relation to the altitude.
Engine coolant temperature sensor

This is an NTC sensor located on the thermostat box.
It detects the temperature of the coolant fluid to give the
control unit information about the engine temperature
conditions.
unit.
Course of the sensor in relation to the temperature:
- 40°C 48.30 kOhm
COURSE OF SENSOR RESISTANCE IN RELATION TO - 20°C 15.46 kOhm
TEMPERATURE
Ą Ą0°C 5.89 kOhm
Ą 20°C 2.50 kOhm
Ą 40°C 1.17 kOhm
Figure 218
Ą 60°C 0.59 kOhm
Ą 80°C 0.32 kOhm
100°C 0.19 kOhm
120°C 0.11 kOhm
Fuel temperature sensor

This is an NTC sensor located on the fuel filter.
It detects the temperature of the fuel to give the control unit
information about the fuel oil temperature conditions.
unit.
It is exactly the same as the engine coolant temperature
sensor.
TECHNICAL VIEW OF ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Figure 220
Figure 219
NTC
003324t
LOCATION OF ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

SENSOR
WIRING DIAGRAM 1. EDC signal - 2. Signal instrument panel
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Fuel filter
Cartridge degree of filtering: 5 micron
Differential operating pressure (obstruction indicator): 0.6 bar
The fuel temperature sent by the sensor to the electronic injection control unit allows very accurate calculation of the flow rate
of the fuel to be injected in the cylinders.
It is located in a fairly accessible position in the left front part of the engine compartment.
1. Actuated by ECU via relay with fuel temperature below 3°C.
2. Filtering element
3. Shows presence of water through a warning lamp on instrument panel.
4. Differential pressure sensor calibrated at 0,6 bar : any clogging is shown by warning lamp
5. It is a NTC sensor connected to EDC for fuel temperature reading enabling electronic control to calculate the amount of
diesel oil to be injected into the cylinders.
6. Installed on filter support for excess fuel return to tank.
Figure 221
1 3
2 4
003312t
1. Clogged filter sensor Ć 2. Fuel temperature sensor Ć 3. Water sensor Ć 4. Heater
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 222 Brake pedal switches

On brake pedal there are two switches; an N.C. (53565) is
directly connected to the central unit at pins K17-K80. It
provides signals (voltages) in order to warn the central unit
about occurred braking.
Second switch 53501 N.A. provides a voltage for turning on
stop lights.
003326t
1. Brake pedal switches
Figure 223 Clutch pedal switch

An N.C. switch connected to electronic centre pin K58 is
mounted on the clutch pedal (42374).
The clutch pedal actuated signal" is used by the centre to
identify gear condition selected and gear shifts.
In absence of the pedal pressed switch signal, the centre
disenables the Cruise Control function.
003327t
1. Clutch pedal switch
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Injectors Figure 224

The solenoid valve controls the lift of the atomiser needle.
On the fuel inlet union a filter protects the injector for
impurities. The injector is constructively the same as
conventional ones, except that there is no needle return
spring.
Access to the injectors is gained by releasing the side
soundproof cover from the cylinder head. The fuel recovery
pipe has a quick coupling.
The injector comprises two parts:
- actuator - atomiser composed of pressure rod (1), pin
(2) and nozzle (3)
- control solenoid valve comprising a coil (4) and drive
valve (5).
10
1st phase: rest position
The coil (4) is not activated and the shutter (6) is in the closed 13
position.
The same fuel pressure acts in both the control area (7) and
in the pressure chamber (8), but as the shutter (6) is closed, 9
4
the needle (2) cannot be raised.
2nd phase: start of injection
11
The coil (4) is energised and causes the shutter (6) to move 5
upwards. 6
The fuel of the control volume (9) flows towards the backflow 14
duct (10) causing a drop in the pressure in the control area 7
(7). 12
At the same time, the pressure of the fuel in the pressure
chamber (8) causes the needle (2) to rise, resulting in fuel 12 1
injection to the cylinder.
3rd phase: end of injection
The coil (4) is not activated and makes the shutter (6) return
to the closed position, which re-creates a balance of forces
that makes the needle (2) return to the closed position and
consequently end injection. 15
Injectors (78247)
The solenoid valve is of the N.C. type. 2
The injectors are connected individually to the control unit at
the following pins: 8
- A1 / A46 cylinder 3 injector 3
INJECTOR WIRING DIAGRAM AND CROSS SECTION

1. Pressure rod - 2. Needle - 3. Nozzle - 4. Coil - 5. Pilot
valve - 6. ball shutter - 7. control area - 8. pressure
chamber - 9. Control volume - 10. Backflow duct -
11. Control duct - 12. Supply duct - 13. Electrical
connection - 14. High pressure fuel inlet - 15. Spring
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Electromagnetic junction fan Engine coolant temperature

The fan is provided with an electromagnetic junction Activated at over 96 °C and deactivated at under 84 °C
monitored by the electronic centre pin A39 that activated
Over supply air temperature
the junction remote control switch, to optimise water
cooling. Activated at over 75 °C and deactivated at under 65 °C
The electrical fan remote control switch is activated or Fuel temperature
deactivated by the centre according to the temperature of: Activated at over 20 °C and deactivated at under 10 °C
- the coolant
- over supply air
- the fuel
Figure 225
88064
ELECTROMAGNETIC JUNCTION TECHNICAL VIEW

1. Coil - 2. Connector
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

CLIMATE CONTROL - manually:

fan speed
General compressor on/off
The function of the system is to automatically or manually outside air inlet/re-circulation
control the temperature required in the cab. MAX DEF function (defrosting);
According to the set required temperature the system - totally manually (through bowden cables):
controls: distribution of air flows to the air vents.
- automatically:
air vent temperature
fan speed (continuous changing)
Figure 226
000250t
AIR FLOW DISTRIBUTION INSIDE THE CAB
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Operating logic The control unit carries out and sets certain functions to
obtain adaptation of the temperature of the cab to the one
A special electronic control unit controls automatic system
required depending on the requests received and the
operation checking the various parameters in order to
temperature conditions detected.
provide the comfort required in the cab.
Figure 227
1 2 3 4
11 12 5
TEMP – kml
6
3 9
16
22
29
1 35
4 38
10
17 36
23
30
10
6A
7
000251t
9 8
CLIMATE CONTROL ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT CONNECTIONS

1. Controls on dashboard: inside temperature sensor, re-circulation switch, "eco" switch, fan control potentiometer -
2. Outside temperature sensor - 3. Evaporator sensor - 4. Blown air sensor - 5. Digital display - 6. Fan electronic control
module - 6A. Fan - 7. Compressor - 8. Gear motor for re-circulation function - 9. Air mixing gear motor -
10. Diagnostic connector - 11. EDC-EGR control unit - 12. Climate control electronic control unit
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Air distribution knob Figure 228

A. Face area vents
B. Face and floor area vents
C. Floor area vents
D. Floor and windscreen area vents
E. Windscreen area vents
C
B D
A E
000252t
DETAIL OF AIR DISTRIBUTION KNOB
Figure 229
1 2 3
4
000241t
VENTILATION AND HEATING CONTROLS ASSEMBLY

1. Temperature adjustment knob - 2. Fan speed control knob - 3. Air distribution knob - 4. Outside air inlet or re-circulation
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 230 Air distribution knob with climate control system
A. Face area vents

B. Face and floor area vents
C C. Floor area vents
D. Floor and windscreen area vents
E. Windscreen area vents
F. Max def" function
B
D
A E
F
000254t
DETAIL OF AIR DISTRIBUTION KNOB
Figure 231
1 2 3
6 5 4
00025et
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM CONTROLS ASSEMBLY

1. Knob for setting required temperature - 2. Fan speed control knob - 3. Air distribution knob - 4. Eco" function switch -
5. inside temperature sensor - 6. Re-circulation knob
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Setting the required temperature Figure 232

To set the required temperature, turn the corresponding
knob (Figure 232) to the 18 °C - 30 °C range.
This knob is connected to a potentiometer which detects the
different angular positions and transmits a signal to the
There are fifteen different positions (one per degree
centigrade) with two extremes LO" and HI" which
correspond respectively to the coldest and warmest
positions.
000255t
KNOB FOR SETTING REQUIRED TEMPERATURE
Setting the fan speed

Figure 233
To set the required fan speed, turn the corresponding knob
(Figure 233) to the 0 to 4 range.
This knob is connected to a potentiometer which detects the
different angular positions and transmits a signal to the
There are six different positions, four of which are set
manually (1, 2, 3, and 4), one for no air flow (0) and an
automatic one controlled by the electronic control unit
where the system itself selects the most suitable air flow to
reach and/or maintain the required temperature (AUTO).
000256t
KNOB FOR SETTING FAN SPEED
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Auto" function In the MAX DEF" mode this function is cut off regardless
With the ventilation control knob in the AUTO" position, of the position of the switch.
the control unit will be able to control:
MAX DEF" function
- The air temperature at the vents. The engagement of this function is completely manual and
- Fan speed. is obtained turning the air distribution clockwise as far as the
MAX DEF" position.
Function 0" (OFF)
The control unit will be informed of this request by the
With the ventilation control knob in the 0" position, the closing of a special N.O. microswitch in the rear part of the
control unit acts as follows: knob.
- No air flow (fan off). The engagement of this function involves:
- Mixing stopped in the previous position. - Maximum air flow, regardless of the position of the
- Re-circulation on. knob.
- Compressor off. - Air distribution towards the windscreen through
bowden cables.
- MAX DEF" function cut off if in progress.
- Mixing with the highest heat available (memorising the
ECO" function last position of the motor before leaving the adjustment
The engagement of this function is completely manual and state).
is obtained through the special switch which makes it - Outside air inlet, regardless of the position of the
possible to disengage the compressor electromagnetic re-circulation button.
clutch.
- Compressor on, regardless of the position of the ECO
Compressor control is however linked to other parameters, button.
namely:
Switching this function off the gear motor moves back to the
- Outside temperature ( > 5 °C ON" ) position memorised previously if the temperature
- Evaporator temperature ( > 4 °C ON", < 3.5 °C adjustment knob is not at LO" or HI".
OFF" ) If this function is already selected when the ignition key is
- Coolant fluid system pressure (min. 3.5 bar, max. 28 bar) turned on, no position will be memorised, and switching it
off, the adjustment procedure will be started with the mixing
- EDC or EGR control unit (in versions where applicable). gear motor in the HI" condition.
Re-circulation" function
The engagement of this function is completely manual and
is obtained through the special switch which makes it
possible to shut off the outside air inlet.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281


This automatically controls the system monitoring the thermodynamic parameters in order to provide the suitable climate
(temperature and humidity) required by the driver.
It is located on the lower part of the passenger's side duct unit.
Figure 234
A B
000257t
Connector Pin Function

1 Signal from treated air temperature sensor
2 Signal from required temperature potentiometer
3 Signal from ventilation control potentiometer
4 Earth
5 Positive from ECO" switch
6 Positive from microswitch for MAX DEF" function
A
7 Signal earth
8 Supply (+15/A)
9 5 V supply for ventilation, temperature and air mixing potentiometers
10 Line L for 38-pin diagnostic connector pin 13
11 Line K for 38-pin diagnostic connector pin 14
12 Positive from switch for re-circulation
1 Positive (0 to 8 V) for fan electronic control module (0 to 6 V)
2 Serial line for digital display (instrument cluster pin B 11")
3 Signal from evaporator temperature sensor
4 Reference voltage from air mixing motor (0 to 5 V)
6 Signal from outside temperature sensor
7 Signal from inside temperature sensor
8 Negative for fan electronic control module
B
10 Supply (0 to 12 V) for re-circulation gear motor (+12 V for switching on re-circulation)
11 Supply (0 to 12 V) for re-circulation gear motor (+12 V for switching on re-circulation)
12 Key-operated positive supply
13 Positive for compressor control relay
14 Supply (0 to 12V) for air mixing gear motor (+12V with HI" function)
15 Supply (0 to 12V) for air mixing gear motor (+12V with LO" function)
16 Reference voltage from electronic fan control module (0 to 12 V)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 235 Outside air temperature sensor

This is an NTC sensor on the left wing mirror (Figure 235) for
both types of drive.
The resistance at 25 °C is 10 kOhm.
Operating range between - 30 °C and + 50 °C.
It is connected to pin 6 connector B of the control unit.
8665
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Inside temperature sensor

This is an NTC sensor located on the climate control module (Figure 237) between the two Re-circulation" and ECO"
switches.
It is ventilated and contains a motor/fan so that the temperature reading is not affected by stagnating air inside the dashboard
which is not realistic.
The resistance is 2.2 kOhm at 25 °C
Operating range between + 5 °C and + 45 °C
The motor A, fan B and sensor C are a single part and are connected to the wiring by a single connector at pin 12.
Figure 236
A B C
000260t
Pin Function
1 Positive for motor
2 Negative for motor
3 Signal earth
4 Sensor signal for control unit (pin 7 connector B)
5 Positive from microswitch for MAX DEF" function to control unit (pin 6 connector A)
6 Ċ
7 Positive from ECO" switch to control unit (pin 5 connector A)
8 Earth
9 +15/A supply
10 +15/A supply
11 Negative for lighting pictograms
12 Positive from re-circulation switch to control unit (pin 12 connector A)
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 237 Blown air temperature sensor

This is an NTC sensor positioned inside the distributor unit
upstream of the air distribution ports to the various vents.
The resistance at 25 °C is 10 kOhm.
Operating range between 0 °C and - 80 °C
It is connected to pin 1 connector A of the control unit.
Evaporator temperature sensor

This is an NTC sensor positioned inside the distributor unit
and it is fitted directly on the evaporator. It causes switching
on (>4 °C) and switching off (>3.5Ă°C) of the compressor
electromagnetic clutch. The resistance at 25 °C is 10 kOhm.
Operating range between 0 °C and +25 °C.
Required temperature potentiometer

This is a potentiometer connected to the required
temperature setting knob on the climate control panel.
It detects the various angular positions (Figure 238) and
transmits a signal to the electronic control unit for a total of
fifteen different positions (one per degree centigrade) two of
which are the extremes HI" and LO" which correspond
respectively to a request for the coldest and warmest
positions.
000255t
It is supplied by the control unit at 5V.
Resistances R1 to R16 are approx. 700 Ohm.
Resistance R17 is approx. 1.1 Mohm
The total resistance R is approx. 11 kOhm.
It is connected to pin 2 and 9 connector A of the control unit.
REQUIRED TEMPERATURE SETTING KNOB
Figure 238
A B C
000265t
POTENTIOMETER POSITION DETECTION LAYOUT
A. Signal earth (ms7) - B. Signal to control unit pin 2 connector A - C. positive from control unit pin 9 connector A
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Ventilation control potentiometer Figure 239

This is a potentiometer connected to the ventilation control
knob positioned on the climate control panel.
It detects the various angular positions (Figure 240) and
transmits a signal to the electronic control unit for a total of
six different positions, four of which are manual flows (1, 2, 3,
and 4), one no air flow and one automatic (AUTO).
It is supplied by the control unit at 5 V.
The resistance R1 to R7 are approx. 1.5 kOhm.
Resistance R8 is approx. 1.1 Mohm.
The total resistance R is approx. 10.5 kOhm.
It is connected to pins 3 and 9 connector A of the control unit.
000256t
VENTILATION CONTROL KNOB
Figure 240
A B C
000266t
POTENTIOMETER POSITION DETECTION LAYOUT

A. Signal earth (ms7) - B. signal to control unit pin 3
connector A - C. Positive from control unit pin 9
connector A
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 241 Electronic fan control module

This is an electronic circuit inside the distributor unit near the
fan (Figure 241) and it adjusts the fan speed.
It is driven by the control unit with a voltage of between o and
5 Volt.
It drives the fans with a voltage of 0 to 12 Volt.
It is connected to pins 1 and 16 connector B of the control
unit.
The graph (Figure 243) represents the air flow rate in relation
to the control voltage from the control unit.
LOCATION OF FAN ELECTRONIC CONTROL

MODULE
Figure 242
A
B
000268t
ELECTRONIC FAN CONTROL MODULE

CONNECTIONS
A. Electronic fan control module - B. Electronic climate
control unit - C. Fan motor
Figure 243
000269t
GRAPH OF AIR FLOW RATE IN RELATION TO

VOLTAGE
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Air mixing gear motor

The gear motor formed of a motor and potentiometer is positioned inside the distributor unit and acts on the port that sends
or does not send the flow of incoming air onto the heater radiator to be able to adjust the required temperature.
The potentiometer detects the actual position of the mixing port and informs the control unit of its position. The control unit
reaches the two extreme positions, which correspond to the request for the coldest position LO" and the warmest position
HI" inverting the polarity on pins 14 and 15 of connector B of the control unit.
+ 15 / - 14 for LO" function
- 15 / + 14 for HI" function.
Motor
This is supplied by the control unit at 12 V. It is connected to the control unit on pins 14 and 15 of connector B of the control
unit. Loadless absorption is ≤ 60 mA, in D.C. it is ≤ 380 mA.
Potentiometer
It is supplied by the control unit at 5 V. The resistance is 4.7 kOhm. It is connected to the control unit on pins 7 and 9 connector
A and on pin 4 connector B of the control unit.
Figure 244
8669
Pin Cable colour Function

1 White-Blue Positive (5 V) for potentiometer from pin 9 connector A of the control unit
2 Grey-Black Reference voltage (0 to 5 V) from pin 4 connector B of the control unit
3 Black Signal earth
4 Yellow-Green Supply (0 to 12 V) for motor from pin 15 connector B of the control unit
5 - -
6 Blue-Red Supply (0 to 12 V) for motor from pin 14 connector B of the control unit
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Re-circulation gear motor

The gear motor is located on the front part of the distributor unit and acts on the air inlet port.
The control unit opens or closes this port to control air inlet from outside or re-circulation inverting the polarity on pins 10 and
11 of connector B of the control unit.
+ 11 / - 10 to switch on re-circulation
- 10 / + 11 for outside air inlet.
There are no intermediate positions. It is supplied by the control unit at 12 V. It is connected to the control unit on pins 10 and
11 connector B of the control unit. Loadless absorption is ≤ 60 mA, in D.C. it is ≤ 380 mA.
Figure 245
1 3
8668

1 Blue-Red Supply (0/12 V) from pin 11 connector B of the control unit
3 Brown Supply (0/12 V) from pin 10 connector B of the control unit
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Compressor Figure 246

This is fitted on the left-hand side of the engine and it is a
NIPPONDENSO SCROLL 08.
The fluid used is Freon R 134A".
The quantity of fluid is 720 grams.
The type of oil used is solely ND Oil 08.
The quantity of oil is 80 grams.
000274t
COMPRESSOR
Figure 247
Safety pressure switches
These are fitted directly on the dryer filter (Figure 248).
The minimum A" and maximum B" pressure switches make
it possible to keep the pressure constant in the system
between a minimum of 2 bar and a maximum of 27 bar, while A B
the average set at 19 bar is used to switch on the condenser
fan.
C
1 3 4 2
8666
PRESSURE SWITCH UNIT WIRING DIAGRAM

A. Mnimum = 2 bar - B. Maximum = 27 bar -
C. Average = 19 bar
Figure 248
8666a
PRESSURE SWITCH UNIT ON DRYER FILTER
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 249 SYSTEM SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

Through suitable control logic the control unit is able to
memorise and display a series of faults (present and/or
A B C intermittent) that may occur to the system.
In the event of these faults the control unit still continues
controlling the system replacing the abnormal values detected
with suitable recovery" values which ensure minimal
operation of the system.
As a fault arises, the control unit shows the wording Error
Cli" on the display on the instrument cluster.
- For preliminary information it is possible to show any
faults on the display on the instrument cluster following
000276t a precise procedure.
- For complete more thorough diagnostics it is however
CLIMATE CONTROLS ASSEMBLY necessary to use the diagnostic tools available to the
A. Required temperature setting knob service network such as MODUS.
B. Speed control knob
C. Air distribution knob Diagnostics through blink code
To find out which is the component concerned, proceed as
Figure 250
follows:
Move the temperature setting knob to the HI" position (Ref.
30 / 15 A Figure 249).
Move the fan control knob to the 0" position (Ref. B
Figure 249).
Move the air distribution knob to the MAX DEF" position
(Ref. C Figure 249)
Engage the ignition switch (Figure 250) at the services
position (+15).
Within 10 seconds, operate the fan control knob (Figure 250)
with the following sequence:
0" ⇒ AUTO" ⇒ 0" ⇒ AUTO" ⇒ 0".
At this point the display on the instrument cluster
(Figure 251) displays the error code. If more than one error
is present, they are displayed every 3 seconds.
000278t
IGNITION SWITCH AND FAN SPEED CONTROL

KNOB SETTING
Figure 251
Error
Cli ⇒ 54
000279t
DISPLAY ON INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Blink codes
The table below shows the different error codes that may appear on the display on the instrument cluster instead of CLI" during
diagnostics.
Figure 252
Error
Cli ⇒ 54
000279t
Codice Description
14 Short circuit or open circuit of blown air temperature sensor
32 Short circuit towards earth of outside temperature sensor
34 Short circuit or open circuit of outside air temperature sensor
42 Short circuit towards earth of inside temperature sensor
44 Short circuit or open circuit of inside air temperature sensor
52 Short circuit towards earth of evaporator temperature sensor
54 Short circuit or open circuit of evaporator temperature sensor
65 Air mixing gear motor failure
82 Short circuit towards earth of required temperature potentiometer
84 Short circuit or open circuit of required temperature potentiometer
92 Short circuit towards earth of ventilation control potentiometer
94 Short circuit or open circuit of ventilation control potentiometer
B2 Short circuit towards earth of air mixing potentiometer signal
B4 Short circuit or open circuit of air mixing potentiometer signal
D5 Fan electronic control module failure
E2 Short circuit towards earth of pin 9 of connector A of control unit for supplying potentiometers
E3 Short circuit towards positive of pin 9 of connector A of control unit for supplying potentiometers
F6 Supply voltage over maximum limit
F7 Supply voltage below minimum limit
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

AIR BAG
General
The air bag is a passive safety device comprising one or two cushions which, in the event of a head-on crash, inflate automatically
setting themselves between the body of the occupants and the front structures of the cab.
The system is always integrated by seat belts with pretensioner, which are controlled by the air bag control unit, in the event
of head-on crashes.
The system does not cut in for front crashes at low speed, side crash, overturning or crashes from behind.
NOTE The air bag is complementary to the use of the seat belts and not in replacement of them.
Inflation of the bags without the restraint of the belts compromises the safety of the driver and passengers.
The system components are connected to one another and with the rest of the electric system through a special harness, that
can be easily recognised as it has a yellow sheath which is connected to the cab/bonnet cable by a 6-cell connector.
Figure 253
A B
C 9
3 16 22 E
29
1 35
4 38
10
17 23 36
30
8546
8621
F G H
000287t
AIR BAG SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Driver's air bag module - B. Passenger's air bag module - C. 38-pin diagnostic connector - D. Electronic control unit -
E. Air bag failure warning light on instrument cluster - F. Driver's reel with pretentioner - G. Centre reel with pretensioner
- H. Passenger's side reel with pretensioner.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Operation deployed bags and the inside of the vehicle may be covered
The air bag system consists of a cushion which inflates with dust: this may irritate the skin and eyes. In the case of
instantly contained in a special recess in the centre of the exposure, wash with neutral soap and water.
steering wheel for the driver and in the dashboard for the two
passengers.
In the event of a head-on crash a deceleration sensor inside
the air bag control unit activates the pretensioners and the NOTE Turning the ignition switch to MAR, the air bag failure
instantaneous inflating device of the cushion or cushions warning light turns on for four seconds as system
which act as protective barrier between the body of the self-diagnostics takes place.
occupants and the vehicle structure. Immediately afterwards
the driver's air bag and, if requested, the passenger's air bag
deflate.
Deployment of the air bag system produces heat and a small Each time the system is activated, the control unit keeps the
amount of powder. This powder is not harmful and does not failure warning light on the instrument cluster on and it will
cause fire. In addition the surface of the be necessary to change the whole system (control unit, belts
and pretensioners, bags and harness).
The system does not require any maintenance or checks.
Figure 254
A B C D E F
L K J I H G 8556
LOCATION OF AIR BAG SYSTEM COMPONENTS AND CABLE
A. 38-pin connector for diagnostics - B. Air bag failure warning light - C. Cock spring - D. Driver's air bag module -
E. Connection between cab/bonnet cable and air bag cable - F. Passenger's air bag module - G. Passenger's reel with
pretensioner - H. Centre reel with pretensioner - I. Air bag earth - J. electronic control unit - K. driver's reel with
pretensioner - L. relay/fuse holder support
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Rules of safety to be followed for operations on vehicles

fitted with the air bag system supplied to us by the supplier. NOTE The assembly or disassembly of components may
ONLY be carried out by competent and authorised
personnel.
The following rules must absolutely be followed The failure to follow the instructions given below may
! when doing any work concerning vehicles fitted with involve unwanted activation of the system, personal
safety system with air bag. injury or unnecessary system repair. IT IS STRICTLY
PROHIBITED TO DISASSEMBLE AIR BAG
MODULES STRIPPING THEIR COMPONENTS.
Preliminary rules
Remember that air bag modules are devices to be

! handled with care. Their use, transport and storage All the system components have been specifically designed
are ruled by the following procedures. to work on vehicles of a specific brand and type. Therefore,
air bags cannot be adapted, re-used or installed on other
vehicles than the one for which they have been designed and
manufactured.
Before starting any body repair work, welding, work requiring
the removal of air bags or of the control unit, it is necessary
to: NOTE Any attempt to re-use, adapt or install them on a
- move the ignition key to STOP" and remove it different type of vehicle may cause serious or lethal
harm to the occupants of the vehicle in the event of
- always disconnect the battery, i.e.: disconnect the two a crash.
terminals from their post and isolate them taping
appropriately
- wait for at least 10 minutes before proceeding
- disconnect the control unit connector.
Store the modules with the cover upwards in a key-lockable
metal cabinet. The cabinet, to be used for this purpose only,
must not be used for storing other types of material, especially
if inflammable.
All the connectors used and wired on air bag modules contain
a short circuit clip. Up to the moment in which the air bag
modules are connected to an appropriate source of energy,
there is no possibility of undue activation of the units.
A system component not activated during an accident is to
be considered still active".
Therefore, undeployed components to be removed from
vehicles (due to faults, guarantee expiry or other causes) must
be returned to the special centre through the procedure
described below.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Operations after an accident Painting work

No particular rules of safety are to be followed for painting
NOTE If any component of the safety system is damaged work followed by oven drying, as the modules and
following an accident, it should be replaced. pretensioners have been designed in such a way that they will
Do not attempt to repair the control unit, clock not be damaged heating the outer surfaces of the vehicle
spring or air bag modules. with normal paint drying systems.
It is prohibited to use naked flames near the modules.
All electronic control units (including the air bag system)
should always be removed if their temperature in certain
Accidents with or without deployment of the air bag device environments may reach or exceed 85 °C.
Some system components should be inspected whether the
system has been activated or not. These components are:
- steering column;
Health hazards
- steering column support;
The precautions to be taken when handling deployed air
- electronic control unit and modules retaining area; bags are the following:
- clock spring; - use protective polyethylene gloves and safety goggles;
- dashboard (in the passenger's air bag area). - after touching triggered air bags, wash your hands and
The component must be replaced in the presence of the parts of the body exposed with soap and water.
distortion, breakage and flexure.
Accidents with the deployment of the air bag device
If the vehicle has undergone a head-on crash involving the Effects of over-exposure
total deployment of the system, the following components
must be replaced: There is no potential hazard of exposure to the propellants
as the system is completely sealed.
- air bag modules;
The propellant mixture is in the solid state, therefore
- pretensioners; inhalation is impossible even in the event of breakage of the
- electronic control unit; gas generator cartridge.
- clock spring. Should any gas come out there is not health hazard.
The harness and connectors should be inspected for signs of Avoid any contact with the skin and do not swallow the
burns, melting of the outer insulation or damage due to propellant.
excessive heat. In the event of:
Any signs of damage on the clock spring in the control unit - contact with the skin wash immediately with soap and
retaining area and on the air bag modules call for the water;
replacement of the damaged components.
- contact with the eyes: wash immediately with running
water for at least 15 minutes;
- inhalation: take the person outdoors immediately;
- swallowing: induce vomit if the person is conscious.
Always call a doctor for all the above conditions.

!
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Rules of safety in handling air bag modules Any spare parts should be stored in their original packing and
temporary storage should follow the same procedure as for
Under normal conditions the driver's and passenger's air bag
are activated by the electronic triggering device during the an undeployed air bag removed from the vehicle, i.e. a
crash. The gas developed (mainly nitrogen) under these key-lockable metal cabinet must be used, especially for this
conditions is not harmful. purpose (metal, shock resistant cabinet with grilles to allow
natural ventilation inside). The cabinet must have special
Personnel carrying out operations on the device fitted on warning notices (DANGER EXPLOSIVES - NO NAKED
vehicles must absolutely adhere to the rules of safety given FLAMES - NOT TO BE OPENED BY UNAUTHORISED
below. PERSONS).
Personnel operating on these devices must be suitably trained
and follow the precautions given below:
- In open (exploded) air bag removal and replacement
Air bag module scrapping
operations handle only one air bag at a time and for
removal use polyethylene gloves and protective goggles. The air bag modules fitted on the vehicle must not be
scrapped with the vehicle itself, but removed beforehand and
- Always rest the air bag module with the opening lid and then deployed as described in the following pages.
pre-split groove facing upwards. Do not put anything on
top of this lid. Air bag units must not be scrapped without firstly deploying
them.
- Afterwards wash your hands carefully with neutral soap
and in the event of contact with the eyes of residual If the air bag module has not been activated during a crash,
powder, rinse immediately with running water. the device is to be considered as still charged.
- Before starting work on the system, disconnect the two All unexploded material MUST NOT BE ACTIVATED and
battery cables (firstly the negative one) isolate the should be sent to a specialised centre with the following
terminals with insulating tape and wait at least 10 minutes wording on the delivery note:
before proceeding. - AIR BAG DEVICE CONTAINING EXPLOSIVE
- The metal components of an air bag that has just been CHARGE TO BE DEACTIVATED
deployed are very hot. Avoid touching these The devices must absolutely be shipped in the same package
components for 20 minutes from the time of air bag in which the spares are received and if this is not available it
deployment. is possible to ask the SPARES division for the package only.
- Do not carry out repairs on air bag modules. Send all Clearly in the case of replacing air bag devices the original
faulty modules to the supplier. Do not heat the air bag packing should be kept intact for sending the undeployed
module for example by welding, hammering, drilling, device.
mechanical machining etc.
For FOREIGN MARKETS follow local regulations.
- Never install on the vehicle air bags that have been
dropped or show signs of any type of damage.
- It is prohibited to keep air bags together with inflammable
material or fuel.
- The gas generators must not come into contact with
acids, greases and heavy metals. Contact with these The failure to follow the procedures listed here may
substances may cause the formation of poisonous, ! cause undue activation of the air bag units and
harmful gas or explosive compounds. personal injury. Undeployed air bag units must NOT
be disposed of through the usual refuse disposal
- Never use naked flames near air bag devices and system channels. Undeployed air bag units contain harmful
components. substances for the health and may cause personal
injury if the sealed container which contains them is
damaged during disposal.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Rules of safety in handling pretensioners

In the event of a head-on crash, the driver's and passenger's After every crash in which the pretensioner has been
pretensioners are activated an instant before the air bag ! activated, the belt is unserviceable and must be
modules. replaced.
The personnel that intervenes on the devices must be suitably

trained and observe the following precautions:
Scrapping pretensioners
- When handling activated pretensioners, i.e. when the Undeployed pretensioners (not fitted on the vehicle) to be
propellant has already been triggered, use protective scrapped must firstly be deployed; those not activated but
gloves and goggles. fitted on the vehicle must be removed and not scrapped
- At the end of operations wash your hands carefully with with the vehicle.
neutral soap and in the event of contact of residual If the pretensioner was not activated during a crash, the
powder with the eyes, rinse immediately with running device is to be considered as still active; proceed as
water. described i this manual.
- Disconnect the two battery cables (firstly the negative
one) isolate the terminals with insulating tape and wait at
least 10 minutes before proceeding.
- During activation the pretensioner develops heat; it is
therefore necessary to wait at least 10 minutes after
deployment, before touching them.
- During transport or handling, pretensioners should be
protected from shocks or falling; pretensioners that have
been knocked or dropped must not be used and must be
returned to the supplier stating the reason.
- Pretensioners should not be carried by the belt.
- Pretensioners must be protected from sparks and naked
flames; they should not contact surfaces for over 6 hours
with temperatures above 100 ºC .
- The gas generator propellant that is not burnt is
inflammable, therefore, the parts of the generator should
never be taken to pieces, damaged or tampered with.
- It is prohibited to store pretensioners with inflammable
materials or fuel.
- The gas generators must not come into contact with
acids, greases and heavy metals. Contact with these
substances may cause the formation of poisonous,
harmful gas or explosive compounds.
- Belts with pretensioners may only be stored in
key-lockable places or cabinets, ventilated and away from
naked flames and sources of heat.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Operations on system components Removing or scrapping an air bag module that

At the end of every operation on the system, it must be has not been deployed from a reparable
checked using Modus, I.W.T. or other diagnostic tools. vehicle
During assembly, the air bag components are labelled with a Do not cut cables or tamper with the connector
sticker with a removable part stating the date of installation between the vehicle harness and the air bag module.
of the system and components. The removable part is !
The connector contains a safety circuit.
detached and the information on it is filed together with the
system check report supplied by Modus, by the workshop that
installed the components.
After 10 years from installation, unless the components are
replaced before that time, a new air bag system (cable and If the connector is cut or removed from the air bag unit, the
safety device is disabled and this could cause unforeseen
components) should be installed. As mentioned previously,
the data concerning the components and the date of system activation with serious consequences for the physical
installation are to be filed. integrity of people.
Air bag systems have a reserve power unit in the control unit.
Removing and scrapping an activated air bag This must be deactivated disconnecting the two battery
module and pretensioner from a vehicle terminals and waiting for at least 10 minutes before doing any
work on any components of the air bag.
Always wear gloves and safety goggles for handling an When handling an air bag module, always keep the bag and
activated air bag or pretensioner. Wash the hands and outer cover away from the body. When positioning an active
exposed skin immediately with neutral soap and water after air bag on a bench or other surface, always place the bag and
handling the components of an air bag module or its cover upwards, not on the resting surface and away from
pretensioner. In the case of exposure to secondary products, people. Never put any object near an active air bag as it
immediately rinse the eyes with running water. The failure to would become a bullet in the event of deployment.
comply with these instructions may result in injury.
To remove and scrap an already activated air bag module and
pretensioner:
1. Follow the instructions given in this manual for removing
activated air bag module and pretensioners.
Always keep active, undamaged, air bag modules and
2. Disconnect the air bag module and pretensioner pretensioners in a cool, dry, locked and safe place.
!
mechanical fastenings. Do not expose to naked flames or temperatures
3. Disconnect the component connector from the air bag above 150 ºC. Do not cut, drill, braze weld an air bag
harness. module or its components with electric current.
Never expose an air bag module or pretensioner to
4. Place the air bag module and pretensioner in a special electric currents. The failure to comply with these
sealed polythene bag. instructions may damage the unit, cause fire, cause
5. Send to the authorised collection/disposal centre. unforeseen deployment and serious harm to
persons.
6. Dispose of, recycle or scrap deployed air bag modules
and pretensioners in the appropriate manner.
The residues left by combustion of the propellant require
Active, damaged air bag modules and pretensioners (e.g.
some consideration. They are mostly concentrated in the
breakage of the electrical connection) must be kept away
generator body or in small quantities in the bag. These
from corrosive or oxidising substances. The failure to comply
residues may contain copper or chloride (e.g. potassium
with these instructions may cause fire, and/or serious harm
chloride). If the propellant is based on sodium azide or
to persons.
potassium nitrate, the combustion residues are highly alkaline
and corrosive. Always wear appropriate protection for the
eyes and skin. Deployed air bags should always be stored in
dry, suitably ventilated places.
NOTE The air bag modules and pretensioners have an
energy reserve. This decive gives the electric pulse
needed to deploy the bag if the battery or cables are
damaged during the crash before the sensor activates
the gas generator.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 255 Deployment of an air bag
A Remote activation
General instructions
1. The deployment procedure can be carried out in a
suitably identified and enclosed open area away from
potentially inflammable materials, fluids or other
substances and from persons. Place the air bag module on
a firm surface and clamp it closely.
C1 2. Clean the area on which the module is placed from
materials and bits (glass, instruments, pieces, etc.) which
could be thrown out during deployment.
Lb
3. Make sure that connector C2 is disconnected from the
remote deployment device (10 m).
4. Connect the electrical connector C1 specified by the
C2 vehicle manufacturer to the air bag module
5. Connect connector C2 to the remote deployment
device.
L 6. Connect the remote deployment device to a 12 V circuit
or equivalent device.
7. Make sure all persons are under shelter.
C2 8. Wear accident prevention goggles and protective
clothing.
9. Press the double deployment button
B 10. After deploying an air bag module, let it cool before
touching it (about 20 min.).
11. Dispose of, recycle or scrap activated air bag modules
according to the cases, as described in the corresponding
chapters.
+12V 8663
REMOTE DEPLOYMENT OF AIR BAG MODULES

C1 = air bag module connector
C2 = Connector to remote deployment device
(connector for air bag with circuit clip; counterparts with
male pins on air bag side)
Lb = bridle length - approx. 1 m
L = general cable, safety distance 10 m
A. Enclosed area
B. Remote deployment device
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Deployment of air bag modules and electronic 13. Press the double activation button to deploy all the air
pretensioners still on board of irreparable bag modules and pretensioners at the same time.
vehicles 14. After deploying the air bag modules and pretensioners
This procedure is followed when the vehicle with one or always let them cool before touching them (about 20
more active air bags needs to be scrapped. This procedure min.).
applies whether the air bag and/or pretensioner system is still
intact or not. 15. Once the modules and pretensioners have been
deployed the vehicle can be scrapped - by squashing
It is advisable to deploy the explosive charges on the vehicle
directly connecting the electric connector of the single or crushing - and/or recycled depending on the cases.
module to the remote deployment system.
Figure 256
The deployment procedure must be carried out
! away from other persons in a suitably identified ABP ABG
area. Check that no type of object has been left
near the modules and pretensioners and make sure C1 C1
that there are no inflammable liquids in the vicinity.
No-one should remain on board during Lb Lb
deployment and remember to close the vehicle
doors. Personnel should stay under shelter (e.g.
behind a wall, vehicle, etc.) to protect themselves C2 C2
from any objects that may be thrown. Leave the
generators and modules to cool after deployment Lb
(wait at least 20 min.). The failure to follow these C1 C2
instructions may result in serious physical harm.
PTG
General instructions
1. Follow all the WARNINGS, PRECAUTIONS and safety
instructions given in this manual.
2. Take the vehicle to the area foreseen.
3. Remove all materials and bits (glass, instruments, pieces,
etc.) around the air bag cover and check that there are L
no inflammable fluids in the immediate vicinity.
4. Disconnect the two battery cables (firstly the negative C2
one) and wait at least 10 minutes before proceeding.
5. Use a connection bridle (L = approx. 1 m) with specific
terminal connector for electrical connection with the
module to be deployed.
6. Reach the electrical connection of the module in +12V
8664
question (air bag or pretensioner) following the
instructions given in this manual.
LAYOUT FOR DEPLOYING EXPLOSIVE CHARGES ON
7. Disconnect connector C1 of the air bag module or THE VEHICLE, SINGLE DEPLOYMENT
pretensioner.
8. Check that connector C2 is disconnected from the
ABG = driver's air bag
remote deployment device.
ABP = passenger's air bag
9. Connect electric connector C1 of the air bag module or C2 = connector to remote deployment device
pretensioner to the connection bridle of the remote C1 = specific connector to explosive charge
deployment device. L = general cable, safety distance 10 m
Lb = bridle length
10. Connect connector C2 to the remote deployment
PTG = driver's pretensioner
device.
A. Remote deployment device
11. Make people go to a safe place.
12. Connect the remote deployment device to a 12 V circuit
or equivalent device.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 257 Electronic control unit

The electronic control unit is located on the floor at the side
of the driver's seat between the gearshift lever and the parking
brake lever; it is supplied at 12 Volt by a key-operated device,
but it is still in a condition to be able to work for about 200
msec after a power cut off.
This is possible due to the presence of a buffer condenser
inside which accumulates electric energy for normal
operation of the control unit and generate the signal for
triggering the explosive capsule.
This way system operation is guaranteed if the crash causes
a power system failure (for example damage or breakage of
the battery, power cable cut-off etc.).
The control unit must be directed with the arrow

! printed on the sticker facing the vehicle direction of
travel. This is absolutely necessary as it determines
8547
the direction in which the deceleration sensor reads
BATTERY CABLE INSULATION the values for defining the crash condition and thus
triggering the air bag.
Figure 258
The electronic control unit should always be replaced after a

crash that causes deployment of the complete system (air bag
and pretensioners).
To remove the control unit:
- follow the rules of safety
- disconnect the battery cables (firstly the negative one
then the positive) and isolate them taping the terminals
- wait at least ten minutes before proceeding
- remove the cover under which the control unit is to be
found
8548
- using a small screwdriver on the catch of the connector
REMOVING THE CONNECTOR FROM THE that locks the connector fastening lever, turn the latter
CONTROL UNIT outwards
Figure 259 - disconnect the connector from the control unit
- slacken the three screws fastening the control unit to the
floor.
8549
REMOVING THE CONTROL UNIT
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

One-connector electronic control unit pin-out
Figure 260
000283t
Pin Function Pin Function
1 Positive for driver's pretensioner 26 Driver's pretensioner short circuit

2 Negative for driver's pretensioner 27 Driver's pretensioner short circuit
3 Positive for passenger's pretensioner 28 Passenger's pretensioner short circuit
4 Negative for passenger's pretensioner 29 Passenger's pretensioner short circuit
5 Key-operated positive supply 30 Ċ
6 Earth 31 Earth short circuit
7 Ċ 32 Short circuit
8 Ċ 33 Ċ
9 Line k for diagnostics 34 Ċ
10 Positive for driver's bag 35 Driver's bag short circuit
11 Negative for driver's bag 36 Driver's bag short circuit
12 Ċ 37 Ċ
13 Positive for passenger's bag 38 Passenger's bag short circuit
14 Negative for passenger's bag 39 Passenger's bag short circuit
15 Ċ 40 Failure warning light
16 Positive for centre pretensioner 41 Centre pretensioner short circuit
17 Negative for centre pretensioner 42 Centre pretensioner short circuit
18 Ċ 43 Ċ
19 Ċ 44 Ċ
20 Ċ 45 Ċ
21 Ċ 46 Ċ
22 Ċ 47 Ċ
23 Ċ 48 Ċ
24 Earth for diagnostics 49 Ċ
25 Ċ 50 Ċ
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

The figure shows the components of the AIRBAG system with two-connector control unit. This type of control unit shall be
fitted on the vehicles in the future to replace the one-connector control unit.
Figure 261
A B
C 9
3 16 22 E
29
1 35
4 38
10 73790
17 23 36
30
8621
F G H
000287t
AIR BAG SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Driver's air bag module - B. Passenger's air bag module - C. 38-pin diagnostic connector - D. Electronic control unit -
E. Air bag failure warning light on instrument cluster - F. Driver's reel with pretentioner - G. Centre reel with pretensioner
- H. Passenger's side reel with pretensioner
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

The two-connector control unit operates within a temperature range of -40 a +85°C with a maximum inclination angle
tolerance at installation of ±4°. The control unit weight is 200g max and features software version 4.4 and hardware version 11.0.
The following figure represents a perspective view of the electronic control unit with two connectors (A and B).
Figure 262
A
B
73792
PERSPECTIVE VIEW OF THE ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT WITH TWO CONNECTORS

A. Black - B. Grey
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ECU pin-out to the two connectors
Figure 263
A B
73791
GREY CONNECTOR (A) BLACK CONNECTOR (B)

Pin Function Pin Function
1 Ground 1 -
2 +15 power supply 2 -
3 K-line for diagnosis 3 -
4 - 4 -
5 - 5 -
6 - 6 -
7 - 7 -
8 - 8 -
9 - 9 -
10 Warning lamp 10 -
11 - 11 -
12 - 12 -
13 - 13 Driver side pre-tensioner positive
14 - 14 Driver side pre-tensioner negative
15 - 15 Front passenger seat pre-tensioner negative
16 - 16 Front passenger seat pre-tensioner positive
17 - 17 -
18 - 18 -
19 - 19 -
20 - 20 -
21 Driver front AIR-BAG positive 21 Front center pre-tensioner positive
22 Driver front AIR-BAG negative 22 Front center pre-tensioner negative
23 Passenger front AIR-BAG negative 23 -
24 Passenger front AIR-BAG positive 24 -
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 264 Drivers air bag module

The module is at the centre of the steering wheel.
It mainly comprises the following:
- a bag inflation device, containing the triggering device and
the explosive charge
- a synthetic fibre bag, folded in a special wrapping
- a plastic cover which at the centre and sides has
pre-established splitting lines which allow the bag out.
- A plate that fastens the module to the steering wheel
with two screws
Inflation of the bag takes place through the pre-established
controlled expansion of the volume of inert harmless gas
(ARGON), contained in a special module, after the heating
caused by a charge of solid propellant.
The rear part of the bag has suitably-sized holes which deflate
8557
the bag immediately after inflation.
AIR BAG MODULE To remove the air bag module, proceed as follows:
Figure 265 - follow the rules of safety
then the positive) and isolate them taping the terminals;
- wait at least ten minutes before proceeding;
- slacken the two screws in the rear part of the steering
wheel; to gain access to each screw, turn the steering
wheel to be able to always work from the part of the
upper steering column cover;
- lift the module enough to disconnect the connector in its
centre;
- remove the module from the steering wheel.
8558
AIR BAG MODULE FASTENING SCREWS After removal undeployed air bags must be stored
Figure 266 ! in a special, key-lockable cabinet with the plate
rested on the shelf.
8559
AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL
A. Connector
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Clock spring Figure 267

The clock spring is a device fitted on the stalk unit ensuring
electrical continuity between the driver's module and the air
bag cable; it is formed of a container from which two cables
lead. One is connected to the air bag cable and one to the
driver's module. The container is composed of two overlaid
plates; the lower one is fastened to the stalk unit by three
screws and the upper one is made integral with the steering
wheel through two appendixes on its upper section.
Inside the two plates, the connection cables are wound in a
coil to be able to allow the cables to follow the movements
of the steering wheel, The clock spring also has a mechanism
that automatically prevents it from turning when it is removed
from the steering wheel; this consists in preventing the upper
plate, no longer restrained, from turning freely causing
unwinding or winding of the cables, with the possibility of
breakage.
When the steering wheel is assembled the device locks 8560
automatically. REMOVING THE STEERING WHEEL FASTENING

To remove the clock spring, proceed as follows: NUTS
- remove the driver's air bag module as described on the Figure 268
previous page
- align the wheels and keep them in this position
throughout the whole operation
- slacken the nut fastening the steering wheel to the
steering column
- still with the wheels aligned, mark the position between
the steering wheel hub and the steering column
- remove the steering wheel taking care not to withdraw
the clock spring cable
8561
REFERENCE BETWEEN STEERING WHEEL HUB AND

STEERING COLUMN
Make sure that removing the steering wheel cause Figure 269
! the upper plate of the clock spring to raise. If the
upper plate turns, it must be locked taking it
outwards; a click will be heard during locking.
8562
REMOVING THE STEERING WHEEL
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 270 - remove the steering column lower half cover slackening
the three fastening screws (Figure 270)
- working from inside, remove the upper steering column
half cover slackening the two fastening screws
- cut the strap that fastens the clock spring cable to the
steering column and disconnect the connector of this
cable from the air bag cable
- slacken the three screws fastening the clock spring to the
stalk unit and remove it.
It is necessary to remove the clock spring without

! making it turn, holding the upper plate in place with
a strap or adhesive tape.
8563
REMOVING THE STEERING COLUMN COVER HALVES

To refit the clock spring, proceed as follows:
- make sure the wheels are aligned
Figure 271 - if replacement of the clock spring is not necessary, refit
it, after removing the adhesive tape or strap put on
previously, without making the upper plate turn, then
tighten the three fastening screws
- in the case of fitting a new clock device, after fastening it
to the stalk unit, tear the plastic tab to lock the upper plate
and check that it does not turn
- connect the air bag cable connector to the clock spring
cable and fasten the latter to the steering column using
a suitable clamp
- assemble the two steering column halves fastening them
on the support plate with their screws
- carefully insert the cable to be connected to the driver's
air bag module through the slot provided on the steering
wheel hub
8564 - assemble the steering wheel making the reference marks
made previously coincide.
REMOVING THE CLOCK SPRING
- Tighten the steering wheel fastening nut to the specified
torque.
Figure 272
Do not re-use the steering wheel fastening nut

! removed previously, replace it with a new one and
caulk it.
NOTE If the stalk unit is changed it must be replaced by

one inclusive of the clock spring.
8565
CLOCK SPRING
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Passenger's air bag module Figure 273

This module is fitted on the dashboard and it is fastened on
the body by a special bracket; the operating principle is the
same as for the driver's module, only the size of the bag differs,
as it has to protect two people.
To remove the air bag module, proceed as follows:
- slacken the two screws fastening the dashboard cover
- remove the dashboard cover in such a way as to
overcome the resistance of the snap button in the lower
part of the cover
- disconnect the module cable connector from the air bag
cable 8553
- slacken the four screws two on either side, that fasten the PASSENGER'S AIR BAG MODULE
module support bracket to the body and remove it.
Figure 274
NOTE If the passenger's air bag is not fitted as it is optional,

a specific resistance is fitted on the connector during
production to simulate the charge
(R = 2.15 Ohm ± 0.35)
8554
REMOVING THE DASHBOARD COVER
Figure 275
8555
REMOVING THE AIR BAG MODULE
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 276 Pretensioners

The pretensioner is an explosive device activated electrically
with a signal leading from the electronic control unit; it is an
integral part of the seat belt reel and forms a single component
with it which is fastened to the vehicle pillar. It comes into
action in the event of a crash of a certain entity, in order to
take up the unavoidable slack in the seat belts due to the
action of the weight of the body, keeping the body close to
the seat back.
After cutting in the belt remains locked meaning that the
device has been triggered.
Operating principle
The moment in which a determinate deceleration of the
vehicle takes place, the electronic sensor in the control unit
sends a signal which ignites the explosive charge (ref. A) of the
gas generator (detonator).
The combustion of the propellant (ref. B) develops a gas, the
pressure of which generates a force that pushes the rack and
REEL WITH PRETENSIONER pinion piston (ref. C) upwards.
Figure 277 The upward movement of the piston makes the gears turn
(ref. D) which reverse the direction of rotation of the belt
rewinding it a few centimetres.
D
C
NOTE The belt is unserviceable after every crash and needs

B to be changed.
A
- The charge for the driver's pretensioner is connected to
the control unit on pins 1/2.
- The charge for the passenger's pretensioner is connected
to the control unit on pins 3/4.
TECHNICAL VIEW OF REEL WITH PRETENSIONER
- The charge for the centre pretensioner is connected to
BEFORE DEPLOYMENT
the control unit on pins 16/17.
A. Explosive charge - B. Propellant - C. Rack and pinion
piston - D. Gears
Figure 278
TECHNICAL VIEW OF REEL WITH PRETENSIONER

AFTER DEPLOYMENT
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Driver's/passenger's pretensioner Figure 279
Do not use percussion screwing machines for the

! following operations on active pretensioners.
To remove the driver's or passenger's reel with pretensioner,

proceed as follows:
- slacken the screw fastening the tool kit under the seat
- slacken the seat fastening screw and remove it
- slacken the two screws fastening the step to the door 8550
pillar base
STEP FASTENING SCREW
- partially remove the door weatherstrip
- slacken the screw fastening the seat belt Figure 280
- remove the lower pillar trim overcoming the resistance
of the two snap buttons in the upper part of the trim
- disconnect the pretensioner connector from the air bag
cable (ref. A)
- connect the specific resistance on the air bag cable to
simulate the presence of the pretensioner; this is to
prevent the control unit from signalling a failure on the
system that does not exist if the ignition switch is
inadvertently turned to AVV or MAR.
- slacken the reel fastening screw (ref. B) and remove the
reel.
8551
REMOVING THE WEATHERSTRIP AND BELT FROM

THE PILLAR
Figure 281
8552
A
REMOVING THE REEL WITH PRETENSIONER
A. Connector - B. Fastening screw
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 282 Centre passenger's pretensioner
Do not use percussion screwing machines for the

! following operations on active pretensioners.
The centre passenger's reel with pretensioner has the same

operating principle as the other two reels. To remove it
proceed as follows:
- slacken the screw fastening the tool kit under the seat
8566
- slacken the seven screws fastening the seat
REMOVING THE TOOL KIT - disconnect the pretensioner connector from the air bag
cable
Figure 283
- remove the seat
- connect the specific resistance on the air bag cable to
simulate the presence of the pretensioner; this is to
prevent the control unit from signalling a failure on the
system that does not exist if the ignition switch is
inadvertently turned to AVV or MAR.
- slacken the three screws fastening the guard on the rear
part of the seat
- remove the guard
- slacken the reel and belt fastening screw, then remove the
reel with pretensioner
8567
REMOVING THE SEAT

8569
8568
REMOVING THE GUARD REMOVING THE REEL WITH PRETENSIONER
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

DOOR-BLOCKER WITH ANTI-THEFT PROTECTION

General information
The anti-theft protection is supplied with the door-blocker and consists of the following:
- a warning siren
- an (ultrasonic) electronic module for volumetric detection, including a LED for signalling that the anti-theft protection is ON
- an electronic central control unit (ECU) for the anti-theft/door-blocker, 433.92 MHz for the European market
- two remote-control keys.
When the anti-theft protection is activated/de-activated by means of the remote-control key, the doors (driver's and passenger's
doors and, for the van version, the side and rear doors) of the vehicle close/open simultaneously.
To complete the system, in addition to the components already mentioned above there are the following:
- switches and motors for closing/opening the doors.
- switch for signalling that the bonnet is being opened.
- switch on a switchboard for locking the rear door.
In addition, the electronic central control unit is connected to the immobiliser control unit, to the direction indicator switch
(indicator flashing lights) and to the 38-pin diagnostics connector (cell 12).
Figure 286
A B C D E F G
8572
M L K J I H
LOCATION OF COMPONENTS
A. Switch for signalling opening of the bonnet - B. Electronic central control unit (ecu) - C. Motor for closing/opening the
lock on the passenger-side door - D. Electronic module for volumetric detection and led for signalling that the anti-theft
protection is on - E. Motor for closing/opening lock on right-hand side door - F. Switch for signalling opening of rear door -
G. Motor for closing/opening lock on rear door - H. Switch for signalling opening of right-hand side door - I. Switch for
signalling opening of door on driver's side - J. Motor for closing/opening lock of door on driver's side - K. Switch for signalling
opening of door on passenger's side - L. Switch for blocking rear door - M. Self-powered siren
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

System components
Figure 287
Rear door
button
Driver Passenger RH side LH side Rear
Side doors
button
Driver
Passenger
Engine
Bonnet
50288
Ref. Function
1 Driver door lock/release motor

2 Passenger lock/release motor
3 RH door lock/release motor
4 LH door lock/release motor
5 Rear door lock/release motor
6 Rear door button
7 Side doors button
8 Driver/passenger doors button
9 Engine bonnet button
10 Siren
11 Remote control key
12 Injection system control unit
13 Volumetric detector electronic module
14 Tester connector
15 Direction indicator telltale
16 Electronic control unit
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Operation
When the push-button on the remote-control key is activated, this is signalled by the LED on the key itself, and a radio-frequency
(RF) signal is sent to the ECU. This signal controls closing of the doors by means of the motors, activates the volumetric sensor
installed in the ceiling-lamp inside the cab and signals that the anti-theft protection has been activated by causing the indicator
flashing lights to flash twice and the "anti-theft activated" LED to flash once. About ten seconds pass between the time when
the signal is sent to the ECU and when the system is actually active. During this period of time, the ECU checks that all the
necessary conditions (state of the doors, inside of the cab) for activating the anti-theft protection are met. Once the 10 seconds
have elapsed the system is active and is constantly checked by the ECU.
If the ECU does not find all the conditions required for correct activation of the system while it carries out the anti-theft activation
procedure (for example, if one of the doors is not closed), the state of the door will not be checked during the system monitoring
that the ECU carries out upon completion of the activation procedure. Once the door has been closed, this too will be checked
by the ECU, starting ten seconds from the time when it was closed.
The conditions in which the anti-theft protection switches on are the following:
- if the driver's/passsenger's doors are opened
- if the rear door is opened
- if the bonnet is opened
- if the side door(s) is(are) opened
- if the engine is switched on
- if the volumetric detection module is activated.
If any of the above conditions occur, the sound of the self-powered siren and the flashing of the indicator flashing lights for five
minutes will signal that the system has switched on.
In order to be able to open the doors and de-activate/switch off the anti-theft protection, it is necessary to press the push button
on the remote-control key again. The ECU will de-activate the anti-theft protection. The indicator flashing lights will flash once
and the signalling LED of the anti-theft protection will go off to confirm that it has been de-activated.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

240
Base - May 2004

B
C Figure 288
ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC SYSTEM
Arrangement of components
D
G F
50287
A. Engine bonnet switch - B. Volumetric detector electronic module - C. Door lock motor - D. Remote control key - E. Door switch - F. Electronic control unit
- G. Siren
DAILY
Print 603.93.281
MAIN COMPONENTS OF THE SYSTEM

Remote-control key
The electronic device controlling the anti-theft protection with the door-blocker can be mounted in the grip of the key or in
any suitable place for the remote-control function.
Features:
- transmission frequency 433.92 MHz
- transmission of combined code (fixed and variable)
- red LED for signalling transmission of the code
- 3V CR 2032 battery
- operation from -30 °C to +60 °C
- retention of the rolling-code" data (variable part of the combined code) in the memory of the microprocessor in the key
during replacement of the battery
- maximum power transmitted: 10 mW.
On pressing the push button in the key, all the doors will be opened or closed and the anti-theft protection will be activated
or de-activated. The red LED on the key will flash to signal transmission of the radio-frequency code to the ECU. If the pushbutton
is activated for a time exceeding 20 minutes, transmission of the code to the ECU will be broken off, in order to prevent the
battery of the remote-control key from going dead due to accidental activation of the push button.
As already stated, the remote-control key transmits a combined code (fixed and variable). The fixed code that is transmitted
is always the same for each individual key, while the second part changes each time the pushbutton is pressed.
The keys supplied are two. It is important that they should both follow the correct key-learning procedure by means of the IVECO
diagnostic tools with the +15 power supply on. The indicator flashing lights will flash once to signal that the code has been received
by the ECU.
If the remote-control key gets partly or totally damaged, with the +15 power supply on, the immobiliser will send a signal to
the ECU to de-activate it.
If the exchange of data between the transponder and the engine management is successfully completed, the immobiliser will send
a 500 msec ± 10 % message to the ECU. This signal will occur after 500 msec ± 10 % from when the +15 power supply is switched
on. If it is not, that is to say if the immobiliser signal does not fall within the range of values indicated above, the ECU will switch
on the anti-theft protection. The impulses generated by the immobiliser after repeated switching on of the +15 power supply
will be ignored.
Figure 289
50268
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Remote control key battery

The key supplied as standard contains a 3 volt type CR2032 lithium battery. Battery life is about one year, since Bosch guarantees
it for 50,000 working cycles at a temperature of between -30 °C to + 60 °C.
Batteries from competing brands can be easily found on the market, but the Bosch warranty is not valid unless only PANASONIC
batteries are used.
Replacing the battery
Battery replacement should not take longer than 3 minutes. When fitting the new battery pay attention to battery polarity.
If you fail to comply with the foregoing instructions the ROLLING CODE necessary to transmit the signal from the key to the
control unit will be deleted.
The ROLLING CODE can be reset by following the key synchronisation procedure.
Key synchronisation procedure
- introduce the key into the switch
- turn it to start
- press the remote control button
This procedure makes it possible to reset the ROLLING CODE
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Electronic central control unit (ECU)

The central control unit is located underneath the central dashboard. It controls both centralised closing/opening of the doors
and activation/de-activation of the anti-theft protection by means of the signal supplied to it by the remote-control key, with
the consequent switching on of the remote-control switches located inside the actual control unit.
If one of the remote-control switches should be blocked (working contact blocked) during operation, causing continuous
activation of the door-locking motor(s), the control unit will switch on remote-control switches that create bridges on the
remote-control switch in question, in order to avoid serious damage to the motor(s) concerned. Once normal operation of the
faulty remote-control switch is reinstated, then these remote-control switches will switch off.
The central unit is connected to the cable in the cab/bonnet by means of one 12-pin connector and one 28-pin connector. Each
central unit has a pin code, which is programmed at the end of the line test. This pin code will consist of 5 digits, each of which
will be a binary-coded decimal number from 0 to 9.
In addition, the ECU detects faults in the system, signalling the by causing the anti-theft signalling LED at the centre of the ceiling
light to flash. It is possible to identify two types of failure: minor and major. In the first case, with the +15 power supply on, the
LED will remain on without flashing, while in the second case, again with the +15 power supply on, the LED will flash. Major failures
are those concerning the ECU, and are caused by:
- an error in the ROM/RAM check sum
- an error in the EEPROM check sum
- remote-control switch with working contact blocked.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Technical view of the ECU

Figure 290
B A
50285
Pin out ECU

Connector Pin Function
1 Door-blocker on driver's and passenger's side

2 -
3 +15 power supply
4 -
5 Rear door-blocker from switch on dashboard
A
6 -
7 Side and rear door-blocker
8 Door-unblocker
9 +30 power supply
10 -
11 Earth
12 -
1B4 -
5 Siren
6 Power supply to led for signalling activation of the anti-theft protection
7 Earth
8B11 -
12 Immobiliser disabling
13 -
14 Switching on of LED signalling activation of the anti-theft protection
15 To switches for switching on the inside lights on driver's and passenger's side doors
B
16 To the switches for switching on the inside lights on the right-hand side doors
17 To the switches for switching on the inside lights on the rear door
18-19 -
20 To the switch signalling opening of the bonnet
21 To the 38-pin diagnostics connector (cell 12)
22 To the switch for switching on the inside lights on the left-had side door
23 Signal from electronic volumetric detection module
24 Switching on of indicator flashing lights
25B28 -
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Arrangement of the switches

Figure 291
50284
A. Volumetric detector electronic module - B. Rear door button - C. Buttons on front doors - D. Engine bonnet button
B
C
A
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Switches for signalling opening of doors and bonnet

These switches are the same, excluding the one for the bonnet, that controls switching on of the ceiling lights inside the cab and,
for the van version, the loading platform. They send the signal indicating the status of the doors and of the bonnet to the ECU.
Door-blocker/unblocker motors
Each door has its own motor for closing/opening the lock on the door.
Operation of the motor is enabled by switching the remote-control switches on the circuit card of the ECU on/off for a
pre-established period of time, programmable in the EEPROM of the ECY.
These motors can be activated in two different ways:
- by means of the pushbutton on the remote-control key (blocking/unblocking of all the doors)
- - by means of the switch on the switch panel (blocking/unblocking of the rear door only, in the van version).
With the +15 power supply on, operation of the motors by pressing the pushbutton on the remote-control key is not possible.
Activation of the motor of the rear door by means of the switch on the switch panel is possible, on the other hand, regardless
of the presence or otherwise of the +15 power supply.
Pinout of a door blocker/unblocker motor
Time
Pin Function V
required
Blocking +12V X750 sec.

1
Unblocking 0V X750 sec.
Blocking 0V X750 sec.

2
Unblocking +12V X750 sec.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 292
50283
A. Door opening button
B 50282
B. Engine bonnet switch
50281
C. Door lock/release button
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Electronic volumetric-detection module

This module carries out volumetric detection inside the cab, by means of the two sensors located on the sides of the ceiling-light
(A) inside the cab, starting from when the anti-theft protection is activated. It sends the data to the ECU. Any changes in the
state inside the cab due, for example, to the windows being smashed or an object being accidentally moved, will be transmitted
to the ECU, which will command the anti-theft protection to switch on.
The module includes a LED for signalling that the anti-theft protection has been switched on. This is also mounted in the
ceiling-light inside the cab (B), and in addition to the state of the anti-theft protection (active, inactive), it also signals that key
learning has been accomplished and any failures in the system.
Pin out
Pin Function
1 Power supply from ECU (connector B pin 6)
2 +30 power supply
3 Earth
4 Receiving and transmitting of serial data
5 Signal to ECU (connector B pin 23)
6 LED driver
Figure 293
50280
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Siren
The siren is located inside the engine compartment. It is self-powered by an internal battery that enables it to sound when it
is disconnected from the vehicle, and it must comply with specific requisites, such as supplying a value greater than or equal to
100 dB at a distance of 1 metre from the siren after 5 minutes of operation.
The batteries of the siren are recharged in the following ways:
- trickle-charging
- rapid charging
- charging after disconnecting the siren from the vehicle
Trickle-charging is always activated in order to compensate for the normally occurring loss of charge of the batteries. The
batteries will be charged by supplying a 12 mA current for one minute at intervals of one hour.
Rapid charging takes place for a duration of 14 hours with a current of 12 mA. This method is used when the siren is connected
for the first time, or when it is reconnected to the system following maintenance operations on the vehicle that require the battery
to be disconnected. Once the required time has elapsed, charging stops. This type of charging does not require the +15 power
supply to be on.
With the third type of charging, if the siren of the vehicle is disconnected while it is not sounding, the whole time for which it
remains disconnected will be the same required to recharge the batteries when it is connected to the system again. If, on the
other hand, the siren is disconnected after it has been triggered, when it has to be reconnected to the system the batteries will
be charged for 45 seconds for each second that the siren remained disconnected. This recharging process is only carried out
with the +15 power supply off. If the batteries are below the minimum charging level, they will be recharged, with the +15 power
supply on, for 14 hours at 12 mA.
Figure 294
Siren pin-out
Pin Function
1 +15 power supply
2 +30 power supply
3 Serial input/output signal
4 Earth
A B
A. Horn
B. Siren
50279
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Siren modes and states

Delivery mode/state
This mode indicates the state of the siren when it is delivered to IVECO. An acoustic signal emitted by the siren will signal its
activation when it is connected to the system.
Idle mode/state
This state indicates when the siren has been disconnected and its operating state has been blocked, implementing the siren service
mode described below. The siren is blocked in order to retain the charge of the batteries and its microprocessor is de-activated.
An acoustic signal produced by the siren will signal its activation when it is reconnected to the system.
Siren disabled state
The siren always goes into an idle state when it is connected to the vehicle on the IVECO production line. In addition, the siren
also goes into this state when the anti-theft protection is de-activated by the remote-control key.
Enabled state 1
This is the normal state of the siren, and it indicates that the anti-theft protection has not been activated and that the +15 power
supply is off. In this state, the siren can still trigger off an alarm if it is disconnected from the vehicle.
Enabled state 2
In this state, the anti-theft protection is activated. The siren has already received a serial activation command from the ECU. In
this state, if the siren is disconnected or the ECU detects a signal able to switch on the siren, this will be activated.
Alarm state 1
In this state the siren is on, however the ECU is not activated. The siren was activated because it was disconnected.
Alarm state 2
In this state the siren is on. The ECU is activated. The siren may have been caused to switch on by a signal from the ECU triggering
anti-theft protection or because it was disconnected from the battery of the vehicle.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ERROR CODES
Any faults and their causes are detected by the ECU and stored in it. There is a diagnostics system that enables them to be
identified, with the +15 power supply on, by detecting the number of times that the anti-theft signalling LED flashes. Correct
interpretation of the flashing will lead to identification of the number of the error code. In order to do this, it is necessary to know
that:
- the LED on for 1 second is equivalent to ten
- the LED on for 0.5 seconds is equivalent to one unit.
The time that passes between each time that the LED goes on and the next is 0.5 seconds. If two or more error codes should
be detected, the time for which the LED remains off would be 2 seconds.
The error codes are signalled, if the corresponding fault is present, once only and in ascending order. Then, once all the active
faults have been signalled, the LED will extinguish.
Figure 295
0.5 0.5
1 sec. sec. sec. 2 sec.
Led on
Led off error code 11 error code 12
8597
ERROR CODE SEQUENCE
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Error code table
Error
Type of improper functioning Fault detection Condition for detecting fault
code
Checksum error in the

Once for each time the +15
11 EEPROM of the ECU remote-control key code in the
power supply is turned on.
EEPROM of the ECU
Checksum error on activation of

RAM/ROM checksum error. the ECU.
12 ECU Remote-control switch with Each time the motor is
working contact blocked operated the working contact
blocks
No remote-control key
13 No key programmed Once every second
programmed in the ECY
No EEPROM PIN code

14 No PIN code programmed Once every second
programmed
Door-closing output signal Inccorrect door-closing output With remote-control switch on.
15
shorted to earth or battery+ signal Once every second
Low output with remote-control

Output signal inside cab shored to switch on. With remote-control switch on.
16
earth or battery + High output with remote-control Once every second
switch off
Low output with remote-control

Rear door output signal shorted to switch on. With remote-control switch on.
17
earth or battery+. High output with remote-control Once every second
switch off
Left direction indicator output signal Low output with remote-control

18 With remote-control switch on
to earth switch on
Right direction indicator output Low output with remote-control

19 With remote-control switch on
signal to earth switch on
Once every second.

Led output signal shorted to earch
20 Incorrect Led output signal For the 10 seconds required to
or battery+
activate the ECU
No response from ultrasonic No signal from ultrasonic For the 10 seconds required for
21
module module activation
No signal from siren in response to For the 10 seconds required for

22 No response from siren
ECU activation
For the 10 seconds required for

23 Siren batteries dead Serial message from siren
activation
For the 10 seconds required for

24 Siren self-test wrong Serial message from siren
activation
Rolling code transmitted in RF from

Rolling code of remote-control key
25 the remote-control key not On receiving the RF message
out of range
recognised by the EEPROM
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

AIR SUSPENSIONS ECAS

High-flexibility air suspension system with highly efficient vibration damping effect provided with self-adjusting feature that keeps
constant chassis-to-road height, regardless of the load carried by the vehicle. A special push-button allows to change
chassis-to-road surface distance, that is the height of the vehicle cargo compartment floor.
Besides the traditional advantages of any air suspension system, the ECAS system also allows:
- air consumption reduction
- prompt response to adjustment
- simple systems
- high safety
- complete system diagnosis.
The ECAS (Electronically Controlled Air Suspension) system automatically controls the vehicle air suspension system nominal
level.
The features described above are bound to special operating and safety conditions of the associated systems.
The ECAS electronic control unit automatically checks chassis level (height from road surface) by reading the real values supplied
by the sensors and comparing them to the rated values stored in the memory.
With any change of the vehicle trimming, the electronic control unit controls the electropneumatic units to bring the actual level
to the level set or previously memorized by the driver.
MODEL MOTOR ECAS VTB

29L .10 .11 .12 .14 X
35S .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .17 X
35C .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .17 X
40C .10 .11 .12 .13 X
45C .11 .13 X
50C .11 .13 .14 .17 X
60C .15 X
65C .15 .17 X
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

WABCO electronically controlled air suspensions (ECAS)

The system in figure is installed in the following vehicles:
29L - 35S.
Figure 296
SYSTEM OPERATING DIAGRAM
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Pin Description Component code

1 ECAS electronic control unit 86023
2 Chassis manual leveling control push-button 52090
3 Chassis lifting control push-button 53051
4 Chassis lowering control push-button 53052
5 ECAS pilot lamp 58713
6 Stop light switch 53501
7 Tachometer ć tachograph 40001 - 40011
8 RH air spring -
9 RH level sensor 40046
10 Hydraulic brake action compensator -
11 Brake action compensator actuator air cylinder -
12 LH level sensor 40046
13 LH air spring -
14 Electrocompressor unit 78233
15 RH chassis actuator solenoid valve -
16 LH chassis actuator solenoid valve -
17 Throttle valve -
18 Dryer filter -
19 Air spring relief solenoid valve -
20 One-way valve -
21 Compressor -
22 One-way valve -
23 Intake filter -
24 Compressor motor -
25 Motor relay -
26 Diagnostic socket 72008
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Vehicles with braking system without ABS
Figure 297
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓ ÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓ
000217t
1. ECAS warning lamp - 2. RH level sensor - 3. RH air spring - 4. Chassis lifting control push-button - 5. Chassis lowering
control push-button - 6. ECAS ECU - 7. Chassis leveling control push-button - 8. Hydraulic brake action compensator -
9. Brake action compensator air cylinder - 10. LH air spring - 11. Air supply unit - 12. LH level sensor -
13. Centralized diagnostic socket
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Vehicles with ABS system
Figure 298
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓ ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
ÓÓÓ
000217t
1. ECAS warning lamp - 2. RH level sensor - 3. RH air spring - 4. Chassis lifting control push-button - 5. Chassis lowering
control push-button - 6. ECAS ECU - 7. Manual chassis leveling control push-button - 8. LH air spring - 9. Air supply unit -
10. LH level sensor - 11. Centralized diagnostic socket.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Electronic Control Unit

The electronic control unit controls different chassis positions in accordance with the requests from the driver.
As the ignition key switch is turned to ON position, the electronic central unit runs a system check while the red warning lamp
on the dashboard panel comes on for about 2 seconds.
If any failure is detected, this warning lamp can stay on fixed for serious system failure or flashing for compressor failure due to
overtemperature.
The electronic control unit checks the level sensor at regular intervals in order to keep chassis level constant as required by the
driver, and operates the necessary compensation when a deviation of more than 3 counts is detected.
The compensation shall be operated with the following delay:
~ 1 sec. with vehicle still
~ 30 sec. with vehicle moving
If the level is not restored within a maximum time of 30 seconds from the beginning of the compensation, the control unit
memorizes a plausibility error and the warning lamp comes on fixed.
During braking, the electronic control unit detects the signal from the stop light switch and stops any chassis level automatic
adjustment.
If a difference of more than 4 counts is detected between RH and LH sensors with vehicle still, after a delay of about 8 seconds,
the control unit recognizes a step" condition and stores the data in memory, keeping the chassis level as it is.
Besides a blink code" option through the red warning lamp for preliminary diagnosis, the electronic control unit is provided
with an advanced self-diagnosis system capable to detect and memorize any failures, depending on the concurrent conditions,
including intermittent errors occurred in the system during operation and ensure a more appropriate and reliable servicing.
All interventions concerning diagnosis, programming, failures memory deletion, etc. can be performed by using available diagnosis
instrument.
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Electronic control unit pin out
Figure 299
000095t
Cable
Pin Function
colour code
1 Battery positive supply 7772
2 L" line to pin 15 of the 38-pole diagnostic connector 1194
3 - -
4 K" line to pin 16 of the 38-pole diagnostic connector 2294
5 - -
6 - -
7 - -
8 RH level sensor positive 5421
9 Ignition switch positive supply 8090
10 - -
11 (Positive to air reservoir solenoid valve supply) 9445
12 - -
13 Positive to LH chassis control solenoid valve 9425
14 - -
15 Positive to electric compressor control relay 9444
16 Positive from stop light switch 1363
17 - -
18 - -
19 Negative from chassis level push-button 8420
20 - -
21 - -
22 Vehicle speed signal 5411
23 - -
24 - -
25 LH level sensor positive 5422
26 Chassis lift/lower push-button communication line 8091
27 Negative 0000
28 - -
29 Positive to relief solenoid valve 9423
30 - -
31 Positive to RH chassis control solenoid valve 9424
32 - -
33 Negative for failure warning lamp 6008
34 - -
35 - -
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Level sensor Figure 300

The level sensor consists of a coil fastened to the chassis and
a piston (Figure 300).
The piston is moved inside the coil by the action of a cam and
a lever connected to the axle, this way varying the coil
inductance.
These variations shall be used by the electronic control unit
at the different stages of system operation.
000369t
LEVEL SENSOR
Figure 301
Here is shown the nominal characteristic curve of the sensor
as a function of the angle displacement of the lever.
000370t
OPERATING DIAGRAM
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 302 Pneumatic supply unit

This component produces, dries,supplies or discharges
suspension spring air.
000222t
INTERNAL COMPRESSED AIR DIAGRAM
Figure 303
Components of the air supply unit
1. Relief solenoid valve
2 3 2. Electrical motor control relay
3. Intake filter
1 4. RH chassis control solenoid valve
5. LH chassis control solenoid valve
6. Compressor
7. Drier filter
4 8. Compressor electrical motor
5 9. Electrical connector
9
6
7
8
000222t
SUPPLY UNIT
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Brake action compensator Figure 304

The vehicles not equipped with ABS / EBS / ABD system need
a system providing a better control of the braking action on
the rear wheels. This system includes an dual brake action 2
compensator and a brake action compensator pneumatic
actuator.
Depending on the load applied on the rear axle, as detected
by the pneumatic actuator, the brake action compensator
automatically adjust the braking torque applied to the axle by
the brakes.
The diagram shows the compensation ratio corresponding to
0.15 as a function air spring variations.
000372t
BRAKE ACTION COMPENSATOR UNIT

1. Dual brake action compensator
2. Pneumatic actuator for brake action compensator
Figure 305
000371t
OPERATION DIAGRAM
A. Hydraulic output pressure (bars) - B. Hydraulic control
pressure (bars) - C. Pneumatic control pressure (bars) -
D. Characteristic curve with 0.15 ratio (empy) -
E. 1:1 ratio (loaded) - F. Characteristic curve of pneumatic
pressure/load
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

A" Braking action

Figure 306
ÔÔÔÔ ÒÒÒÒ
Ö
ÖÖ Ö Ö ÖÒÒÒÒ
Ö
ÔÔÔÔ
ÖÖ ÒÒÒÒ
Ö Ö ÒÒÒÒ
Ö
ÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔ
ÕÛÕÕ
ÚÚ
Û
ÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔ
Û
Õ
ÚÚ
Û
ÕŠŠ
Õ
ÒÒ
Õ Ô
ŠŠÔ
ÕÕ
Õ
ÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔ 000219t
B" Braking action with empty vehicle

Figure 307
ÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔ
ÖÒÒÒÒ
Ö Ö ÒÒÒÒ
Ö
Ö Ö Ö Ö
ÔÔÔÔÒÒÒÒ
Ö ÒÒÒÒ
Ö
ÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔ
Û
Õ
ÚÚ
ÔÔÔÔ
Û
Õ
ÚÚÕÕ
ÕŠŠ
ÒÒ
Õ Ô
ÒÒÔ
ÕÕ
ÕŠŠ
Õ
ÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔ 000220t
C" Braking action with laden vehicle

Figure 308
ÔÔÔ
Ö ÒÒÒÒÒ
ÖÖ ÒÒÒÒ
ÖÖ
ÔÔÔ
Ö
ÖÖ
ÖÖ
ÒÒÒÒÒ
ÖÖ
ÖÖ ÖÖ
ÒÒÒÒ
ÖÖ
ÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔ
ÔÔÔÔÔ
Õ
ÚÚ
Û
ÔÔÔÔÔÛÕ
ÕÕ
ÒÒ
ŠŠ
Õ Ô
Õ
ÚÚ
Û
ÔÔÔÔÔÛÕÒÒÔ
ÕÕ
ŠŠ
Õ
ÔÔÔÔÔ 000221t
Print 603.93.281
ÔÔÔÔÔ Base - May 2004
Chassis lifting
This operation is allowed at a speed below 15 Km/h; as soon as this speed is exceeded, automatic chassis leveling is actuated.
Proceed as follow to lift the chassis:
- Press chassis lifting push-button and keep it pressed to enable the relay to close the switch and receive a 5A supply. Now,
the control unit commands the relay to start the compressor (6) electrical motor (2). Air is then aspirated through the filter
(3), compressed and delivered into the system via the one-way valve and the drying filter (7).
Simultaneously, the control unit starts solenoid valves 4" and 5" so that the compressed air is supplied to the suspension
air springs to lift the chassis.
During the entire operation, the red warning lamp on the dashboard panel shall flash to inform the driver that the chassis is off
trim.
The warning lamp shall keep flashing until the chassis is off normal trim.
Chassis lowering is stopped as the push-button is released while the chassis level reached is maintained.
The maximum height is set by level sensors according to the calibration data memorized in the electronic control unit.
Maximum lifting actuation time is 2 minutes to prevent preheats that could damage the electro compressor.
Figure 309
000224t
SYSTEM OPERATION DIAGRAM

1. Exhaust solenoid valve - 2. Electrical motor control relay - 3. Intake filter - 4. RH chassis control solenoid valve -
5. LH chassis control solenoid valve - 6. Compressor - 7. Dryer filter - 8. Compressor control electrical motor -
9. Electrical connector
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chassis lowering
This operation is allowed at a speed below 15 Km/h; as soon as this speed is exceeded, automatic chassis leveling is actuated.
Proceed as follow to lower the chassis:
- Press the lowering push-button and keep it pressed to enable the relay to send a signal to the control unit to energize solenoid
valves (4) and (5) and the exhaust valve (1).
The compressed air contained in the suspension air springs can flow back through the dryier filter 7" for cleaning and, as
imposed by the closed one-way valve, flow to the relief solenoid valve to be released in the atmosphere through the intake
filter.
During the entire operation, the red warning lamp on the dashboard panel shall flash to inform the driver that the chassis is off
trim.
The warning lamp shall keep flashing until the chassis is off normal trim.
Chassis lowering is stopped as the push-button is released while the chassis level reached is maintained.
The maximum height is set by level sensors according to the calibration data memorized in the electronic control unit.
Figure 310
000223t

5. LH chassis control solenoid valve - 6. Compressor - 7. Dryer filter - 8. Compressor control electrical motor -
9. Electrical connector
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chassis leveling
Chassis leveling can be achieved with vehicle moving at a speed below 15 Km/h by pressing the leveling push-button.
This way, the control unit shall start the lifting or lowering action until the normal height is reached and maintained in accordance
with the signals received from the level sensors and the calibration data stored in the control unit memory.
On achievement of the normal trim, the warning lamp on the dashboard panel shall stop flashing.
The same leveling shall be obtained automatically as the vehicle exceed the speed of 15 Km/h.
Figure 311
000363t

5. LH chassis control solenoid valve - 6. Compressor - 7. Dryer filter - 8. Compressor control electrical motor - 9. Electrical
connector
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

VB TECHNIEK PNEUMATIC SUSPENSIONS

The system illustrated is used in the following vehicles:
65C - 60C - 50C
Figure 312
004282t
OPERATION DIAGRAMS
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Pin Description
1 Electronic control unit
2 Manual mode actuation button
3 Lowering button
4 Lifting button
5 VBT signalling warning light
6 Tachograph
7 Electric motor control relays
8 Discharge solenoid valve (for washing)
9 Choking valve
10 Unidirectional discharge valve
11 Unidirection feed valve
12 Drier filter
13 Right-hand air spring
14 Pneumatic discharge valve
15 Compressor
16 Compressor actuation electric motor
17 Filter
18 Braking connector
19 Exhaust silencer
20 Exhaust solenoid valve
21 Left-hand air spring
22 Level sensor
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Vehicles with braking system without ABS
Figure 313
85725
1. VBT warning lamp - 2. Suspension control unit (ECU, pneumatic supply unit) - 3. Chassis lifting switch - 4. Chassis
lowering push-button - 5. Manual control button - 6. RH air spring - 7. Level sensor - 8. Pneumatic brake action
compensator - 9. Brake action compensator - 10. LH air spring
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Vehicles with ABS system
Figure 314
85724
1. VBT waring lamp - 2. Suspension control unit (ECU, pneumatic supply unit) - 3. Chassis lifting switch - 4. Chassis lowering
push-button - 5. Manual control button - 6. RH air spring - 7. Level sensor - 8. LH air spring
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Electronic Control Unit (35C - 40C - 45C)
The electronic control unit controls different chassis positions in accordance with the driver's requests.
As the ignition key switch is turned to ON position, the electronic central unit runs a system check while the red warning lamp
on the dashboard panel comes on for about 5 seconds.
If no failures are detected, this warning lamp shall turn off, otherwise an automatic blink code shall be started with the following
meaning:
Slow blinking - Electric compressor overload due to prolonged manual actuation.
Fast blinking - Electric compressor overload
Fixed on - Level sensor cable
Off - Supply failure
Dimmed light - Wrong button operation (simultaneous action) or button connecting cabling failure.
The control unit is fitted with a warning led 1" connected to the warning lamp on the dashboard panel, and a set of five
connectors 2" of which only 1, 3 and 5 are used.
Figure 315
000373t
Connector Pin Function Cable colour

1 Signal from level sensor White
2 Signal from level sensor Brown
3 Positive from level sensor Yellow
1
4 Negative from level sensor Green
5 - -
6 - -
1 Signal from lifting switch Grey
2 Negative for trim variators Green
3 Signal from lowering switch Brown
3
4 Negative for failure warning light Yellow
5 Key-controlled positive Pink
6 Signal from handbrake switch White
1 Electric compressor control remote-control switch positive White
2 Discharge solenoid valve control positive Yellow
3 Positive from battery Red
5
4 Negative from battery Black
5 - -
6 - -
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Electronic control unit (60C - 65C - 50C)
Figure 316
004283t

1 Pink +15
2 Yellow Warning light bulb
3 Green Button negative
4 White Signal from handbrake
5 Brown Lowering button
6 Grey Lifting button
7 - Free
8 - Free
9 - Free
10 - Free
11 - Free
12 Black Tachograph
13 White Signal from level sensor for lifting
14 Brown Signal from level sensor for lowering
15 Yellow Positive for level sensor
16 Green Negative for level sensor
17 Green Earth
18 Pink +30
19 Brown Discharge solenoid valve control
20 Grey Compressor relay 2 control
21 Yellow Discharge solenoid valve control
22 White Compressor relay 2 control
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Figure 317 Level sensor

In accordance to the chassis height from floor, the level sensor
shown sends the signals to start chassis leveling to the ECU.
It is connected to the control unit by means of four cables:
- White: Lifting signal
- Brown: Lowering signal
- Yellow: Positive
- Green: Negative
000374t
LEVEL SENSOR
Figure 318 Pneumatic supply unit

The function of this component is that of distributing or
discharging suspension spring air.
Shows the connection of its internal components of the
supply unit..
Components of the pneumatic supply unit
1 - Air spring relief solenoid valve
2 - Dryer filter
3 - Compressor
4 - Supply filter
5 - Electrical motor
6 - Relief pneumatic valve
7 - Muffler
000375t
PNEUMATIC SUPPLY UNIT
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Brake action compensator Figure 319

Those vehicles not equipped with ABS / EBS / ABD require
the installation of a system providing better braking action on
the rear wheels This system includes an dual brake action
compensator and a brake action compensator pneumatic
actuator.
Depending on the load applied on the rear axle, as detected
by the pneumatic actuator, the brake action compensator
automatically adjust the braking torque applied to the axle by
the brakes.
The correction ratio is calibrated at 0.25.
000376t
BRAKE ACTION COMPENSATION UNIT

1. Brake action compensator - 2. Pneumatic actuator for
brake action compensator
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ROTATING SLIDING DOOR

Description
The rotating sliding door consists of:
- Complete panel and door compartment frame
This aluminum extruded profile guarantees a rigid bearing structure to support all system components such as:
- access step;
- moving hinge;
- seals;
- two locks;
- the electronic center;
- door panel front lock pins;
- extension arm;
- compressed air sensitive edge (bus version only);
- motor unit.
Figure 320
73726
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Electronic center
The electronic center is located under the access step.
In addition to the motor reduction gear control, it also features a series of vehicle and door system communication inputs and
outputs. A tachometer signal reading system for the following purposes is provided to prevent the door from being opened with
the vehicle moving:
- to prevent the door from opening when the vehicle travels at over 5 Km/h;
- to generate a buzzer when the vehicle is moving and the door is open;
- for the absence of a tachometer signal involving the possibility of the door opening (after push button actuation) with the
vehicle moving.
Electrical features
Power 12V dc
Standćby absorption 20 ÷ 30 mA
Operating absorption 3.5 ÷ 5 mA
Operating temperature -30°C ÷ +60°C
Figure 321
73741
ECU LOCATION
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Electronic center pin-out

Pin Description
1A Free
2A Free
3A Tachometer signal
4A Open open/close push button
5A Centralized opening remote control input
6A Centralized opening remote control input
7A Free
8A Positive from battery
1B Free
2B Free
3B Positive input from key switch
4B Door open warning output
5B External emergency lock closed warning output
6B Door defect warning output
7B Free
8B Negative from battery
1C Free
2C Free
3C Free
4C Free
5C Free
6C Free
7C Ceiling light control output
8C Free
Figure 322
73740
ECU LOCATION
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Optical and sound warnings Figure 323

Component location on instrument panel:
1. Door open warning light.
2. Emergency handle lock
(yellow warning light).
3. Emergency handle lock activated
(bus yellow warning light).
4. Door open/close control push button.
72609
COMPONENT LOCATION ON INSTRUMENT PANEL
Figure 324
Sound device
This electronic center piloted device warns users of special
operating conditions, such as the vehicle moving with the
door open, for instance. 1
73739
BUZZER
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Description and operation

The open/close control is only activated with the vehicle moving, via the instrument panel push button.
If the vehicle is provided with a centralized closing system, door opening can be activated even with the vehicle stationary. In
this case, opening and closing must be limited to prevent discharging the vehicle battery.
Opening with the instrument panel push button

The operator controls automatic door opening by actuating the instrument panel push button.
Pressing the push button sends an electrical impulse required for mechanical electro magnetic induced lock release.
At release end, the lock on travel end warning loses the signal and starts the motor reduction gear that makes the door panel
rotate open and given visual warning of door open, with a warning light on the instrument panel.
Opening end is with the Complete Opening micro switch.
During door opening, a cam located on the lower part of the hinge and solidal with motor reduction gear rotation lowers the
access step to its use position.
Closing with the instrument panel push button

The operator controls automatic door closing by actuating the instrument panel push button.
Pressing the push button sends an electrical impulse to the motor reduction gear that completes its closing travel.
During closing a double obstacle detection system operating on motor ammeter measurement and adjustable via a timer on the
center is activated, another one is located on the compressed air sensitive edge of the two door compartment uprights.
Near door close a position reading sent to the tachometer on the door control motor disenables the ammeter controlled
sensitive edge to enable otherwise impossible door closing.
The compressed air sensitive edge is activated until receipt of door closed micro switch signal, which activates a signal switching
all center functions off.
When closing, the door enables rotation of the mobile step to its rest position with a return spring.
If the vehicle moves with the door open, its closing can be controlled with the push button even at speeds over 5 Km/h, in which
case the buzzer remains active (inclusive of the door open warning light) until complete door closing.
Opening/closing with the remote control

The open/close control extends to all vehicle doors including the rotating sliding one.
Movement inversion
After door open/close push button actuation, in whatever position it may be, actuating the push button generates its controlled
movement inversion.
Obstacle detection system

The system features motor ammeter control capable of detecting peaks of voltage and of the compressed air sensitive edge
located on the front and back of the door compartment, for obstacle detection.
If an obstacle counters door panel movement during closing, over 150N force of compressed air transducer activation opens it.
If an obstacle counters door panel movement during opening, over 150N force of compressed air transducer activation closes it.
Since the door is equipped with the anti-squash function, reading the nearly closed door status signal generated by the motor
encoder automatically cats out this function to enable complete door closing.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Emergency operation Figure 325

The door can be opened in case of system failure or power
down by using the emergency lever from the inside of the lock
close to the door panel from the outside.
In case of emergency operation, automatic door opening or
closing is disenabled until the system is restarted manually.
The outside emergency lock is provided with a key that can
be used to secure the vehicle (Figure 325).
An internal buzzer is actuated if the starter switch is actuated
in the service position with external opening emergency
locked with the key.
Diagnosis
The system reports a failure when the failure warning light 73720
goes on.
EXTERNAL EMERGENCY OPENING
This failure can be due to the following causes:
- Closing does not occur a maximum of ~20 sec after Figure 326
actuation
- Possible causes:
Door open micro switch warning failed.
Electrical cabling cut.
- Over voltage when opening or closing
- Possible causes:
Motor short circuit
- Door opening/closing travel abnormal.
- Possible causes:
Motor encoder signals not recognized.
- Door does not open.
- Possible causes:
Tachometer signal detective or down.
73718
STEP LIGHT
Figure 327
73718
1. Light - 2. Emergency openings
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Description of opening
Opening
Press open/close push

button
No Speed control (B7)

≤ 5 Km/h
Yes
Center actuation
Electromagnet excitation
(∆T = ^0.5 s)
Electromagnet de-excitation
No Lock micro switch actuation

(opens on contact)
Yes
Engine start in opening
Position and speed control with engine encoder

Constant speed start and travel
No Micro switch complete

opening" position engaged
Yes
Position and speed control

with engine encoder
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Description of closing cycle
Closing
Press open/close push

button
Reposition
on opening
No Micro switch complete
opening position engaged?
Yes
Engine start in closing
Position and speed control with engine encoder

Ramp start
Constant speed travel to next stage
Encoder reading of door

nearly closed
Deceleration
Complete closing
No
Micro switch engaged on lock
Yes
Engine cut out
Center cut out
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Operating diagram
REMOTE
CONTROL
CLOSES
MECHANICAL OPERATOR door LOCKED

KEY OPENS REMOTE
CONTROL
ROTO door CLOSED OPENS
OPERATOR door UNLOCKED OPERATOR door UNLOCKED

EMERGENCY REMOTE
HANDLE. CONTROL
ROTO door CLOSED CLOSES ROTO door CLOSED
INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT
PANEL PUSH REMOTE PANEL PUSH
BUTTON CONTROL BUTTON
OPENS OPENS OPERATOR door LOCKED CLOSES
ROTO door OPEN
OPERATOR door UNLOCKED OPERATOR door UNLOCKED

ROTO door OPEN ROTO door CLOSED
REMOTE
CONTROL
OPENS
INSTRUMENT
PANEL PUSH MECHANICAL REMOTE
BUTTON OPERATOR door UNLOCKED KEY CONTROL
CLOSES CLOSES
ROTO door OPEN
OPERATOR door LOCKED

REMOTE
CONTROL
CLOSES ROTO door CLOSED
N.B.: As a consequence of use by

IVECO of passive type door locks,
disconnected operation may occur
between operator and rotating sliding
door opening and closing.
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 328 ELECTRONIC TACHOGRAPH

Removing the lower dashboard cover
- Remove the snap-fitted panel (Ref. A) to gain access to
the panel fastening screws (Ref. B).
- Slacken the 4 fastening screws, two on either side, of the
lower panel (Ref. A).
Electronic tachograph control unit housing

assembly
Fasten the control unit to the support, insert the 3
connectors, eliminating the bridges between the connectors
(white, yellow and brown) and apply the seals (ref. A).
B
A 8670
LOWER DASHBOARD SNAP-FITTED PANEL
Figure 329
A
8781
LOWER PANEL FASTENING SCREWS
A 8782
8783
LOWER PANEL FASTENING SCREWS CONNECTIONS AND TACHOGRAPH CONTROL

UNIT SUPPORT
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Assembling the tachograph control unit Figure 333

support on the dashboard
Use the six screws to fasten the tachograph control unit
support to the dashboard.
8784
TACHOGRAPH CONTROL UNIT

Figure 334
8785
TACHOGRAPH CONTROL UNIT FASTENING TO

DASHBOARD
Figure 332
8786
TACHOGRAPH CONTROL UNIT SUPPORT FASTENING SCREWS
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Figure 335 Removing the instrument cluster module

To replace the module, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the upper trim working on the three screws
shown by the arrows.
2. Lift and remove the trim taking care not to damage the
velcro stoppers.
8787
UPPER TRIM FASTENING SCREW

8788 8790
UPPER TRIM FASTENING SCREW TRIM REMOVAL
8789
8791
UPPER TRIM FASTENING SCREW
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Work on the 4 screws, 2 on either side, to remove the cluster Figure 341
module with tachometer.
Disconnect the electrical connections and replace with the
module for tachograph sealing the electrical connections
concerning the wiring for tachograph.
Fasten the instrument cluster to the dashboard and refit the
upper and lower trim.
8792
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FASTENING
Figure 342
8793
Figure 340
REMOVING THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Figure 343
8795 8794
CONNECTIONS CONCERNING WIRING FOR

COMPLETE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TACHOGRAPH
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004
Figure 344 Operations on gearbox

1. Replace the sensor on the gearbox with a suitable one for
tachograph.
2. Seal with lead the electrical connection to the sensor and
to the gearbox body.
If necessary, drill (4 mm) the ribbing on the gearbox (see
arrow) for passing the wire.
8796
SENSOR REPLACEMENT ON GEARBOX

Figure 345
8797
CONNECTION OF SENSOR TO WIRING

Figure 346
8798
SENSOR TECHNICAL VIEW
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Operation in bonnet Figure 347

1. Disconnect the terminals of the power cables from the
battery terminals.
2. Remove the battery from the engine compartment, after
removing the fastening bracket.
3. Seal the connector between the frame and cab/bonnet
cables with sealing wire.
8799
CONNECTOR BETWEEN CAB/BONNET AND FRAME

CABLES
Figure 348
4. Refit the battery, re-connect the terminals to the battery

terminals, ensuring correct polarity and calibrate the
tachograph using the special VDO tool.
5. In the front part, seal the tachograph control unit with the
special red plug as shown.
6. Apply the labels; on the driver's door and on the tilting
plate of the tachograph control unit.
10.04.98 13 : 00
100436.8km
8800
FRONT VIEW OF TACHOGRAPH CONTROL UNIT
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Circuit charts
Page
CIRCUIT CHARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
NOTES AND SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
CHART 1A: START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
CHART 1B: START (.10 - .12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
CHART 2A: PREHEATING (.9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
CHART 2B: PREHEATING (.11) . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
CHART 2C: PREHEATING (.13 - .15) . . . . . . . 300
CHART 2D: PREHEATING (.10 - .12) . . . . . . . 301
CHART 2E: PRE-HEATING (.10 - .12 - .14 -

.17 - EDC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
CHART 3: RECHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
CHART 4: INSTRUMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
CHART 5: TACHOMETER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
CHART 6A: RPM COUNTER (.9) . . . . . . . . . . . 306
CHART 6B: RPM COUNTER (.11) . . . . . . . . . . 307
CHART 6C: RPM COUNTER (.10 - .12 - .13 -

.15) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
CHART 6D: RPM COUNTER (.10 - .12 - .14 -

.17 - EDC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
CHART 7A: OPTICAL INDICATORS (.9 - .11) 310
CHART 7B: OPTICAL INDICATORS . . . . . . . . 311
CHART 8: OUTSIDE LIGHTING (CAB

INSTRUMENTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
CHART 9A: OUTSIDE LIGHTING (POSITION

LIGHTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
CHART 9B: OUTSIDE LIGHTING (CAB POSITION

LIGHTS VAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
CHART 10: FLOOD AND DIPPED LIGHTS . . 315
CHART 11A: BACK AND FRONT FOG LIGHTS 316
CHART 11B: BACK AND FRONT FOG LIGHTS

(VAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Page Page
CHART 12: FRONT LIGHT SETTING . . . . . . . 318 CHART 23B: ENGINE COOLING (.11) . . . . . . . 341
CHART 13A: DIRECTION AND EMERGENCY CHART 23C: ENGINE COOLING (.13-.15) . . . 342
LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
CHART 23D: ENGINE COOLING (.10 - .12) . . 343
CHART 13B: DIRECTION AND EMERGENCY
LIGHTS (VAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 CHART 23E: ENGINE COOLING (.10 - .12 - .14 -
.17 - EDC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
CHART 14A: STOP LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
CHART 24A: EGR/EXHAUST GAS ELECTRONIC
CHART 14B: STOP LIGHTS (VAN) . . . . . . . . . . 322 CONTROL SYSTEM (.9) . . . . . . . . 345
CHART 15A: BACKUP LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 CHART 24B: EGR/EXHAUST GAS ELECTRONIC
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR EDC (.13) 346
CHART 15B: BACKUP LIGHTS (VAN) . . . . . . . . 324
CHART 24C: EGR/EXHAUST GAS ELECTRONIC
CHART 16: HORN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 CONTROL SYSTEM FOR EDC
(.10 - .12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
CHART 17: WINDSCREEN AND FRONT LIGHT
WASHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 CHART 24D: EGR EXHAUST GAS ELECTRONIC
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR EDC
(.10 - .12 - .14 - .17 - EDC16) . . 348
CHART 18A: WINDSCREEN DEFROSTER . . . . 327
CHART 25A: SPARK LEAD VARIATOR (.9) . . . . 349
CHART 18B: WINDSCREEN DEFROSTER
(.10 - .12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
CHART 25B: SPARK LEAD VARIATOR (.11) . . . 350
CHART 19: RADIO SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
CHART 26A: E.D.C. (.13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
CHART 20A: INTERNAL LIGHTING AND
CIGARETTE LIGHTER . . . . . . . . . 330 CHART 26B: E.D.C. WITH VGT (.15) . . . . . . . . . 352
CHART 20B: INTERNAL LIGHTING (VAN) . . . 331 CHART 26C: E.D.C. WITH WASTE GATE (.13) 353
CHART 20C: INTERNAL LIGHTING 6+1 VEHICLE 332 CHART 26D: E.D.C. WITHOUT EGR (.10 - .12) 354
CHART 20D: INTERNAL LIGHTING AND CHART 26E: E.D.C WITHOUT EGR (.10 - .12 -
CIGARETTE LIGHTER (F1A) . . . . 333 .14 - .17 - EDC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
CHART 21A: IMMOBILIZER (.9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 CHART 27A: HEATED FUEL FILTER (.9 - .11) /
OPT 2287 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
CHART 21B: IMMOBILIZER (.11) . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
CHART 27B: HEATED FUEL FILTER (.13 - .15) . 357
CHART 21C: IMMOBILIZER (.10 - .12 - .13 - .15) 336
CHART 27C: HEATED FUEL FILTER (.10 - .12) . 358
CHART 21D: IMMOBILIZER (.10-.12-.14 - .17
EDC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 CHART 27D: HEATED FUEL FILTER (.10 - .12 -
.14 - .17 - EDC16) . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
CHART 22A: DIAGNOSIS CONNECTION
(.9 - .11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 CHART 28A: POWER WINDOW OPERATOR AND
PASSENGER SIDE / OPT 693 . . . . 360
CHART 22B: DIAGNOSIS CONNECTION
(.10-.12-.13-.15-.14-.17) . . . . . . . 339 CHART 28B: POWER WINDOW OPERATOR SIDE /
OPT 4028 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
CHART 23A: ENGINE COOLING (.9) . . . . . . . . 340
CHART 28C: POWER WINDOW OPERATOR AND
PASSENGER SIDE (.10 - .12) . . . . 362
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Page Page
CHART 29: HEATED REARVIEW MIRRORS / CHART 39B: REAR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK /
OPT 697 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 OPT 131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
CHART 30: REARVIEW MIRROR ADJUSTMENT / CHART 40: 13-POLE POWER CONNECTION /
OPT 2714 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 OPT 6520 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
CHART 31: HEATED WINDSCREEN / OPT 685 365 CHART 41A: TOTAL PTO (.9 - .11) . . . . . . . . . 385
CHART 32: HEATED REAR WINDOW / CHART 41B: TOTAL PTO (.10 - .12 - .13 - .15) 386
OPT 6815 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
CHART 41C: TOTAL PTO (EDC 16) . . . . . . . . . 387
CHART 33: ABS/EBD/ABD / OPT 2091 . . . . . . 367
CHART 42A: HEATED OPERATOR SEAT BUS
CHART 34A: E.C.A.S. WITHOUT RESERVE AIR VERSION / OPT 6628 . . . . . . . . . . 388
RESERVOIR (.9-.10-.11-.12-.13-.14-
.17) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 CHART 42B: HEATED SEATS / OPT 6644 . . . . 389
CHART 34B: E.C.A.S. WITH RESERVE AIR RESERVOIR CHART 43: DAY LIGHTS FOR NORTHERN
(.9-.10-.11-.12-.13-.14-.17) . . . . . 369 EUROPE VEHICLES / OPT 2536 . 390
CHART 34C: VB TECHNIEK (35C - 40C - 45C) 370 CHART 44: DOOR LOCK / OPT 6536 . . . . . . 391
CHART 34D: VB TECHNIEK (60C - 65C - 50C) 371 CHART 45A: TELMA SCUDATI RETARDER (.9 - .11) /
OPT 235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
CHART 35A: AUTOMATIC CONDITIONER (.9) /
OPT 6650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 CHART 45B: TELMA RETARDER (.10 - .12 - .13 - .15)
/ OPT 235 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
CHART 35B: AUTOMATIC CONDITIONER (.11) /
OPT 6650 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 CHART 46: ELECTRICAL BATTERY SECTIONER /
OPT 2532 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
CHART 35C: AUTOMATIC CONDITIONER
(.13-.15) / OPT 6650 . . . . . . . . . . 374 CHART 47A: CRUISE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . 395
CHART 35D: AUTOMATIC CONDITIONER CHART 47B: CRUISE CONTROL (EDC 16) . . . 396
(.9 - .10 - .11 - .12 - .13 - .14 -
.15 - .17) / OPT 6650 . . . . . . . . . . 375
CHART 48: ENGINE WATER HEATER /
OPT 6654 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
CHART 35E: AUTOMATIC CONDITIONER
(.10 - .12) / OPT 6650 . . . . . . . . . 376
CHART 49: ELECTRICAL CONTROL SLIDING
SIDE DOOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
CHART 35F: AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING
(.10 - .12 - .14 - .17 - EDC16) . . 377
CHART 50: ROTATING SLIDING DOOR . . . 399
CHART 36: ELECTRONIC TACHOGRAPH /
OPT 5130 - 5131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 CHART 51: ELECTRICAL PIT ON PAVILION /
OPT 640 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
CHART 37A: AIR BAG AND PRE-TENSIONERS /
OPT 4495 - 4496 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 CHART 52: SCUDATI CENTRAL EMERGENCY
CONTROL / OPT 2546 . . . . . . . . 401
CHART 37B: AIR BAG AND PRETENSIONERS 380
CHART 53: SYSTEM FOR NORTH AFRICA
VEHICLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
CHART 38: DOOR LOCK WITH ANTI-THEFT /
OPT 6890 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
CHART 54: SYSTEM FOR BUS VEHICLES WITH
2-TONE HORN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
CHART 39A: FRONT DIFFERENTIAL LOCK /
OPT 131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
CHART 55: SYSTEM FOR RIGHT HAND DRIVE
VEHICLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

CIRCUIT CHARTS
Notes and specifications

Unless otherwise specified the charts are to be considered valid for all engines and for all truck and van versions.
The vehicle conditions considered for laying wiring circuitries are:
- engine off
- ignition key off
- handbrake on
- gearbox in neutral
- fluids at normal level
- doors closed
The relays used have an internal resistance (in parallel with the coil) of 680 Ω to reduce over-voltage on the system due to
switching of the switches.
In charts 22 A-B the component distinguished by the symbol is the socket for the converter.
In chart 33 the connection distinguished by the symbol Y is valid only for vehicles with "parallel" braking system.
In chart 34B the component distinguished by the symbol ∆ is present only on vehicles with reserve air tank.
Chart 38 shows a van with sliding side doors.
Component codes concerning chart 35D (82010A/B/C connectors - for all tables)
1 Sensor on evaporator
2 Fan motor
3 Fan electronic control module
4 Air mixing gear motor
5 Re-circulation gear motor
6 Electronic climate control unit (82010)
7 Treated air sensor
8 Fan control potentiometer
9 Required temperature potentiometer
10 Climate control module
11 Microswitch for MAX DEF function
12 Control panel lighting
Colour codes for cabling not supplied by IVECO
Code Colour Code Colour

A Light Blue M Brown
B White N Black
C Orange R Red
G Yellow S Rose
H Grey V Green
L Blue Z Purple
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 1A: Start
49949
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 1B: Start (.10 - .12)
77046
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 2A: Preheating (.9)
49948
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 2B: Preheating (.11)
49947
49947
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 2C: Preheating (.13 - .15)
49946
49946
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 2D: Preheating (.10 - .12)
74257
74257
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 2E: Pre-heating (.10 - .12 - .14 - .17 - EDC16)
85715
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 3: Recharge
49945
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 4: Instruments
49944
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 5: Tachometer
49943
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 6A: Rpm counter (.9)
49942
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 6B: Rpm counter (.11)
49941
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 6C: Rpm counter (.10 - .12 - .13 - .15)
49940
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 6D: Rpm counter (.10 - .12 - .14 - .17 - EDC16)
90163
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 7A: Optical indicators (.9 - .11)
49939
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 7B: Optical indicators
49938
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 8: Outside lighting (cab instruments)
49937
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 9A: Outside lighting (position lights)
49936
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 9B: Outside lighting (cab position lights van)
49935
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 10: Flood and dipped lights
49934
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 11A: Back and front fog lights
49933
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 11B: Back and front fog lights(van)
49932
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 12: Front light setting
49931
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 13A: Direction and emergency lights
49930
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 13B: Direction and emergency lights (van)
49929
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 14A: Stop lights
49928
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 14B: Stop lights (van)
49927
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 15A: Backup lights
49926
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 15B: Backup lights (van)
49925
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 16: Horn
49924
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 17: Windscreen and front light washer
49923
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 18A: Windscreen defroster
49922
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 18B: Windscreen defroster (.10 - .12)
74258
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 19: Radio set
49921
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 20A: Internal lighting and cigarette lighter
49920
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 20B: Internal lighting (van)
49919
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 20C: Internal lighting 6+1 vehicle
49918
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 20D: Internal lighting and cigarette lighter (F1A)
74259
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 21A: Immobilizer (.9)
49917
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 21B: Immobilizer (.11)
49916
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 21C: Immobilizer (.10 - .12 - .13 - .15)
49915
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 21D: Immobilizer (.10-.12-.14 - .17 EDC16)
90159
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 22A: Diagnosis connection (.9 - .11)
49914
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 22B: Diagnosis connection (.10-.12-.13-.15-.14-.17)
85716
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 23A: Engine cooling (.9)
49912
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 23B: Engine cooling (.11)
49911
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 23C: Engine cooling (.13-.15)
49910
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 23D: Engine cooling (.10 - .12)
74260
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 23E: Engine cooling (.10 - .12 - .14 - .17 - EDC16)
85717
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 24A: EGR/exhaust gas electronic control system (.9)
49909
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 24B: EGR/exhaust gas electronic control system for EDC (.13)
49908
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 24C: EGR/exhaust gas electronic control system for EDC (.10 - .12)
74261
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 24D: EGR Exhaust gas electronic control system for EDC (.10 - .12 - .14 - .17 - EDC16)
85718
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 25A: Spark lead variator (.9)
49907
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 25B: Spark lead variator (.11)
49906
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 26A: E.D.C. (.13)
49905
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 26B: E.D.C. with VGT (.15)
49904
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 26C: E.D.C. with WASTE GATE (.13)
49903
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 26D: E.D.C. without EGR (.10 - .12)
74262
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 26E: E.D.C WITHOUT EGR (.10 - .12 - .14 - .17 - EDC16)
90161
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 27A: Heated fuel filter (.9 - .11) / OPT 2287
49902
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 27B: Heated fuel filter (.13 - .15)
49901
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 27C: Heated fuel filter (.10 - .12)
74263
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 27D: Heated fuel filter (.10 - .12 - .14 - .17 - EDC16)
85720
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 28A: Power window operator and passenger side / OPT 693
49900
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 28B: Power window operator side / OPT 4028
49899
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 28C: Power window operator and passenger side (.10 - .12)
74264
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 29: Heated rearview mirrors / OPT 697
49898
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 30: Rearview mirror adjustment / OPT 2714
49897
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 31: Heated windscreen / OPT 685
49896
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 32: Heated rear window / OPT 6815
49895
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 33: ABS/EBD/ABD / OPT 2091
49894
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 34A: E.C.A.S. without reserve air reservoir (.9-.10-.11-.12-.13-.14-.17)
49893
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 34B: E.C.A.S. with reserve air reservoir (.9-.10-.11-.12-.13-.14-.17)
49892
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 34C: Vb Techniek (35C - 40C - 45C)
86165
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 34D: Vb Techniek (60C - 65C - 50C)
86166
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 35A: Automatic conditioner (.9) / OPT 6650
49890
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 35B: Automatic conditioner (.11) / OPT 6650
49889
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 35C: Automatic conditioner (.13-.15) / OPT 6650
49888
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 35D: Automatic conditioner (.9 - .10 - .11 - .12 - .13 - .14 - .15 - .17) / OPT 6650
49887
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 35E: Automatic conditioner (.10 - .12) / OPT 6650
74265
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 35F: Automatic air conditioning (.10 - .12 - .14 - .17 - EDC16)
85721
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 36: Electronic tachograph / OPT 5130 - 5131
49886
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 37A: Air bag and pre-tensioners / OPT 4495 - 4496
49885
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 37B: Air bag and pretensioners
49884
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 38: Door lock with anti-theft / OPT 6890
49883
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 39A: Front differential lock / OPT 131
49882
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 39B: Rear differential lock / OPT 131
49881
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 40: 13-pole power connection / OPT 6520
49880
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 41A: Total PTO (.9 - .11)
49879
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 41B: Total PTO (.10 - .12 - .13 - .15)
49878
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 41C: Total PTO (EDC 16)
90160
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 42A: Heated operator seat bus version / OPT 6628
49877
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 42B: Heated seats / OPT 6644
49876
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 43: Day lights for Northern Europe vehicles / OPT 2536
49875
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 44: Door lock / OPT 6536
49874
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 45A: Telma Scudati retarder (.9 - .11) / OPT 235
49873
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 45B: Telma retarder (.10 - .12 - .13 - .15) / OPT 235
49872
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 46: Electrical battery sectioner / OPT 2532
49871
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 47A: Cruise Control
49870
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 47B: Cruise Control (EDC 16)
90162
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 48: Engine water heater / OPT 6654
49869
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 49: Electrical control sliding side door
49868
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 50: Rotating sliding door
49867
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 51: Electrical pit on pavilion / OPT 640
49866
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 52: Scudati central emergency control / OPT 2546
49865
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 53: System for North Africa vehicles
49864
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Chart 54: System for bus vehicles with 2-tone horn
49863
Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Chart 55: System for right hand drive rotating sliding door vehicles
49862
Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Iveco Daily 2000my - Repair Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Iveco Daily 2000my - Repair Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Iveco Daily 2000my - Repair Manual PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

https://truckmanualshub.

”This document provides data, characteristics, instructions and

Publication Edited by:

Danger for persons

Danger of serious damage for the vehicle

NOTE It indicates an additional explanation for a piece of information.

Print 603.93.281 I Base - May 2004

SYMBOLS - ASSISTANCE OPERATIONS

Tighten to torque + angle value Rolling torque

Press or caulk Rotation

Surface for machining

Base - May 2004 II Print 603.93.281

Product 50 = Vehicle chassis;

Product 50 = Vehicle chassis;

Product 50 = Vehicle chassis;

Print 603.93.281 III Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 IV Print 603.93.281

Print 603.93.281 V Base - May 2004

GENERAL WARNINGS ON THE ELECTRIC SYSTEM

Base - May 2004 VI Print 603.93.281

Bonding and screening

Further, following warnings are to be compulsorily observed for electronic components:

1. NEGATIVE CABLES “STAR“ CONNECTION TO SYSTEM BONDING M

2. SCREENING THROUGH METALLIC BRAIDING OF A CABLE TO AN ELECTRONIC COMPONENT — C. CONNECTOR

Print 603.93.281 VII Base - May 2004

OPTIONAL ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL PARTS INSTALLATIONS

CONVERSIONS BETWEEN THE MAIN UNITS OF MEASUREMENT OF THE

Base - May 2004 VIII Print 603.93.281

Print 603.93.281 — 1st edition

Section Description Page Revision date

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

Wheels and tyres 9

Hydro-pneumatic system - brakes 11

Bodywork - Chassis frame - Cab air-conditioning 12

Volume 3 Electric/electronic system 14

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

- Vehicle Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

ALPHANUMERICAL CODING FOR

ALPHANUMERICAL CODING FOR

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

a) Type-approval number marking, b) Kg

n) No. of axles. Engine type Engine power KW

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

REAR AIR SUSPENSIONS V V V V V V V V V V V ◒ V ◒ V ◒ V ◒ V

ID = Direct injection s Standard on chassis cabs and vans 40C

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

REAR AIR SUSPENSIONS ◒ V ◒ V ◒ V V V V V V V V V V V

ID = Direct injection s Standard on chassis cabs and vans 40C

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004

REAR AIR SUSPENSIONS V V V V V V V V V V

ID = Direct injection s Standard on chassis cabs and vans 40C

Base - May 2004 Print 603.93.281

ALPHANUMERICAL CODING FOR VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

MARKET VEHICLE (V.M.)

STANDARD VEHICLE (V.C.B.)

50 C CHASSIS CABS AND

Print 603.93.281 Base - May 2004